JP7803549B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes limiting the number of times the game can change during time-saving mode in gaming machines.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-134136

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in presentation in order to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The purpose of this invention is to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., a game control unit 200) capable of controlling the progress of a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, the game control means being capable of acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a start condition and being capable of executing a variable display of symbols based on the determination information, the presentation control means being capable of controlling a presentation mode, and emitting light (e.g., a left panel lamp 1162, an upper frame lamp 1163, a 1571, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, starting gate lamp 1211, left movable role object 1151) with a specific light emitting color, the light emitting means has a first light emitting means (for example, upper frame lamp 1571) and a second light emitting means (for example, button lamp 1611) provided in the operation means which is different from the first light emitting means, and a variable display which varies a plurality of rows of performance symbols in a predetermined path in the display means in accordance with the variable display. The display means can execute an operation prompt display that prompts operation of the operating means, and during the execution of the variable performance, specific performances (performances based on a preliminary determination result, stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach prompting performance, reach performance, display of doublet decorative symbols 41, etc.) can be executed, and during the execution of the variable performance, emphasis images that emphasize the specific performance (chance eye effect image, stop effect image, reach prompting effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, doublet effect image) can be displayed, and the performance modes that display the variable performance include a first performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and a second performance mode (a stage different from the first performance mode) that is different from the first performance mode, and the emphasis images include a first emphasis image, a second emphasis image (chance eye first effect image 537, stop first effect image 503, reach prompting first effect image 522, first reach right effect image 523, and a second emphasized image (a fourth chance effect image 596, a fifteenth effect image at stop 589, an eighth reach teasing effect image 591, a second reach line image 531, a second reach notification image 532, a sixteenth effect image at stop 594, a seventeenth effect image at stop 599, etc.) which are different from the first emphasized image (a fourth chance effect image 596, a fifteenth effect image at stop 589, a seventeenth effect image at stop 591, a second reach line image 531, a second reach notification image 532, a sixteenth effect image at stop 594, a seventeenth effect image at stop 599, etc.), and when the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the first effect mode, at least the first emphasized image can be displayed, and when the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the second effect mode, at least the second emphasized image can be displayed, and the rainbow light emitting effect can be executed during the variable effect in which the special game is executed or at a first timing during the special game and a second timing different from the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing are during the variable effect in which the special game is executed, Or, during the special game, the light emitting mode of the rainbow light emitting effect in the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, or the cycle of a specific light emitting color of the rainbow light emitting effect , can be made different between the first timing and the second timing, a first variation can be executed in which the effect pattern varies along a first variation path in association with the variation display in the first presentation mode, and a second variation can be executed in which the effect pattern varies along a second variation path different from the first variation path in association with the variation display in the second presentation mode, in the variation presentation, switching between the first variation path and the second variation path can be executed in association with a transition to the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, in the variation presentation, a predetermined presentation that covers all or part of the display area of the display means can be executed in association with a transition to the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, and in the first variation, the execution of the predetermined presentation can be restricted during the period in which the operation prompt display is executed .

Please note that the above symbols in this section are used for illustrative purposes only and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine when viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the bottom left of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of a pachinko game machine, and (c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display arranged at the bottom left of the game board. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a game control unit of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit during power interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a gate switch process. A flowchart showing the contents of the normal prize entry port switch processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the large prize entrance switch processing. A flowchart showing the contents of the out ball detection switch processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of processing during stoppage. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a customer waiting setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. This is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize slot processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an electric tulip process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an MY value specification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a complete determination process. This is a diagram showing the relationship between the MY specific standard value, difference in balls, and MY value according to the results of playing at multiple times in a day. This is a diagram showing the relationship between the MY specific standard value, difference in balls, and MY value according to the results of playing at multiple times in a day. These figures show examples of the configuration of random numbers used in this embodiment, where (a) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern random number, (c) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a small jackpot pattern random number, (d) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a reach random number, and (e) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of a winning random number. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation patterns and table settings used in the fluctuation pattern selection process. 1A and 1B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of a game control unit, where FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a memory area, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in FIG. 10A and 10B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM of the performance control unit, where (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved memory area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in (a). 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a preliminary determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of pre-determination patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination process. 10A and 10B are flowcharts showing the operation of the performance control unit, in which FIG. 10A is a diagram showing main processing, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a command receiving process. A flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of Figure 37. A flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of Figure 37. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process of FIG. 37. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a pre-operation notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a specific time-saving related performance process. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect button processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the display information of the information display device in each game zone. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a main process of the general control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels by the lamp control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a return-to-origin process of the lamp control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an initial operation process of the lamp control unit. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during a setting change. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after confirming settings. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole in a normal gaming state. This is a pre-determined presentation pattern table used when a game ball enters the second starting hole in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in normal game mode. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port during normal game play. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting port in a special time-saving game state. This is a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the first starting port in a special time-saving game state. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing various lamps provided on a pachinko gaming machine. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the first rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the second rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the third rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the third rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the fourth rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the fourth rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the fifth rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect in the sixth rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the seventh rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the 8th rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the 9th rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the 10th rainbow light emission mode. A figure showing an example of rainbow light emission effect of the 10th rainbow light emission mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect in a modified rainbow light-emitting mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when waiting for customers. This is a chart showing the flow of each effect when the customer waiting effect shown in Figure 81 is executed. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 13. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 13. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 17. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 18. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 19. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 21. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 22. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 1 of variable presentation example 13. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 2 of variable presentation example 13. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. A chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 40. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 43. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 65. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 71. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 71. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 73. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 76. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 76. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 77. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 78. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the timing at which decorative patterns are displayed in various visual modes during variable performances. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. FIG. 10 is a chart showing the timing of executing vibration effects in response to button operation effects. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in a pachinko gaming machine and the rainbow light-emitting presentation that is executed. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of notification regarding a complete function. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the content shown in Figure 332. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the contents shown in Figures 335 and 336. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing one aspect of a performance performed by a performance control unit using an image display unit. FIG. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 1 of variable presentation example 71. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 2 of variable presentation example 71. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the second reach notification image. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the display color of numbers in decorative patterns. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating modified examples of effect sounds output from speakers. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation mode when a double-digit decorative pattern is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. This figure shows an example of when the effect button is operated before the rainbow light effect starts during the customer waiting effect. This figure shows an example of when the effect button is operated while a rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed in the customer waiting effect. This figure shows a modified example in which the effect button is operated when a rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed in the customer waiting effect. This figure shows the relationship between when the effect button is operated before the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect while a customer waiting effect is being executed, and when the effect button is operated before the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect while a jackpot variable effect is being executed. This figure shows the relationship between when the effect button is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the customer waiting effect and when the effect button is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the jackpot variable effect. FIG. 10 shows an example of a presentation in which a game ball wins before the start of the rainbow light-emitting presentation in the customer waiting presentation. A figure showing an example of a customer waiting presentation in a time-saving gaming state. A figure showing a modified example of variable performance example 81. A figure showing a modified example of variable performance example 81. A figure showing a modified example of variable performance example 81. This is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in a modified example of variable presentation example 81. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in a pachinko gaming machine and the rainbow light-emitting presentation that is executed. FIG. A figure showing variant example 2 of variable performance example 81. This figure shows variant example 3 of variation performance example 81. A figure showing a modified example of the lamp's light emission mode when the first right-hit image is displayed. FIG. 10 shows an example of the presentation when a game ball enters the first starting hole in the time-saving game mode. 10 is a diagram showing the light emission state of the lamp when the time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state. FIG. A figure showing a modified example of the presentation mode when a jackpot game is played after the jackpot variable presentation in the time-saving game state has ended. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing modified examples of the light emission mode of the lamp when a jackpot game is played. This figure shows the relationship between when an advance notification is given and when a complete operation notification is given during the execution of a suggestive effect in a jackpot variation effect. This figure shows the presentation mode when the power to the pachinko game machine is cut off and then restored while the rainbow light-emitting effect and advance notification are being executed in the jackpot variation presentation. This figure shows a modified example of the presentation mode when the complete function is activated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting presentation in the jackpot variation presentation. A diagram showing the relationship between an example of a modified variable presentation and an example of a modified customer waiting presentation. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing modified examples of the light emission mode of the lamp in the demonstration performance state. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing modified examples of the light emission mode of the lamp in the demonstration performance state. This figure shows a modified example of the lamp's lighting pattern from the end of a round of jackpot play after a jackpot variation presentation in normal play mode until control is given to the time-shortened play mode. A diagram showing the display size of decorative patterns depending on the performance situation. A figure showing a modified example of the lamp's lighting pattern from the end of a round of jackpot play that has undergone a jackpot variation presentation in a time-shortened play state until control is given to the time-shortened play state. This figure shows the relationship between when the power supply to a pachinko game machine is cut off and then restored while a variable effect is being performed, and when the power supply to a pachinko game machine is cut off and then restored when the complete function is activated. A figure showing a modified example of notifying the number of winning balls during a jackpot game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of the rainbow light-emitting effect that is executed when the effect button is operated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of a manner in which information regarding the awarding of game value is notified. A figure showing the relationship between a case where an advance notification is made and a case where a complete standby notification is made while the 30th rainbow image is being displayed. A figure showing a modified example in which a complete standby notification is made while the 30th rainbow image is being displayed.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when viewed from the rear side.
Figure 3 is a diagram explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment, where Figure 3(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board 110, Figure 3(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and Figure 3(c) is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the bottom left of the gaming board.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment.
1 shows a pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of a gaming machine, which is configured to pay out prize balls when a gaming ball shot out in response to a player's instruction enters a prize ball. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 from which the gaming balls are shot out, and a frame member 150 that surrounds the gaming board 110. The gaming board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front, a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a path along which game balls launched from below rise and head toward the upper position of the game area 111, and a guide member 113 on the right side of the game area 111 that guides the game balls.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for effects is disposed in a position in the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. This image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the player progresses through the game, it displays, for example, decorative symbols to notify the player of the lottery results (pattern variation results) of the special symbol lottery, or displays effect images due to the appearance of characters or items. In addition, the image display unit 114 is provided with a plurality of layers on which images are displayed, and an image is displayed on each of the plurality of layers.
The game board 110 of this embodiment is also provided with a light guide plate 118 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The light guide plate 118 is a transparent panel made of a resin such as acrylic, and is located in front of the play area 111 so as to cover the play area 111. The light guide plate 118 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the situation of the presentation.

In addition, the front of the game board 110 is provided with three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 that are used for various effects.
The three movable role pieces 115 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction above the image display unit 114. When describing each of the three movable role pieces 115 individually, the movable role piece 115 arranged on the left side will be referred to as the "left movable role piece 1151." The movable role piece 115 arranged in the center will be referred to as the "middle movable role piece 1152." The movable role piece 115 arranged on the right side will be referred to as the "right movable role piece 1153." When no particular distinction is made between the three movable role pieces 115, they will simply be referred to as "movable role pieces 115." The movable role pieces 115 perform various effects by operating on the game board 110. In this embodiment, the movable role piece 115 is arranged to be movable from the initial position shown in FIG. 1 to an effect position where it overlaps with the image display unit 114.
In this embodiment, the left movable role 1151 and the right movable role 1153 are visible to the player in the initial position. On the other hand, the center movable role 1152 is located behind the upper frame lamp 1571 (described later) in the initial position, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see.

The panel lamps 116 emit light to create various effects. In this embodiment, the panel lamps 116 include an upper panel lamp 1161 located above the image display unit 114, a left panel lamp 1162 located to the left of the image display unit 114, a right panel lamp 1163 located to the right of the image display unit 114, and a lower panel lamp 1164 located below the image display unit 114.

The game area 111 is equipped with game pegs and windmills (not shown) that change the direction in which game balls fall. Various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are also installed in predetermined positions in the game area 111. The game area 111 is also equipped with an outlet 117 that ejects game balls that have been shot into the game area 111 but have not entered any of the winning holes (first start hole 121, second start hole 122, big prize hole 125, and regular prize hole 127, described below) from the game area 111. The pachinko game machine 100 is also equipped with an out-ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see Figure 4, described below). The out-ball detection switch 227 detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area 111.

In this embodiment, various prize-winning and lottery-related devices are provided on the game board 110, including a first start gate 121 and a second start gate 122 that start a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the game, and a start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 that starts a normal symbol lottery (open/close lottery) when a game ball passes through. In FIG. 1 , the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, with the left gate 124 labeled 124L and the right gate 124 labeled 124R. The first start gate 121 and the second start gate 122 refer to the winning gates that trigger the activation of a predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of a gaming ball when a winning prize is awarded are provided in the first start port 121 and the second start port 122. When the gaming ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by this switch triggers the activation of the special symbol display device.
In this embodiment, a start port lamp 1211 that emits light under predetermined conditions is provided at the first start port 121. The start port lamp 1211 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the situation of the performance.

The second starting hole 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123, a standard electric device with a pair of tulip-shaped blades that open and close using an electric solenoid and light up. The electric tulip 123 is configured so that when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122, but when the blades are open, the entrance to the second starting hole 122 expands, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122. When a standard symbol lottery is won, the electric tulip 123's blades light up or flash while opening for a specified time (e.g., 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (e.g., 1 to 3 times).

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-electric support state in which there are fewer chances of winning at the second starting hole 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning at the second starting hole 122 than in the no-electric support state. The machine is controlled to either the no-electric support state or the electric support state under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of draws for a special symbol. The electric support state is a game state controlled by, for example, shortening the normal symbol variation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, or a combination thereof.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 has two game states: a no-time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is long, and a time-reduction state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than that in the no-time-reduction state. Here, the time-reduction state is considered to be a state more advantageous to the player than the no-time-reduction state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time-saving state are controlled simultaneously. In the following description, the electric support state and the time-saving state are simply referred to as the time-saving state, and the no electric support state and no time-saving state are simply referred to as the no-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as other devices related to winning prizes and lotteries, a special electric device called a large prize opening 125 that opens depending on the results of a special symbol drawing, and a regular prize opening 127 that does not trigger a lottery even if a game ball wins are arranged on the game board 110. The large prize opening 125 is provided with a large prize opening door 125D that opens and closes the large prize opening 125. In the following description, for convenience, the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening door 125D may be referred to as the open/closed state and opening/closing operation of the large prize opening 125.
In addition, in this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the bottom left of the game board 110 to display the lottery results and the number of reserved balls.

1, the second starting hole 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the big prize hole 125 are located in the right area of the game area 111. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment, when attempting to win the second starting hole 122, the gate 124R, the big prize hole 125, etc., the game ball is caused to flow down into the right area of the game area 111. Here, the left area of the game area 111 can also be regarded as the first game area. Furthermore, the right area of the game area 111 can also be regarded as the second game area.
In the illustrated example, the second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the large prize opening 125 are located in the right area of the play area 111, but this is not limited to this. The second starting gate 122 equipped with the electric tulip 123, the gate 124R, and the large prize opening 125 may be located in the left area of the play area 111, and the first starting gate 121, the gate 124L, and the regular prize opening 127 may be located in the left area of the play area 111. In this case, the right area of the play area 111 is considered to be the first play area. Furthermore, the left area of the play area 111 is considered to be the second play area.

Attached to the back of the gaming board 110 are a gaming control board 200B, which determines whether a special symbol has been won, a presentation control board 300B, which controls the overall presentation, and a payout control board 330B, which controls the launch and payout of gaming balls. Also attached to the back of the gaming board 110 are various boards (not shown), such as an image control board (not shown), which controls the presentation using images and sounds, and a lamp control board (not shown), which controls the presentation using various lamps and movable gadgets 115. Also located on the back of the gaming board 110 are a connector 200C, which connects the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B, and a switching power supply (not shown), which converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards. The connector 200C has multiple wires (not shown) for connecting the gaming control board 200B and the presentation control board 300B.

The frame member 150 includes a handle 151 and a launching device 158 (see FIG. 4 ) that electrically launches game balls at a predetermined time interval (e.g., 100 balls per minute) with a ball-hitting force corresponding to the angle of operation when a player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise. The handle 151 is also provided with a touch sensor 151a and a launching volume 151b. The handle 151 of this embodiment is also provided with a handle lamp 1511 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The handle lamp 1511 emits light in a manner corresponding to the presentation situation. The launching device 158 is also provided with a launch solenoid 158a and a ball-feeding solenoid 158b.
The frame member 150 also includes a supply device (not shown) that supplies game balls one by one to the launching device in sequence in response to the player's operation of a lever 152, and a tray 153 that temporarily stores the game balls that the supply device supplies to the launching device. Balls are dispensed onto this tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.
In this embodiment, the tray 153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower tray, but a configuration example in which the upper tray and the lower tray are separated is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and an ejection button 155 for dropping the game balls accumulated in the tray 153 into a box (not shown) and removing them.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that notify the player of the game status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and provide various effects.
The speaker 156 produces various effects using music, voice, and sound effects.
The frame lamps 157 are composed of light-emitting elements such as LEDs, and perform various light-based effects using lighting/flashing patterns, different light colors, etc. A possible configuration example for the frame lamps 157 is one that allows effects to be created by changing the direction of light irradiation. The frame lamps 157 in this embodiment include an upper frame lamp 1571 located above the upper panel lamp 1161, an upper left frame lamp 1572 located above the left panel lamp 1162 and to the left of the upper frame lamp 1571, an upper right frame lamp 1573 located above the right panel lamp 1163 and to the right of the upper frame lamp 1571, a left frame lamp 1574 located to the left of the left panel lamp 1162, and a right frame lamp 1575 located to the right of the right panel lamp 1163.
The frame member 150 also includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

3(a), the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a win at the first start gate 121, a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to a win at the second start gate 122, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passage through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the first start gate 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays a special symbol in a variable manner and then a static display to display the lottery result based on a win at the second start gate 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform a cyclical change (cyclical display) multiple times, with the change in display mode being one cycle (= 256 ms), and display a static display after the special symbol change time has elapsed.
The normal symbol display 223 displays the lottery result by variably displaying normal symbols and then stopping them based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a first special symbol reserve indicator 218 that operates in response to a reserve on the first special symbol display 221, a second special symbol reserve indicator 219 that operates in response to a reserve on the second special symbol display 222, and a regular symbol reserve indicator 220 that operates in response to a reserve on the regular symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, and the regular symbol reserve indicator 220 are each comprised of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of reserved symbols is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

Here, we will explain the reservation. If a game ball enters the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning game is being performed), the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning game cannot be started because the special symbol is still changing. Therefore, the later winning game is stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for that winning game ball is reserved until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball is completed.
The same processing is performed on the normal symbols as on the special symbols. The fact that such a reservation has been made and the number of reservations (number of remaining reservations) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 218, the second special symbol reservation indicator 219, and the normal symbol reservation indicator 220.

The display 130 also includes a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is configured as a display device with an array of two LEDs. One of the two LEDs lights up to indicate whether the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is short. The other LED lights up to indicate whether a state is favorable to the player by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the gaming ball).

The display 130 also includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the jackpot opening 125 is activated in a jackpot game that is played based on the results of the special symbol lottery. Jackpot games will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device with an array of LEDs, and the number of rounds that the jackpot opening 125 will be activated in a jackpot game is displayed by the lighting pattern of the LEDs.

The display 130 also includes a status confirmation indicator 226. The status confirmation indicator 226 is composed of a single LED and is used to indicate that the setting change mode (described below) or the setting confirmation mode (described below) has been set. The LED begins to light up when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, and turns off when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. As such, because the status confirmation indicator 226 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in any location as long as it is on the front (surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting is changed or checked, but the display may be configured to make it clear which mode is set. For example, the status check indicator 226 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting check mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 226 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been set, but it may also be used as another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the first special symbol reserved indicator 218, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the number of rounds indicator 225, the status indicator 224, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an input device through which a player inputs information regarding effects. As shown in FIG. 3B , in this embodiment, an example of an input device is provided on the frame member 150. The input device includes an effect button 161 and effect keys 162, which are adjacent to the effect button 161 and consist of a plurality of keys arranged in a generally cross shape. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is generated in which an operation to select one image from a plurality of images is accepted. In this case, for example, a player can select one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114 by operating the effect keys 162, which consist of four keys arranged in a cross shape, and then select the selected image by operating the effect button 161. Furthermore, in addition to the effect buttons 161 and effect keys 162 shown in the figure, various input forms, such as levers and handles, can be adopted as the input device depending on the content of the effect.
The effect button 161 of this embodiment is provided with a button lamp 1611 that emits light under predetermined conditions. The button lamp 1611 emits light in a manner that corresponds to the effect situation.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a sub-information display 80 inside the game area 111, which consists of a sub-first change display 81, a sub-second change display 82, a sub-first hold display 83, a sub-second hold display 84, a sub-normal map change display 85, a sub-normal map hold display 86, and a sub-right-hit display 87.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs and is designed to be dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 does not have an indicator, such as the status check indicator 226, that indicates whether the setting is in the setting change mode or setting check mode.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is used to display (notify) whether the first special symbol is being displayed or not, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is used to display (notify) whether the second special symbol is being displayed or not. Each is composed of one LED. When the display of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (on for 0.5 seconds, then off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol. In other words, the sub-first variable indicator 81 and the sub-second variable indicator 82 repeatedly display in cycles, with one flash representing one cycle (= 1 second), and light up when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as a static symbol.

The results of the special symbol jackpot determination may be announced using the sub-first variable indicator 81 or the sub-second variable indicator 82. In this case, the LED may light up in the event of a jackpot, and turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first hold number), which will be described later, and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second hold number), which will be described later. Each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off; when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off; when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on; when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on; and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 is used to display (announce) the results of the winning lottery, and is composed of a single LED. When the normal symbol variation display begins, the LED flashes (varies) at a predetermined interval. When the normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED displays a static display indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes out if there is a loss).

In addition, the sub-regular symbol variation indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying a regular symbol variation, and to light up or turn off when the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to determine whether or not a regular symbol variation is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-right hit indicator 87 is used to encourage the player to fire the game ball toward the right area of the play area 111 (a so-called right hit), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and a time-saving play state, and is off in other play states.

[Configuration of the control unit]
Next, a control unit that controls the operation and processes signals in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
4, the control unit includes, as a game control means, a game control unit 200 that determines whether a special symbol has been won, etc. Also, as a presentation control means, it includes a presentation control unit 300 that controls the presentation overall, and a payout control board 330B that controls the payout of game balls and the launch of game balls, etc.

[Game control unit configuration and functions]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs calculations when determining whether a special symbol has been won, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201 and various data, and a RAM 203 that serves as a working memory for the CPU 201. The RAM 203 also includes a special symbol reserved memory area, a prize ball count memory area, a total payout memory area, a total out memory area, a payout memory area, a base memory area, a complete flag memory area, a complete standby flag memory area, an MY specific reference value memory area, an MY value memory area, and an error information memory area for storing information related to various error determinations. In addition to the memory areas described above, the RAM 203 also includes numerous other memory areas and timer counters for measuring various times.

The gaming control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to either a no-time-reduction state or a time-reduction state. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the no-time-reduction state may be referred to below as the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the time-reduction state may be referred to below as the time-reduction gaming state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-reduction gaming state includes a special time-reduction gaming state and a specific time-reduction gaming state. The special time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled via a jackpot game. Furthermore, the specific time-reduction gaming state is a gaming state that is controlled when the number of times the special symbol variable display executed after a predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of variations) reaches a specific number (300 times in this embodiment). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes one of the normal gaming state, the special time-shortened gaming state, and the specific time-shortened gaming state. The gaming control unit 200 switches between the normal gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the normal gaming state and the specific time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. The gaming control unit 200 also switches between the specific time-shortened gaming state and the special time-shortened gaming state based on predetermined conditions. In the time-shortened gaming state, the gaming control unit 200 also performs control such as increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery compared to the normal gaming state, shortening the normal symbol variation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123.

Note that the time-saving game state is considered to be a more advantageous state than the normal game state in that the special symbol variation time is more likely to be shorter than in the normal game state, and it is possible to execute a larger number of special symbol variation displays in a shorter time than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the normal game state may be designed to more easily execute jackpot games with a larger number of rounds than in the time-saving game state, in which case the normal game state is considered to be a more advantageous state than the time-saving game state. Furthermore, the normal game state and the time-saving game state do not need to be in an advantageous or disadvantageous relationship. In other words, the normal game state and the time-saving game state only need to be different states.

The game control unit 200 conducts a special symbol lottery when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122. Then, depending on the results of the special symbol lottery, a special game such as a big win game or a small win game is played. During a big win game, the game control unit 200 controls the large winning opening 125, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 gaming balls have entered) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between the opening and closing of the large winning opening 125 when it opens. During a small win game, the game control unit 200 controls the large winning opening 125, a special electric device, to repeat a predetermined number of rounds in which it remains open until a predetermined condition (e.g., 0.9 seconds have elapsed) is met. The game control unit 200 then controls the interval between the opening and closing of the large winning opening 125 when it opens.

The game control unit 200 also performs a normal symbol lottery when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the operation of the electric tulip according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 sets holds that occur when the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during special pattern fluctuation, and holds that occur when the game ball passes through the gate 124 during normal pattern fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sends information related to game control, such as the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery, information on changing the time-saving state to no time-saving state, and hold setting information, to the presentation control unit 300 using commands described below.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, the second start opening 122, the big prize opening 125, or the normal prize opening 127, the game control unit 200 instructs the payout control board 330B to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls per gaming ball depending on where the gaming ball entered. For example, the game control unit 200 sends an instruction command to the payout control board 330B to pay out three prize balls when the gaming ball enters the first start opening 121, four prize balls when the gaming ball enters the second start opening 122, thirteen prize balls when the gaming ball enters the big prize opening 125, and ten prize balls when the gaming ball enters the normal prize opening 127. Note that even if it detects that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 124, it does not instruct the payout control board 330B to pay out the corresponding prize balls.
When the payout control board 330B pays out prize balls in accordance with instructions from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 obtains information on the number of prize balls paid out (number of prize balls) from the payout control board 330B, thereby managing the number of prize balls paid out.

As shown in Figure 4, the game control unit 200 is connected to detection means including a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 121, a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 124.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a large prize opening detection unit (large prize opening switch (SW)) 215 that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 125, a large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216 that sets the large prize opening door 125D of the large prize opening 125 to a closed state and a protruding and tilted open state, and a regular prize opening detection unit (regular prize opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the entry of a game ball into the regular prize opening 127.

In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 207 that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time and a radio wave detection sensor 208 that detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time are connected to the game control unit 200. The magnetic detection sensor 207 and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are connected to the game control board 200B via wiring (not shown).
In addition, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern reserve display 218 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the first start gate 121 while the special pattern is changing, a second special pattern reserve display 219 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have entered the second start gate 122 while the special pattern is changing, and a normal pattern reserve display 220 that displays the number of reserved, unchanging symbols that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal pattern is changing.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to a first special pattern display 221 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a second special pattern display 222 which displays the change in the special pattern that occurs when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 and the results of the special pattern lottery, a normal pattern display 223 which displays the change in the normal pattern and the results of the normal pattern lottery, and a status display 224 which displays the status of the pachinko game machine 100.

Then, detection signals detected by the first start gate switch 211, the second start gate switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big prize gate switch 215, the regular prize gate switch 217, the magnetic detection sensor 207, and the radio wave detection sensor 208 are sent to the game control unit 200. Control signals from the game control unit 200 are also sent to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the big prize gate door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the regular symbol reserve indicator 220, the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the regular symbol indicator 223, and the status indicator 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of prize balls paid out as described above.

Also mounted on the surface of the gaming control board are a RAM clear switch 228 that inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in RAM 203 of the gaming control unit 200 or to update the setting value, which indicates the degree of advantage in the game (the probability of determining a jackpot), a setting key switch 229 that inputs a signal to transition to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (described below) by operating the setting key, an information display 230 that displays performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be understood, and other electronic components.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a-230d, see Figure 52 below) arranged horizontally. The two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), while the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information indicating setting values and performance information values (see Figure 51). Static lighting is used to display setting values, and dynamic lighting is used to display performance information.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for the board, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. The game control unit 200 then transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out and information indicating the status of the game control unit 200, etc., obtained from the payout control board 330B, to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350.

[Configuration and function of the dispensing control board]
The payout control board 330B includes a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 360 that controls the launch of game balls.
The payout control unit 330 comprises a CPU 331 that performs calculations when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as working memory for the CPU 331.
The payout control unit 330 then controls the payout of balls based on commands sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 receives a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has entered (such as the first starting hole 121). Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout drive unit 334 to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

Also connected to the payout control unit 330 are a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, a ball presence detection unit 336 that detects whether game balls are stored in the storage unit (not shown), and a full tank detection unit 337 that detects whether the tray 153 that holds the game balls used by the player when playing and the paid-out prize balls is full. The payout control unit 330 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, ball presence detection unit 336, and full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing in accordance with these detection signals.
Furthermore, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a slot external information terminal board 340 that transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 then transmits to the host computer via the slot external information terminal board 340, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout drive unit 334 has been instructed to pay out, and information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335. The same information is also transmitted to the game control unit 200.

The firing control unit 360 is equipped with a control circuit and input/output ports (not shown). The handle 151 is connected to the input port of the firing control unit 360, and the firing device 158 is connected to the output port of the firing control unit 360.

The touch sensor 151a is provided inside the handle 151 and is composed of a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance when a player touches the handle 151. When the touch sensor 151a detects that a player has touched the handle 151, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control unit 360 that allows the launch solenoid 158a to be energized. If no touch signal is input from the touch sensor 151a, the launch control unit 360 will not launch the gaming ball.
The launch volume 151b is directly connected to the rotating part that rotates the handle 151 and is composed of a variable resistor. The launch volume 151b divides a constant voltage (e.g., 5 V) applied to the launch volume 151b using the variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control unit 360 (varying the voltage supplied to the launch control unit 360). The launch control unit 360 energizes the launch solenoid 158a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 151b, rotating a launch member (not shown) directly connected to the launch solenoid 158a, thereby launching the game ball into the game area 111.

The firing solenoid 158a is configured as a rotary solenoid, and a firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 158a, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 158a rotates the firing member.
The ball feeding solenoid 158b is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the tray 153 one by one toward the firing member directly connected to the launch solenoid 158a.

When the launch control unit 360 detects that the player's hand is touching the handle 151 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 151a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 158b and the launch solenoid 158a. When it detects a change in the rotation angle of the handle 151 based on a detection signal from the launch volume 151b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 158b and also drives the launch solenoid 158a to fire game balls at a predetermined frequency (e.g., 99.9 balls/minute) with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 151.

[Configuration and functions of the production control unit]
The performance control unit 300 comprises a CPU 301 that performs calculations when controlling the performance, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as working memory for the CPU 301, and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the date and time.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the result of the determination of whether or not a special symbol lottery has been won and the variation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At this time, the effect control unit 300 may receive operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 and set the effect content according to the operation input. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) according to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Furthermore, when a game is suspended for a predetermined period of time, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of a screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation content based on the change information of the time-shortening state and the time-shortening state received from the game control unit 200.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 sends a command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 to instruct the execution of the set performance content.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls performances using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls performances using various lamps and movable props 115.

The game control unit 200 and each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the game control unit 200 can also be regarded as a game control means for controlling the progress of the game.
In addition, the performance control unit 300, each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the performance control unit 300, the payout control board 330B, each functional unit connected to the input/output ports of the payout control board 330B, and the external information terminal board 350 for the board can also be seen as a performance control means that controls the performance.

[Image/sound control unit configuration and functions]
As shown in FIG. 5, the image/audio control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 that performs calculations when controlling the images and sounds that represent the performance content, a ROM 312 that stores programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data, a RAM 313 that is used as working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, based on the command sent from the performance control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores image data such as symbol images and background images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 during play, decorative symbols for notifying the player of lottery results, characters and items for displaying preview effects to the player, etc. The SNDROM 316 also stores various sound data such as music and voice to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, as well as sound effects such as jingles.
Based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300, the CPU 311 analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes drawing-related commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314.

The VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, etc. using the read image data, and performs sound processing using the read sound data. The VDP 314 then controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing processing. The VDP 314 also controls the sound output from the speaker 156 using the sound data that has been subjected to the sound processing.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not limiting, and a separate processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 comprises a CPU 321 that performs calculations when controlling the illumination of various lamps and the operation of the movable props 115 and the performance button 161, a ROM 322 that stores programs executed by the CPU 321 and various data, and a RAM 323 that is used as working memory for the CPU 321.
The lamp control unit 320 controls the lighting/flashing and color of light of various lamps based on commands sent from the performance control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable role object 115 and the performance button 161.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light color pattern data (light-emitting pattern data) for the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start-up lamp 1211, and movable role object 115, in accordance with the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light-emitting pattern data stored in ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the performance control unit 300. The lamp control unit 320 then controls the light emission of the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start-up lamp 1211, and movable role object 115 based on the read-out light-emitting pattern data.

The board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start lamp 1211, and movable part 115 are all considered to be light-emitting means. Furthermore, the board lamp 116, frame lamp 157, light guide plate 118, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, start lamp 1211, and movable part 115 may be collectively referred to as "lamps" as light-emitting means. Furthermore, the image display unit 114 displays images by illuminating the display. Therefore, in a broad sense, the image display unit 114 can also be considered to be light-emitting means.

Moreover, the frame lamp 157, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are all provided on the frame member 150. Therefore, the frame lamp 157, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are all considered to be frame light-emitting means.
In addition, the board lamp 116, the light guide plate 118, the starting lamp 1211, the image display unit 114, and the movable accessory 115 are all provided on the game board 110. Therefore, the board lamp 116, the light guide plate 118, the starting lamp 1211, the image display unit 114, and the movable accessory 115 are all considered to be board light-emitting means.

In addition, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data for the movable role object 115 according to the performance content set by the performance control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable role object 115 using the read operation pattern data.

In this embodiment, the game control unit 200, the presentation control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, and the lamp control unit 320 are individually configured on a game control board 200B as a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110, a presentation control board 300B as a sub-board, an image control board (not shown), and a lamp control board (not shown). Also, the payout control unit 330 and the launch control unit 360 are individually configured on a payout control board 330B arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110.
5, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may also be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by this lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of the game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in Fig. 6, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, a special symbol determination unit 234, and a normal symbol variation control unit 236 as functional units that execute various lottery processes.
The game control unit 200 also includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with the variation of special symbols.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 is equipped with a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, a prize ball processing unit 239, an output control unit 240, and a random number control unit 241, which are functional units that control the operation of various devices and process data related to prize balls, etc.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery and a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the random number value used in the special symbol lottery, one number (random number value) is selected (acquired) from a predetermined range of numbers for each type of random number, on the condition that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, etc.
Furthermore, in the case of the random number value used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124. The obtained random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Note that as the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to a winning random number indicating whether or not there is a win, a pattern random number indicating the type of win or a variable pattern random number may also be set.
When a special pattern lottery is held, the special pattern change control unit 233 controls the change of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 221 or the second special pattern display device 222 according to the lottery result.

When the special symbols start to change, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table such as that shown in FIG. 26, which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is won, and whether it is a minor jackpot or a miss if a jackpot is not won. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which serve as detection means, and the special symbol determination unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. Note that the aforementioned special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) refers to the processing performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result of whether or not a jackpot game will be played and the determination result of whether or not a variation pattern (for example, 15.0 seconds or more) that can produce a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation is to be used. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" refers to a presentation that makes the player expect a big win in the decorative symbols described below.

When the normal symbol starts to vary, the normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table such as that shown in FIG. 26( e), which will be described later, to determine whether the result of the normal symbol lottery is a "win" or not. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to play the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Furthermore, if multiple types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of win" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232.
When a regular symbol lottery is held, the regular symbol variation control unit 236 controls the variation of the regular symbol by the regular symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result.
If the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines a "win" in the normal symbol lottery, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times, creating a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the second starting hole 122. On the other hand, if a "loss" is determined, the electric tulip 123 does not open in this manner. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but examples include an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which the electric tulip opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation of the large prize opening 125 in an operation pattern specified based on the type of big win won, as a big prize game. Also, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the large prize opening operation control unit 237 opens the large prize opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times, as a small prize game.
The prize ball processing unit 239 manages the number of prizes won by various devices related to winning and lottery, and sets commands for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 performs initialization and initial settings of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Furthermore, when the power is turned off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the basic processing operation by the game control unit 200.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the gaming control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) (step (hereinafter, step will be abbreviated as "S") 701). Then, the gaming control unit 200 determines whether a RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S702).
If the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S702), the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not a backup flag relating to operation when the power is cut off is ON (S703).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S703), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the checksum created when the power was cut off is normal (S704).

If the checksum is normal (Yes in S704), the game control unit 200 then executes a restoration process (S705). During this restoration process, the game control unit 200 configures the RAM 203. By performing this process, the game progress state (control state) is restored (restored) to the state before the power was shut off. During the restoration process, the game control unit 200 also clears the MY value and MY specific reference value (described below). That is, the MY value and MY specific reference value (described below) are cleared upon power restoration (the counter value becomes "0" upon power restoration). During the restoration process, the game control unit 200 also configures the presentation control means, such as the presentation control unit 300, in response to the restoration from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 configures the presentation control means by outputting a power restoration command to the presentation control unit 300. The power restoration command is a command that includes information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is being played, whether the game is in a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, etc.). In addition, in this restoration process, the gaming control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.
In addition, the game control unit 200 may send a game status command indicating the current game status to the presentation control unit 300 before or after sending the power restoration command, without including information indicating the current game status in the power restoration command.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S702), the backup flag is OFF (No in S703), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S704), the game control unit 200 then clears the contents stored in RAM 203 as an initialization process (S706). Clearing the contents stored in RAM 203 may be referred to as RAM clearing below.
If a complete flag or a complete wait flag, which will be described later, is set, these flags are cleared in step 706. That is, if the complete flag or the complete wait flag is set, these flags are cleared by clearing the RAM. Furthermore, by clearing the RAM, the MY value and the MY specific reference value, which will be described later, are also cleared.
In the following, the restoration of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the RAM clear switch is ON may be referred to as RAM clear restoration. In addition, the restoration of power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the RAM clear switch is OFF may be referred to as non-RAM clear restoration.

Next, the game control unit 200 sets the working area of RAM 203 (S707). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command to the performance control unit 300 to set (initialize) the performance control means, and sets up the sub-board (performance control means) (S708). Setting up the sub-board includes clearing RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S705) is completed or after the sub-board setting (see S708) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S709).The game control unit 200 then repeatedly executes the following loop processes: interrupt permission (S710), interrupt prohibition (S711), symbol random number control process (S712), initial value random number update process (S713), and determination of whether the power cutoff flag is ON (S714).
Here, the interrupt permission (S710) and the interrupt prohibition (S711) are provided to enable the execution of an interrupt process during the execution of this loop process (S710 to S714). In this embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the pattern random number control process (S712), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special pattern lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S713), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random number values used in game control.
In determining the power-off flag, if the power-off flag is OFF (No in S714), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the loop processing (S710 to S714) and the main control processing by interruption. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (Yes in S714), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (processing at the time of power-off).

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the game control unit 200 during power-off processing.
In the power-off process, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for various outputs (S801). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S802). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S803), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S804), and enters an infinite loop.

[Main control process of gaming machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, and also instructs the presentation control unit 300 of the presentation control means to control the presentation, and instructs the payout control unit 330 to control the payout of prize balls.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S710) in the loop process shown in Figure 7, the main control process is executed as interrupt processing. As shown in Figure 9, the main control process sequentially executes a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric device process, a prize ball process, a counting process, a base value determination process, a performance information setting process, a MY value determination process, a complete determination process, and an output process (S901 to S911).

In the random number update process (S901), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting random numbers and updating random number values will be described later.

The switch processing (S902) includes start port switch processing, gate switch processing, normal prize port switch processing, large prize port switch processing, and out ball detection switch processing.
In the start port switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in Fig. 4, and executes processing for the special symbol lottery when the switch is turned ON. Also, as will be described in detail later, when performing pre-determination processing in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, it calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes processing for pre-determination.
In the gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal pattern lottery.
In the normal winning port switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the normal winning port switch 217 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing for the normal symbol lottery.
In the special prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the special prize opening switch 215 in FIG. 4, and when the switch is turned ON, executes processing related to the prize balls.
In the out ball detection switch processing, the game control unit 200 monitors the state of the out ball detection switch 227 in Figure 4, and when the switch is turned ON, performs processing related to the out ball.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S903), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are carried out.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the special symbol change control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the change pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol change control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with this pattern change.
The details of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S904), the big prize slot processing and the electric tulip processing are carried out.
In the special prize opening processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the special prize opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special electric device, the special prize opening 125, based on predetermined conditions.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric device, based on predetermined conditions.
The details of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S905), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239 and sets commands for managing the number of winning balls and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winnings. More specifically, the game control unit 200 references the prize ball count memory area of RAM 203 and causes the prize ball processing unit 239 to set a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to the winnings at each winning slot (first start slot 121, second start slot 122, large winning slot 125, regular winning slot 127). The payout control command set in the prize ball processing unit 239 is sent to the payout control unit 330 by the output process shown in step 911, described below. As a result, the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls corresponding to the winnings at each winning slot, which are stored in the prize ball count memory area of RAM 203.

In the counting process (S906), the game control unit 200 performs processing to count the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering various winning ports (mainly the first start port 121 and normal winning port 127) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the total payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on game balls entering each winning port (the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the large winning port 125, the normal winning port 127) regardless of the game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 regardless of the game state.
In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected entering each winning slot (first starting slot 121, second starting slot 122, large winning slot 125, normal winning slot 127), the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated based on the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning slot. The number of prize balls to be paid out may be referred to as the "planned number of prize balls" below. The calculated planned number of prize balls is added to the value stored in the total payout number storage area. In other words, the total payout number is calculated based on the planned number of prize balls, not the number of game balls actually paid out. However, the total payout number may also be calculated based on the number of game balls actually paid out, rather than the planned number of prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of payouts during normal play is also calculated based on the planned number of prize balls, not the number of game balls actually paid out. However, the number of payouts during normal play may be calculated based on the number of game balls actually paid out, not the planned number of prize balls.
In this embodiment, the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play do not change depending on the setting value. Therefore, by counting the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play, it is possible to identify the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that is not affected by the setting value.

In the base value determination process (S907), the game control unit 200 determines the normal base value for the current game section, which is divided by the total number of outs. The normal base value is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts during normal play by the number of outs during normal play and multiplying the result by 100. In addition, in step 907, the game control unit 200 stores the determined normal base value in the first area of the base memory area in RAM 203.
In this embodiment, the game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base memory area includes first to fourth areas. The first area stores the normal base value for the current game section, the second area stores the normal base value for the previous game section, the third area stores the normal base value for the previous game section, and the fourth area stores the normal base value for the previous game section.

In the performance information setting process (S908), the game control unit 200 performs settings to display the normal base value saved in the base memory area of RAM 203 as performance information on the information display 230. The manner in which the performance information is displayed on the information display 230 will be described later.

In the MY value determination process (S909), the game control unit 200 performs a process of determining the MY value. The MY value and the MY value determination process will be described later.
In the complete determination process (S910), the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the conditions for activating the complete function are met. The complete function and the complete determination process will be described later.

In the output process (S911), the game control unit 200 calls a function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240 and outputs various commands to the performance control unit 300 and the payout control board 330B. The RAM 203 has a storage area set up for each type of control command.
The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the memory areas of each control command in RAM 203, and if a control command is stored in each memory area (i.e., if a control command has been generated in the processing of S902 to S910), it reads out the control command and outputs it to the output destination (the performance control unit 300 or the payout control board 330B).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each of the processing steps S902 to S910 by the above-mentioned functions as first processing means are stored in the corresponding memory area of RAM 203 for each processing step. Then, after these processing steps, output control unit 240, acting as second processing means, outputs all of the commands generated in each processing step that have been accumulated in the memory area of RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when one cycle of main control processing is executed, the commands generated in that cycle are output after the final command in that cycle is generated.

[Modification of the basic operation of the gaming machine]
In the example of operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, an interrupt is permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and a main control processing consisting of a series of processes is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control processing may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 7 to 9. For example, the main control processing may be incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the system may return to the main control processing every regular interval (e.g., 4 milliseconds). Furthermore, while the main control processing may be incorporated into the series of operations of the basic processing, an interrupt may be generated every regular interval, as in the operation described with reference to Figures 7 to 9, and when an interrupt is generated, the system may return to the main control processing incorporated into the basic processing.

Furthermore, when outputting commands generated in basic processing, as a general rule, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called and output. Basic processing differs from main control processing related to the progress of the game, and is special processing such as initial operations that are performed only when the power is turned on. Furthermore, because the processing procedure may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, basic processing is processing that promptly outputs generated commands to ensure that no output processing is missed. Note that, in cases where commands are generated consecutively by multiple related processes, or in other cases, a processing procedure may be adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and output together depending on the specific processing requirements.

[Random number update process by game control unit]
Random numbers, which serve as judgment information for various lotteries in game control, such as special symbol lotteries, are counted by a counter, starting from a predetermined initial value and incremented by one each time the random number update process (S901) of the main control process shown in FIG. 9 is performed. The value at the time of each lottery is obtained by the start switch process (FIG. 10) and the gate switch process (FIG. 11) and used in the special symbol process (FIG. 13) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 18). This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum random number value (e.g., 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 26(a) described below), it returns to the initial value. Furthermore, because the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is identified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and initial value information. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 7, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process at S713.

[Start port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process of the switch process shown in S902 of FIG.
This start port switch processing is performed sequentially by processing for a win at the first start port 121 and processing for a win at the second start port 122. Referring to Figure 10, the game control unit 200 first determines whether a game ball has won at the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned ON (S1001).

When the first start port switch 211 is turned ON (YES in S1001), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1002).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1002), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning at the first start port 121 (S1003), and ends the processing for the winning at the first start port 121. In this case, information indicating the winning at the first start port 121 is created, but the random number value based on the winning at the first start port 121 is not obtained and no prize balls are awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1002), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1004). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the first start port 121 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the first start port 121 to the value stored in the total payout number memory area.

After step 1004, the game control unit 200 determines whether the number U1 of pending winnings from the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit (S1005). In the example shown in Figure 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number U1 of pending winnings has reached the upper limit (No in S1005), no more pending winnings can be reserved, and processing for the winnings from the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1005), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been won this time and stores it in RAM 203 (S1006). In this case, since the win occurred in the first starting slot 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value then determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol processing. The random number values referred to here include a jackpot random number value that determines whether or not a win has been won, a small win, or a miss; a pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the type of jackpot; a variation pattern random number value that specifies the variation pattern in the pattern variation; and a reach random number value that determines whether or not a variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described below will be set in the event of a miss.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S1007). The pre-determination process is a process (pre-determination) in which a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting hole but has not yet had its random number determined by the special pattern process described below is subjected to a random number determination (pre-determination) before the random number is determined by the special pattern process.

The effect control unit 300 of this embodiment can then perform a preview effect that suggests the result of the random number determination made by the pre-determination process (pre-determination result) before the random number is determined by the special pattern processing and the result is announced. This preview effect is performed, for example, using a reserve display effect (described below) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) that has already obtained a random number by winning at the starting port but for which the random number has not yet been determined by the special pattern processing. This preview effect based on pre-determination suggests to the player the result of the subsequent random number determination made by the special pattern processing for the reserved ball corresponding to the pre-determination related to the preview effect. This allows the player to play with anticipation for the reserved ball. Details of the preview effect based on pre-determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S1008).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1004 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1009).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U1 due to S1005 (S1010), and ends processing for the winning at the first starting port 121.

If a negative result is obtained in step 1001, if a negative result is obtained in step 1005, or if the processing of step 1010 is performed, processing for a win at the second start hole 122 is then performed. Referring to Figure 10, the game control unit 200 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 122 and the second start hole switch 212 has been turned ON (S1011).

When the second start port switch 212 is turned ON (YES in S1011), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1012).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1012), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning at the second start port 122 (S1013), and ends the processing for the winning at the second start port 122. In this case, information indicating the winning at the second start port 122 is created, but the random number value based on the winning at the second start port 122 is not obtained and no prize balls are awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1012), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1014). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the second start opening 122 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the second start opening 122 to the value stored in the total payout number memory area.

After step 1014, the game control unit 200 determines whether the number U2 of pending winnings at the second start port 122 that have not yet changed is less than the upper limit (S1015). In the example shown in Figure 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number U2 of pending winnings has reached the upper limit (No in S1015), no more pending winnings can be reserved, and processing for the winnings at the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1015), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery resulting from this winning and stores it in RAM 203 (S1016). In this case, the winning occurred in the second starting slot 122, so similar to S1006 above, a random number value for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number value, jackpot symbol random number value, small jackpot symbol random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, etc.) is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S901. This random number value is then used to determine the result of the special symbol lottery in the subsequent special symbol process.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S1017). The contents of this preliminary determination process are the same as those of S1007.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S1018).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process of S1017 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S1019).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number U2 by S1018 (S1020), and ends processing for the winning at the second start port 122.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the gate switch processing when a gaming ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1101).

When the gate switch 214 is turned ON (YES in S1101), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1102).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1102), the game control unit 200 invalidates the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 (S1103), and the gate switch processing ends. In this case, information indicating the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 is created, but a random number value based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 is not obtained.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1102), the game control unit 200 determines whether the number of reserved winnings G that have not yet changed is less than the upper limit (S1104). In the example shown in Figure 11, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reserved winnings G has reached the upper limit (NO in S1104), no more winning winnings that have not yet changed can be reserved, and the gate switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1104), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery due to this winning and stores it in RAM 203 (S1105). In this case, since the winning is at gate 124, a random number value (such as a winning random number value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number G (S1106).
After the value of the reserved number G is added in S1106, the game control unit 200 sets a reserved number G increase command in RAM 203 to notify the presentation control unit 300 of the increase in reserved number G due to S1106 (S1107), and ends processing for the winning at gate 124.

[Normal winning port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal winning port switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this normal winning port switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal winning port 127 and the normal winning port switch 217 has been turned ON (S1201). If the normal winning port switch 217 has not been turned ON (NO in S1201), the normal winning port switch processing ends.

On the other hand, if the normal winning port switch 217 is turned ON (YES in S1201), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1202).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1202), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning of the regular winning opening 217 (S1203). In this case, information indicating the winning of the regular winning opening 217 is created, but the winning ball for the winning of the regular winning opening 217 is not awarded.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1202), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1204). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the normal winning port 217 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the normal winning port 127 to the value stored in the total payout memory area.

[Big prize slot switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize entrance switch processing among the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this special prize opening switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the special prize opening 125 and the special prize opening switch 215 has been turned ON (S1211). If the special prize opening switch 215 has not been turned ON (NO in S1211), the current special prize opening switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big prize opening switch 215 is turned ON (YES in S1211), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1212).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1212), the game control unit 200 invalidates the winning of the special prize opening 215 (S1213). In this case, information indicating the winning of the special prize opening 215 is created, but no winning balls are awarded for the winning of the special prize opening 215.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1212), the game control unit 200 updates the number of prize balls (S1214). More specifically, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win in the special prize opening 215 to the value stored in the prize ball number memory area of RAM 203 as the number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, the game control unit 200 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to a win in the special prize opening 125 to the value stored in the total payout memory area.

[Out ball detection switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12C is a flowchart showing the contents of the out ball detection switch processing of the switch processing shown in S902 of FIG.
In this out ball detection switch processing, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the out ball detection switch 227 is ON (S1221). If the out ball detection switch 227 is OFF (NO in S1221), the out ball detection switch processing ends.

On the other hand, if the out ball detection switch 227 is turned ON (YES in S1221), the game control unit 200 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1222).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1222), the game control unit 200 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the complete function was activated (S1223). This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds.
If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the complete function was activated (YES in S1223), the game control unit 200 updates the number of game balls to be paid back (S1224). More specifically, the game control unit 200 updates the value stored in the payout number storage area of the RAM 203 as the number of game balls to be paid back to the player (planned payout number) to the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 after the complete function was activated.

Furthermore, if a predetermined time has passed since the complete function was activated (NO in S1223), the game control unit 200 disables the detection of out balls by the out ball detection switch 227 (S1225). In this case, information indicating the detection of out balls by the out ball detection switch 227 is created, but the total number of outs and the number of outs during normal play are not added.
Also, after step 1224, the game control unit 200 updates the value stored in the total number of outs storage area of the RAM 203 as the total number of outs (S1226).

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with a payout number storage area that stores the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 after the complete function is activated as the number of game balls to be paid out to the player (planned payout number), and a set time period for counting the planned payout number. The pachinko gaming machine 100 then pays out to the player the game balls that were in the game area 111 when the complete function was activated (the out balls added to the payout number storage area).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game balls that were shot out when the complete function was activated from being wasted by the player.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (S1301). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1301). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1301), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special symbol variation state (S1302).
If the special symbol is not currently being changed (No in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 next refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1303). If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 restricts the change of the special symbol (S1304). In this case, even if there is a reserve (a reserve related to a win at the first start port 121, a reserve related to a win at the second start port 122), the special symbol change control unit 233 does not change the special symbol based on this reserve.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1303), the special symbol change control unit 233 performs processing on the pending numbers U1 and U2 (see Figure 10) of the special symbols that have not yet changed (S1305-S1308). In this embodiment, a distinction is made between the pending number U1 related to winning at the first start port 121 and the pending number U2 related to winning at the second start port 122, so this processing is also performed separately for each corresponding start port.

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 is 1 or more (S1305). If the reserved number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U2 (S1306). On the other hand, if the reserved number U2=0 (No in S1305), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the reserved number U1 related to the winning of the first starting gate 121 is 1 or more (S1307). If the reserved number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1307), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number U1 (S1308). On the other hand, if the reserved number U1 = 0 (No in S1308), this means that there is no winning combination to trigger the lottery for the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and a separate routine for customer waiting setting processing is executed, and the processing ends (S1323).
In this embodiment, priority is given to processing the reserved number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122. That is, if the reserved number U2 is 1 or more, processing is performed for the reserved number U2, and if the reserved number U2 = 0, processing is performed for the reserved number U1 (see S1305-S1306). On the other hand, it is also possible to control the reserved numbers U1 and U2 to be decremented in the order of winning, regardless of whether the winning is at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

After subtracting the reserved number U1 or reserved number U2 in S1306 or S1308, the special symbol variation control unit 233 generates a game status command indicating the current game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1309). The game status command set in S1309 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9. Furthermore, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1310). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1323, see FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a separate routine for determining whether a jackpot has occurred and for selecting a variation pattern (S1311, S1312). Details will be described later, but this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process determine setting information (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbols that are displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222. This information is included in the variation start command sent to the performance control unit 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 starts variation of the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 shown in Fig. 3 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process (S1313). Then, a variation start command including setting information indicating the setting contents (jackpot symbol, game status, variation pattern, etc.) is generated and set in RAM 203 (S1314). The variation start command set in S1314 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Fig. 9.
Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 adds one to the number of times the special symbol has been varied since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clearing, resetting of the number of variations) (S1315). Then, a variation number command indicating the added number of times the variable display has been varied is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1316). The variation number command set in S1316 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Also, if it is determined in S1302 that a special symbol is changing (Yes in S1302), the special symbol change control unit 233 references the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1317). If the complete flag is ON (Yes in S1317), the special symbol change control unit 233 stops the change of the special symbol that is currently being performed (S1318) and ends the special symbol processing.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1317), or after the number of variations command is set in S1316, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the variation time has elapsed (S1319). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the special symbol variation began in S1313 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process in S1312. If the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1319), the special symbol variation continues, and the special symbol processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has elapsed (Yes in S1319), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first stops the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 at the symbol determined in the jackpot determination process of S1311 (S1320). Then, another routine of during-stop processing is executed (S1321). The details of the during-stop processing will be described later. In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233 sets a variation stop command to stop the decorative symbols (described later) in the RAM 203 (S1322). The variation stop command set in S1322 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
It should be noted that, if a win at the second starting port 122 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121. Also, for example, if a win at the first starting port 121 occurs during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122, the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the first starting port 121 may occur during the variation of the special pattern triggered by a win at the second starting port 122.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 13, after subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or reserved number U1 (see S1306, S1308), the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1311, S1312), but this is not limited to this.
In the special symbol processing, after the jackpot determination processing and the variation pattern selection processing are executed, a processing for subtracting the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 may be executed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection processing, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the reserved number U2 or the reserved number U1 before subtraction.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Game Control Unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win determination process (S1311 in FIG. 13).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value for this special symbol lottery (S1401) and determines whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred (S1402, S1405). Whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has occurred is determined by determining whether the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of Fig. 10 matches the value set as the winning value for the jackpot or the value set as the winning value for the small jackpot (see Fig. 26(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a jackpot (Yes in S1402), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1403). The type of jackpot is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of jackpot is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of jackpot (see FIG. 26(b)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1404).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is a small win (No in S1402, Yes in S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the small win symbol random number value (S1406). The type of small win is determined based on the result of this determination. The type of small win is determined by whether the value of the big win symbol random number obtained in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 matches any of the values preset for each type of small win (see FIG. 26(c)).
After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (small win symbol) representing the type of small win determined by the determination of the small win symbol random number as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1407).

If the result of the random number determination in S1401 is neither a big win nor a small win (No in S1402 and S1405), the special symbol determination unit 234 then sets a symbol indicating that the lottery was lost (hereinafter referred to as the losing symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203 (S1408).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1312 in FIG. 13).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in the normal game state, the special time-saving game state, or the specific time-saving game state) (S1501). Then, using the determination result of S1402 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14), it determines whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1502). Then, if a jackpot has been achieved (Yes in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a variation pattern table for the jackpot from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1503).

On the other hand, if a jackpot has not been reached (No in S1502), the variation pattern selection unit 235 then uses the determination result of S1405 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14) to determine whether or not a small jackpot has been reached in this special pattern lottery (S1504). If a small jackpot has been reached (YES in S1504), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out the variation pattern table for small jackpots from ROM 202 and sets it in RAM 203 (S1505).

On the other hand, if a small win has not been achieved (NO in S1504), a random number value is judged to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big win (S1506). Whether or not to perform a reach effect is determined by judging whether or not the reach random number value acquired in S1006 or S1016 of Fig. 10 matches a preset value (see Fig. 26(d)).
If the result of the determination using the random number value is that a reach effect is to be performed (Yes in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a reach variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1508). On the other hand, if a reach effect is not to be performed (No in S1507), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads out a loss variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1509).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a table that associates multiple pre-prepared fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random number value using the variation pattern random number value acquired in S1006 or S1016 of FIG. 10 and the variation pattern table set in S1503, S1505, S1508, and S1509 (S1510). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 references the variation pattern table set in RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern corresponding to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation pattern table referenced will differ depending on the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is in a time-shortened state or not), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it has been a jackpot or a small jackpot, and whether a reach effect is to be performed if neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot has been achieved), etc., and therefore the variation pattern that is determined will differ.

Then, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1510 as setting information in RAM 203 (S1511). The setting information for the variation pattern set in S1511 is included in the variation start command set in S1314 of FIG. 13, and is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9. Details of the variation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stoppage by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stoppage process (S1321 in FIG. 13).
In this stop processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether a flag indicating a time-shortened state (hereinafter, the time-shortened flag) is ON in the flag setting of RAM 203 (S1601). If the time-shortened flag is ON (Yes in S1601), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (variable number) J in the time-shortened state (S1602) and checks whether the number of lotteries J has become 0 (S1603). If the number of lotteries J=0 (Yes in S1603), the game control unit 200 turns OFF the time-shortened flag (S1604). The operation of turning ON the time-shortened flag and setting the initial value of the number of lotteries J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 20) in the large prize winning port process (FIG. 19) described below.
If the number of lottery draws J is not 0 (NO in S1603), the game control unit 200 generates a time-saving count command indicating the value of the number of lottery draws J in the time-saving state and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1605). The time-saving count command set in S1605 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 can enter a high-probability time-shortening no-play state, processing relating to the high-probability time-shortening no-play state is carried out during this stoppage processing.
The game control unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability flag) is ON in the flag settings of the RAM 203. If the high probability flag is ON, the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of variations) X in the high probability state, and checks whether the number of lotteries X has become 0. If the number of lotteries X=0, the high probability flag is turned OFF.

Also, if the time-saving flag is OFF (No in S1601), or after the time-saving flag is turned OFF in S1604, or after the time-saving count command is set in S1605, the game control unit 200 then generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1606). The game status command set in S1606 is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not a jackpot has been awarded in this special symbol lottery (S1607). Here, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded can be made based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 26(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1607. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the answer is No in S1607.

If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1607), the game control unit 200 then turns on the jackpot game flag (S1608), which sets the game state in the RAM 203 to the jackpot game state.
Next, the game control unit 200 initializes the value of the number of lottery draws J (S1609). Furthermore, if the time-saving flag is ON in S1601 and the number of lottery draws J is not 0 in S1603, the game control unit 200 turns the time-saving flag OFF (S1610).

After initializing the value of the number of lotteries J in S1610, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game (S1611).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets in the RAM 203 an opening command for the effect control unit 300 to perform an effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag (S1612), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is sent to the effect control unit 300 by the output processing shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1607), the game control unit 200 next determines whether the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S1613).
If it is a small win (YES in S1613), the game control unit 200 then starts a small win game (S1614).

On the other hand, if it is not a small win (No in S1613), the game control unit 200 determines whether the number of times the special symbol variable display has been executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the variable number) has reached a specific number (300 in this embodiment) (S1615). If the specific number has been reached (YES in S1615), the game control unit 200 executes a game status setting process of a separate routine (S1616). The content of the game status setting process will be described later.
Also, if the number of times the variable display has been displayed has not reached the specified number (NO in S1615), the processing during the stoppage is terminated.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1323 in FIG. 13).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and processing ends immediately (Yes in S1701). On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1701), the gaming control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in RAM 203 (S1702), and sets the customer waiting flag ON (S1703). The pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to be in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting command set in S1702 is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9. The customer waiting flag is set when the variation of special symbols has stopped and there are no reserved symbols.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in S903 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1801). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. When the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 21) described below, making it easier to win the second start hole 122 (auxiliary game state).

If the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state has already been entered and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation (Yes in S1801). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1801), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON (S1802).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 restricts the change of the normal symbol (S1803). If the change of the normal symbol is being executed in step 1802, the normal symbol change control unit 236 stops the change of the normal symbol that is being executed. Also, even if there is a hold (a hold related to the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124) in step 1802, the normal symbol change control unit 236 does not execute the change of the normal symbol based on this hold.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S1802), the normal symbol change control unit 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol change (S1804). If the normal symbol is not during change (NO in S1804), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the reserved number G (see FIG. 11) of unchanged normal symbols is 1 or greater (S1805). If the reserved number G = 0 (NO in S1805), this means that there is no winning combination to start the normal symbol lottery, and processing ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, if the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1805), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number G (S1806). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number for this normal symbol lottery and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (S1807). Whether or not a win has been achieved is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number obtained in S1105 of FIG. 11 matches the value set as the winning value in a table such as that shown in FIG. 26(e) described below.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1808). That is, if the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the win (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing the loss (hereinafter, the losing symbol) is set in RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol variation time (S1809). This variation time is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2008 in FIG. 20 described below. That is, if the time-saving flag is ON when setting in S1809, the variation time is set to a short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and if the time-saving flag is OFF, the variation time is set to a long time (e.g., 4.0 seconds). After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts varying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIG. 2(a) and FIG. 4 based on the settings in S1809 (S1810). The normal symbol variation pattern can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and in S1807, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines the random number value for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, thereby setting the fluctuation time.

After the normal pattern change has started in S1810, or if it is determined in S1804 that the normal pattern is changing (Yes in S1804), the normal pattern change control unit 236 determines whether the change time has elapsed (S1811). In other words, it determines whether the time elapsed since the normal pattern change started in S1810 has reached the change time set in S1809. If the change time has not elapsed (No in S1811), the normal pattern change continues, and the normal pattern processing ends.

On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (Yes in S1811), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1812). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether the result of the determination in S1807 was a win (S1813). If it was a win (Yes in S1813), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1814). On the other hand, if the lottery was unsuccessful (No in S1813), the normal symbol processing ends without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Big prize slot processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize slot processing in the electric role processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In this special prize opening process, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the special prize opening flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the special prize opening flag is OFF, no prize will be won in the special prize opening 125, and the special prize opening process is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the special prize opening flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 next determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the middle of the opening operation in the special prize opening operation control started in the stop processing (FIG. 16) (S1902).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the opening mode (Yes in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the time (opening time) for the preset opening operation has elapsed (S1903). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation of the special prize opening 125 continues, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1903). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1903), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs operation settings for the special prize opening 125 (S1904), initializes the number of wins C (C = 0) (S1905), adds 1 to the current value of the number of rounds R for the operation of the special prize opening 125 (S1906), and starts operation (opens) the special prize opening 125 (S1907).

The activation setting in S1904 sets the activation pattern of the large prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (number of activation rounds) to be activated with that activation pattern. The activation pattern and number of rounds are set in various ways depending on the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Note that in a jackpot game, it is specified that the large prize opening 125 is activated multiple times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, it is activated for 15 rounds (15R), with one round opening for 29.5 seconds. As another example, it is activated for two rounds (2R), with one round opening for 0.9 seconds. To explain further, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the opening time for the operation pattern set in S1904 has elapsed (S1908). If the opening time for the special prize opening 125 has not elapsed (No in S1908), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the number of prizes C won by the special prize opening 125 is equal to or greater than a specified number (e.g., 9 prizes) (S1909). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of prizes C is less than the specified number, the special prize opening 125 will remain in operation (open), and special prize opening processing will be terminated (No in S1909). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1908) or the number of prizes C has reached the specified number (Yes in S1909), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 will terminate operation (close) of the special prize opening 125 (S1910).

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1904 (S1911). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations will be performed, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1911).

When the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1911), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1912). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the special prize game flag.
After this, the big win opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for the performance control unit 300 to perform the performance in the ending operation according to the big win game flag (S1913). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Next, the special prize opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of operation of the special prize opening 125 to 0 (S1914), and then determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the ending operation has exceeded the preset time for the ending operation to be performed (ending time) (S1917). If the ending time has not passed, the ending operation continues, and the special prize opening processing is terminated (No in S1917). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1917), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then performs a game status setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1918), and then turns off the jackpot game flag and terminates the special prize opening processing (S1919). The details of the game status setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1902 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening mode (No in S1902), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the ending mode is in progress (S1915). If the ending mode is in progress (Yes in S1915), the operations from S1917 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not currently ending (No in S1915), the special prize opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether the special prize opening 125 is in operation (open) (S1916). If it is not in operation (No in S1916), the operations from S1905 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1916), the operations from S1908 onwards are executed.

[Game status setting process]
The contents of the game status setting process (S1616, S1918) by the game control unit 200 are shown in FIG.
First, the game control unit 200 determines whether the result of the special symbol lottery was a big win or a small win (S2001, S2002). This determination can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14). Note that these determinations are generally similar to S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 in the big win determination process (FIG. 14), and therefore the determination results of S1402, S1403, S1405, and S1406 may also be used.

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win (YES in S2001), the game control unit 200 does not change the game state and therefore ends the game state setting process.
If the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (NO in S2001 and YES in S2002), the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lotteries J based on the type of jackpot symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 (S2003). This initial value is, for example, 100 times.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 can enter a high-probability time-shortening no-play state, processing relating to the high-probability time-shortening no-play state is carried out in step 2003 .
The game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag and sets an initial value for the number of lottery draws X. The initial value for the number of lottery draws X is, for example, 100. As a result, the game state setting in the RAM 203 becomes a high probability time-shortened game state. Then, when 100 lotteries have been drawn in this high probability time-shortened game state, the high probability time-shortened game state ends, and the game enters a normal game state (a low probability non-time-shortened game state).

Next, the game control unit 200 resets the number of times the special symbol has been displayed after the predetermined condition is met (executing RAM clear and resetting the number of times the special symbol has been displayed) (S2004). The game control unit 200 also generates a command indicating the number of times the special symbol has been displayed and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2005). This command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the special time-shortening flag (S2006), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the special time-shortening game state.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is neither a big win nor a small win (NO in S2001, NO in S2002), the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the number of lotteries J (S2007). In this embodiment, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 295. Therefore, when 295 lotteries are performed in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.
Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the specific time-shortening flag (S2008), which causes the game state setting in the RAM 203 to become the specific time-shortening game state.

Next, the game control unit 200 generates a game status command and sets it in RAM 203 (S2009). This game status command is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S904 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 and determines whether the complete flag is ON or not (S2101).
If the complete flag is ON (YES in S2101), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 restricts the operation of the electric tulip 123 (S2102). If the electric tulip 123 is operating (open) in step 2101, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 closes the electric tulip 123. Also, even if the auxiliary game flag is ON in step 2101, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 does not operate (open) the electric tulip 123.

On the other hand, if the complete flag is OFF (NO in S2101), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag settings in RAM 203 (S2103). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF (NO in S2103), the electric tulip 123 will not open, and the electric tulip processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S2103), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 then determines whether the electric tulip 123 is operating (S2104).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S2104), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern for the electric tulip 123 (S2105) and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S2106). The operation pattern is set based on the time-saving flag set in processes such as S1604 and S1610 in FIG. 16 and S2006 and S2008 in FIG. 20. For example, if the time-saving flag is OFF when set in S2105, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds. If the time-saving flag is ON, an operation pattern is set that opens the electric tulip three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds. Thus, when the time-saving flag is ON (in the time-saving state), the electric tulip 123 is typically opened multiple times for a long period of time, providing a winning support (electric tulip support) that makes it easier to win a prize in the second starting hole 122. It is also possible to provide multiple operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) for the electric tulip 123 when the time-saving flag is ON or OFF, and set the operation pattern according to the type of win determined in the normal symbol processing (see Figure 18).

If it is determined in S2104 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S2104), or after operating the electric tulip 123 in S2106, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the opening time for the set operation pattern has elapsed (S2107). If the opening time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 will remain in operation (open state), and the electric tulip processing will end (No in S2107). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S2107), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 will turn off the auxiliary game flag and end the electric tulip processing (S2108).

[Stopping the game]
Next, the stopping of the game will be explained.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment stops the game and notifies the user of the game's stoppage when a predetermined condition is met. Here, stopping the game means ceasing the variation of the symbols (special symbols, normal symbols), not starting the variation of the symbols (special symbols, normal symbols), invalidating the winnings at each winning slot (first starting slot 121, second starting slot 122, big winning slot 125, normal winning slot 127), and invalidating the passage of the game ball through the gate 124.
Hereinafter, the function of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to stop playing and notify the player of the game's halt when predetermined conditions are met may be referred to as the "complete function." Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100's stopping playing and notifying the player of the game's halt when predetermined conditions are met may be referred to as the "activation of the complete function."

In this embodiment, two conditions are defined as conditions for activating the complete function. Note that, hereinafter, the conditions for activating the complete function may be referred to as complete function activation conditions.
The first complete function activation condition is determined based on the relationship between the number of game balls paid out and the number of game balls shot. More specifically, the first complete function activation condition is that the increase in the number of game balls from the point at which the number of game balls is lowest when the game results for that day are obtained reaches a predetermined upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit is 95,000 balls. However, the upper limit may be any value.
The second condition for the complete function to be activated is determined based on the game status. More specifically, the second condition is that the game is not in progress and the jackpot symbol is not being determined.
That is, in this embodiment, the time when the number of game balls has decreased the most when the game results for that day are used as the reference, and even if the increase in the number of game balls from this reference reaches the upper limit, the complete function does not operate when the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is in progress. Also, even if the time when the jackpot symbol is not stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is not in progress, the complete function does not operate when the increase in the number of game balls from this reference does not reach the upper limit, and even if the time when the jackpot symbol is not stopped to be determined or a jackpot game is in progress, the complete function does not operate.

In addition, the value at which the number of game balls has decreased the most between the reference value (0) when the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off is used as the base value, and if the increase in the number of game balls from this value reaches the upper limit value, or if the increase reaches the upper limit value while the jackpot pattern is being confirmed or a jackpot game is in progress, the complete function will be activated after the jackpot game ends.
This allows the pachinko gaming machine 100 to realize a variety of games while suppressing excessive increases in gambling.

When the complete function is activated, the game control unit 200 may stop (limit) the launch of game balls by stopping the flow of electricity to the launch solenoid 158a and the ball feed solenoid 158b via the payout control board 330B.

In the following, the value at which the number of game balls has decreased the most between the reference value at power-on and the time when the power is cut off may be referred to as the MY specific reference value.
In the following, the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the total number of outs from the total number of payouts after the power is turned on may be referred to as the difference in balls. The above-mentioned MY specific reference value can also be regarded as the difference in balls when it has decreased the most after the power is turned on (the difference in balls when the game result is obtained the most). In other words, the MY specific reference value can also be regarded as the difference in balls when it has decreased the most in the game result from the time the power is turned on to the present in one day.
Furthermore, the first complete function activation condition mentioned above can also be understood as the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls) reaching an upper limit value.
In addition, hereinafter, the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls) may be referred to as the MY value. The MY value can also be regarded as the increase in the number of game balls relative to the MY specific reference value. In addition, the upper limit of the difference between the difference balls and the MY specific reference value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the difference balls), which is set as the first complete function activation condition, may be referred to as the MY upper limit value. In addition, hereinafter, the difference between the MY upper limit value and the MY value (the value obtained by subtracting the MY value from the MY upper limit value) may be referred to as the MY remaining value.

[MY value determination process by game control unit]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the MY value specification process shown in S909 of FIG.
The game control unit 200 refers to the value stored in the total payout memory area and the value stored in the total out memory area, and determines whether the total payout number or the total out number has changed (S2201). If neither the total payout number nor the total out number has changed (NO in S2201), the game control unit 200 ends the MY value determination process.

On the other hand, if the total number of payouts or the total number of outs has changed (YES in S2201), the game control unit 200 subtracts the value stored in the total number of outs memory area from the value stored in the total number of payouts memory area to calculate the difference in balls at the current time (S2202).
Next, the game control unit 200 refers to the MY specific reference value stored in the MY specific reference value storage area of the RAM 203, and determines whether the MY specific reference value is greater than the current difference in balls (S2203).

If the MY specific reference value is greater than the current difference in balls (YES in S2203), the game control unit 200 updates the MY specific reference value by storing the current difference in balls in the MY specific reference value memory area (S2204).
Also, if the MY specific reference value is smaller than the current difference in balls (NO in S2203), and after step 2204, the game control unit 200 updates the MY value by storing the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value from the current difference in balls in the MY value memory area (S2205).

Next, the game control unit 200 generates an MY value command indicating the updated MY value and sets it in RAM 203 (S2206). This MY value command is sent to the performance control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

As described above, in this embodiment, the MY specific reference value is not updated when the difference in balls is updated to a larger value, and is updated when the difference in balls is updated to a smaller value. In other words, the MY specific reference value is the smallest difference in balls in a day after the power is turned on. Furthermore, the MY value is not updated when the difference in balls is smaller than the MY specific reference value, but is updated according to the increase in the number of game balls from the MY specific reference value. In other words, the MY value is always greater than or equal to 0.

[Complete determination process by the game control unit]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the contents of the complete determination process shown in S910 of FIG.
The game control unit 200 first refers to the value stored in the MY value storage area and determines whether the MY value has reached the MY upper limit (S2301). If the MY value has not reached the MY upper limit (NO in S2301), the game control unit 200 ends the complete determination process.

On the other hand, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (YES in S2301), the game control unit 200 determines whether the standby condition is met (S2302). In this embodiment, the standby condition is that the jackpot symbol is stopped and fixed or that a jackpot game is in progress.
If the standby condition is not satisfied (NO in S2302), the game control unit 200 turns ON the complete flag in the complete flag storage area of the RAM 203 (S2303). The game control unit 200 also generates a complete command indicating that the complete function is activated and sets it in the RAM 203 (S2304). This complete command is sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output process shown in S911 of FIG. 9.

Also, if the standby conditions are met (YES in S2302), the game control unit 200 turns ON the complete standby flag in the complete standby flag storage area of RAM 203 (S2305). The game control unit 200 also generates a complete standby command indicating that the operation of the complete function is in a standby state, and sets this in RAM 203 (S2306). This complete standby command is sent to the presentation control unit 300 by the output process shown in S911 of Figure 9.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value when the jackpot symbol is not fixed and stopped, or when the jackpot game is not in progress, the complete function is activated.
Furthermore, when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit while the jackpot symbol is being determined or stopped or during a jackpot game, the operation of the complete function is put on standby. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the waited complete function is carried out.

[Relationship between MY specific standard value, difference ball and MY value]
Next, the relationship between the MY specific reference value, the difference ball, and the MY value will be described.
Figures 24 and 25 are diagrams showing the relationship between the MY specific reference value, the difference in balls, and the MY value according to the results of games at multiple timings in one day.
24 and 25, timing T0 is when the power is turned on. At timing T0, the difference ball, MY specific reference value, and MY value are all 0.
As shown in Figure 24 (1), at timing T1, the difference in balls becomes "-5000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-5000" and the MY value is "0".

Next, as shown in Figure 24 (2), at timing T2, the difference in balls becomes "+5000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-5000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T2, the difference in balls is greatest at timing T1, so the MY specific reference value at timing T2 remains unchanged from timing T1. Furthermore, the MY value is "+10000", which is the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-5000" from the difference in balls at timing T2 of "+5000".

Next, as shown in Figure 24 (3), at timing T3, the difference in balls becomes "-10000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is updated to "-10000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T3, timing T3 is the timing when the difference in balls decreased the most, so the difference in balls at timing T3 becomes the MY specific reference value. Also, the value "0" obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10000" from the difference in balls at timing T3 "-10000" is the MY value.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (4), at timing T4, the difference in balls becomes "+15,000." In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-10,000." In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T4, the difference in balls decreased the most at timing T3, so the MY specific reference value at timing T4 remains unchanged from timing T3. Also, the MY value is "+25,000," which is the value obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10,000" from the difference in balls "+15,000" at timing T4.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (5), at T5, the difference in balls becomes "+85000". In this case, the MY specific reference value is "-10000". In other words, in the period from when the power is turned on to timing T5, the timing at which the difference in balls decreased the most was timing T3, so the MY specific reference value at timing T5 remains unchanged from timing T3. Also, the value "+95000" obtained by subtracting the MY specific reference value "-10000" from the difference in balls "+85000" at timing T5 is the MY value.
When the MY value reaches "95000" (MY upper limit), the game stops and the operation of the complete function is announced, except when the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or the jackpot game is in progress. Also, if the jackpot symbol is stopped to be determined or the jackpot game is in progress when the MY value reaches "95000", the game stops after the jackpot game ends and the operation of the complete function is announced.

[Random number determination method]
Next, we will explain in detail the random number determination method used in the jackpot determination process (Figure 14), variable pattern selection process (Figure 15), normal pattern process (Figure 18), etc.
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of random numbers (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 26(a) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(b) shows an example of the composition of a jackpot random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(c) shows an example of the composition of a small win random number used in the special pattern lottery, Figure 26(d) shows an example of the composition of a reach random number used in the special pattern lottery that is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in normal game mode, and Figure 26(e) shows an example of the composition of a winning random number used in the normal pattern lottery.

Referring to FIG. 26( a), the jackpot random number determination values are set to two types: a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in a low-probability state, a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in a high-probability state, and a small jackpot. The range of values for the random numbers (jackpot random numbers) is 300, ranging from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) at a low-probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In the case of a special symbol lottery at a high-probability state, ten winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). In other words, in the illustrated example, if a prize is awarded in the starting slots 121 and 122 at a high-probability state and a special symbol lottery is held, the winning probability is 10 times higher than when a special symbol lottery is held at a low-probability state. In addition, three small prize values are set regardless of whether the state is low probability or high probability, and the probability of winning is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, taking the special symbol lottery in the low probability state as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot random number value (see S1006, S1016) obtained as a result of winning in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 matches the winning value of "5" in the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in Fig. 26(a). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small win.

Referring to Figure 26(b), there are five types of jackpot symbols available: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, and jackpot symbol E. Here, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the first starting gate 121, and of these, jackpot symbol A indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol B indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol C indicates a ten-round jackpot. Furthermore, jackpot symbol D and jackpot symbol E are symbols that indicate a jackpot as the result of the special symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win in the second starting gate 122, and of these, jackpot symbol D indicates a four-round jackpot. Jackpot symbol E indicates a ten-round jackpot. The random number value range is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the jackpot symbol A, 20 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the jackpot symbol B, 70 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol B is 70/100 (=7/10).
For the jackpot symbol C, 10 winning values are assigned to the first starting slot 121. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol C is 10/100 (= 1/10).

For the jackpot symbol D, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol D is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the jackpot symbol E, 50 values are assigned as winning values when the symbol enters the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the jackpot symbol E is 50/100 (= 5/10).

Here, taking jackpot pattern A as an example, it is determined whether the jackpot pattern random number value (see S1006) obtained upon winning in the first starting slot 121 matches the winning value of jackpot pattern A in Figure 26 (b), which is "0 to 19." While a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special pattern lottery for other jackpot patterns, such as jackpot pattern B.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of setting a set value, which is a level of advantageousness in the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to one of, for example, six levels: "1,""2,""3,""4,""5," and "6."
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1," the probability of winning is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1," the probability of winning is 1/100.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is highest when the set value is set to "6." For example, when the set value is "6," the winning probability is 1/95.
In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Referring to Figure 26(c), there are three types of small win symbols: small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C. Here, small win symbol A, small win symbol B, and small win symbol C all indicate a two-round small win. The range of random number values is 100, from 0 to 99.

For the small prize symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery that is initiated by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol A is 20/100 (= 2/10).
For the small prize symbol B, 50 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol B is 50/100 (= 5/10).
For the small prize symbol C, 30 values are assigned as winning values for the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting slot 122, the probability of winning with the small prize symbol C is 30/100 (= 3/10).

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be explained. The reach random number is set according to the number of reserved balls, as will be described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 121 is one will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 26(d), the range of random number values is 250, from 0 to 249. 22 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (with reach) that result in a variation pattern (variation time) in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., 15.0 seconds or longer), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery results (without reach) that do not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed (e.g., less than 15.0 seconds). In other words, in the illustrated example, if a jackpot is not won in the special pattern lottery, a reach effect is executed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Hereinafter, the reach effect is an effect executed on the image display unit 114 when a special pattern changes. Hereinafter, an effect when a special pattern changes that does not result in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-free effect, and a effect when a special pattern changes that results in a variation pattern in which a reach effect can be executed is referred to as a reach-free effect.

Here, taking the example of a reach-enabled situation, it is determined whether the reach random number value (see S1006) obtained upon winning in the first starting port 121 matches the reach-enabled winning value of "0 to 21" in Figure 26 (d). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the special symbol lottery without a reach. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting port 122 may have the same or different winning values. Furthermore, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the normal play state, the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving play state, and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the specific time-saving play state may have the same or different winning values.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, an effect using decorative symbols is produced on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the display control of the first special symbol display unit 221 and the second special symbol display unit 222 (hereinafter, referred to as special symbol displays 221 and 222 when no distinction is made). The decorative symbols are, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a vertically consecutive sequence of numbers from 1 to 9. When the special symbol display units 221 and 222 begin to display the special symbol changes, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display unit 114 begin scrolling. Furthermore, when the special symbol is displayed as a static symbol a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol display (the start of the decorative symbol scrolling), the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped. Generally, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win, the decorative symbol displays three identical numbers lined up horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. The effect produced in conjunction with the display of the special symbol changes is called a dynamic effect. In addition, below, the variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot may be referred to as a jackpot variable effect. Also, below, the variable effect that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a miss may be referred to as a miss variable effect.

In the reach effect, the following operation is performed on the decorative symbols as a variable effect. First, before the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are fixed and stopped, any two symbols (number series) are temporarily stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolling vertically, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a horizontal line.
Next, the scrolling speed for the last row gradually slows down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. After the last row temporarily stops, the three symbols will stop.
Here, in the reach effect, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. The SP reach effect is generally called a super reach or a special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than a reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds. The SPSP reach effect is generally called a super super reach or a special special reach, and is an effect that gives more hope for a jackpot than an SP reach effect, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and a story unfolds.
In addition, a reach effect in which neither the SP reach effect nor the SPSP reach effect is performed may be referred to as a normal reach effect below.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, the decorative symbols scrolling vertically (horizontally) are not fixed and stopped until they are fixed and stopped without any performance that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach performance, and the symbols are fixed and stopped without the same numbers lining up in a straight line horizontally (vertically) or diagonally.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot random number is a miss, the reach random number determines whether to perform a reach effect in which the reach effect is an executable variation pattern on the image display unit 114, or a reach-less effect in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern. Also, the reach random number changes the execution rate of the reach effect according to the number of reserved numbers, enabling efficient game progress while giving the player an appropriate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols can be fixed and stopped with the same numbers lined up in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal line. On the other hand, when a small win or a loss occurs, a reach effect is performed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped with the same numbers not lined up in the above line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
26(e), the range of random number values is 10, from 0 to 9, with one value assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is OFF and nine values assigned as the winning value when the time-saving flag is ON. Therefore, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 in the non-time-saving state and a regular symbol lottery is held, there is a 1/10 probability of winning. In contrast, when a gaming ball passes through gate 124 in the time-saving state and a regular symbol lottery is held, there is a 9/10 probability of winning.

Here, taking the time-saving flag OFF as an example, it is determined whether the winning random number value (see S1105) obtained when the gaming ball passes through the gate 124, first start gate 121, or second start gate 122 matches the winning value of "0" when the time-saving flag is OFF in Figure 26 (e). A detailed explanation will be omitted, but the same applies to the normal symbol lottery when the time-saving flag is ON.

Although not shown, it is possible to set a plurality of winning options with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening patterns of the electric tulips 123) to be played when a winning is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set in the same way as the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 26(b)) that specifies the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 11) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and identifies the type of winning based on the acquired random number value by the normal symbol determination unit 232.
Note that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in Figure 26 are merely examples and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting a fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of the setting of the fluctuation patterns and tables used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
Figure 27 is a diagram showing an example of setting the variation pattern and table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in Figure 15. In addition, Figure 27 shows a setting example when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on winning the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1502 in FIG. 15), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on whether the variation pattern random number value (see S1006) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. For example, if the jackpot symbol is "jackpot symbol C" and the variation pattern random number is "51," this matches the variation pattern random number range of "50 to 69" assigned to "jackpot symbol C" in FIG. 27, and therefore "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time for this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds."

Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol lottery determination is a miss (when both S1502 and S1504 in FIG. 15 are No), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 for the first special symbol lottery is "1," the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the reach random number value (see S1006) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the reserved number "1" for a "miss" in FIG. 26, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249." If the acquired reach random number is within the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether the fluctuation pattern random number value (see S1003) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value matches any of the fluctuation pattern random number values assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21". For example, if the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 69", so "PR8" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

28 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 28 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second starting hole in the normal game state.
In the table shown in Fig. 28, variation patterns are provided according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the variation pattern random number. More specifically, variation patterns are provided in which the "determination result" corresponds to "big win,""smallwin," and "miss," respectively.
In the table shown in FIG. 28, a variation pattern in which "time" is "7.00" is provided for "jackpot pattern D". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "7.01" is provided for "jackpot pattern E". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.00" is provided for "small prize pattern A". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.01" is provided for "small prize pattern B". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "6.02" is provided for "small prize pattern C". Also, a variation pattern in which "time" is "0.50" is provided for "miss".

In this table, a "miss" is not assigned a winning value in the reach random number. Therefore, a reach is not performed for special symbol variations in which the lottery result based on winning the second start slot 122 during normal gameplay is a miss.

29 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 29 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the second start hole 122 in the special time-saving game state.
The table shown in Figure 29 provides fluctuation patterns according to the determination result of the special pattern lottery, the reserved number U2 for the second special pattern lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number.
In the table shown in FIG. 29, a variation pattern is provided in which the "time" is "2.50" and "4.00" for the "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1." The "times" of "2.50" and "4.00" are shorter than the "times" of "8.00,""10.00," and "11.00" for the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 27 for the "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "1." Also, in the table shown in FIG. 29, variation patterns are provided in which the "time" is "2.00,""4.00," and "4.01" for the "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3." The "times" of "2.00,""4.00," and "4.01" are shorter than the "times" of "6.80" and "10.00" for the "variation pattern" provided in the table shown in FIG. 27 for the "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "2 to 3." 29, a fluctuation pattern in which the "time" is "1.50" and "4.00" is provided as "no reach" when the "reserved number" is "4". The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is shorter than the "time" of "4.60" and "10.00" of the "fluctuation pattern" in which the "reserved number" is "4" and "no reach" is provided in the table shown in FIG.

30 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. In addition, FIG. 30 shows an example of the setting when the variation of the special symbol is performed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 30, a variation pattern is provided according to the judgment result of the special symbol lottery, the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern random number. In this table, a winning value in the reach random number is not assigned to a "variation pattern" in which the "judgment result" is "miss." Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning the first start slot 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, a reach is not performed in the special symbol variation.
In the table shown in Fig. 30, a variation pattern is provided in which the "reserved number" is "1 to 4" and the "time" is "14.00". The "time" of this variation pattern is longer than any of the "times" of the "variation patterns" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in Fig. 29. In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a "miss" and "no reach", the variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning at the second start port 122 is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol variation based on winning at the first start port 121.

The game control unit 200 determines the table to be used to select the special symbol variation pattern based on whether the gaming ball has entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122 and the game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Then, as described above, the game control unit 200 determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained when the gaming ball entered the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, and conditions such as the presence or absence of a reach effect and the number of reserved balls. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is then included in a variation start command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300. As described below, the presentation control unit 300 selects and executes, as the presentation when the special symbol varies, a presentation that corresponds to (can be executed within) the variation time specified based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of performance control unit for performing preview performance based on advance judgment]
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the presentation control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the preview presentation based on the advance determination will be described.
31A and 31B are block diagrams illustrating an example of the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 4) of the game control unit 200 according to this embodiment. Fig. 31A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the memory area 204, and Fig. 31B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 31A.

As shown in Figure 31(a), RAM 203 has memory area 204, which serves as a special symbol reserve memory area for storing jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This memory area 204 has eight memory sections corresponding to the maximum number of reserved numbers for first start port 121 and second start port 122 (when the upper limit for each reserved number is 4). Specifically, memory area 204 has first memory section 204a, second memory section 204b, third memory section 204c, fourth memory section 204d, fifth memory section 204e, sixth memory section 204f, seventh memory section 204g, and eighth memory section 204h.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(b), each of these memory units 204a to 204h has an area for storing information indicating which starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) was won, an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing a pattern random number, an area for storing a reach random number, and an area for storing a variation pattern random number. In other words, each of memory units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order, starting with the first storage unit 204a. To be more specific, for example, if no random numbers are stored in any of the first storage unit 204a through the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number will be stored in the first storage unit 204a. Also, for example, if random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a through the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number will be stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

When the reserved numbers (reserved numbers U1, U2) are subtracted in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 (S1306, S1308), the random numbers stored in the first memory unit 204a through the eighth memory unit 204h are shifted to the previous memory area 204. Here, the RAM 203 may be provided with a random number memory area for storing random numbers used in the jackpot determination processing (S1311). In this case, the random numbers stored in the first memory unit 204a are shifted to the random number memory area in response to the subtraction of the reserved numbers. At this time, the random numbers already stored in the random number memory area, i.e., the random numbers used in the previous jackpot determination processing (the previous special symbol variable display), are erased (overwritten). However, the timing at which the random numbers stored in the random number memory area are erased is not limited to when the reserved numbers are subtracted. When a special symbol lottery is executed in the jackpot determination processing, the random numbers used in this special symbol lottery (the random numbers stored in the random number memory area) may be erased.

Fig. 32 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of RAM 303 (see Fig. 4) of performance control unit 300 according to this embodiment. Fig. 32(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved memory areas 305 and 306, and Fig. 32(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the memory units shown in Fig. 32(a).
As shown in FIG. 32A, RAM 303 includes a first reserved memory area 305 and a second reserved memory area 306 as reserved status memory areas for storing the status of reserved balls. The first reserved memory area 305 and the second reserved memory area 306 correspond to reserved balls for winning the first starting hole 121 and reserved balls for winning the second starting hole 122, respectively, and each has four memory sections. Specifically, the first reserved memory area 305 includes a first memory section 305a, a second memory section 305b, a third memory section 305c, and a fourth memory section 305d. The second reserved memory area 306 includes a first memory section 306a, a second memory section 306b, a third memory section 306c, and a fourth memory section 306d.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32(b), each of these memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d has a reserve flag memory area for turning a reserve flag ON/OFF and a notification flag memory area for turning a notification flag ON/OFF. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying whether or not there are reserved balls in each of the memory units 305a-305d and 306a-306d. For example, if the number of reserved balls due to winning in the first starting hole 121 is three, the reserve flags will be ON in the three reserve flag memory areas of the first through third memory units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a preview effect based on the results of a preliminary determination depending on the game status and the presentation situation. Therefore, if a preview effect is to be performed, the notification flag is turned ON, and if a preview effect is not to be performed, the notification flag is turned OFF. For example, if a preview effect is to be performed on the third of the three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

In addition, although not specifically shown, RAM 203 also has an area (hereinafter referred to as the "pre-determination information storage area") for storing pre-determination information, separate from the configuration shown in Figure 31(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process based on the random numbers described above (see S1007 and S1017 in Figure 10). The content of the pre-determination information is similar to the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol process (see Figure 13). Specifically, the content of the pre-determination information indicates whether a jackpot has been achieved (and whether a small jackpot has been achieved), and if so, the type of jackpot, whether the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is long enough to execute a reach effect, and the details of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is included in a pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, either together with information regarding the reserve corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process was performed (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved information"), or separately from this reserve information at a unique timing.

[Preliminary Determination Processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S1007 and S1017 in FIG. 10) will be described in detail.
In the preliminary determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the example of random number configuration described with reference to Figures 27 to 30.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S1007 and S1017 in FIG. 10) according to this embodiment.
As shown in Figure 33, the game control unit 200 first refers to the game status (S3301), selects a table corresponding to the current game status of the pachinko game machine 100, and performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number (S3302).
Next, the game control unit 200 selects a table according to the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performs a preliminary determination of the reach random number (S3303). Furthermore, it selects a table according to the current game state and performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number (S3304).
Although not shown in the figures, in S3302, S3303 and S3304, a dedicated table is selected depending on whether the pre-determination process is based on a winning entry at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122.

Next, the game control unit 200 selects a pre-determination pattern according to the results of the pre-determinations in S3302, S3303, and S3304 (S3305).
After that, the game control unit 200 stores the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the reach random number, the results of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern, and the preliminary determination pattern obtained as described above in the preliminary determination information storage area as preliminary determination information (S3306).Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the performance control unit 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S3307).

The above-mentioned preliminary determination was made using a random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122, and a determination table having a configuration similar to that of the determination table used in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26). In other words, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1401 in FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine (see S1311 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 13) is called, and the random number determination in the above-mentioned preliminary determination is made.

By adopting this configuration, in this embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random numbers in the pre-determination process. This reduces the number of control instructions and prevents the increase in program size related to the jackpot determination process and pre-determination process. Furthermore, as described above, if the determination table used for the pre-determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

While only the advance judgment (whether or not a jackpot is reached) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described above, in this embodiment, the variation patterns for the variable display and stop display of the special symbol are also predicted (pre-judgment). The variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is selected using the variation pattern selection random number value (see S1006 and S1016 in FIG. 10) obtained in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122, and the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 27 to 32) (see S1312 and FIG. 15 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when predicting the variation pattern, the variation pattern to be selected can be predicted using the variation pattern selection random number value obtained at the time of entry and a predictive table with the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing. In other words, a different predictive table can be used for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In addition, different look-ahead tables can be used depending on whether the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122 is won.

In this case, the subroutine (see S1312 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15) of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 13) can be called and used to predict the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process. Furthermore, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process for the special symbol processing may also be used for the predictive table used to predict the variation pattern selection. This configuration reduces the number of control commands related to predictive prediction of variation pattern selection, and prevents the program size from increasing.

Note that if the preliminary determination process and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes are performed in the same subroutine using the same set of determination tables, the execution times of each process may differ, resulting in different results between the preliminary determination and the jackpot determination process when a special symbol changes. This occurs when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (either the normal game state, the special time-limited game state, or the specific time-limited game state) changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol changes. In this case, different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, so the specific determination tables used for the determination differ between the execution of the preliminary determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the first start slot 121 and the second start slot 122 is used, the preliminary determination and the determination results of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such cases, if the game state changes after the preliminary determination process is performed and before the special symbol variation begins, the effect control unit 300 may perform control such as prohibiting the execution of effects based on the preliminary determination results.

In accordance with the commands output from the game control unit 200 to the presentation control unit 300 as described above, the presentation control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the speaker 156, various lamps, etc. For example, when the presentation control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the presentation control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display a message such as "Please call an attendant," or an image indicating an abnormal condition. The presentation control unit 300 also causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm indicating an abnormal condition, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, etc. The presentation control unit 300 also causes various lamps to light up, for example, in red, to indicate an abnormal condition.

In addition, while it has been described here that the performance control unit 300 notifies that an error has occurred using the image display unit 114, speaker 156, and all of the various lamps, it may also be possible to use only some of these. The notification mode may also be switched depending on the type of error. For example, if a door opening error occurs, the image display unit 114, speaker 156, and all of the various lamps may be used as described above. Furthermore, if a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and speaker 156 notify that an error has occurred. This allows staff at gaming establishments (pachinko parlors) and the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Example of setting a pre-determination pattern]
Next, an example of setting the pre-determination patterns and tables used in the pre-determination process shown in FIG. 33 will be described.
Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the settings of the pre-determination pattern and table used in the pre-determination process shown in Fig. 33. Fig. 34 shows an example of the settings when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first start hole 121 in the normal gaming state.

In the table shown in Figure 34, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.
The game control unit 200 determines the expected fluctuation pattern and the pre-determination pattern based on the pre-determination results of the jackpot random number and jackpot pattern random number, the pre-determination results of the reach random number, and the pre-determination results of the fluctuation pattern random number.

35 shows an example of the setting of the pre-determination pattern and the table used in the pre-determination process. In addition, FIG. 35 shows an example of the setting when the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state.
In the table shown in Figure 35, "judgment result,""pattern,""reach random number,""variation pattern random number,""expected variation pattern," and "pre-judgment pattern" are associated with each other.

[Operation of the production control unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation of the performance control unit 300.
The operation of the performance control unit 300 consists of the main processing shown in Fig. 36(a) and the interrupt processing shown in Fig. 36(b). Referring to Fig. 36(a), the performance control unit 300 first performs initial setting at startup (S3601), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S3602), and then accepts interrupt processing while updating the random numbers used in performance control according to the set cycle (S3603).

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S3602. Referring to FIG. 36(b), in this interrupt processing, the presentation control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S3611). In this command reception processing, the presentation content (presentation pattern) is selected. The presentation control unit 300 also performs specific time-saving related presentation processing to execute presentations related to the specific time-saving game state (S3612). The presentation control unit 300 also performs presentation button processing to accept operation of the presentation button 161 or the like by the player (S3613). Thereafter, the presentation control unit 300 performs command transmission processing to send a command including information on the selected presentation pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S3614). This results in presentations such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, operation of the movable role-player 115, and illumination of various lamps.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S3611 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this command reception process, the performance control unit 300 first determines whether a command has been received (S3701). If no command has been received (NO in S3701), the performance control unit 300 ends the command reception process.

On the other hand, when the performance control unit 300 receives any command (YES in S3701), it determines whether the received command is a preliminary determination result command or a reserved number increase command (S3702). The preliminary determination result command and the reserved number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch processing shown in Figure 10 (S1009, S1010, S1019, S1020) and are commands sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Figure 9.
Then, if the performance control unit 300 determines that the received command is a pre-determination result command and a command to increase the number of reserved items (Yes in S3702), it adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved items stored in RAM 303 (S3703).
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3704). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is neither a pre-determination result command nor a reserved number increase command (No in S3702), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S3705). This fluctuation start command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13 (S1314) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S3705), the performance control unit 300 executes a performance selection process (S3706). Also, when a fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for performance control used in the performance selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S3603 of the main process shown in Figure 36 (a). The performance selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a fluctuation start command (No in S3705), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S3707). This fluctuation stop command is set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in Fig. 13 (S1322) and is a command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S3707), the performance control unit 300 executes a fluctuation performance end process (S3708). In the fluctuation performance end process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets a fluctuation performance end command in RAM 303 to instruct the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a fluctuation stop command (No in S3707), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening operation of the jackpot game (S3709). This opening command is set in the stop processing shown in Fig. 16 (S1612) and is the command sent to the performance control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S3709), the effect control unit 300 executes a big win effect selection process (S3710). The big win effect selection process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not an opening command (No in S3709), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an ending command for starting the ending operation of the jackpot game (S3711). This ending command is set in the jackpot entry processing shown in Fig. 19 (S1913) and is the command sent to the presentation control unit 300 in the output processing (S911) shown in Fig. 9.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S3711), the rendering control unit 300 executes an ending rendering selection process (S3712). The details of the ending rendering selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not an ending command (No in S3711), the performance control unit 300 next determines whether the received command is a customer waiting command (S3713).
If the received command is a customer waiting command (YES in S3713), the performance control unit 300 executes a customer waiting command reception process to transition to a customer waiting state (S3714). The customer waiting command reception process will be described in detail later.

If the received command is not a customer waiting command (NO in S3713), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a power restoration command (S3715).
If the received command is a power restoration command (YES in S3715), the performance control unit 300 performs a power restoration process (S3716). In this power restoration process, the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a complete command has been received. If the performance control unit 300 has not received a complete command, it executes the initial operation of the movable role piece 115, and if it has received a complete command, it does not execute the initial operation of the movable role piece 115.

If the received command is not a power restoration command (NO in S3715), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is an MY value command (S3717).
If the received command is an MY value command (YES in S3717), the performance control unit 300 performs pre-activation notification processing (S3718). The pre-activation notification processing will be described later.

If the received command is not an MY value command (NO at S3717), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a complete standby command (S3719).
If the received command is a complete standby command (YES in S3719), the performance control unit 300 performs a complete standby notification process (S3720). In this complete standby notification process, the performance control unit 300 transmits the complete standby command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. The complete standby notification will be described later.

If the received command is not a complete standby command (NO at S3719), it means that the received command is a complete command. In this case, the performance control unit 300 performs complete operation notification processing (S3721). In this complete operation notification processing, the performance control unit 300 transmits a complete command to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320. Complete operation notifications will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S3704) and the effect selection process (S3706) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S3801). The effect control unit 300 then analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S3802). The effect control unit 300 then selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) to be used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S3803).

Pre-determination effect patterns can include various effect patterns that foretell the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing before the start of fluctuations based on the results of the random number determination made by the special pattern processing. For example, effects such as a hold display effect or a continuous notice effect can be provided as pre-determination effect patterns. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special pattern reserved display 218 and the second special pattern reserved display 219 of the display unit 130 (see Figure 3), and a reserve display indicating the occurrence of a reserved ball and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, by reflecting the pre-determination result in the display mode of the reserve display in this reserve display effect, a pre-determination effect can be provided that suggests to the player the determination result when a random number determination is subsequently made using the special pattern processing for that reserved ball.

Note that while we have explained the case where the hold display effect is used as a pre-determination effect, it is possible to perform a variety of preview effects by reflecting this in the various effect contents that are performed before the start of fluctuations based on the random number determination results from special pattern processing. For example, effects using effect images displayed on the image display unit 114, effects using the illumination of various lamps, effects using the movement of movable props, effects using audio output such as music and sound effects, etc. can be set as pre-determination effect patterns.

In addition, the pre-determination effect may be executed in conjunction with a pattern change for another winning ball that occurs before the pattern change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which a pre-determination has been made. In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls is limited to four per start port (first start port 121 or second start port 122) (see Figure 10). Priority is given to the consumption of reserved balls in second start port 122. In this case, for example, if a pre-determination is made for a reserved ball in second start port 122, pattern changes will occur for up to four winning balls, including the currently changing change (referred to as the change in question), before the pattern change for that reserved ball occurs. In the preview effect for a reserved ball for which a pre-determination has been made, if multiple pattern changes occur before the pattern change for that reserved ball, a preview effect (continuous preview effect) may be executed that spans those multiple pattern changes.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets in RAM 303 a hold number command containing the value of the hold number after the addition and information about the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process (S3804). The hold number command contains information indicating the selected pre-determined effect pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of that pattern. Upon receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected pre-determined effect pattern from CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the pre-determined effect using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S3811). It also subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 (S3812). The effect control unit 300 then selects a fluctuation effect pattern for the pattern fluctuations using images to be displayed on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (such as the type of jackpot, the game status after the jackpot, and fluctuation patterns) obtained from the analysis results of the fluctuation start command (S3813). Note that after a fluctuation effect pattern is selected, the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. In other words, the fluctuation effect pattern may be selected before the value of the reserved number stored in RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the performance control unit 300 sets a variable performance start command in RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected performance (S3814). The variable performance start command includes information indicating the selected variable performance pattern, in order to notify the CPU 311 of that pattern. Upon receiving the variable performance start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like to cause the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data representing the selected variable performance pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and displays the variable performance using the image display unit 114 and speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting the variation presentation pattern for the symbol variation in S3813, the variation presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. The variation presentation pattern determined here determines the variation display of the decorative symbol, background presentation, preview presentation, etc. Note that the variation presentation of the decorative symbol is a presentation display performed on the image display unit 114 in conjunction with the variation presentation of the special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222. In this variation presentation of the decorative symbol, a reach presentation, etc. is executed. Note that, unlike this embodiment, if multiple variation presentation patterns are set for a variation pattern, the variation presentation pattern may be selected by lottery using a presentation random number (one of the random numbers updated in S3603 of Figure 36 (a), the presentation random number value being obtained when the variation start command is received).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win effect selection process (S3710) of FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3901) and selects an effect pattern (jackpot effect pattern) (S3902). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected jackpot effect pattern, sets this data together with a jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, and terminates the jackpot effect selection process (S3903). This determines the effects during the jackpot. Note that the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3902) may be determined based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S3712) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S4001) and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S4002). The effect control unit 300 then reads from ROM 302 the image data and sound data used for the effects of the selected ending effect pattern, and sets these data and an ending effect start command instructing the selected effect in RAM 303, thereby terminating the ending effect selection process (S4003). Note that in selecting the ending effect pattern (S4002), a determination may be made based on a random number value obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command receiving process (S3713) of FIG.
The performance control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for transitioning to a customer waiting state has been received (S4101). If a customer waiting command has been received (Yes in S4101), the performance control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S4102) and turns on a measurement flag in RAM 303 (S4103). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S4101), the performance control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 is on (S4104). If the measurement flag is off (No in S4104), the performance control unit 300 ends the customer waiting command reception process.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S4104 or after being set to ON in S4103), the performance control unit 300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-out period (e.g., 10 seconds) (S4105). If the time has not expired (No in S4105), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time has expired (Yes in S4105), the performance control unit 300 turns OFF the measurement flag stored in RAM 303 (S4106).

Next, the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4107). If it is in the specific time-shortened game state (YES in S4107), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the first variable effect in the special time-shortened game state has not yet started (S4108).
If it is not before the start of the first variable effect (NO in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing the first customer waiting effect in the RAM 303 and ends the customer waiting command reception process (S4109). This causes the machine to be controlled to the customer waiting state.
Furthermore, if the game is not in the specific time-saving game state (NO in S4107) or if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has not yet started (YES in S4108), the effect control unit 300 sets a customer waiting effect command for performing a second customer waiting effect (demo effect) in RAM 303 and terminates the customer waiting command reception process (S4110). This places the game in the customer waiting state. Furthermore, the second customer waiting effect is an effect that is different in type from the first customer waiting effect.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-operation notification process (S3718) of FIG.
First, the performance control unit 300 notifies the MY remaining value (S4201). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 notifies the MY remaining value based on the MY value indicated in the MY value command.
Next, the performance control unit 300 determines whether the pre-alert conditions are met (S4202). In this embodiment, the pre-alert condition is that the MY value has reached a specific value. The specific value is a value lower than the MY upper limit value. Also, in this embodiment, "90000" is set as the specific value. However, the specific value can be any value as long as it is lower than the MY upper limit value. If the pre-alert conditions are not met (NO in S4202), the performance control unit 300 terminates the pre-activation alert process.

On the other hand, if the advance notification conditions are met (YES in S4202), the performance control unit 300 issues an advance notification (S4203). An advance notification is a notification in advance that the complete function will be activated when the complete function activation conditions are met. Advance notifications will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific time-saving related effect processing (S3612) of FIG. 36(b).
The presentation control unit 300 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is the normal gaming state (S4301). If it is the normal gaming state (YES in S4301), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (S4302). If it has been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (YES in S4302), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state processing. Furthermore, if it has not been controlled from the specific time-shortened gaming state to the normal gaming state (NO in S4302), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether a variable presentation is being executed (S4303). If it is not in a variable presentation state (NO in S4303), the presentation control unit 300 terminates the specific time-shortened gaming state processing.

On the other hand, if a variable effect is being performed (YES in S4303), the effect control unit 300 determines whether RAM clearing was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (S4304). If RAM clearing was not performed (NO in S4304), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the number of times the decorative symbols have changed since the most recent return is equal to or greater than the first number (S4305). In this embodiment, the first number is 50 times. However, the first number may be any value. If the number of times of change is less than the first number (NO in S4305), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated. Note that the condition for the effect control unit 300 to determine that the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the first number may be that the first number of changes has ended or that the first number of changes has started.
If the number of changes is equal to or greater than the first number (YES in S4305), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is equal to or greater than the second number (S4306). The second number is a number of changes greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the second number is, for example, 101 times. However, the second number may be any value as long as it is a number of changes greater than the first number. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is equal to or greater than the second number when the second number of changes has ended or when the second number of changes has started.
If the number of changes is less than the second number (NO in S4306), the performance control unit 300 determines whether the number of changes of the decorative pattern after the return is the third number (S4307). In this embodiment, the third number is 100. Note that the performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of changes is the third number as a condition that the third change has ended or that the third change has started.

If the number of times of change is not the third number (NO in S4307), the effect control unit 300 determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether or not to execute a clear negation effect (S4308). The clear negation effect is an effect indicating that RAM clear has not been executed. If it is determined that the clear negation effect will not be executed (NO in S4308), the specific time-saving related effect processing is terminated.
If it is determined that a clear denial effect should be executed (YES in S4308), the effect control unit 300 executes a clear denial effect and an effect informing the player of the number of remaining times (S4309). The effect informing the player of the number of remaining times is an effect informing the player of the number of variable effects required to reach the specific time-saving game state.

Also, if the number of changes is the third number (YES in S4307), the performance control unit 300 determines whether a clear negation effect has been executed (S4310). If a clear negation effect has not been executed (NO in S4310), the performance control unit 300 executes a clear negation effect and a remaining number of times notification effect (S4311).

On the other hand, if a RAM clear was performed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state (YES in S4304), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the most recent reset of the number of fluctuations was a reset based on a jackpot (S2004 in FIG. 20) (S4312). If the reset was not based on a jackpot (NO in S4312), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether the number of fluctuations after the pachinko gaming machine 100 most recently returned from a power-off state was the fourth number or more (S4313). The fourth number is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. In this embodiment, the fourth number is 100. However, the fourth number may be any value as long as it is a number of fluctuations greater than the first number. If the number of fluctuations is less than the fourth number (NO in S4313), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated. The performance control unit 300 may determine that the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the fourth number when the fourth fluctuation has ended or when the fourth fluctuation has started.

If the number of times of change is equal to or greater than the fourth number (YES in S4313) or if the most recent reset was due to a jackpot (YES in S4312), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the remaining number of times notification effect has been executed (S4314).If the remaining number of times notification effect has not been executed (NO in S4314), the effect control unit 300 executes the remaining number of times notification effect (S4315).
Furthermore, if S4306 is YES, if S4310 is YES, after S4309 is executed, after S4311 is executed, if S4314 is YES, or after S4315 is executed, the presentation control unit 300 executes a remaining number update presentation (S4316). The remaining number update presentation is a presentation that notifies the user of the updated number of variable presentations required to enter the specific time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if the game is not in the normal game state (NO in S4301), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the specific time-shortened game state (S4317). If the game is not in the specific time-shortened game state (NO in S4317), the specific time-shortened effect processing is terminated.
If the specific time-saving game state is active (YES in S4317), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not the first variable presentation in the specific time-saving game state has yet to begin (S4318). If the first variable presentation has yet to begin (YES in S4318), the presentation control unit 300 determines whether or not there is a hold (S4319). If there is a hold (NO in S4319), the specific time-saving related presentation processing is terminated.
If there is no reserved ball (YES in S4319), the performance control unit 300 starts a right-hit notification (S4320). More specifically, the performance control unit 300 starts a notification to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111.

On the other hand, if the first variable effect in the specific time-saving game state has already started (NO in S4318), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the right-hit notification has already started (S4321). If the right-hit notification has already started (NO in S4321), the specific time-saving effect processing is terminated.
If the right-hit notification has not yet started (YES in S4321), the effect control unit 300 starts the right-hit notification (S4322). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 executes a specific time-shortening notification effect (S4323). The specific time-shortening notification effect is an effect that notifies the user that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a specific time-shortening game state.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S3613 in FIG. 36(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether the player has operated an operation means such as the effect button 161 during a predetermined acceptance period (the operation valid period described below) (S4401). Here, operation of the operation means includes pressing the effect button 161 so that it moves from its non-operation position (reference position) to a predetermined position, turning it ON, and pressing the center key or surrounding keys of the effect keys 162, turning it ON. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is equipped with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and effect keys 162, such as a touch panel, this also includes detecting the operation of that device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.
If an operating means such as the effect button 161 is not operated (No in S4401), the effect button processing is terminated.

Also, if an operating means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S4401), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command containing information indicating the operation content of the operating means in RAM 303 and terminates effect button processing (S4402).

Then, the performance control unit 300 performs the command sending process (S3614) in Figure 36 (b) and sends the commands set in RAM 303 in the command receiving process and performance button process described above to the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320. Then, based on the received commands, the image/sound control unit 310 and lamp control unit 320 control the image display on the image display unit 114, the sound output, the operation of the movable prop 115, the illumination of various lamps, etc., to execute the set performance.

[Information displayed on the information display in each gaming area]
Next, the display information of the information display device 230 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 45. In the table of display information in Fig. 45, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display device 230 are associated with each other.
In the following, the current play interval may be referred to as the first play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the second play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the third play interval. The previous play interval may be referred to as the fourth play interval.

Here, the first game zone shown in Figure 45 begins when the power is turned on for the first time. The total number of outs set to 60,000 is a value that can roughly guarantee one day's operation of a pachinko machine that shoots 100 shots per minute. The normal base value is always displayed in two digits in the numeric segment. Furthermore, if the number of outs during normal play is "0" or if the normal base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numeric segment.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one section before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two sections before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three sections before.

The numerical information displayed in the numeric segments of the information display 230 includes "--", which indicates that no normal base value has been calculated; "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the number of normal outs is "0"; "01" to "99", which indicate that the number of normal outs is "1" or greater and the normal base value is "1" to "99"; and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or greater. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and the display will be in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segments does not change (it is displayed as a lit indicator) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segments changes (it is displayed as a flashing indicator or a lit indicator) depending on the play area, the number of outs during normal play, etc. (whether or not a calculated normal base value has been calculated, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is reliable).

Specifically, in the first through fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a flashing manner. Furthermore, in play zones from the second play zone onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period is one in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a flashing manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit state.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 230, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 230 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the numeric segment displays performance information that does not use the decimal points DP of the 7-segment display, such as "00" to "99."; on the other hand, when the normal base value is "100" or more, the numeric segment displays performance information that uses the decimal points DP of the 7-segment display, such as "99.", making it easier to recognize that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g., "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two 7-segment displays as numeric segments to provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "--" will be displayed in the numeric segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the gaming section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the counting process, base value determination process, and performance information setting process as information programs, one or two of them may be executed as game programs (for example, the counting process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest are executed as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 230 may be executed by the performance program rather than by the output control process, which is a gaming program.

In addition, rather than using the out ball detection switch 227 to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the normal prize entry port 127, first start port 121, second start port 122, and large prize entry port 125, and game balls that have flowed into the discharge port 117, the out ball detection switch 227 may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, normal prize entry port switch 217, first start port switch 211, second start port switch 212, or large prize entry port switch 215.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
The main processing of the image/audio control unit 310 will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image/audio control unit 310. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from a power supply board (not shown), is input to the CPU 311.

First, in step T1, CPU 311 disables all interrupts, and then in step T2, performs initial setting processing. Specifically, the CPU performs initial setting of the internal registers and other settings, grants access to RAM 313, initializes all RAM areas of RAM 313 (clears them to 0), and starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and then in step T3, all interrupts are enabled.

In step T4, the CPU 311 performs adjustment mode switching processing. Specifically, by referencing an input signal from a selector switch (not shown) operable by an arcade staff member, the CPU 311 performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sounds output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114, as well as to switch the adjustment mode related to volume and light intensity adjustment (whether volume can be adjusted, whether light intensity can be adjusted, the initial volume value (any value between 0 and 5), the initial light intensity value (any value between 0 and 5), the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the light intensity value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

Here, a changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board serving as the main board, and switches between adjustment modes related to the volume of the effect sounds output from the speaker 156, the light intensity of the display devices (image display unit 114, sub-display unit (a display device that displays images related to the effects separately from the image display unit 114)), and various lighting devices (various lamps).
In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the selector switch (not shown) can be done at any time as long as the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on (after the image/sound control unit 310 has been started).

In step T5, the CPU 311 performs a volume adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switches that detect the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the CPU 311 performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the CPU 311 performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 based on the detection signals (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the detection switches that detect the operation of the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume and light intensity values using the effect key 162 is restricted (limited) when the variable effect starts and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops). Furthermore, the settings (adjustments) of the volume and light intensity values using the effect key 162 are restricted (limited) from when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on until game progress control begins (specifically, from when a timer interrupt is initiated on the game control board during setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, or the initial operation of various drive sources), and also during the notification (output of alarm sounds) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities.

In addition, while the abnormality alarm sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) being output from the speaker 156 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality alarm sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the CPU 311 performs eco mode control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to control the start and end of eco mode, which reduces the amount of light from the backlight of the image display unit 114 to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 300. If it has not received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T11. If it has received a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command, it proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the CPU 311 performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, it determines an animation pattern from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T10, the CPU 311 performs sound pattern setting processing. Specifically, it determines a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not a complete command has been received from the performance control unit 300. If a complete command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T13, and if a complete command has been received, the process proceeds to step T12.
In step T12, the CPU 311 performs an activation process, instructing the VDP 314 to draw image data and output sound to notify the user that the complete function has been activated.

In step T13, the CPU 311 determines whether a frame switch flag is set in the RAM 313, indicating that it is time to update the frame image displayed on the image display unit 114. If the frame switch flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12; if the frame switch flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switch flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed each time the image/sound control unit 310 receives a V blank signal sent from the VDP 314 every 1/30 seconds (the time it is expected that one frame's worth of effect image will be drawn and displayed). Therefore, steps T14 to T17, described below, are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T14, the CPU 311 clears the frame switch flag set in RAM 313, and in step T15 performs scene update processing. Specifically, the CPU 311 references the scene switch counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter, which are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10 above.

In step T16, the CPU 311 performs drawing control processing. Specifically, it generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) for one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, in accordance with the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, and outputs this display list to the VDP 314, while also performing processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws display images based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also displays the images (effect images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. In other words, the frame update timing becomes the start and end timing of the various effects (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable effects, jackpot preview effects, and pre-reading effects) performed by the image display unit 114. Note that effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 300 and lamp control unit 320 (effect operation of the movable role object 115) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T17, the CPU 311 performs audio control processing. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs this audio control command to the image/audio control unit 310.

As a result, the image/audio control unit 310 performs processing to output various sound effects and notification sounds from the speaker 156 based on the voice control commands. When this processing is completed, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable effect begins and ends (when the decorative pattern 41 stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by gaming facility staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it less likely that the player will miss important points such as the start and end of the variable effect, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, during the notification (output of alarm sound) of an important (high security level) abnormality (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a tray full error or payout abnormality, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using a selector switch (not shown) that can be operated by gaming facility staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of volume and light intensity adjustment for the gaming facility while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing that an abnormality has occurred when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality alert sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) being output from speaker 156 is reduced from its previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality alert sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This prevents the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality alert sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the effect keys 162 that can be operated by the player, or the adjustment range for the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of lamp control unit)
The initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 320 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a complete command has been received from the performance control unit 300. If a complete command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103; if a complete command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102.

The CPU 321 performs an activation process in step R102. In this activation process, if the movable role piece 115 is in operation, the CPU 321 stops the operation of the movable role piece 115 that is currently being performed, and sets the drive data of the movable role piece 115 for use when the complete function is activated. This stops the normal operation of the movable role piece 115, and performs a process to return the movable role piece 115 to its initial position (see FIG. 1).
In this way, when the complete function is activated, the lamp control unit 320 executes the operation of the movable prop 115 in response to the complete command sent from the performance control unit 300 .

In step R103, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the game control unit 200. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R104; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R105.

In step R104, the CPU 321 sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each step of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return processing for the reels (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), and effect button 161).

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107, assuming that the origin return processing of the reel will not be executed. If the initial processing number is "1", the CPU 321 executes the origin return processing in step R106, terminating the current reel initial processing. Specifically, the CPU 321 executes the return operation of the reel (movable reel 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, and performs processing such as setting the initial processing number to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

In step R107, the CPU 321 determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the reel is not executed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed in step R108 and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 321 performs processing such as initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the reel is operating normally, and sets the initial processing number to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initializing process shown in Figure 47, the origin return process for returning various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation process for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of various reels are not executed simultaneously. As a result, the return operations of various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of various reels are not mixed together, making it possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

Furthermore, according to the reel initializing process shown in Figure 47, a return-to-origin process is executed before the initial operation process. This causes the various reels to perform their initial operation from their origin positions, making it easier to determine whether there are any abnormalities in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process for lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a flowchart showing the origin return process of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)), is "0." If the board role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0," the CPU 321 sets the movable role 115 (movable performance device) as the drive target to be returned to the origin in step R105-2, and proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 sets the sub-display device (not shown) as the drive target to be returned to its origin in step R105-4, and then proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether the target device is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects whether each device is in the origin position. If the target device is not in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-6. If the target device is in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the CPU 321 drives the drive motor to move the target board device so that the target board device returns to its origin position, and in step R105-7, it increments by +1 the board device abnormality determination timer, which determines whether a return abnormality has occurred, in which the board device does not return to its origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated board/role device abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board/role device abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the board/role device being driven, and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board/role device abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets in RAM 323 recovery abnormality information (movable effect device recovery abnormality information, sub-display device recovery abnormality information) indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the target board device, and in step R105-10, clears the board device abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0," it updates the board role processing number to "1" to drive the sub-image display unit (not shown), and if the board role processing number is "1," it updates the board role processing number to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the origin return status of the frame role (effect button 161), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," processing proceeds to step R105-13; if the board role processing number is not "0," processing proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the CPU 321 determines whether the effect button 161 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 161 is in the origin position. If the effect button 161 is not in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-14. If the effect button 161 is in the origin position, it proceeds to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the CPU 321 drives the effect button drive motor to move the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, it increments by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine whether a return abnormality has occurred, in which the effect button 161 does not return to its original position within a specified time.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether the updated frame reel abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame reel abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame reel abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, the current return-to-origin process is terminated.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets in the RAM 323 recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame reel processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number to "1" to terminate the process of returning the frame reel (effect button 161) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role object processing number and the frame role object processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role object processing number is "2" and the frame role object processing number is "1." If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21; if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the initial processing number described above to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return-to-origin processing.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in Figure 48, if the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), whose performance positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on, are not in the origin position (standby position), they are not returned to the origin position (standby position) simultaneously (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable role 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)). This makes it easier to check whether various board roles have returned to their origin positions. Furthermore, if the movable role 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two roles from applying stress to each other, preventing the inconvenience of both roles being damaged at the same time.

Furthermore, according to the origin return process shown in Figure 48, the return operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin position and the return operation of the frame role device (performance button 161) to its origin position can be performed simultaneously (at the same time). This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the return operations of the various role devices, and to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various role devices that will be executed next.

In addition, the origin return process shown in Figure 48 sets an upper limit on the time it takes for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return operations of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return operation even during a variable performance, preventing the performance from taking place, and prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the origin return processing shown in Figure 48, when both the return operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to its origin position and the return operation of the frame role device (performance button 161) to its origin position are completed, processing is performed to transition to the initial operation processing. As a result, the return operation of various role devices to their origin positions and the initial operation of various role devices are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of various role devices separately.

The movable reel 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) are designed to return to their original positions in a predetermined order (movable reel 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)), but they may also be designed to start returning to their original positions at the same time. This reduces the time required for the return operation of the movable reel 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown), allowing for a smooth transition to the initial operation of the next reel to be executed.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the board feature, is "0." If the board feature processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-2; if the board feature processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not abnormal return information for the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) has been set in RAM 323. If abnormal return information has not been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-4, assuming that the board role will perform its initial operation and initial light emission. If abnormal return information has been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-3, setting the board role processing number to "2" to indicate that the board role will not perform its initial operation, and proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see Figure 50 (a)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in RAM 323. Specifically, it references the board role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (a) and determines one initial operation pattern from multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number by 1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the board feature processing number to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the board role according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in RAM 323 in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all stages of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1," the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame reel processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame reel (effect button 161), is "0." If the frame reel processing number is "0," processing proceeds to step R107-12; if the frame reel processing number is not "0," processing proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not abnormal return information for the effect button 161 has been set in the RAM 323. If abnormal return information has not been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-14, assuming that the initial operation of the frame reel will be performed. If abnormal return information has been set, the CPU 321 proceeds to step R107-13, setting the frame reel processing number to "2" to indicate that the initial operation of the frame reel will not be performed, and proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a framed device initial operation pattern determination table (see Figure 50 (b)) for determining the initial operation pattern of the framed device. Details of the framed device initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (effect button 161) and sets it in RAM 323. Specifically, it references the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame reel processing number is "0," the CPU 321 increments the frame reel processing number to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame reel.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether the frame reel processing number is "1." If the frame reel processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame reel processing number is "1," the CPU 321 executes the initial operation of the frame reel in accordance with the initial operation pattern of the frame reel set in RAM 323 in step R107-18.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have not been completed, processing proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role object have been completed, in step R107-20, the frame role object processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "1," the frame role object processing number is updated to "2" to end the processing for initializing the frame role object.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether the board role processing number and frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22; if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the CPU 321 clears the board role processing number and frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, ending this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, the initial operation of the board role device (movable role device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role device (effect button 161) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of various roles, and to prevent the effect operation of various roles from being hindered during play.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, if there is a recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) that make up the board role, the initial operation of the movable role 115 and sub-image display unit (not shown) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board role from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing a board role that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 161 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the effect button 161 will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage to the effect button 161 by forcibly initializing the effect button 161 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, even if the initial operation of the board device where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame device where a return abnormality has not occurred will be executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame device where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board device where a return abnormality has not occurred will be executed. This makes it possible to check whether there are any abnormalities in the operation of the device where a return abnormality has not occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial operation processing shown in Figure 49, the initial operation processing ends when both the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) have been completed. This eliminates the occurrence of a situation where it is unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is occurring, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation while the other is performing an effect operation.

(Table for determining initial operation patterns of board roles)
Figure 50(a) is a diagram showing a board role initial operation pattern determination table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

The board role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command issued when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of abnormal recovery information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and also lists the operating mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps in the initial operation for reference.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received; patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command indicating that the machine is waiting for customers is received; and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed or a third power restoration command indicating that a jackpot is being played is received.

"Small descent of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 moving (descending) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly lower than the standby position, "large descent of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 moving (descending) from the standby position to a performance position lower than the intermediate position, and "return to origin of the movable performance device" refers to the action of the movable performance device 115 returning to the standby position.

"Sub-display device movement" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) rising from the standby position to the performance position, and "sub-display device return to origin" refers to the operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) returning to the standby position.

"Moveable performance device LEDs" refers to the multiple LEDs provided on the movable prop 115, and "sub-display device LEDs" refers to the multiple LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-image display unit (not shown).

Note that the lighting color of the movable effect device LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the movable effect device LED will flash red to indicate an abnormality when the left movable role piece 1151 returns to its normal state.

Furthermore, the lighting color of the sub-display LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the sub-display LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the sub-image display unit (not shown) recovers abnormally.

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (a) is that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same when the power is turned on, which involves initialization of RAM 203, and when the power is restored without initializing RAM 203. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

Note that the same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the movable role device 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable role device 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. In this way, it becomes easy to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

Furthermore, if the operating mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable role 115 and/or sub-image display unit (not shown) is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it becomes easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A second feature of the board/game device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board/game device (movable device 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or when the power is restored (the game control state is restored).

A third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that while the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that while the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED is different. Conversely, the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be the same.

In addition, the initial light emission pattern of the movable effect device LED and the initial light emission pattern of the sub-display device LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

A fifth feature of the board and role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that the initial light emission pattern during the initial operation of the board and role (movable role 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs when power is restored to restore the waiting state and when power is restored while special symbols are changing or during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being restored to restore the waiting state and when power is restored while special symbols are changing or during a jackpot game.

When power is restored during the display of changing special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are set to turn off, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED may also be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when power is restored to return to the waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50(a) is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 but no recovery abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is not performed and the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is performed; and if there is no recovery abnormality in the movable role 115 but there is a recovery abnormality in the sub-image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable role 115 is performed but the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform appropriate initial operations depending on whether or not there is a recovery abnormality.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (effect button 161).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps in the initial operation are also listed.

"Effect button big rise" is the action of the effect button 161 rising from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and "effect button return to origin" is the action of the effect button 161 returning to the standby position.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) is different when the power is turned on, which involves initialization of RAM 203, and when the power is restored, which does not involve initialization of RAM 203. This makes it easy to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

A second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is set to perform an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the effect button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. This makes it possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

A third feature of the framed device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the framed device (effect button 161) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or when the power is restored (the game control state is restored).

A fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 161) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot is played. This makes it possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The effect button LED is set to turn off when power is restored during the display of special symbols or when a jackpot is played, but the effect button LED may be set to light up in the same illumination pattern as when power is restored to return to the waiting state.

A fifth feature of the frame role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is different from the number of luminous colors in the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the effect button 161 when it is initially illuminated upon power-on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the effect button 161 when it is initially illuminated upon power-on, but this may be reversed.

A sixth feature of the frame role device initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the color of light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on initially includes a color that is not included in the color of light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to determine whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the initial light emitted by the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

A seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the time for which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or restored is different from the time for which the effect button 161 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 161.

An eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 50 (b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed in overlap with the initial operation of the effect button 161, which does detect whether it is at the origin position. This means that the operation of the effect button 161 and the button vibration motor can be checked simultaneously, shortening the time required for operation checks.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on and RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting change mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources begin operating as their initial operation (drive sources = ON). A setting change notification is also initiated to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (the setting change screen is displayed, and the setting change voice "Settings are being changed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoids" are alternately output). The current setting value (here, "6") is also displayed on the seven-segment display 230d on the far right of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the operating time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed at timing T10 before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at timing T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), ending the initial operation of the various drive sources, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 will also cease. The game control unit 200 will then transition from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during RAM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 will show a status confirmation message indicating that RAM clear preparation is in progress, and the various drive sources will start operating as their initial operation (drive sources = ON). Also, a RAM clear preparation notification will start (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating audio notification of "Press RAM clear again" and audio confirmation of initial operation of "Check the operation of the solenoid") to indicate that RAM clear preparation is in progress and to prompt confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T2, when the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the various drive sources started operating, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If, at time T10, the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and RAM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the game control unit 200 will transition from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. Note that the initial operation of the movable reels 115 ends after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation message indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources begin operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. A setting confirmation notification is also initiated to indicate that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (the setting confirmation screen is displayed, and the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoids" are alternately output). The current setting value (here, "6") is also displayed on the seven-segment display 230d on the far right of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the various drive sources started operating, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and from then on, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from timing T3 to timing T10.

If, at time T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 also ends. The game control unit 200 then transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power restoration notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. Note that the initial operation of the movable reels 115 ends after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T11, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base values) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initially operated. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls game progress when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at an amusement parlor.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (during the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a hidden (inactive) state. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (a RAM clear preparation notification that RAM clear is being prepared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification that settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources).This notifies the worker (factory worker, game parlor staff) who is checking the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, allowing them to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated in the setting change modes (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode). This eliminates the need to create multiple pre-start states before game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce development costs (such as shortening development time) for the pachinko gaming machine 100.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a setting value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped even before their operation time has elapsed. This prevents the initial operation of the various drive sources from being set to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing this with the operation of the various drive sources as the game progresses.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state when game progress control is performed, an initial operation of the movable device 115 that does not affect the game outcome is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operation can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED remains off. This avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the special prize opening door 125D are initially operating, an open signal is not output even though the special prize opening 125 is open. This prevents unnecessary processing burdens from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base values) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of performance information is restricted) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until game progress control begins, which makes it possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the gaming control unit 200.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine's performance information (normal base values) is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after game progress control has begun, making it possible to confirm whether game progress control has begun and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, thereby allowing the current setting value to be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming facility.

In this embodiment, the setting change notification, RAM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification do not display text such as "Drive source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources, but such text may also be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after game progress control has begun, all seven-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are fully lit to confirm that they are lit, but lighting confirmation may not be performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Drive Sources)
A modified example of initializing the various drive sources will be described below with reference to the drawings. This modified example differs from the above embodiment in that drive source operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, or setting confirmation mode has ended.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned ON and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 229 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON), the game control unit 200 enters setting change mode and returns to the pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that a setting change is in progress, and the setting change notification described above begins. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation is performed (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF), the setting change mode and setting change notification end, the initial operation of the various drive sources begins, and the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification is initiated (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids") to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RAM)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after clearing the RAM in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after clearing the RAM in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters RAM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the RAM clear preparation notification described above begins.

At timing T2, when the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned ON) is performed, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources begins. At this time, an initial operation notification is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message saying, "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example of initializing the various drive sources after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at timing T0, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a predetermined area (second start opening 122, large prize opening 125) (ball entry difficulty), are stopped.

In addition, the large prize opening LED, which causes the large prize opening 125 to illuminate in a predetermined manner during a round of play, is turned off, and the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display 226), image display unit 114, and information display 230 are not displayed (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is turned on) is performed, the game control unit 200 enters setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before game progress control begins. At this time, the status confirmation display 226 displays a status confirmation display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress, and the setting confirmation notification described above begins. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At timing T2, when the confirmation end operation is performed (setting key switch 229 is turned OFF), the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, the initial operation of the various drive sources begins, and the setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and an initial operation notification is initiated (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice message "Please check the operation of the solenoids") to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At timing T3, after the activation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the initial operation notification began, the various drive sources begin their first activation (drive sources = ON), and at timing T4, after the activation time (0.512 seconds in this case) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the activation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the various drive sources start operating for the second time, and at timing T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed for the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources begins, and at timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the game control unit 200 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the display 130, and the power-on notification described above begins. Furthermore, the recovery and initial operations of the various reels controlled by the performance control unit 300 (movable reels 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), performance button 161) begin, and all 7-segment displays 230a-230d on the information display 230 light up to begin confirmation that they are illuminated. The initial operations of the various reels end after confirmation that the information display 230 is illuminated has finished.

At timing T10, once the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the information display 230 began to light up, all 7-segment displays 230a-230d will stop lighting up and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value for the current play section) will begin. After that, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) for the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections will be displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources (electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, large prize opening door opening/closing unit 216) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (electric tulip 123, large prize opening door 125D) are initially operated. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls game progress when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at an amusement parlor.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (during the pre-start state), the displays 130 (first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol reserved display 218, second special symbol reserved display 219, normal symbol reserved display 220, number of rounds display 225, and status display 224) except for the status confirmation display 226 are in a hidden (inactive) state. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, gaming parlor staff) who checks the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before game progress control has begun, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) has ended. This eliminates the need to perform complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation), and allows for proper operation checks.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, once the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) has ended, an operation standby time has elapsed before the operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins. This allows ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game occurs after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the large prize opening door 125D are initially operating, the large prize opening LED remains off. This avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the large prize opening door 125D, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before game progress control is performed, various drive sources are initialized to operate movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state when game progress control is performed, an initial operation of the movable device 115 that does not affect the outcome of the game is performed. Therefore, the two types of initial operation can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the special prize opening door 125D are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the special prize opening 125 is open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the game control unit 200, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 (the display of performance information is restricted) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until game progress control begins, which makes it possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the gaming control unit 200.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after game progress control has begun, making it possible to confirm whether game progress control has begun and to inform the player that the performance information is related to the game.

Furthermore, according to this modified example, during setting change mode, RAM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d that displays the current setting value, thereby allowing the current setting value to be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming facility.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 230 does not display setting values or gaming machine performance information during the initial operation of the various drive sources, allowing gaming facility employees to focus their attention on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources and accurately determine whether any of the drive sources are malfunctioning.

[Pre-determined effect pattern table]
57 and 58 are diagrams showing examples of pre-determination effect patterns and table settings used in the pre-determination effect pattern selection (S3803) in the pre-determination effect selection process of FIG. 38(a). Note that FIG. 57 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the normal gaming state. Also, FIG. 58 shows a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state.

The pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 57, which is used when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 121 in normal gaming mode, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JA1" to "JA9," "JB1" to "JB6," and "JR1" to "JR13" set using Figure 34 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AA1" to "AA9," "AB1" to "AB6," and "AR1" to "AR13."

Furthermore, the pre-determination effect pattern table shown in Figure 58, which is used when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, has multiple pre-determination effect patterns set. The pre-determination patterns "JF1" to "JF8," "JG1" to "JG3," and "JH1" to "JH9" set using Figure 35 above are associated one-to-one with the pre-determination effect patterns "AF1" to "AF8," "AG1" to "AG3," and "AH1" to "AH9."

Here, the pre-determination effect is an effect that is performed based on the pre-determination process.
In addition, the pre-determined effect patterns shown in the figures include "reserved image,""displaycolor,""chanceeye,""zone,""gimmick,""buttonvibration," and "symbol action." Note that "-" in each column of the table shown in the figures indicates that the corresponding effect will not be executed.

Here, the "reserved image" is an image indicating that the right to judge a big win is reserved. The reserved image will be described in detail later.
"Display color" refers to the display color of the reserved image. In this embodiment, the display color of the reserved image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In this embodiment, one of "blue,""green,""red," and "rainbow" is selected as the display color. For example, the display colors of the reserved images may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored reserved image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored reserved image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Chance Eye" indicates the type of chance eye effect. The chance eye effect is an effect that displays a chance eye based on the result of a preliminary determination process. The chance eye is three decorative symbols that are a combination of symbols of the same predetermined color and that include different numbers. The chance eye effect, for example, notifies or suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that follows the special symbol variation that initiated the chance eye effect. Furthermore, the chance eye effect may be performed multiple times in multiple variation effects. In the illustrated example, one of "RO1" to "RO3" is executed as the type of chance eye effect. Furthermore, the higher the number in the order of "RO1" to "RO3," the higher the expectation level.
The chance eye may be any three specific decorative patterns 41 that notify or suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that started the chance eye performance, and the three decorative patterns 41 do not have to be the same color.

"Zone" refers to a zone effect. A zone effect is, for example, an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes. A zone effect that is performed based on a pre-determination result may be an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes that initiated the zone effect, or an effect that creates the expectation that a jackpot will occur when a special symbol changes after the special symbol change that initiated the zone effect.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem effect. A gem effect is an effect in which the movable gem 115 operates. The gem effect performed based on the results of a preliminary determination may be an effect that raises the expectation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that initiated the gem effect, or an effect that raises the expectation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation that follows the special symbol variation that initiated the gem effect. In the example shown, one of "CH1", "CH2", and "CH5" is executed as the type of gem effect. Furthermore, the higher the number, the higher the expectation, in the order of "CH1", "CH2", and "CH5".

"Button vibration" refers to a vibration effect. A vibration effect is an effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates. The vibration effect, which is performed based on the results of a preliminary determination, is an effect that raises the expectation of a jackpot in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation that initiated the vibration effect.

"Symbol action" indicates the type of symbol action effect. Symbol action effect refers to an effect in which a decorative symbol moves. Symbol action effect performed based on the results of a preliminary determination is an effect that raises the expectation of a jackpot in the special symbol movement that follows the special symbol movement that initiated the symbol action effect. In the example shown, one of "DE1" to "DE3" is executed as the symbol action effect for each type of decorative symbol movement. Furthermore, the higher the number, "DE1" to "DE3," the higher the expectation.

The performance control unit 300 determines a pre-determination performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 57 and 58. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a pre-determination performance pattern corresponding to the pre-determination pattern set in the pre-determination process (see Figure 33) based on the tables shown in Figures 57 and 58.
57, for example, if the "judgment result" is "miss" and the pre-determination pattern is "JR6,""AR6" is selected as the pre-determination effect pattern. In this pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image," a "display color," a "chance number," a "zone," a "gimmick," and a "symbol action" are set. That is, in the pre-determination effect pattern "AR6," a "reserved image" is displayed, the "display color" becomes "blue,""RO1" is executed as the "chance number," a zone effect is executed, "CH1" is executed as the "gimmick," and "DE2" is executed as the "symbol action."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is no pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. In other words, in this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state, no pre-determination effect is performed. However, there may be a pre-determination effect pattern table that is used when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state. The effect control unit 300 may then use this pre-determination effect pattern table to perform a pre-determination effect when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 121 in the special time-saving gaming state.

[Variable performance pattern table]
59 to 62 are diagrams showing examples of variable presentation patterns and table settings used in variable presentation pattern selection (S3813) in the presentation selection process of FIG. 38(b). Note that FIG. 59 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the first starting gate 121 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 60 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second starting gate 122 in the normal game state. Also, FIG. 61 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the second starting gate 122 in the special time-saving game state. Also, FIG. 62 shows a variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on a win at the first starting gate 121 in the special time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 59, the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a win at the first starting slot 121 during normal game play has multiple variable effect patterns set. The variable effect patterns "PA1" to "PA9," "PB1" to "PB6," and "PR1" to "PR13" set using Figure 27 above are associated one-to-one with the variable effect patterns "EA1" to "EA9," "EB1" to "EB6," and "ER1" to "ER13."

60, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table used when a variable effect is performed based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 122 in the normal gaming state. Variable effect patterns "EC1", "EC2", "ED1" to "ED3", and "EE1" correspond one-to-one to the variable effect patterns "PC1", "PC2", "PD1" to "PD3", and "PE1" set using the above-mentioned FIG.
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation is performed based on winning at the second starting hole 122 in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in Fig. 61. Variable presentation patterns "PF1" to "PF8,""PG1" to "PG3," and "PH1" to "PH9" set using Fig. 29 above are associated one-to-one with variable presentation patterns "EF1" to "EF8,""EG1" to "EG3," and "EH1" to "EH9."
In addition, a plurality of variable presentation patterns are set in the variable presentation pattern table used when a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving gaming state shown in Fig. 62. Variable presentation patterns "EI1" to "EI3" and "EJ1" are associated one-to-one with the variable presentation patterns "PI1" to "PI3" and "PJ1" set using Fig. 30 above.

The number of variable presentation patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in Figures 59 to 62.
For example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot. Also, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be fewer than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.
In this case, if a game ball enters the first start port 121 in the normal game state or if a game ball enters the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state, the interest in the game can be increased by various presentations even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery based on a win in the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the number of variable presentation patterns is small, making it difficult to increase the interest in the game. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should enter the first start port 121 in the normal game state and that the game ball should enter the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, for example, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state is a jackpot.Furthermore, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be greater than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot. In this case, the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a miss may be fewer than the number of variable presentation patterns used when the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot.

Here, the variable effect is an effect that notifies the result of the special pattern lottery (i.e., whether or not a jackpot has been won) in a dramatic manner by displaying a variable effect pattern and then displaying it in a stationary state.
In addition, the variable presentation patterns shown in the figure include the following settings: "final display color,""pseudoexcitement,""pseudo consecutive number of times,""reachexcitement,""normal,""SPreach,""SPSPreach,""zoneexcitement,""zone,""step,""developmentexcitement,""development,""gimmick,""button,""buttonvibration,""promotionexcitement,""promotion," and "revival." Note that a "-" in each column of the table shown indicates that the corresponding presentation will not be executed.

Here, "final display color" refers to the final display color of the variable image (described below). In this embodiment, the display color of the variable image is changed to notify or suggest to the player the likelihood of winning the jackpot. In the example shown, one of "blue," "green," "red," or "rainbow" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display colors of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, with the later colors in the order indicating a higher likelihood of winning. Furthermore, a variable effect in which a rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In other words, a rainbow-colored variable image may have a 100% likelihood of winning.

"Pseudo-stimulation" refers to a pseudo-sequential stimulation effect. A pseudo-sequential stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates the execution of a pseudo-sequential effect (pseudo-sequential effect). A pseudo-sequential effect is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple decorative pattern changes are being displayed during the display of one change of a special pattern (one change effect). In a pseudo-sequential effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before entering a reach state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then resumes the display of the decorative pattern changes. In other words, in a pseudo-sequential effect, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and changes again a set number of times, and then stops to complete the display of one change of the special pattern. Here, a temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality, the pattern is slightly fluctuating. In other words, a temporary stop of the pattern is treated as a continuous change in terms of game control. Here, the term "stop" includes not only a fixed stop but also a provisional stop. The fixed stop of the symbol refers to a state in which the special symbol stops as a fixed symbol in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol.
In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again after the reach state is reached. Furthermore, in the pseudo consecutive performance, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display), the performance control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbols again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" refers to the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are performed. In the example shown, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" is set to "-", "1", "2", or "3", i.e., between 0 and 3 times. The pseudo consecutive number of times is also set in relation to the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot, which is the degree to which one can expect to win. In other words, the higher the pseudo consecutive number of times, the higher the expectation.

"Reach stimulation" indicates the type of reach stimulation effect. A reach stimulation effect is an effect that stimulates whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In other words, a reach stimulation effect is an effect that raises expectations that a reach effect will be executed. In the example shown, either "RE1" or "RE2" is executed as the type of reach stimulation effect. Furthermore, in the order of "RE1" and "RE2", the larger the number, the higher the expectation that a reach effect will be executed (if the reach stimulation effect is successful).
"Normal" indicates a normal reach effect.
"SP Reach" indicates an SP Reach performance.
"SPSP Reach" indicates the SPSP Reach performance.

"Zone hype" refers to a zone hype effect. The zone hype effect is an effect that hypes up the execution of a zone effect.
"Zone" indicates a zone effect.
"Step" indicates the number of stages executed in the step performance. A step performance is a performance (stage performance) that can be developed in stages up to a predetermined number. In the illustrated example, any of "1,""2," and "3" step performances are executed. "1" in the step performance means that only the first stage is executed as a step performance. "2" in the step performance means that the first and second stages are executed as a step performance. "3" in the step performance means that the first, second, and third stages are executed as a step performance.

"Development provocation" refers to a development provocation effect. The development provocation effect is an effect that encourages the execution of a development effect. The development effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game will develop to an SPSP reach.
"Development" indicates developmental performance.

"Gem" indicates the type of gem effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of the "gem" indicates the type of gem effect that occurs before the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of the "gem" indicates the type of gem effect that occurs after the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the variable effect and before the start of the deciding effect. The deciding effect is an effect that suggests or notifies whether a jackpot game will be played (whether the variable effect being played is a jackpot variable effect or a losing variable effect). The deciding effect can also be considered as a win/lose effect that suggests or notifies the possibility of a jackpot game being played. The deciding effect (win/lose effect) can also be considered as an effect that creates anticipation for a jackpot game being played. In the illustrated example, one of "CH2" to "CH7" is executed as the type of gem effect. Furthermore, the higher the number in the order of "CH2" to "CH7," the higher the expectation. In this embodiment, the expected rate for the "CH2" role effect is 10%, the expected rate for the "CH3" role effect is 15%, the expected rate for the "CH4" role effect is 35%, and the expected rate for the "CH7" role effect is 50%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expected rate for the role effect "before the temporary stop" (the average value of the expected rate for the role effect before the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which the role effect is performed before the temporary stop) is 11%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expected rate for the role effect "after the temporary stop" (the average value of the expected rate for the role effect after the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which the role effect is performed after the temporary stop) is 35%.

"Button" indicates the type of button operation effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" of "button" indicates the type of button operation effect performed before the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" of "button" indicates the type of button operation effect performed after the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the variable effect and before the start of the final effect. A button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. The button operation effect may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination process. The button operation effect executed based on the results of a pre-determination process may be an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation that initiated the button operation effect, or an effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the button operation effect. In the illustrated example, one of "BU1" to "BU8" is executed as the type of button operation effect. Furthermore, the higher the number, the higher the expectation level, in the order of "BU1" to "BU8." In this embodiment, the button operation effect of "BU1" has an expected degree of 0%, the button operation effect of "BU2" has an expected degree of 3%, the button operation effect of "BU3" has an expected degree of 5%, the button operation effect of "BU4" has an expected degree of 20%, and the button operation effect of "BU5" has an expected degree of 65%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expected degree of the button operation effect "before the temporary stop" (the average value of the expected degree of the button operation effect before the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which a button operation effect is performed before the temporary stop) is 3%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expected degree of the button operation effect "after the temporary stop" (the average value of the expected degree of the button operation effect after the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which a button operation effect is performed after the temporary stop) is 25%.

"Button vibration" refers to the type of vibration effect. More specifically, "before temporary stop" in "button vibration" refers to the type of vibration effect that occurs before the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect, and "after temporary stop" in "button vibration" refers to the type of vibration effect that occurs after the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the variable effect. Furthermore, a vibration effect is an effect that vibrates the effect button 161. The vibration effect may be executed based on the results of a preliminary determination process. A button vibration effect executed based on the results of a preliminary determination is an effect that encourages anticipation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation following the special symbol variation that initiated the vibration effect. In other words, the vibration effect may be an effect that suggests or notifies the player of the likelihood of a jackpot in one or more side Otsu effects. In the illustrated example, one of "V1" to "V7" is executed as the type of vibration effect. Furthermore, the higher the number in the order of "V1" to "V7," the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, the expectation rate for the "V1" vibration effect is 60%, and the expectation rate for the "V4" vibration effect is 100%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expectation rate for the vibration effect "before the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation rate for the vibration effect before the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed before the temporary stop) is 60%. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, the expectation rate for the vibration effect "after the temporary stop" (the average value of the expectation rate for the vibration effect after the temporary stop in all variation patterns in which a vibration effect is performed after the temporary stop) is 99%.

The "promotion teaser" refers to a promotion teaser effect. The promotion teaser effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbol is changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state.
"Promotion" means a promotion effect. The promotion effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then changed to a decorative symbol indicating that the player will be in a more advantageous gaming state. In this promotion effect, for example, after the decorative symbol "444" is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol "777" is displayed as the stopped symbol.
The "revival" refers to a revival effect. The revival effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 41 of the losing numbers are temporarily stopped, and then the decorative symbols 41 of the double numbers are stopped.

The performance control unit 300 determines the variable performance pattern based on the tables shown in Figures 59 to 62. Specifically, the performance control unit 300 selects a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see Figure 15) based on the tables shown in Figures 59 to 62.
For example, in FIG. 59, when the "jackpot symbol" is "jackpot symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PA1", "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variation effect pattern "EA1", "pseudo-stimulation", "reach stimulation", "promotion", and "revival" are set to "-". In other words, when "EA1" is selected as the variation effect pattern, the pseudo-stimulation effect, the reach stimulation effect, the promotion effect, and the revival effect are not executed. Furthermore, in the variable presentation pattern "EA1,""red" is displayed as the "final display color,""2" is executed as the "pseudo consecutive number of times,""normal,""SPreach," and "SPSP reach" are executed, "zone stimulation" and "zone" are executed, "3" is executed as the "step,""developmentstimulation" and "development" are executed, "CH2" and "CH4" are executed as "devices""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop,""BU3" and "BU5" are executed as "buttons""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop,""V1" and "V2" are executed as "button vibrations""before the temporary stop" and "after the temporary stop," and "promotion stimulation" is executed.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the presentation control unit 300 controls one of multiple stages (presentation modes) in normal gaming mode, but the same variable presentation pattern table shown in Figure 59 is used regardless of the stage in normal gaming mode. However, different variable presentation pattern tables may be used for each stage in normal gaming mode.

[Lamp configuration]
Next, the configuration of the lamp will be described.
Figure 63 is a diagram showing various lamps provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100. Note that in Figure 63, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 other than the lamps is omitted from the illustration.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is provided with the following lamps: a frame lamp 157 (see Figure 1), a board lamp 116, a movable role piece 115, a starter lamp 1211, a button lamp 1611, and a handle lamp 1511.
The frame lamps 157 include an upper frame lamp 1571, an upper left frame lamp 1572, an upper right frame lamp 1573, a left frame lamp 1574, and a right frame lamp 1575. The board lamps 116 include an upper board lamp 1161, a left board lamp 1162, a right board lamp 1163, and a lower board lamp 1164. The movable role pieces 115 include a left movable role piece 1151, a center movable role piece 1152, and a right movable role piece 1153.

In addition, the upper left frame lamp 1572 has a first light-emitting portion 1572a, a second light-emitting portion 1572b located to the left of the first light-emitting portion 1572a, and a third light-emitting portion 1572c located below the second light-emitting portion 1572b.
In addition, the upper right frame lamp 1573 has a first light-emitting portion 1573a, a second light-emitting portion 1573b located to the right of the first light-emitting portion 1573a, and a third light-emitting portion 1573c located below the second light-emitting portion 1573b.
The left frame lamp 1574 also has a first light-emitting portion 1574a and a second light-emitting portion 1574b located below the first light-emitting portion 1574a.
The right frame lamp 1575 also has a first light-emitting portion 1575a and a second light-emitting portion 1575b located below the first light-emitting portion 1575a.

In addition, the upper panel lamp 1161 has a first light-emitting portion 1161a, a second light-emitting portion 1161b located to the right of the first light-emitting portion 1161a, and a third light-emitting portion 1161c located to the right of the second light-emitting portion 1161b.
The left panel lamp 1162 has a first light-emitting portion 1162a and a second light-emitting portion 1162b located below the first light-emitting portion 1162a.
The right panel lamp 1163 has a first light-emitting portion 1163a and a second light-emitting portion 1163b located below the first light-emitting portion 1163a.
The lower panel lamp 1164 also has a first light-emitting portion 1164a, a second light-emitting portion 1164b located to the right of the first light-emitting portion 1164a, and a third light-emitting portion 1164c located to the right of the second light-emitting portion 1164b.
In addition, the central movable part 1152 has a first light-emitting part 1152a and a second light-emitting part 1152b located to the right of the first light-emitting part 1152a.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned upper frame lamp 1571, upper left frame lamp 1572, upper right frame lamp 1573, left frame lamp 1574, right frame lamp 1575, upper board lamp 1161, left board lamp 1162, right board lamp 1163, lower board lamp 1164, left movable role element 1151, middle movable role element 1152, right movable role element 1153, starter lamp 1211, button lamp 1611, and handle lamp 1511 emit light in a lighting pattern that corresponds to the situation of the performance.

(Rainbow light effect)
Next, the rainbow light effect will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a rainbow performance using each lamp. A rainbow performance is a performance in which the lamps emit light in a specific light color. The specific light color is a light color that appears rainbow-like when three to eight colors are combined. In other words, a rainbow performance in which the lamps emit light in a specific light color is a performance in which three to eight colors are combined to emit light that appears rainbow-like. Three colors that appear rainbow-like when combined include red, yellow, and purple. Seven colors that appear rainbow-like when combined include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Eight colors that appear rainbow-like when combined include red, orange, yellow, yellow-green, green, blue, indigo, and purple.
The rainbow light-emitting effect is executed according to the game status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the situation of the effect. In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 executes the rainbow light-emitting effect while a jackpot variable effect is being executed. The effect control unit 300 also executes the rainbow light-emitting effect while a jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 executes the rainbow light-emitting effect when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.
The light-emitting mode of a specific lamp when the specific lamp is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may be referred to as a rainbow light-emitting mode hereinafter. Also, a light-emitting mode different from the rainbow light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode that is not the rainbow light-emitting mode) may be referred to as a non-rainbow light-emitting mode hereinafter.

In addition, this embodiment provides multiple rainbow light emission modes. In other words, multiple modes are provided for presenting rainbow colors to the player through lamp illumination. More specifically, the rainbow light emission modes include rainbow light emission mode 1 through rainbow light emission mode 10. Specific modes of each rainbow light emission mode are described below.

Figure 64 shows an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect in the first rainbow light-emitting mode. The first rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that allows the player to see rainbow colors moving from the bottom to the top of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The first rainbow light-emitting mode includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.

As shown in Figure 64 (1), in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided into seven areas in the vertical direction, consisting of the first light-emitting area through the seventh light-emitting area, and each lamp is located in one of the divided areas. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the area in which the lamp is located.

The lamps located in the first light-emitting region include an upper frame lamp 1571, a first light-emitting portion 1572a and a second light-emitting portion 1572b of an upper left frame lamp 1572, and a first light-emitting portion 1573a and a second light-emitting portion 1573b of an upper right frame lamp 1573.
The lamps located in the second light-emitting area include the third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper left frame lamp 1572, the third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, three movable parts 115, and the upper panel lamp 1161.
The lamps located in the third light-emitting region include a first light-emitting portion 1162 a of the left panel lamp 1162 and a first light-emitting portion 1163 a of the right panel lamp 1163 .
The lamps located in the fourth light-emitting area include the second light-emitting portion 1162b of the left panel lamp 1162, the second light-emitting portion 1163b of the right panel lamp 1163, the first light-emitting portion 1574a of the left frame lamp 1574, and the first light-emitting portion 1575a of the right frame lamp 1575.
The lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574, the second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the lower panel lamp 1164, and the starting port lamp 1211.
The lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region include a button lamp 1611 .
The lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region include a handle lamp 1511 .

As shown in Figure 64 (2), in the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamps located in the first light-emitting region light up in red, the lamps located in the second light-emitting region light up in orange, the lamps located in the third light-emitting region light up in yellow, the lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region light up in green, the lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region light up in blue, the lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region light up in deep blue, and the lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region light up in purple.

As shown in Figure 64 (3), in the second mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the first to sixth light emission regions light up in the color of the mode immediately before that of the lamp located in the light emission region one level below. Also, when the light emission mode changes from the first mode to the second mode, the lamp located in the seventh light emission region lights up in the color of the mode immediately before that of the lamp located in the topmost light emission region (first light emission region).

As shown in Figure 64 (4), in the third mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.
As shown in Figure 64 (5), in the fourth aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 64 (6), in the fifth aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up green.
As shown in Figure 64 (7), in the sixth aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in blue.

As shown in Figure 64 (8), in the seventh aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode causes the light color of the lamp to change for each light-emitting area and each lamp to light up in seven colors, allowing the player to visually see the rainbow light emitted by the lamp moving from the bottom to the top of the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the seventh light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the seventh mode.

Figure 65 shows an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The second rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of lamps in which each lamp switches its light color, causing the player to visually perceive the lamps as emitting rainbow colors. The second rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.

As shown in FIG. 65(1), in the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in red.
As shown in FIG. 65(2), in the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in orange.
As shown in FIG. 65(3), in the third mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in yellow.
As shown in FIG. 65(4), in the fourth mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in green.
As shown in FIG. 65(5), in the fifth mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in blue.
As shown in Figure 65 (6), in the sixth mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in deep blue.
As shown in FIG. 65(7), in the seventh mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in purple.

As described above, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp changes color and lights up in seven colors, allowing the player to see the lamp emitting rainbow colors.
Furthermore, when each lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the player will see the lamps emitting rainbow colors when each lamp emits light in one mode. In contrast, when each lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the player will not see the lamps emitting rainbow colors when each lamp emits light in one mode, but will see the lamps emitting rainbow colors when each lamp emits light in the first mode through the seventh mode. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different presentation from the rainbow light-emitting effect in the first rainbow light-emitting mode, and the variety of presentations can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the seventh light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the seventh mode.

Figures 66 and 67 are diagrams showing an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect in the third rainbow light-emitting mode. The third rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode in which each lamp repeatedly turns on and off while switching light colors, giving the player the appearance of flashing rainbow colors. The third rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 to 14.

As shown in FIG. 66(1), in the first mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in red.
As shown in Figure 66 (2), in the second mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all lamps are turned off.
As shown in FIG. 66(3), in the third mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in orange.
As shown in Figure 66 (4), in the fourth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all the lamps are turned off.
As shown in FIG. 66(5), in the fifth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in yellow.
As shown in Figure 66 (6), in the sixth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all the lamps are turned off.
As shown in FIG. 66(7), in the seventh mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in green.

As shown in FIG. 66(8), in the eighth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all the lamps are turned off.
As shown in FIG. 67(9), in the ninth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in blue.
As shown in FIG. 67(10), in the tenth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all the lamps are turned off.
As shown in Figure 67 (11), in the eleventh mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in deep blue.
As shown in Figure 67 (12), in the twelfth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all lamps are turned off.
As shown in Figure 67 (13), in the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in purple.
As shown in Figure 67 (14), in the 14th mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, all lamps are turned off.

As described above, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp repeatedly turns on and off, and the light color changes until it lights up in seven colors, allowing the player to see the lamp flashing in rainbow colors.
In this way, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode includes a light-emitting mode that is not performed in either the first or second rainbow light-emitting mode, that is, the lamp is turned off while the rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different performance from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first and second rainbow light-emitting modes, and the variety of the performances can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the fourteenth light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the fourteenth mode.

Figures 68 and 69 are diagrams showing an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect in the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. The fourth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp in the pachinko gaming machine 100 that causes the player to visually recognize rainbow and white colors moving counterclockwise. The fourth rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 to 8.

As shown in Figure 68 (1), in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided into seven areas in a clockwise direction, consisting of the first light-emitting area through the seventh light-emitting area, and each lamp is located in one of the divided areas. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the area in which the lamp is located.

The lamps located in the first light-emitting area include the first light-emitting part 1573a of the upper right frame lamp 1573 (see Figure 63), the second light-emitting part 1152b of the middle movable part 1152, the right movable part 1153, and the third light-emitting part 1161c of the upper panel lamp 1161.
The lamps located in the second light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1573b and third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the first light-emitting portion 1575a of the right frame lamp 1575, and the first light-emitting portion 1163a of the right panel lamp 1163.
The lamps located in the third light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the second light-emitting portion 1163b of the right panel lamp 1163, and the handle lamp 1511.
The lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region include a lower panel lamp 1164, a starting port lamp 1211, and a button lamp 1611.
The lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574 and the second light-emitting portion 1162b of the left panel lamp 1162.
The lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region include the first light-emitting portion 1574a of the left frame lamp 1574, the first light-emitting portion 1162a of the left panel lamp 1162, and the second light-emitting portion 1572b and third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper left frame lamp 1572.
The lamps located in the seventh light-emitting area include the upper frame lamp 1571, the first light-emitting part 1572a of the upper left frame lamp 1572, the left movable part 1151, the first light-emitting part 1152a of the middle movable part 1152, and the first light-emitting part 1161a and second light-emitting part 1161b of the upper panel lamp 1161.

As shown in Figure 68 (2), in the first mode of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up indigo, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up purple.

As shown in Figure 68 (3), in the second mode of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up white.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the first to sixth light emission regions are lit in the lighting color of the lamp located in the light emission region one light emission region downstream in the clockwise direction in the previous mode. Also, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamp located in the seventh light emission region is lit in a color (white in the illustrated example) that was not included in the lighting color of the previous mode.

As shown in Figure 68 (4), in the third aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up white, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
As shown in Figure 68 (5), in the fourth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

As shown in Figure 68 (6), in the fifth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
As shown in Figure 68 (7), in the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in white, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in green.

As shown in Figure 68 (8), in the seventh aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up blue.
As shown in Figure 69 (9), in the eighth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in white, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.

As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up each lamp in eight colors, allowing the player to visually see the rainbow and white light emitted by the lamps moving counterclockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode emits light in white, a color not included in the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to third rainbow light-emitting modes. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different effect from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to third rainbow light-emitting modes, and the diversity of the effects can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the eighth light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the eighth mode.

Figure 70 shows an example of the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode. The fifth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that allows the player to visually recognize rainbow colors moving from the left side to the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The fifth rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.

As shown in Figure 70 (1), in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided into seven regions in the left-right direction, consisting of the first light-emitting region through the seventh light-emitting region, and each lamp is located in one of the divided regions. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the region in which the lamp is located.

The lamps located in the first light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1572 b (see FIG. 63 ) and third light-emitting portion 1572 c of the upper left frame lamp 1572 , and the left frame lamp 1574 .
The lamps located in the second light-emitting region include the first light-emitting portion 1572 a of the upper left frame lamp 1572 and the left panel lamp 1162 .
The lamps located in the third light-emitting area include the left movable part 1151, the first light-emitting part 1161a of the upper panel lamp 1161, and the first light-emitting part 1164a of the lower panel lamp 1164.
The lamps located in the fourth light-emitting area include the upper frame lamp 1571, the middle movable part 1152, the second light-emitting part 1161b of the upper panel lamp 1161, the second light-emitting part 1164b of the lower panel lamp 1164, the starter lamp 1211, and the button lamp 1611.
The lamps located in the fifth light-emitting area include the right movable part 1153, the third light-emitting part 1161c of the upper panel lamp 1161, and the third light-emitting part 1164c of the lower panel lamp 1164.
The lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region include the first light-emitting portion 1573 a of the upper right frame lamp 1573 and the right panel lamp 1163 .
The lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1573b and the third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the right frame lamp 1575, and the handle lamp 1511.

As shown in Figure 70 (2), in the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamps located in the first light-emitting region light up red, the lamps located in the second light-emitting region light up orange, the lamps located in the third light-emitting region light up yellow, the lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region light up green, the lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region light up blue, the lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region light up indigo blue, and the lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region light up purple.

As shown in Figure 70 (3), in the second mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the second to seventh light emission regions light up in the lighting color of the lamp located in the light emission region one light source to the right of the lamp in the lighting color of the lamp located in the rightmost light emission region (seventh light emission region) of the lamp in the first light emission region light up in the lighting color of the lamp located in the lighting color of the lamp located in the lighting color of the lamp located in the rightmost light emission region (seventh light emission region) of the lamp in the lighting color of the lamp located in the lighting color of the lamp located in the lighting color of the lamp located in the lighting color of the lamp located in the rightmost light emission region of the lamp in the seventh light emission region of the lamp in the lighting color of the lamp located ...

As shown in Figure 70 (4), in the third aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in blue.
As shown in Figure 70 (5), in the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up green.

As shown in Figure 70 (6), in the fifth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
As shown in Figure 70 (7), in the sixth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

As shown in Figure 70 (8), in the seventh aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up each lamp in seven colors, allowing the player to visually recognize the rainbow colors emitted by the lamps as moving from left to right on the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode differs in the direction of movement of the emitted colors from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to fourth rainbow light-emitting modes. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different presentation from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to fourth rainbow light-emitting modes, and the diversity of the presentation can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the seventh light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the seventh mode.

Figure 71 shows an example of the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode. The sixth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp in the pachinko gaming machine 100 that causes the player to visually recognize rainbow colors moving in a clockwise direction. The sixth rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.

As shown in Figure 71 (1), in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided clockwise into seven areas consisting of the first light-emitting area through the seventh light-emitting area, and each lamp is located in one of the divided areas. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the area in which the lamp is located.

In Figure 71 (1), the lamps located in the first light-emitting area include the upper frame lamp 1571, the first light-emitting portion 1573a of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the second light-emitting portion 1152b of the middle movable part 1152, the right movable part 1153, and the second light-emitting portion 1161b and third light-emitting portion 1163c of the upper board lamp 1161.
The lamps located in the second light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1573b and third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the first light-emitting portion 1575a of the right frame lamp 1575, and the first light-emitting portion 1163a of the right panel lamp 1163.
The lamps located in the third light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the second light-emitting portion 1163b of the right panel lamp 1163, and the handle lamp 1511.
The lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region include a lower panel lamp 1164, a starting port lamp 1211, and a button lamp 1611.
The lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region include the second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574 and the second light-emitting portion 1162b of the left panel lamp 1162.
The lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region include the first light-emitting portion 1574a of the left frame lamp 1574, the first light-emitting portion 1162a of the left panel lamp 1162, and the second light-emitting portion 1572b and third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper left frame lamp 1572.
The lamps located in the seventh light-emitting area include the first light-emitting part 1572a of the upper left frame lamp 1572, the left movable part 1151, the first light-emitting part 1152a of the middle movable part 1152, and the first light-emitting part 1161a of the upper panel lamp 1161.

As shown in Figure 71 (2), in the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamps located in the first light-emitting region light up red, the lamps located in the second light-emitting region light up orange, the lamps located in the third light-emitting region light up yellow, the lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region light up green, the lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region light up blue, the lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region light up indigo, and the lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region light up purple.

As shown in Figure 71 (3), in the second mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the first to seventh light emission regions are lit with the lighting color of the previous mode of the lamp located in the light emission region one upstream in the clockwise direction.

As shown in Figure 71 (4), in the third mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in blue.
As shown in Figure 71 (5), in the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up green.

As shown in Figure 71 (6), in the fifth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
As shown in Figure 71 (7), in the sixth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

As shown in Figure 71 (8), in the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up each lamp in seven colors, allowing the player to visually perceive the rainbow colors emitted by the lamps as moving clockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode differs in the direction of movement of the light colors from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first rainbow light-emitting mode to the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different presentation from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first rainbow light-emitting mode to the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the diversity of the presentation can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the seventh light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the seventh mode.

72 is a diagram showing an example of the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode. The seventh rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that allows the player to visually recognize that the rainbow colors are moving clockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The seven rainbow light-emitting modes include light-emitting modes 1 to 8.
Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided clockwise into seven regions consisting of the first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region, and each lamp is located in one of the divided regions. The light-emitting color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the region in which the lamp is located. The first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode is executed are the same as when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed (see FIG. 71 (1)).

As shown in Figure 72 (1), in the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamps located in the first light-emitting region light up red, the lamps located in the second light-emitting region light up orange, the lamps located in the third light-emitting region light up yellow, the lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region light up green, the lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region light up blue, the lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region light up indigo, and the lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region light up purple.

As shown in Figure 72 (2), in the second mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region is turned off, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region is lit in red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region is lit in orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region is lit in yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region is lit in green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region is lit in blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region is lit in indigo.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the second light emission region to the seventh light emission region light up in the color of the light emission mode of the lamp located in the light emission region one light emission mode upstream in the clockwise direction. Also, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamp located in the first light emission region changes to the light emission mode that was not performed in the previous mode (in the illustrated example, it is turned off).

As shown in Figure 72 (3), in the third aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region is turned off, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up blue.
As shown in Figure 72 (4), in the fourth aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region is turned off, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in green.

As shown in Figure 72 (5), in the fifth aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region is turned off, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
As shown in Figure 72 (6), in the sixth aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region is turned off, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

As shown in Figure 72 (7), in the seventh aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region is turned off, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in red.
As shown in Figure 72 (8), in the eighth aspect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region is off.

As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up in seven colors, allowing the player to visually see the rainbow colors emitted by the lamps moving clockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode has a light-emitting mode that is not included in the first to sixth rainbow light-emitting modes, in that some lamps are lit and others are extinguished at the same time. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different effect from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to sixth rainbow light-emitting modes, and the diversity of the effects can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the eighth light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again.Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the eighth mode.

73 is a diagram showing an example of the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode. The eighth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that causes the player to visually recognize rainbow colors and white moving clockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The eighth rainbow light-emitting mode includes light-emitting modes 1 to 8.
In the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided clockwise into seven regions consisting of the first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region, and each lamp is located in one of the divided regions. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the region in which the lamp is located. The first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed are the same as when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed (see FIG. 71 (1)).

As shown in Figure 73 (1), in the first mode of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamps located in the first light-emitting region light up red, the lamps located in the second light-emitting region light up orange, the lamps located in the third light-emitting region light up yellow, the lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region light up green, the lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region light up blue, the lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region light up indigo, and the lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region light up purple.

As shown in Figure 73 (2), in the second mode of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in white, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
In this way, when the light emission mode advances by one mode, the lamps located in the second to seventh light emission regions are lit in the light emission color of the lamp located in the light emission region one light emission region upstream in the clockwise direction in the previous mode. Also, when the light emission mode advances by one mode, the lamp located in the first light emission region is lit in a color (white in the illustrated example) that was not included in the light emission color of the previous mode.

As shown in Figure 73 (3), in the third aspect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up blue.
As shown in Figure 73 (4), in the fourth mode of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in white, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in green.

As shown in Figure 73 (5), in the fifth aspect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
As shown in Figure 73 (6), in the sixth aspect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up white, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

As shown in Figure 73 (7), in the seventh aspect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up white, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
As shown in Figure 73 (8), in the eighth aspect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up white.

As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up each lamp in eight colors, allowing the player to visually see the rainbow and white light emitted by the lamps moving clockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode uses the same lamp light colors (rainbow and white) as the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, but the way the light colors move is different from the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different effect from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first through seventh rainbow light-emitting modes, increasing the enjoyment of the game through the diversity of the effects.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first mode to the eighth mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the eighth mode.

74 is a diagram showing an example of the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode. The ninth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that allows the player to visually recognize that the rainbow colors are moving counterclockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The ninth rainbow light-emitting mode includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.
Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided clockwise into seven regions consisting of the first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region, and each lamp is located in one of the divided regions. The light-emitting color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the region in which the lamp is located. The first light-emitting region to the seventh light-emitting region when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed are the same as when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed (see FIG. 68(1)).

As shown in Figure 74 (1), in the first mode of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up indigo, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up purple.

As shown in Figure 74 (2), in the second mode of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the first light emission region to the seventh light emission region light up with the lighting color of the previous mode of the lamp located in the light emission region one downstream in the clockwise direction.

As shown in Figure 74 (3), in the third aspect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.
As shown in Figure 74 (4), in the fourth aspect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 74 (5), in the fifth aspect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up green.
As shown in Figure 74 (6), in the sixth aspect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in blue.

As shown in Figure 74 (7), in the seventh aspect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the lighting color of the lamps for each light-emitting area and lights up each lamp in seven colors, allowing the player to visually perceive the rainbow colors emitted by the lamps as moving counterclockwise in the pachinko gaming machine 100, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode has a similar movement pattern of the light colors as the rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, but does not have the light color (white) included in the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide the player with a different effect from the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first through eighth rainbow light-emitting modes, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game through the diversity of the effects.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the seventh light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the seventh mode.

Figures 75-1 and 75-2 are diagrams showing examples of rainbow light-emitting effects in the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode. The tenth rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of lamps in which each lamp switches its light color, causing the player to visually perceive the lamps as emitting rainbow and white colors. The tenth rainbow light-emitting mode also includes light-emitting modes 1 through 9.

As shown in FIG. 75-1(1), in the first mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in red.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(2), in the second mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in orange.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(3), in the third mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in yellow.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(4), in the fourth mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in green.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(5), in the fifth mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in blue.

As shown in FIG. 75-1(6), in the sixth mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in deep blue.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(7), in the seventh mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, each lamp lights up in purple.
As shown in FIG. 75-1(8), in the eighth aspect of the tenth rainbow light emission aspect, each lamp lights up in white.
As shown in FIG. 75-2(9), in the ninth mode of the tenth rainbow light emission mode, all the lamps are turned off.

As described above, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp changes color and lights up in eight colors, allowing the player to see the lamp emitting rainbow and white colors. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode has the same lamp color change pattern as the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, but has a light-emitting pattern (white on and off) that is not included in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. Therefore, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode can provide players with a different presentation than the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first through ninth rainbow light-emitting modes, and the variety of presentations can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may change from the first light-emitting mode to the ninth light-emitting mode, and then repeat the light-emitting mode from the first mode again. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may periodically repeat the light-emitting modes from the first mode to the ninth mode.

Furthermore, it has been explained that the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode changes the light-emitting mode of the lamp in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, white, and off, but is not limited to this.
In the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting mode of the lamp may change in the following order: red, white, orange, white, yellow, white, green, white, blue, white, indigo, white, and purple. In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode of the lamp in which white is included between each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow in chronological order. Hereinafter, a light-emitting mode of the lamp in which white is included between each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow in chronological order, such as red, white, orange, white, yellow, white, green, white, blue, white, indigo, white, and purple, may be referred to as a rainbow flash light-emitting mode. Hereinafter, a light-emitting mode of the lamp in which white is included between each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow in chronological order, such as red, white, orange, white, yellow, white, green, white, blue, white, indigo, white, and purple, may be referred to as a rainbow flash light-emitting effect.
Furthermore, a lamp light emission mode in which white is included among chromatic colors in a time series, such as in the order red, white, red, white, red, may be referred to as a flash light emission mode.Furthermore, hereinafter, a presentation based on a lamp light emission mode in which white is included among chromatic colors in a time series, such as in the order red, white, red, white, red, may be referred to as a flash light emission presentation.

The rainbow flash light emission mode may also be a rainbow light emission mode in which the lamp's light color includes white. That is, the tenth rainbow light emission mode shown in Figures 75-1 (1) to (8) and 75-2 (9) may be considered a rainbow flash light emission mode. The rainbow flash light emission effect may also be a light emission mode in which the lamp's light color includes white. That is, the tenth rainbow light emission mode shown in Figures 75-1 (1) to (8) and 75-2 (9) may be considered a rainbow flash light emission effect.

Next, a modified example of the rainbow light-emitting effect will be described.
The rainbow light emission pattern in the rainbow light emission effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 64 to 75-2.
75-3 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow light-emitting effect of a modified rainbow light-emitting mode. The modified rainbow light-emitting mode is a rainbow light-emitting mode of a lamp that is visually recognized by a player as rainbow colors moving radially from the center to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The modified rainbow light-emitting mode includes light-emitting modes 1 to 7.

As shown in Figure 75-3, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the modified rainbow light-emitting mode, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is divided into seven areas, consisting of a first light-emitting area through a seventh light-emitting area, based on the distance from the center of the machine, and each lamp is located in one of the divided areas. The light color of the lamp at a given timing varies depending on the area in which the lamp is located.

The first light-emitting area is the center of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "1" shown within the dashed line in the figure indicates the first light-emitting area. The lamps located in the first light-emitting area include an upper panel lamp 1161 and a lower panel lamp 1164.
The second light-emitting area is an area adjacent to the first light-emitting area and is an area outside the first light-emitting area in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The "2" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the second light-emitting area. The lamps located in the second light-emitting area include an upper board lamp 1161, a lower board lamp 1164, a middle movable role object 1152, and a starting gate lamp 1211.
The third light-emitting area is an area adjacent to the second light-emitting area and is an area outside the second light-emitting area in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "3" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the third light-emitting area. The lamps located in the third light-emitting area include three movable parts 115, a left panel lamp 1162, a right panel lamp 1163, an upper panel lamp 1161, a lower panel lamp 1164, a starter lamp 1211, and a button lamp 1611.

The fourth light-emitting region is adjacent to the third light-emitting region and is located outside the third light-emitting region in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "4" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the fourth light-emitting region. The lamps located in the fourth light-emitting region include an upper frame lamp 1571, three movable role pieces 115, a left panel lamp 1162, a right panel lamp 1163, and a button lamp 1611.
The fifth light-emitting region is adjacent to the fourth light-emitting region and is located further outward than the fourth light-emitting region in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "5" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the fifth light-emitting region. The lamps located in the fifth light-emitting region include an upper frame lamp 1571, an upper left frame lamp 1572, an upper right frame lamp 1573, a left frame lamp 1574, and a right frame lamp 1575.
The sixth light-emitting region is adjacent to the fifth light-emitting region and is located further outward than the fifth light-emitting region in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "6" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the sixth light-emitting region. The lamps located in the sixth light-emitting region include an upper left frame lamp 1572, an upper right frame lamp 1573, a left frame lamp 1574, and a right frame lamp 1575.
The seventh light-emitting region is adjacent to the sixth light-emitting region and is located further outward than the sixth light-emitting region in the pachinko gaming machine 100. The number "7" shown between two adjacent dashed lines in the figure indicates the seventh light-emitting region. The lamps located in the seventh light-emitting region include an upper left frame lamp 1572, an upper right frame lamp 1573, and a handle lamp 1511.

In this variant, each lamp is provided with a light-emitting element (LED) in each of the areas divided into the first to seventh light-emitting areas, and light is emitted in a different light-emitting pattern for each lamp and each light-emitting area.

In addition, in the first aspect of the rainbow light-emitting aspect of the modified example, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up indigo, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up purple.

Next, in the second aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up blue, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in indigo.
In this way, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamps located in the second light emission region to the seventh light emission region are lit in the lighting color of the mode immediately before that of the lamp located in the light emission region one light inside in the pachinko gaming machine 100. Also, when the light emission mode progresses by one mode, the lamp located in the first light emission region is lit in the lighting color of the mode immediately before that of the lamp located in the outermost light emission region (seventh light emission region).

Next, in the third aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in purple, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up in red, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up in orange, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up in yellow, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up in green, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up in blue.
Next, in the fourth aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up in indigo, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up yellow, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up green.

Next, in the fifth aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up red, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up orange, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up yellow.
Next, in the sixth aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up purple, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up red, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up orange.

Next, in the seventh aspect of the modified rainbow light-emitting aspect, the lamp located in the first light-emitting region lights up orange, the lamp located in the second light-emitting region lights up yellow, the lamp located in the third light-emitting region lights up green, the lamp located in the fourth light-emitting region lights up blue, the lamp located in the fifth light-emitting region lights up indigo, the lamp located in the sixth light-emitting region lights up purple, and the lamp located in the seventh light-emitting region lights up red.
In this way, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the modified rainbow light-emitting mode, each lamp lights up in sequence from the first mode to the seventh mode, and the player sees the rainbow colors moving radially from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 100 to the outside.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the modified rainbow light-emitting mode, after the lamp has changed to the light-emitting mode from mode 1 to mode 7, it may again repeat the light-emitting mode from mode 1. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effect of the modified rainbow light-emitting mode, the lamp may cyclically repeat the light-emitting mode from mode 1 to mode 7.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emission mode of this modified example may be used in place of any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission modes described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light emission mode in multiple modes.
In this case, the rainbow colors displayed by the lamps can be diversified to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode to the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the modified example are, as described above, rainbow light-emitting modes of the lamp that allow the player to visually recognize moving rainbow colors in the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the lamp that allows the player to visually recognize moving rainbow colors in the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be referred to as a moving rainbow light-emitting mode.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is provided with five types of rainbow moving light-emitting modes, each with a different rainbow color movement direction. More specifically, the rainbow colors move in different directions among the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the fourth and ninth rainbow light-emitting modes, the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth to eighth rainbow light-emitting modes, and the modified rainbow light-emitting mode. In this way, by providing various rainbow moving light-emitting modes, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects.

In addition, the rainbow light emission modes of this embodiment include rainbow light emission modes (first rainbow light emission mode, fourth to ninth rainbow light emission mode, and modified rainbow light emission mode) in which predetermined light emission colors that make up the rainbow colors change in a predetermined order in predetermined directions (up and down, left and right, clockwise, counterclockwise, direction from the center to the outside in the pachinko gaming machine 100, etc.), and rainbow light emission modes (second rainbow light emission mode, third rainbow light emission mode, tenth rainbow light emission mode) in which predetermined light emission colors switch without moving, causing the colors to appear rainbow.
Here, the second rainbow light emission mode, the third rainbow light emission mode, and the tenth rainbow light emission mode can also be regarded as rainbow light emission modes of gradation in which the colors that make up the rainbow change in stages.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes, the performance control unit 300 causes the multiple lamps to emit light in light-emitting modes that are related to each other. That is, in the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first rainbow light-emitting mode and the fourth to ninth rainbow light-emitting modes, the performance control unit 300 causes two lamps located in adjacent light-emitting regions to emit light so that the emitted colors of the adjacent light-emitting regions are visually perceived as colors of the rainbow (seven colors) that have consecutive wavelength relationships. Furthermore, in the rainbow light-emitting effects of the second, third, and tenth rainbow light-emitting modes, the performance control unit 300 causes each lamp to emit light so that the emitted colors of each light-emitting region are visually perceived as the same color.
By doing this, it is possible to realize a coordinated rainbow light emission effect using multiple lamps, compared to when multiple lamps emit light without any correlation with each other, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the rainbow light effect, a specific lamp may have a light emission mode that is unrelated to the other lamps (e.g., emitting light in a color unrelated to the other lamps, being off, etc.). Even in this case, by having any of the lamps provided on the pachinko gaming machine 100 emit light in a light emission mode that is related to each other, it is possible to achieve a coordinated rainbow light effect using multiple lamps, compared to when none of the lamps emit light in a related manner, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes the illumination of multiple lamps in the rainbow illumination effects of the first through tenth rainbow illumination modes. That is, as described above, in the rainbow illumination effects of the first rainbow illumination mode and the fourth through ninth rainbow illumination modes, the performance control unit 300 illuminates two lamps located in adjacent illumination regions so that the illumination colors of the adjacent illumination regions are visually perceived as colors of the rainbow (seven colors) in a continuous wavelength relationship. Furthermore, in the rainbow illumination effects of the second, third, and tenth rainbow illumination modes, the performance control unit 300 illuminates each lamp so that the illumination colors of each lamp are visually perceived as the same color. Furthermore, in the rainbow illumination effects of the first through tenth rainbow illumination modes, when the illumination mode of one lamp is changed, the performance control unit 300 also changes the illumination modes of the other lamps.
By doing this, it is possible to realize a coordinated rainbow light emission effect using multiple lamps, compared to when multiple lamps emit light without synchronization, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, there may be rainbow light emission modes that combine the first, fourth to ninth rainbow light emission modes, and modified rainbow light emission modes with the second, third, and tenth rainbow light emission modes. That is, during a predetermined period in the rainbow light emission effect, the luminous colors that make up the rainbow colors may change in stages, and during a specific period different from the predetermined period in the rainbow light emission effect, the predetermined luminous colors that make up the rainbow colors may switch without moving, changing to appear as rainbow colors.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emission mode may have modes in which the colors appear rainbow and modes in which the colors do not appear rainbow, depending on the speed at which the light color of each lamp changes. An example of a mode in which the colors do not appear rainbow depending on the speed at which the light color of each lamp changes is a mode in which the colors do not appear rainbow because the speed at which the light color of each lamp changes is slow.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display 130 does not perform a rainbow light-emitting effect. Furthermore, the sub-information display 80 does not perform a rainbow light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, in the rainbow light effect, a specific lamp may have an illumination mode that is not synchronized with the other lamps (e.g., illumination in a different mode while maintaining the same rainbow light effect as the other lamps, a different rainbow light effect from the other lamps, illumination in a different color from the other lamps, illumination with a different timing for changing the illumination mode from the other lamps, or extinguishing). Even in this case, by having any of the lamps provided on the pachinko gaming machine 100 illuminate in synchronization with each other, a coordinated rainbow light effect can be achieved using multiple lamps, compared to when all lamps illuminate asynchronously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the examples shown in Figures 64 to 75-3, the performance control unit 300 causes all lamps to emit light in the same manner in the same rainbow light emission mode in the rainbow light emission performance, but this is not limited to this.
In a rainbow light-emitting effect, the performance control unit 300 may set some lamps to a specific rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the first rainbow light-emitting mode), while setting some other lamps to a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the second rainbow light-emitting mode) that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode. Also, in a rainbow light-emitting effect, the performance control unit 300 may cause each lamp to emit light in the same rainbow light-emitting mode, while differentiating the light-emitting mode between a specific lamp and a predetermined lamp that is different from this specific lamp (for example, setting the left movable role object 1151 to the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see Figure 64 (2)) and the upper panel lamp 1161 to the third mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see Figure 64 (4))).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first rainbow light-emitting mode and the fourth to ninth rainbow light-emitting modes, the performance control unit 300 causes the lamp to emit light so that the emitted color is visible as seven different colors (rainbow colors) at one timing (see Figure 64 (2) etc.), but this is not limited to this.
In the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first rainbow light-emitting mode and the fourth through ninth rainbow light-emitting modes, the performance control unit 300 may cause the lamp to emit light so that the emitted colors are visually recognized as fewer than six different colors at a specific timing. Then, at one or more predetermined timings after the specific timing, the performance control unit 300 may cause the lamp to emit light in a light color out of the seven different colors (rainbow colors) that was not used at the specific timing, so that the emitted colors are visually recognized as seven different colors (rainbow colors) during a period including the specific timing and the predetermined timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper frame lamp 1571, the left movable part 1151, the right movable part 1153, the starting port lamp 1211, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are all composed of a single light-emitting element, but this is not limited to this.
The upper frame lamp 1571, the left movable part 1151, the right movable part 1153, the starting port lamp 1211, the button lamp 1611, and the handle lamp 1511 are each composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements, and when these plurality of light-emitting elements are in the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode to the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the light colors they emit when they are simultaneously illuminated may be different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can also perform a rainbow light-emitting performance using the light guide plate 118 in addition to the lamps shown in FIG. 63. The light guide plate 118 has multiple light-emitting elements (not shown). In a rainbow light-emitting performance, the multiple light-emitting elements in the light guide plate 118 all emit light in a common light-emitting color. For example, when performing a rainbow light-emitting performance using the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the multiple light-emitting elements in the light guide plate 118 all emit light in a common light-emitting mode. In addition, when emitting light in a light-emitting mode different from the rainbow light-emitting mode, the multiple light-emitting elements in the light guide plate 118 all emit light in a common light-emitting color (e.g., white).

63, the first light-emitting portion 1572a, the second light-emitting portion 1572b, and the third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper frame lamp 1571 and the upper left frame lamp 1572, the first light-emitting portion 1573a, the second light-emitting portion 1573b, and the third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the first light-emitting portion 1574a and the second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574, the first light-emitting portion 1575a and the second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the first light-emitting portion 1161a, the second light-emitting portion 1161b, and the third light-emitting portion 1161c of the upper panel lamp 1161, and the first light-emitting portion 1162a of the left panel lamp 1162. , second light-emitting unit 1162b, first light-emitting unit 1163a and second light-emitting unit 1163b of right panel lamp 1163, first light-emitting unit 1164a, second light-emitting unit 1164b, and third light-emitting unit 1164c of bottom panel lamp 1164, left movable role element 1151, first light-emitting unit 1152a and second light-emitting unit 1152b of center movable role element 1152, right movable role element 1153, start port lamp 1211, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, and each light-emitting area of light guide plate 118 are different light-emitting areas from one another and can also be considered as rainbow light-emitting areas capable of emitting light in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, the number of rainbow light-emitting areas capable of producing rainbow light-emitting effects can also be considered as the number of light-emitting means capable of producing rainbow light-emitting effects.
In addition, the number of rainbow light-emitting areas capable of performing the rainbow light-emitting effect may be the number of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are in a rainbow light-emitting mode among the light-emitting elements (LEDs) provided in each light-emitting means. In this case, in this embodiment, the first light-emitting portion 1572a, the second light-emitting portion 1572b, and the third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper frame lamp 1571 and the upper left frame lamp 1572, the first light-emitting portion 1573a, the second light-emitting portion 1573b, and the third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the first light-emitting portion 1574a and the second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574, the first light-emitting portion 1575a and the second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the first light-emitting portion 1161a, the second light-emitting portion 1161b, and the third light-emitting portion 1161c of the upper board lamp 1161, and the left board lamp 1162 The first light-emitting portion 1162a and the second light-emitting portion 1162b of the right panel lamp 1163, the first light-emitting portion 1163a and the second light-emitting portion 1163b of the right panel lamp 1163, the first light-emitting portion 1164a, the second light-emitting portion 1164b and the third light-emitting portion 1164c of the lower panel lamp 1164, the left movable part 1151, the first light-emitting portion 1152a and the second light-emitting portion 1152b of the middle movable part 1152, the right movable part 1153, the starting port lamp 1211, the button lamp 1611, the handle lamp 1511, and the light guide plate 118 may each be provided with one light-emitting element (LED).

Furthermore, while it has been explained that the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to eleventh rainbow light-emitting modes are rainbow light-emitting effects that appear rainbow-colored due to the combination of seven colors, this is not limited to this. The rainbow light-emitting effects of the first to eleventh rainbow light-emitting modes may be rainbow light-emitting effects that appear rainbow-colored due to the combination of the three colors described above, or rainbow light-emitting effects that appear rainbow-colored due to the combination of the eight colors described above.

[Produced image]
Next, the effect image that the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display will be described.
76-1, the effect control unit 300 controls the image display unit 114 to display an effect image. In this embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative pattern 41, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small pattern 56, and a stage image 61. Further, the image display section 114 displays a first effect image at start 501, a button operation image 502, a first effect image at stop 503, a demo image 605, a first image at operation 504, a zone teaser image 505, a second effect image at start 555, a second effect image at stop 506, a first effect image of a role 507, a step image 508, a first reach line image 509, a first reach notification image 510, a pseudo consecutive image 511, a pseudo consecutive teaser effect image 512, a second effect image of a role 513, an effect image at pseudo consecutive stop 514, a re-change notification image 515, a transition image 516, an SP reach image 517, an SP teaser First effect image 518, SP teaser second effect image 519, switching image 520, development image 521, reach teaser first effect image 522, reach teaser second effect image 523, stop time third effect image 524, start time third effect image 525, role third effect image 526, operation time second image 527, zone notification image 528, zone effect image 529, zone execution image 530, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, development effect image 534, role fourth effect image 535, SPSP reach image 536, SPSP suggestion image 601, chance eye first Effect image 537, button effect image 557, success image 538, first rainbow image 539, third rainbow image 540, second rainbow image 606, first doublet effect image 556, fourth rainbow image 607, second doublet effect image 541, jackpot game notification image 542, fifth rainbow image 608, first right hit image 609, second right hit image 543, number of rounds image 544, in-round image 545, time-saving start image 546, warning image 610, company name image 611, fourth effect image at start 547, third reach tease effect image 548, fourth effect image at stop 549, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613 , first effect image of double numbers teasing 550, second effect image of double numbers teasing 551, fifth effect image when stopped 552, sixth effect image when stopped 553, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, seventh effect image when stopped 554, third reach line image 602, third reach notification image 603, high expectation effect image of role 604, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, revival image 558, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, fifth effect image when started 559, eighth effect image when stopped 560, sixth effect image when started 561, ninth effect image when stopped Effect image 562, sixth effect image of reel 563, seventh effect image of reel 564, fourth effect image of reach tease 565, tenth effect image at stop 566, seventh effect image at start 567, eighth effect image of reel 568, third image at time of operation 569, second effect image of chance eye 570, eighth effect image at start 571, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, ninth effect image at start 572, eleventh effect image at stop 573, tenth effect image at start 574, twelfth effect image at stop image 575, ninth role effect image 576, tenth role effect image 577, fifth reach stimulation effect image 578, sixth reach stimulation effect image 579, thirteenth effect image when stopped 580, eleventh effect image at start 581, eleventh role effect image 582, third chance eye effect image 583, twelfth effect image at start 584, stage change image 585, fourteenth effect image when stopped 586, eighteenth rainbow image 626, change effect image 533, pattern effect image 587, thirteenth effect image at start 588, fifteenth effect image at stop 589, reach stimulation Seventh effect image 590, eighth reach tease effect image 591, fourteenth effect image at start 592, twelfth effect image for role play 593, sixteenth effect image at stop 594, third effect image for SP tease 595, fourth effect image for chance eye 596, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 627, twenty-first rainbow image 598, twenty-second rainbow image 628, seventeenth effect image at stop 599, third right hit image 629, winning notification image 630, twenty-third rainbow image 631, twenty-fourth rainbow image 632, type notification image 633, twenty-fifth rainbow image 634, twenty-sixth rainbow image 635, twenty-seventh rainbow image 636, twenty-eighth rainbow image 637 , a 29th rainbow image 638, a 30th rainbow image 639, a 31st rainbow image 640, a blackout image 641, a 32nd rainbow image 642, a 33rd rainbow image 643, a 34th rainbow image 644, a 35th rainbow image 645, a 36th rainbow image 646, a 37th rainbow image 647, a jackpot suggestion image 600, a remaining value notification image 651, a pre-notification image 652, a complete notification image 653, a standby notification image 654, a recovery in progress image 655, an initialization in progress image 656, a magnetic error image 657, a payout error image 658, a door opening error image 659, a 4th right hit image 660, a stage transition image 661, a result image 662, and a left hit image 663 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 41)
As shown in FIG. 76-1 (1), three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When describing the three columns of symbols constituting the decorative symbols 41 individually, the symbols arranged in the left column may be referred to as the "left column decorative symbol 41," the symbols arranged in the center column as the "middle column decorative symbol 41," and the symbols arranged in the right column as the "right column decorative symbol 41." When describing the left column decorative symbol 41 and the right column decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "left and right columns of decorative symbols 41." When describing the left column decorative symbol 41, the middle column decorative symbol 41, and the right column decorative symbol 41 together, they may be referred to as the "three columns of decorative symbols 41." The left and right columns of decorative symbols 41 with matching numbers, i.e., the left and right columns of decorative symbols 41 where a reach has been achieved, may be referred to as the "reach-eyed decorative symbol 41." Furthermore, three rows of decorative patterns 41 containing different numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with no matching numbers." Furthermore, three rows of decorative patterns 41 with matching numbers may be referred to as "decorative patterns 41 with double numbers."

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 41 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 76-1(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 94(6), FIG. 105(33), FIG. 120(63), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 41, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the image of these characters and the like. Furthermore, in the less decorative decorative pattern 41, the character portion occupies a higher proportion of the area of the decorative pattern 41 than in the more decorative decorative pattern 41.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 41 is switched according to changes in the game state or the progress of the presentation, etc. Although the details will be described later, for example, decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are displayed in the SP reach presentation, the SPSP reach presentation, and the time-saving game state, etc., and decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed in other cases.
In addition to characters such as numbers, simple pictures, images of characters, etc. may also be displayed on the less decorative decorative pattern 41. In other words, the "less decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 94 (6), Figure 105 (33), Figure 120 (63), etc. may be less decorative than the "highly decorative decorative pattern 41" shown in Figure 76-1 (1), etc.

In the variable presentation, the presentation control unit 300 displays three rows of decorative symbols 41 in a variable manner, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then temporarily stops the left-row decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "2"), then the right-row decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "3"), and then the middle decorative symbol (for example, the number "1"). After all decorative symbols 41 have been temporarily stopped in this manner, all decorative symbols 41 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special symbols. Note that the combination of stopped decorative symbols 41, "213," shown in Figure 76-1 (1), is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a losing draw. The decorative symbols 41 are also an example of a presentation symbol.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 76-1 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed (the performance symbol is being displayed) by the special symbol variable control unit 233 (see FIG. 6, etc.). In other words, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol while the special symbol is being displayed. The variable image 51 can also be considered as an image suggesting the contents of the random number used in the special symbol lottery for the special symbol being displayed. The variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side of the display area of the image display unit 114) when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and disappears when the special symbol is displayed in a static state. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. A variable base is also displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.
The variable image 51 may be erased (not displayed) when the variable performance ends, or may be erased (not displayed) before the variable performance ends (during the variable performance).

Furthermore, the variable image 51 changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed than if the result is a miss. For example, if the colors of the variable image 51 are set to white, blue, green, red, or rainbow, the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be 100%.

(Pending image 52)
As shown in FIG. 76-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved image 52 based on information in the memory area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). In other words, the reserved image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. The reserved image 52 can also be considered an image suggesting the contents of the random numbers that have not been used (not yet executed) in the special symbol lottery (jackpot determination). In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the results of the preliminary determination process.
The reserved image 52 has a smaller display size than the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. A reserved base is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable base of the variable image 51 and the reserved base of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes. Hereinafter, the display mode of the variable image 51, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 52, which is white, may be referred to as the normal display mode.

As described above, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52. Therefore, a win at the first starting port 121 can result in up to four pending images 52 being displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, in this embodiment, the multiple pending images 52 generated by a win at the first starting port 121 are displayed in an area to the left of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position further away, that is, from right to left.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are also generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 52 generated by a winning game ball entering the second starting hole 122 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 51, in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 to a position farther away, that is, from left to right.
In this embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms. Furthermore, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the first starting port 121 may be displayed in a different form from the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 displayed upon winning the second starting port 122.

In addition, in the following description, the up to four pending images 52 that are displayed may be referred to as the "first pending image 52," "second pending image 52," "third pending image 52," and "fourth pending image 52," in order of their proximity to the variable image 51.

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 76-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a reserved number display 55 based on information in the memory area corresponding to reserved balls in RAM 303 (see FIG. 4, etc.). This reserved number display 55 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes in number depending on the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the reserved number display 55, the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
As shown in Fig. 76-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a small symbol 56, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol change control unit 233 (see Fig. 6, etc.) based on winning at the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the performance control unit 300, and is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 56 are three images each corresponding to the decorative patterns 41, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small patterns 56 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative patterns 41. As mentioned above, the decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in either a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 56 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of text. However, the small patterns 56 may also be displayed in a display mode that displays images such as pictures and characters in addition to text. In other words, the small patterns 56 may be less decorative than the highly decorative decorative patterns 41.

The small symbols 56 are displayed (vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting slot 121 or the second starting slot 122. As the small symbols 56 scroll, number images are displayed in increments of one from "1" to "9," and then the numbers are displayed again in increments of one from "1." When the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the small symbols 56 are also displayed in a static state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the statically displayed small symbols 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbols 41. To further explain, in the example of Figure 76-1 (1), the number corresponding to the decorative symbols 41's "213" is displayed as the small symbols 56. The small symbols 56 can also be considered as performance symbols.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 76-1(1), a stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc. This stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idols, anime characters, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The stage image 61 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 61.
In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 selects one of the presentation modes and executes a variable presentation in the selected presentation mode. The presentation control unit 300 then displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, a presentation mode is provided for each game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Each time the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes, the presentation control unit 300 sets the presentation mode corresponding to the changed game state and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the set presentation mode. Furthermore, when a variable presentation in one presentation mode has been performed a predetermined number of times, the presentation control unit 300 switches the presentation mode and displays the stage image 61 in a display mode corresponding to the switched presentation mode. Therefore, the presentation mode can also be considered as the stage displayed in the stage image 61. Furthermore, the stage image 61 (the display mode of the stage image 61) may be switched, for example, when a specific variable presentation (e.g., a variable presentation in which an SP reach or SPSP reach presentation is performed) is performed.
In this embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed on a layer behind other performance images such as the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

(First effect image 501 at the start)
78(2), the image display unit 114 displays a first start effect image 501. The first start effect image 501 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that start to change. In the illustrated example, the first start effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Button operation image 502)
As shown in FIG. 78 (5), a button operation image 502 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button operation image 502 is an image that is displayed when a button operation effect is being executed. The display of this button operation image 502 allows the player to recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161. In the example shown, an image that resembles the effect button 161 and a gauge that indicates the valid operation period are displayed as the button operation image 502. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 161 is accepted by the effect control unit 300 as valid. The button operation image 502 is displayed during the valid operation period, and if the effect button 161 is operated between the display of the button operation image 502 and the lapse of the valid operation period, a predetermined effect is executed.

(First effect image 503 when stopped)
79(9), the image display unit 114 displays the first stop effect image 503. The first stop effect image 503 is an image that highlights the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the stopped left-row decorative pattern 41.

(Demo image 605)
81(2), a demo image 605 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The demo image 605 is an image showing content related to the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the demo image 605 is displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a waiting state for customers.

(First image during operation 504)
As shown in FIG. 83 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a first image during operation 504. The first image during operation 504 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 161 is operated while the button operation effect is being executed (while the button operation image 502 is being displayed, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the first image during operation 504 is displayed in a layer on the image display unit 114 that is closer to the player than the layer in which the decorative patterns 41 are displayed, and in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the first image during operation 504 is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Zone promotional image 505)
As shown in FIG. 84 (2), a zone teasing image 505 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone teasing image 505 is an image that teases the execution of a zone effect. In this embodiment, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed when the zone teasing effect is being executed. In the example shown, the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in a layer on the nearer side (toward the player) than the layer on which the decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114, in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see.

(Starting second effect image 555)
85(2), the image display unit 114 displays a start-up second effect image 555. The start-up second effect image 555 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that are about to start changing. In the illustrated example, the start-up second effect image 555 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Second effect image 506 when stopped)
85(6), the image display unit 114 displays a second stop effect image 506. The second stop effect image 506 is an image that highlights the stopped decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of stopped decorative symbols 41.

(First effect image of reel 507)
87(5), the image display unit 114 displays a first reel effect image 507. The first reel effect image 507 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 1152. In the example shown in the figure, the first reel effect image 507 is displayed around the middle movable reel 1152 in the shape of the middle movable reel 1152.

(Step image 508)
As shown in FIG. 87 (6), a step image 508 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The step image 508 is an image that notifies the player of the stage currently being performed in the step performance. In this embodiment, the display mode of the step image 508 changes depending on the stage currently being performed in the step performance. In the example shown, the step image 508 displays the text "Step 1," which indicates that the stage in the step performance is the first stage.

(First reach line image 509)
88 (14), a first reach line image 509 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach line image 509 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the first reach line image 509 is displayed in blue.

(First reach notification image 510)
As shown in Figure 88 (14), a first reach notification image 510 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first reach notification image 510 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. In the example shown, the first reach notification image 510 is displayed between the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41, above the first reach line image 509. In addition, the first reach notification image 510 displays the text "Reach!" indicating that a reach has been achieved.

(Pseudo-continuous image 511)
As shown in FIG. 88 (16), a pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive image 511 is an image that notifies users that a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed when it stops. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed instead of the middle row decorative pattern 41. However, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may also be displayed even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the pseudo consecutive image 511 moves from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114. Note that the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed as a variable or stopped image as part of the middle row decorative pattern 41, as will be described later. Therefore, the pseudo consecutive image 511 can also be broadly considered to be an effect pattern.

(Pseudo-continuous provocation effect image 512)
As shown in Fig. 89 (17), a pseudo consecutive winning hype effect image 512 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo consecutive winning hype effect image 512 is an image that emphasizes the pseudo consecutive winning image 511, and is an image that indicates that the pseudo consecutive winning image 511 will stop, i.e., that a pseudo consecutive winning performance will be executed. In this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive winning hype effect image 512 is displayed when a pseudo consecutive winning performance is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, the pseudo consecutive winning hype effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive winning image 511.

(Second effect image of reel 513)
90(2), the image display unit 114 displays a second reel effect image 513. The second reel effect image 513 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 1151. In the example shown in the figure, the second reel effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable reel 1151.

(Effect image 514 when pseudo consecutive stops)
91 (13), a pseudo-continuous stop effect image 514 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo-continuous stop effect image 514 is an image that emphasizes the stopped pseudo-continuous image 511. In the example shown, the pseudo-continuous stop effect image 514 is displayed around the stopped pseudo-continuous image 511.

(Re-change notification image 515)
As shown in FIG. 91 (15), a re-change notification image 515 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The re-change notification image 515 is an image that notifies that the decorative pattern 41 will change again due to the pseudo-consecutive effect. In the example shown, the re-change notification image 515 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 in the left-right direction, above the three columns of decorative patterns 41. In addition, the re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2" indicating the number of times the decorative pattern 41 will change in the change effect due to the re-change.

(Transition image 516)
As shown in FIG. 94 (4), a transition image 516 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The transition image 516 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect being executed will transition from a normal reach effect to an SP reach effect. In this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed across the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the transition image 516 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41, etc., instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the transition image 516 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when the transition image 516 is displayed.

(SP Reach Image 517)
As shown in FIG. 94 (6), an SP reach image 517 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This SP reach image 517 is an image indicating that an SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 517 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game. In this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed over the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the SP reach image 517 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41 or the like, instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SP reach image 517 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when an SP reach effect is being executed.

(SP promotion first effect image 518)
95(9), an SP provocation first effect image 518 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP provocation first effect image 518 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a different number from the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the example shown, the SP provocation first effect image 518 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(SP promotion second effect image 519)
95(11), an SP provocation second effect image 519 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP provocation second effect image 519 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the example shown, the SP provocation second effect image 519 is displayed on the side where the middle row decorative pattern 41 advances and the side where it returns.

(Switching image 520)
As shown in FIG. 95 (14), a switching image 520 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The switching image 520 is an image for switching the background (display mode of the stage image 61) of the decorative pattern 41 and the like from the background corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect to the background (display mode of the stage image 61) before the reach effect starts in the variable effect. The switching image 520 is displayed across the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The switching image 520 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, variable image 51, reserved image 52, and stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and small pattern 56.

(Advanced image 521)
As shown in FIG. 97 (2), a development image 521 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development image 521 is an image that notifies players that a development effect will be executed when the development image 521 stops. In the example shown, the development image 521 moves so as to swap its display position with the middle row decorative pattern 41. As will be described later, the development image 521 is displayed in a variable or stopped state as part of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Therefore, the development image 521 can also be broadly regarded as an effect pattern.

(Reach promotion first effect image 522)
99(2), a reach stimulation first effect image 522 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach stimulation first effect image 522 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach stimulation performance. In the example shown, the reach stimulation first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

(Reach teaser second effect image 523)
As shown in Figure 99 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach-prompting second effect image 523. The reach-prompting second effect image 523 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach-prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach-prompting second effect image 523 is displayed after the reach-prompting first effect image 522 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach-prompting second effect image 523 is displayed above and below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

(Third effect image 524 when stopped)
100(4), the image display unit 114 displays a third effect image 524 at stop. The third effect image 524 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 that have stopped after the start of the reach-eye stimulation performance. In the example shown in the figure, the third effect image 524 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41.

(Third effect image at start 525)
101(2), a start-up third effect image 525 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start-up third effect image 525 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that start to change. In the illustrated example, the start-up third effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Third effect image 526)
101(5), a third reel effect image 526 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reel effect image 526 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 1153. In the example shown in the figure, the third reel effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable reel 1153.

(Second image during operation 527)
As shown in FIG. 102 (12), the image display unit 114 displays a second image 527 during operation. The second image 527 during operation is an image displayed when the effect button 161 is operated while the button operation effect is being executed (during the display of the button operation image 502, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the second image 527 during operation is displayed in a layer on the image display unit 114 closer to the player than the layer in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed, in a display area overlapping the three columns of decorative symbols 41. Therefore, when the second image 527 during operation is displayed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, by displaying the second image 527 in a display area different from the display area of the decorative symbols 41, the decorative symbols 41 may be visible even while the second image 527 during operation is displayed. In the illustrated example, the second image 527 during operation displays the text "Hot!?", which raises expectations that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot.

(Zone notification image 528)
102 (14), a zone notification image 528 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This zone notification image 528 is an image that notifies the execution of a zone effect. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 528 displays the text "Entering the zone!"

(Zone effect image 529)
102 (14), a zone effect image 529 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone effect image 529 is an image that emphasizes the zone notification image 528. In the illustrated example, the zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528.

(Zone execution image 530)
102 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone execution image 530 is an image that notifies the user that a zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone execution image 530 is displayed in the text "Zone" at the top of the display area of the image display unit 114.

(Second reach line image 531)
As shown in Fig. 103 (19), a second reach line image 531 is displayed on the image display section 114. The second reach line image 531 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The second reach line image 531 has a higher expectation level than the first reach line image 509 (see Fig. 88 (14)). In the illustrated example, the second reach line image 531 is displayed in red.

(Second reach notification image 532)
As shown in FIG. 103 (19), a second reach notification image 532 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second reach notification image 532 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. The second reach notification image 532 has a higher expectation level than the first reach notification image 510 (see FIG. 88 (14)). In the example shown, the second reach notification image 532 is displayed between the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right, above the second reach line image 531. The second reach notification image 532 also displays the text "Chance!"

(Development effect image 534)
104 (31), an development effect image 534 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The development effect image 534 is an image that emphasizes the stopped development image 521. In the example shown in the figure, the development effect image 534 is displayed around the stopped development image 521.

(Fourth effect image 535)
104 (32), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth reel effect image 535. The fourth reel effect image 535 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 1152 in the development performance. In the illustrated example, the fourth reel effect image 535 is a radial image centered on the middle movable reel 1152.

(SPSP reach image 536)
As shown in FIG. 105 (33), an SPSP reach image 536 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 536 is an image indicating that an SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 536 is, for example, a moving image of a battle between characters appearing in content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed across the entire display area of the image display unit 114. Also, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed as a background for the decorative pattern 41 or the like, instead of the stage image 61. Therefore, the SPSP reach image 536 can also be regarded as the stage image 61. The stage (effect mode) in this case is a stage (effect mode) specific to when an SPSP reach effect is being executed.

(SPSP suggestion image 601)
105 (33), an SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP suggestion image 601 is an image that suggests the expectation (jackpot probability) of a jackpot game being executed in the SPSP reach effect. In the example shown, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Battle" that suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 40%" that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is 40%.

(Chance eye first effect image 537)
112(7), a first chance eye effect image 537 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first chance eye effect image 537 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the first chance eye effect image 537 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Button effect image 557)
As shown in FIG. 118 (43), a button effect image 557 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button effect image 557 is an image that emphasizes the image that resembles the effect button 161 in the button operation image 502. In this embodiment, a button operation effect in which the button effect image 557 is displayed is more likely to be a desirable effect than a button operation effect in which the button effect image 557 is not displayed. In the example shown in the figure, the button effect image 557 is displayed around the image that resembles the effect button 161 in the button operation image 502.

(Success image 538)
As shown in FIG. 118 (44), a success image 538 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The success image 538 is an image that suggests or notifies that the effect performed in the SPSP reach effect has been successful. In this embodiment, the success image 538 is displayed only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

(First rainbow image 539)
As shown in FIG. 118 (45), a first rainbow image 539 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first rainbow image 539 is an image that highlights the three movable role pieces 115, and is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The first rainbow image 539 is displayed after the start of the winning performance and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number of digits. In the example shown, the first rainbow image 539 is a radial image centered on the middle movable role piece 115, displayed in rainbow colors.

(Second rainbow image 606)
118 (47), a second rainbow image 606 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second rainbow image 606 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The second rainbow image 606 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number.

(Third rainbow image 540)
As shown in FIG. 119 (49), a third rainbow image 540 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third rainbow image 540 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The third rainbow image 540 is displayed when a doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the third rainbow image 540 is a radial image centered on the middle row decorative symbol 41, displayed in rainbow colors.

(Double number first effect image 556)
119 (51), a doublet first effect image 556 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The doublet first effect image 556 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative patterns 41. In the illustrated example, the doublet first effect image 556 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41.

(Fourth rainbow image 607)
119 (52), a fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth rainbow image 607 is an image emphasizing that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot, and is a rainbow-colored effect image emphasizing the promotion teasing effect. The fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed when the promotion teasing effect is executed.

(Double number second effect image 541)
119 (54), a doublet second effect image 541 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The doublet second effect image 541 is an image that highlights the doublet decorative symbols 41 that were not promoted after the promotion teasing performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet second effect image 541 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41.

(Jackpot game notification image 542)
As shown in FIG. 119 (56), a jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot game notification image 542 is an image that notifies the start of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In the example shown, the jackpot game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!", which indicates the start of a jackpot game. The jackpot game notification image 542 indicates the type of jackpot (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the jackpot game ends.

(Fifth rainbow image 608)
120 (57), a fifth rainbow image 608 is displayed on the image display section 114. The fifth rainbow image 608 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that a big win game is being executed.

(First right-hand hit image 609)
As shown in Fig. 120 (58), a first right-hit image 609 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The first right-hit image 609 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the first right-hit image 609 is displayed with the text "right-hit" and an arrow mark pointing to the right.

(Second right-hand hit image 543)
As shown in FIG. 120 (59), a second right-hit image 543 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second right-hit image 543 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The second right-hit image 543 has a smaller display size than the first right-hit image 609 (see FIG. 120 (58)). In the example shown, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the second right-hit image 543. The second right-hit image 543 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game and in a time-saving game state.

(Round number image 544)
As shown in Fig. 120 (59), a round number image 544 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 544 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played in a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."

(Image 545 during the round)
120 (59), a round-in-progress image 545 is displayed on the image display unit 114. This round-in-progress image 545 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The round-in-progress image 545 is displayed during a round in a jackpot game.

(Time-saving start image 546)
120 (60), a time-saving start image 546 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The time-saving start image 546 is an image that notifies the start of a time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Entering special time-saving!!" which suggests or notifies that the gaming state will be controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

(Warning image 610)
As shown in FIG. 120 (61), an attention-calling image 610 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The attention-calling image 610 is an image that calls the player's attention. The attention-calling image 610 is displayed during a jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the attention-calling image 610 displays the text "Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card or have it stolen."

(Company name image 611)
120 (62), a company name image 611 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The company name image 611 is an image showing the name of the company that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine 100 (the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 100) or the company that does business related to the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, the company name image 611 shows the text "XY Company."

(Fourth effect image at the start 547)
129(2), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth start effect image 547. The fourth start effect image 547 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that are about to start changing. In the illustrated example, the fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Reach teaser third effect image 548)
As shown in Fig. 129 (5), a reach-prompting third effect image 548 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach-prompting third effect image 548 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach-prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach-prompting third effect image 548 may be displayed only when the target of the reach-prompting performance is the decorative symbol 41 of "7". In the example shown in the figure, the reach-prompting third effect image 548 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(Fourth effect image 549 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 129 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a fourth effect image 549 at stop. The fourth effect image 549 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 that has stopped after the reach-eye stimulation effect has started. In this embodiment, the fourth effect image 549 at stop may be displayed only when the target of the reach-eye stimulation effect is the "7" decorative symbol 41. In the example shown in the figure, the fourth effect image 549 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41.

(Sixth rainbow image 612)
129(7), a sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth rainbow image 612 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed in a frame shape on the image display unit 114. In addition, the sixth rainbow image 612 starts to be displayed before the stopped (temporary stopped) display of the doublet decorative symbol 41 starts in the variable performance.

(7th rainbow image 613)
As shown in FIG. 129 (8), the seventh rainbow image 613 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh rainbow image 613 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The seventh rainbow image 613 starts to be displayed before the stopped (temporary stopped) display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number of digits starts in the variable performance. In the illustrated example, the text "Yay!" is displayed as the seventh rainbow image 613.

(Double number teaser first effect image 550)
As shown in FIG. 130 (9), a doublet first effect image 550 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The doublet first effect image 550 is an image that indicates that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach-eye performance, will be stopped. In other words, the doublet first effect image 550 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach-eye performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet first effect image 550 is displayed above and below the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Double number teaser second effect image 551)
As shown in FIG. 130 (10), a doublet teasing second effect image 551 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image that teases the fact that the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach-eye performance, will be stopped. In other words, the doublet teasing second effect image 551 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is the same decorative pattern 41 as the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 in the normal reach-eye performance. In the illustrated example, the doublet teasing second effect images 551 are displayed above, below, left, and right of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Fifth effect image 552 when stopped)
130 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a fifth effect image 552 at stop. The fifth effect image 552 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative symbols 41 that stop with the same numbers as the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eyes. In the illustrated example, the fifth effect image 552 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative symbols 41.

(Sixth effect image 553 when stopped)
130 (14), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth effect image 553 at stop. The sixth effect image 553 at stop is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative symbols 41 that have stopped in the normal reach effect. In the example shown in the figure, the sixth effect image 553 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41.

(8th rainbow image 614)
131 (18), an eighth rainbow image 614 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth rainbow image 614 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that a jackpot game will be executed. In particular, the eighth rainbow image 614 emphasizes that a jackpot game that will activate the big prize slot 125 for 10 rounds will be executed.

(Seventh effect image 554 when stopped)
134 (13), a seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh effect image 554 at stop is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has stopped in the SP reach performance. In the example shown, the seventh effect image 554 at stop is displayed around the middle row decorative pattern 41 that has low decorativeness.

(9th Rainbow Image 615)
As shown in FIG. 134 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth rainbow image 615. The ninth rainbow image 615 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The ninth rainbow image 615 is displayed after the start of the button operation effect (decisive button operation effect) in the SP reach effect, and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41. In the illustrated example, the text "Breakthrough!" is displayed as the ninth rainbow image 615.

(Third reach line image 602)
As shown in Fig. 136 (5), a third reach line image 602 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach line image 602 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41. The third reach line image 602 has a higher expectation level than the first reach line image 509 (see Fig. 88 (14)) and the second reach line image 531 (see Fig. 103 (19)). In the illustrated example, the third reach line image 602 is displayed in gold.

(Third reach notification image 603)
As shown in FIG. 136 (5), a third reach notification image 603 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third reach notification image 603 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved. The third reach notification image 603 has a higher expectation level than the first reach notification image 510 (see FIG. 88 (14)) and the second reach notification image 532 (see FIG. 103 (19)). In the illustrated example, the third reach notification image 603 is displayed between the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right, above the third reach line image 602. The third reach notification image 603 also displays the text "Super Hot!"

(10th rainbow image 616)
138 (21), a tenth rainbow image 616 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth rainbow image 616 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The tenth rainbow image 616 is displayed after the start of the button operation effect (decisive button operation effect) in the SPSP reach effect, and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41.

(11th rainbow image 617)
138 (23), an eleventh rainbow image 617 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh rainbow image 617 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The eleventh rainbow image 617 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number.

(12th rainbow image 618)
As shown in FIG. 138 (23), a twelfth rainbow image 618 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth rainbow image 618 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The twelfth rainbow image 618 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41. In the illustrated example, the text "Congratulations!" is displayed as the twelfth rainbow image 618.

(Resurrected image 558)
142(6), a revival image 558 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The revival image 558 is an image that suggests or notifies that a revival effect will be performed. In the example shown, the revival image 558 displays the text "Revival!!" indicating the revival effect.

(Rainbow reach line image 619)
145(2), a rainbow reach line image 619 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The rainbow reach line image 619 is a linear image that crosses the reach-eye decorative pattern 41, and is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a jackpot.

(Rainbow reach notification image 620)
145(2), a rainbow reach notification image 620 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The rainbow reach notification image 620 is an image that notifies that a reach has been achieved, and is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. In the example shown, the rainbow reach notification image 620 displays the text "Yay!"

(5th effect image at the start 559)
152(2), a fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifth start effect image 559 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that are about to start changing. In the example shown, a fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side where each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 is moving.

(Eighth effect image 560 when stopped)
As shown in Fig. 153 (9), the image display unit 114 displays an eighth effect image 560 at stop. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is an image that emphasizes the decorative pattern 41 that has stopped. The eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed ahead in the direction in which the decorative pattern 41 has been moving. In the example shown in the figure, the eighth effect image 560 at stop is displayed to the left of the left-row decorative pattern 41 that has stopped.

(Starting effect image 6 561)
157(2), a sixth start effect image 561 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The sixth start effect image 561 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that are about to start varying. In the illustrated example, the sixth start effect image 561 is displayed above and below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(9th effect image 562 when stopped)
157(6), a ninth stop effect image 562 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The ninth stop effect image 562 is an image that emphasizes the stopped decorative patterns 41. In the example shown in the figure, the ninth stop effect image 562 is displayed in the direction in which the three rows of stopped decorative patterns 41 were moving when they changed.

(6th effect image 563)
159(5), the image display unit 114 displays a sixth reel effect image 563. The sixth reel effect image 563 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 1152. In the example shown in the figure, the sixth reel effect image 563 is displayed around the middle movable reel 1152 in the shape of the middle movable reel 1152.

(7th effect image 564)
162(2), a seventh reel effect image 564 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh reel effect image 564 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 1151. In the example shown in the figure, the seventh reel effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable reel 1151.

(Reach tease 4th effect image 565)
170(2), a reach-prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach-prompting fourth effect image 565 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 in the reach-prompting performance. In the example shown in the figure, the reach-prompting fourth effect image 565 is displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.

(10th effect image 566 when stopped)
171(4), a tenth effect image 566 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth effect image 566 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 that have stopped after the start of the reach-eye stimulation performance. In the example shown in the figure, the tenth effect image 566 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41.

(Starting effect image 7: 567)
172(2), a seventh start effect image 567 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventh start effect image 567 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to vary. In the example shown in the figure, the seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 8 of the special feature 568)
172(5), an eighth reel effect image 568 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth reel effect image 568 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 1153. In the example shown in the figure, the eighth reel effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable reel 1153.

(Third image during operation 569)
As shown in FIG. 173 (12), the image display unit 114 displays a third operation image 569. The third operation image 569 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 161 is operated during execution of the button operation effect (during the display of the button operation image 502, during the operation valid period). In the illustrated example, the third operation image 569 is displayed in a layer on the image display unit 114 that is closer to the player than the layer in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed, in a display area that overlaps with the three columns of decorative symbols 41. Therefore, when the third operation image 569 is displayed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see. However, by displaying the third operation image 569 in a display area different from the display area of the decorative symbols 41, the decorative symbols 41 may be visible even while the third operation image 569 is displayed. In addition, in the illustrated example, the third image 569 during operation displays the text "Chance!?", which raises hopes that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot.

(Chance eye second effect image 570)
183(7), the image display unit 114 displays a second chance eye effect image 570. The second chance eye effect image 570 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 of the chance eye. In the example shown in the figure, the second chance eye effect image 570 is displayed around the decorative symbol 41 of the chance eye.

(Starting effect image 8 571)
194(2), an eighth start effect image 571 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eighth start effect image 571 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to vary. In the example shown in the figure, the eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(13th rainbow image 621)
As shown in FIG. 194 (8), a thirteenth rainbow image 621 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth rainbow image 621 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The thirteenth rainbow image 621 is displayed before the decorative symbols 41 with the same number of digits temporarily stop. In the illustrated example, the thirteenth rainbow image 621 displays the text "Here it comes!"

(14th rainbow image 622)
199(2), a fourteenth rainbow image 622 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth rainbow image 622 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The fourteenth rainbow image 622 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41.

(15th rainbow image 623)
As shown in FIG. 199(3), the image display unit 114 displays a 15th rainbow image 623. The 15th rainbow image 623 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 15th rainbow image 623 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41. In the illustrated example, the 15th rainbow image 623 displays the text "Perfect!"

(16th rainbow image 624)
205(4), a 16th rainbow image 624 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 16th rainbow image 624 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 16th rainbow image 624 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number.

(17th Rainbow Image 625)
As shown in FIG. 205 (6), the image display unit 114 displays a 17th rainbow image 625. The 17th rainbow image 625 is displayed. The 17th rainbow image 625 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 17th rainbow image 625 is displayed after the start of the winning performance and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 that is a double-digit number. In the illustrated example, the text "PERFECT!" is displayed as the 17th rainbow image 625.

(Starting effect image 9 572)
211(2), the image display unit 114 displays a ninth start effect image 572. The ninth start effect image 572 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to vary. In the illustrated example, the ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(11th effect image 573 when stopped)
212(9), an eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh stop effect image 573 is an image that highlights the stopped decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the stopped left-row decorative pattern 41.

(Starting effect image 10: 574)
216(2), a tenth start effect image 574 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth start effect image 574 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that are about to start varying. In the example shown in the figure, the tenth start effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(12th effect image 575 when stopped)
216(6), a twelfth effect image 575 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth effect image 575 at stop is an image that highlights the stopped decorative symbols 41. In the example shown in the figure, the twelfth effect image 575 at stop is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 that are stopped.

(Effect image 9 576)
218 (5), a reel ninth effect image 576 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reel ninth effect image 576 is an image that emphasizes the middle movable reel 1152. In the example shown in the figure, the reel ninth effect image 576 is displayed around the middle movable reel 1152 in the shape of the middle movable reel 1152.

(Effect image 10 577)
221 (2), a tenth reel effect image 577 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The tenth reel effect image 577 is an image that emphasizes the left movable reel 1151. In the example shown in the figure, the tenth reel effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable reel 1151.

(Reach tease 5th effect image 578)
230(2), a reach-prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach-prompting fifth effect image 578 is an image that emphasizes the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 in the reach-prompting performance. In the example shown, the reach-prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.

(Reach tease 6th effect image 579)
As shown in FIG. 230 (3), a reach-prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach-prompting sixth effect image 579 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach-prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach-prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed after the reach-prompting fifth effect image 578 is displayed. In the example shown in the figure, the reach-prompting sixth effect image 579 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

(13th effect image 580 when stopped)
231(4), a thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is displayed on the image display unit 114. The thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 that have stopped after the start of the reach-eye stimulation performance. In the example shown in the figure, the thirteenth effect image 580 at stop is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41.

(Starting effect image 11: 581)
232(2), an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh start effect image 581 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to change. In the example shown in the figure, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 11 582)
232 (5), an eleventh reel effect image 582 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The eleventh reel effect image 582 is an image that emphasizes the right movable reel 1153. In the example shown in the figure, the eleventh reel effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable reel 1153.

(Chance Eye 3rd Effect Image 583)
243(7), a third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third chance eye effect image 583 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed around the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(Starting effect image 12: 584)
254(2), a start twelfth effect image 584 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start twelfth effect image 584 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to vary. In the example shown, a start twelfth effect image 584 is displayed to the left of each of the three columns of decorative patterns 41.

(Stage change image 585)
As shown in FIG. 264 (4), a stage change image 585 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stage change image 585 is an image that suggests or notifies that the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 will change. The stage change image 585 is displayed across the entire display area of the image display unit 114. The stage change image 585 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41, the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small pattern 56. In the illustrated example, the stage change image 585 displays the text "change," which suggests or notifies that the stage (presentation mode) will change.

(14th effect image 586 when stopped)
268(4), a fourteenth stop effect image 586 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth stop effect image 586 is an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative symbols 41 displayed by the promotion effect. In the example shown in the figure, the fourteenth stop effect image 586 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41.

(18th Rainbow Image 626)
268(4), an 18th rainbow image 626 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 18th rainbow image 626 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that a promotion effect has been executed.

(Change effect image 533)
270(2), a change effect image 533 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The change effect image 533 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eyes whose numbers have changed. In the example shown in the figure, the change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eyes.

(Pattern effect image 587)
270(4), a pattern effect image 587 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pattern effect image 587 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 that is the target of the pattern change effect. In the example shown in the figure, the pattern effect image 587 is displayed so as to surround each of the reach-eye decorative patterns 41.

(Starting effect image 13: 588)
272(2), a start thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The start thirteenth effect image 588 is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative patterns 41 that are about to start varying. In the example shown, the start thirteenth effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(15th effect image 589 when stopped)
272(6), a fifteenth effect image 589 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fifteenth effect image 589 is an image that emphasizes the less decorative decorative patterns 41 that are stopped. In the example shown in the figure, the fifteenth effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 that are stopped.

(Reach teaser 7th effect image 590)
274(2), a reach-provoking seventh effect image 590 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach-provoking seventh effect image 590 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach-provoking performance. In the example shown in the figure, the reach-provoking seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

(Reach tease 8th effect image 591)
As shown in FIG. 274 (3), the image display unit 114 displays a reach-prompting eighth effect image 591. The reach-prompting eighth effect image 591 is an image that emphasizes the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows in the reach-prompting performance. In this embodiment, the reach-prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed after the reach-prompting seventh effect image 590 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the reach-prompting eighth effect image 591 is displayed above and below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

(Starting effect image 14: 592)
275(2), a fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourteenth start effect image 592 is an image that highlights the decorative patterns 41 that have started to vary. In the example shown, the fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative patterns 41.

(Effect image 12 of the special feature 593)
As shown in FIG. 275 (4), a twelfth reel effect image 593 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The twelfth reel effect image 593 is an image that emphasizes the center movable reel 1152 and the right movable reel 1153. In the illustrated example, the twelfth reel effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable reel 1152 and the right movable reel 1153 in the shape of the movable reel 115, respectively.

(16th effect image 594 when stopped)
275(7), a stop-time 16th effect image 594 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stop-time 16th effect image 594 is an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 that have stopped after the start of the reach-eye stimulation performance. In the example shown in the figure, the stop-time 16th effect image 594 is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41.

(SP promotion third effect image 595)
276 (13), an SP provocation third effect image 595 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP provocation third effect image 595 is an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41, which has the same number as the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows in the SP reach performance. In the illustrated example, the SP provocation third effect images 595 are displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

(Chance Eye 4th Effect Image 596)
278(6), a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth chance eye effect image 596 is an image that emphasizes the chance eye decorative pattern 41. In the example shown in the figure, the fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed so as to surround the chance eye decorative pattern 41.

(19th Rainbow Image 597)
As shown in FIG. 281 (17), a 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 19th rainbow image 597 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot, and is an image that emphasizes the three movable role objects 115. The 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed after the start of the winning performance and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41. In the example shown in the figure, the 19th rainbow image 597 is an image that spreads out from the center of the middle movable role object 1152 and is displayed in rainbow colors.

(20th Rainbow Image 627)
281 (19), the image display unit 114 displays the 20th rainbow image 627. The 20th rainbow image 627 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 20th rainbow image 627 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the decorative symbol 41 with the same number.

(21st Rainbow Image 598)
As shown in FIG. 281 (20), the image display unit 114 displays a 21st rainbow image 598. The 21st rainbow image 598 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 21st rainbow image 598 is displayed after the start of the winning effect and before the display of the doublet decorative symbol 41. In the illustrated example, the 21st rainbow image 598 is displayed in rainbow colors, with the middle row decorative symbol 41 at the center.

(22nd rainbow image 628)
As shown in FIG. 281 (22), the image display unit 114 displays a 22nd rainbow image 628. The 22nd rainbow image 628 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The 22nd rainbow image 628 is displayed when a double-digit decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the 22nd rainbow image 628 displays the text "Well done!"

(17th effect image 599 when stopped)
281 (22), a seventeenth effect image 599 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The seventeenth effect image 599 is a rainbow-colored effect image that highlights the stopped doublet decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the seventeenth effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41.

(Third right-hand shot image 629)
As shown in Figure 281 (24), a third right hit image 629 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The third right hit 629 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The third right hit image 629 is displayed in a larger size than the second right hit image 543 (see Figure 281 (17)). In the illustrated example, the third right hit image 629 displays the text "Aim to the right!"

(Winner notification image 630)
As shown in FIG. 282 (25), a winning notification image 630 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The winning notification image 630 is an image that notifies the player that a gaming ball has entered a specific winning slot (for example, the big winning slot 125). In the illustrated example, the winning notification image 630 displays the text "V."

(23rd rainbow image 631)
282 (26), a 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 23rd rainbow image 631 is an image that is displayed during the execution of a jackpot game, and is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes the winning notification image 630.

(24th rainbow image 632)
282 (28), a 24th rainbow image 632 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The 24th rainbow image 632 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that a jackpot game is being played (that a jackpot game is currently being played). In the example shown, the 24th rainbow image 632 displays the text "bonus," which means a jackpot game.

(Type notification image 633)
282 (30), a type notification image 633 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The type notification image 633 is an image that notifies the player of the jackpot game currently being played. In the illustrated example, the type notification image 633 displays the text "A Bonus," which notifies the player that the jackpot game currently being played is an A Bonus with four rounds.

(25th rainbow image 634)
As shown in FIG. 285 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a 25th rainbow image 634. The 25th rainbow image 634 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 25th rainbow image 634 is displayed before the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, the text "Quin!" is displayed as the 25th rainbow image 634.

(26th Rainbow Image 635)
As shown in FIG. 286 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a 26th rainbow image 635. The 26th rainbow image 635 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 26th rainbow image 635 is displayed before the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, the 26th rainbow image 635 displays the text "rainbow."

(27th Rainbow Image 636)
287 (13), the image display unit 114 displays a 27th rainbow image 636. The 27th rainbow image 636 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 27th rainbow image 636 is displayed when a double-digit decorative symbol 41 is displayed.

(28th Rainbow Image 637)
As shown in FIG. 288 (21), the image display unit 114 displays a 28th rainbow image 637. The 28th rainbow image 637 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The 28th rainbow image 637 is displayed when a double-digit decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the 28th rainbow image 637 displays the text "Amazing!"

(29th Rainbow Image 638)
As shown in FIG. 290 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a 29th rainbow image 638. The 29th rainbow image 638 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 29th rainbow image 638 is displayed while the SP reach effect is being executed and before the start of the deciding effect. In the illustrated example, the 29th rainbow image 638 displays the text "Congratulations!"

(30th Rainbow Image 639)
294 (19), the image display unit 114 displays a 30th rainbow image 639. The 30th rainbow image 639 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that the jackpot game being executed (currently being executed) is a jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds. In the illustrated example, the 30th rainbow image 639 displays the text "BIG BONUS."

(31st rainbow image 640)
294 (20), the image display unit 114 displays a 31st rainbow image 640. The 31st rainbow image 640 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) the history of executed jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the 31st rainbow image 640 displays the text "A," which indicates that an "A bonus" has been executed.

(Blackout image 641)
As shown in FIG. 297 (3), a blackout image 641 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The blackout image 641 is a black image. In this embodiment, the blackout image 641 is displayed on the entire surface of the image display unit 114. In addition, the blackout image 641 is displayed on a layer behind the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, and the second right-hit image 543 on the image display unit 114, and on a layer in front of the stage image 61 and the decorative symbol 41.

(32nd Rainbow Image 642)
As shown in FIG. 297 (5), the image display unit 114 displays a 32nd rainbow image 642. The 32nd rainbow image 642 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. The 32nd rainbow image 642 is displayed before the start of the winning performance and before the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, the 32nd rainbow image 642 displays the text "Congratulations!"

(33rd Rainbow Image 643)
As shown in FIG. 298 (12), the image display unit 114 displays a 33rd rainbow image 643. The 33rd rainbow image 643 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The 33rd rainbow image 643 is displayed when a double-digit decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the 33rd rainbow image 643 displays the text "Awesome!"

(34th Rainbow Image 644)
As shown in FIG. 300(3), the image display unit 114 displays a 34th rainbow image 644. The 34th rainbow image 644 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that a round promotion effect has been executed. The round promotion effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the player that the jackpot game being executed (or being executed) is a jackpot game consisting of a second number of rounds (10 rounds), which is greater than the first number of rounds, after the start of an effect that makes the player recognize that a jackpot game consisting of a first number of rounds (4 rounds) is being executed (for example, the display of the type notification image 633 shown in FIG. 300(1)). In the illustrated example, the 34th rainbow image 644 displays the text "Round Promotion."

(35th Rainbow Image 645)
As shown in FIG. 300(4), the image display unit 114 displays a 35th rainbow image 645. The 35th rainbow image 644 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that a round promotion effect has been executed. In the illustrated example, the 35th rainbow image 645 displays the text "Thank you!"

(36th Rainbow Image 646)
As shown in FIG. 301 (2), the image display unit 114 displays a 36th rainbow image 646. The 36th rainbow image 646 is a rainbow-colored effect image that emphasizes (suggests or notifies) that the number of prize balls based on winning at a specific prize slot (e.g., the large prize slot 125) has reached a predetermined value (5000 in the illustrated example). In the illustrated example, the 36th rainbow image 646 displays the text "5000pt over!"

(37th Rainbow Image 647)
As shown in FIG. 302 (7), the image display unit 114 displays a 37th rainbow image 647. The 37th rainbow image 647 is a rainbow-colored effect image that is displayed when a consecutive reserved symbol display is executed. The consecutive reserved symbol display is a display that is executed when a specific reserved symbol (a reserved symbol that results in a jackpot) is stored. More specifically, the consecutive reserved symbol display is a display that suggests or notifies the user that the result of the reserved special symbol display is a jackpot (the display based on the reserved symbol is a jackpot display) after the start of the jackpot variable display and before the variable display based on the specific reserved symbol starts. In other words, the 37th rainbow image 647 is an image that emphasizes that the result of the reserved special symbol display is a jackpot. In the illustrated example, the 37th rainbow image 647 displays the text "Continuous"("Continuous").

(600 images suggesting a jackpot)
As shown in FIG. 308 (2), a jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is an image that suggests or notifies that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbol 41 and the stage image 61, and on a layer behind the reserved number display 55 and the small symbol 56. In the example shown, the jackpot suggestion image 600 displays the text "Jackpot!?"

(Remaining value notification image 651)
As shown in Fig. 330(1), a remaining value notification image 651 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The remaining value notification image 651 is an image that notifies the MY remaining value. In the illustrated example, the remaining value notification image 651 displays the text "Approximately 50,000 remaining until the complete function is activated," which includes the MY remaining value of "50,000."

(Advance notification image 652)
As shown in Fig. 330 (2), an advance notification image 652 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The advance notification image 652 is an image that provides an advance notification (see S4202 in Fig. 42). In the example shown, the advance notification image 652 displays the text "The complete function will be activated when there are approximately 5000 remaining. If activated, today's game will end," which includes the MY remaining value of "5000."

(Complete notification image 653)
As shown in FIG. 330 (3), a complete notification image 653 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The complete notification image 653 is an image that notifies that the complete function has been activated. In the example shown, the complete notification image 653 displays the text "Complete function activated. The maximum payout limit for one day has been reached. Play has ended for today."

(Waiting notification image 654)
As shown in FIG. 330 (4), a standby notification image 654 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The standby notification image 654 is an image that notifies the player of a wait for completion. In the illustrated example, the standby notification image 654 displays the following text, which suggests or notifies the player that the complete function is in a standby state: "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The complete function will be activated after the jackpot ends. If activated, today's game will end."

(Image 655 under restoration)
332(4), a restoration in progress image 655 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The restoration in progress image 655 is an image that suggests or notifies that the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being restored. In the illustrated example, the restoration in progress image 655 displays the text "Restoring."

(Initializing image 656)
As shown in Fig. 334 (2), an initializing image 656 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initializing image 656 is an image that suggests or notifies that RAM clearing is in progress (various settings of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are being initialized). In the illustrated example, the initializing image 656 displays the text "Initializing."

(Magnetic error image 657)
As shown in Fig. 340 (2), a magnetic error image 657 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The magnetic error image 657 is an image that suggests or notifies that a magnetic error has occurred. In the example shown, the magnetic error image 657 displays the text "Magnetic detection error."

(Dispensing abnormality image 658)
As shown in FIG. 341 (2), an abnormal dispensing image 658 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The abnormal dispensing image 658 is an image that suggests or notifies that a abnormal dispensing has occurred. In the example shown, the abnormal dispensing image 658 displays the text "abnormal dispensing."

(Door open error image 659)
As shown in Figure 342 (2), a door open error image 659 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The door open error image 659 is an image that suggests or notifies that a door open error has occurred. In the example shown, the door open error image 659 displays the text "The door is open."

(Fourth right-hand hit image 660)
As shown in Figure 367 (2), a fourth right-hit image 660 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The fourth right-hit image 660 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. The fourth right-hit image 660 is displayed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121 in the time-saving game state. The fourth right-hit image 660 has a larger display size than the second right-hit image 543 (see Figure 281 (17)). In the illustrated example, the fourth right-hit image 660 displays the text "right-hit" and an arrow pointing right.

(Stage transition image 661)
As shown in FIG. 368 (1), a stage transition image 661 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The stage transition image 661 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 61 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 61 corresponding to the time-shortened gaming state (stage image 61 of the fourth stage) is switched to the stage image 61 corresponding to the normal gaming state (stage image 61 of the first stage) via the stage transition image 661. In the illustrated example, an image resembling a door is displayed as the stage transition image 661 across the entirety of one layer on the image display unit 114.

(Result image 662)
As shown in FIG. 368 (1), a result image 662 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The result image 662 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 662 is displayed when the stage transition image 661 is displayed after a jackpot game has been played. Furthermore, if multiple jackpot games have been played before the stage transition image 661 is displayed, the result image 662 shows the cumulative result of these multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 662 displays the text "TOTAL 3 times," which indicates that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points obtained," which corresponds to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game.

(Left-handed image 663)
As shown in FIG. 368 (2), a left-hit image 663 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The left-hit image 663 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 111. The left-hit image 663 is displayed when the pachinko machine is controlled from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. In the illustrated example, the left-hit image 663 is displayed with the text "left-hit" and an arrow pointing left.

In this embodiment, the first effect image at start 501, the first effect image at stop 503, the second effect image at start 555, the second effect image at stop 506, the first effect image of the reel 507, the pseudo consecutive win promotion effect image 512, the second effect image of the reel 513, the effect image when the pseudo consecutive win is stopped 514, the first effect image of the SP promotion 518, the second effect image of the SP promotion 519, the first effect image of the reach promotion 522, the second effect image of the reach promotion 523, the third effect image at stop 524, the third effect image at start 525, the third effect image of the reel 526, the zone effect image 529, the change effect image 533, the development effect image 534, the fourth effect image of the reel 535, the first effect image of the chance number 537, the button effect image 557, the first effect image of the double numbers 556, the second effect image of the double numbers 541, the fourth effect image at start 547, third effect image of reach tease 548, fourth effect image at stop 549, first effect image of double numbers tease 550, second effect image of double numbers tease 551, fifth effect image at stop 552, sixth effect image at stop 553, seventh effect image at stop 554, fifth effect image at start 559, eighth effect image at stop 560, sixth effect image at start 561, ninth effect image at stop 562, sixth effect image at start 563, seventh effect image of the role 564, fourth effect image of reach stimulation 565, tenth effect image when stopped 566, seventh effect image when started 567, eighth effect image of the role 568, second effect image of chance eye 570, eighth effect image when started 571, ninth effect image when started 572, eleventh effect image when stopped 573, tenth effect image when started 574, twelfth effect image when stopped 575, role 9th effect image 576, 10th effect image 577, 5th reach stimulation effect image 578, 6th reach stimulation effect image 579, 13th effect image when stopped 580, 11th effect image when started 581, 11th effect image 582, 3rd chance eye effect image 583, 12th effect image when started 584, 14th effect image when stopped 586, pattern effect image 587, 13th effect image when started 15th effect image when stopped 589, 7th reach tease effect image 590, 8th reach tease effect image 591, 14th effect image when started 592, 12th effect image of role object 593, 16th effect image when stopped 594, 3rd effect image of SP tease 595, 4th effect image of chance eye 596, 17th effect image when stopped 599, 1st rainbow image 539, 2nd rainbow image 606, 3rd rainbow image 540, 4th rainbow Image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 627, twenty-first rainbow image 598, the 22nd rainbow image 628, the 23rd rainbow image 631, the 24th rainbow image 632, the 25th rainbow image 634, the 26th rainbow image 635, the 27th rainbow image 636, the 28th rainbow image 637, the 29th rainbow image 638, the 30th rainbow image 639, the 31st rainbow image 640, the 32nd rainbow image 642, the 33rd rainbow image 643, the 34th rainbow image 644, the 35th rainbow image 645, the 36th rainbow image 646, and the 37th rainbow image 647 are each different images (different display modes).

In addition, the first chance eye effect image 537, the second chance eye effect image 570, the third chance eye effect image 583, and the fourth chance eye effect image 596 may be referred to as chance eye effect images below.
In addition, the first effect image when stopped 503, the second effect image when stopped 506, the third effect image when stopped 524, the fourth effect image when stopped 549, the fifth effect image when stopped 552, the sixth effect image when stopped 553, the seventh effect image when stopped 554, the eighth effect image when stopped 560, the ninth effect image when stopped 562, the tenth effect image when stopped 566, the eleventh effect image when stopped 573, the twelfth effect image when stopped 575, the thirteenth effect image when stopped 580, the fourteenth effect image when stopped 586, the fifteenth effect image when stopped 589, the sixteenth effect image when stopped 594, and the seventeenth effect image when stopped 599 may be referred to as effect images when stopped hereinafter.
In addition, the reach promotion first effect image 522, the reach promotion second effect image 523, the reach promotion third effect image 548, the reach promotion fourth effect image 565, the reach promotion fifth effect image 578, the reach promotion sixth effect image 579, the reach promotion seventh effect image 590, and the reach promotion eighth effect image 591 may be referred to as reach promotion effect images below.
In addition, the first reach line image 509, the second reach line image 531, the third reach line image 602, and the rainbow reach line image 619 may be referred to as reach line images below.
In addition, the first reach notification image 510, the second reach notification image 532, the third reach notification image 603, and the rainbow reach notification image 620 may be referred to as reach notification images below.
In addition, the doublet first effect image 556 and the doublet second effect image 541 may be referred to as doublet effect images hereinafter.

(Rainbow image)
Next, the rainbow image will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays a rainbow image on the image display unit 114. A rainbow image is an image having specific display colors. The specific display colors are display colors that appear to the player as rainbow colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple). The rainbow images include a first rainbow image 539, a second rainbow image 606, a third rainbow image 540, a fourth rainbow image 607, a fifth rainbow image 608, a sixth rainbow image 612, a seventh rainbow image 613, an eighth rainbow image 614, a ninth rainbow image 615, a tenth rainbow image 616, an eleventh rainbow image 617, a twelfth rainbow image 618, a rainbow reach line image 619, a rainbow reach notification image 620, a thirteenth rainbow image 621, a fourteenth rainbow image 622, a fifteenth rainbow image 623, a sixteenth rainbow image 624, a seventeenth rainbow image 625, an eighteenth rainbow image 626, a nineteenth rainbow image 627, a rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 627, twenty-first rainbow image 598, twenty-second rainbow image 628, twenty-third rainbow image 631, twenty-fourth rainbow image 632, twenty-fifth rainbow image 634, twenty-sixth rainbow image 635, twenty-seventh rainbow image 636, twenty-eighth rainbow image 637, twenty-ninth rainbow image 638, thirtieth rainbow image 639, thirty-first rainbow image 640, thirty-second rainbow image 642, thirty-third rainbow image 643, thirty-fourth rainbow image 644, thirty-fifth rainbow image 645, thirty-sixth rainbow image 646, thirty-seventh rainbow image 647, and rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51).

In this embodiment, each rainbow image (first rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, The 20th rainbow image 627, the 21st rainbow image 598, the 22nd rainbow image 628, the 23rd rainbow image 631, the 24th rainbow image 632, the 25th rainbow image 634, the 26th rainbow image 635, the 27th rainbow image 636, the 28th rainbow image 637, the 29th rainbow image 638, the 30th rainbow image 639, the 31st rainbow image 640, the 32nd rainbow image 642, the 33rd rainbow image 643, the 34th rainbow image 644, the 35th rainbow image 645, the 36th rainbow image 646, the 37th rainbow image 647, and the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51) are all displayed in a certain operational mode. One example of such an operational mode is one in which the rainbow colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) scroll in order from left to right in the rainbow image, and the colors that have passed the right end start scrolling again from the left end. Another example of an operational mode may be, for example, a mode in which the rainbow colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) in a rainbow image scroll sequentially from right to left, and a color that has passed the left end begins scrolling again from the right end. Another example of an operational mode may be, for example, a mode in which the rainbow colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) in a rainbow image scroll sequentially from top to bottom, and a color that has passed the bottom end begins scrolling again from the top end. Another example of an operational mode may be, for example, a mode in which the rainbow colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) in a rainbow image scroll sequentially from bottom to top, and a color that has passed the top end begins scrolling again from the bottom end.

In addition, in this embodiment, each rainbow image (first rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 627, 7. The twentieth rainbow image 627, the twenty-first rainbow image 598, the twenty-second rainbow image 628, the twenty-third rainbow image 631, the twenty-fourth rainbow image 632, the twenty-fifth rainbow image 634, the twenty-sixth rainbow image 635, the twenty-seventh rainbow image 636, the twenty-eighth rainbow image 637, the twenty-ninth rainbow image 638, the thirty-first rainbow image 639, the thirty-first rainbow image 640, the thirty-second rainbow image 642, the thirty-third rainbow image 643, the thirty-fourth rainbow image 644, the thirty-fifth rainbow image 645, the thirty-sixth rainbow image 646, the thirty-seventh rainbow image 647, and the rainbow-colored suspended image 52 (variable image 51) are all displayed in a single cycle. One cycle is, for example, 0.5 seconds.

The rainbow images include a rainbow image that is displayed while a variable effect is being performed and a rainbow image that is displayed when a variable effect is not being performed.
Any rainbow image displayed during the execution of a variable effect means that the variable effect being executed is a jackpot variable effect. In other words, any rainbow image displayed during the execution of a variable effect has a 100% expectation rate. In other words, any rainbow image displayed during the execution of a variable effect suggests or notifies that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot (the variable effect being executed is a jackpot variable effect).
The rainbow images displayed when no variable effects are being performed include rainbow images that suggest that a game that is more advantageous to the player will be played (e.g., eighth rainbow image 614, thirtieth rainbow image 639, thirty-fourth rainbow image 644, thirty-fifth rainbow image 645, thirty-seventh rainbow image 647), and rainbow images that are displayed regardless of whether a game that is more advantageous to the player will be played (e.g., fifth rainbow image 608, twenty-fourth rainbow image 632), even if a game that is more advantageous to the player will not be played.

(Visual recognition mode of decorative pattern 41)
Next, a description will be given of the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41. The visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 refers to the mode in which the decorative symbol 41 is recognized by the player.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 displays the decorative pattern 41 in various visual modes according to the progress of the performance.
76-1 to 76-5 are diagrams showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 controlled by the performance control unit 300.

Figure 76-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first viewing mode. The first viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that has been fixed and stopped. In the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to see, hard to see, or impossible to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the first viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is stationary. However, even in the first viewing mode, characters in the decorative pattern 41 or images that emphasize the number portions of the decorative pattern 41 (such as the outline portions surrounding the numbers) may be displayed in motion.

FIG. 76-1 (2) is a diagram showing the second viewing mode. The second viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative symbols 41 that begin to change immediately after the start of the change effect. In the second viewing mode, the decorative symbols 41 are opaque (low transparency) and visible to the player. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to see, difficult to see, or even impossible to see through the display area of the decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, in the second viewing mode, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a dynamic manner. In the illustrated example, in the second viewing mode, three rows of the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a dynamic manner, moving upward. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, an image emphasizing the decorative symbols 41 is displayed, such as the first start effect image 501.
In this embodiment, there are multiple operation modes of the decorative pattern 41 in the second visual mode, each with a different degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or notified depending on which operation mode the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in.

Figure 76-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third viewing mode. The third viewing mode is a viewing mode in which the decorative pattern 41 accelerates after the start of variation. In the third viewing mode, the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 may be the same as that of the second viewing mode, or may be higher than that of the second viewing mode. If the transparency of the decorative pattern 41 is higher in the third viewing mode than in the second viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 will be more difficult for the player to see when displayed in the third viewing mode than when displayed in the second viewing mode, and the stage image 61 will be easier to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the example shown, the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode is displayed as moving downward.

FIG. 76-1 (4) shows the fourth viewing mode. The fourth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative symbols 41 that change the fastest in the variable presentation. In the fourth viewing mode, the decorative symbols 41 have a higher transparency than in the second viewing mode, making them difficult, difficult to see, or impossible for the player to see. More specifically, each of the decorative symbols 41 in the row representing the fourth viewing mode is difficult, difficult to see, or impossible to see compared to the second viewing mode. Furthermore, in the fourth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is easier to see through the display area of the decorative symbols 41 than in the second viewing mode. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 in the fourth viewing mode are displayed as moving downward. In addition, when the drawing shows that the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 are changing (scrolling) particularly quickly and are difficult or impossible to see, the target performance pattern is displayed with an arrow to make it easier to understand.
The transparency of the decorative pattern 41 in the third viewing mode may be the same as that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode, or may be higher than that of the decorative pattern in the second viewing mode and lower than that of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode.

Figure 76-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth viewing mode. The fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that fluctuates at a slower speed than the fourth viewing mode. In the fifth viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the fourth viewing mode, making it visible to the player. More specifically, each of the decorative patterns 41 in the row that is the fifth viewing mode is visible. In other words, the fifth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to see than the fourth viewing mode. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to see, is difficult to see, or is impossible to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. In the example shown, the decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode is displayed as moving downward.

Figure 76-1 (6) is a diagram showing the sixth viewing mode. The sixth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative symbol 41 that stops. In the sixth viewing mode, the decorative symbol 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the sixth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, difficult to view, or impossible to view through the display area of the decorative symbol 41. Furthermore, in the sixth viewing mode, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in motion. In the example shown, in the sixth viewing mode, the left-row decorative symbol 41 that was moving downward is displayed in motion, bouncing and moving upward. Furthermore, when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, such as the first effect image 503 when the decorative symbol 41 stops.

Figure 76-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh viewing mode. The seventh viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 that is temporarily stopped. In the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is opaque (has low transparency) and is visible to the player. In other words, the seventh viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to see than the fourth viewing mode. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to see, hard to see, or impossible to see through the display area of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the seventh viewing mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the seventh viewing mode, the left-column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion, swaying left and right at a predetermined cycle. This predetermined cycle may be referred to below as the first cycle. The first cycle is, for example, one second.

Figure 76-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth visual mode. The eighth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows when a reach is achieved (when the reach effect begins). In the eighth visual mode, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in motion. In the example shown, in the eighth visual mode, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in motion as if raising their right hands. In this embodiment, the motion mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the eighth visual mode includes multiple motion modes with different degrees of expectation, and the degree of expectation is suggested or indicated depending on which motion mode the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in.

The ninth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 in the reach prompting effect. The ninth visual recognition mode includes a first mode to a fourth mode.
FIG. 76-2 (9) is a diagram showing the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. The first mode of the ninth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative symbols 41 at the beginning of the reach-inducing effect. In the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in their entirety, while the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed with only the number portion and not the character portion. Furthermore, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in motion, moving downward at a slower speed than in the fifth viewing mode. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode, an image emphasizing the left-row decorative symbols 41 is displayed, such as the reach-inducing first effect image 522.

Figure 76-2 (10) is a diagram showing the second mode of the ninth viewing mode. The second mode of the ninth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the middle of the reach-inducing performance. In the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, both of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right columns are displayed in their entirety. Also, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 in the vertical direction, and the right column decorative symbols 41 are displayed above the left column decorative symbols 41. Also, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a moving manner. In the example shown, in the second mode of the ninth viewing mode, the left column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a moving manner so as to sway up and down, and the right column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a moving manner so as to move downward at a slower speed than in the first mode of the ninth viewing mode. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode, an image that highlights the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows is displayed, such as the reach teaser second effect image 523.

Figure 76-2 (11) is a diagram showing the third aspect of the ninth visual mode. The third aspect of the ninth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative symbols 41 at the end of a reach-prompting effect. In the third aspect of the ninth visual mode, the left-row decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, and the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a way that the number that was the target of the reach-prompting effect passes below and the number next to the number that was the target of the reach-prompting effect moves from above to below. In other words, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third aspect of the ninth visual mode during a reach-prompting effect, the left-row decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped without being displayed in the sixth visual mode (see Figure 76-1 (6)). Furthermore, in the third aspect of the ninth visual mode, the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a way that they move downward at a faster speed than in the first aspect of the ninth visual mode.

As shown in Figure 76-2 (12), the fourth aspect of the ninth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative symbols 41 at the end of the reach-inducing effect. In the fourth aspect of the ninth visual mode, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows stop, resulting in a reach. In addition, in the fourth aspect of the ninth visual mode, each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth aspect of the ninth visual mode, an image that emphasizes the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed, as in the third stop effect image 524.

In this embodiment, when a reach prompting effect is executed, if a reach prompting effect is not executed, decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third aspect of the ninth viewing mode, and if a reach prompting effect is executed, decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing mode. That is, in a reach prompting effect, decorative symbol 41 is displayed in either the third aspect of the ninth viewing mode or the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing mode. However, if a reach prompting effect is executed after a reach prompting effect, after decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third aspect of the ninth viewing mode, the numbers that have passed in the right-column decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in an action that returns them to the upper side, thereby establishing a reach, and decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing mode. On the other hand, after decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth aspect of the ninth viewing mode, decorative symbol 41 is not displayed in the third aspect of the ninth viewing mode.

The tenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the normal reach effect. The tenth visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode.
FIG. 76-2 (13) is a diagram showing the first mode of the tenth viewing mode. The first mode of the tenth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the middle row decorative symbols 41 in the first half of the normal reach effect. In the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the decorative symbols 41 have a lower transparency than in the fourth viewing mode (see FIG. 76-1 (4)), making them visible to the player. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative symbols 41 is visible. In other words, the first mode of the tenth viewing mode is a viewing mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth viewing mode. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the stage image 61 is difficult to view, is difficult to view, or is impossible to view through the display area of the decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, in the first mode of the tenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 of the first aspect of the tenth visual aspect is displayed in an operational manner to move downward.

Figure 76-2 (14) is a diagram showing the second mode of the tenth visual mode. The second mode of the tenth visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the latter half of the normal reach effect. In the second mode of the tenth visual mode, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed as moving downward at a higher speed than in the first mode of the tenth visual mode. Also, in the second mode of the tenth visual mode, after the same number as the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 passes, the next number moves from above to below the reach-eye decorative symbol 41.

The eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the transition image 516 is displayed. The eleventh visual recognition mode includes a first mode and a second mode. In the eleventh visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
FIG. 76-2 (15) is a diagram showing a first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 in the first half of the display of the transition image 516. In the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, the character portions of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are erased, thereby reducing their decorativeness, and the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner, moving in the left-right direction toward the center of the image display unit 114 and upward.

FIG. 76-2 (16) is a diagram illustrating a second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 in the latter half of the display of the transition image 516. In the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking motion. Also, in the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode, each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a moving motion to both upper corners of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a rotating motion at a predetermined cycle. Hereinafter, this predetermined cycle may be referred to as the second cycle. The second cycle is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the second cycle is longer than the first cycle (see FIG. 76-1 (7)).
The second period may be shorter than the first period, or the first period and the second period may be the same length of time.

The twelfth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the SP reach effect is being executed. In the twelfth visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 has the same visual recognition mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. The twelfth visual recognition mode includes first to sixth modes.
FIG. 76-3 (17) shows the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. The first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode is the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols 41 when the middle row decorative symbols 41 are fluctuating at high speed. In the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode, the decorative symbols 41 have a higher transparency than in the second visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-1 (2)), making them difficult, difficult to see, or impossible for the player to see. More specifically, each of the middle row decorative symbols 41 is difficult, difficult to see, or impossible to see compared to the second visual recognition mode. Furthermore, in the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode, the background (SP reach image 517) is easier to see through the display area of the middle row decorative symbols 41 than in the second visual recognition mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed as moving from the upper right to the lower left of the image display unit 114.

Figure 76-3 (18) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 12th visual mode. The second mode of the 12th visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is fluctuating at a slow speed. In the second mode of the 12th visual mode, the decorative pattern 41 has a lower transparency than the first mode of the 12th visual mode, making it easier for the player to see. In other words, the second mode of the 12th visual mode is a visual mode that is easier for the player to see than the fourth visual mode. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode, it is more difficult to see the background (SP reach image 517) through the display area of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than when it is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in motion, moving from the upper right to the lower left on the image display unit 114.

Figure 76-3 (19) is a diagram showing the third mode of the twelfth viewing mode. The third mode of the twelfth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when an effect is being executed to tease whether the middle row decorative pattern 41 will stop. In the third mode of the twelfth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the center of the image display unit 114 and is displayed as if it is swaying. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the third mode of the twelfth viewing mode is displayed as if it is swaying between the forward side (lower left side) and the backward side (upper right side). Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed, such as the SP teasing second effect image 519.

76-3 (20) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed as returning to the opposite side of the direction of travel. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode is displayed as moving to the upper right side of the image display unit 114 at a higher speed than in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode.
FIG. 76-3 (21) is a diagram showing the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. The fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode is the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye, is stopped. In the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and displayed as if swinging. Note that the fifth mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode and the seventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-1 (7)) may have different motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as different swing directions, or may have the same motion modes of the decorative pattern 41, such as the same swing direction.

76-3 (22) is a diagram showing the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode. The sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode is a visual mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the middle row decorative symbol 41, which has the same number as the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look, is stopped. When the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the twelfth visual mode, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed, such as the seventh effect image 554 when stopped.
In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 12th viewing mode, if a doublet decorative symbol 41 is not displayed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and if a doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. However, when a doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 12th viewing mode, and then may change again and be displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode. On the other hand, after the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 12th viewing mode, it is not displayed in either the fourth or fifth mode of the 12th viewing mode.

The thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 when a development-inducing effect is executed in the SP reach effect. In the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is the same visual recognition mode as the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode. The thirteenth visual recognition mode includes first to sixth modes.
FIG. 76-3 (23) is a diagram showing the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. The first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbol 41 when the development image 521 is displayed in front of the middle decorative symbol 41. In the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle decorative symbol 41 and the development image 521 are displayed in a rotating motion so that their display positions are swapped. Also, in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, a middle decorative symbol 41 with a number different from the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed. In this case, the number of the middle decorative symbol 41 may be visible to the player, or may be hidden by the development image 521 and be difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 76-3 (24) is a diagram showing the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is the viewing mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in front of the developed image 521. In the second mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed image 521 are displayed in a rotating motion so that their display positions are swapped.

Figure 76-4 (25) is a diagram showing the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode. The third mode of the thirteenth visual mode is the visual mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the developed image 521 and the middle row decorative pattern 41 are displayed side by side. The third mode of the thirteenth visual mode is a visual mode that is easier for the player to view than the fourth visual mode. In the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 and the developed image 521 are displayed in a manner that pushes each other toward the center of the image display section 114.

76-4 (26) is a diagram showing a fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode. The fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the decorative symbols 41 when the development image 521 is not displayed. In the fourth mode of the thirteenth viewing mode, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the center of the image display unit 114.
FIG. 76-4 (27) shows the fifth aspect of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. The fifth aspect of the thirteenth visual recognition mode is the visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 when the middle row decorative pattern 41, which is a number different from the decorative pattern 41 of the reach-eye symbol, is stopped. In the fifth aspect of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and displayed as if swinging. Note that the fifth aspect of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the seventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-1 (7)) may have different motion patterns of the decorative pattern 41, such as different swing directions, or the same motion patterns of the decorative pattern 41, such as the same swing direction. Furthermore, the fifth aspect of the thirteenth visual recognition mode and the fifth aspect of the twelfth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-3 (21)) may have different motion patterns of the decorative pattern 41, or the same motion patterns of the decorative pattern 41.

FIG. 76-4 (28) is a diagram showing the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect. The sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect is the viewing aspect of the decorative pattern 41 when the development image 521 stops. In the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect, the middle decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth aspect of the thirteenth viewing aspect, an image that emphasizes the development image 521, such as the development effect image 534, is displayed.
In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 13th viewing mode in the SP reach performance, if the development image 521 does not stop, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fourth and fifth modes of the 13th viewing mode, and if the development image 521 stops, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth mode of the 13th viewing mode.

FIG. 76-4 (29) shows a fourteenth visual recognition mode. The fourteenth visual recognition mode is a visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols 41 when the SPSP reach effect is being executed. In the fourteenth visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a row in the corners of the image display unit 114, and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden. However, in the fourteenth visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are difficult or impossible for the player to see due to their rapid fluctuation between the reach-eye decorative symbols 41, but they do not have to be hidden. Furthermore, in the fourteenth visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a smaller size than in the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-2 (16)) and the first mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-3 (17)). In the fourteenth visual recognition mode, the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is temporarily stopped in the same operation mode as the second mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode and the second mode of the twelfth visual recognition mode.
In the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in the same size as in the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode. In addition, in the 14th visual recognition mode, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 may be temporarily stopped in an operation mode different from the second mode of the 11th visual recognition mode or the second mode of the 12th visual recognition mode.

Figure 76-4 (30) is a diagram showing the 15th visual mode. The 15th visual mode is the visual mode of the missing decorative symbols 41 in the SPSP reach effect. In the 15th visual mode, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a larger size than in the 14th visual mode. In the 15th visual mode, the missing decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in an operation mode different from that in the 14th visual mode. Note that the operation mode of the decorative symbols 41 in the 15th visual mode and the 7th visual mode (see Figure 76-1 (7)) may be different, such as the swinging direction of the decorative symbols 41 being different, or the operation mode of the decorative symbols 41 may be the same, such as the swinging direction of the decorative symbols 41 being the same.

The sixteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the doublet decorative pattern 41. The sixteenth viewing mode includes first to fourth modes. In the sixteenth viewing mode, an image that emphasizes the doublet decorative pattern 41, such as the third rainbow image 540, is displayed.
76-4 (31) is a diagram showing the first aspect of the 16th visual recognition aspect. The first aspect of the 16th visual recognition aspect is a visual recognition aspect of the doublet decorative pattern 41 displayed in a small size.

76-4 (32) is a diagram showing a second mode of the sixteenth viewing mode. The second mode of the sixteenth viewing mode is a viewing mode of the doublet decorative patterns 41 displayed at a larger size than in the first mode of the sixteenth viewing mode. When the doublet decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth viewing mode, the display size of each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 may be the same, or the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be larger than the display size of each of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows.
FIG. 76-5 (33) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 16th viewing mode. The third mode of the 16th viewing mode is a viewing mode of the doublet decorative symbol 41 displayed at the largest size and temporarily stopped. In the third mode of the 16th viewing mode, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in its entirety, while only a portion of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows is displayed. In other words, in the third mode of the 16th viewing mode, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a larger size than each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows. Furthermore, the third mode of the 16th viewing mode can also be considered as a mode in which the middle row decorative symbol 41 occupies the largest proportion of the image display unit 114.

Figure 76-5 (34) is a diagram showing the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode. The fourth mode of the 16th visual mode is a visual mode in which the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a smaller size than in the third mode of the 16th visual mode and temporarily stopped. In the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode, each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is displayed in its entirety, and the display size of each of the doublet decorative symbols 41 is the same. However, even when the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 may be larger than the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

The seventeenth visual confirmation mode is a visual confirmation mode of the decorative symbols 41 when a middle symbol provocative effect is executed in a normal reach effect. The middle symbol provocative effect is an effect that encourages the stopping of a middle row decorative symbol 41 having the same number as the reach-eye decorative symbol 41. The seventeenth visual confirmation mode includes first to third modes. In the seventeenth visual confirmation mode, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode.
FIG. 76-5 (35) shows the first aspect of the 17th visual recognition mode. The first aspect of the 17th visual recognition mode is the visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the first half of the middle symbol tilt effect. In the first aspect of the 17th visual recognition mode, the middle row decorative symbol 41, which has the same number as the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye, is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in motion, moving from top to bottom. Furthermore, the movement speed of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is slower when the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first aspect of the 17th visual recognition mode than when the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first aspect of the 10th visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-2 (13)). Furthermore, in the first aspect of the 17th visual recognition mode, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed, such as the first doublet tilt effect image 550.

FIG. 76-5 (36) is a diagram showing the second mode of the 17th visual mode. The second mode of the 17th visual mode is the visual mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the latter half of the middle symbol tilt effect. In the second mode of the 17th visual mode, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in motion. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in motion as if swaying up and down. In addition, in the second mode of the 17th visual mode, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed, such as the doublet tilt second effect image 551.
76-5 (37) is a diagram showing the third mode of the 17th visual mode. The third mode of the 17th visual mode is a visual mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 that stops with the same number as the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye after the middle symbol tilt effect. In the third mode of the 17th visual mode, an image emphasizing the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed, such as the fifth effect image 552 when the reel stops.
The first to seventeenth viewing modes are the displays of the decorative pattern 41 in various viewing modes. Therefore, the first to seventeenth viewing modes can also be regarded as the first to seventeenth displays.
In addition, in each of the visual recognition modes of the decorative pattern 41 shown in Figures 76-1 to 76-5, the number portion of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in white.

(Variation path of decorative pattern 41)
Next, the path of the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 executes a variable performance using various variable paths for each column of the decorative patterns 41. The variable path is a path along which the decorative patterns 41 pass in the display area of the image display unit 114 when the decorative patterns 41 are variable.
77-1 and 77-2 are diagrams showing the fluctuation path.

Figure 77-1 (1) is a diagram showing the first variation path. The first variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (first presentation mode) and third stage (third presentation mode), and for the variation of the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode). In other words, the first variation path is a variation path when no reach presentation is being performed or when a normal reach presentation is being performed in the first stage, when a normal reach presentation is being performed in the third stage, and when no reach presentation is being performed in the fourth stage.

The first movement paths include a left first movement path LR1, which is the movement path of the left row decorative symbols 41, a middle first movement path CR1, which is the movement path of the middle row decorative symbols 41, and a right first movement path RR1, which is the movement path of the right row decorative symbols 41. The left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 are aligned in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the left first movement path LR1, the middle first movement path CR1, and the right first movement path RR1 all extend in the vertical direction of the image display unit 114. The three columns of decorative symbols 41 passing through the first movement path all move from the top to the bottom of the image display unit 114, and are displayed as moving in a common movement pattern.
The decorative symbol 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, the fifth viewing mode, the ninth viewing mode, the tenth viewing mode, and the seventeenth viewing mode in the first stage. The middle row decorative symbol 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in the tenth viewing mode in the third stage. The decorative symbol 41 passes through the first variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, and the fifth viewing mode in the fourth stage.

FIG. 77-1 (2) is a diagram showing the second variable path. The second variable path is a variable path when the SP reach effect is executed in the normal gaming state. The second variable path includes a middle second variable path CR2, which is a variable path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle second variable path CR2 extends from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114. In the SP reach effect, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational state so as to move from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the middle second variable path CR2.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the second variable path when displayed in the twelfth visual mode.

FIG. 77-1 (3) is a diagram showing the third variable path. The third variable path is a variable path when a development stimulation effect is executed during an SP reach effect in a normal game state. The third variable path includes a middle third variable path CR3, which is a variable path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle third variable path CR3 extends in a circular shape. In the development stimulation effect, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed to rotate along the middle third variable path CR3.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the third variable path when displayed in the thirteenth visual mode.

FIG. 77-1 (4) is a diagram showing the fourth variable path. The fourth variable path is a variable path used to vary the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 in the second stage (second presentation mode). In other words, the fourth variable path is a variable path when a reach presentation is not being performed in the second stage or when a normal reach presentation is being performed. The fourth variable path includes a left fourth variable path LR4, which is the variable path of the left-row decorative symbol 41, a middle fourth variable path CR4, which is the variable path of the middle-row decorative symbol 41, and a right fourth variable path RR4, which is the variable path of the right-row decorative symbol 41. The left fourth variable path LR4, the middle fourth variable path CR4, and the right fourth variable path RR4 are aligned in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the left fourth variable path LR4 and the right fourth variable path RR4 are arranged to extend in the left-right direction. The left row decorative symbols 41 passing through the left fourth variable path LR4 are displayed as moving from the center to the left side of the image display unit 114. The right row decorative symbols 41 passing through the right fourth variable path RR4 are displayed as moving from the center to the right side of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative symbols 41 passing through the middle fourth variable path CR4 are displayed as rotating in the center of the image display unit 114.
The decorative pattern 41 passes through the fourth variable path when it is displayed in any one of the third viewing mode, the fourth viewing mode, the fifth viewing mode, the ninth viewing mode, the tenth viewing mode, and the seventeenth viewing mode in the second stage.

FIG. 77-1 (5) is a diagram showing the fifth variation path. The fifth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 in the second stage. In other words, the fifth variation path is a variation path when a normal reach effect is being executed in the second stage. The fifth variation path includes a middle fifth variation path CR5, which is a variation path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle fifth variation path CR5 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display unit 114. The middle row decorative symbol 41 passing through the middle fifth variation path CR5 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move from the bottom to the top of the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the fifth variable path when it is displayed in the fourth visual mode and the tenth visual mode in the second stage.

FIG. 77-1 (6) shows the sixth variable path. The sixth variable path is a variable path used to vary the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 in the third stage. In other words, the sixth variable path is a variable path when no reach effect is being performed in the third stage. The sixth variable path includes a left sixth variable path LR6, which is a variable path for the left-row decorative symbols 41; a middle sixth variable path CR6, which is a variable path for the middle-row decorative symbols 41; and a right sixth variable path RR6, which is a variable path for the right-row decorative symbols 41. The left sixth variable path LR6, the middle sixth variable path CR6, and the right sixth variable path RR6 all extend vertically on the image display unit 114 and slope to the right as they move downward. The three columns of decorative symbols 41 passing through the sixth variable path are all displayed as moving to the right as they move downward on the image display unit 114.
The decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows pass through the sixth variable path when they are displayed in any one of the third, fourth, fifth, and ninth viewing modes in the third stage. The decorative symbols 41 in the middle row pass through the sixth variable path when they are displayed in either the third or fourth viewing mode in the third stage.

FIG. 77-1 (7) is a diagram showing the seventh variation path. The seventh variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the highly decorative middle row decorative symbol 41 in the third stage. In other words, the seventh variation path is a variation path when no reach effect is being executed in the third stage. The seventh variation path includes a middle seventh variation path CR7, which is a variation path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle seventh variation path CR7 extends upward via a curved surface extending in a counterclockwise direction. The middle row decorative symbol 41 passing through the middle seventh variation path CR7 is displayed as rotating counterclockwise and then moving upward.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the seventh variable path when displayed in the fifth visual mode in the third stage.

FIG. 77-1 (8) is a diagram showing the eighth variation path. The eighth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative symbol 41, which has low decorativeness, in the second stage. In other words, the eighth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach effect is being executed in the second stage. The eighth variation path includes a middle eighth variation path CR8, which is a variation path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle eighth variation path CR8 extends from the lower right corner to the upper left corner of the image display unit 114. In the SP reach effect, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational manner to move from the lower right corner to the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 along the middle eighth variation path CR8.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the eighth variable path when displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the second stage.

FIG. 77-2 (9) is a diagram showing the ninth variation path. The ninth variation path is a variation path used for the variation of the middle row decorative symbol 41, which has low decorativeness, in the fourth stage. In other words, the ninth variation path is a variation path when the SP reach effect is executed in the fourth stage. The ninth variation path includes a middle ninth variation path CR9, which is a variation path of the middle row decorative symbol 41. The middle ninth variation path CR9 extends vertically in the image display unit 114 and is provided so as to extend so as to incline to the right as it moves downward. The middle row decorative symbol 41 passing through the middle ninth variation path CR9 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right as it moves downward in the image display unit 114.
The middle row decorative pattern 41 passes through the ninth variable path when it is displayed in the twelfth visual mode in the fourth stage.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of movement paths are used in each stage.
Here, in any of the stages (first to fourth stages), the number of types of variable paths used when a reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative symbols 41) may be made different from the number of types of variable paths used when a reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative symbols 41). In this case, in any of the stages, the number of types of variable paths used when a reach performance is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative symbols 41) may be made greater than the number of types of variable paths used when a reach performance is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows or the middle row decorative symbols 41). Furthermore, in any stage, the number of types of variable paths used when the reach effect is being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows or the decorative symbols 41 on the middle row) may be less than the number of types of variable paths used when the reach effect is not being executed (the number of types of variable paths of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows or the decorative symbols 41 on the middle row). In this case, it is possible to add variety to the effect according to the progress of the game in the variable effect.

Furthermore, while various change paths are used for the decorative symbols 41 depending on the stage and progress of the change presentation, a single change path is used for the small symbols 56. However, multiple change paths may also be used for the small symbols 56. For example, different change paths for the small symbols 56 may be used in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state.

(Example of variation 1)
78 to 80, a specific description will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 1) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 1 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 78 to 80 are variable effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 1 to change presentation example 22 described below is a change presentation example when the change starts in the first stage.

As shown in Figure 78 (1), when the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, a highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, and stage image 61. Specifically, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first presentation mode). The first stage is the presentation mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "1," which is the reserved number for winning at the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning at the second start gate 122. The three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (2), the change effect begins as the special symbol changes. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a first start operation, which is the operation performed when the change begins, is performed. When the first start operation is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed moving upward. At this time, a first start effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41. The change of the small symbols 56 also begins. In this embodiment, the left column decorative symbols 41, the middle column decorative symbols 41, the right column decorative symbols 41, and the small symbols 56 each change by repeatedly displaying the numbers "1" through "9" in order. That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left column decorative symbols 41, the middle column decorative symbols 41, the right column decorative symbols 41, and the small symbols 56 can be changed individually. The left row decorative patterns 41, middle row decorative patterns 41, right row decorative patterns 41, and small patterns 56 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. At this time, variable background music (BGM), which is the sound effect corresponding to the variable effect being performed, is output from the speaker 156. Although not shown in the figures, in each of the variable effect examples described below, variable background music continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable effect, unless otherwise specified.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform a first varying operation, which is the operation when the symbols are varying. When the first varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an operation such that they move downward along the first varying path (see Figure 77-1 (1)).
Next, as shown in Figure 78 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (5), a button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button operation image 502 is displayed, is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. Note that the effective period for operation of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect accompanied by the output of the first button sound is a first period. The first period is, for example, three seconds.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden, as shown in Fig. 78 (6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Furthermore, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (7), the left column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 78 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (9), the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs a first stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops. When the first stop action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if bouncing and moving upward. At this time, a first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a first stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the decorative symbol 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Figure 79 (10), the "1" in the right-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first varying motion. At this time, the visual mode of the left-row decorative pattern 41 changes to the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stopping motion, which is the motion when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. When the first temporary stopping motion is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is swaying left and right in a first cycle.
Next, as shown in Figure 79 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (12), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 79 (13), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "9" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 79 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (15), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative symbol 41, the right row decorative symbol 41, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 79 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first viewing mode) as the special symbols are displayed. This decorative symbol 41 combination "412" is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Furthermore, as the special symbols stop changing, three small symbols 56 also stop and are fixed. In other words, in this changing effect, all of the small symbols 56 are fixed and stopped without any temporary stops. At this time, the combination of small symbols 56 "412" matches the combination of decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, as the changing effect ends, the changing image 51 is erased (displayed).

Next, the effects during the waiting state will be described.
FIG. 81 shows an example of a presentation when waiting for customers.
In this embodiment, during the customer waiting performance (customer waiting state), the lamp emits light in a manner that corresponds to the progress of the customer waiting performance.

In the following, for ease of explanation, each lamp will be referred to without using a symbol. More specifically, the upper frame lamp 1571 will be referred to as the "first lamp," the left movable part 1151 will be referred to as the "second lamp," the middle movable part 1152 will be referred to as the "third lamp," the right movable part 1153 will be referred to as the "fourth lamp," the upper board lamp 1161 will be referred to as the "fifth lamp," the upper left frame lamp 1572 will be referred to as the "sixth lamp," the left board lamp 1162 will be referred to as the "seventh lamp," and the left frame lamp 1574 will be referred to as the "eighth lamp." The upper right frame lamp 1573 may be referred to as the "ninth lamp", the right panel lamp 1163 may be referred to as the "tenth lamp", the right frame lamp 1575 may be referred to as the "eleventh lamp", the lower panel lamp 1164 may be referred to as the "twelfth lamp", the starter lamp 1211 may be referred to as the "thirteenth lamp", the button lamp 1611 may be referred to as the "fourteenth lamp", and the handle lamp 1511 may be referred to as the "fifteenth lamp".

First, the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Then, when the time-out period (e.g., 10 seconds) elapses after the special symbol stops and the game ball does not enter either the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and the customer waiting effect is executed, as shown in Figure 81 (1). During the execution of the customer waiting effect, sound is no longer output from the speaker 156.
At this time, the lamps change to a lighting mode corresponding to the customer waiting effect. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, while the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white. This lighting mode of each lamp is different from the lighting mode during the variable effect. That is, when the customer waiting performance starts, the light emission mode of the lamp changes.

When the light emission mode of a lamp is explained using a drawing, the drawing will include a number identifying the lamp being explained and the light emission mode. For example, "1: Yellow" shown in Figure 81(1) means that the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is lit in yellow.
The state in which the customer waiting effect is executed can also be regarded as a customer waiting effect state. The customer waiting effect state is a state controlled by the effect control unit 300.

Next, after the start of the customer waiting effect, if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, a demo image 605 is displayed as shown in Fig. 81 (2). In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text "New effect coming!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

The state in which the demo image 605 is displayed can also be considered a demo presentation state. The demo presentation state is a state that is controlled when a predetermined condition is met in the customer waiting presentation state (when a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting presentation state began without a game ball entering either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122). Therefore, the demo presentation state is one of the customer waiting presentation states. In other words, the demo presentation state is, in a broad sense, a customer waiting presentation state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (3), the display content of the demo image 605 changes over time. In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text "Featured Performance: SPSP Challenge!" At this time, the lamps change to a light-emitting mode corresponding to the display content of the demo image 605. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light-emitting performance of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 64). Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white. Additionally, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
When the rainbow light emission mode of a lamp is explained using a drawing, a number identifying the type of rainbow light emission mode is written in the drawing. For example, the "1:1 rainbow" shown in Figure 81 (3) means that the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is performing the rainbow light emission effect of the first rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (4), the display content of the demo image 605 changes over time. In the example shown, the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" is displayed as the demo image 605. Here, "XY Company" shown in the demo image 605 is the name of the company that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine 100 (the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 100) or the company that sells the pachinko gaming machine 100. Furthermore, "Pachinko ABC" is the name of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
At this time, the lamps emit light in a manner that corresponds to the display content of the demo image 605. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off. In other words, when the demo image 605 displays the content shown in FIG. 81(4), the rainbow light-emitting effect ends. In other words, the effect control unit 300 restricts the rainbow light-emitting effect when the demo image 605 displays the content shown in FIG. 81(4).

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (5), over time, the display content of the demo image 605 changes to one that warns the player. In the example shown, the demo image 605 displays the text, "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted." Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 81 (4).

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (6), the demo image 605 disappears, and the decorative pattern 41 and stage image 61 are displayed again. The lamps change to a lighting mode that corresponds to the disappearance of the demo image 605. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up orange. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

81(6), if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demo image 605 was hidden and no game ball has entered either the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, the demo image 605 will again change to the display content shown in Figures 81(2) to (5). In addition, with the display of the demo image 605, the lamp will again change to the light emission mode shown in Figures 81(2) to (5).
Furthermore, in the customer waiting performance state, the state in which no sound is audibly output from the speaker 156 (silence) continues.

Furthermore, in the state shown in Figure 81 (1) and with the complete function not activated, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then turned on without clearing the RAM, and thereafter no gaming ball enters either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, the same effects as those shown in Figures 81 (1) to (6) will be performed.

FIG. 82 is a chart showing the flow of each effect when the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 81 is executed.
FIG. 82 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the lighting state of the lamps when the customer waiting effect is executed.

First, at time T1, the display of the demo image 605 begins. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 81 (2) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 25 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the demo image 605 changes to a display content that introduces noteworthy effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first through seventh modes of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 64) at 1.5-second intervals. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue the light-emitting mode from time T1.
Here, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are in a common light emission mode among the first mode to the seventh mode at any timing during the period in which they are in the first rainbow light emission mode. In other words, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. An example of "synchronizing light emission modes" is when one lamp (e.g., the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) is in the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, and another lamp (e.g., the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) is also in the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode. Another example of "synchronizing light emission modes" is when, at the timing when the light emission mode of one lamp (e.g., the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) changes from the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode to the second mode, the light emission mode of another lamp (e.g., the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) also changes from the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode to the second mode.
Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 81 (3) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 will continue for 21 seconds.

Note that when describing a lamp repeating each of the rainbow light emission modes (modes 1 to 7 in the case of the first rainbow light emission mode), hereinafter this may simply be referred to as the lamp "repeat[ing] the rainbow light emission mode."

Next, at time T3, the demo image 605 changes to the display content such as the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T2.
The effect shown in Figure 81(4) starts at time T3. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the demo image 605 changes to a display content that calls the player's attention.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as from time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 81 (5) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T5, the demo image 605 disappears.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in orange. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T4.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 81 (6) begins.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 can be controlled to a specific effect mode (such as waiting for customers) when not executing a variable effect, and in the specific effect mode, can display specific text information (such as the manufacturer's name, the name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and warning content in the demo image 605), and in the specific effect mode, can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) when not displaying specific text information, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means when displaying specific text information.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the specific character information by preventing the player from being distracted by the rainbow light-emitting effect while the specific character information is being displayed, and the player can experience the excitement of when a jackpot variable effect is executed even when a variable effect is not being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, while the customer waiting effect is being executed, the lamp's light emission mode (light emission color) may be made less likely to change while specific text information is being displayed than when the rainbow light emission effect is being executed (see Figures 81 (3) to (5)).
Furthermore, the fact that the light emission mode (light emission color) of the lamp is less likely to change while specific text information is being displayed during the execution of a customer waiting effect than when a rainbow light emission effect is being executed also includes the fact that the light emission mode (light emission color) of the lamp does not change while specific text information is being displayed during the execution of a customer waiting effect. However, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the lamp may change even while specific text information is being displayed during the execution of a customer waiting effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the demo image 605 is displayed for a predetermined period of time (see (2) to (5) in FIG. 81).
Here, in each of Figures 81(2) to 81(5), the demo image 605 is displayed in a different display mode. Therefore, the images shown as the demo image 605 in Figures 81(2) to 81(5) can also be regarded as different effect images.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the customer waiting presentation state, the lighting state of some lamps differs before the display of the demo image 605 (see Figure 81 (1)) and after the display of the demo image 605 (see Figure 81 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
In the customer waiting presentation state, when the demo image 605 is no longer displayed, the lamp may emit light in the same manner as before the demo image 605 was displayed (see FIG. 81(1)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the rainbow light effect is restricted during a warning display that alerts the player (see FIG. 81 (5)). More specifically, during the warning display, the lamps are lit in a single color, and changes in the lamp color and transitions from one lamp to another are restricted. Furthermore, during the warning display, the flash light effect is restricted.
In this case, the attention-calling display can be made more noticeable to the player.

In this embodiment, it has been described that the lamps are illuminated in the same color during the attention-calling display, but this is not limiting. For example, during the attention-calling display, odd-numbered lamps such as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) may be illuminated in white, and even-numbered lamps such as the second lamp (left movable role piece 1151) may be illuminated in a color other than white (for example, blue).
In other words, during the warning display, the lamp lights up in a single color, and the lamp for which changes in the lamp color, transitions in the lamp color from one lamp to another, and flash lighting effects are restricted only needs to be one lamp (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the lamps are lit while the attention-calling display is being displayed, but this is not limiting. The lamps may flash in a single color (for example, white) while the attention-calling display is being displayed.

Figure 83 shows another example of the presentation in variable presentation example 1.
In the variation effect example 1, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect has been described. Below, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect will be described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 78(1) to 78(4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 83(1), the button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, the first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 83 (2). At this time, the first operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

83(3), the first operation image 504 is hidden, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 78 (7) and (8), Figures 79 (9) to (16), and Figure 80 (17) are performed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Variable presentation example 2 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Note that variable presentation example 2 is a variable presentation that is executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable presentation" in FIG. 59. Also, variable presentation example 2 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first starting hole 121 being "1". Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable presentation example 1 will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as variable presentation example 1 may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 84 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 84 (2), a zone promotion effect is executed, and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (6)). However, the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone promotion image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Furthermore, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation effect example 2, the zone effect is not executed after the zone promotion effect is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 84 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 79 (10) to (16) and Figure 80 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 is no longer displayed, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Variation example 3)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 3) will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Variable presentation example 3 is a variable presentation example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 3 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first starting hole 121 being "4".
85 shows the variation effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 85 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in Figure 85 (2), the variation effect begins with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a second start operation, which is the operation performed when the variation starts, is performed. When the second start operation is being performed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a motion that sways from side to side. At this time, second start effect images 555 are displayed on the left and right sides of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 85 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying action.
Next, as shown in Figure 85 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first variation operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in Variation Presentation Example 1 and Variation Presentation Example 2.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a second stop action, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the second stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if they have stopped temporarily and then gradually moved upward. At this time, a second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a first stop sound is output from speaker 156. In other words, the same sound effect is output when the decorative symbols 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 1 and fluctuation performance example 2, and when the decorative symbols 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(7), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 85(8).

As described above, in this embodiment, in variation presentation example 2, a stop sound is not output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. On the other hand, in variation presentation example 3, a stop sound is output when the left column decorative pattern 41 stops. In other words, in this embodiment, the output of a stop sound when a specific column of patterns (for example, left column decorative pattern 41) stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) is more likely to be executed when the second variation presentation is executed, which is a variation presentation based on the hold number for the first starting port being "4" and is a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, than when the first variation presentation is executed, which is a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed and is a variation presentation based on the hold number for the first starting port being "1".
In this embodiment, it has been described that the output of a stop sound may not be executed when the left-row decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, but this is not limited to this. The output of a stop sound may not be executed when the right-row decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance, and the output of a stop sound may not be executed when the middle-row decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific display mode in the first variable performance. In other words, the symbol in the specific column may be the right-row decorative symbol 41 or the middle-row decorative symbol 41.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 3)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 3 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (the first stop sound in both cases) in the variable performance where the pending number for winning at the first start port 121 is "1" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 1, variable performance example 2), and the variable performance where the pending number for winning at the first start port 121 is "4" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 3), but this is not limited to this.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 85 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 86 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (2), the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform a second stop operation. At this time, a second stop effect image 506 is displayed above each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a second stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the three columns of decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the first and second variation presentation examples.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 86(4).

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make different stop sounds when the three columns of decorative symbols 41 stop in the first stop display mode (a mode in which the left column decorative symbols 41, the right column decorative symbols 41, and the middle column decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop in that order) and when the three columns of decorative symbols 41 stop in the second stop display mode (a mode in which all three columns of decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the decorative symbols 41 have stopped in the first stop display mode or the second stop display mode, making it easier for the player to experience a variety of presentations.

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 3 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 3.

(Variation example 4)
87 to 89 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 4) will be described with reference to Figures 87 to 89. Variable effect example 4 is a variable effect example in which a reach effect is executed based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, variable performance example 4 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 87 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56, "213," are fixed and stopped. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121. Also, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (2), the variable effect begins as the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode and perform the first starting action. At this time, a first starting effect image 501 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The variable display of the small symbols 56 also begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the central movable reel 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the reel first effect image 507 is displayed. Also at this time, the first reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 87(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound, which is the sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 87 (7), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound, which is a sound effect for the second step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (8), the left column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 88 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 88 (10), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 88 (12), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 88 (13), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a first reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the first reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (15), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed to move downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first variation path CR1, which is the same variation path as the middle row decorative pattern 41.
89(17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-series fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-series image 511.

In the variation effect example 4, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and then the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 89 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in Figure 89 (19), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reduced size so that it is the same display size as the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 89 (21).

(Variation example 5)
90 to 93 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 5) will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 93. Variable effect example 5 is a variable effect based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
90 to 93 are variable effects that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effect as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 90 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 90 (2), a role production is executed, and the left movable role product 1151 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role product second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable role product 1151. Also, at this time, a second role product sound, which is a sound effect of the role product production, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (3), the left column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (5), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (6), the right column decorative symbol 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (7), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 90 (8), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (9), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (10), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (11), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in such a way that it moves downward.
91(12), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (13), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the pseudo consecutive image 511 has stopped, is output.
91 (14), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion may be continued.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (15), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "434," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change for the second time. At this time, a first re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change again, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (16), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (17), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 92 (18), the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 92 (19), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 92 (20), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 92 (21), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 92 (22), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the first reach action is performed. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 92 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 93 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 93 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (27), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 93 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a way that it shrinks to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 93 (29).

(Example of variation 6)
94 to 96 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
94 to 96, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 94 to 96 are variable effects that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 90 (1) to (8), Figures 91 (9) to (16), and Figures 92 (17) to (24) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 94 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 94 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (14)).
Next, as shown in Figure 94 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (15)). At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in Fig. 94(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Fig. 76-2(16)), and a second temporary stop action, which is the action when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, is performed. When the second temporary stop action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed to rotate in a second cycle.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 94 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 76-3 (17)), and performs a second varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is varying. When the second varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 77-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in Figure 94 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (18)) and performs the second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (19)). At this time, SP promotion first effect images 518 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 95 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

95(11), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 95 (12), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that returns it to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (13), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the "4" that is the middle row decorative symbol 41 passes, and the "3" that is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 76-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, a third stopping sound, which is the sound effect when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops, is output. In other words, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops. Furthermore, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Figure 95 (14), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching display sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the switching image 520 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (15), a portion of the switching image 520 is hidden. More specifically, the switching image 520 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right of the image display unit 114, thereby hiding a portion of the switching image 520. At this time, a portion of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 remain difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching non-display sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the switching image 520 is hidden, is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 95 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output. Also, as described above, since the variable background music is not output at this time, there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 7)
97 and 98 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 7) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Variation presentation example 7 is a variation presentation based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 97 and 98 are variable effects that are executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 90(1) to (8), 91(9) to (16), 92(17) to (24), and 94(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 97(1), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(2), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth viewing mode (see FIG. 76-3(23)), and performs a third changing operation, which is the operation when changing. When the third changing operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed along the third changing path (see FIG. 77-1(3)), so as to replace the display position of the development image 521. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5," is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (3), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Figure 76-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 97 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 97(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 76-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (6), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Figure 76-4 (27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a fourth stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the middle row decorative symbol 41 has temporarily stopped, is output. Furthermore, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Figure 97 (7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
97(8), a part of the switching image 520 disappears and a part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

98(9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) for the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 to stop is not output, but remains silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 8)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 8) will be described with reference to Fig. 99. Variable effect example 8 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable effect shown in FIG. 99 is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 99 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 99 (2), the reach stimulation effect starts, and the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (9)) and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach stimulation first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Figure 99(3), the "7" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2(10)). At this time, the second reach-inducing effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Figure 99 (4), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual recognition mode (see Figure 76-2 (11)). At this time, the left-row decorative symbols 41 perform the first temporary stop operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 99 (5), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below each of the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 99 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable effect example 8, after the effect shown in FIG. 99(4) is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 99(6) may be executed without executing the effect shown in FIG. 99(5). In other words, if a reach effect is not executed after a reach promotion effect is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Example of variation 9)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 9) will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Variable effect example 9 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach effect is executed.
Note that this is a variable effect that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in the variable effect diagram 59 shown in Figure 100.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 100 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
100(2), the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the first "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed below the respective first effect images 522.

100(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the second reach-inducing effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 76-2 (12)), and a third stop action is performed, which is the action taken when the variation stops. When the third stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an enlarged manner, respectively. The third stop action can also be considered as a second reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a third stop effect image 524 is displayed surrounding each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a second reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The second reach sound can also be considered as a fifth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 94 (1) to (8), 95 (9) to (16), and 96 (17) are performed.

(Variation example 10)
101 to 105 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 10) will be described with reference to Figures 101 to 105. Variable effect example 10 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
101 to 105 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 101(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The blue display state of this reserved image 52 may be the display state at the start of display, or may be due to a change in the display state during the variation effect executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a third start operation, which is the operation performed when the change begins, is performed. When the third start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, a third start effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a first start sound, which is the sound effect indicating the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound, which is a sound effect of the role object effect, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 101 (6), the role effect ends and the role effect third image 526 disappears. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 101 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 101 (8), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 102 (9), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound, which is a sound effect for the third step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 102 (10), the step image 508 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (11), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, a second image 527 is displayed as shown in Fig. 102 (12). At this time, a second operation sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (13), the zone promotion effect starts, and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 102 (14), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone effect has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 102 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 102 (16), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (17), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (18), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (19), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a third reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the third reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. Furthermore, the third reach action has a higher expectation than the first reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Furthermore, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, a first change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 103 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (26), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (27), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (28), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 104 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 104 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 104 (31), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. Also, at this time, a development stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the development image 521 has stopped, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (32), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle movable role object 1152 has moved lower than the position shown in FIG. 87 (5). At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound, which is the sound effect of the role object effect, is output. At this time, the fourth role object sound can also be considered as the sound effect of the development effect.
Next, as shown in Figure 105 (33), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect starts, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. At this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (34), the deciding button operation effect is initiated, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The deciding button operation effect is a button operation effect that, in response to the operation of the effect button 161, suggests or notifies whether a jackpot game will be executed (whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, and whether the currently executed variable effect is a jackpot variable effect or a miss variable effect). The deciding button operation effect can also be interpreted as an effect that raises expectations that a jackpot game will be executed (whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and whether the currently executed variable effect is a jackpot variable effect). The deciding button operation effect can also be interpreted as an effect that suggests or notifies whether the special symbol lottery has been won or lost. The deciding button operation effect is an example of a deciding effect. In the illustrated example, the button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!" to prompt the operation of the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, a second button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect accompanied by the output of the second button sound is the second period, which is, for example, 5 seconds.
Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 105 (35), three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454", are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-4 (30)). At this time, a sixth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. Furthermore, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (36), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
105 (37), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
105 (38), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stopping operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (39), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 11)
106 to 111 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described with reference to Figures 106 to 111. Variable effect example 11 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
The variable performances shown in Figures 106 to 111 are variable performances that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 101 (1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 106 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 106(2), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 106 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(4), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(7), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 106 (8), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
107(9), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to oscillate up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 107 (10), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is also output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops for the first time (see Fig. 106 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(11), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change again, is output. In other words, in change performance example 11, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative symbols 41 start to change for the first time (see Figure 101 (2)), when the decorative symbols 41 start to change for the second time (see Figure 106 (5)), and when the decorative symbols 41 start to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (14), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (15), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 107 (16), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 108 (17), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (18), the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 108 (19), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 108 (20), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 108 (21), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (22), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 108 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop action is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. Also, at this time, a second change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output. That is, the sound effect (change sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see Fig. 103 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 109 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 109 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 109 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (29), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (30), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (31), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 109 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 110 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (34), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (35), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 110 (36), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (37), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the decide button operation effect, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 110 (38). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. When the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.

Next, as shown in Figure 110 (39), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
110(40), a part of the switching image 520 disappears and a part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
111 (41), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (42), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in Variation Presentation Example 5 (see Figures 90 to 93), the presentation control unit 300 can output a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variation BGM) when the symbols in a specific column (middle column decorative symbols 41) stop in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) in a first specific variation presentation (a losing variation presentation in which a normal reach presentation is performed and an SP reach presentation is not performed). On the other hand, as shown in Variation Presentation Example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105) and Variation Presentation Example 11 (see Figures 106 to 111), the presentation control unit 300 can not output a specific sound when the symbols in a specific column stop in a specific display mode in a second specific variation presentation (a losing variation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is performed).
In this case, the stopping of the symbols in the specific row when the specific sound is output is likely to attract the player's attention, and the ease with which the stopping of the symbols in the specific row in a specific display mode is noticed can be varied depending on the variable performance being executed, thereby realizing a variety of variable performances with different meanings for the stopping of the symbols in the specific row in a specific display mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the second specific variable presentation is executed, the missing decorative symbols 41, including the symbols in the specific column, stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode (see Figure 105 (35)), and then stop in the specific display mode. Here, if the missing decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the special display mode and then excessively emphasized when displayed in the specific display mode, there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease due to repeated emphasis on the missing decorative symbols 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the missing decorative symbols 41 stop in the specific display mode, the emphasis on the missing decorative symbols 41 is reduced, thereby preventing the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second specific variable effect, when the symbols in the specific column stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) different from the specific display mode, a specific sound (see FIG. 105 (35)) can be output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
Furthermore, in the second specific variable presentation, a specific sound can be output when a predetermined row of symbols (for example, decorative symbol 41 in the left row) stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 102 (16)), but no specific sound is output when the predetermined row of symbols stops in a special display mode (see FIGS. 104 (25), (26)). Therefore, when the predetermined row of symbols is in a special display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing excessively on the predetermined row of symbols, and to make it easier for the player to focus on presentation images that are different from the predetermined row of symbols.
Furthermore, in the first specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound that is output when the symbols in a predetermined row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 92 (19)) and when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (see FIG. 93 (27)). And, in the second specific variable performance, it is possible to make the specific sound that is output when the symbols in a predetermined row stop in a specific display mode and when the symbols in a specific row stop in a special display mode (see FIG. 105 (35)). Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of variable performances with a diverse relationship between the stop sound of the symbols in a predetermined row and the stop sound of the symbols in a specific row.
Furthermore, when the first specific variable effect is executed, both a predetermined sound and a specific sound can be output when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode. On the other hand, when the second specific variable effect is executed, it is possible to output neither a predetermined sound nor a specific sound (no sound) when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode. Therefore, various variable effects can be realized, such as a variable effect in which multiple effect sounds are combined, or a variable effect that has a period of time that does not stimulate the player depending on the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) include a first specific sound (such as a first stop sound) that can be output when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode), and a second specific sound (such as a pseudo-sequential stop sound) that can be output when a special symbol (such as pseudo-sequential image 511) stops. In one losing variable effect, the output of the first specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) is more likely to be executed when no reach effect is performed than when a special symbol stops.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the special symbol stops, it is difficult to emphasize that the symbol in a specific row has stopped in a specific display mode, and the impression of the special symbol stopping can be strengthened, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in one miss variation effect, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when no reach effect is performed than when a special pattern stops includes the fact that when a special pattern stops, the first specific sound is not always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (0%), and that when no reach effect is performed, the first specific sound is always output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (100%).
Furthermore, in one miss variation effect, if it is easier to output the first specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when no reach effect is performed than when a special pattern stops, the first specific sound may be output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when a special pattern stops, or the first specific sound may not be output when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode when no reach effect is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the output of the first specific sound (such as the first stop sound) when the symbols in the specific row stop is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect (a loss variation effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not performed) is executed than when the first specific variation effect (a loss variation effect in which the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops) is executed. Therefore, in the first specific variation effect, it is more difficult to emphasize that the symbols in the specific row stop in a specific display mode than in the third specific variation effect, and the impression of the pseudo consecutive image 511 stopping can be strengthened to the extent that this is the case.
The fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the symbols in the specific column stop when the third specific variation performance is performed than when the first specific variation performance is performed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output when the symbols in the specific column stop (0%) when the first specific variation performance is performed, and the fact that the first specific sound is always output when the symbols in the specific column stop (100%) when the third specific variation performance is performed.
Furthermore, if it is easier to output the first specific sound when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed than when the first specific variation performance is executed, the first specific sound may be output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the first specific variation performance is executed, or the first specific sound may not be output when the symbols in the specific row stop when the third specific variation performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the first specific variation effect is being executed, the first specific sound may be output when the symbols in the specific column stop (see FIG. 93 (27)). On the other hand, in a miss variation effect (fourth specific variation effect) in which a specific effect (such as the red display of the variation image 51 or the reserved image 52, the execution of multiple pseudo consecutive effects in one variation effect, a zone effect, or an advanced effect) is performed, the first specific sound is not output when the symbols in the specific column stop (0%). In other words, in this embodiment, the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the symbols in the specific column stop when the first specific variation effect is executed than when the fourth specific variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an unexpected effect in which the first specific sound is output even in the first specific variation effect.
In addition, the fact that the first specific sound is more likely to be output when the patterns in the specific row stop when the first specific variation performance is executed than when the fourth specific variation performance is executed includes the fact that the first specific sound is not always output when the fourth specific variation performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the first specific sound is always output when the first specific variation performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if the output of the first specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop is more likely to be executed when the first specific variation performance is executed than when the fourth specific variation performance is executed, the output of the first specific sound may be executed when the fourth specific variation performance is executed, or the output of the first specific sound may not be executed when the first specific variation performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the fourth specific variable presentation, the first specific sound is output when a specific row of symbols (for example, the decorative symbol 41 in the left row) stops in a specific display mode. This prevents the player from noticing that the decorative symbol 41 has stopped.

Furthermore, when the first or fourth specific variation effect is executed, it is more likely that a specific sound (such as the sixth stop sound (see FIG. 105 (35))) will be output when the symbols in the specific row stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) than when the second specific variation effect (a miss variation effect in which no reach effect is performed) is executed. Therefore, in the first or fourth specific variation effect, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the symbols in the specific row have stopped.
In addition, the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is more likely when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed includes the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is not always executed (0%) when the second specific change performance is executed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode is always executed (100%) when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.
Furthermore, if it is easier to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed than when the second specific change performance is executed, the specific sound may be output when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the second specific change performance is executed, or the specific sound may not be output when the patterns in a specific column stop in a special display mode when the first specific change performance or the fourth specific change performance is executed.

Furthermore, when the first or fourth specific variation effect is executed, it is easier to output a special sound (start sound) when the variation effect starts than when the second specific variation effect is executed. In this case, the first or fourth specific variation effect can increase the interest in the game from the start of the variation effect.
In addition, the fact that the output of a special sound when a variation effect starts is more likely when the first specific variation effect or the fourth specific variation effect is executed than when the second specific variation effect is executed includes the fact that the output of a special sound is not always executed (0%) when the second specific variation effect is executed, and the fact that the output of a special sound is always executed (100%) when the first specific variation effect or the fourth specific variation effect is executed.
Furthermore, if it is easier to output a special sound when the first or fourth specific change performance is executed at the start of a change performance than when the second specific change performance is executed, the special sound may be output when the second specific change performance is executed, or the special sound may not be output when the first or fourth specific change performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start sound (first re-change sound (see Figure 106 (5))) output when the pseudo-series image 511 changes again after stopping for the first time is different from the start sound (second re-change sound (see Figure 107 (12))) output when the pseudo-series image 511 changes again after stopping for the second time. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which re-change is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which a reach effect is executed is performed, it is less likely that a stop sound will be output when the decorative pattern 41 in the middle row stops in a specific display mode (see Figure 105 (38)) than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see Figure 102 (16)).
In addition, when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stop sound is always output (100%) when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode, and the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stop sound is always not output (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode.
Furthermore, if it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, then it is possible that a stop sound will not be output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, or that a stop sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable performance in which a reach effect is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when a variable performance in which a reach effect is not executed is performed.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the stop sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stop sound is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, in one miss variation performance, when the SP reach performance is not executed, it is more likely that a specific sound will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the SP reach performance is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the SP reach presentation is executed, it is difficult to emphasize that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has stopped in a specific display mode, which strengthens the impression that the SP reach presentation is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in one miss variation effect, the output of a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is more likely to be performed when the reach effect is not performed than when the SP reach effect is performed, including the fact that the output of a specific sound is not always performed (0%) when the SP reach effect is performed, and the fact that the output of a specific sound is always performed (100%) when the reach effect is not performed.
Furthermore, in one miss variation performance, if it is easier to output a specific sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed than when the SP reach performance is executed, then the specific sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the SP reach performance is executed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when the reach performance is not executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a third specific variable effect in which an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed is performed, a specific sound (stop sound) is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 105 (35)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) (see FIG. 104 (25), (26)). Therefore, when the decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, it is possible to make it easier for a player to notice the stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 than the stopping of the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41.
In addition, when the third specific variation performance is performed, the specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode than when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, which includes the fact that when the third specific variation performance is performed, the specific sound is not always output when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode (0%), and the fact that when the third specific variation performance is performed, the specific sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (100%).
Furthermore, if a specific sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed than when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode, the specific sound may be output when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed, or the specific sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode when the third specific variation performance is performed.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display, on the image display unit 114, identification information (such as the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52) corresponding to the determination information (random number value) determined by the special symbol determination unit 234 or the determination information for which no determination has been made. There are also a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 79 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable background music) when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode), and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 105 (38)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. In one variation effect, a change effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 103 (20)) that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode (e.g., red) is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed.
In this case, in a variable effect in which a change effect is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the change effect than by the patterns stopping, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the change effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the change effect will not be executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the change effect will be executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation effect, if it is easier to execute a change effect when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the change effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the change effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, the second stage (for example, the third stage (see Figure 102 (9))) of the stage performance (step performance) is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stage of the stage presentation is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the fact that the second stage of the stage presentation has been executed than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second stage of the stage presentation may be any stage that can be executed after the first stage of the stage presentation.
Furthermore, in one variable performance, the second stage of the stage performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, which includes the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is not necessarily executed when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second stage of the stage performance is certainly executed when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable performance, if the second stage of the step performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second stage of the step performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second stage of the step performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variation performance, when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 10 is executed), it is easier to execute a variation performance (see Figures 103 (24), 104 (25), (26)) that changes the display position of the temporarily stopped pattern in the image display unit 114 than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variation performance example 1 is executed).
In this case, in a variable effect in which a change effect is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the change effect than by the patterns stopping, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one of the above-mentioned variable effects, the fact that the change effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the change effect will not be executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the change effect will be executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one of the variable effects, if the change effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the change effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the change effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the change effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the change effect will not be executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the change effect will be executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variation effect, if it is easier to execute a change effect when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the change effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the change effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the button operation presentation includes a first operation presentation (the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 78 (5)) in which the operation valid period is a first period (for example, 3 seconds), and a second operation presentation (the button operation presentation shown in FIG. 105 (34)) in which the operation valid period is a second period (for example, 5 seconds) different from the first period. In one variation presentation, the second operation presentation is more likely to be performed when the second stop presentation is performed (for example, when variation presentation example 10 is performed) than when the first stop presentation is performed (for example, when variation presentation example 1 is performed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second operation presentation is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific column stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second operation presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the second operation effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the second operation effect is not always executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the second operation effect is always executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable effect, if the second operation effect is more easily executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the second operation effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the second operation effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the action presentation (part presentation) that operates the presentation body (for example, the movable part 115) includes a first action presentation (part presentation of "CH2" (see FIG. 59) shown in FIG. 87 (5)) and a second action presentation (part presentation of "CH4" shown in FIG. 104 (32)) that has a higher expectation of a special game (jackpot game) being executed than the first action presentation. In one variation presentation, the second action presentation is more likely to be executed when the second stop presentation is executed (for example, when variation presentation example 10 is executed) than when the first stop presentation is executed (for example, when variation presentation example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the second action effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the second action effect is never executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the second action effect is always executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable performance, if the second action performance is more likely to be executed when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second action performance may be executed when the first stop performance is executed, or the second action performance may not be executed when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the emphasis effects that emphasize the reach effect include a first emphasis effect (first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510 (see Figure 88 (14))) and a second emphasis effect (second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532 (see Figure 103 (19))) that has a higher expectation of a special game being executed than the first emphasis effect. In one variable effect, the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 10 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable effect in which the second emphasis effect is executed, since it is difficult to output a specific sound when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, the execution of the second emphasis effect can be more strongly impressed on the player than the fact that the symbols have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis effect is never executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the second emphasis effect is always executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable effect, if the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the second emphasis effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the second emphasis effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the emphasis effect that emphasizes the displayed symbol when the reach effect is started (for example, an effect that activates the decorative symbol 41) includes a first emphasis effect (see FIG. 88 (14)) and a second emphasis effect (see FIG. 103 (19)) that has a different pattern emphasis mode from the first emphasis effect. In one variation effect, the second action effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed (for example, when variation effect example 10 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (for example, when variation effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second action presentation is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the patterns in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the second action presentation than by the fact that the patterns have stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable effect, the fact that the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that the second emphasis effect is never executed when the first stop effect is executed (0%), and the fact that the second emphasis effect is always executed when the second stop effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable effect, if the second emphasis effect is more likely to be executed when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed, the second emphasis effect may be executed when the first stop effect is executed, or the second emphasis effect may not be executed when the second stop effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (reach effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, etc.) and teasing effects that tease the execution of specific effects (reach teasing effects, pseudo consecutive teasing effects, development teasing effects, etc.). In one variable effect, the specific effect is more likely to be executed after the teasing effect is executed when the second stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 10 is executed) than when the first stop effect is executed (for example, when variable effect example 4 is executed).
In this case, in a variable presentation in which a specific presentation is executed, it is difficult to output a specific sound when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, so the player can be more impressed by the execution of the specific presentation than by the symbols stopping, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in one variable effect, the fact that a specific effect is more likely to be executed after a hyping effect when the second stop effect is executed than when the first stop effect is executed includes the fact that when the first stop effect is executed, a specific effect is not necessarily executed after a hyping effect is executed (0%), and the fact that when the second stop effect is executed, a specific effect is certainly executed after a hyping effect is executed (100%).
Furthermore, in one variable performance, if it is easier for a specific performance to be executed after a provocative performance when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the specific performance may be executed after the provocative performance when the first stop performance is executed, or the specific performance may not be executed after the provocative performance when the second stop performance is executed.

(Variation example 12)
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 12) will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Variable effect example 12 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 112 is a variable performance that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 57 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third start effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1." At this time, a first start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 112 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 112 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 112 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel third effect image 526 is no longer displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, a third change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (7), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a first chance eye effect image 537 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the three rows of decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation effect example 12, the third start action, the third effect image at start 525, the first start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Furthermore, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Variation example 13)
113 to 120 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 13) will be described with reference to Figures 113 to 120. Variable presentation example 13 is a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable presentation example 13 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 12. In other words, variable presentation example 13 is an example of a variable presentation that shows the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 112 (6)) shown in variable presentation example 12.
113 to 120 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 113 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third start effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a first start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Figure 113 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 113 (4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the third role effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. At this time, the third role sound is also output. At this time, the vibration effect has ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(6), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 113 (7), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Furthermore, the button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The valid operation period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 114 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(10), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 114 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifts to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 114 (14), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
114(15), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 114 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (21), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 115 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 115 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 115 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the first varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (25), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (26), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (27), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the first stop action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 116 (28), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 116 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 116 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (35), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (36), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 117 (37), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "5" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 117 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (40), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (41), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (42), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and a second SPSP sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, is output. In the illustrated example, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Battle," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 60%," which suggests that the expectation of the jackpot game being executed is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (43), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. The third period is, for example, 5 seconds.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the deciding button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 118 (44). At this time, a first success sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is initiated, and the effect button 161 vibrates, although this is not shown in the figure.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable role 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect begins.
When specific rainbow light emission modes of lamps are explained using drawings, the drawings include numbers identifying the specific rainbow light emission modes. For example, "1:2 Rainbow 1" shown in Figure 118 (44) means that the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode (see Figure 65 (1)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (45), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.
It should be noted that when the light guide plate 118 is not shown in the drawing, this means that the light guide plate 118 is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 118 (46), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 118 (47), the role-playing performance ends, and the three movable role-playing devices 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (48), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect continues.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white. That is, at this time, the lamps are not emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 119 (50), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (51), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the doublet decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect. That is, the lamp begins emitting light in the rainbow mode again.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 119 (52), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect has also ended.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, as shown in FIG. 119 (53).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (54), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" temporarily stops. In other words, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion teasing effect is executed. At this time, a doublet second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative patterns 41. Also, at this time, a ninth stop sound, which is a sound effect when the doublet decorative patterns 41 stop, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (55), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 119 (56), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (57), the big win game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size, and the fifth rainbow image 608 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 120 (58), the first right-hit image 609 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable device 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 120 (59), a second right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in Fig. 120 (60). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving mode has begun!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up orange, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. That is, the rainbow light-emitting effect ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 120 (61), a warning image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, while the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In other words, the rainbow light effect is not being displayed at this time.

Next, as shown in Figure 120 (62), the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up blue, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In other words, the rainbow light effect is not being displayed at this time.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (63), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444." At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). At this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a specific variable presentation (jackpot variable presentation) based on the determination that a special game is being played, and can display specific text information (such as time-saving start image 546, warning image 610, and company name image 611) from the start of the specific variable presentation until the start of the next variable presentation of the specific variable presentation (the first variable presentation after a jackpot game), and can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, light guide plate 118, and image display unit 114) when specific text information is not being displayed from the start of the specific variable presentation until the start of the next variable presentation of the specific variable presentation, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means when specific text information is being displayed.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the specific character information by preventing the player from being distracted by the rainbow light-emitting effect while the specific character information is being displayed, and when a jackpot variable effect is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect can make the player feel a sense of excitement, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance even when the variable performance is not being executed (see Figure 81 (3)).
In this case, even when the variable performance is not being executed, the player can experience the excitement that would be felt if the big win variable performance were executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can output a specific sound (start sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable BGM) when the variable presentation starts. Also, variable presentations in which a specific sound is not output, such as variable presentation example 1 (see FIGS. 78 to 80), are variable presentations based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a miss. On the other hand, variable presentations in which a specific sound is output, such as variable presentation example 13 (see FIGS. 113 to 120), are variable presentations based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot. And, in this embodiment, a special game (jackpot game) is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable presentation in which a specific sound is not output is executed.
In this case, the output of the specific sound can heighten the player's anticipation that a special game will be played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game from the start of the variable presentation.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed.
Furthermore, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed, the output of a special stop sound (the stop sound of the pseudo consecutive images 511 and the stop sound of the development image 521) is more likely to be executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound (start sound) is executed. Therefore, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation that an effect accompanied by the output of a special stop sound will be executed from the start of the variable effect.
In addition, the fact that the output of a special stop sound is more likely when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that the output of a special stop sound is never executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, and the fact that the output of a special stop sound is always executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed.
Furthermore, if it is easier to output a special stop sound when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, the special stop sound may be output when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed, or the special stop sound may not be output when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which a specific sound (start sound) is output (see FIG. 78 (2)) is executed, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (highly decorative display mode) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output (see FIG. 101 (2)) is executed (see FIG. 105 (38)). Therefore, in a variable effect in which a start sound is output, excessive sound effects can be prevented from decreasing interest in the game.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, a stop sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed, a stop sound is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).
Furthermore, if it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable performance in which a specific sound is not output is executed, then a stop sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode when a variable performance in which a specific sound is output is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound (start sound) is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound (start sound) is not output. Therefore, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation that a reach effect will be executed from the start of the variable effect.
In addition, the fact that a reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed than when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes the fact that a reach effect will always be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is output is executed, and the fact that a reach effect will never be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a specific sound is not output is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot game may be executed in a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed without outputting a specific sound (start sound) (such as variable effect example 6 (see Figures 94 to 96)). That is, the variable effect in which a specific sound is not output includes a first variable effect in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see Figure 93 (27)), and a second variable effect in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see Figure 95 (16)). A jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect is executed than when the first variable effect is executed.
Here, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation is executed than when the first variable presentation is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game is not necessarily executed (0%) when the first variable presentation is executed. Also, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the second variable presentation is executed than when the first variable presentation is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when the first variable presentation is executed.

In this embodiment, the losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variable performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 85(2)), and a second variable performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 112(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute).
Note that when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variable performance example 13 is never executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, if it is made easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 13 is easier to execute), then when the first variable performance is executed, it is possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 13 may be executed), and when the second variable performance is executed, it is not necessary to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variable performance example 13 may not be executed).

Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it easier for an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) to be executed in the next change effect (change effect example 10 or change effect example 11 to be executed) if the second change effect in which a start sound is output is executed than if the first change effect in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is more likely that an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) will be executed in the next change effect when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed (change effect example 10 or change effect example 11 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first change effect is executed, an SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect will not be executed in the next change effect (0%) (change effect example 10 or change effect example 11 will not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, and if the second variable performance is executed, it is more likely that an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the next variable performance (variation performance example 10 or variation performance example 11 will be executed) than if the first variable performance is executed, then if the first variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may be executed in the next variable performance (variation performance example 10 or variation performance example 11 may be executed), and if the second variable performance is executed, an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) may not be executed in the next variable performance (variation performance example 10 or variation performance example 11 may not be executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two types of stop effects: a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 79 (15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable background music) when a specific column of symbols (e.g., the middle column decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode); and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 105 (38)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific column of symbols stops in a specific display mode. The specific sounds include a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see FIG. 102 (16))) and a second specific sound (e.g., the seventh stop sound (see FIG. 112 (7))) that is different from the first specific sound. In one variable effect, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the first stop effect is executed (e.g., when variable effect example 12 is executed) than when the second stop effect is executed (e.g., when variable effect example 10 is executed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the first stop presentation is executed, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed, and thus the fact that the pattern has stopped combined with the output of the second specific sound can be more strongly impressed on the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is not always output when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the second stop performance is executed, or the second specific sound may not be output when the first stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 12 is executed), it is more likely that a specific pre-determined performance (such as a pattern movement performance (see Figure 112 (2)), output of the first start sound, role-play performance (see Figure 112 (5)), or chance eye performance (see Figure 112 (7))) will be executed than when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 10 is executed).
In this case, in a variable performance in which a pre-determined performance is performed, the specific sound is more likely to be output when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, making it easier for the player to recognize the "stop of symbols," which is one of the divisions in the variable performance, and in combination with the pre-determined performance, this can further increase the sense of anticipation for the next and subsequent variable performances, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that a specific pre-determined performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed includes the fact that the specific pre-determined performance will not be executed when the second stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the specific pre-determined performance will be executed when the first stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, a specific pre-determined performance is more likely to be executed when the first stop performance is executed than when the second stop performance is executed, the specific pre-determined performance may be executed when the second stop performance is executed, or the specific pre-determined performance may not be executed when the first stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, the pre-determination effects of this embodiment include specific pre-determination effects that raise expectations of a jackpot in the next or subsequent variation effect after the currently executed variation effect. Examples of specific pre-determination effects include the pre-determination effects of variation effect example 12 (such as a symbol movement effect (see FIG. 112 (2)), output of the first start sound, a role effect (see FIG. 112 (5)), and a chance eye effect (see FIG. 112 (7))). The variation effect that raises expectations of a jackpot through the pre-determination effect of variation effect example 12 is the variation effect of variation effect example 13. In this embodiment, the second stop effect is more likely to be executed when a variation effect that raises expectations of a jackpot through a specific pre-determination effect is performed than when a variation effect in which a pre-determination effect (specific pre-determination effect) is executed is performed.
Note that the fact that the second stop effect is more likely to be executed when a target variation effect is performed than when a variation effect in which a pre-determination effect (a specific pre-determination effect) is performed includes the fact that the second stop effect is never executed (0%) when a variation effect in which a pre-determination effect (a specific pre-determination effect) is performed, and the fact that the second stop effect is always executed (100%) when a target variation effect is performed. Also, if the second stop effect is more likely to be executed when a target variation effect is performed than when a variation effect in which a pre-determination effect (a specific pre-determination effect) is performed, the second stop effect may be executed when a variation effect in which a pre-determination effect (a specific pre-determination effect) is performed, or the second stop effect may not be executed when a target variation effect is performed.

Figures 121 and 122 are charts showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 13.
Figures 121 and 122 show the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in variable performance example 13.

First, as shown in Fig. 121, at time T1, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (43) begins.

Next, at time T2, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 65) at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) are also turned off. The fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) continue the light-emitting mode from time T1. The third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIGS. 66 and 67) at 0.4-second intervals. Additionally, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. Additionally, the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emitting mode at 0.4 second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) with the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118. In other words, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 both execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode at a 0.4 second cycle, but the light emission modes at a certain timing are not aligned (see FIG. 118 (44)), and the light emission modes are not synchronized.
Furthermore, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (44) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T2. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.
The time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (45) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for two seconds.

Next, at time T4, the display of the first rainbow image 539 continues. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIGS. 68 and 69) at a cycle of one second. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of one second. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 71) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 70) at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. Furthermore, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) perform a rainbow light-emitting effect by repeating the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4 second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals. The light guide plate 118 continues the light-emitting mode from time T3.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (46) starts. Furthermore, the effect indicated to be executed at time T4 continues for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T5, the second rainbow image 606 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are extinguished. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continues the light-emitting mode from time T4. Furthermore, the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emission mode every second.
The time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (47) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable device 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable device 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white. The third lamp (middle movable device 1152) continues its light-emitting mode from time T5. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off. Furthermore, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light emission mode at one-second intervals, and the light guide plate 118 is turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
The time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (48) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T6 will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T7, the doublet decorative pattern 41 begins to expand. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light from time T6.
The time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (49) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T7 continues for one second.

Next, at time T8, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 shrinks. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the light guide plate 118 continues the light emitting mode from time T7.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
Furthermore, time T8 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (51) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T8 continues for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T9, the fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the light guide plate 118 continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T8.
The time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (52) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T9 will continue for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T10, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is again enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T9.
The time T10 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (53) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10 continues for one second.

Next, at time T11, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T10. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
119(54)。 Also, time T11 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (54) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11 continues for one second.

Next, at time T12, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T11. In other words, even when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped (when the variable effect ends), the rainbow light-emitting effect continues.
Time T12 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (55) begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122, at time T13, the jackpot game notification image 542 is enlarged. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit purple. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T12. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is also turned off.
The time T13 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (56) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T13 will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T14, the fifth rainbow image 608 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) through sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue the light-emitting mode from time T13. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the sixth rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152) with the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).
Furthermore, time T14 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (57) starts. Furthermore, the effect indicated to be executed at time T14 continues for three seconds.

Next, at time T15, the first right-hit image 609 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the seventh rainbow light-emitting pattern at 1.6-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue their light-emitting patterns from time T14. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is also turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T15 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (58) starts. Furthermore, the effect indicated to be executed at time T15 continues for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T16, a jackpot game round begins, and a round-in-progress image 545 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. Furthermore, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T15.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role 1151), fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Time T16 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (59) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T16 will continue for 30 seconds.

Next, at time T17, the time-saving start image 546 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in orange, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting opening lamp 1211) are turned off.
The time T17 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (60) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T17 will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T18, the attention-calling image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T17.
The time T18 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (61) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T18 will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T19, the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in blue. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T18.
Time T19 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (62) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T19 will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T20, a stage image 61 corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated in yellow. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T19.
Time T20 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 120 (63) begins.

Although not shown in the figure, the light guide plate 118 is turned off during the execution of the jackpot game in the variable presentation example 13.
Also, although not shown in the figure, in variable performance example 13, the lamp continues to be in a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, which is different from the rainbow light-emitting mode, for approximately 58 seconds from when the variable performance starts until the rainbow light-emitting performance first starts at time T2 (see Figure 121).

In addition, the effects from the end of the jackpot variation effects until the start of the jackpot game round (see Figures 119 (56), 120 (57), and (58)) can also be considered the opening effects of the jackpot game. In addition, the effects from the end of the jackpot game round until the display of stage image 61 (see Figures 120 (60) to (62)) can also be considered the ending effects of the jackpot game.

(Variation example 14)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 14) will be described with reference to Fig. 123. Variable effect example 14 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
123 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), 115 (17) to (24), 116 (25) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), and 118 (41) and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 123 (1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. Button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a third button sound is output. The valid operation period for this button operation effect is the third period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamp emits the same light as shown in Figure 118 (43).

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in Figure 123 (2). At this time, the success image 538 (see Figure 118 (44)) is not displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is not executed. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 123 (3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is initiated, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in Fig. 118 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 118 (45) to (48), Figures 119 (49) to (56), and Figures 120 (57) to (63) are executed.

As described above, in Variation Presentation Example 14, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode of presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time presentation button 161 is operated, compared to Variation Presentation Example 13. In other words, in Variation Presentation Example 14, the period from when presentation button 161 is operated in the button operation presentation to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode of presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is longer than in Variation Presentation Example 13.

In the variation effect example 14, the success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limiting. In the variation effect example 14, after the effect shown in FIG. 123 (2) is performed, the vibration effect, the specific light emission mode of the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound may be executed without displaying the success image 538.
Also, at the time shown in Figure 123 (2), the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 118 (43), or may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 118 (44).
In addition, in variable performance example 14, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light-emitting mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as variable performance example 13, except that the performance shown in Figure 123 (2) is performed between time points T1 and T2 shown in Figure 121.

(Variation example 15)
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 15) will be described with reference to Fig. 124. Variable effect example 15 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
124 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), 115 (17) to (24), 116 (25) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), and 118 (41) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 124 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 and SPSP suggestion image 601 are displayed, and the second SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (2), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect starts, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light, and the second button sound is output. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the third period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 emit light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 118 (43).
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 124 (3). At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 118 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 118 (45) to (48), Figures 119 (49) to (56), and Figures 120 (57) to (63) are executed.

(Variation example 16)
125 to 128 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 16) will be described with reference to Figures 125 to 128. Variable effect example 16 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
125 to 128 are the variable performances that are executed when "EA6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), and 115 (17) to (22) are performed, and then the third step effect is executed as shown in Figure 125 (1), and a step image 508 with the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 125(2), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left column decorative symbol 41 "6" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the first varying action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 125 (3), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 125 (4), the right column decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 125 (5), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (6), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a specific reach action is performed. The specific reach action is a different action mode from any of the first reach action to the third reach action described above. In the illustrated example, as the specific reach action, the character of the decorative symbol 41 lowers his left arm and raises his right arm, making a fist with his right hand. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 125 (7), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 125 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 126 (12), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (13), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (14), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 126 (15), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 126 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 127 (17), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (18), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 127 (19), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (20), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output. In the illustrated example, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Battle," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 40%," which suggests that the expectation of the jackpot game being executed is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (21), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the first success sound is output. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is started at this time, and the effect button 161 vibrates.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (22), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (23), the bonus effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue.
Next, as shown in Figure 127 (24), the role-playing performance ends, and the three movable role-playing devices 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.

Next, the success image 538 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 128(25).
Next, as shown in Figure 128 (26), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "666" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
128 (27), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 128 (28), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 128 (29), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. Also, at this time, the vibration effect has ended.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, as shown in FIG. 128 (30).
Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (31), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "666" temporarily stops. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion teasing effect is executed. At this time, the doublet second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the ninth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (32), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbol 56 "666" are fixed and stopped.
After this, the same presentation as shown in Figure 119 (56) and Figures 120 (57) to (63) is performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 ``666'' are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

In addition, during the performances shown in Figures 127 (21) to (24) and Figures 128 (25) to (32), the lamps will emit light in the same manner as shown in Figures 118 (44) to (48) and Figures 119 (49) to (55).
In addition, in the variation presentation example 16, the deciding button presentation is not executed, but this is not limited to this. In the variation presentation example 16, the deciding button presentation may be executed during the execution of the SPSP reach presentation (after the presentation shown in FIG. 127 (20) and before the presentation shown in FIG. 127 (21)). In this case, the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission mode of the lamp when the deciding button presentation is executed may be the same as those shown in FIG. 118 (43).

(Variation example 17)
129 to 131 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 17) will be described with reference to Figures 129 to 131. Variable effect example 17 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
129 to 131 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 129 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a fourth start action, which is the action taken when the symbol begins to change, is performed. When the fourth start action is being performed, each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a shrinking manner. At this time, a fourth start effect image 547 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. In this embodiment, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 (reserved image 52) in the normal game state is spherical. At this time, a vibration effect is performed. At this time, a fourth change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 has changed, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 129 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable action is performed.
129(4), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the reach stimulation first effect image 522 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
129(5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, third reach-inducing effect images 548 are displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (6), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a fourth stop action is performed, which is the action taken when the variation stops. When the fourth stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed larger than when the third stop action is being performed (see FIG. 100 (4)). The fourth stop action can also be considered a fourth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach effect begins). The fourth reach action has a higher expectation level than any of the first reach action to the third reach action. At this time, a fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed surrounding each of the reach-ey decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The fourth reach sound can also be considered a tenth stop sound, which is the sound effect taken when the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 129 (7), the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 return to the display size before enlargement. At this time, the sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

129(8), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the seventh rainbow image 613 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Figure 76-5 (35)). At this time, doublet fanning first effect images 550 are displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (10), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Figure 76-5 (36)). At this time, doublet-number tilt second effect images 551 are displayed above, below, left, and right of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the seventeenth visual mode (see Figure 76-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth stop effect image 552 is displayed around the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started, and an eleventh stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the middle row decorative symbol 41 has stopped, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. Also, the vibration effect continues.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

In addition, in variable performance example 17, the stage image 61 is displayed even when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th viewing mode. However, even in variable performance example 17, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th viewing mode, the third rainbow image 540 (see Figure 128 (26)) may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in Figure 130 (15), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 131 (17), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "BIG".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (18), the jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus!" is displayed as the jackpot game notification image 542. That is, the jackpot game executed after the jackpot variable presentation is different between variation presentation example 17 and variation presentation example 13 (FIGS. 113 to 120). In addition, after variation presentation example 17, a jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds is executed. At this time, the eighth rainbow image 614 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 120 (58) to (63) are played, except that the jackpot game (round) takes longer to play, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

Figure 132 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 17.
Figure 132 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 17.
First, at time T1, a rainbow-colored variable image 51 is displayed. Although not shown, the lamp is emitting light in a different light-emitting mode from the rainbow light-emitting mode at this time. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 129 (2) starts. The effect indicated to be executed at time T1 continues for 15 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. In addition, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. In addition, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. In addition, the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.
The effect shown in Figure 129(7) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the seventh rainbow image 613 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue the light-emitting mode from time T2.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to perform a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to perform a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 129 (8) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 will continue for 10 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the doublet decorative pattern 41 starts to be enlarged and displayed. At this time, the sixth rainbow image 612 and the seventh rainbow image 613 are not displayed.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T3.
The effect shown in Figure 130 (12) starts at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue the light-emitting mode from time T4. Furthermore, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are lit in white.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (14) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 is no longer displayed.
Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 130 (16) begins.

Note that the effect performed at time T4 in Figure 132 is not limited to the example shown. From time T4 to time T5, the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) may be lit in white. Also, from time T4 to time T5, all lamps may be lit in white.

Furthermore, the flow of lamp illumination patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 17 is the same as variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp illumination pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 131 (17), the illumination pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 131 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Variation example 18)
133 and 134 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 18) will be described with reference to Figures 133 and 134. Variable effect example 18 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
133 and 134 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 129 (1) to (6) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 133 (1), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stopping operation is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 133 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 133 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

133(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 133(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 133 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 133 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 134 (9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (10), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!". At this time, button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) lights up red, and a third button sound is output. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the decide button operation effect, the ninth rainbow image 615 is displayed as shown in Fig. 134 (11). At this time, the vibration effect starts.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 134 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. Additionally, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventh stop effect image 554 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the thirteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 131 (17) and (18) are played. After that, the same effects as those shown in Figure 120 (58) to (63) are played, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

Figure 135 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 18.
Figure 135 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 18.
First, at time T1, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 is displayed. Although not shown, the lamp is emitting light in a different light-emitting mode from the rainbow light-emitting mode at this time. The effect indicated to be executed at time T1 continues for 30 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the ninth rainbow image 615 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) perform the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. Also, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
134(11) begins. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second. That is, the first rainbow light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) that are executed at time T2 end without being repeated (less than one cycle).

Next, at time T3, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.
The time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (12) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for one second.

Next, at time T4, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
Furthermore, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (13) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T5, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 is no longer displayed.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 134 (14) begins.

The sequence of lamp illumination patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 18 is the same as that in variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp illumination pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 131 (17), the illumination pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 131 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Example of variation 19)
136 to 139 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 19) will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 139. Variable effect example 19 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
136 to 139 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB4" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112(1) to (8), 113(1) to (8), 114(9) to (16), and 115(17) to (23) are performed, and then the step image 508 is hidden as shown in Figure 136(1). Also, the left column decorative pattern 41, "7," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (2), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (3), the right column decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (4), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, the third reach line image 602 and the third reach notification image 603 are displayed. Also, at this time, a first super-hot sound is output, indicating that there is a high expectation of a jackpot being played. The first super-hot sound can also be interpreted as a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved.

Next, as shown in Figure 136 (6), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 136 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "6" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 137 (9), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 137 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the transition image 516 is displayed on the lower half of one layer of the image display unit 114. In addition, in the variation performance example 19, the transition image 516 is displayed on a layer closer to the viewer than the decorative pattern 41, so that part of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 137 (12), the transition image 516 is displayed on the entire surface of one layer of the image display section 114, making the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye difficult to see or impossible to see.

137(13), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. Also, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 137 (14), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the "8" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 137 (15), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 137 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (17), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (18), a development effect is executed. At this time, a role object effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object high expectation effect image 604 is also displayed. At this time, a special development sound effect, which is a sound effect of the development effect, is output. The special development sound effect can also be regarded as a sound effect of the role object effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (19), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the third SPSP sound, which is the sound effect indicating the display of the SPSP suggestion image 601, is output. In the example shown, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Challenge," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 90%," which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is 90%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (20), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. The third period is, for example, 5 seconds.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 138 (21), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the tenth rainbow image 616 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is started. At this time, a special jackpot notification sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (22), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) enter the first mode of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remain extinguished.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (23), the role-playing effect ends, and the three movable role-playing objects move back to their initial positions. At this time, the eleventh rainbow image 617 and the twelfth rainbow image 618 are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (24), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. Furthermore, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, while the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) remain extinguished.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (25), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventh stop effect image 554 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the thirteenth stop sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (26), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remain off.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 131 (17) and (18) are played. After that, the same effects as those shown in Figure 120 (58) to (63) are played, except that the jackpot game (round) takes longer to play, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

In variable presentation example 19, the third reach action is performed when a reach performance is executed, but this is not limited to this. In variable presentation example 19, the fourth reach action (see Figure 129 (6)) may also be performed when a reach performance is executed. Also, in variable presentation example 19, when a reach performance is executed, a reach action different from any of the reach actions described above (for example, an action in which the character of decorative pattern 41 waves both hands) may also be performed.

As described above, in the variation performance example 19, a development performance different from the development performance (see FIG. 118 (41)) executed in the variation performance example 13 is performed, and an SPSP reach performance with a higher expectation level than the SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 118 (42)) executed in the variation performance example 13 is performed. Here, in this embodiment, the first SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 118 (42)) is more likely to be executed when a variation performance in which the first development performance (development performance shown in FIG. 118 (41)) is executed is performed than when a variation performance in which the second development performance (development performance shown in FIG. 138 (18)) is executed is performed, and the second SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 138 (19)) is more likely to be executed (a jackpot game is more likely to be executed) when a variation performance in which the second development performance (development performance shown in FIG. 138 (18)) is executed is performed than when a variation performance in which the first development performance (development performance shown in FIG. 118 (41)) is executed is performed.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the development effects, and the player's anticipation as to which development effect will be executed can be increased.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second development effect (the development effect shown in FIG. 138 (18)) is executed after the reach effect in which the "7" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are aligned, the third reach line image 602 is displayed, the third reach notification image 603 is displayed, and the first super hot sound is output. Here, in this embodiment, the second development effect may be executed more easily when a variable effect in which the specific effect that starts before the start of the development effect is the second specific effect is executed than when a variable effect in which the specific effect that starts before the start of the development effect is the first specific effect is executed. Here, examples of the first specific effect include the reach effect in which the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are aligned, the display of the second reach line image 531, the second reach notification image 532, and the output of the third reach sound. In addition, the second specific effects include a reach effect in which the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows all line up, the display of a third reach line image 602, the display of a third reach notification image 603, and the output of a first super hot sound.
In this case, the player can be made to feel the variety of the specific effects, and the player's anticipation as to which specific effect will be executed can be increased.

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable part 115 is the same between the first development performance (development performance shown in Figure 118 (41)) and the second development performance (development performance shown in Figure 138 (18)), but the displayed performance image and output sound effects are different, but this is not limited to this.
The first development performance and the second development performance may have the same movement pattern of the movable role object 115, but the light emission pattern of the movable role object 115 may be different. Also, the first development performance and the second development performance may have the same light emission pattern of the movable role object 115, but the movement pattern of the movable role object 115 may be different. Also, the first development performance and the second development performance may have a different moving movable role object 115 among the three movable role objects 115. In other words, as long as at least one of the moving movable role object 115, the light emission pattern of the movable role object 115, the movement pattern of the movable role object 115, the displayed performance image, and the output sound effect is different between the first development performance and the second development performance, any performance pattern may be common and any performance pattern may be different.
Furthermore, the first development effect and the second development effect may have the same expectation level.

Furthermore, in variable presentation example 19, the presentation image displayed and the sound effect output when a normal reach presentation is executed are different from those in variable presentation example 13 (see FIG. 116 (28)). Here, it may be configured such that the second SPSP reach presentation is more likely to be executed (a jackpot game is more likely to be executed) when a variable presentation in which a second specific presentation is executed is executed than when a variable presentation in which a first specific presentation is executed is executed. Also, it may be configured such that the first SPSP reach presentation is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation in which a first specific presentation is executed is executed than when a variable presentation in which a second specific presentation is executed is executed. Examples of the first specific presentation include a reach presentation in which the "4"s of the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows line up, the display of the second reach line image 531, the output of the second reach notification image 532 and the third reach sound, etc. In addition, the second specific effects include a reach effect in which the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows all line up, the display of a third reach line image 602, the display of a third reach notification image 603, and the output of a first super hot sound.
The first and second specific effects may share the same decorative symbols 41 on the left and right sides. The first and second specific effects may also share the same effect images. The first and second specific effects may also share the same sound effects.

In addition, in variable performance example 19, the manner in which the display mode of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is switched to the display mode of the less decorative decorative pattern 41 is different from that of variable performance example 13 (see Figures 117 (32) to (34)).
Here, the second development effect or the second SPSP reach effect may be more easily executed when the second switching effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 137(10) to (13)) is executed than when the first switching effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 117(32) to (34)) is executed as a switch from the display mode of the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 to the display mode of the less decorative decorative pattern 41. Also, the first development effect or the first SPSP reach effect may be more easily executed when the first switching effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 117(32) to (34)) is executed than when the second switching effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 137(10) to (13)) is executed.

It should be noted that even when the first advanced effect is executed, the second SPSP reach effect may be executed. Also, even when the second advanced effect is executed, the first SPSP reach effect may be executed.
Furthermore, even when the first specific effect is executed, the second SPSP reach effect may be executed. Furthermore, even when the second specific effect is executed, the first SPSP reach effect may be executed.
Furthermore, even when the first reach effect is executed, the second SPSP reach effect may be executed. Furthermore, even when the second reach effect is executed, the first SPSP reach effect may be executed.
Furthermore, even when the second reach effect is executed, the first switching effect may be executed. Furthermore, even when the first reach effect is executed, the second switching effect may be executed.

Furthermore, the fact that the first SPSP reach effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the first development effect is executed is performed than when a variable effect in which the second development effect is executed is performed includes the fact that the first SPSP reach effect is not executed (0%) when a variable effect in which the second development effect is executed is performed, and the fact that the first SPSP reach effect is always executed (100%) when a variable effect in which the first development effect is executed is performed.
Furthermore, the fact that the second development effect is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second specific effect is executed is executed than when a variable effect in which the first specific effect is executed includes the fact that the second development effect is not executed (0%) when a variable effect in which the first specific effect is executed is executed, and the fact that the second development effect is always executed (100%) when a variable effect in which the second specific effect is executed is executed.
Furthermore, the fact that the second SPSP reach performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which the second reach performance is executed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first reach performance is executed is performed includes the fact that the second SPSP reach performance is not executed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first reach performance is executed is performed, and the fact that the second SPSP reach performance is always executed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second reach performance is executed is performed.
Furthermore, the fact that the second development effect or the second SPSP reach effect is more likely to be executed when the second switching effect is executed than when the first switching effect is executed includes the fact that the second development effect or the second SPSP reach effect will not be executed (0%) when the first switching effect is executed, and the fact that the second development effect or the second SPSP reach effect will always be executed (100%) when the second switching effect is executed.

Furthermore, when the second development effect is executed, an effect in which the movable role object 115 swings slightly is executed as a development stimulation effect, while when the first development effect is executed, an effect in which the movable role object 115 swings slightly is executed as a development stimulation effect.

Figure 140 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in Variable Presentation Example 19.
Figure 140 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 19.
First, at time T1, the tenth rainbow image 616 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable role piece 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable role piece 1153) are lit in white.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 138 (21) starts. The effect that is indicated to be executed at time T1 continues for one second.

Next, at time T2, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the ninth rainbow light-emitting pattern at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue their light-emitting patterns from time T1. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) lights up in white.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and executes a rainbow light emission performance with the ninth rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 138 (22) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T3, the tenth rainbow image 616 disappears, and the eleventh rainbow image 617 and the twelfth rainbow image 618 are displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue the light-emitting mode from time T2.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and executes the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 138 (23) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for 8 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 138 (24) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T4. The thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) is turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 139 (25) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for 7 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable performance ends.
Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 139 (26) begins.

(Variation example 20)
141-1 and 141-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 20) will be described with reference to Figures 141-1 and 141-2. Variable effect example 20 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
141-1 and 141-2 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples will be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 101(1) to (8), 102(9) to (16), 103(17) to (24), 104(25) to (32), and 105(33) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 141-1(1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!". In addition, a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 141-1 (2). At this time, the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141-1 (3), the role presentation is executed, and the left movable role 1151, the center movable role 1152, and the right movable role 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 141-1 (4), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 141-1 (5), the role-playing performance ends, and the three movable role-playing devices 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141-1 (6), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) change to the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) turn off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes to the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

141-1(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.
Next, as shown in FIG. 141-1 (8), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and no vibration effect is performed. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141-2 (9), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed. The eighth stop sound is also output.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are in the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode. The fourth mode is selected, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) is in the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) is in the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off and are lit in white, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, the promotion teasing effect is started. In the promotion teasing effect, as shown in FIG. 141-2 (10), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 119 (53) to (56) and Figure 120 (57) to (63) are performed.
In this way, in the variation effect example 20, the vibration effect is not executed.
In addition, in the variable performance example 20, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as those in the variable performance example 13 (see Figures 121 and 122).

(Variation example 21)
142 and 143 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 21) will be described with reference to Figures 142 and 143. Variable effect example 21 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
142 and 143 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112(1) to (8), 113(1) to (8), 114(9) to (16), 115(17) to (24), 116(25) to (32), 117(33) to (40), and 118(41) and (42) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 142(1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the decide button operation effect, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 142 (2). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Furthermore, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output, and the game becomes silent.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are lit in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. A switching sound is also output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 142(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 142(4), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 reappears. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Fig. 142(2).
Next, as shown in Figure 142 (5), the entire switching image 520 disappears, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect indicating the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 stopping is not output, but is silent. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Figure 142 (2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(6), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the revival image 558 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started. A first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 142(2).
Next, as shown in Figure 142 (7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are lit in orange, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to be extinguished.

Next, as shown in Figure 142 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (9), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 119 (53) to (56) and Figure 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are two types of stop effects: a first stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 79(15)) that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) different from the predetermined sound (variable BGM) when a specific row of symbols (e.g., the middle row decorative symbol 41) stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode); and a second stop effect (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 142(5)) that does not output a specific sound when a specific row of symbols stops in a specific display mode. The specific sounds include a first specific sound (e.g., the first stop sound (see FIG. 79(15))) and a second specific sound (e.g., the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 119(51))) that is output when the decorative symbol 41 stops in a specific sequence (double numbers). Furthermore, in one variable performance, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 21 (see Figure 142) is performed) than when the first stop performance is executed (for example, when variable performance example 1 (see Figures 78 to 80) is performed).
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second stop presentation is executed, when the symbols in a specific row stop in a specific display mode, a specific sound is not output, but the second specific sound is likely to be output. This, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, can increase the player's excitement at the execution of the special game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is not always output when the first stop performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second stop performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second stop performance is executed than when the first stop performance is executed, the second specific sound may be output when the first stop performance is executed, or the second specific sound may not be output when the second stop performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the second specific variation effect (a miss variation effect in which an SP reach effect is performed) is executed, a specific sound (stop sound) is not output when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops after the switching image 520 (see FIG. 105 (36)) is displayed (see FIGS. 105 (38) and (40)). On the other hand, when a revival effect is executed (see FIG. 142 (6)), a specific sound (such as the eighth stop sound (see FIG. 119 (51))) can be output when a specific row of symbols stops, even after the switching image 520 is displayed. Therefore, combined with the unexpectedness of the specific sound being output, the level of excitement the player feels when a special game is played can be increased.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot game is more likely to be played when a variable effect is executed in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (see FIG. 79 (15)), than when a variable effect is executed in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) (see FIG. 142 (5)). Therefore, even when a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode, the player can be made to expect that a jackpot game will be played.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be played when a variable effect in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable effect in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode also includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be played (0%) when a variable effect in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is easier to execute when a variable effect in which a stop sound is not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed than when a variable effect in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed, then a jackpot game may be executed when a variable effect in which a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is executed.

Figure 144 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 21.
Figure 144 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 21.
First, at time T1, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number temporarily stops. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are lit in blue.
The effect shown in Figure 142 (2) starts at time T1. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 7 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the restored image 558 is displayed. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T1.
The effect shown in Figure 142(6) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are lit in orange. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T2.
Furthermore, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 142 (7) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for one second.

Next, at time T4, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T3. The thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) is turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
Furthermore, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 142 (8) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for 10 seconds.

Next, at time T5, a fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 143 (9) begins.

(Variation example 22)
145 to 147 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 22) will be described with reference to Figures 145 to 147. Variable effect example 22 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
145 to 147 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA7" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), 115 (17) to (24), and 116 (25) and (26) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 145 (1), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in red, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (2), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the third reach action is performed. At this time, a rainbow reach line image 619 and a rainbow reach notification image 620 are displayed. At this time, a first rainbow reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The first rainbow reach sound can also be considered as a sound effect suggesting or notifying that a jackpot game will be played.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (3), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in red, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 145 (5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 145 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 145 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 145 (8), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (9), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (10), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 146 (11), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 146 (12), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 146 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (14), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Although not shown, while the effects shown in Figures 145 (4) to (8) and Figures 146 (9) to (14) are being performed, the lamp is in a non-rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (15), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in red, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) through the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (16), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the fourth SPSP sound, which is the sound effect of the SPSP suggestion image 601 being displayed, is output. In the illustrated example, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Chance," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 100%," which suggests that the expectation of the jackpot game being executed is 100% (the jackpot game will definitely be executed).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (17), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Victory!", which encourages the operation of the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period for this button operation effect is the third period.
At this time, the lamp continues to emit light in the manner shown in FIG. 146 (16).

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 147 (18). At this time, a first success sound is output. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 118 (45) to (48), Figures 119 (49) to (56), and Figures 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

The SPSP suggestion image 601 shown in Figure 146 (16) and the "Victory!" text on the button operation image 502 shown in Figure 146 (17) may be rainbow-colored, which is a display mode that emphasizes (notifies or suggests) that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the SPSP suggestion image 601 shown in Figure 146 (16) and the "Victory!" text on the button operation image 502 shown in Figure 146 (17) are perceived as rainbow images.

Figure 148 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 22.
Figure 148 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 22.
First, at time T1, the right-row decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in red, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.
The time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 145 (1) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 continues for one second.

Next, at time T2, the rainbow reach line image 619 and the rainbow reach notification image 620 are displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.3-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) continue their light-emitting modes from time T1. The thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to execute a rainbow light emission performance with the fifth rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 145 (2) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the rainbow reach line image 619 and the rainbow reach notification image 620 are hidden. Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 145 (3) begins.

After that, at time T4, the fourth effect image 535 of the role is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in red, and the second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) through the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.
Furthermore, time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 146 (15) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T5, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T4.
The time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 146 (16) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 will continue for 7 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as it did at time T5. Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147 (17) starts. The effect indicated to be executed at time T6 continues for one second.
Next, at time T7, success image 538 is displayed. Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 147 (18) starts.

Note that from time T6 to time T7 shown in FIG. 148, the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) may be in a rainbow light emission mode (for example, the second rainbow light emission mode with a 0.4 second cycle).

As described above, in this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed using the decorative patterns 41 "4" on the left and right rows, the rainbow reach line image 619 is displayed, and when a reach effect is executed using the decorative patterns 41 "7" on the left and right rows, the third reach line image 602 is displayed. In other words, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (displaying a stopped decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, displaying a double-digit decorative pattern 41, etc.) while a variable performance is being executed, and can display emphasis images (stop effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, double-digit effect image, etc.) that emphasize the specific performances while a variable performance is being executed, and the performance patterns include a first performance pattern that includes first character information (such as any number from 1 to 9) and a second performance pattern that includes second character information that is different from the first character information (such as a number different from the first character information), and the specific performances include a first specific performance in which the first performance pattern is displayed stopped, and a second specific performance in which the second performance pattern is displayed stopped, and different emphasis images can be displayed when the first specific performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and when the second specific performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which only a single emphasized image is displayed regardless of the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped and displayed, even in a specific presentation mode, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the specific presentation from the perspective of the decorative pattern 41 and the emphasized image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed using the decorative pattern 41 "4" on the left and right rows, the first rainbow reach sound is output, and when a reach effect is executed using the decorative pattern 41 "7" on the left and right rows, the first super hot sound is output. In other words, the performance control unit 300 can execute specific performances (such as the display of a stopped decorative pattern 41, a reach performance, or the display of a double-digit decorative pattern 41) while a variable performance is being executed, and can output specific sounds (such as a stop sound or a reach sound) when a specific performance is executed. The performance patterns include a first performance pattern that includes first character information (such as any number from 1 to 9) and a second performance pattern that includes second character information that is different from the first character information (such as a number different from the first character information). The specific performances include a first specific performance in which the first performance pattern is displayed stopped, and a second specific performance in which the second performance pattern is displayed stopped, and different specific sounds can be output when the first specific performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode and when the second specific performance is executed while a variable performance is being executed in a specific performance mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which only a single specific sound is output regardless of the decorative pattern 41 that is stopped and displayed, even in a specific presentation mode, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the specific presentation from the perspective of the decorative pattern 41 and the specific sound, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that the display time of the rainbow reach line image 619 is one second (see Figure 148). Here, the display time of the rainbow reach line image 619 may be longer than that of other reach line images (see Figures 88 (14), 103 (19), and 136 (5)). Furthermore, the display time of the rainbow reach notification image 620 may be longer than that of other reach notification images (see Figures 88 (14), 103 (19), and 136 (5)). Furthermore, the output time of the first rainbow reach sound may be longer than that of other reach sounds (see Figures 88 (14), 103 (19), and 136 (5)). Furthermore, the output time of the first rainbow reach sound may be longer than the display time of the rainbow reach line image 619 and the rainbow reach notification image 620, or the display time of the rainbow reach line image 619 and the rainbow reach notification image 620 may be longer than the output time of the first rainbow reach sound, or the display time of the rainbow reach line image 619 and the rainbow reach notification image 620 may be the same as the output time of the first rainbow reach sound.

(Variation 1 of Variation Example 13)
Figure 149 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 1 of variable presentation example 13.
Next, a description will be given of a first modified example of the variation presentation example 13. The presentation performed in the variation presentation example 13 is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.
Figure 149 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in variant example 1 of variable performance example 13.
In addition, in the modified example 1 of the variable performance example 13, the performance (such as the display content of the image display unit 114) except for the light emission mode of the lamp is the same as that shown in Figures 113 to 122. In addition, the light emission mode of the lamp in the modified example 1 of the variable performance example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 113 to 122 except for the part shown in Figure 149.

First, the same effects as those shown at time points T1 to T3 in FIG. 121 are performed, and then, as shown at time point T4', the display of the first rainbow image 539 continues. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode at a 1-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at a 1-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at a 0.8-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at a 0.8-second cycle. Furthermore, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) perform a rainbow light-emitting effect by repeating the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4 second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals. The light guide plate 118 is also turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, time T4' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (46) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T4' will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T5', the second rainbow image 606 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continues the light-emitting mode from time T4'. Furthermore, the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emission mode every second.
The time T5' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (47) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T5' will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T6', the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode every one second. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode every one second.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the sixth rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) with the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).
The time T6' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (48) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T6' will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T7', the doublet decorative pattern 41 starts to expand. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.
The time T7' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (49) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T7' continues for one second.
After this, the same effects as those shown from time T8 to time T20 in Figures 121 and 122 are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a second cycle different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a specific cycle different from the second cycle (see times T4' to T5' and times T6' to T7' in Figure 149, etc.).
In this case, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a sense of unity can be realized by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means, and then the rainbow light-emitting effect can be diversified in accordance with the light-emitting means depending on the progress of the variable effect.
In the illustrated example, the specific period is the first period, but is not limited to this. The specific period may be any period different from the second period, and may be any period different from the first period (e.g., 0.8 seconds).

Also, in the example shown in Figure 149, a specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T6' to time T7' is set as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), but this is not limited to this.
The specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T6' to time T7' may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611).

Furthermore, during the period from time T6' to time T7', the performance control unit 300 may make the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp (one of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611)) the same cycle, but different, between the specific lamps (lamps other than the specific lamp from the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611)). In this case, as long as the rainbow light emission pattern of the specific lamp is different between the period from time T4' to time T5' and the period from time T6' to time T7', the rainbow light emission patterns of the other lamps may be the same or different.

(Variation 2 of Variation Presentation Example 13)
Figure 150 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 2 of variable presentation example 13.
Next, we will explain variant example 2 of variation presentation example 13.
Figure 150 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in variant example 2 of variable performance example 13.
In addition, in the modified example 2 of the variation performance example 13, the performance (such as the display content of the image display unit 114) except for the light emission mode of the lamp is the same as that shown in Figures 113 to 122. In addition, the light emission mode of the lamp in the modified example 2 of the variation performance example 13 is the same as that shown in Figures 113 to 122 except for the part shown in Figure 150.

First, the same effects as those shown at time points T1 to T3 in FIG. 121 are performed, and then, as shown at time point T4', the display of the first rainbow image 539 continues. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 1 second. Also, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 1 second. Also, the third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. Also, the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. Also, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.4 seconds. Furthermore, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals. The light guide plate 118 is also turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute the rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light-emitting mode of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) with the light-emitting modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611).
Furthermore, time T4' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (46) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T4' will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T5', the second rainbow image 606 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable role 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continues the rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8-second intervals. Furthermore, the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emission mode every second.
The time T5' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (47) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T5' will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T6', the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
The time T6' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 118 (48) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T6' will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T7', the doublet decorative pattern 41 begins to expand. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T6'.
The time T7' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 119 (49) starts. The effect shown to be executed at the time T7' continues for one second.
After this, the same effects as those shown from time T8 to time T20 in Figures 121 and 122 are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a third cycle that is different from the first cycle and then to the second cycle (see times T4' to T5' and times T6' to T7' in Figure 150, etc.).
In this case, after realizing diversification of rainbow light-emitting effects according to the light-emitting means, it is possible to realize a rainbow light-emitting effect with a sense of unity between the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means according to the progress of the variable effect.
In the illustrated example, the third period is different from the second period, but this is not limiting. The third period may be any period different from the first period, or may be the same period as the second period.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 150, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is a specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T4' to time T5', but this is not limited to this.
The specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T4' to time T5' may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611).

Furthermore, during the period from time T4' to time T5', the performance control unit 300 may make the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp (one of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611)) the same cycle, but different, between the specific lamps (lamps other than the specific lamp from the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611)). In this case, as long as the rainbow light emission pattern of the specific lamp is different between time T4' to time T5' and time T6' to time T7', the rainbow light emission patterns of the other lamps may be the same or different.

Also, in variant example 2 of variable performance example 13, at time T4', the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission patterns of the second lamp (left movable role 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) with the light emission patterns of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), but this is not limited to this.
At time T4', the performance control unit 300 may synchronize (align) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role 1151), fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 10)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 10 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 101(1) to (8) and 102(9) to (14) are performed, and then the zone execution image 530 is displayed as shown in Figure 151(1). At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41, "3," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 151 (2), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stopping operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a fourteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbol 41 stops, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (3), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 151 (4), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the fourteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (5), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a fifth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the fifth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is also output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative symbols 41. In other words, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an emphasis effect that emphasizes each of the plurality of decorative symbols 41 (1 to 9), and can also make the emphasis mode of the emphasis effect different between the first symbol (e.g., 4) and the second symbol (e.g., 3).
In this embodiment, as a variable effect, a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 10 may be provided instead of variable effect example 10, or a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 10 may be provided together with variable effect example 10.

(Variation example 23)
Next, referring to Figures 152 to 154, a specific description will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 23) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable presentation example 23 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 23 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 152 to 154 are variable effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.
In addition, each of the change presentations from change presentation example 23 to change presentation example 43 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the second stage.

As shown in FIG. 152 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays one reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small symbol 56, and a stage image 61. Additionally, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second presentation mode). The second stage is a presentation mode in the normal game state. At this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first start gate 121 indicates "1," which is the reserved number for winning the first start gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second start gate 122 indicates "0," which is the reserved number for winning the second start gate 122. The three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.
In addition, in the second stage, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a decorative manner different from the decorative manner in the first stage (see Figure 78 (1)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (2), the change effect begins as the special symbol changes. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a fifth start action, which is the action taken when the change begins, is performed. When the fifth start action is being performed, the left row decorative symbols 41 are displayed as moving to the right, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed as rotating clockwise, and the right row decorative symbols 41 are displayed as moving to the left. At this time, a fifth start effect image 559 is displayed on the side to which the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are moving. The small symbols 56 also begin to change. In the second stage, change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change effect, but this change BGM is a different song from the change BGM in the first stage.

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a third visual mode and perform a fourth changing operation, which is the operation when changing. When the fourth changing operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed moving along a fourth changing path (see Figure 77-1 (4)). More specifically, when the fourth changing operation is being performed, the left row decorative symbols 41 are displayed moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the left in the left-right direction, the right row decorative symbols 41 are displayed moving from the center of the image display unit 114 to the right in the left-right direction, and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed rotating in the center of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 152 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and perform a fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (5), a button operation effect is executed, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the first period. At this time, a first button sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 152 (6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Furthermore, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 152 (7), the left column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 152 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (9), the left-row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops. When the fifth stop action is being performed, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed as if it is being stopped by sudden braking. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left-row decorative pattern 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the decorative pattern 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Figure 153 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action. At this time, the visual mode of the left-row decorative symbol 41 changes to the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 153 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.

Next, as shown in Figure 153 (12), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 153 (13), the "9" in the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action. At this time, the right row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 153 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (15), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative symbol 41, the right row decorative symbol 41, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 153 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 154 (17), as the special symbol stops, three rows of decorative symbol 41, "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first visual mode). Furthermore, as the special symbol stops changing, small symbol 56, "412", is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, as the changing effect ends, the changing image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 155 is a diagram showing another example of presentation in variable presentation example 23.
In the variation effect example 23, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect has been described. Below, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect will be described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 152(1) to 152(4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 155(1), the button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 155 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a different display mode from the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 83 (2)). At this time, a third operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

155(3), the first operation image 504 is hidden, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 152 (7) and (8), Figures 153 (9) to (16), and Figure 154 (17) are performed.

(Variation example 24)
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 24) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. Variable presentation example 24 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state. Note that variable presentation example 24 is a variable presentation that is executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable presentation" in FIG. 59. Also, variable presentation example 24 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for entry into the first starting hole 121 being "1". Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable presentation examples will be mainly described, and explanations of similarities with the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 152 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 156 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
156(2), a zone promotion effect is executed, and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone promotion image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Furthermore, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the 15th stop sound is not output.

In the variation effect example 24, the zone effect is not executed after the zone promotion effect is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 156 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and is performing the first temporary stop operation.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 153 (10) to (16) and Figure 154 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 is no longer displayed, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Variation example 25)
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 25) will be described with reference to Fig. 157. Variable effect example 25 is a variable effect example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 25 is a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first starting hole 121 being "4".
157 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 157(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), the variation effect starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a sixth start operation, which is the operation when the variation starts, is performed. When the sixth start operation is being performed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a motion that sways up and down. At this time, a sixth start effect image 561 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 157 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 157 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and perform a fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 157 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in variation performance example 23 and variation performance example 24.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (6), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a sixth stopping action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the sixth stopping action is being executed, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed as if they are swaying in the direction in which they were moving in the fourth fluctuation action. Also, at this time, the ninth stop effect image 562 is displayed. Also, at this time, the fifteenth stopping sound is output from the speaker 156. In other words, the same sound effect is output when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 23 and fluctuation performance example 24, and when the decorative patterns 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 24.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (7), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 157 (8).

(Variation of Variation Example 25)
Next, a modified example of variation presentation example 25 will be explained.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (both are the 15th stop sound) in the variable performance where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 23, variable performance example 24), and the variable performance where the pending number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 25), but this is not limited to this.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 157 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 158 (1), the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (2), the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform a sixth stop operation. At this time, the ninth stop effect image 562 is displayed on the left side of the left column decorative symbols 41 and on the right side of each of the right column decorative symbols 41 and the middle column decorative symbols 41. At this time, a sixteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the three columns of decorative symbols 41 stop, is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output from when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 23 and the variation performance example 24.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 158 (4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 25 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 25, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 25 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 25.

(Variation example 26)
159 to 161 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 26) will be described with reference to Figures 159 to 161. Variable effect example 26 is a variable effect example in which a reach effect is executed based on a winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
In addition, the variable performance example 26 is a variable performance that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 159 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56, "213," are fixed and stopped. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121. Also, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 159 (2), the variable effect begins as the display of the special symbols begins to change, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and the fifth start operation is performed. At this time, the fifth start effect image 559 is also displayed. The small symbols 56 also begin to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 159 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 159 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the central movable reel 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the sixth reel effect image 563 is displayed. Also, at this time, the fifth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 159(6), the first step effect is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound, which is a sound effect for the first step effect, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 159 (7), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, the step 2 sound, which is the sound effect of the second step performance, is output.
The step image 508 displayed in the second stage has a different display mode from the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see Figures 87(6), (7), etc.).

Next, as shown in Figure 159 (8), the left column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (10), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 160 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (12), the right-row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right-row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 160 (13), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a sixth reach action is performed, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). When the sixth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if raising their right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (15), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 160 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first variable path CR1 (see Fig. 77-1 (1)). However, in the second stage, the pseudo consecutive image 511 may pass through the middle fourth variable path CR4 (see Fig. 77-1 (4)). At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
161 (17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-series fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-series image 511.

In the variation effect example 26, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and then the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 161 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (19), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stop operation. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reduced size so that it is the same display size as the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Figure 161 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 161 (21).

(Variation example 27)
162 to 164 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 27) will be described with reference to Figures 162 to 164. Variable effect example 27 is a variable effect based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
The variation effects shown in Figures 162 to 164 are variation effects that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effect as shown in Figures 152 (1) to (3) is executed, and then, as shown in Figure 162 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (2), a role production is executed, and the left movable role product 1151 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a seventh role product effect image 564 is displayed around the left movable role product 1151. Also, at this time, a sixth role product sound, which is a sound effect of the role product production, is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(3), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an action such that it moves downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (4), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (5), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the pseudo consecutive image 511 has stopped, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(6), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 162 (7), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "434," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. Also at this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 162 (8), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(9), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (10), the left column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the fourth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (11), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 163 (12), the right column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (13), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 163 (14), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the sixth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, the first reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (15), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 163 (16), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (17), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (18), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (19), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 164 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a way that it shrinks to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 164 (21).

(Variation example 28)
165 to 167 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
165 to 167, another specific example (variation presentation example 28) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described. Variation presentation example 28 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 165 to 167 are variable effects that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162 (1) to (8) and Figures 163 (9) to (16) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 165 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 165 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (14)).
Next, as shown in Figure 165 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 165 (4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (15)). At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode (see FIG. 76-2(16)), and a second temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 165 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 76-3 (17)), and performs a second varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is varying. When the second varying operation is being performed in the second stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving from the upper right corner to the lower left corner of the image display unit 114 along the second varying path (see Fig. 77-1 (2)).
Next, as shown in Figure 165 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (18)).

Next, as shown in Fig. 166(9), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "3", is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 76-3(19)). At this time, the SP first effect image 518 is displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 166 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode.

166(11), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 166 (12), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that returns it to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (13), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the "4" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 passes, and the "3" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 76-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, a third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Furthermore, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Figure 166 (14), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (15), part of the switching image 520 is hidden and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 remain difficult to see or invisible. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output. Also, as described above, since the variable background music is not being output at this time, there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 29)
168 and 169 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 29) will be described with reference to Figures 168 and 169. Variable effect example 29 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach effect is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 168 and 169 are variable effects that are executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 162(1) to (8), 163(9) to (16), and 165(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 168(1), the SP Reach effect starts and the SP Reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the Reach eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (2), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth viewing mode (see FIG. 76-3 (23)), and a third variation operation is performed. When the third variation operation is performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed along the third variation path (see FIG. 77-1 (3)) so as to replace the display position of the development image 521. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5," is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 168 (3), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Figure 76-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 168 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 168(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 76-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(6), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 76-4(27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Next, as shown in Figure 168 (7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
168(8), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

169(9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) for the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 to stop is not output, but remains silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 30)
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Variable effect example 30 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 170 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 152 (1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 170 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 170 (2), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (9)) and perform the fourth varying action. In the second stage, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode are displayed in a swinging motion from side to side. At this time, the reach stimulation fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 170(3), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 76-2(10)). At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed further outward in the left-right direction of the image 511 than in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 170(2)). At this time, a fourth reach-inducing effect image 565 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 170 (4), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (11)) and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the left-row decorative symbols 41 perform the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(5), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the fifth stop action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of each of the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable performance example 30, after the performance shown in FIG. 170(4) is executed, the performance shown in FIG. 170(6) may be executed without executing the performance shown in FIG. 170(5). In other words, if a reach performance is not executed after a reach-inducing performance is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the 15th stop sound may not be performed.

(Variation example 31)
FIG. 171 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 31) will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Variable effect example 31 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach effect is executed.
Note that this is a variable effect that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in the variable effect diagram 59 shown in Figure 171.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 152 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 171 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
171(2), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, reach stimulation fourth effect images 565 are displayed on the left and right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

171(3), the decorative symbols 41 of the left and right rows, “4,” are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual recognition mode. At this time, the fourth reach teasing effect image 565 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 76-2 (12)), and a seventh stop action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the seventh stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in an action such that they expand while swaying left and right, respectively. The seventh stop action can also be considered as a seventh reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a tenth effect image 566 is displayed at the time of stop. At this time, a fifth reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The fifth reach sound can also be considered as a seventeenth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 165 (1) to (8), 166 (9) to (16), and 167 (17) are performed.

(Variation example 32)
172 to 176 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 32) will be described with reference to Figures 172 to 176. Variable effect example 32 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
172 to 176 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 172(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The blue display mode of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be due to a change in the display mode during the variation effect executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a seventh start operation, which is the operation performed when the change begins, is performed. When the seventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an upward movement. At this time, a seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a second start sound, which is the sound effect indicating the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 172 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172(4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the eighth role effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the seventh role sound, which is the sound effect of the role effect, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 172 (6), the role effect ends and the role effect image 8 568 disappears. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 172 (7), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 172 (8), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (9), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, the step 3 sound, which is the sound effect of the third step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (10), the step image 508 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (11), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, a third operation image 569 is displayed as shown in Fig. 173 (12). At this time, a fourth operation sound is output as a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (13), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (14), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone effect has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 173 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (16), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 174 (17), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and an eighth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the eighth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if both hands are raised. Furthermore, the eighth reach action has a higher expectation than the sixth reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Furthermore, at this time, a third reach sound, which is a sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop motion. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 174 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 174 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (26), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (27), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (28), the development promotion effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 175 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 175 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (31), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (32), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle movable role object 1152 has moved to a position lower than the position shown in FIG. 159 (5). At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (33), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode (see FIG. 76-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect starts, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output. This SPSP suggestion image 601 is the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 105 (33), FIG. 127 (20), etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (34), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 176 (35), three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output and becomes silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 176 (36), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
176 (37), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
176 (38), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stopping operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output, and the display is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (39), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 33)
177 to 182 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 33) will be described with reference to Figures 177 to 182. Variable effect example 33 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
The variation effects shown in Figures 177 to 182 are variation effects that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 172 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 177 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the fourth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(2), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is period 1. At this time, a first button sound is output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 177 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is also output. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see).

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(4), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 177 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 177(7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 177 (8), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
Next, as shown in Fig. 178(9), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (10), the pseudo-continuous image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo-continuous stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 511. At this time, a pseudo-continuous stop sound is also output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo-continuous image 511 stops for the first time (see FIG. 177 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(11), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 178 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Also at this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change for the third time. Also at this time, a second re-change sound is output. That is, in change performance example 33, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the first time (see Figure 172 (2)), when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the second time (see Figure 177 (5)), and when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Figure 178 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 178 (15), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 178 (16), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (17), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 179 (18), the left column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (19), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (20), the right column decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 179 (22), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, the third reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 179 (23), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. At this time, the second variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 179 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 180 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 180 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 180 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (30), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 180 (31), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 180 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 181 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (34), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (35), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role object effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (36), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (37), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 181 (38). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. When the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output, and the display becomes silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 181 (39), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 181 (40), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
182 (41), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output, and the display is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (42), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound (first stop sound) output when the left-row decorative pattern 41 stops common to the specific sound output when the right-row decorative pattern 41 stops in the variable performance of the first performance mode (first stage) (for example, the variable performance of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105)), and can make it different from the specific sound (sixth stop sound) output when the middle-row decorative pattern 41 stops.The performance control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the middle-row decorative pattern 41 stops common between the variable performance of the first performance mode and the variable performance of the second performance mode (second stage) (variable performance example 32 (see Figures 172 to 176)).
In this case, the impression of the decorative symbol 41 stopping is made different depending on the row in which the decorative symbol 41 stops, and the impression of the middle row decorative symbol 41 stopping is prevented from differing depending on the presentation mode. That is, it is possible to switch between making the impression of the decorative symbol 41 stopping different depending on the row in which the decorative symbol 41 stops, or giving a common impression to the decorative symbol 41 stopping regardless of the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In the first presentation mode, the change presentation in which a specific sound is output when the left row decorative pattern 41 stops, the change presentation in which a specific sound is output when the right row decorative pattern 41 stops, and the change presentation in which a specific sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops may be one change presentation or may be multiple different change presentations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific variable effect in which an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed is performed, a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 105 (35)) and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (see FIG. 176 (35)) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) in the first stage (see FIG. 102 (16)) and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage (see FIG. 173 (16)). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player to recognize that the middle row decorative pattern 41 has stopped in a special display mode regardless of the stage.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stopping sound output when the pseudo consecutive images 511 stop common between the first stage and the second stage (see Fig. 106(3) and Fig. 177(3)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive images 511 have stopped, regardless of the stage.

Note that when a specific variable effect is being performed, a common stop sound is more likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage. This includes the fact that when a specific variable effect is being performed, a common stop sound is never output (0%) when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the first stage and when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in the second stage, and the fact that when a specific variable effect is being performed, a common stop sound is always output (100%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the first stage and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in the second stage.

(Variation example 34)
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 34) will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Variable effect example 34 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 183 is a variable performance that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 57 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 183(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a seventh start operation is performed. At this time, seventh start effect images 567 are displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1." At this time, a second start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 183 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the fourth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 183 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a fourth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the eighth role object effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the seventh role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 183 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel effect image 8 568 disappears. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continues in the fourth visual mode. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (7), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a chance eye second effect image 570 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, an 18th stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the three rows of decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation effect example 34, the seventh start action, the seventh effect image at the start 567, the second start sound, the role-play effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Furthermore, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can perform preparatory operations for the decorative pattern 41 in the first and second stages before the decorative pattern 41 changes along the change path (see FIG. 78(2) and FIG. 152(2)). The performance control unit 300 can also make the preparatory operations for the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. This allows for a variety of performances to be realized from the start of the change.
Furthermore, in the first and second stages, the performance control unit 300 can stop the decorative pattern 41 after it has fluctuated along the fluctuation path (see Figures 79 (9) and 153 (9)). The performance control unit 300 can also make the stopping operation of the decorative pattern 41 different between the first and second stages. This makes it possible to realize a variety of performances even when the fluctuating performance is about to end.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the stopping action (see FIG. 91 (14), FIG. 162 (6), etc.) of the special symbols (pseudo consecutive images 511, development images 521) the same in the first and second stages. Furthermore, it is possible to make the stopping action of the decorative symbols 41 and the stopping action of the special symbols different in both the first and second stages. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the special symbol has stopped, regardless of the stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 can make the movement path of the small symbols 56 common between the first stage and the second stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first variable path (see FIG. 77-1(1)) or the fourth variable path (see FIG. 77-1(4)) is used in the variable effect, when a specific effect (pseudo consecutive effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) is executed, the same type of stop operation of the effect pattern is performed (stop operation of the pseudo consecutive image 511, stop operation by the fifth mode (see FIG. 76-4(27)) in the thirteenth visual mode of the decorative pattern 41, stop operation by the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-4(30)), etc.). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the stop of the effect pattern regardless of the variable path used.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable effect, when a specific effect is executed, a stopping action different from the stopping action set for each stage (see Figures 79(9) and 153(9)) is executed. Therefore, regardless of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a specific effect has been executed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used in the variable presentation, when a stop action (such as the stop action of the pseudo consecutive image 511, the stop action of the fifth mode (see FIG. 76-4 (27)) in the thirteenth visual mode of the decorative pattern 41, or the stop action of the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-4 (30))) different from the stop action set for each stage (see FIG. 79 (9) and FIG. 153 (9)) is executed, a jackpot game is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a stop action different from the stop action set for each stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether a variation effect using the first variation path or a variation effect using the fourth variation path is being executed, when a predetermined effect (display of switching image 520) is executed, the effect pattern stops in a specific mode (a mode in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a temporary stopped state without going through the fifth viewing mode and the sixth viewing mode) that is different from the mode when the first variation path and the fourth variation path are used. In particular, this specific mode is a mode common to a variation effect using the first variation path and a variation effect using the second variation path.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can limit the output of the stopping sound when the decorative pattern 41 stops when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, in both the losing variation presentation using the first variation path and the losing variation presentation using the fourth variation path (see Figure 105 (38) and Figure 176 (38)). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by emphasizing the stopping of the decorative pattern 41 more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a first sound effect that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops, in both the variable effect using the first variable path and the variable effect using the fourth variable path. The effect control unit 300 can also execute a second sound effect (output of a pseudo consecutive stop sound or a development stop sound) when a special symbol (pseudo consecutive image 511, development image 521) stops. The first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a losing variable effect in which a special symbol does not stop (a reach effect is not executed) than in a losing variable effect in which a special symbol stops.
In addition, the fact that the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a loss variation effect in which the special symbol does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a loss variation effect in which the special symbol stops includes the fact that the first sound effect is never executed (0%) in a loss variation effect in which the special symbol stops, and the fact that the first sound effect is always executed (100%) in a loss variation effect in which the special symbol does not stop (the reach effect is not executed).
Furthermore, if the first sound effect is more likely to be executed in a miss variation effect in which the special symbol does not stop (the reach effect is not executed) than in a miss variation effect in which the special symbol stops, the first sound effect may be executed in the miss variation effect in which the special symbol stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, the performance control unit 300 can vary the performance mode (type of stopping sound) of the sound performance when a specific row of symbols (middle row decorative symbol 41) stops between when a variable performance in which a reach effect is not executed and when a variable performance in which a reach effect is executed are executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, when a miss variable effect in which a reach effect is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more unlikely when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode. This includes the fact that when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%), and the fact that when the middle row of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%).
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, then it is possible that a stop sound is not output when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or that a stop sound is output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, when a miss variable effect in which a reach effect is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) than when the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 stop.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more unlikely when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the left and right row decorative patterns 41 stop. This includes the fact that the stop sound is always output (100%) when the left and right rows decorative patterns 41 stop in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the fact that the stop sound is always not output (0%) when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop, then it is possible that a stop sound is not output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or a stop sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, when a miss variable effect in which a reach effect is executed is performed, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a display mode with high decorativeness) than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode (a display mode with low decorativeness).
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the output of a stop sound is more unlikely when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode. This includes the fact that when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (100%), and the fact that when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, the output of a stop sound is always executed (0%).
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, if it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode than when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, then the stop sound may not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a special display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed, or the stop sound may be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode in a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or fourth variable path is used, it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss variable performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.
In addition, regardless of whether the first or fourth variation path is used, the fact that it is more difficult to output a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed includes the fact that when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, the stop sound is always output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (100%), and that when a miss variation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed, the stop sound is always not output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (0%).
Regardless of whether the first or fourth fluctuation path is used, if it is more difficult to output a stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed is performed than when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed, then it may be possible that the stopping sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode is not output when a miss fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed is performed.

(Variation example 35)
184 to 191 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 35) will be described with reference to Figures 184 to 191. Variable presentation example 35 is a variable presentation based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable presentation example 35 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 34. In other words, variable presentation example 35 is an example of a variable presentation that shows the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 183 (6)) shown in variable presentation example 34.
184 to 191 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 184 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a seventh start operation is performed. At this time, a seventh start effect image 567 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a second start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Figure 184 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the fourth varying action. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 184 (4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the eighth role effect image 568 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. At this time, the seventh role sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect has ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(6), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 184 (7), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Furthermore, the button operation effect is started, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The valid operation period for this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 185 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(10), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 185 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 185 (14), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
185(15), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to oscillate up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 185 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual confirmation mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 186 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the fourth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 186 (21), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, a step 1 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a step 2 sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 186 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a step 3 sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 186 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (25), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (26), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the fifth stopping action is performed, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 187 (28), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, the second reach line image 531 and the second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, the third reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 187 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 187 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 188 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (35), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (36), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 188 (37), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 188 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 188 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (40), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (41), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (42), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the second SPSP sound is output. In the illustrated example, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Battle," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 60%," which suggests that the expectation of the execution of the jackpot game is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (43), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 189 (44). At this time, a first success sound is output. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (45), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (46), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (47), the role-playing performance ends, and the three movable role-playing devices 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (48), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 190 (50), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (51), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 190 (52), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect has also ended.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, as shown in FIG. 190 (53).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (54), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "444" is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion teasing effect is executed. At this time, the doublet second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (55), three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped in association with the stop display of the special symbols.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 190 (56), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (57), the big win game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size, and the fifth rainbow image 608 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 191 (58), the first right-hit image 609 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable device 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (59), a second right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 191 (60). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving mode has begun!"
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up orange, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. That is, the rainbow light effect ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 191 (61), a warning image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 191 (62), the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up blue, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (63), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444." At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). At this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Note that the specific lighting pattern of the lamp in variation presentation example 35 is the same as that shown in Figures 121 and 122.

As described above, in this embodiment, in both the first stage and the second stage, when a reach effect is executed, a common image such as the second reach line image 531 is displayed. That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach effect, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) while a variable effect is being executed, and can display emphasis images (stop effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, double-digit effect image) that emphasize the specific effect while a variable effect is being executed, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and a common emphasis image can be displayed when a specific effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed in the first effect mode and when a specific effect is executed while a variable effect is being executed in the second effect mode.
In this case, regardless of the controlled presentation mode, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, a common sound such as a third reach sound is output when a reach effect is executed in both the first stage and the second stage. That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (such as the stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach effects, and display of double-digit decorative symbols 41) while a variable effect is being executed, and can output specific sounds (such as the first stop sound, the third stop sound, the sixth stop sound, the eighth stop sound, the tenth stop sound, and the first reach sound) when a specific effect is executed. The effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and can output a common specific sound when a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect in the first effect mode and when a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect in the second effect mode.
In this case, regardless of the controlled presentation mode, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, in both the first stage and the second stage, a common image such as the fourth reel effect image 535 is displayed after the start of the reach effect and before the start of the SPSP reach effect. That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute a first effect (for example, a reach effect) and a second effect (for example, an SPSP reach effect) that can start after the start of the first effect during the execution of the variable effect, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode. When the first and second effects are executed, a specific image (for example, the transition image 516, the fourth reel effect image 535, etc.) can be displayed from the start of the first effect to the start of the second effect. A common specific image can be displayed when the first and second effects are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the first effect mode and when the first and second effects are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the second effect mode.
In this case, when the first effect is executed, the player expects that an effect (specific image) that will trigger the start of the second effect will be executed (displayed), and regardless of the effect mode being controlled, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the effect (specific image) that will trigger the start of the second effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, in both the first stage and the second stage, a common sound such as the fourth role sound is output after the start of the reach effect and before the start of the SPSP reach effect. That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute a first effect (for example, a reach effect) and a second effect (for example, an SPSP reach effect) that can start after the start of the first effect during the execution of the variable effect, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode. When the first and second effects are executed, a specific sound (such as a development stop sound or a fourth role sound) can be output from the start of the first effect to the start of the second effect. A common specific sound can be output when the first and second effects are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the first effect mode and when the first and second effects are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the second effect mode.
In this case, when the first effect is executed, the player expects that an effect (specific sound) that will trigger the start of the second effect will be executed (output), and regardless of the effect mode being controlled, it is possible to make the player more aware of the effect (specific sound) that will trigger the start of the second effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the variable presentation of this embodiment includes a first variable presentation in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific column (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) in the first presentation mode (first stage) is a first path (for example, the first variable path (see Figure 77-1 (1))), and a second variable presentation in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific column in the second presentation mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (for example, the fourth variable path (see Figure 77-1 (4))). The presentation control unit 300 can make the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation (for example, the first stop sound) different from the specific sound output when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation (for example, the 15th stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable effects consisting of various variable paths according to the effect mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the effect mode when the symbols stop, it is possible to draw the player's attention without boring the symbols, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable effects, regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The variable presentation of this embodiment includes a first variable presentation in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 78(1)) in the first presentation mode (first stage), and a second variable presentation in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 152(1)) in the second presentation mode (second stage). The presentation control unit 300 can differentiate the specific sound (for example, the first stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation from the specific sound (for example, the 15th stop sound) output when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable effects consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the effect mode. Also, by outputting a specific sound according to the effect mode when the symbols stop, it is possible to draw the player's attention without boring the stopped symbols, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "stopped symbols", which is one of the divisions in the variable effects, regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first stop effect image 503 (see FIG. 79(9)) is displayed, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second presentation mode (second stage), the eighth stop effect image 560 (see FIG. 153(9)) is displayed. In other words, the specific sound output and the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation are different from the specific sound output and the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation.
In addition, the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the first variable performance and the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable performance may be the same, and the other may be different. In other words, the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the first variable performance may be the same as the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable performance.

In addition, the variable presentation of this embodiment includes a first variable presentation in which the path of the change of the symbols in a specific column (for example, the middle column decorative symbol 41) in the first presentation mode (first stage) is a first path (for example, the first variable path (see Figure 77-1 (1))), and a second variable presentation in which the path of the change of the symbols in a specific column in the second presentation mode (second stage) is a second path different from the first path (for example, the fourth variable path (see Figure 77-1 (4))). The presentation control unit 300 can execute a common presentation that is common when a specific presentation is executed in both the first variable presentation and the second variable presentation. Examples of specific presentations include reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations), pseudo consecutive presentations, zone presentations, role device presentations, button operation presentations, vibration presentations, etc. In addition, as common effects, images displayed in association with specific effects (decorative symbol 41, button operation image 502, first reach line image 509, first reach notification image 510, pseudo consecutive image 511, transition image 516, SP reach image 517, development image 521, zone notification image 528, zone effect image 529, zone execution image 530, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, SPSP reach image 536, success image 538, first rainbow image 539, third rainbow image 540, doublet first effect image 541, 556, double-digit second effect image 541, etc.), and sound effects output in conjunction with specific performances (first button sound, first role sound, first reach sound, second role sound, pseudo consecutive stop sound, first re-change sound, third stop sound, fourth stop sound, third role sound, zone start sound, third reach sound, first change sound, development stop sound, fourth role sound, second button sound, sixth stop sound, second re-change sound, second change sound, third change sound, third button sound, first success sound, first jackpot notification sound, eighth stop sound, fourth button sound, ninth stop sound, fourth change sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable effects consisting of various variable paths according to the effect mode. Also, by executing a common effect in any of the multiple effect modes, it is possible to make the player easily aware of the effect of the specific effect being executed, regardless of the effect mode in which the specific effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common effect is executed in the first stage and the second stage, but it is possible to vary the effect format after the common effect is executed (for example, the display format of the stage image 61 after the execution of an SP reach effect). Therefore, even when a common effect is executed, the player can feel the diversity of the effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect symbols include a first effect symbol (decorative symbol 41) and a second effect symbol (pseudo consecutive image 511, developing image 521). The effect control unit 300 can make the stopping sounds for the first effect symbol different between the first and second stages (first stopping sound, 15th stopping sound), but can make the stopping sounds for the second effect symbol the same between the first and second stages (pseudo consecutive stopping sound and developing stopping sound). This makes it possible to realize a variety of stopping modes for the first effect symbol depending on the stage, and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the second effect symbol has stopped, regardless of the stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or second variable path is used, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of outputting a first specific sound (the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a missing variable presentation is executed, when a losing variable presentation is executed. Furthermore, regardless of whether the first or second variable path is used, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of outputting a second specific sound (the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a double number) when the decorative pattern 41 stops, and then outputting a third specific sound (the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a double number after the promotion tease presentation) when the decorative pattern 41 stops when a jackpot variable presentation is executed. Therefore, when a jackpot variable presentation is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the decorative pattern 41 with a double number has stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or second variable path is used, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first start performance by the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 78(2) and the display of the first effect image 501 at the start), and a second start performance different from the first start performance (for example, the movement of the decorative pattern 41 shown in FIG. 113(2) and the display of the third effect image 525 at the start).The performance control unit 300 differs in the execution rate of a predetermined performance (such as a role device performance as a continuous performance (see FIG. 113(5))) in the variable performance when the first start performance is executed and when the second start performance is executed.
In addition, the fact that the execution rate of the predetermined effect in the variable effect is different when the first start effect is executed and when the second start effect is executed means that the predetermined effect will not be executed when the first start effect is executed (0%), and that the predetermined effect will be executed when the second start effect is executed (100%).
In addition, in this embodiment, the specified performance is more likely to be executed when the second start performance is executed than when the first start performance is executed, but it may also be possible to make the specified performance more likely to be executed when the first start performance is executed than when the second start performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the first or second variable path is used, the performance control unit 300 can execute a specific sound performance (output of a stop sound) when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) in the variable performance, and can limit the specific sound performance when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific display mode. The execution rate of the predetermined performance (display of the switching image 520) differs between when a variable performance in which a specific sound performance can be executed is performed and when a variable performance in which the specific sound performance can be limited is performed.
In addition, the different execution rates of the specified effect when a variable effect that can execute a specific sound effect is performed and when a variable effect that can restrict the specific sound effect is performed include the case where the specified effect is not always executed (0%) when a variable effect that can execute a specific sound effect is performed, and the case where the specified effect is always executed (100%) when a variable effect that can restrict the specific sound effect is performed.

In this embodiment, the miss variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variable performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 157(2)), and a second variable performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 183(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 35 is easier to execute).
Note that when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 35 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variation performance example 35 is never executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, if it is made easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 35 is easier to execute), then when the first variable performance is executed, it is possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 35 may be executed), and when the second variable performance is executed, it is not necessary to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 35 may not be executed).

Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) will be executed in the next change effect (change effect example 32 or change effect example 33 will be executed) if the second change effect in which a start sound is output is executed, rather than if the first change effect in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is more likely that an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) will be executed in the next change effect when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed (change effect example 32 or change effect example 33 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first change effect is executed, an SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect will not be executed in the next change effect (0%) (change effect example 32 or change effect example 33 will not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, and the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed in the next variable effect when the second variable effect is executed than when the first variable effect is executed (variation effect example 32 or variation effect example 33 is more likely to be executed), then when the first variable effect is executed, the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) may be executed in the next variable effect (variation effect example 32 or variation effect example 33 may be executed), and when the second variable effect is executed, the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) may not be executed in the next variable effect (variation effect example 32 or variation effect example 33 may not be executed).

(Variation example 36)
FIG. 192 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 36) will be described with reference to Fig. 192. Variable effect example 36 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
192 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 183 (1) to (8), 184 (1) to (8), 185 (9) to (16), 186 (17) to (24), 187 (25) to (32), 188 (33) to (40), and 189 (41) and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 192 (1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. Button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a third button sound is output. The valid operation period for this button operation effect is the third period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamp emits the same light as that shown in Figure 189 (43).

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in Figure 192 (2). At this time, the success image 538 (see Figure 189 (44)) is not displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is not executed. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) lights up in white. At this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is initiated, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 189 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 189 (45) to (48), 190 (49) to (56), and 191 (57) to (63) are executed.

As described above, in variation presentation example 36, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode of presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time presentation button 161 is operated, compared to variation presentation example 35. In other words, in variation presentation example 36, the period from when presentation button 161 is operated in the button operation presentation to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode of presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variation presentation example 35.

In the variation effect example 36, the success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limiting. In the variation effect example 36, after the effect shown in FIG. 192 (2) is performed, the vibration effect, the specific light emission mode of the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound may be executed without displaying the success image 538.
Also, at the time shown in Figure 192 (2), the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 189 (43), or may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 189 (44).
In addition, in variable performance example 36, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light-emitting mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as variable performance example 13 (variable performance example 35), except that the performance shown in Figure 192 (2) is performed between time T1 and time T2 shown in Figure 121.

(Variation example 37)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 37) will be described with reference to Fig. 193. Variable effect example 37 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
193 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 183 (1) to (8), 184 (1) to (8), 185 (9) to (16), 186 (17) to (24), 187 (25) to (32), 188 (33) to (40), and 189 (41) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 193 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 and SPSP suggestion image 601 are displayed, and the second SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193 (2), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect starts, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light, and a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 emit light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 118 (43).
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 193 (3). At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 118 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 189 (45) to (48), 190 (49) to (56), and 191 (57) to (63) are executed.

(Variation example 38)
194 to 196 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 38) will be described with reference to Figures 194 to 196. Variable effect example 38 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
194 to 196 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 194 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and the eighth start action, which is the action taken when the change begins, is performed. When the eighth start action is being performed, each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 is displayed in a manner that moves downward. At this time, an eighth start effect image 571 is displayed below each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is executed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 194 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a fourth variable action is performed.
194(4), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode, and are displayed in a swinging motion from side to side. At this time, the reach stimulation fourth effect image 565 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 194 (5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode, and are displayed so as to sway left and right outside the first mode of the ninth visual mode in the left-right direction of the image 511. Also, at this time, the fourth reach teaser effect image 565 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 194 (6), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed surrounding each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the fourth reach sound (tenth stop sound) is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 194 (7), the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 return to their original display size before enlargement. At this time, the sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

194(8), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the thirteenth rainbow image 621 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 195 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect is started, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Figure 76-5 (35)). At this time, doublet fanning first effect images 550 are displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 195 (10), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 76-5 (36)). At this time, doublet-up second effect images 551 are displayed above, below, left, and right of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 76-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth stop effect image 552 is displayed around the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started. At this time, the 11th stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is output. Also, the vibration effect continues.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.
In the variation performance example 38, the stage image 61 is displayed even when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode. However, also in the variation performance example 38, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th visual mode, the third rainbow image 540 (see FIG. 190 (49)) may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in Figure 195 (15), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 196 (17), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "BIG".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (18), the jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size. In the example shown, the text "BIG BONUS!" is displayed as the jackpot game notification image 542. At this time, the eighth rainbow image 614 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same presentation as shown in Figure 191 (58) to (63) is performed, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.
In addition, the specific lighting pattern of the lamp during the variable performance in variable performance example 38 is the same as that shown in Figure 132.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 38 is the same as variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 196 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 196 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed in the first stage, the second reach line image 531 is displayed (see FIG. 116 (28)), and when a reach effect is executed in the second stage, the fourth reach effect image 549 is displayed at stop. That is, the effect control unit 300 can display emphasis images (chance eye effect image, stop effect image, reach teasing effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, doublet effect image) that emphasize specific effects during execution of variable effects, and the effect modes include the first effect mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and the second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and the emphasis images include the first emphasis image and the first emphasis image (chance eye first effect image 537, stop first effect image 503, reach teasing first effect image 522, first reach right effect image). There are second emphasized images (fourth chance effect image 596, fifteenth effect image when stopped 589, eighth reach teasing effect image 591, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, sixteenth effect image when stopped 594, seventeenth effect image when stopped 599, etc.) which are different from the first emphasized image (fourth chance effect image 596, fifteenth effect image when stopped 589, first reach notification image 510, first double-digit effect image 556, etc.), and when a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect in the first presentation mode, at least the first emphasized image can be displayed, and when a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable effect in the second presentation mode, at least the second emphasized image can be displayed.
In this case, when a specific effect is executed, it is easier for the player to sense the diversity of the effect modes and specific effects, compared to a configuration in which only a single highlighted image is displayed regardless of the effect mode being controlled, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the third reach sound is output when a reach effect is executed in the first stage (see FIG. 116 (28)), and the fourth reach sound is output when a reach effect is executed in the second stage. That is, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach effect, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) while variable effects are being executed, and can output specific sounds (stop sound, reach sound, etc.) when specific effects are executed, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and the specific sounds include the first specific sound (first stop sound, reach sound, etc.). There are first specific sounds (first stop sound, third stop sound, fifth stop sound, eighth stop sound, first reach sound, third reach sound, etc.) and second specific sounds different from the first specific sounds (25th stop sound, 26th stop sound, 27th stop sound, 29th stop sound, fourth reach sound, seventh reach sound, etc.), and when a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable effect in the first effect mode, at least the first specific sound can be output, and when a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable effect in the second effect mode, at least the second specific sound can be output.
In this case, when a specific effect is executed, it is easier for the player to sense the diversity of the effect modes and specific effects, compared to a configuration in which only a single specific sound is output regardless of the effect mode being controlled, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Variation example 39)
197 and 198 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 39) will be described with reference to Figures 197 and 198. Variable effect example 39 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
197 and 198 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 194 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 197 (1), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 197 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 197 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed again in the fourth visual mode.

197(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 197 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 197 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 198 (9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 198 (10), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!". At this time, button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) lights up red, and a third button sound is output. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the decide button operation effect, the ninth rainbow image 615 is displayed as shown in Fig. 198 (11). At this time, the vibration effect starts.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 198 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. Additionally, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventh stop effect image 554 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the thirteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

After this, the same effects as those shown in (17) and (18) of Fig. 196 are performed. After that, the same effects as those shown in (58) to (63) of Fig. 191 are performed, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.
In addition, the specific lighting pattern of the lamp during the execution of the variable performance in variable performance example 39 is the same as that shown in Figure 135.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 39 is the same as that in variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 196 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 196 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Example of variation 40)
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 40) will be described with reference to Fig. 199. Variable effect example 40 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
199 is a variation effect that is executed when "EB5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 194 (1) to (7) and 197 (1) to (8) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 199 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 12th visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative pattern 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199(2), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the 14th rainbow image 622 is displayed. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is started at this time. In other words, the vibration effect is performed without executing the button effect.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 199(3), the fifteenth rainbow image 623 is displayed. Also, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.
Next, as shown in Figure 199 (4), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 199 (5), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. Additionally, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199 (6), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventh stop effect image 554 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the thirteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 199(7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 196 (17) and (18) are played. After that, the same effects as those shown in Figure 191 (58) to (63) are played, except that the jackpot game (round) takes longer to play, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

Figure 200 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 40.
Figure 200 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in the variable performance example 40.
First, at time T1, a rainbow-colored variable image 51 is displayed. Although not shown, the lamp is emitting light in a different light-emitting mode from the rainbow light-emitting mode at this time. Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 194 (2) starts. The effect indicated to be executed at time T1 continues for 30 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the 14th rainbow image 622 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
199(2) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the fifteenth rainbow image 623 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.
The effect shown in Figure 199(3) starts at time T3. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for one second.

Next, at time T4, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
199(4) begins at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.
The effect shown in Figure 199(5) starts at time T5. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for one second.

Next, at time T6, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
199(6) begins at time T6. The effect shown to be executed at time T6 will continue for four seconds.

Next, at time T7, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable performance ends.
Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 199 (7) begins.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 39 is the same as that in variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 196 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 196 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Variation example 41)
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 41) will be described with reference to Fig. 201. Variable effect example 41 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
201 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 172 (1) to (8), 173 (9) to (16), 174 (17) to (24), 175 (25) to (32), and 176 (33) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 201 (1), the final button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!". In addition, a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the final button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 201 (2). At this time, the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (3), the role presentation is executed, and the left movable role 1151, the center movable role 1152, and the right movable role 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 201 (4), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 201 (5), the role-playing performance ends, and the three movable role-playing devices 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 201 (6), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Fig. 201 (7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (8), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and no vibration effect is performed. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (9), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed. The eighth stop sound is also output.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are in the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode. The fourth mode is selected, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) is in the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) is in the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off and are lit in white, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, the promotion teasing effect is started. In the promotion teasing effect, as shown in FIG. 202 (10), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 190 (53) to (56) and Figure 191 (57) to (63) are performed.
In this way, in the variation effect example 41, the vibration effect is not executed.
In addition, in variable performance example 41, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as in variable performance example 35.

(Variation example 42)
203 and 204 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 42) will be described with reference to Figures 203 and 204. Variable effect example 42 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
203 and 204 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 183(1) to (8), 184(1) to (8), 185(9) to (16), 186(17) to (24), 187(25) to (32), 188(33) to (40), and 189(41) and (42) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 203(1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the decide button operation effect, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 203 (2). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. When the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are lit in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. A switching sound is also output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 203(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 203(4), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 reappears. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Fig. 203(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 203(5), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect indicating the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output, and the display becomes silent. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Fig. 203(2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(6), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the revival image 558 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is started. A first revival sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the revival image 558 is displayed, is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 203(2).
Next, as shown in Figure 203 (7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are lit in orange, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to be extinguished.

Next, as shown in Figure 203 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 204 (9), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 190 (53) to (56) and Figure 191 (57) to (63) are performed.

In addition, in variation presentation example 42, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission state of the lamp, and the flow of the light emission state of the light guide plate 118 are the same as in variation presentation example 21.

(Variation example 43)
205 and 206 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 43) will be described with reference to Figures 205 and 206. Variable effect example 43 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
205 and 206 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA8" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 183 (1) to (8), 184 (1) to (8), 185 (9) to (16), 186 (17) to (24), 187 (25) to (32), and 188 (33) to (40) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 205 (1), an advanced effect is executed. At this time, a role-playing effect is executed, and the central movable role-playing object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the fourth role-playing object effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role-playing object sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 205 (2), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the 5th SPSP sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, is output. In the example shown, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Story," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 70%," which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is 70%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 205 (3), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period for this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 205 (4), a vibration effect is started and the role effect is executed, with the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each moving to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the 16th rainbow image 624 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153) are lit in white.
Next, as shown in Figure 205 (5), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 205 (6), the 17th rainbow image 625 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) enter the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remain extinguished.

Next, as shown in Figure 205 (7), the reel effect ends, and the three movable reels 115 move back to their initial positions. The double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, while the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) remain off.

As shown in Figure 205 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 206 (9), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 190 (53) to (56) and Figure 191 (57) to (63) are performed.

Figure 207 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 43.
Figure 207 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 43.
First, at time T1, the 16th rainbow image 624 is displayed. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 5th lamp (upper board lamp 1161) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the 2nd lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the 4th lamp (right movable role object 1153) are lit in white.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 205 (4) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 continues for one second.

Next, at time T2, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the ninth rainbow light-emitting pattern at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue their light-emitting patterns from time T1.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and executes a rainbow light emission performance with the ninth rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 205 (5) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T3, the 17th rainbow image 625 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue the light-emitting mode from time T2.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and executes the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 205 (6) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for 8 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the sixteenth rainbow image 624 and the seventeenth rainbow image 625 are hidden, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T3.
The effect shown in Figure 205 (7) starts at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the decorative pattern 41 of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T4. The thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) is turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 205 (8) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for 7 seconds.

Next, at time T6, a fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed.
Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 206 (9) begins.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 32)
Next, a modified example of the variation presentation example 32 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 172(1) to (8) and 173(9) to (14) are performed, and then the zone execution image 530 is displayed as shown in Figure 208(1). At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41, "3," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 208 (2), the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbol 41 stops, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 208 (3), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 208 (4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the nineteenth stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 208 (5), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a ninth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the ninth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if raising the left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is also output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In this embodiment, as a variable effect, a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 32 may be provided instead of variable effect example 32, or a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 32 may be provided together with variable effect example 32.

(Variation of normal reach effect)
Next, a description will be given of a modified example of the normal reach effect executed in the second stage. As an example of the modified example, a modified example of the normal reach effect in the variation effect example 32 (see (20) to (24) of FIG. 174) will be described below.
First, when the left and right decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, as shown in Fig. 209(1), and the eighth reach action is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 209 (2), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. Furthermore, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variable action, which is the action taken when the symbol is fluctuating. While the fifth variable action is being performed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in motion, moving from the bottom to the top of the image display unit 114 along the fifth middle variable path CR5 (see Figure 77-1 (5)). At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 209 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 209 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 209 (5), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 209 (6), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the fifth variable operation.
After this, just like in the variation performance example 32, a transition image 516 is displayed and then the SP reach performance begins.

As described above, in the modified example, in the normal reach performance, the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes a change path different from that before the reach performance starts (see Figure 172 (4)).
209, the change path of the middle row decorative symbol 41 during the normal reach effect in the change performance example 32 is the middle fifth change path CR5, but it is not limited to this. The change path of the middle row decorative symbol 41 during the normal reach effect in the change performance example 33, the change performance example 35 to the change performance example 42 may be the middle fifth change path CR5.
In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to each of the variable performances shown in variable performance example 32, variable performance example 33, and variable performance example 35 to variable performance example 42, each variable performance may be provided in which the variable path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 during the normal reach performance in variable performance example 32, variable performance example 33, and variable performance example 35 to variable performance example 42 is the middle fifth variable path CR5.

(Variation of pseudo-consecutive provocation performance)
Next, we will explain a modified example of the pseudo-consecutive excitement effect that is performed during the execution of the variable effect in the second stage.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 184 (1) to (8) and Figures 185 (9) to (12) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 210 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 210 (2), a pseudo-continuous hype effect is executed. In this modified example, a pseudo-continuous hype effect different from the pseudo-continuous hype effect executed in the variable hype effect example described above is executed. In the example shown, as a pseudo-continuous hype effect, the pseudo-continuous hype image 511 is displayed in a swinging motion from side to side. At this time, a specific pseudo-continuous hype sound, which is the sound effect of the pseudo-continuous hype effect, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 210 (3), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. The stopping mode of the pseudo consecutive image 511 at this time is the same as the stopping mode of the pseudo consecutive effect executed in the variable effect example described above. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a pseudo-consecutive excitement performance in the second stage that is different from that in the first stage.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the pseudo consecutive excitement effects according to the stage.

Note that even when a pseudo-continuous fanning performance different from the pseudo-continuous fanning performance shown in FIG. 210 (see, for example, FIG. 106 (8) and FIG. 107 (9)), the sound effect of the pseudo-continuous fanning performance may be output. In this case, a predetermined pseudo-continuous fanning sound different from the specific pseudo-continuous fanning sound output in the pseudo-continuous fanning performance shown in FIG. 210 is output. Also, regardless of whether the pseudo-continuous fanning performance shown in FIG. 210 or a pseudo-continuous fanning performance different from this pseudo-continuous fanning performance (see, for example, FIG. 106 (8) and FIG. 107 (9)), is executed, the same (common) pseudo-continuous fanning stop sound is output when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed. In other words, it is possible to make the sound effect when the pseudo-continuous fanning performance is executed different between the first stage and the second stage, and to make the sound effect when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed the same.
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of pseudo consecutive exciting effects while making it easier for the player to recognize that a pseudo consecutive effect has been performed.

In addition, the pseudo consecutive promotional effects and pseudo consecutive effects shown in Figure 210 may be performed in the first stage.

(Variation example 44)
Next, referring to Figures 211 to 213, a specific description will be given of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 44) performed by the presentation control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. Variable presentation example 44 is a variable presentation example based on a game ball winning in the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 44 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach presentation is not executed, and is a variable presentation based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start opening 121 being "1".
The variable effects shown in Figures 211 to 213 are variable effects that are executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, each of the change presentation examples from change presentation example 44 to change presentation example 64 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the third stage.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 211 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 "213" are fixed and stopped by the presentation control unit 300 as the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. This decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage, and is different from the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 78 (1)) and the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 152 (1)). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third presentation mode). The third stage is a presentation mode in normal gameplay. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 211 (2), the change effect begins as the special symbol changes. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the change image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a ninth start action, which is the action taken when the change begins, is performed. When the ninth start action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in such a way that they move to the upper left. At this time, a ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The small symbols 56 also begin to change. In the third stage, change BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the change effect, but this change BGM is a different song from the change BGM in the first stage and the change BGM in the second stage.

Next, as shown in Figure 211 (3), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform a sixth varying operation, which is the operation when the symbols are varying. When the sixth varying operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an operation such that they move to the lower right along a sixth varying path (see Figure 77-1 (6)).
Next, as shown in Figure 211 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the sixth variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211 (5), a button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the button operation image 502 is displayed, is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, the button operation image 502 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 211(6). Note that no sound (non-display sound) is output in response to the button operation image 502 being hidden. Furthermore, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 211 (7), the left column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 211 (8), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (9), the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops. When the eighth stop action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if vibrating. At this time, an eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a first stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the decorative symbol 41 has stopped, is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41, "1," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action. At this time, the visual mode of the left-row decorative symbol 41 changes to the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41 "1" passes, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (12), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop action. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (13), the "9" in the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variable action, which is the action when the pattern is fluctuating. When the seventh variable action is being performed, the decorative patterns 41 in the three rows are displayed in an action such that they rotate counterclockwise along the seventh variable path (see Figure 77-1 (7)) and then move upward. At this time, the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "9" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the seventh variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (15), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping operation. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the upper left side of the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the left row decorative symbol 41, the right row decorative symbol 41, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 stop.
Next, as shown in Figure 212 (16), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213 (17), with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, with the end of the variable effect, the variable image 51 is erased (displayed).

Figure 214 is a diagram showing another example of presentation in variable presentation example 44.
In the variation effect example 44, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect has been described. Below, an effect example in which the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect will be described.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 211(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 214(1), the button operation effect is executed and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is also output.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a first image at operation 504 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 214 (2). This first image at operation 504 is displayed in a display mode different from both the first image at operation 504 in the first stage (see Fig. 83 (2)) and the first image at operation 504 in the second stage (see Fig. 155 (2)). At this time, a fifth operation sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 214(3), the first operation image 504 is hidden. Also, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 211 (7) and (8), Figures 212 (9) to (16), and Figure 213 (17) are performed.

(Variation example 45)
FIG. 215 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 215. Variable effect example 45 is a variable effect example based on a game ball winning in the first start opening 121 in a normal game state. Note that variable effect example 45 is a variable effect that is executed when "ER5" is selected as the "variable effect" in Fig. 59. Also, variable effect example 45 is a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start opening 121 being "1".
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 211 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 215 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 215(2), a zone promotion effect is executed, and a zone promotion image 505 is displayed. At this time, the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth viewing mode and then in the sixth viewing mode, but the display of the left row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode and the display in the sixth viewing mode are hidden by the zone promotion image 505, making it difficult or impossible to see. Furthermore, when the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth viewing mode, the first stop sound is not output.

In the variation effect example 45, the zone effect is not executed after the zone promotion effect is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 215 (3), the zone promotion image 505 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 212 (10) to (16) and Figure 213 (17) are performed.
In addition, when the zone teasing image 505 is displayed in the zone teasing performance, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode or the sixth viewing mode, and when the zone teasing image 505 is no longer displayed, the left row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the seventh viewing mode.

(Variation example 46)
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 216. Variable effect example 46 is a variable effect example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state. Also, variable effect example 46 is a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first starting hole 121 being "4".
216 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 216(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 from being fixed in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121 shows "4."
Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (2), the variation effect begins with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a tenth start operation, which is the operation performed when the variation starts, is performed. When the tenth start operation is being performed, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an operation such that they move alternately between the upper left and lower right sides. At this time, a tenth start effect image 574 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 216 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the sixth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 216 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the sixth variable action.
216(5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a sixth varying action, and the middle row of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform a seventh varying action. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in variation performance example 44 and variation performance example 45.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth viewing mode, and a ninth stop action, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops, is performed. When the ninth stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed swaying to the upper left and lower right. At this time, a twelfth stop effect image 575 is displayed on the upper left and lower right of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a first stop sound is output from speaker 156. In other words, the same sound effect is output when the decorative symbols 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 44 and fluctuation performance example 45, and when the decorative symbols 41 stop in fluctuation performance example 46.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (7), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 216 (8).

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 46)
Next, a modified example of the variation presentation example 46 will be explained.
It has been explained that the sound effect output when the decorative pattern 41 stops is the same (the first stop sound in both cases) in the variable performances where the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "1" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 44, variable performance example 45), and the variable performance where the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121 is "4" and no reach performance is executed (variable performance example 46), but this is not limited to this.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 216 (1) to (4) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 217 (1), the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fifth viewing mode and perform the sixth variable operation, and the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row are displayed in the fifth viewing mode and perform the seventh variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 217 (2), the three columns of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the ninth stop operation. At this time, the twelfth stop effect image 575 is displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the three columns of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the second stop sound is output from the speaker 156. That is, a different sound effect is output when the decorative symbols 41 stop in the variation performance example 44 and the variation performance example 45.

Next, as shown in Figure 217 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 217(4).

In addition, in the variable performance of this embodiment, the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 46 may be provided instead of the variable performance shown in variable performance example 46, or the variable performance shown in the modified example of variable performance example 46 may be provided together with the variable performance shown in variable performance example 46.

(Variation example 47)
Figures 218 to 220 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 47) will be described with reference to Figures 218 to 220. Variable effect example 47 is a variable effect example in which a reach effect is executed based on a winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state.
Note that the variation effect example 47 is a variation effect that is executed when "ER6" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 218 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56, "213," are fixed and stopped. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed, and "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121. Also, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first viewing mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 218 (2), the variable effect begins as the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, performing the ninth start operation. Also, at this time, the ninth start effect image 572 is displayed on the upper left side of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. Also, the variable display of the small symbols 56 begins.

Next, as shown in Figure 218 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the sixth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 218 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 218 (5), the reel performance is executed, and the central movable reel 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the upper part of the image display unit 114. At this time, the ninth reel effect image 576 is displayed. Also, at this time, the eighth reel sound, which is the sound effect of the reel performance, is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Fig. 218(6), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound, which is the sound effect of the first step performance, is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 218(7), the second stage step effect is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second stage sound, which is a sound effect for the second stage step effect, is output.
The display mode of the step image 508 displayed in the third stage is different from the display mode of the step image 508 displayed in the first stage (see Figure 87 (6) etc.) and the display mode of the step image 508 displayed in the second stage (see Figure 159 (6)).

Next, as shown in Figure 218 (8), the left column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 219 (9), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (10), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop action. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 219 (11), the right column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 219 (12), the right column decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (13), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed to the lower right of the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 219 (14), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and a tenth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the tenth reach action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if raising their left hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 219 (15), the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stopping action. At this time, the middle decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable action.

Next, as shown in Figure 219 (16), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. This pseudo consecutive image 511 passes through the middle first variation path CR1, which is the same variation path as the middle row decorative pattern 41.
220(17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-series fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-series image 511.

In the variation effect example 47, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and then the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 220 (18), after the pseudo consecutive image 511 passes, the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5," is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode, and the first variation action is performed. This middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a larger size than the decorative patterns 41 of the left and right rows.
Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (19), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stop operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a reduced size so that it is the same display size as the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Figure 220 (20), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 220 (21).

(Variation example 48)
221 to 224 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 48) will be described with reference to Figures 221 to 224. Variable effect example 48 is an example of a variable effect based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 121 in a normal game state, in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed.
The variation effects shown in Figures 221 to 224 are variation effects that are executed when "ER7" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 211 (1) to (3) are executed, and then, as shown in Figure 221 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 221 (2), the role production is executed, and the left movable role product 1151 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role product 10th effect image 577 is displayed around the left movable role product 1151. Also, at this time, the role product 9th sound effect, which is the sound effect of the role product production, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 221 (3), the left column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 221 (4), the left row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the left row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (5), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop action. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in Figure 221 (6), the right column decorative symbol 41 "3" is displayed in the fifth visual mode. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 221 (7), the right-row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the right-row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (8), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eighth stopping action. As a result, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop with the same number, resulting in a reach state. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed to the lower right of the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 222 (9), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, the first reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 222 (10), the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stopping action. At this time, the middle decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (11), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in such a way that it moves downward.
Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (12), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (13), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 222 (14), the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is not displayed. However, even when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop motion may be continued.

Next, as shown in Figure 222 (15), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "434," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, the first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 222 (16), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (17), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (18), the left column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (19), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stop action. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 223 (20), the right column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, performs the eighth stopping action, and starts the reach effect. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (22), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the tenth reach action is performed. At this time, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, the first reach sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 223 (23), the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eye are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stopping action. At this time, the middle decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first varying action.

Next, as shown in Figure 223 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 224 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 224 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (27), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping operation. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is output. That is, the same sound effect (stop sound) is output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops.
Next, as shown in Figure 224 (28), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a way that it shrinks to the same display size as the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 224 (29).

(Variation example 49)
225 to 227 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
225 to 227, another specific example (variation presentation example 49) of the variation presentation of the decorative symbol 41 will be described. The variation presentation example 49 is a variation presentation based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variation presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach presentation is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 225 to 227 are variable effects that are executed when "ER8" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 221 (1) to (8), Figures 222 (9) to (16), and Figures 223 (17) to (24) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 225 (1), the middle row decorative pattern 41, "4," is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 225 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 225 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 225 (4), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 225(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second provisional stopping action is performed.
In addition, when the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first and second modes of the eleventh visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 225 (7), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (17)), and the second variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 225 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (18)) and performs the second variable operation.

Next, as shown in Figure 226 (9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "3" is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (19)). At this time, SP promotion first effect images 518 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 226 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.

226(11), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 226 (12), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4", is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Figure 76-3 (20)). In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that returns it to the upper right side of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (13), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the "4" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 passes, and the "3" that is the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode (see FIG. 76-3 (21)), and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, a third stopping sound is output. That is, different sound effects (stopping sounds) are output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop and when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops. Furthermore, when the third stopping sound is output, the variable background music is no longer output and becomes silent.
Next, as shown in Figure 226 (14), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (15), a portion of the switching image 520 is hidden. More specifically, the switching image 520 is displayed in an operational manner so as to move to the right of the image display unit 114, thereby hiding a portion of the switching image 520. At this time, a portion of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. Meanwhile, at this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 remain difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (16), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, no sound effect (stop sound) is output indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped. Also, as described above, no variable background music is output at this time, so there is no sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (17), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "434", are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 50)
228 and 229 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 50) will be described with reference to Figures 228 and 229. Variable effect example 50 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SP reach effect is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 228 and 229 are variable effects that are executed when "ER9" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 221(1) to (8), 222(9) to (16), 223(17) to (24), and 225(1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 228(1), the SP reach effect starts and an SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode and performs the second temporary stop operation, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed (is difficult to see or cannot be seen).
Next, as shown in FIG. 228(2), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-3(23)), and the third variation operation is performed. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5," is displayed in a layer behind the development image 521 in the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in Figure 228 (3), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Figure 76-3 (24)). At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a layer in front of the developed image 521 in the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in Figure 228 (4), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (25)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 228(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode (see Fig. 76-4(26)). At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 228 (6), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (27)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the fourth stop sound is output. Also, when the fourth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output, and the system becomes silent.
Next, as shown in Figure 228 (7), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
228(8), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.

229(9), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) indicating that the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output, and the display is silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (10), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 51)
Figure 230 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 51) will be described with reference to Fig. 230. Variable effect example 51 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 230 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 211 (1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 230 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 230 (2), the reach-inducing effect starts, and the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (9)) and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing fifth effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Fig. 230(3), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode (see Fig. 76-2(10)). At this time, sixth reach-inducing effect images 579 are displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in Figure 230 (4), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode (see Figure 76-2 (11)). At this time, the right-row decorative symbols 41 perform the sixth varying motion, the middle-row decorative symbols 41 perform the seventh varying motion, and the left-row decorative symbols 41 perform the first temporary stopping motion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 230(5), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and the eighth stopping action is performed. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the upper left side of the middle-row decorative symbols 41, respectively. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 230 (6), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "718", are fixed and stopped.

In addition, in variable effect example 51, after the effect shown in FIG. 230(4) is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 230(6) may be executed without executing the effect shown in FIG. 230(5). In other words, if a reach effect is not executed after a reach-inducing effect is executed, the display of the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual mode and the output of the first stop sound may not be performed.

(Variation example 52)
FIG. 231 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 52) will be described with reference to Fig. 231. Variable effect example 52 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach effect is executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 231 is the variable effect that is executed when "ER10" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 59.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 211 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 231 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
231(2), the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right columns are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the fifth "4" decorative symbol image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right columns.

231(3), the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, sixth reach-inducing effect images 579 are displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right decorative symbols 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (4), the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode (see FIG. 76-2 (12)), and a tenth stop action is performed, which is the action taken when the fluctuation stops. When the tenth stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed as expanding while swaying up and down, respectively. The tenth stop action can also be considered an eleventh reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts). At this time, a thirteenth stop effect image 580 is displayed surrounding each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows. At this time, a sixth reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The sixth reach sound can also be considered as a twentieth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 225 (1) to (8), Figures 226 (9) to (16), and Figure 227 (17) are performed.

(Variation example 53)
232 to 236 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 53) will be described with reference to Figures 232 to 236. Variable effect example 53 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
232 to 236 are the variation effects that are executed when "ER11" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 232(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The blue display mode of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be due to a change in the display mode during the variation effect executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and an eleventh start operation, which is the operation performed when the change begins, is performed. When the eleventh start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed so as to move alternately between the upper right and lower left. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a third start sound, which is the sound effect indicating the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 232 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the sixth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 232 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, an eleventh role object effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a tenth role object sound, which is a sound effect of the role object effect, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 232 (6), the role production ends and the role 11 effect image 582 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 232 (7), the first step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 232 (8), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 233 (9), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound, which is a sound effect for the third step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 233 (10), the step image 508 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (11), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the second image at operation 527 is displayed as shown in FIG. 233 (12). This second image at operation 527 displays the text "Coming?!" In other words, the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the second stage is different from the display mode of the second image at operation 527 in the first stage (see FIG. 102 (12)). At this time, a sixth operation sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the effect button 161 has been operated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (13), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 233 (14), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the zone effect has started.
Next, as shown in Fig. 233 (15), a zone execution image 530 is displayed. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual recognition mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (16), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stop motion. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 234 (17), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 234 (18), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 234 (19), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a 12th reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 12th reach action is being performed, the ribbon worn by the character in the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if it is floating. Furthermore, the 12th reach action has a higher expectation than the 10th reach action. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. Furthermore, at this time, a third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 234 (20), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 234 (21), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 234 (22), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 234 (23), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the 10th visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 234 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (25), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (26), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (27), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 235 (28), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 235 (29), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 235 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (31), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235 (32), an extended effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle movable role object 1152 has moved lower than the position shown in FIG. 218 (5). At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 236 (33), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode (see Figure 76-4 (29)). At this time, the SPSP reach effect starts, and the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 236 (34), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 236 (35), three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode (see FIG. 76-4 (30)). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output and becomes silent.

Next, as shown in Figure 236 (36), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult to see or impossible to see. At this time, a switching indication sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 236 (37), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
236 (38), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stopping operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect (stop sound) of the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 236 (39), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 54)
237 to 242 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 54) will be described with reference to Figures 237 to 242. Variable effect example 54 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach effect is executed.
The variation effects shown in Figures 237 to 242 are variation effects that are executed when "ER12" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Figure 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 232 (1) to (5) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 237 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the sixth variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 237(2), the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 237 (3). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(4), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 237 (5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 237 (6), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in Figure 237 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 237 (8), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed moving downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
Next, as shown in Fig. 238(9), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 238 (10), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is also output. That is, the same sound effect is output when the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops for the first time (see Fig. 237 (3)) and the second time.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(11), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 238 (12), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the decorative patterns 41 will change again, is output. That is, in change performance example 54, the sound effect (change start sound) is different when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the first time (see Figure 232 (2)), when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the second time (see Figure 237 (5)), and when the decorative patterns 41 start to change for the third time.

Next, as shown in Figure 238 (13), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the sixth variation action is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in Figure 238 (14), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 238 (15), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 238 (16), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (17), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 239 (18), the left column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (19), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (20), the right column decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action. At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action.
Next, as shown in Figure 239 (21), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 239 (22), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 239 (23), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to green. At this time, a second variable sound is output. That is, the sound effect (variable sound) is different when the display mode of the variable image 51 changes to red (see FIG. 234 (20)) and when it changes to green.

Next, as shown in Figure 239 (24), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 240 (25), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 240 (26), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 240 (27), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 240 (28), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 240 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 240 (30), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 240 (31), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the third variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 240 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 241 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 241 (34), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 241 (35), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 241 (36), the SPSP reach effect starts, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the first SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 241 (37), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, the effect button 161 emits white light. At this time, a second button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the second period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the decide button operation effect, three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 241 (38). At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output, and the game becomes silent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 241 (39), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. At this time, a switching sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 241 (40), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 is redisplayed. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output.
242 (41), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect of the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 stopping is not output, and the display becomes silent.
Next, as shown in FIG. 242 (42), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454", are fixed and stopped.

(Variation example 55)
Figure 243 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 55) will be described with reference to Fig. 243. Variable effect example 55 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 243 is a variable performance that is executed when "AA1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 57 and "ER2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 243(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 243 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1." At this time, a third start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 243 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the sixth variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 243 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 243 (5), a role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, an eleventh role object effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a tenth role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 243 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel 11 effect image 582 is no longer displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 243 (7), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a third chance eye effect image 583 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 21st stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the three rows of decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 243 (8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In addition, in the variation performance example 55, the seventh stop sound may be output instead of the twenty-first stop sound.
In addition, the eleventh start action, the eleventh effect image at the start 581, the third start sound, the role-playing effect, and the chance eye effect in the variation effect example 55 are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Furthermore, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Variation example 56)
244 to 251 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 56) will be described with reference to Figures 244 to 251. Variable presentation example 56 is a variable presentation based on winning at first start slot 121 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable presentation example 56 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 55. In other words, variable presentation example 56 is an example of a variable presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 243 (6)) shown in variable presentation example 55.
244 to 251 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 244 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 244 (2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and an eleventh start operation is performed. At this time, an eleventh start effect image 581 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a third start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Figure 244 (3), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the sixth variation action. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 244 (4), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in FIG. 244 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the eleventh role effect image 582 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. At this time, the tenth role sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect has ended. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 244(6), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 244 (7), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528. At this time, a zone start sound is also output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 244 (8), zone execution image 530 is displayed. Also, the button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops, as shown in FIG. 245 (9). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 245(10), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x2," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change a second time. At this time, a first re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 245 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 245 (14), a pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo consecutive image 511 is displayed so as to move downward. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
Next, as shown in Fig. 245 (15), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, the pseudo-sequential fanning effect image 512 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 245 (16), the pseudo consecutive win image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive win image 511. At this time, a pseudo consecutive win stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (17), the pseudo-series image 511 is displayed in an enlarged manner.
Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (18), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed again. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41, "213," are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. At this time, a re-change notification image 515 is displayed. The re-change notification image 515 displays the text "x3," indicating that the decorative symbols 41 will change for the third time. At this time, a second re-change sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 246 (19), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, and the sixth variation operation is performed. At this time, the re-variation notification image 515 is displayed in a reduced size and shifted to the right.
Next, as shown in Figure 246 (20), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 246 (21), the first step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 246 (22), the second step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 246 (23), the third step performance is executed, and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 246 (24), the step image 508 is hidden. Also, the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and a sixth variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 247 (25), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping action. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stopping sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 247 (26), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 247 (27), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eighth stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 247 (28), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye is displayed in the eighth visual mode, and the twelfth reach action is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (29), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable action. At this time, the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the first variable sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 247 (30), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 247 (31), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "3" passes by, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the first mode of the 10th visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 247 (32), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 248 (33), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (34), the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not displayed. Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (35), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (36), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 248 (37), the development promotion effect starts, and the development image 521 is displayed. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41, "5", is displayed in the first mode of the thirteenth visual mode, and the third variation action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 248 (38), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 248 (39), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (40), the development image 521 stops, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden. At this time, a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. At this time, a development stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (41), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed. At this time, the fourth role object sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (42), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourteenth visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 is displayed. Also, at this time, the SPSP suggestion image 601 is displayed, and the second SPSP sound is output. In the illustrated example, the SPSP suggestion image 601 displays the text "SPSP Battle," which suggests the content of the SPSP reach effect, and the text "Expectation 60%," which suggests that the expectation of the jackpot game being executed is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (43), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound is output. The effective operation period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 249 (44). At this time, a first success sound is output. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is started, and the effect button 161 vibrates.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (45), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 249 (46), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 249 (47), the role-playing effect ends, and the three movable role-playing objects 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 249 (48), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (49), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration effect continues.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 250 (50), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (51), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 250 (52), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect has also ended.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, as shown in FIG. 250 (53).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (54), the doublet decorative symbol 41 "444" is temporarily stopped. That is, the promotion effect is not executed after the promotion teasing effect is executed. At this time, the doublet second effect image 541 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the ninth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (55), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (56), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "Bonus!".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (57), the big win game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size, and the fifth rainbow image 608 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 251 (58), the first right-hit image 609 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable device 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (59), a second right-hit image 543 is displayed. At this time, a round number image 544 and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 251 (60). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving mode has begun!"
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up orange, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. That is, the rainbow light effect ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 251 (61), a warning image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 251 (62), the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up blue, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (63), the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, "444," is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. And, like the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444." At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode). At this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Note that the specific lighting pattern of the lamp in variation presentation example 56 is the same as that shown in Figures 121 and 122.

As described above, the variable performance of this embodiment includes a first variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific column (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) in the first performance mode (first stage) is a first path (for example, the first variable path (see Figure 77-1 (1))), and a second variable performance in which the path of the change of the pattern in a specific column in the third performance mode (third stage) is a second path different from the first path (for example, the sixth variable path (see Figure 77-1 (6))). The performance control unit 300 can output the same specific sound when the pattern stops in the first variable performance as the specific sound when the pattern stops in the second variable performance (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable effects consisting of various variable paths according to the effect mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a symbol stops in any of the multiple effect modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop", which is one of the divisions in the variable effect, regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The variable presentation of this embodiment includes a first variable presentation in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a first display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 78(1)) in the first presentation mode (first stage), and a second variable presentation in which the decorative pattern 41 can be displayed in a second display mode (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 211(1)) in the third presentation mode (third stage). The presentation control unit 300 can output the same specific sound when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation and the same specific sound when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation (both output the first stop sound).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of variable effects consisting of various display modes of the decorative symbols 41 according to the effect mode. Also, by outputting a common specific sound when a symbol stops in any of the effect modes, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the "symbol stop," which is one of the divisions in the variable effects, regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first presentation mode (first stage), the first effect image 503 (see FIG. 79(9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops, and when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third presentation mode (third stage), the eleventh effect image 573 (see FIG. 212(9)) is displayed when the decorative pattern 41 stops. In other words, the specific presentation (effect image) executed when the pattern stops in the first variable presentation is different from the specific presentation executed when the pattern stops in the second variable presentation, but this is not limiting.
The specific effect (effect image) executed when the symbols stop in the first variable effect may be the same as the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable effect. That is, the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the first variable effect may be the same as the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable effect. Also, either the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the first variable effect or the specific sound output and the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable effect may be the same, while the other may be different. That is, the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the first variable effect may be the same as the specific sound output or the specific effect executed when the symbols stop in the second variable effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display using the viewing mode shown in Figure 76-1 (4)) in which the pattern in a specific column (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display using the viewing mode shown in Figures 76-1 (5) to (7), 76-2 (13), and 76-3 (18)) in which the pattern in the specific column is easier to see than in the first display after the first display, and a third display (for example, a display using the viewing mode shown in Figure 76-1 (1)) in which the pattern in the specific column stops after the second display. Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode (such as the third presentation mode (third stage)), the presentation control unit 300 can differentiate the movement pattern of the first column symbols when the first column symbols (left column decorative symbols 41) are in the second display (for example, a movement pattern to the lower right along the left sixth variation path LR6) from the movement pattern of the second column symbols when the second column symbols (for example, the middle column decorative symbols 41) are in the second display. The second display of the second column symbols in a specific presentation mode can be classified into a first pattern (a movement pattern in which the symbols rotate counterclockwise along the middle seventh variation path CR7 (see FIG. 77-1 (7)) and then rise) and a second pattern (a movement pattern to the lower left along the middle second variation path CR2 (see FIG. 77-1 (2))) which is different from the first pattern.
In this case, the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 can be made more diverse depending on the row of the displayed decorative patterns 41, and the movement patterns of the decorative patterns 41 in one row can also be made more diverse, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second row symbols are displayed in the second mode of the second visual mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode of the second visual mode is executed. Therefore, even if the second row symbols are displayed in the same second visual mode, it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether the second row symbols are displayed in the first mode or the second mode.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the first mode of the second viewing mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable effect in which the second column's patterns are displayed in the second mode of the second viewing mode is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can display the middle row decorative symbols 41 in a specific mode that changes the movement path of the middle row decorative symbols 41 during high-speed movement and low-speed movement. The specific mode includes a first specific mode, which is a specific mode in the third stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed by the middle sixth movement path CR6 (see FIG. 77-1(6)) during high-speed movement and by the middle seventh movement path CR7 (see FIG. 77-1(7)) during low-speed movement), and a second specific mode, which is a specific mode in the first stage (for example, a mode in which the middle row decorative symbols 41 are displayed by the middle first movement path CR1 (see FIG. 77-1(1)) during high-speed movement and by the middle second movement path CR2 (see FIG. 77-1(2)) during low-speed movement). Furthermore, a jackpot game is more likely to be achieved when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first specific mode. Therefore, even if the display is in the same specific mode, the player's interest in whether the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode can be increased.
In addition, the fact that a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode includes the fact that a jackpot game will not be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, and the fact that a jackpot game will be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.
Furthermore, if a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed than when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, a jackpot game may be executed when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first specific mode is executed, or a jackpot game may not be executed when a variable effect in which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second specific mode is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variation presentation example 1, the first start operation (see Figure 78 (2)) is executed before the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variation path, and in variation presentation example 10, variation presentation example 11, and variation presentation example 13, the third start operation (see Figure 113 (2)) is executed before the decorative pattern 41 changes along the first variation path. It may also be possible to make it easier for a jackpot or SP reach presentation to be executed (it is less likely for a stop sound to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops due to a highly decorative display mode) when the variation presentations of variation presentation example 10, variation presentation example 11, and variation presentation example 13 are executed than when the variation presentation of variation presentation example 1 is executed. In other words, even if the fluctuation path is the same for each stage (presentation mode), it is easier to achieve a jackpot or SP reach presentation when a second fluctuation presentation (such as fluctuation presentation example 10, fluctuation presentation example 11, and fluctuation presentation example 13) is executed, in which the action at the start of the fluctuation presentation is the second action (for example, the third start action), than when a first fluctuation presentation (such as fluctuation presentation example 1) is executed, in which the action at the start of the fluctuation presentation is the first action (for example, the first start action) (it is harder to achieve the output of the stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode).

In addition, even when the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), it is easier for a jackpot or SP reach presentation to be executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely) when a second fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the second action than when a first fluctuation presentation is executed in which the action when the fluctuation presentation is started is the first action. This includes the fact that when the first fluctuation presentation is executed, a jackpot or SP reach presentation is never executed (0%) (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is always executed (100%)), and that when the second fluctuation presentation is executed, a jackpot or SP reach presentation is always executed (100%) (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is never executed (0%)). Furthermore, even if the fluctuation path is common to each stage (presentation mode), by making it easier for a jackpot or SP reach presentation to be executed when the second fluctuation presentation is executed than when the first fluctuation presentation is executed (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is less likely to be executed), it is possible that a jackpot or SP reach presentation will be executed in the first fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode will not be executed), or that a jackpot or SP reach presentation will not be executed in the second fluctuation presentation (the output of a stop sound will be executed when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode).
The first action can also be regarded as a first movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts. The second action can also be regarded as a second movement, which is the movement of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts.

Furthermore, between the first variable performance (such as variable performance example 1) and the second variable performance (such as variable performance example 10, variable performance example 11, and variable performance example 13), not only the operation (movement) of the decorative pattern 41 when the variable performance starts, but also the operation (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start may differ. For example, in the first variable performance, the operation (movement) and changes when the variable performance starts occur in the order of the left column decorative pattern 41, the right column decorative pattern 41, and the middle column decorative pattern 41. On the other hand, in the second variable performance, the operation (movement) and changes when the variable performance starts may occur in the order of the right column decorative pattern 41, the middle column decorative pattern 41, and the left column decorative pattern 41. In this way, differences in the operation (movement) when the variable performance starts include differences in the order of the operation (movement) when the variable performance starts and the order in which the changes start.

In this embodiment, the losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variable performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 216(2)), and a second variable performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 243(2)). When a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 56 is easier to execute).
Note that when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 56 is easier to execute), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variation performance example 56 is never executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, if it is made easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 56 is easier to execute), then when the first variable performance is executed, it is possible to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 56 may be executed), and when the second variable performance is executed, it is not necessary to win a jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 56 may not be executed).

Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it may be possible to make it more likely that an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) will be executed in the next change effect (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 will be executed) if the second change effect in which a start sound is output is executed, rather than if the first change effect in which a start sound is not output is executed.
In addition, when a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, it is more likely that an SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) will be executed in the next change effect when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first change effect is executed, an SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect will not be executed in the next change effect (0%) (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 will not be executed). Furthermore, if a hold is stored for the first starting port 121, and the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed in the next change effect when the second change effect is executed than when the first change effect is executed (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 is more likely to be executed), then when the first change effect is executed, the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) may be executed in the next change effect (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 may be executed), and when the second change effect is executed, the SP reach effect (SPSP reach effect) may not be executed in the next change effect (change effect example 53 or change effect example 54 may not be executed).

(Variation example 57)
FIG. 252 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 57) will be described with reference to Fig. 252. Variable effect example 57 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
252 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 243 (1) to (8), 244 (1) to (8), 245 (9) to (16), 246 (17) to (24), 247 (25) to (32), 248 (33) to (40), and 249 (41) and (42) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 252 (1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. Button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a third button sound is output. The valid operation period for this button operation effect is the third period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamp emits the same light as that shown in Figure 249 (43).

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in Figure 252 (2). At this time, the success image 538 (see Figure 118 (44)) is not displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is not executed. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) lights up in white. At this time, the first success sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (3), a success image 538 is displayed. At this time, a vibration effect is initiated, and the effect button 161 vibrates. At this time, a first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 249 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 249 (45) to (48), 250 (49) to (56), and 251 (57) to (63) are executed.

As described above, in variation presentation example 57, the timing of the display of success image 538, the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode by presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is delayed relative to the time presentation button 161 is operated, compared to variation presentation example 56. In other words, in variation presentation example 57, the period from when presentation button 161 is operated in the button operation presentation to the display of success image 538, the start of the vibration presentation, the specific light-emitting mode by presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound is longer than in variation presentation example 56.

In the variation performance example 57, a success image 538 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In variable performance example 57, after the performance shown in Figure 252 (2) is performed, a vibration performance, a specific light emission pattern by (button lamp 1611), and the output of the first success sound may be executed without displaying success image 538.
Also, at the time shown in Figure 252 (2), the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 249 (43), or may have the same light-emitting mode as that shown in Figure 249 (44).
In addition, in variable performance example 57, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light-emitting mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as variable performance example 13 (variable performance example 56), except that the performance shown in Figure 252 (2) is performed between time T1 and time T2 shown in Figure 121.

(Variation example 58)
FIG. 253 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 58) will be described with reference to Fig. 253. Variable effect example 58 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
253 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 243 (1) to (8), 244 (1) to (8), 245 (9) to (16), 246 (17) to (24), 247 (25) to (32), 248 (33) to (40), and 249 (41) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 253 (1), the SPSP reach effect begins, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 14th visual mode. At this time, the SPSP reach image 536 and SPSP suggestion image 601 are displayed, and the second SPSP sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 253 (2), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which urges the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a vibration effect starts, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light, and the second button sound is output. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the third period. Although not shown, at this time, the lamps other than the button lamp 1611 emit light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 249 (43).
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 253 (3). At this time, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. At this time, the first success sound is output. At this time, although not shown, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in FIG. 249 (44).
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 249 (45) to (48), 250 (49) to (56), and 251 (57) to (63) are executed.

(Variation example 59)
254 to 256 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 59) will be described with reference to Figures 254 to 256. Variable effect example 59 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
254 to 256 are the variable performances that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 254 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 254 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a twelfth start action, which is the action taken when the change begins, is performed. When the twelfth start action is being performed, each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 is displayed moving to the left. At this time, a twelfth start effect image 584 is displayed to the left of each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed. Furthermore, the display mode of the changing image 51 changes from red to rainbow colors. At this time, a vibration effect is executed. At this time, a fourth changing sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 254 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and a sixth variable action is performed.
254(4), the "7" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right columns are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the sixth varying action. At this time, the fifth "reach" effect image 578 is displayed on the lower right side of each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right columns.
254(5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "7", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, sixth reach-inducing effect images 579 are displayed on the upper left and lower right sides of each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 254 (6), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the fourth stopping action is performed. At this time, the fourth stop effect image 549 is displayed surrounding each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. Also, at this time, the fourth reach sound (tenth stop sound) is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 254 (7), the left and right rows of decorative patterns 41 return to the display size before enlargement. At this time, the sixth rainbow image 612 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 254 (8), the middle row decorative symbol 41 "7" is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual recognition mode and performs the first varying action. At this time, the seventh rainbow image 613 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 255 (9), the middle symbol fanning effect starts, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 17th visual mode (see Figure 76-5 (35)). At this time, doublet fanning first effect images 550 are displayed above and below the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 255 (10), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the 17th visual mode (see Fig. 76-5 (36)). At this time, doublet-up second effect images 551 are displayed above, below, left, and right of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 17th visual mode (see FIG. 76-5 (37)) and stops. At this time, the fifth stop effect image 552 is displayed around the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, a vibration effect is started. At this time, the 11th stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (14), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the sixth stop effect image 553 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twelfth stop sound is also output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

In addition, in variable performance example 59, the stage image 61 is displayed even when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th viewing mode. However, even in variable performance example 59, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 16th viewing mode, the third rainbow image 540 (see Figure 250 (49)) may be displayed instead of the stage image 61.

Next, as shown in Figure 255 (15), the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stop action is performed. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (16), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) remain off.

Next, as shown in Figure 256 (17), a big win game notification image 542 is displayed. In the example shown, the big win game notification image 542 displays the text "BIG".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up purple, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 256 (18), the jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed in a reduced size. In the example shown, the text "BIG BONUS!" is displayed as the jackpot game notification image 542. At this time, the eighth rainbow image 614 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to be off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the third mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same presentation as shown in Figures 251 (58) to (63) is performed, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.
In addition, the specific lighting pattern of the lamp during the variable performance in variable performance example 59 is the same as that shown in Figure 132.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 59 is the same as that in variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 256 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 256 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Example of variation 60)
257 and 258 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 60) will be described with reference to Figures 257 and 258. Variable effect example 60 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
257 and 258 are the variable effects that are executed when "EB2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 254 (1) to (7) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 257 (1), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the seventh visual mode and the first temporary stopping action is performed, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "7", is displayed in the first mode of the tenth visual mode and the first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 257 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" passes, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "8" is displayed in the second mode of the tenth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 257 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is again displayed in the fourth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.

257(4), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual recognition mode. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed in place of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257(5), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 257(6), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 257 (7), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 257 (8), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "7" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the second variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 258 (9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 258 (10), the deciding button operation effect begins, and button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Make it!". At this time, button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) lights up red, and a third button sound is output. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the third period.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the decide button operation effect, the ninth rainbow image 615 is displayed as shown in Fig. 258 (11). At this time, the vibration effect starts.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 258 (12), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. Additionally, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 258 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventh stop effect image 554 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the thirteenth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 258 (14), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "777", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the seventh aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the fourth aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the second aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

After this, the same effects as those shown in (17) and (18) of Fig. 256 are performed. After that, the same effects as those shown in (58) to (63) of Fig. 251 are performed, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.
In addition, the specific lighting pattern of the lamp during the execution of the variable performance in variable performance example 60 is the same as that shown in Figure 135.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 60 is the same as variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is as shown in Figure 196 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is as shown in Figure 196 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

(Variation example 61)
Figure 259 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 61) will be described with reference to Fig. 259. Variable effect example 61 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
259 is a variation effect that is executed when "EA4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 232 (1) to (8), 233 (9) to (16), 234 (17) to (24), 235 (25) to (32), and 236 (33) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 259 (1), the deciding button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press!". In addition, a second button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the second period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the final button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 259 (2). At this time, the first success sound is output. Meanwhile, the vibration effect is not performed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (3), the role presentation is executed, and the left movable role 1151, the center movable role 1152, and the right movable role 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the first rainbow image 539 is displayed. At this time, the first jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 259 (4), the special effect and the display of the first rainbow image 539 continue. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light emission aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 259 (5), the role-playing effect ends, and the three movable role-playing objects 115 move back to their initial positions. At this time, the second rainbow image 606 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 259 (6), the success image 538 is displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

259(7), the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed in the first mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 is displayed.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.
Next, as shown in FIG. 259 (8), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, and no vibration effect is performed. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all continue to be lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 260 (9), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed. The eighth stop sound is also output.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are in the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) are in the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode. The fourth mode is selected, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) is in the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) is in the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off and are lit in white, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) is in the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 260 (10), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 250 (53) to (56) and Figure 251 (57) to (63) are performed.
In this way, in the variation effect example 61, the vibration effect is not executed.
In addition, in the variable performance example 61, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the flow of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 are the same as those in the variable performance example 56.

(Variation example 62)
261 and 262 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 62) will be described with reference to Figures 261 and 262. Variable effect example 62 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
261 and 262 are the variation effects that are executed when "EA5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 243(1) to (8), 244(1) to (8), 245(9) to (16), 246(17) to (24), 247(25) to (32), 248(33) to (40), and 249(41) and (42) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 261(1), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Decide!", which prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. At this time, a button effect image 557 is displayed around the button operation image 502. At this time, a third button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are lit in white, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is lit in red.

Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 261 (2), three rows of decorative symbols 41, "454," are displayed in the fifteenth visual mode and temporarily stopped. At this time, the sixth stop sound is output. Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are lit in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 261(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become difficult or impossible to see. A switching sound is also output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 261(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 261(4), part of the switching image 520 disappears and part of the stage image 61 reappears. At this time, a switching non-display sound is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Fig. 261(2).
Next, as shown in FIG. 261(5), the entire switching image 520 is hidden, and three rows of highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, at this time, the sound effect indicating the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 have stopped is not output, and the display becomes silent. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 261(2).

Next, as shown in Figure 261 (6), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the revival image 558 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect begins. At this time, the first revival sound is output. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Figure 261 (2).

Next, as shown in Figure 261 (7), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable role element 1152), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153) are lit in orange, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) remain extinguished.

Next, as shown in FIG. 261 (8), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. Furthermore, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 262 (9), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 250 (53) to (56) and Figure 251 (57) to (63) are performed.

In addition, in variation presentation example 62, the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission state of the lamp, and the flow of the light emission state of the light guide plate 118 are the same as in variation presentation example 21.

(Variation of variation example 53)
Next, a modified example of the variation presentation example 53 will be explained.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 232(1) to (8) and 233(9) to (14) are performed, and then the zone execution image 530 is displayed as shown in Figure 263(1). At this time, the left column decorative symbol 41, "3," is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the sixth variable action.
Next, as shown in FIG. 263(2), the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eighth stopping operation. At this time, the eleventh stopping effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the left-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the twenty-second stopping sound, which is the sound effect of the decorative symbol 41 stopping, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 263 (3), the right column decorative pattern 41, "3", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 263(4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, performs the eighth stopping action, and starts the reach effect. At this time, the eleventh stop effect image 573 is displayed on the lower right side of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the 22nd stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 263 (5), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the eighth visual confirmation mode, and a 13th reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbol 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach performance starts), is performed. When the 13th reach action is being performed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as if raising the right hand. At this time, a first reach line image 509 and a first reach notification image 510 are displayed. At this time, a first reach sound is also output.
In this way, different reach actions may be executed for each number of the decorative pattern 41.
In addition, in a modified example of the variable performance example 53, the 14th stop sound (see Figure 151 (2)) may be output instead of the 22nd stop sound.
In addition, in this embodiment, as a variable effect, a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 53 may be provided instead of variable effect example 53, or a variable effect shown as a modified example of variable effect example 53 may be provided together with variable effect example 53.

(Variation example 63)
264 and 265 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 63) will be described with reference to Figures 264 and 265. Variable presentation example 63 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery based on winning into first start slot 121 in the normal game state is a loss, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the stage (presentation mode) controlled by presentation control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the similarities with the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 264(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the display of the previous special symbol, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "213," are fixed and stopped. Also, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, a stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first effect mode).
Next, as shown in Fig. 264 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the first start operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 264 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 264(4), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 264 (5). At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 264 (6), the left column decorative pattern 41, "4", is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 264 (7), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the left of the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 264 (8), the right column decorative pattern 41 "2" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265(9), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 265 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "1" is displayed in the fifth visual mode and the fourth variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the fifth stopping action. At this time, the eighth stop effect image 560 is displayed to the right of the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the fifteenth stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 265 (12), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 265 (13), along with the stop display of the special pattern, three rows of decorative patterns 41 and small patterns 56, "412", are fixed and stopped (displayed in the first visual mode).

(Variation example 64)
Figure 266 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 64) will be described with reference to Fig. 266. Variable presentation example 64 is a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery based on winning into the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state is a loss, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the similarities with the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 264 (1) and (2) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 266 (1), in the first stage, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 266 (2), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (3), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
266(3) is a pre-determination effect for the reserve that has occurred due to winning in the first starting slot 121. Although not shown, the same reel effect as that shown in FIG. 266(3) is also executed in the variable effect for this reserve. Therefore, the reel effect shown in FIG. 266(3) can also be regarded as a continuous effect. A continuous effect is an effect that is executed across multiple reserve memories.

Next, as shown in FIG. 266 (4), a button operation effect is executed, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, a first button sound is output. At this time, the three columns of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, first operation image 504 is displayed as shown in Fig. 266 (5). At this time, a first operation sound is also output.
266(6), the first operation image 504 is hidden. The three rows of decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the fourth visual mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 266(7), a stage change image 585 is displayed.
Next, the stage (presentation mode) controlled by the presentation control unit 300 changes from the first stage (first presentation mode) to the second stage (second presentation mode), and the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second stage, as shown in Fig. 266 (8). At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a fourth viewing mode, and a fourth changing operation is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in variation effect example 63, when the stage controlled by the effect control unit 300 changes, the stage change image 585 is displayed and the variation path is switched (switching from the variation path shown in FIG. 264 (3) to the variation path shown in FIG. 264 (5)). More specifically, after the variation effect starts and before a specific effect starts, the stage change image 585 is displayed and the variation path is switched. Examples of specific effects include displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the fourth viewing mode, displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the fifth viewing mode, displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the sixth viewing mode, and displaying the decorative pattern 41 in the seventh viewing mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in the variation performance example 64, when a special device performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed after the variation performance has started and before a specific performance has started, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are not executed. That is, in this embodiment, when a special device performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted.
In this case, compared to when the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed while the special device performance or the button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing attention to either the display of the stage change image 585 or the switching of the change path, or the special device performance or the button operation performance (continuous performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a change effect starts in the first stage, the first change path (see Figure 77-1 (1)) is used, and when a change effect starts in the second stage, the second change path (see Figure 77-1 (4)) is used. However, when a special effect (display of stage change image 585) is executed after the change effect starts in the first mode, the second change path is used. In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise that the second change path is being used.

In the variable performance example 63 and the variable performance example 64, examples have been described in which the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 changes from the first stage to the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
The stage may change from the first stage to the third stage, from the second stage to the third stage, from the third stage to the first stage, or from the third stage to the second stage. In this case, the decorative pattern 41 changes in a manner corresponding to the stage before the change and the stage after the change. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a visual manner similar to that shown in the variation presentation example 63 and the variation presentation example 64.

Furthermore, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path shown in change performance example 63 and change performance example 64 may be performed in any of the change performance examples and variations described above. In this case, the display of stage change image 585, the switching of the display mode of stage image 61, and the switching of the change path may be performed or restricted at the same timing as shown in change performance example 63 and change performance example 64 (after the change performance starts and before a specific performance starts, when no special device performance or button operation performance (continuous performance) is being performed, etc.).

Furthermore, in the variation performance example 64, in a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a special device performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are restricted, and when a special device performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are executed, but this is not limited to this.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path are determined, when a role-play performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is executed, the performance control unit 300 may not execute the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path in this variation performance. Then, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed in the next variation performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one change performance, when a special feature performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are restricted, and when a special feature performance or a button operation performance (continuous performance) is not being executed, the display of the stage change image 585 and the switching of the change path are executed, but this is not limited to this.
In a variation performance in which the display of the stage-change image 585 and the switching of the variation path were supposed to be executed (the execution of the display of the stage-change image 585 and the switching of the variation path was set in the variation performance pattern), if a special effect or a button operation effect (continuous effect) is executed, the display of the stage-change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be restricted in this variation performance. In this case, in a variation performance from the next onwards in which a special effect or a button operation effect (continuous effect) is not executed, the display of the stage-change image 585 and the switching of the variation path may be executed.

(Example of effects when effect button 161 is not operated)
Figure 267 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when presentation button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation presentation.
First, we will explain the variation effect example 10 explained with reference to Figures 101 to 105. After the effect shown in Figure 102 (10) is executed, the button operation effect starts as shown in Figure 267 (1), and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the second image 527 at the time of operation (see FIG. 102(12)) is not displayed and the second operation sound is not output, as shown in FIG. 267(2). In other words, the manner of the sound output differs depending on whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period or not.
267(2) is not limited to the effect when the effect button 161 is not operated in the variable effect example 10. In the variable effect in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 102(11) is performed, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 102(11), the effect shown in FIG. 267(2) may be performed.
In addition, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Figure 173 (11) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Figure 173 (11), the fourth operation sound (see Figure 173 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in Figure 267 (2).
Also, in a variable presentation in which the same presentation as that shown in Figure 233 (11) is performed, if the presentation button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation presentation shown in Figure 233 (11), the sixth operation sound (see Figure 233 (12)) may not be output, as in the presentation shown in Figure 267 (2).

Next, we will explain variation effect example 11, which was explained with reference to Figures 106 to 111. After the effect shown in Figure 106 (1) is performed, the button operation effect begins as shown in Figure 267 (3), and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the pseudo-continuous play image 511 stops, as shown in Figure 267 (4). At this time, a pseudo-continuous play stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous play image 511. Also, at this time, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become hidden (hard to see or impossible to see), and a pseudo-continuous play stop sound is output. In other words, the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period (see Figure 106 (3)) or not.

267(4) is not limited to the effect when the effect button 161 is not operated in the variable effect example 11. In the variable effect in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 106(2) is performed, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 106(2), the effect shown in FIG. 267(4) may be performed.
113(8), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 113(8), the pseudo-consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo-consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo-consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267(4). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 113(8).

177(2) 的变形的变形，如果显示的复合效应用效应用时，则可以输出PSI复合效应用效应用514。 Also, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 177(2) in a variable effect application in which the same effect as that shown in Fig. 177(2) is performed, the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267(4). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 177(2).
184(8), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 184(8), the pseudo-consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo-consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo-consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267(4). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 184(8).
237(2) 的变形的变形，如果显示出的效应用 ...
244(8) 的变形的变形可以是相同的情况下，如果显示在图244(8)中所示的动作点头161没有操作，则动作止挥头511完成，则动作止挥头514被显示，则动作止挥头音被输出。 In addition, if the same effect as that shown in Fig. 244(8) is performed in a variable effect display, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the button operation display shown in Fig. 244(8), the pseudo consecutive image 511 may stop, the pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 may be displayed, and a pseudo consecutive stop sound may be output, as in the case of Fig. 267(4). In other words, the type of sound output may be the same whether or not the effect

Next, we will explain the variation effect example 11, which was explained with reference to Figures 106 to 111. After the effect shown in Figure 110 (36) is performed, the button operation effect begins as shown in Figure 267 (5), and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the second button sound is output.

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number is displayed in the fifteenth visual mode, and the sixth stop sound is output, as shown in Fig. 267 (6). Also, when the sixth stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output. In other words, the manner of the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period (see Fig. 110 (38)) or not.
267(6) is not limited to the effect when the effect button 161 is not operated in the variable effect example 11. In the variable effect in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 110(37) is performed, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 110(37), the effect shown in FIG. 267(6) may be performed.
142(1) 的变形的变形，如果显示出的变形为15种视形方形41，则输出第15种视形方形520后，则输出变形为线盘520后，则输出变形为线盘520。 In addition, if the same effect as that shown in Fig. 142(1) is performed in the variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 142(1), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing number may be displayed in the 15th visual mode, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267(6), and the sixth stop sound may be output, and then the variable BGM may not be output, and the display may go to silence after the display of the switching image 520. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 142(1).

Next, we will explain variation effect example 13, which was explained with reference to Figures 113 to 120. After the effect shown in Figure 118 (42) is performed, the button operation effect begins as shown in Figure 267 (7), the button operation image 502 and button effect image 557 are displayed, and the third button sound is output. Also, at this time, the lamp emits light in the same manner as shown in Figure 118 (43).

If the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 267 (8), the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, the success image 538 is displayed, the vibration effect starts, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) enters a specific light-emitting mode (in the illustrated example, the third mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode), and a first success sound is output. In other words, the sound output is the same whether the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period (see FIG. 118 (44)) or not. Also, at this time, the lamp is in the same light-emitting mode as shown in FIG. 118 (44).
267(8) is not limited to the effect when the effect button 161 is not operated in variable effect example 13. In a variable effect in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 118(43) is performed, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 118(43), the effect shown in FIG. 267(8) may be performed.

123(1), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 123(1), the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be started, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may be illuminated in a specific manner, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the effect shown in FIG. 267(8), with a delay after the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 123(1).
124(2), if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 124(2), the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers may temporarily stop, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be executed, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may emit light in a specific manner, and a first success sound may be output, similar to the effect shown in FIG. 267(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 124(2).

189(43) 的变形图中，如果显示处理显示机161没有操作在操作有效的时间，如果显示在处理显示机161(阀灯1611)发光的特定发光状态、发出第一成功音也可以相同。 In addition, if the same effect as the effect shown in Fig. 189 (43) is performed in the variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 189 (43), the decorative pattern 41 may be hidden, the success image 538 may be displayed, the vibration effect may be started, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may be illuminated in a specific light state, and a first success sound may be output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267 (8). In other words, the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 189 (43).
192(1) 的变形态，如果显示图267(8)中的时候，如果显示图267(8)中的时候，则发光显示538、发光显示538开始、显示图267(8)中的变显示图267(8)。 Also, if the same effect as that shown in Fig. 192(1) is performed in the variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 192(1), after a delay from when the decorative pattern 41 disappears, the success image 538 is displayed, the vibration effect starts, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) changes to a specific light emission mode, and a first success sound is output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267(8). In other words, the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 192(1).
193(2) 的变形的变形，如果显示出的效应用效应用效应用时，则发生发生时间在处理效应用 ...

249(43) 的变形图中，如果显示处理显示机161没有操作在操作有效的时间，如果显示处理显示机161(显示机灯1611)发生特定光标准、发出第一成功音。 In addition, if the same effect as that shown in Fig. 249 (43) is performed in a variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 249 (43), the decorative pattern 41 may be hidden, the success image 538 may be displayed, the vibration effect may start, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may emit a specific light, and a first success sound may be output, as in the effect shown in Fig. 267 (8). In other words, the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation effective period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 249 (43).
252(1) 的变形态，如果显示图252(1)中的变形态中所示的图252(1)中的变形态后，同样，在显示盖式41后，显示成功图538、变形态开始、变形态，变形态161(ボタン灯1611)变形为特定的光标准、发出第一成功音。 In addition, if the same effect as the effect shown in Fig. 252(1) is performed in the variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 252(1), after a delay from when the decorative pattern 41 disappears, similar to the effect shown in Fig. 267(8), success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be started, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may be in a specific light emission mode, and a first success sound may be output. In other words, the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 252(1).
253(2) 的变形可能是相同的实施方式的情况下，如果效应用效应用效应用效应用时，则发生电 ...时。 In addition, if the same effect as that shown in Fig. 253(2) is performed in a variable effect, if the effect button 161 is not operated during the effective operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 253(2), the decorative pattern 41 may be hidden, the success image 538 may be displayed, a vibration effect may be executed, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may be illuminated in a specific manner, and a first success sound may be output, as in the case of the effect shown in Fig. 267(8). In other words, the manner of the sound output may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the button operation effect shown in Fig. 253(2).

As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effects include a first operation effect that can be executed before the start of a specific effect, and a second operation effect that can be executed after the start of a specific effect. Specific effects include predetermined effects executed in variable effects, such as temporary stops of decorative symbols 41, reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects), pseudo consecutive effects, zone effects, step effects, and role-playing effects. Furthermore, in a variable effect in which the first operation effect is executed (such as variable effect example 10), the effect control unit 300 can output different types of sounds depending on whether the effect button 161 is operated (see FIG. 102 (12)) or not (see FIG. 267 (2)) during the operation valid period in the first operation effect. Furthermore, in a variable presentation (such as variable presentation example 13) in which a special game (jackpot game) is executed and a second operation presentation is executed, the presentation control unit 300 can make the type of sound output the same when the presentation button 161 is operated (see Figure 118 (44)) during the valid operation period in the second operation presentation and when it is not operated (see Figure 267 (8)).
In this case, before the start of the specific effect, an original sound effect for when the effect button 161 is operated in the button operation effect is output, thereby increasing the interest in the button operation effect even before the start of the specific effect. Also, after the start of the specific effect, even if the player forgets to operate the effect button 161 in the button operation effect, by outputting the same sound as when the effect button 161 is operated, the player can be more reliably allowed to enjoy the important effects at the end of the variable effect. This can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the jackpot variation presentation, the manner of the sound output may be the same when the presentation button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 113 (8) and FIG. 114 (9)) and when it is not operated. On the other hand, in the loss variation presentation, it has been explained that the manner of the sound output may be different when the presentation button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the first operation presentation (see FIG. 83 (2)) and when it is not operated (see FIG. 78 (6)).
In this embodiment, when a loss variation effect is executed, the manner of the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the first operation effect is more likely to be different from that when the jackpot variation effect is executed. Therefore, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the first operation effect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize which effect led to the jackpot.

Furthermore, the fact that the type of sound output when effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation presentation is executed than when a jackpot variation presentation is executed includes the fact that when a jackpot variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always the same (0%), and that when a miss variation presentation is executed, the type of sound output when effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is always different (100%).
Furthermore, if the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation is more likely to be different when a miss variation effect is executed than when a jackpot variation effect is executed, then when a miss variation effect is executed, the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period in the first operation presentation may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the sound output when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect is more likely to be the same as when it is not operated, compared to when a loss variation effect is executed. Therefore, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period of the first operation effect, it is easy for the player to recognize which effect led to the jackpot.
Furthermore, when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the manner of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect is more likely to be the same when a jackpot variation effect is executed than when a miss variation effect is executed, including the fact that when a miss variation effect is executed, the manner of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect is always different (0%), and when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the manner of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect is always the same (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a miss variation effect is executed, the manner of the sound to be output may be always the same (100%) whether the effect button 161 is operated or not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect during the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 105 (34)). Also, when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the manner of the sound to be output may be always the same (100%) whether the effect button 161 is operated or not during the operation valid period in the button operation effect during the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 118 (43)).
In other words, when a miss variation effect is executed and when a jackpot variation effect is executed, the likelihood of the output sound being the same may be the same whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect during the SPSP reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of sound output when the effect button 161 is operated or not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect is more likely to be different when a miss variation effect (second variation effect) in which a button operation effect (see Figure 78 (5)) is performed without a reach effect is performed than when a miss variation effect (first variation effect) in which a reach effect (see Figure 103 (19)) and a button operation effect (see Figure 105 (34)) are performed is performed.
Furthermore, when the second variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation performance is more likely to be different than when the first variation performance is executed, for reasons including the fact that when the first variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation performance is always the same (0%), and that when the second variation performance is executed, the type of sound output when the performance button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period of the button operation performance is always different (100%).

In addition, in this embodiment, a sound effect (see Figure 78 (5)) is output when the button operation image 502 is displayed, but if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, no sound effect is output (see Figure 78 (6)). This prevents the player's interest in the game from being reduced by sound effects being output even when the effect button 161 is not being intentionally operated by the player.

(Variation example 65)
Figure 268 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 65) will be described with reference to Fig. 268. Variable effect example 65 is a variable effect based on winning the first starting slot 121 in the normal game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
268 is a variation effect that is executed when "EB3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 59. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112(1) to (8), 113(1) to (8), 114(9) to (16), 115(17) to (24), 116(25) to (32), 117(33) to (40), 118(41) to (48), and 119(49) and (50) are performed. Next, as shown in Figure 268(1), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the third rainbow image 540 continues to be displayed, the vibration effect continues, and the eighth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 268 (2), the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 and the fourth rainbow image 607 are displayed. At this time, the fourth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

Then, when the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, an upgrade effect is executed as shown in Figure 268 (3), and the decorative pattern 41 of the same number "777" is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the first aspect of the first rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 268 (4), the doublet decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop. At this time, the 14th stop effect image 586 is displayed so as to surround each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the 18th rainbow image 626 is displayed. In addition, at this time, the 23rd stop sound, which is the sound effect when the doublet decorative symbols 41 stop, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) is turned off.

Then, with the special symbol being displayed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) remains off.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 256 (17) and (18) are played. After that, the same effects as those shown in Figure 251 (58) to (63) are played, except that the execution time of the jackpot game (round) is longer and the decorative pattern 41 and small pattern 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

In addition, in variable performance example 65, even if the performance button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation performance shown in Figure 268 (2), the same performance as that shown in Figures 268 (3) and (4) may be performed.
In addition, a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 183 (1) to (8), 184 (1) to (8), 185 (9) to (16), 186 (17) to (24), 187 (25) to (32), 188 (33) to (40), 189 (41) to (48), 190 (49), and (50) is performed, and then the same presentation as shown in Figures 268 (1) to (4) is performed.
In addition, a variable presentation may be provided in which the same presentation as shown in Figures 243 (1) to (8), Figures 244 (1) to (8), Figures 245 (9) to (16), Figures 246 (17) to (24), Figures 247 (25) to (32), Figures 248 (33) to (40), Figures 249 (41) to (48), Figures 250 (49), (50) is performed, and then the same presentation as shown in Figures 268 (1) to (4) is performed.

Figure 269 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 65.
Figure 269 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variable performance example 65.
In the variable performance example 65, up until time T9', the display content of the image display unit 114 and the lamp illumination mode are the same as those from time T1 to time T9 in FIG.

Next, at time T9', the fourth rainbow image 607 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. Additionally, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. Additionally, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the first rainbow light emitting pattern every two seconds.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T9' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 268 (2) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T9' will continue for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T10′, the fourth rainbow image 607 is hidden, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed again. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T9′.
The effect shown in Figure 268 (3) starts at time T10'. The effect shown to be executed at time T10' continues for one second.

Next, at time T11', the 18th rainbow image 626 is displayed, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue their light-emitting modes from time T10'.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153).
268(4) begins at time T11'. The effect indicated to be executed at time T11' continues for one second.

Next, at time T12', the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the 18th rainbow image 626 is no longer displayed. Time T12' is the time when the effect shown in FIG. 268 (5) begins.
In addition, the flow of the lamp light emission patterns during the execution of the jackpot game in variable presentation example 65 is the same as variable presentation example 13 (see Figure 122), except that the lamp light emission pattern from time T13 to time T14 is that shown in Figure 256 (17), the light emission pattern from time T14 to time T15 is that shown in Figure 256 (18), and the period from time T16 to time T17 is 60 seconds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first effect (e.g., normal reach effect, etc.) and the second effect (e.g., SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the first effect mode (e.g., first stage), and when the first effect and the second effect are executed during the execution of the variable effect in the second effect mode (second stage, third stage), it has been explained that a common specific image (e.g., fourth effect image 535, etc.) can be displayed (see FIG. 118 (41), FIG. 189 (41), FIG. 249 (41), etc.). In this case, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be different when the specific image is displayed in the first effect mode and when the specific image is displayed in the second effect mode.
In this case, even if a common specific image is displayed, the player's expectation of the execution of a jackpot game can be made different when a specific image is displayed according to the presentation mode, thereby realizing diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a common specific sound (for example, a fourth role sound) can be displayed when the first performance (for example, a normal reach performance) and the second performance (for example, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance, etc.) are executed during the execution of a variable performance in the first performance mode (for example, the first stage), and when the first performance and the second performance are executed during the execution of a variable performance in the second performance mode (the second stage, the third stage) (see FIG. 118 (41), FIG. 189 (41), FIG. 249 (41), etc.). In this case, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be different when a specific sound is output in the first performance mode and when a specific sound is output in the second performance mode.
In this case, even if a common specific sound is output, the player's expectation of the execution of a jackpot game can be made different when the specific sound is output according to the presentation mode, thereby realizing diversification of presentations according to the presentation mode.

The expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when a specific image is displayed in the second presentation mode than when a specific image is displayed in the first presentation mode. Also, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when a specific image is displayed in the first presentation mode than when a specific image is displayed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when a specific sound is output in the second presentation mode than when a specific sound is output in the first presentation mode. Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot game being executed may be higher when a specific sound is output in the first presentation mode than when a specific sound is output in the second presentation mode.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when a reach-ichi performance is executed without going through a reach-ichi prompting performance, reach line images (first reach-ichi line image 509, second reach-ichi line image 531, third reach-ichi line image 602, rainbow reach-line image 619) are displayed (see FIG. 88 (14), FIG. 116 (28), FIG. 136 (5), FIG. 145 (2), etc.). On the other hand, it has been explained that when a reach-ichi performance is executed through a reach-ichi prompting performance, reach line images are not displayed (see FIG. 100 (4), FIG. 129 (6), etc.). Here, it may be configured so that reach line images are more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach-ichi performance is executed without going through a reach-ichi prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach-ichi performance is executed through a reach-ichi prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode. In addition, the reach line image may be made more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed without going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode.
In this case, even if the reach effect is executed without going through the reach-inducing effect, the display of the reach line image makes it easier for the player to recognize that a reach has been achieved.
The first presentation mode may be any one of the first to fourth stages, and the second presentation mode may be any one of the first to fourth stages, provided that the second presentation mode is different from the first presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a reach line image is more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed without going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance in the first performance mode also includes the fact that a reach line image is not displayed (0%) when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode.
Furthermore, if a reach line image is more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed without going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance in the first performance mode, then there may be cases where a variable performance in which a reach line image is displayed is performed when a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance in the first performance mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a reach line image is more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed without going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode also includes the fact that a reach line image is not displayed (0%) when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after a reach prompting performance is performed in the first performance mode.
Furthermore, if a reach line image is more likely to be displayed when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed without going through a reach prompting performance is performed in the second performance mode than when a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance in the first performance mode, then a variable performance in which a reach line image is displayed may be performed when a reach performance is executed after going through a reach prompting performance in the first performance mode.

(Variations of the pattern change effects)
In the present embodiment, the pattern change effect is described as a change in the display size of the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness (see Fig. 104 (31), Fig. 105 (33), etc.). Here, the pattern change effect is not limited to a change in the display size of the decorative pattern 41.
Figure 270 shows a modified example of the pattern change effect.
First, as shown in Fig. 270(1), in the variable presentation, the SP reach presentation starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. Also, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41, "4", is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (2), an effect is executed in which the "4" decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye changes to a "3." At this time, the "3" decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye performs a symbol change action, which is the action taken when the symbol changes. When the symbol change action is being executed, the decorative symbols 41 of the reach-eye are each displayed as if they are swaying from side to side. At this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 of the reach-eye. At this time, a symbol change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the number of the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye has changed.
In this way, the pattern change effect may be an effect in which the characters of the decorative pattern 41 change.

270(1), the display color of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41 changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 270(3). At this time, a change effect image 533 is displayed around each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41, and a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the pattern change effect may be an effect in which the display color of the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye changes.
270(3) shows an example in which the display color of the entire decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye symbol changes, but is not limited to this. The symbol change effect may be an effect in which the display color of at least a part of the decorative symbol 41 of the reach-eye symbol changes.

270(1), as shown in FIG. 270(4), a symbol effect image 587 is displayed surrounding each of the reach-eye decorative symbols 41. At this time, a symbol change sound is output.
In this way, the symbol change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 changes. That is, the change in the decorative mode of the symbol may include a change in the display color of the symbol or the addition of a new decorative image to the symbol.

(Variation of SP reach effect in the second stage)
Next, a description will be given of a modified example of the SP reach effect executed in the second stage. Below, a description will be given of a modified example of the SP reach effect in the variation effect example 28 described with reference to Figs. 165 to 167.
First, as shown in FIG. 271(1), the SP reach effect starts and an SP reach image 517 is displayed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 271 (2), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode (see Fig. 76-3 (17)), and performs the eighth varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative pattern 41 is varying. When the eighth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed moving from the lower right corner to the upper left corner of the image display unit 114 along the eighth varying path (see Fig. 77-1 (8)).
Next, as shown in Figure 271 (3), the middle row decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the second mode of the 12th visual mode and performs the 8th variable operation.
271(4), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP promotion second effect images 519 are displayed on the upper right and lower left sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114.

271(5), the middle row decorative symbol 41, "4," is displayed in the fourth mode of the twelfth visual mode. In the illustrated example, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a manner that returns to the bottom right corner of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), the "4" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 passes, and the "3" which is the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, and the first temporary stopping operation is performed. At this time, the 24th stop sound, which is the sound effect when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops, is output. Furthermore, when the 24th stop sound is output, the variable BGM is no longer output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 166 (14) to (16) and Figure 167 (17) are performed.

In this way, in the second stage, SP reach effects and variable paths that are not used in the first or third stage may be used.
271 is not limited to the SP reach effect. The effect shown in FIG. 271 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the second stage.

271 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the second or third stage, but are used only in the first stage. In this case, the effect shown in FIG. 271 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the first stage.
271 may be an SP reach effect and a variable path that are not used in the first or second stage, but are used only in the third stage. In this case, the effect shown in FIG. 271 may be performed as the SPSP reach effect in the third stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in normal game mode, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed without a pseudo consecutive promotion performance being executed (see Figure 114 (9) etc.), but this is not limited to this.
When a pseudo consecutive effect is executed in a normal game state, a pseudo consecutive inciting effect may be always executed.

(Example of variation 66)
Next, referring to Fig. 272, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 66) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. Variable effect example 66 is a variable effect example based on a game ball winning in the second start opening 122 in a special time-saving game state. Also, variable effect example 66 is a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the second start opening 122 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 272 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.
In addition, each of the change presentation examples from change presentation example 66 to change presentation example 81 described below is a change presentation example when the change begins in the fourth stage.

As shown in Figure 272 (1), when the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the presentation control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. This decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, and is less decorative than the highly decorative decorative symbols 41 in the first to third stages (see Figure 78 (1), etc.). At this time, one reserved image 52, reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, and stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In addition, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode). The fourth stage is a presentation mode in the special time-saving game state. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning at the first starting port 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning at the second starting port 122. Also, the three columns of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 272 (2), the variable effect begins as the display of the special symbol begins. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second viewing mode, and a thirteenth start action, which is the action taken when the variable effect begins, is performed. When the thirteenth start action is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an action such that they move upward while swaying left and right. At this time, a thirteenth start effect image 588 is displayed above each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. In the second stage, variable background music continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable effect, but this variable background music is a different song from any of the variable background music in the first to third stages.

Next, as shown in Figure 272 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 272 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
272(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 272 (6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and an eleventh stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops, is performed. When the eleventh stop action is performed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed as if vibrating up and down. At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a twenty-fifth stop sound, which is the sound effect when the decorative symbols 41 stop, is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 272 (7).
As described above, in the variable presentation in which the reach presentation is not executed in the fourth stage, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed due to the seventh visual mode.

(Example of variation 67)
Figure 273 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 273. Variable effect example 67 is a variable effect example of the decorative pattern 41 based on a game ball winning in the second start hole 122 in a special time-saving game state. Also, variable effect example 67 is a variable effect in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the second start hole 122 being "4".
273 is a variation effect that is executed when "EH3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Fig. 273(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 in the image display unit 114. In addition, four reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "4."
Next, as shown in FIG. 273(2), the special symbol begins to change, and the effect begins. At this time, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and the thirteenth start action is performed. At this time, the thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 273 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 273 (4), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
273(5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 273(6), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is also output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 273 (7).

(Variation example 68)
Figure 274 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 68) will be described with reference to Fig. 274. Variable effect example 68 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable effect shown in Figure 274 is the variable effect that is executed when "EH4" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same effect as shown in Figures 272 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 274 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
274(2), the reach-inducing effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 274 (3), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in Figure 274 (4), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third aspect of the ninth visual aspect and perform the first varying action. At this time, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual aspect and performs the first temporary stopping action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 274 (5), the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop operation. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the right-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is also output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 274 (6).

(Example of variation 69)
275 to 277 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 69) will be described with reference to Figures 275 to 277. Variable effect example 69 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the SP reach effect is executed.
The variable effects shown in Figures 275 to 277 are variable effects that are executed when "EH5" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 61.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

First, as shown in FIG. 275(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue. The blue display mode of this reserved image 52 may be the display mode at the start of display, or may be due to a change in the display mode during the variation effect executed while this reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (2), as the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode, and a fourteenth start operation, which is the operation performed when the change begins, is performed. When the fourteenth start operation is being performed, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in an expanding manner while swaying up and down and left and right. At this time, a fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51, and the changing image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a fourth start sound, which is the sound effect indicating the start of the change, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 275 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275 (4), the role effect is executed, and the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, an 11th role object sound, which is a sound effect of the role effect, is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

275(5), the reach-inducing effect is started, and the left and right decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 275(6), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Figure 275 (7), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops, is performed. When the twelfth stop action is being performed, the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed so that they vibrate and expand. The twelfth stop action can also be considered a fourteenth reach action, which is the action of the decorative symbols 41 when a reach is achieved (when the reach effect begins). At this time, a sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows. At this time, a seventh reach sound, which is the sound effect indicating that a reach has been achieved, is output. The seventh reach sound can also be considered a twenty-sixth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicated when the decorative symbols 41 have stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 275(8), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in a shrinking motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (9), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in such a manner that it shrinks and moves toward the upper left and upper right corners of the image display unit 114. That is, the operational mode (movement mode) of the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 when displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode is different between the normal gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state. Also, at this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden (hard to see or impossible to see). Also, at this time, a transition image 516 is displayed. The display mode of this transition image 516 is different from that of the transition image 516 in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 94 (4)).
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (10), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 276 (11), the SP reach effect starts, and an SP reach image 517 is displayed. This SP reach image 517 has a different display mode from the SP reach image 517 in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 94 (6)).
Next, as shown in Fig. 276 (12), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the twelfth visual mode, and performs a ninth varying operation, which is the operation when the middle row decorative symbol 41 is varying. When the ninth varying operation is being performed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operating manner so as to move to the right as it moves downward on the image display unit 114 along the ninth varying path (see Fig. 77-2 (9)).

Next, as shown in Figure 276 (13), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP third effect images 595 are displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in FIG. 276 (14), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!". At this time, a fifth button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. At this time, the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light. The effective operation period for this button operation effect is the fourth period. The fourth period is, for example, four seconds.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect, the "5" of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 276 (15). At this time, the 27th stop sound, which is the sound effect when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops, is output. Note that the variable BGM continues to be output even after the 27th stop sound is output.
Furthermore, even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 276 (14), the same effect as that shown in Fig. 276 (15) may be performed. In other words, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect shown in Fig. 276 (14).

Next, as shown in Fig. 276 (16), a switching image 520 is displayed. This switching image 520 has a different display mode from the switching image 520 in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 95 (14)). Furthermore, no sound effect is output in conjunction with the display of the switching image 520, and the output of the variable background music continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 277 (17), the decorative symbol 41 of the missing number is displayed in the seventh visual mode at the display size when the variable effect started (see Fig. 275 (1)), and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the variable BGM continues to be output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 277 (18), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "454," are fixed and stopped as the special symbols stop changing. Note that the output of the changing BGM continues at the end of the changing performance and after the changing performance ends.

In the variable performance example 69, it has been explained that the variable BGM continues to be output from the start to the end of the variable performance, but this is not limited to this.
When the switching image 520 is displayed (see FIG. 276 (16)), the variable BGM may not be output. Then, when the stage image 61 is displayed again (see FIG. 277 (17)), the variable BGM may be output again.

(Example of variation 70)
Figure 278 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 70) will be described with reference to Fig. 278. Variable effect example 12 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach effect is not executed.
The variable performance shown in Fig. 278 is a variable performance that is executed when "AF1" is selected as the "pre-determined performance pattern" in Fig. 58 and "EH2" is selected as the "variable performance pattern" in Fig. 61. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 278(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. Also, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278(2), as the next special symbol begins to change, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual recognition mode, and a fourteenth start operation is performed. At this time, fourteenth start effect images 592 are displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a fourth start sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 278 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (4), the role effect is executed, and the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.
Next, as shown in Fig. 278 (5), the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. At this time, a fifth change sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue. That is, when the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes to blue in the special time-saving gaming state, a sound effect different from the sound effect indicating that the display mode of the reserved image 52 has changed to blue in the normal gaming state (see Fig. 112 (6)) is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 278(6), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a fourth chance eye effect image 596 is displayed surrounding the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a 28th stop sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the three rows of decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 278 (7), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
In the variation effect example 70, the 14th start action, the 14th start effect image 592, the 4th start sound, the role effect, and the chance eye effect are all examples of the pre-determination effect. Furthermore, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the variation effect following the variation effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

(Example of variation 71)
279 to 282 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable presentation (variable presentation example 71) will be described with reference to Figures 279 to 282. Variable presentation example 71 is a variable presentation based on winning at the second starting slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, variable presentation example 71 is an example of a variable presentation executed after the variable presentation shown in variable presentation example 70. In other words, variable presentation example 71 is an example of a variable presentation that shows the result of the special symbol lottery suggested by the blue reserved image 52 (see Figure 278 (5)) shown in variable presentation example 70.
279 to 282 are the variation effects that are executed when "EF1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 279 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "331" on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a fourteenth start operation is performed. At this time, a fourteenth start effect image 592 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. In addition, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a fourth start sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 279 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and the first variable action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 279 (4), the role effect is executed, and the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object 12 effect image 593 is displayed around the center movable role object 1152 and the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
279(5), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, a sixth variable sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 is changing, is output.

279(6), the reach-inducing effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 279 (7), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 279 (8), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, a sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280(9), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in a shrinking motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (10), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational manner so as to shrink and move toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden (hard to see or impossible to see). At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (11), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach pattern is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (12), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 280 (13), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the 9th variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 280 (14), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP third effect images 595 are displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (15), the final button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!". At this time, a sixth button sound, which is a sound effect for the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period for this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the deciding button operation effect, the decorative symbol 41 is hidden and a success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 280 (16). This success image 538 has a different display mode from the success image 538 displayed in the normal game mode (see FIG. 118 (44)). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is initiated and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, at this time, a second success sound, which is a sound effect indicating that the success image 538 is displayed, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (17), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and a second jackpot notification sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (18), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (19), the reel performance ends, and the three movable reels 115 move back to their initial positions. Also, the 20th rainbow image 627 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable part 1152), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (20), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is also displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is also continued.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 281 (21), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (22), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stop. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the twenty-second rainbow image 628 is also displayed. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the doublet decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (23), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Then, when the jackpot game starts, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state) to the normal game state, and the third right-hit image 629 is displayed, as shown in Figure 281 (24).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 282 (25), the winning notification image 630 is enlarged. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable device 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 282 (26), the winning notification image 630 is displayed in a reduced size and the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, the 24th rainbow image 632 is enlarged and displayed as shown in Figure 282 (27). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 282 (28), the 24th rainbow image 632 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up blue, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, the third right-hit image 629 is displayed again, as shown in Figure 282 (29). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 282 (30), a second right-hit image 543, a round number image 544, and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1." In addition, a type notification image 633 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 282 (31). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving continues!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up orange, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (32), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444," are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode), which is the presentation mode in the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). At this time, the variable presentation is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Figures 283 and 284 are charts showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 71.
Figures 283 and 284 show the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in the variable performance example 71.

First, as shown in FIG. 283, at time T1, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) through the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is illuminated in red.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 280 (15) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), and the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) are turned off. The third lamp (center movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are lit in white. In addition, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as from time T1.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
280(16) begins at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the 12th lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T2. The 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.
Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (17) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of one second. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of one second. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.4 seconds. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light emission pattern at 0.8 second intervals, and the light guide plate 118 continues the light emission pattern from time T3.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.
281(18) begins at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 will continue for three seconds.

Next, at time T5, the 19th rainbow image 597 disappears and the 20th rainbow image 627 appears. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are extinguished. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals, and the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emitting mode at 1 second intervals.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (19) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the 20th rainbow image 627 disappears, and the 21st rainbow image 598 appears. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeatedly emit a first rainbow light in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) illuminate white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeatedly emits a second rainbow light in a two-second cycle. The light guide plate 118 is also turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
281(20) begins at time T6. The effect indicated to be executed at time T6 will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T7, the doublet decorative pattern 41 begins to expand. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light as it did at time T6.
The time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (21) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T7 continues for one second.

Next, at time T8, the 22nd rainbow image 628 is displayed, and the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the light guide plate 118 continues the light emitting mode from time T8.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
281(22) begins at time T8. The effect shown to be executed at time T8 will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T9, decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, 21st rainbow image 598 and 22nd rainbow image 628 are not displayed.
Time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (23) begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 284, at time T10, the third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) repeat the seventh rainbow light-emitting pattern at 1.6-second intervals. Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue their light-emitting patterns from time T8 (see FIG. 283). Furthermore, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (24) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10 will continue for 9 seconds.

Next, at time T11, the winning notification image 630 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T10.
Time T11 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (25) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T12, the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T11.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
282(26) begins at time T12. The effect shown to be executed at time T12 continues for one second.

Next, at time T13, the 24th rainbow image 632 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T12.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
282(27) begins at time T13. The effect indicated to be executed at time T13 continues for one second.

Next, at time T14, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up blue. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T13.
Time T14 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (28) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T14 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T15, the 24th rainbow image 632 disappears, and the 3rd right-hit image 629 is displayed again. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 7th lamp (left board lamp 1162), the 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the 10th lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the 12th lamp (lower board lamp 1164) repeat the 7th rainbow light-emitting mode at 1.6-second intervals. In addition, the 2nd lamp (left movable role 1151) through the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T14.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
282 (29) starts at time T15. The effect shown to be executed at time T15 will continue for 9 seconds.

Next, at time T16, a jackpot game round begins, and the round number image 544 and the round in progress image 545 are displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. Furthermore, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner that they did at time T15.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role 1151), fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Time T16 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (30) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T16 will continue for 30 seconds.

Next, at time T17, the time-saving start image 546 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in orange. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) are turned off.
Time T17 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (31) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T17 will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T18, a stage image 61 corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated yellow. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T17. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) is illuminated white.
Time T18 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (32) begins.

As described above, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include the first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see Figure 79 (15))) and the second specific sound (for example, the eighth stop sound (see Figure 119 (51)), the 29th stop sound (see Figure 281 (22)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double numbers).
In this embodiment, the reach effect is more likely to be executed (the reach effect is more likely to be successful) when the reach effect is executed in the normal gaming state than when the reach effect is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, a jackpot is more likely to be won when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the special time-saving gaming state than when the reach effect is successful (the reach effect is executed) in the normal gaming state. In other words, in this embodiment, the second specific sound is more likely to be output when a variable effect (variable effect example 71 (see FIGS. 279 to 282), etc.) in which a reach effect is executed after a second provocation effect (a reach effect in the special time-saving gaming state) is executed than when a variable effect (variable effect example 9 (see FIG. 100), etc.) in which a reach effect is executed after a first provocation effect (a reach effect in the normal gaming state) is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the reach presentation is executed after the second teasing presentation, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41 which notifies that a special game will be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when a variable effect in which a reach effect is executed after the second hype effect is performed than when a variable effect in which a reach effect is executed after the first hype effect is performed includes the fact that the second specific sound will always be output (100%) when a variable effect in which a reach effect is executed after the second hype effect is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific sounds (stop sounds) different from the predetermined sounds (variable BGM) include a first specific sound (for example, the first stop sound (see Figure 79 (15))) and a second specific sound (for example, the eighth stop sound (see Figure 119 (51)), the 29th stop sound (see Figure 281 (22)), etc.) that is output when the decorative pattern 41 stops in a specific sequence (double numbers).
In this embodiment, there is a first provocation effect (such as variable effect example 9 (see Figure 100)) in which a reach effect is executed after initiating the execution of a reach effect in a normal gaming state, and a second provocation effect (such as variable effect example 71 (see Figures 279 to 282)) in which a reach effect is executed after initiating the execution of a reach effect in a special time-saving gaming state. In one variable effect, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second provocation effect is executed than when the first provocation effect is executed.
In this case, in the variable presentation in which the second teasing presentation is executed, combined with the second specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the stopping of the decorative pattern 41 which notifies that a special game will be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in one variable performance, the fact that the second specific sound is more likely to be output when the second hype performance is executed than when the first hype performance is executed includes the fact that the second specific sound is never output when the first hype performance is executed (0%), and the fact that the second specific sound is always output when the second hype performance is executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variable performance, the output of the second specific sound is more likely to be executed when the second hype performance is executed than when the first hype performance is executed, the output of the second specific sound may be executed when the first hype performance is executed, or the output of the second specific sound may not be executed when the second hype performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific effect (such as a reach effect or an effect announcing a jackpot) is executed in the first to third stages, it is possible to vary the effect mode (such as outputting different sound effects or displaying different effect images) between the first to third stages and the fourth stage. This makes it possible to increase the excitement of the game through effects unique to the fourth stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the operational state of the decorative symbols 41 in the reach presentation when they are temporarily stopped (see Figures 117 (37) and 280 (12)) the same in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the state of the decorative symbols 41 in the reach presentation, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the losing variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed includes a first variable performance in which the start sound is not output (see, for example, FIG. 273(2)), and a second variable performance in which the start sound is output (see, for example, FIG. 278(2)). When a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it is easier to win the jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variable performance example 71 is easier to execute).
Note that when a hold for the second starting port 122 is stored, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 71 is more likely to be executed), which also includes the fact that when the first variable performance is executed, there is no guarantee that there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (0%) (variation performance example 71 is not necessarily executed). Also, when a hold for the second starting port 122 is stored, if it is made easier to win a jackpot in the next variable performance when the second variable performance is executed than when the first variable performance is executed (variation performance example 71 is more likely to be executed), it is possible that when the first variable performance is executed, there will be a jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 71 may be executed), and it is not necessary that when the second variable performance is executed, there will be no jackpot in the next variable performance (variation performance example 71 may not be executed).

Furthermore, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, it may be possible to make it easier for an SP reach effect to be executed in the next variable effect (variable effect example 69 to be executed) when the second variable effect in which a start sound is output is executed than when the first variable effect in which a start sound is not output is executed.
Note that when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, the fact that an SP reach effect is more likely to be executed in the next variable effect when the second variable effect is executed than when the first variable effect is executed (variation effect example 69 is more likely to be executed) also includes the fact that when the first variable effect is executed, an SP reach effect is not necessarily executed (0%) in the next variable effect (variation effect example 69 is not necessarily executed). Also, when a hold is stored for the second starting port 122, if an SP reach effect is more likely to be executed in the next variable effect when the second variable effect is executed than when the first variable effect is executed (variation effect example 69 is more likely to be executed), an SP reach effect may be executed in the next variable effect when the first variable effect is executed (variation effect example 69 may be executed), and an SP reach effect may not be executed in the next variable effect when the second variable effect is executed (variation effect example 69 may not be executed).

(Variation example 72)
Figure 285 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 72) will be described with reference to Fig. 285. Variable effect example 72 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
285 is a variation effect that is executed when "EF2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278 (1) to (7) and Figures 279 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 285 (1), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red. At this time, the sixth variable sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 285 (2), the 25th rainbow image 634 is displayed. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 7th lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the 10th lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the 12th lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the 6th rainbow light-emitting mode, the 2nd lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the 5th lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 279 (6) to (8), 280 (9) to (16), 281 (17) to (24), and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

285(2) is being executed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8 second intervals. Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) to execute the rainbow light-emitting performance of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode.
285(2) for 0.5 seconds, the lamp switches to a non-rainbow light emission mode different from the rainbow light emission mode. 25th rainbow image 634 is displayed for 2 seconds, and then disappears.

(Variation example 73)
286 to 288 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 73) will be described with reference to Figures 286 to 288. Variable effect example 73 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
286 to 288 are the variation effects that are executed when "EF3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278(1) to (7) and 279(1) to (4) are performed, and then the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red as shown in Figure 286(1). At this time, the sixth variable sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 286 (2), the 26th rainbow image 635 is displayed. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 7th lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the 10th lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the 12th lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the 2nd lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the 5th lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 286 (3), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up purple, while the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 286 (2).

286(4), the reach-inducing effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 286 (5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 286 (6), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, a sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 286(7), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in a shrinking motion.
Next, as shown in Fig. 286 (8), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational manner so as to shrink and move toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display unit 114. At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed, and the middle row decorative symbol 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or impossible to see).
Next, as shown in FIG. 287(9), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (10), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 287 (11), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the 9th variable operation is performed.

287(12), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is enlarged and displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP third effect images 595 are displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up in yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 287 (13), a winning/losing effect is performed. In this case, the middle row decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, and the 27th rainbow image 636 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) through the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 287 (12), and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 287 (14), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size, and the 27th rainbow image 636 is hidden. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, while the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode shown in Figure 287 (13).

Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (15), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed. Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, at this time, a second success sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 287 (16), the role effect is executed, and the left movable role element 1151, the center movable role element 1152, and the right movable role element 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect continues, and the second jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 288 (17), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 288 (18), the reel performance ends, and the three movable reels 115 move back to their initial positions. Also, the 20th rainbow image 627 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable part 1152), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the second mode of the second rainbow light emission mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (19), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the 21st rainbow image 598 is also displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is also continued.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 288 (20), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 288 (21), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the twenty-eighth rainbow image 637 is displayed. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the eighth rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 73), and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the eighth mode of the rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 73). The second rainbow light-emitting mode becomes the fourth mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 281 (23), (24) and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

Figure 289 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 73.
Figure 289 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in the variable performance example 73.

First, at time T1, the 26th rainbow image 635 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeatedly emit the first rainbow light at one-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
286(2) starts at time T1. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 continues for one second.

Next, at time T2, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up purple. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T1.
The effect shown in Figure 286(3) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 will continue for 6 seconds.

Then, at time T3, the third SP effect image 595 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated in white. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are illuminated in yellow. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.
Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 287 (12) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the 27th rainbow image 636 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) through the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T3. The seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are illuminated in white.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 287 (13) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the 27th rainbow image 636 disappears. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. Also, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T4.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the sixth rainbow light emission mode.
287(14) begins at time T5. The effect indicated to be executed at time T5 continues for two seconds.

Next, at time T6, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off. The third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. In addition, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
287(15)。 Also, time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 287 (15) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T6 continues for one second.

Next, at time T7, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the 12th lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T6. The 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.
Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 288 (16) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T7 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T8, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of one second. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of one second. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.8 seconds. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at a cycle of 0.4 seconds. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the third rainbow light emission pattern at 0.8 second intervals. The light guide plate 118 continues the light emission pattern from time T7.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to execute a rainbow light-emitting performance of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.
288(17) begins at time T8. The effect shown to be executed at time T8 will continue for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T9, the 19th rainbow image 597 disappears and the 20th rainbow image 627 appears. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are extinguished. The fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeats the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continues the light-emitting mode from time T8. Furthermore, the light guide plate 118 repeats the second rainbow light emission mode every second.
Time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 288 (18) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T9 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T10, the 20th rainbow image 627 disappears and the 21st rainbow image 598 appears. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeatedly emit a first rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) illuminate white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeatedly emits a second rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T10 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 288 (19) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T10 continues for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T11, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T10.
Time T11 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 288 (20) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11 continues for one second.

Next, at time T12, the 28th rainbow image 637 is displayed, and the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the eighth rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable device 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable device 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The third lamp (center movable device 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern every two seconds. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the light guide plate 118 continues the light emitting mode from time T11.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the eighth rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
288(21) begins at time T12. The effect shown to be executed at time T12 will continue for 6 seconds.
Next, at time T13, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable performance ends.

(Variation example 74)
Figure 290 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 74) will be described with reference to Fig. 290. Variable effect example 74 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
290 is a variation effect that is executed when "EF4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278 (1) to (7), 279 (1) to (8), 280 (9) and (10) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 290 (1), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the second mode of the 11th visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

290(2), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the 29th rainbow image 638 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 280 (13) to (16), 281 (17) to (24), and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

290(2) is being executed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at one-second intervals. Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light-emitting patterns of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light-emitting performance of the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern.
290(2) continues for three seconds, the lamp then switches to a non-rainbow light emission mode different from the rainbow light emission mode. Also, the twenty-ninth rainbow image 638 is displayed for three seconds, and then disappears.

(Example of variation 75)
FIG. 291 is a diagram showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 75) will be described with reference to Fig. 291. Variable effect example 75 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
291 is a variation effect that is executed when "EF5" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278(1) to (7), 279(1) to (8), and 280(9) to (14) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 291(1), the final button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!". At this time, a sixth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the effective operation period of the decide button operation effect, the "5" of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the twelfth visual mode, as shown in FIG. 291 (2). At this time, the 27th stop sound is output. Note that the variable BGM continues to be output even after the 27th stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are lit in blue.

Note that even if the effect button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 291(1), the same effect as that shown in FIG. 291(2) may be performed. In other words, a common effect may be executed whether or not the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect shown in FIG. 291(1).

Next, as shown in Fig. 291(3), a switching image 520 is displayed. At this time, the output of the variable background music continues. Also, the lamp continues to emit light in the manner shown in Fig. 291(2).
Next, as shown in Fig. 291(4), the stage image 61 is displayed again, and the decorative symbol 41 of the missing combination is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the output of the variable background music continues. The lamp continues to emit light in the mode shown in Fig. 291(2).
Next, as shown in FIG. 291(5), a revival image 558 is displayed. This revival image 558 has a different display mode from the revival image 558 displayed in the normal game mode (see FIG. 142(6)). At this time, a vibration effect is initiated and a second revival sound is output. The lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 291(2).

Next, as shown in Figure 291 (6), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable role element 1152), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153) are lit in orange, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) remain extinguished.

Next, as shown in FIG. 291 (7), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first aspect of the first rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 281 (23), (24) and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

Although not shown, when the effect shown in FIG. 291 (7) is being executed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable device 1151), fourth lamp (right movable device 1153), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable device 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
291(7) continues for 3 seconds. After that, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends.

(Variation example 76)
292 to 294 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 76) will be described with reference to Figures 292 to 294. Variable effect example 76 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
292 to 294 are the variation effects that are executed when "EF8" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278(1) to (7) and Figures 279(1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 292(1), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to rainbow colors. In this embodiment, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 in the time-saving game state is a square. At this time, a seventh variable sound is output, which is a sound effect indicating that the display mode of the variable image 51 is changing.
In this way, the display mode of the rainbow-colored variable image 51 (reserved image 52) in the time-saving game state is different from the display mode of the rainbow-colored variable image 51 (reserved image 52) in the normal game state (see Figure 129 (2)).

292(2), the reach-inducing effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4," are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach-inducing seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (3), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (4), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, a sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in Figure 292 (5), the decorative symbols 41 of the reach eyes are displayed in a shrinking motion. At this time, the middle row decorative symbols 41 are hidden (hard to see or impossible to see).
Next, as shown in Fig. 292 (6), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational manner so as to shrink and move toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display section 114. At this time, a transition image 516 is also displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 292 (7), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop motion is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 292 (8), the SP reach effect starts, an SP reach image 517 is displayed, and the final button operation effect starts, with a button operation image 502 being displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Press it!". At this time, a sixth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in blue.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the decide button operation effect, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, as shown in Fig. 293 (9). At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is displayed and the vibration effect is started.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 293 (10), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues, and the twenty-ninth stop sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, the promotion prompting effect is started. In the promotion prompting effect, as shown in FIG. 293 (11), the button operation effect is started and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the seventh button sound, which is the sound effect of the button operation effect, is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the third period. Also, at this time, the vibration effect has ended.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the button operation effect, an upgrade effect is executed, as shown in Figure 293 (12), and the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect is started again. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light in the mode shown in Figure 293 (11).

Next, as shown in FIG. 293 (13), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. At this time, the thirtieth stop sound, which is the sound effect indicating that the doublet decorative symbols 41 have stopped, is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 293 (14), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbol 56 "777" are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Then, when the jackpot game starts, the pachinko game machine 100 is controlled from the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state) to the normal game state, and the third right-hit image 629 is displayed, as shown in Figure 293 (15). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 293 (16), the winning notification image 630 is enlarged. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable device 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (center movable device 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 294 (17), the winning notification image 630 is displayed in a reduced size and the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, the 30th rainbow image 639 is enlarged and displayed as shown in Figure 294 (18). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the third rainbow light emission mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light emission mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, the 30th rainbow image 639 is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in Figure 294 (19). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light emission aspect, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light emission aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light emission aspect, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 294 (20), a second right-hit image 543, a round number image 544, and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1." In addition, a type notification image 633 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the type notification image 633 displays the text "B Bonus." In addition, at this time, a 31st rainbow image 640 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Furthermore, after this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 282 (30) and (31) are performed, except that the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 "777" are fixed and stopped when the display of the stage image 61 of the fourth stage begins.

Figures 295 and 296 are charts showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 76.
Figures 295 and 296 show the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in the variable performance example 76.

First, at time T1, a rainbow-colored variable image 51 is displayed as shown in Fig. 295. Although not shown, at this time, the lamp is in a predetermined light emission mode different from the rainbow light emission mode.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 292 (1) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 35 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are lit in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. In addition, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in blue.
The effect shown in Figure 292 (8) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 will continue for three seconds.

Next, at time T3, the 21st rainbow image 598 is displayed, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable role piece 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable role piece 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role piece 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The light guide plate 118 continues the light-emitting mode from time T2.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
293(9) begins at time T3. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for two seconds.

Next, at time T4, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T3. The third lamp (center movable part 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light emitting mode every 2 seconds.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
293(10) begins at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 will continue for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T5, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T4.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 293 (11) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T5.
The time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 293 (12) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T6 continues for one second.

Next, at time T7, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the light guide plate 118 continues the light emitting mode from time T6.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
293(13) begins at time T7. The effect indicated to be executed at time T7 will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T8, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the 21st rainbow image 598 is no longer displayed.
Time T8 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 293 (14) begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 296, at time T9, the third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) repeat the seventh rainbow light-emitting pattern at 1.6-second intervals. Furthermore, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) continue their light-emitting patterns from time T7. Furthermore, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
The time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 293 (15) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T9 will continue for 9 seconds.

Next, at time T10, the winning notification image 630 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T9.
Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 293 (16) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T11, the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T10.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
294(17)。 Also, time T11 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 294 (17) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11 continues for one second.

Next, at time T12, the 30th rainbow image 639 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T11.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
294(18) begins at time T12. The effect shown to be executed at time T12 continues for one second.

Next, at time T13, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals. Also, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T12.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the sixth rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152) with the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).
Time T13 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 294 (19) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T13 will continue for 4 seconds.

Next, at time T14, a jackpot game round begins, and the round number image 544 and the round in progress image 545 are displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are illuminated in white. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. The third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at 2.3-second intervals. Furthermore, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T13.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role 1151), fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
The time T14 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 294 (20) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T14 will continue for 60 seconds.

Next, at time T17, the time-saving start image 546 is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the eighth stop sound is output when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" stops in the first stage (see FIG. 119 (51)), and the twenty-ninth stop sound is output when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" stops in the fourth stage (see FIG. 293 (10)). In other words, the performance control unit 300 can output the first specific sound when a plurality of performance patterns including specific character information (e.g., the numbers 4 and 7) are stopped and displayed in a specific sequence in the variable performance in the first performance mode, and can output the second specific sound when a plurality of performance patterns including specific character information are stopped and displayed in a specific sequence in the variable performance in the second performance mode.
In this case, even when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 containing common character information is stopped and displayed, the way in which the player is made to recognize the effect in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is stopped and displayed can be diversified depending on the performance mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Example of variation 77)
297 and 298 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 77) will be described with reference to Figures 297 and 298. Variable effect example 77 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
297 and 298 are the variation effects that are executed when "EF6" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in Fig. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation effect examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation effect examples may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 278 (1) to (7) and Figures 279 (1) to (4) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 297 (1), the display mode of the variable image 51 changes from blue to red and the sixth variable sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 297(2), the button operation presentation starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "??".

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a blackout image 641 is displayed and the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 297 (3).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 297 (4), the blackout image 641 disappears and the 32nd rainbow image 642 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (5), the 32nd rainbow image 642 is reduced in size, thereby displaying the entire 32nd rainbow image 642. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), 7th lamp (left panel lamp 1162), 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), 10th lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through 12th lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the 2nd lamp (left movable part 1151) through 5th lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 297 (6), the deciding button operation effect starts, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "One Strike."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the first rainbow light-emitting state, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period of the deciding button operation effect, as shown in FIG. 297 (7), the accessory effect is executed, and the left movable accessory 1151, the center movable accessory 1152, and the right movable accessory 1153 each move to a position where they overlap with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is started, and the second jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the third rainbow light-emitting state, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) lights up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 297(8), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all turned off, and the light guide plate 118 is lit in white.
Next, as shown in Figure 298 (9), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth mode of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are turned off, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 298 (10), the 19th rainbow image 597 is hidden. At this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all turned off.
Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (11), the role presentation ends, and the three movable role objects 115 move back to their initial positions. Also, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is displayed. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (12), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the thirty-third rainbow image 643 is also displayed. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 298 (13), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 281 (24) and Figure 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

In variable presentation example 77, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed as a stopped symbol, but this is not limited to this. In variable presentation example 77, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" may also be displayed as a stopped symbol. In this case, at the timing when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops (the timing shown in Figure 298 (12)), a unique sound effect (stop sound) different from the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 in any of the variable presentation examples described above may be output.

Figure 299 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 77.
Figure 299 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in variable performance example 77.

First, at time T1, a button operation image 502 is displayed. Although not shown, at this time, the lamp is in a predetermined light emission mode different from the rainbow light emission mode.
The time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 297 (2) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 continues for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T2, a blackout image 641 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. In addition, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) are lit in white.
The effect shown in Figure 297(3) starts at time T2. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for two seconds.

Next, at time T3, the 32nd rainbow image 642 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.9-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T2.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute a rainbow light emission performance with a tenth rainbow light emission mode.
297(4) starts at time T3. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for four seconds.

Next, at time T4, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals. Also, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T3.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
297(5) begins at time T4. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T5, the 32nd rainbow image 642 disappears, and the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T4.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
297(6) starts at time T5. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 will continue for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T6, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) are turned off. The third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T5.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
297(7) starts at time T6. The effect shown to be executed at time T6 will last for 0.4 seconds.

Next, at time T7, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the light guide plate 118 is lit in white.
The effect shown in Figure 297 (8) starts at time T7. The effect shown to be executed at time T7 will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T8, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode at 1-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), and fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) continue the light-emitting mode from time T7. The third lamp (center movable accessory 1152) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.8-second intervals. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The light guide plate 118 also lights up in white.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute the rainbow light emission mode of the fourth rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to execute the rainbow light emission mode of the third rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573).
The effect shown in Figure 298(9) starts at time T8. The effect shown to be executed at time T8 will continue for three seconds.

Next, at time T9, the 19th rainbow image 597 is hidden. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are all turned off.
Time T9 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 298 (10) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T9 continues for one second.

Next, at time T10, the 21st rainbow image 598 disappears, and the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T9.
Time T10 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 298 (11) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10 continues for one second.

Next, at time T11, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the light guide plate 118 continue the light-emitting mode from time T10. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and executes the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
298(12) begins at time T11. The effect shown to be executed at time T11 will continue for 5 seconds.

Next, at time T12, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the 21st rainbow image 598 is no longer displayed.
Time T12 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 298 (13) begins.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 76)
Next, a modified example of the variation presentation example 76 will be explained.
Figure 300 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 76.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 292 (1) to (8), Figures 293 (9) and (10), Figures 281 (23) and (24), and Figures 282 (25) to (29) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 300 (1), a second right-hit image 543, a round number image 544, and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1." In addition, a type notification image 633 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the type notification image 633 displays the text "A Bonus."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 300 (2), the button operation effect begins during the jackpot game, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

When effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a round promotion effect is performed, and as shown in FIG. 300(3), round number image 544, in-round image 545, and type notification image 633 are hidden, and a 34th rainbow image 644 is displayed. The round promotion effect is an effect that notifies the player that a more advantageous jackpot game will be played during the execution of a jackpot game after notifying the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot during the execution of a variable effect.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 300(4), the 34th rainbow image 644 is hidden, and the round number image 544, the round in progress image 545, and the type notification image 633 are displayed again. The type notification image 633 displays the text "B Bonus." At this time, the 35th rainbow image 645 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Although not shown in the figures, the same effects as those shown in Figure 282 (31) and (32) are then performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display content of the type notification image 633 may change from "A Bonus" to "B Bonus." Therefore, if the type notification image 633 notifies of a jackpot game that is currently being played, it may also indicate a jackpot game that is not currently being played.

(Example of the number of winning balls)
Next, an example of notification when the number of winning balls reaches a predetermined value will be explained.
Figure 301 shows an example of an announcement made when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined value.
First, as shown in Figure 301 (1), a jackpot game is being played, and a round number image 544, a round in progress image 545, a type notification image 633, and a 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed. In the example shown, two 31st rainbow images 640 are displayed, indicating that an "A bonus" has been played twice, and two 31st rainbow images 640 are displayed, indicating that a "B bonus" has been played twice.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, during the execution of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the jackpot into the jackpot opening 125 reaches 5000. In this case, as shown in FIG. 301(2), the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In other words, the lamp continues the light emitting behavior from FIG. 301(1).

(Example of variation 78)
302 to 304 are diagrams showing one form of performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 78) will be described with reference to Figures 302 to 304. Variable effect example 78 is a variable effect based on winning the second start slot 122 in the special time-saving game state, and is an example of a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in variation presentation example 78, two variation presentations are executed. The first of the two variation presentations executed in variation presentation example 78 is a variation presentation executed when "EH9" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, the second variation presentation is a variation presentation executed when "EF7" is selected as the "variation presentation pattern" in FIG. 61. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above-mentioned variation presentation examples may be omitted.

In the variation presentation example 78, first, a jackpot variation presentation is executed in the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state), and the jackpot game is started. Next, the jackpot game round starts, and as shown in FIG. 302 (1), the second right-hit image 543, the round number image 544, the round in progress image 545, and the type notification image 633 are displayed. Also, in the variation presentation example 78, it is assumed that two reserves for the second start port 122 are stored at this time.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 302 (2), the button operation effect begins during the jackpot game, and button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light emission mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light emission mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, as shown in Figure 302 (3), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and light guide plate 118 enter the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) enter the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode. The through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) turn off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) change to the fifth pattern of the third rainbow light-emitting pattern, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect begins at this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 302 (4), the role production is executed, and the left movable role 1151, the center movable role 1152, and the right movable role 1153 each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, the 19th rainbow image 597 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 302 (5), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the sixth aspect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the ninth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the thirteenth aspect of the third rainbow light-emitting aspect.

Next, as shown in Figure 302 (6), the role production ends, and the three movable role objects 115 move back to their initial positions. Also, the 19th rainbow image 597 disappears, and the 20th rainbow image 627 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable part 1152), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) becomes the thirteenth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the seventh mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 302 (7), the 37th rainbow image 647 is displayed. At this time, the vibration effect also ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 302(8). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving continues!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in orange, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 303 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444," are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, a stage image 61 corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed. At this time, the variable effect is not being executed, but background music corresponding to the fourth stage is being output from the speaker 156. Also, two reserved images 52 are displayed, and the reserved number display 55 for the first starting slot 121 shows "0," and the reserved number display 55 for the second starting slot 122 shows "2."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) enters the first rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (10), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable action. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the second starting port 122 is updated to "1." Also, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in FIG. 303 (9).
Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (11), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and an eleventh stop action is performed. At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a twenty-fifth stop sound is output. The lamp continues to emit light in the manner shown in FIG. 303 (10).

Next, as shown in Figure 303 (12), as the special symbols stop varying, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped. Also, the lamp continues to emit light as shown in Figure 303 (11).
Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (13), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable action. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, the reserved number display 55 for the second start port 122 is updated to "0." Also, the lamp continues to emit light in the manner shown in FIG. 303 (12).

Next, as shown in Figure 303 (14), three rows of decorative symbols 41, "444," are displayed in the sixth visual mode, and an eleventh stop action is performed. At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a twenty-fifth stop sound is output. Also, although not shown, a vibration effect is initiated. The lamp continues the light-emitting mode shown in Figure 303 (13).

Next, as shown in Fig. 303 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) light up in yellow, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) enters the first rainbow light-emitting state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 303 (16), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. In addition, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. In addition, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 304 (17), along with the stop display of the special symbol, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "444", are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Figure 305 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variable presentation example 78.
Figure 305 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in the variable performance example 78.

First, at time T1, the variable effect begins. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow. The third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) are turned off. The eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) repeats the first rainbow light-emitting mode at one-second intervals.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (10) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 4 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light in the manner it has been emitting light since time T1.
Time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (12) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the variable effect starts. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light in the same manner as at time T2.
Time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (13) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T3 will continue for 4 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the doublet decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop. At this time, the lamp continues to emit light as it did at time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (14) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the 21st rainbow image 598 is displayed, and the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is enlarged. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) through the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) continue to emit light in the manner they did at time T4.
Time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (15) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for one second.

Next, at time T6, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable role piece 1152), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role piece 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role piece 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode in a two-second cycle. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the sixth rainbow light emission mode. Also, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152) with the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611). Also, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
Furthermore, time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 303 (16) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T6 continues for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T7, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, the 21st rainbow image 598 is no longer displayed.
Time T7 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 304 (17) begins.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a specific effect related to a hold (the effect shown in Figure 302 (7)) or a predetermined effect related to the number of rounds of a jackpot game (the effect shown in Figure 300 (3)) is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed than when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is not executed.
In this case, the specific effects and predetermined effects can be emphasized to the player.

(Example of variation 79)
Next, referring to Fig. 306, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 79) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. Variable effect example 79 is a variable effect example based on a game ball winning in the first start port 121 in a special time-saving game state. Also, variable effect example 79 is a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121 being "1".
The variable effect shown in Figure 306 is the variable effect that is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 62.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 306 (1), as the performance control unit 300 freezes and displays the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are frozen and fixed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the hold number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 shows "1", which is the hold number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the hold number display 55 for the second starting gate 122 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the second starting gate 122. Meanwhile, the hold image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 306 (2), the special symbol begins to change, and the display of the special symbol begins. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first change. Meanwhile, the change image 51 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 306 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 306 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in Figure 306 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop action. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is also output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 306(6).
As described above, in the variable presentation based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 may stop without being displayed due to the second viewing mode or the seventh viewing mode.

(Example of variation 80)
Next, referring to Fig. 307, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 80) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like. Variable effect example 80 is a variable effect example based on a game ball winning in the first start port 121 in a special time-saving game state. Also, variable effect example 80 is a variable effect in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed, and is a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for winning in the first start port 121 being "4".
The variable effect shown in Figure 307 is the variable effect that is executed when "EJ1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 62.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 307 (1), as the performance control unit 300 freezes and displays the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "213" are frozen and fixed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the hold number display 55 for the first starting gate 121 shows "4", which is the hold number for winning at the first starting gate 121, and the hold number display 55 for the second starting gate 122 shows "0", which is the hold number for winning at the second starting gate 122. Meanwhile, the hold image 52 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 307 (2), the variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable action. Also, the reserved number display 55 of the first start port 121 is updated to "3." Meanwhile, neither the variable image 51 nor the reserved image 52 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 307 (3), the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 307 (4), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first varying operation. The movement speed of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 at this time is faster than the movement speed of any of the decorative symbols 41 displayed in the fifth visual mode in stages 1 to 3.

Next, as shown in Fig. 307 (5), the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stop action. At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-fifth stop sound is also output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 307(6).

(Example of variation 81)
Next, referring to Fig. 308, a specific description will be given of a variable effect (variable effect example 81) performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114, etc. The variable effect example 81 is a variable effect example based on a game ball entering the first start slot 121 in a special time-saving game state. The variable effect example 81 is also a variable effect based on the result of a special symbol lottery being a jackpot.
The variable effect shown in Figure 307 is a variable effect that is executed when "EI1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in Figure 62.
In addition, in the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation.

As shown in FIG. 308(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second starting gate 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 308 (2), the display of the special symbols begins, and the display of the special symbols begins. At this time, the jackpot suggestion image 600 is displayed. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are not displayed, or are hidden by the jackpot suggestion image 600, making them difficult or impossible to see. Meanwhile, the display of the small symbols 56 begins.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

308(3), when the special symbol stops varying, the small symbol 56, "444", is fixed and stopped. On the other hand, no stopping sound (sound effect) is output when the small symbol 56 stops.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 281 (24) and Figure 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the execution of a variable effect (miss variable effect, jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the special time-saving game state, the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect (illumination of the lamp in the rainbow light-emitting mode, display of a rainbow image) is restricted.
In this case, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be encouraged to place the game ball in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first start port 121 is executed in the normal game state than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first start port 121 is executed in the time-saving game state.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the game ball should not enter the first starting hole 121 in the time-saving game state.

In addition, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is executed than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (0%) (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed (100%) (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is executed.
However, if it is easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal game state is executed than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed, then a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) even when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-saving play state is executed than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving play state is executed.
In this case, in the time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should enter the second starting hole 122 instead of the first starting hole 121.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state is executed than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-shortened play state is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-shortened play state is executed (0%), and that a rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on a winning entry into the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state is executed (100%).
However, if it is easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened play state is executed than when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened play state is executed, then a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed (during the execution of the variable effect) even when a variable effect (jackpot variable effect) based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened play state is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start port 122 rather than the first start port 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the special time-saving game state is executed also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the special time-saving game state is executed.
Furthermore, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-shortened game state is executed than when a miss variation effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the special time-shortened game state is executed, the start sound may be output when a miss variation effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the special time-shortened game state is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the output of the start sound is made more difficult when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a miss variation effect based on a win in the first start hole 121 is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should be placed in the second start hole 122 rather than the first start hole 121.
In addition, the fact that it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is executed in the normal game state also includes the fact that the start sound is not output (0%) when a miss variation effect based on a win at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state.
Furthermore, if it is more difficult to output the start sound when a miss variation effect based on winning at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a miss variation effect based on winning at the first start port 121 is executed in the normal game state, the start sound may be output when a miss variation effect based on winning at the first start port 121 is executed in the special time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, each jackpot variation effect is executed when there is no pending.
Here, when each jackpot variation effect is executed while there is a reserved ball, when the jackpot game executed through the jackpot variation effect ends, a stage image 61 according to the time-saving game state is displayed, and the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 41 is displayed (see FIG. 120 (63), FIG. 191 (63), FIG. 251 (63), FIG. 282 (32), FIG. 303 (9), etc.), and then the next variation effect starts according to the consumption of the reserved ball (see FIG. 303 (10)). Therefore, regardless of whether there is a reserved ball during the execution of the jackpot variation effect, "until the next variation effect starts" in the jackpot variation effect means the timing when the effect shown in FIG. 120 (63), FIG. 191 (63), FIG. 251 (63), FIG. 282 (32), or FIG. 303 (9) is being executed.

(Display timing of each visual appearance in variable performance)
Next, the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance will be explained.
Figure 309 is a chart showing the timing at which decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance.

Figure 309 (1) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation (variable presentation examples 1, 23, and 44) that is executed when variable presentation pattern "ER1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (1) are not limited to the display timings in the variable presentation that is executed when variable presentation pattern "ER1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (1) may also be the average display timing of all variable presentation patterns that can be selected when a variable presentation is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach presentation is executed, based on the number of reserved symbols for the first starting slot 121 being "1" in normal gaming mode.

First, at time t1, based on the fact that the number of reserved symbols for the first starting port 121 is "1" in the normal game state, the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t2, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 78(2)). At this time, the first start effect image 501 is also displayed.
Next, at time t3, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 78 (3)).
Next, at time t4, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 78 (4)).

Next, at time t5, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 79 (13)).
Next, at time t6, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 79 (15)). At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is also displayed.
Next, at time t7, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 79 (16)).
Next, at time t8, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 80 (17)).

Here, the time from time t1 to time t2, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts to when the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (when the first effect image 501 is displayed at the start), is time T1.
Furthermore, the time from time t2 to time t3, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the first effect image 501 at the start), is time T2.
Furthermore, the time from time t3 to time t4, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T3.
Furthermore, the time from time t4 to time t5, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T4.

Furthermore, the time from time t5 to time t6, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T5.
Furthermore, the time from time t6 to time t7, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual recognition mode (the display time of the first effect image 503 when stopped), is time T6.
Furthermore, the time from time t7 to time t8, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual mode, is time T7.
Here, time T3 is shorter than time T2. Time T5 is longer than time T3. Time T6 is shorter than time T5. Time T6 is shorter than time T2. Time T7 is shorter than time T2.

Figure 309 (2) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable presentation (variable presentation examples 3, 25, and 46) that is executed when variable presentation pattern "ER3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (2) are not limited to the display timings in the variable presentation that is executed when variable presentation pattern "ER3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (2) may be the average display timing of all variable presentation patterns that can be selected when a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach presentation is executed is executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting slot 121 is "4" in normal gaming mode.

First, at time t11, based on the fact that the number of reserved symbols for the first starting port 121 is "4" in the normal game state, the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t12, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 85(2)). At this time, the second start effect image 555 is also displayed.
Next, at time t13, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 85 (3)).
Next, at time t14, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 85 (4)).

Next, at time t15, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 85 (5)).
Next, at time t16, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 85(6)). At this time, the second stop effect image 506 is also displayed.
Next, at time t17, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode (see Figure 85 (7)).
Next, at time t18, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 85 (8)).

Here, the time from time t11 to time t12, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts until the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the second effect image 555 is displayed at the start), is time T11.
Furthermore, the time from time t12 to time t13, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the start second effect image 555), is time T12.
Furthermore, the time from time t13 to time t14, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T13.
Furthermore, the time from time t14 to time t15, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T14.

Furthermore, the time from time t15 to time t16, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T15.
Furthermore, the time from time t16 to time t17, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the sixth visual recognition mode (display time of the second effect image 506 when stopped), is time T16.
Furthermore, the time from time t17 to time t18, i.e., the display time of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the seventh visual recognition mode, is time T17.

Here, time T13 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T15 is longer than time T13. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T15. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T12. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T12.
Furthermore, time T12 is shorter than time T2. Furthermore, time T14 is shorter than time T4. Furthermore, time T15 is shorter than time T5. Furthermore, time T16 is shorter than time T6. Furthermore, time T17 is shorter than time T7.

Figure 309 (3) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect (variable effect example 66) executed when variable effect pattern "EH1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (3) are not limited to the display timings in the variable effect executed when variable effect pattern "EH1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (1) may be the average display timing of all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a variable effect is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach effect is executed, based on the number of reserved symbols for the second starting slot 122 being "1" in the special time-saving game state.

First, at time t21, in the special time-saving game state, the reserved number for the second starting port 122 is "1", so the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t22, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 272(2)). At this time, a thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.
Next, at time t23, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 272 (3)).
Next, at time t24, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 272 (4)).

Next, at time t25, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 272 (5)).
Next, at time t26, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 272(6)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t27, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 272 (7)).

Here, the time from time t21 to time t22, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts until the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T21.
Furthermore, the time from time t22 to time t23, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the initial 13th effect image 588), is time T22.
Furthermore, the time from time t23 to time t24, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T23.
Furthermore, the time from time t24 to time t25, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T24.

Furthermore, the time from time t25 to time t26, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T25.
Furthermore, the time from time t26 to time t27, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T26.

Here, time T23 is shorter than time T22. Furthermore, time T25 is longer than time T23. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T25. Furthermore, time T26 is shorter than time T22.
Furthermore, time T22 is shorter than time T12, time T24 is shorter than time T14, time T25 is shorter than time T15, and time T26 is shorter than time T16.
Note that time T12 may be shorter than time T22, time T14 may be shorter than time T24, time T15 may be shorter than time T25, and time T16 may be shorter than time T26.

Figure 309 (4) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect (variable effect example 67) that is executed when variable effect pattern "EH3" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (4) are not limited to the display timings in the variable effect that is executed when variable effect pattern "EH3" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (4) may also be the average display timing of all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a variable effect is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach effect is executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the second start slot 122 is "4" in the special time-saving game state.

First, at time t31, based on the fact that the number of reserved symbols for the second starting port 122 is "4" in the special time-saving game state, the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t32, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (see FIG. 273(2)). At this time, the thirteenth effect image 588 is also displayed.
Next, at time t33, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 273 (3)).
Next, at time t34, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 273 (4)).

Next, at time t35, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 273 (5)).
Next, at time t36, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode (see FIG. 273(6)). At this time, the fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t37, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 273 (7)).

Here, the time from time t31 to time t32, that is, the time from when the variable performance starts until the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the second visual mode (the 13th effect image 588 is displayed at the start), is time T31.
Furthermore, the time from time t32 to time t33, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the second visual mode (the display time of the initial 13th effect image 588), is time T32.
Furthermore, the time from time t33 to time t34, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T33.
Furthermore, the time from time t34 to time t35, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T34.

Furthermore, the time from time t35 to time t36, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T35.
Furthermore, the time from time t36 to time t37, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T36.
Here, time T33 is shorter than time T32. Time T35 is longer than time T33. Time T36 is shorter than time T35. Time T36 is shorter than time T32.
Furthermore, time T32 is shorter than time T22, time T34 is shorter than time T24, time T35 is shorter than time T25, and time T36 is shorter than time T26.

Figure 309 (5) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect (variable effect example 79) that is executed when variable effect pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (5) are not limited to the display timings in the variable effect that is executed when variable effect pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (5) may also be the average display timing of all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a variable effect is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach effect is executed, based on the number of reserved symbols for the first starting slot 121 being "1" in the special time-saving game state.

First, at time t41, in the special time-saving game state, the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "1", so the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t42, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 306 (2)).
Next, at time t43, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 306 (3)).

Next, at time t44, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 306 (4)).
Next, at time t45, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 306(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t46, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 306 (6)).

Here, the time from time t41 to time t42, that is, the time from when the variable presentation starts until the three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T41.
Furthermore, the time from time t42 to time t43, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T42.
Furthermore, the time from time t43 to time t44, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T43.
Furthermore, the time from time t44 to time t45, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T44.

Furthermore, the time from time t45 to time t46, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T45.

Here, time T42 is longer than time T33. Also, time T43 is longer than time T34. Also, time T44 is longer than time T35. Also, time T45 is longer than time T36.

Figure 309 (6) shows the display timing for each visual aspect of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect (variable effect example 80) executed when variable effect pattern "EJ1" is selected. Note that the display timings shown in Figure 309 (6) are not limited to the display timings in the variable effect executed when variable effect pattern "EJ1" is selected. The display timings shown in Figure 309 (6) may be the average display timing of all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a variable effect is executed in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and no reach effect is executed, based on the fact that the reserved number for the first starting slot 121 is "4" in the special time-saving game state.

First, at time t51, in the special time-saving game state, the reserved number for the first starting port 121 is "4", so the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a variable effect is started in which the reach effect is not executed.
Next, at time t52, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode (see Figure 307 (2)).
Next, at time t53, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode (see Figure 307 (3)).

Next, at time t54, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode (see Figure 307 (4)).
Next, at time t55, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode (see FIG. 307(5)). At this time, a fifteenth stop effect image 589 is also displayed.
Next, at time t56, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the first visual mode (see Figure 307 (6)).

Here, the time from time t51 to time t52, that is, the time from when the variable presentation starts until the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode, is time T51.
Furthermore, the time from time t52 to time t53, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the third visual mode, is time T52.
Furthermore, the time from time t53 to time t54, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode, is time T53.
Furthermore, the time from time t54 to time t55, that is, the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fifth visual mode, is time T54.

Furthermore, the time from time t55 to time t56, i.e., the display time of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the sixth visual mode (the display time of the 15th effect image 589 when stopped), is time T55.

Here, time T42 and time T52 are the same time. Time T43 and time T53 are the same time. Time T44 and time T54 are the same time. Time T45 and time T55 are the same time.
Furthermore, time T1, time T11, time T21, time T31, time T41, and time T51 are all the same time.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute two viewing modes for the patterns: a first display (fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific column (e.g., middle column decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific column is easier to see after the first display than in the first display. Then, in the first mode (for example, in the normal game state), when a specific variable effect (a miss variable effect in which no reach effect is performed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories (the number of pending memories for the first starting port 121) being a specific number (for example, "1") (when variable effect example 1 (see Figures 78 to 80) or the like is executed), the average time from when the patterns in the specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in the specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a specific variable effect is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a specific number in the first mode) is the first time (time T5 + time T6 + time T7). Furthermore, when a specific variable effect (such as variable effect example 66 (see Figure 272)) is performed in the second mode (for example, in a special time-saving game state) based on the number of second reserved memories (the number of reserved memories for the second starting port 122) being a specific number, the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second display to when they stop (the average time from when the patterns in a specific column become the second state to when they stop in all variable effect patterns that can be selected when a specific variable effect is performed based on the number of second reserved memories being a specific number in the second mode) is a second time (time T25 + time T26) that is shorter than the first time.
In this case, in the second mode, compared to the first mode, the player can be given the impression that the symbols in the specific row stop at high speed after changing to the second mode, and a speedy change effect can be realized in the second mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a normal game state, in a specific variable effect (a miss variable effect in which no reach effect is performed) based on the first reserved memory being "1", from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes visible at a slow speed until it stops, multiple symbols (e.g., "9" and "1" (see (13), (14) in Figures 79)) fluctuating in the middle row decorative pattern 41 become visible. On the other hand, in a special time-saving game state, in a specific variable effect based on the second reserved memory being "1", from the time the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes visible at a slow speed until it stops, only a single symbol (e.g., "1" (see (5) in Figure 272)) fluctuating in the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes visible.
That is, in this embodiment, when a specific variation effect is executed in the first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number (for example, "1"), it is easier to execute an effect in which multiple varying symbols in a specific row are visible from the time the symbols in the specific row (for example, the middle row decorative symbol 41) reach the second mode (the fifth visible mode, the sixth visible mode, the seventh visible mode, etc.) until they stop, when a specific variation effect is executed in the first mode. Therefore, even when a miss variation effect is executed in the first mode, it is possible to show the player a variety of variations in the decorative symbol 41.

The fact that an effect in which multiple changing symbols in the symbols of the specific column are visible from the time the symbols in the specific column change to the second state until they stop is more likely to be executed when a specific change effect is executed in first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number than when a specific change effect is executed in second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number includes the fact that when a specific change effect is executed in first mode based on the first reserved memory being a specific number, an effect in which multiple changing symbols in the symbols of the specific column are visible from the time the symbols in the specific column change to the second state until they stop is always executed (100%), and that when a specific change effect is executed in second mode based on the second reserved memory being a specific number, an effect in which multiple changing symbols in the symbols of the specific column are visible from the time the symbols in the specific column change to the second state until they stop is never executed (0%).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (for example, a display using the fourth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (4))) in which the pattern in a specific column (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, a second display (for example, a display using the sixth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (6)) or the seventh viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (7))) in which the pattern in the specific column is easier to see after the first display than in the first display, etc., and a third display (a display using the first viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (1))) in which the pattern in the specific column stops after the second display. Furthermore, in one second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) in the first mode (normal game state), the display time according to the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column (time T5 + time T6 + time T7 in the second variable presentation based on the first specific number (see Figure 309), and time T15 + time T16 + time T17 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number) is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number (e.g., "4") that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number (e.g., "1"). Furthermore, in one second variable presentation, the display time (time T35 + time T36 in the second variable presentation based on the second specific number in the second mode) due to the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a second specific number in the second mode (special time-saving play state) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number in the first mode.
In this case, by displaying the slow visual appearance of the decorative pattern 41 for various display times according to the number of first reserved memories in the first mode, it is possible to realize a variety of vivid and varied variations in the display of the decorative pattern 41. Furthermore, in the second mode, the high-speed variations of the decorative pattern 41 can be more strongly impressed on the player than in the first mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in one second variable presentation in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number, which includes the fact that in one second variable presentation in the first mode, the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in the specific column is always shorter (100%) when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number.
Furthermore, if, in one second variable performance in the first mode, the display time for the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number, then, in one second variable performance in the first mode, the display time for the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number that is greater than the first specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the first specific number.

Furthermore, the fact that the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second pending memories being a second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode also means that the display time of the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column will always be shorter (100%) when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of second pending memories being a second specific number in the second mode than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time for the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable performance is executed in the second mode based on the number of second pending memories being a second specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode, then the display time for the second aspect of the pattern in a specific column may be longer when the second variable performance is executed in the second mode based on the number of second pending memories being a second specific number than when the second variable performance is executed based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number in one second variable performance in the first mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display time for the second aspect of the specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variation effect (a miss variation effect in which a reach effect is not executed) is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being a first specific number (e.g., "1") in the second mode (special time-shortened gaming state) (time T25 + time T26) than when the second variation effect (a miss variation effect in which a reach effect is not executed) is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "4") in the first mode (normal gaming state) (time T15 + time T16 + time T17). Therefore, in the second mode, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the player can be more strongly impressed by the high-speed variation of the decorative pattern 41 than in the first mode.
In addition, the fact that the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column is more likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode also means that when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode, the display time due to the second aspect of the specific column will always be shorter (100%) than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode.
Furthermore, if the display time due to the second aspect of a specific column is likely to be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode, then the display time due to the second aspect of a specific column may be shorter when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of first pending memories being the second specific number in the first mode than when the second variable presentation is executed based on the number of second pending memories being the first specific number in the second mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first mode, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops differs between when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number and when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number (time T6, time T16). Therefore, it is possible to realize a variable effect having a variety of operation modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the number of reserved memories.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops is longer when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number than when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number, but this is not limited to this. The operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number than when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number. Furthermore, the operation time when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number and when the second variable effect is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number.

In addition, Figure 309 shows the timings at which the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes during the variable performance, but this is not limited to this. Each timing shown in Figure 309 may be the timings at which the left row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes, or the timings at which the right row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in various visual modes.

(Variation of Variation Example 66)
Figure 310 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 66.
In the variable presentation example 66, in the special time-saving game state, the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and in the variable presentation based on the number of reserved symbols for winning in the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative symbols 41 are simultaneously displayed in the fifth visual mode and simultaneously displayed in the sixth visual mode, but this is not limited to this.
In the following explanation, we will mainly explain the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation, and may omit explanations of the similarities with the examples of variable presentation.

First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 272 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 310 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (2), the left column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (3), the left-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first changing action.

Next, as shown in Figure 310 (4), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output. At this time, the middle-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first changing action.
Next, as shown in Figure 310 (5), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the eleventh stopping action. At this time, the twenty-fifth stopping sound is output.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 310(6).
In this way, even in a variable presentation in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed, and the variable presentation is based on the number of reserved prizes for winning in the second starting port 122 being "1", three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode.

In addition, in a variable presentation in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a reach effect is not executed during the special time-saving game state, in a variable presentation based on a win in the first start port 121, even if the variable presentation is based on the number of reserved symbols in the first start port 121 being any of "1" to "4," three rows of decorative symbols 41 may be displayed in sequence in the fifth viewing mode, and then in sequence in the sixth viewing mode (see Figures 310 (1) to (7)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first display (e.g., a display using the fourth viewing mode) in which the pattern in a specific column (e.g., the middle column decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance, and a second display (e.g., a display using the fifth viewing mode, sixth viewing mode, seventh viewing mode, first viewing mode, etc.) in which the pattern in the specific column is easier to see than in the first display after the first display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation in the first mode (for example, normal game state), a display in the first stop display mode (a mode in which three rows of decorative patterns 41 sequentially become the sixth visual mode and the seventh visual mode) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (for example, "1") is executed (when variable presentation example 1 (see Figures 78 to 80) is executed, etc.) than when a specific variable presentation (a miss variable presentation in which no reach presentation is executed) based on the number of first reserved memories (the number of reserved memories for the first starting port 121) being a first specific number (for example, "4") is executed (when variable presentation example 3 (see Figure 85) is executed, etc.). Furthermore, in one variable effect in the second mode (for example, a special time-saving game state), a display in the second stop display mode (a mode in which three rows of decorative patterns 41 all become the sixth visual mode or the seventh visual mode at the same time) is more likely to be executed when a specific variable effect (such as variable effect example 67 (see Figure 273)) based on the number of second reserved memories (the number of reserved memories for the second starting port 122) being the second specific number is executed, than when a specific variable effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 66 (see Figure 310)) based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed.
In this case, a variable effect can be realized in which decorative symbols 41 are displayed in various stop display modes depending on the relationship between the mode and the number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then in the sixth viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth viewing mode. In this case, the second display is in the sixth viewing mode.
Furthermore, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then in the seventh viewing mode without being displayed in the fifth and sixth viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the seventh viewing mode.
Furthermore, the symbols in a specific row may be displayed in the fourth viewing mode, and then displayed in the first viewing mode without being displayed in any of the fifth to seventh viewing modes. In this case, the second display is the first viewing mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the first mode, the display in the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number is executed, which includes the fact that when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, the display in the first stop display mode is never executed (0%), and the fact that when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode, the display in the first stop display mode is always executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variation presentation in the first mode, a display using the first stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number is executed, then a display using the first stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode, or a display using the first stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of first pending memories being a second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the first mode.

Furthermore, in one variation presentation in the second mode, the display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed, which includes the fact that when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, the display using the second stop display mode is never executed (0%), and the fact that when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, the display using the second stop display mode is always executed (100%).
Furthermore, if in one variation presentation in the second mode, a display using the second stop display mode is more likely to be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed than when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed, then a display using the second stop display mode may be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode, or a display using the second stop display mode may not be executed when a specific variation presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed in one variation presentation in the second mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed in the first mode (e.g., normal game state), and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed, it is easier for a display using a common stop display pattern to be executed than when a specific change presentation (a miss change presentation in which no reach presentation is executed) based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number (e.g., "4") is executed in the first mode (e.g., normal game state), and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number (e.g., "1") is executed.
Furthermore, in the second mode, when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number, it is easier to execute a display using a common stop display mode than when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number and when a specific change presentation is executed based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number.
In this case, since the variable presentation based on winning the first starting hole 121 in the second mode tends to become monotonous, it is possible to make the player aware that in the second mode the game ball should win the second starting hole 122.

In addition, the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed in the second mode when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed than in the first mode when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed includes the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the second mode, and the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is always not executed (0%) when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being a second specific number is executed in the first mode.
Furthermore, the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is more likely to be executed in the second mode when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of first reserved memories being the second specific number is executed than in the second mode when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed includes the fact that a display using a common stop display mode is always executed (100%) when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the first specific number is executed and when a specific change presentation based on the number of second reserved memories being the second specific number is executed in the second mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the execution times of the actions performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops (the sixth visual recognition mode and the display time T6 and time T16 of the first effect image 503 when stopped) are different between the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation effect consisting of various stopping modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
Although it has been described that in the normal gaming state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is shorter in the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6 > time T16), this is not limited to this. In the normal gaming state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be longer in the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4" than in the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" (time T6 < time T16). In other words, in the normal gaming state, it is sufficient that the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different between the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Furthermore, in the normal game state, the execution time of the operation performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same for a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4".

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the special time-saving game state, the execution time (time T26, time T36) of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops is different for a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4", but this is not limited to this. In the special time-saving game state, the execution time of the action performed when the decorative pattern 41 stops may be the same for a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "1" and a miss variation effect based on the reserved number for the second start port 122 being "4".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts (the second visual recognition mode and the display time T2 and time T12 of the first effect image 501 at the start) is different between the failure variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "1" and the failure variation effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 being "4". Therefore, it is possible to realize a variation effect consisting of a variety of variation start modes of the decorative pattern 41 according to the reserved number.
In addition, in the normal gaming state, the operation time of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts may be the same for a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4". Also, in the normal gaming state, the operation mode of the decorative pattern when the variation effect starts may be the same for a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "1" and a loss variation effect based on the reserved number for the first starting port 121 being "4".

(Relationship between button operation effects and vibration effects in variable effects)
Next, the timing of executing the vibration effect in response to the button operation effect will be described.
Figure 311 is a chart showing the timing of execution of vibration effects in response to button operation effects.
Figure 311 (1) shows the timing of button operation and vibration effects in variation performance example 13 (see Figures 113 to 120). Note that Figure 311 (1) may also be the timing of button operation and vibration effects in variation performance example 35 (see Figures 184 to 191) or variation performance example 56 (see Figures 244 to 251).

First, at time t61, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 118 (43)).
Next, at time t62, the vibration effect begins (see Figure 118 (44)).
Then, at time t63, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t61 to time t62, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T61.
Furthermore, the time from time t62 to time t63, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T62.

Figure 311 (2) shows the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variation effect example 14 (see Figure 123). Note that Figure 311 (2) may also be the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variation effect example 36 (see Figure 192) or variation effect example 57 (see Figure 252).

First, at time t71, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 123 (1)).
Next, at time t72, the vibration effect begins (see Figure 123 (3)).
Then, at time t73, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t71 to time t72, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T71.
Furthermore, the time from time t72 to time t73, i.e., the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T72.

Figure 311 (3) shows the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variation effect example 21 (see Figures 142 and 143). Note that Figure 311 (3) may also be the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variation effect example 42 (see Figures 203 and 204) or variation effect example 62 (see Figures 261 and 262).

First, at time t81, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 142 (1)).
Next, at time t82, the vibration effect begins (see Figure 142 (6)).
Then, at time t83, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t81 to time t82, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T81.
Furthermore, the time from time t82 to time t83, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T82.

Figure 311 (4) shows the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variable effect example 71 (see Figures 279 to 282).
First, at time t91, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 280 (15)).
Next, at time t92, the vibration effect begins (see Figure 280 (16)).
Then, at time t93, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t91 to time t92, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T91.
Furthermore, the time from time t92 to time t93, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T92.

Figure 311 (5) shows the timing of button operation effects and vibration effects in variable effect example 75 (see Figure 291).
First, at time t101, the button operation presentation begins (see Figure 291 (1)).
Next, at time t102, the vibration effect begins (see Figure 291 (5)).
Then, at time t103, the vibration effect ends.
Here, the time from time t101 to time t102, that is, the time from when the button operation effect starts to when the vibration effect starts, is time T101.
The time from time t102 to time t103, that is, the execution time of the vibration effect, is time T102.

Here, time T71 is longer than time T61, and time T81 is longer than time T71.
Furthermore, time T72 is shorter than time T62, and time T62 and time T82 are the same length of time.
Furthermore, time T101 is longer than time T91.
Furthermore, time T92 and time T102 are the same time.
Furthermore, time T101 is shorter than time T81. In this case, time T82 and time T102 may be the same or different. When time T82 and time T102 are different, time T102 may be shorter than time T82 or longer than time T82.

As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effect of "BU5" (see FIG. 118 (43)) is more likely to be executed than the button operation effect of "BU4" (see FIG. 59) (see FIG. 105 (34)). That is, the expectation of a special game (jackpot game) is higher when the second operation display (the display of the button operation image 502 shown in FIG. 118 (43)) is executed than when the first operation display (the display of the button operation image 502 shown in FIG. 105 (34)) is executed. The effect control unit 300 can set the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when a predetermined condition is met to be different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the predetermined condition is not met. Examples of cases where a predetermined condition is met include when the vibration effect in the variation effect example 13 is executed (see FIG. 118 (44) and FIG. 311 (1)) and when the revival effect is executed (see FIG. 142 (6) and FIG. 311 (3)). In addition, examples of cases where the specified conditions are not met include when the vibration effect or revival effect in variable performance example 13 is not executed, and the vibration effect in variable performance example 14 is executed (see Figure 123 (3) and Figure 311 (2)).
In this case, the timing of the execution of the vibration effect can be given to the player as a surprise, and coupled with the execution of the second operation display, which has a particularly high degree of expectation, the anticipation of the execution of the vibration effect can be heightened, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition (execution of a vibration effect in variable performance example 13 (see Figure 118 (44) and Figure 311 (1))) and a second predetermined condition (execution of a vibration effect in a revival performance (see Figure 142 (6) and Figure 311 (3))).
Furthermore, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the specified condition is not met is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the first specified condition is met.
Furthermore, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the second specified condition is met is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the first specified condition is met.
In addition, the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the second specified condition is met is longer than the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration effect when the specified condition is not met.
In this case, various vibration effects with different start timings are realized depending on the conditions under which the vibration effects are executed, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the vibration effects being executed.

In this embodiment, in variable performance example 14, variable performance example 36, and variable performance example 57, when performance button 161 is operated in the button operation performance, performance button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits white light (see Figure 123 (2) etc.) and then changes to a rainbow light-emitting state, but this is not limited to this.
In variation presentation example 14, variation presentation example 36, and variation presentation example 57, even if the presentation button 161 is operated in the button operation presentation, the presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611) may continue to emit red light. Then, when the vibration presentation starts, the presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611) may emit rainbow light. In this case, the length of time that the presentation button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits red light is time T71 shown in FIG. 311 (2).

(Modification of the visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbol 41 in the normal gaming state)
Next, a modified example of the visual recognition mode of the middle row decorative symbols 41 until the SP reach effect is started in the normal game state will be described.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that in the normal game state, the SP reach effect starts after the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the 10th visual mode in the normal reach effect, but this is not limited to this.

First, as shown in Fig. 312(1), the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the eighth visual mode, the first reach action is performed, the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510 are displayed, and the first reach sound is output. At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 312 (2), the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is displayed in the first mode of the 11th visual mode, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is hidden, and a transition image 516 is displayed instead of the stage image 61.
Next, as shown in FIG. 312(3), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach look is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312(4), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
In this way, even in the normal game state, the SP reach effect may be started without the middle row decorative pattern 41 being displayed in the tenth visual mode in the normal reach effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed in a normal gaming state (for example, variable presentation example 10, etc.), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a slow visual mode before the start of the SP reach presentation (see FIG. 103 (21)). On the other hand, in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed in a special time-saving gaming state (for example, variable presentation example 69 (see FIGS. 275 to 277), etc.), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is not displayed in a slow visual mode before the start of the SP reach presentation.
That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute the following viewing modes for the decorative pattern 41: a first display (for example, a display using the fourth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (4))) in which the pattern in a specific row (for example, the middle row decorative pattern 41) is difficult to see after the start of the variable performance; a second display (for example, a display using the fifth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (5))), sixth viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (6)), seventh viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (7)), tenth viewing mode (see Figure 76-2 (13)), etc.) in which the pattern in the specific row is easier to see after the first display than in the first display; and a third display (for example, a display using the first viewing mode (see Figure 76-1 (1))) in which the pattern in the specific row stops after the second display. Furthermore, in one variable presentation, the second display of the pattern in a specific column before the start of a specific presentation is more likely to be executed when a specific presentation is executed in the second mode (special time-saving playing state) than when a specific presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation) is executed in the first mode (for example, normal playing state).
In this case, in the normal game state, the special effect is likely to start after the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a slow visual mode to alert the player that the variable effect will end, which can increase the player's interest in the special effect. Also, in the special time-saving game state, the special effect is likely to start without the middle row decorative symbol 41 being displayed in a slow visual mode, so even in the variable effect in which the special effect is performed, the execution time of the variable effect can be set to be suitable for the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, in one variable performance, the second display of the symbols in the specific column before the start of the specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance is executed in the second mode than when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, which includes the fact that when a specific performance is executed in the first mode, the display of the symbols in the specific column in the second form before the start of the specific performance is never executed (0%), and the fact that when a specific performance is executed in the second mode, the display of the symbols in the specific column in the second form before the start of the specific performance is always executed (100%).
Furthermore, if, in one variable performance, the second display of the patterns in a specific column before the start of the specific performance is more likely to be executed when a specific performance in the second mode is executed than when a specific performance in the first mode is executed, the display of the patterns in a specific column in the second form before the start of the specific performance may be executed when a specific performance in the first mode is executed, or the display of the patterns in a specific column in the second form before the start of the specific performance may not be executed when a specific performance in the second mode is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, when an SP reach effect is executed, the middle row decorative symbol 41 can be hidden (difficult to see or impossible to see) (see Figures 104 (25) and 276 (9)). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable effect or reach effect until the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden (difficult to see or impossible to see) is likely to be shorter when a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the speed at which the visibility of the decorative symbol 41 changes can make the player aware that the effect is progressing quickly.
In addition, the fact that the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or unvisible) is more likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state includes the fact that when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state, the time from the start of the variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or unvisible) is always shorter (100%) than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state.
Furthermore, if the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or unvisible) is likely to be shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a special time-saving play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state, then it may also be that the time from the start of a variable performance or reach performance until the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes invisible (difficult to see or unvisible) is shorter when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed is performed in a normal play state than when a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in a special time-saving play state.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 5)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable presentation example 5 (see Figures 90 to 93).
Figure 313 shows a modified example of variable performance example 5.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 78 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 313 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 313(2), the button operation effect starts, button operation image 502 is displayed, and a first button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the first period.
When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a second image 527 is displayed during operation and a second operation sound is output, as shown in FIG. 313 (3).
Next, as shown in Fig. 313 (4), the role production is executed, and the left movable role object 1151 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object second effect image 513 is displayed around the left movable role object 1151, and a second role object sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 90 (3) to (8), Figures 91 (9) to (16), Figures 92 (17) to (24), and Figures 93 (25) to (29) are performed.

In this way, the button operation effect and the special feature effect are executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change effect may be executed in which the button operation effect and the special feature effect are not executed.
313的变形例5的变形例27(参照图162～164)的变形例，如图313所示例中，在开始后，前述盖式41的变形可能不执行的变形例。 Also, the example shown in Figure 313 is not limited to a variation of the variation display example 5. As a variation of the variation display example 27 (see Figures 162 to 164), after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, the button operation display and the special feature display may be executed in the same manner as the example shown in Figure 313, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation display and the special feature display may not be executed. Also, as a variation of the variation display example 48 (see Figures 221 to 224), after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, the button operation display and the special feature display may be executed in the same manner as the example shown in Figure 313, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation display and the special feature display may not be executed.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 10)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105).
Figure 314 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 10.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 101 (1) to (3) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 314 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(2), the first step performance is executed, a step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed, and a first step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 314(3), the second step performance is executed, a step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed, and a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 314(4), the third step performance is executed, a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed, and a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(5), the step image 508 is hidden, and the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continues in the fourth visual mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 314(6), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 102 (14) to (16), 103 (17) to (24), 104 (25) to (32), and 105 (33) to (40) are performed.

In this way, the button operation effect and the special feature effect may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change effect in which the button operation effect and the special feature effect are executed may be executed.
314 is not limited to a modified example of the variation performance example 10. As a modified example of the variation performance example 32 (see FIGS. 172 to 176), the button operation performance and the special feature performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation performance (see FIG. 176 (34)) and the special feature performance (see FIG. 175 (32)) may be executed. Also, as a modified example of the variation performance example 53 (see FIGS. 232 to 236), the button operation performance and the special feature performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation performance (see FIG. 236 (34)) and the special feature performance (see FIG. 235 (32)) may be executed.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 11)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 11 (see Figures 106 to 111).
Figure 315 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 11.
First, the same presentation as shown in Figures 101 (1) to (5) is performed, and then, as shown in Figure 315 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 315(2), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 become invisible (hard to see or impossible to see). At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 106 (4) to (8), 107 (9) to (16), 108 (17) to (24), 109 (25) to (32), 110 (33) to (40), and 111 (41) to (43) are performed.

In this way, the button operation effect and the special feature effect may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to change and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, a change effect in which the button operation effect and the special feature effect are executed may be executed.
315 is not limited to a modified example of the variation performance example 11. As a modified example of the variation performance example 33 (see FIGS. 177 to 182), the button operation performance and the special feature performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation performance (see FIG. 181 (37)) and the special feature performance (see FIG. 181 (35)) may be executed. Also, as a modified example of the variation performance example 54 (see FIGS. 237 to 242), the button operation performance and the special feature performance may not be executed after the decorative pattern 41 starts to vary and before it temporarily stops, and after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the button operation performance (see FIG. 241 (37)) and the special feature performance (see FIG. 241 (35)) may be executed.

(Variation of Variation Presentation Example 13)
Next, we will explain a modified example of variable performance example 13 (see Figures 113 to 120).
Figure 316 shows a modified example of variation presentation example 13.
First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8) and Figures 113 (1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 316 (1), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(2), the zone promotion effect starts and the zone promotion image 505 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 316(3), the zone effect starts, and a zone notification image 528 is displayed. At this time, a zone effect image 529 is displayed around the zone notification image 528, and a zone start sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 316 (4), the pseudo consecutive image 511 stops. At this time, a pseudo consecutive stop effect image 514 is displayed around the pseudo consecutive image 511, the three rows of decorative patterns 41 become invisible (hard to see or impossible to see), and a pseudo consecutive stop sound is output.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 114 (10) to (16), 115 (17) to (24), 116 (25) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), 118 (41) to (48), 119 (49) to (56), and 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected probability of a button operation effect executed before the start of a specific effect (temporary stopping of decorative symbol 41) is 3% (see FIG. 59), and the expected probability of a button operation effect executed after the start of a specific effect is 25%. Therefore, a special game (jackpot game) is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is not executed before the start of a specific effect but is executed after the start of a specific effect (such as a variation of variable effect example 10 (see FIGS. 101 to 105, 314)) is executed, compared to when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect but not after the start of a specific effect (such as variable effect example 1 (see FIGS. 78 to 80)) is executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the expected probability of a vibration effect executed before the start of a specific effect is 65%, and the expected probability of a button operation effect executed after the start of a specific effect is 25%. In other words, special games are easier to play when a variable effect is executed in which a button operation effect is performed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 113 to 120, Figure 316)) than when a variable effect is executed in which a button operation effect is performed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105, Figure 314)).
In this case, the player's sense of expectation for the button operation effect can be increased as the fluctuation effect progresses. Also, even in the first half of the fluctuation effect, if a vibration effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire period of the fluctuation effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is not performed before the start of a specific performance but is performed after the start of a specific performance is executed than when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance but is not performed after the start of a specific performance includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a button operation performance is performed before the start of a specific performance but is not performed after the start of a specific performance is executed.
Furthermore, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect than when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect.
Furthermore, if it is easier to execute a special game when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect than when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific effect is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the expected rate of the special feature effect executed before the start of the specific effect (temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41) is 11% (see FIG. 59), and the expected rate of the special feature effect executed after the start of the specific effect is 35%. Therefore, a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a special feature effect is not performed before the start of the specific effect but is performed after the start of the specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see FIGS. 101 to 105, 314)) is executed, compared to when a variable effect in which a special feature effect is performed before the start of the specific effect but is not performed after the start of the specific effect (such as variable effect example 4 (see FIGS. 87 to 89)) is executed. Furthermore, it is easier to execute a special game when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance before the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance 13 (see Figures 113 to 120, Figure 316)) is executed, than when a variable performance in which a reel performance is performed without a vibration performance after the start of a specific performance (such as a modified example of variable performance example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105, Figure 314)).
In this case, the player's expectations for the bonus effect can be increased as the variable effect progresses. Also, even in the first half of the variable effect, if a vibration effect is executed, the player's expectations can be significantly increased, so the player can be kept in anticipation throughout the entire variable effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a special feature performance is not performed before the start of a specific performance is executed and a special feature performance is performed after the start of a specific performance is executed than when a variable performance in which a special feature performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a special feature performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance is executed includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a special feature performance is performed before the start of a specific performance and a special feature performance is not performed after the start of a specific performance is executed.
Furthermore, the fact that a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a device performance is executed before the start of a specific performance than when a variable performance in which a device performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance is executed includes the fact that a special game will not be executed (0%) when a variable performance in which a device performance is executed without a vibration effect after the start of a specific performance is executed, and the fact that a special game will be executed (100%) when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a device performance is executed before the start of a specific performance.
Furthermore, if a special game is more likely to be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a device effect being performed before the start of a specific performance is executed than when a variable performance in which a device effect is performed without a vibration effect being performed after the start of a specific performance is executed, a special game may be executed when a variable performance in which a device effect is performed without a vibration effect being performed after the start of a specific performance is executed, or a special game may not be executed when a variable performance in which a vibration effect is performed without a device effect being performed before the start of a specific performance is executed.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is described as the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this.
The specific effect may be any effect executed in a variable effect, such as a reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, zone effect, step effect, special effect, etc. In this case, the expectation level before and after the temporary stop of the special effect, button operation effect, and vibration effect shown in Figure 59 may be the expectation level before any of the specific effects described above and the expectation level after the specific effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a variable effect in which the third button sound (see FIG. 118 (43)) is output is executed, it is more likely that a jackpot game, vibration effect, and red illumination of the effect button 161 will be executed than when a variable effect in which the second button sound (see FIG. 105 (34)) is output is executed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a vibration effect are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is performed in which the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) produces a special light-emitting effect (light emission in red) and the third button sound is output, than when a variable effect is performed in which the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) produces a specific light-emitting effect (light emission in white) and the second button sound is output.
Also, a first variation effect in which a specific light-emitting effect and a third button sound are output, and a second variation effect in which a special light-emitting effect and a second button sound are output, may be provided. In this case, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more likely to be executed when the second variation effect is executed than when the first variation effect is executed. Also, a jackpot game or a vibration effect may be more likely to be executed when the first variation effect is executed than when the second variation effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special game and special light emission in which the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) emits red light are more likely to be executed when a variable effect is executed in which a second effect (see FIG. 113(2) etc.) that produces a vibration effect without a button operation effect is executed than when a variable effect is executed in which a first effect (see FIG. 102(11) etc.) that produces a button operation effect without a vibration effect is executed. Therefore, even when a vibration effect is executed that does not involve the player operating the effect button 161, the player can be made to expect that a special game will be executed.
In addition, the fact that special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is performed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is performed includes the fact that special lighting is never performed (0%) when a variable performance in which the first performance is performed is performed, and the fact that special lighting is always performed (100%) when a variable performance in which the second performance is performed is performed.
Furthermore, if special lighting is more likely to be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is performed is performed than when a variable performance in which the first performance is performed is performed, special lighting may be performed when a variable performance in which the first performance is performed is performed, or special lighting may not be performed when a variable performance in which the second performance is performed is performed.

(Variations of reach-inducing effects)
Next, a modified example of the reach stimulation effect will be described.
Figure 317 shows a modified example of a reach stimulation effect.
In the first modification, when the variation effect starts, the left-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stop action, which is the action taken when the variation stops, as shown in Fig. 317(1). At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left-row decorative symbol 41, and the first stop sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 317(2), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, "4", are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, reach stimulation second effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.
In this way, the reach stimulation effect may be started after the left column decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in Variation 2, when the variable effect starts, before the decorative symbols 41 temporarily stop, as shown in Figure 317 (3), a reach-inducing effect starts, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, reach-inducing second effect images 523 are displayed above and below each of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 317(4), the left column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stop operation, while the right column decorative symbols 41 continue to be displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode.
In this way, the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped during the execution of the reach-inducing effect.

(Variation of the effect when the reach-inducing effect fails)
Next, we will explain modified examples of the effects that are executed when the reach prompting effect is executed but is not executed, i.e., when the reach prompting effect fails (see Figures 99 (4) to (7), etc.).
First, in the first modification, after the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows are used to induce a win, the left row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stop action, as shown in Fig. 318(1). Also, the right row decorative symbols 41, "5," are displayed in the fifth visual mode and perform the first variable action.

Next, as shown in Figure 318 (2), the right-row decorative symbol 41 enters the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop action. Meanwhile, no sound effect (stop sound) is output in conjunction with the temporary stop of the right-row decorative symbol 41. Also, at this time, the "1" in the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth visual mode and performs the first variable action.

Next, as shown in Figure 318 (3), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 318 (4), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 318 (5), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped in conjunction with the stop display of the special pattern.
In this way, if the reach stimulation performance fails, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 may not be output, while a sound effect accompanying the temporary stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be output.

In addition, in variant 2, after the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows have been used to create a reach-inducing effect, the "5" decorative symbol 41 in the right row and the "1" decorative symbol 41 in the middle row are displayed in the third mode of the ninth visual mode, as shown in Figure 318 (6). At this time, the "7" decorative symbol 41 in the left row performs the first temporary stop action.

Next, as shown in Figure 318 (7), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode and perform the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, sound effects (stop sounds) accompanying the temporary stop of the right row decorative symbols 41 and the middle row decorative symbols 41 are not output.
Next, as shown in Figure 318 (8), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped as the special patterns stop varying.

In this way, if the reach stimulation effect fails, neither the sound effect associated with the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 nor the sound effect associated with the temporary stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be output.
318(6) to (8) are described as examples of effects when the reach-promoting effect using the "4" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows fails, but the present invention is not limited to this. The examples of Fig. 318(6) to (8) may also be examples of effects when the reach-promoting effect using the "7" decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows fails.

(Variation of the effect when the pseudo-consecutive provocation effect fails)
Next, we will explain a modified example of the effect that is executed when the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is executed but the pseudo consecutive fanning effect is not executed, that is, when the pseudo consecutive fanning effect fails.
Figures 319 and 320 show modified examples of the presentation when the pseudo consecutive promotion presentation fails.
First, in variant example 1, as shown in Figure 319 (1), during the execution of the variable performance, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and the first variable operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 319 (2), the pseudo-continuous image 511 is displayed in a motion that sways up and down in the center of the image display unit 114. At this time, a pseudo-continuous image hype effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 511.

Next, as shown in Fig. 319(3), the pseudo-sequential image 511 is hidden. At this time, the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual recognition mode, and the first varying operation is performed.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 78 (7) and (8), Figures 79 (9) to (16) and Figure 80 (17) are performed.
In this way, the pseudo consecutive exciting effect may be executed before the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped after the pseudo consecutive exciting effect is executed.

In addition, in variant example 2, the same effects as those shown in Figures 319 (1) to (3) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 319 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41, "412", are displayed in the fifth visual mode, and the first variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 319(5), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the seventh visual mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. Meanwhile, no sound effect (stop sound) is output in association with the temporary stop of the three rows of decorative symbols 41.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped as shown in Figure 319 (6).
In this way, after the pseudo consecutive excitement performance is executed, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of any of the decorative patterns 41 may not be output.

In addition, in variant example 3, the same effects as those shown in Figures 78 (1) to (8) and Figure 79 (9) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 319 (7), the left column decorative pattern 41 enters the seventh visual state and performs the first temporary stop operation.
319(8), a pseudo-series image 511 is displayed so as to sway up and down in the center of the image display section 114. At this time, a pseudo-series fanning effect image 512 is displayed around the pseudo-series image 511.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 79 (10) to (16) and Figure 80 (17) are performed.
In this way, a pseudo consecutive fanning effect may be executed after the left row decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped and before the right row decorative pattern 41 has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the fourth modification, the same effects as those shown in Figures 78(1) to (8), 79(9), 319(7), and (8) are performed, and then the pseudo-sequential image 511 is hidden as shown in Figure 320(9). Also, the right-row decorative pattern 41, "2," is displayed in the fifth visual mode, and the first variable action is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 320 (10), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, no sound effect (stop sound) is output in association with the temporary stop of the right-row decorative symbol 41. In addition, the middle-row decorative symbol 41, "1," is displayed in the fifth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 320 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
Next, as shown in Figure 320 (12), the visual appearance of the middle row decorative pattern 41 becomes the seventh visual appearance, and all three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the seventh visual appearance, and the first temporary stop operation is performed.

Next, as shown in Figure 320 (13), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped in conjunction with the stop display of the special pattern.
In this way, if the pseudo consecutive excitement performance fails, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 may not be output, while a sound effect accompanying the temporary stopping of the middle row decorative pattern 41 may be output.
Also, although not shown in the figure, if the pseudo consecutive excitement performance fails, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of any of the decorative patterns 41 may not be output.

Also, although not shown, even if the zone promotion effect is executed but the zone promotion effect is not executed, i.e., if the zone promotion effect fails, the same effect as shown in Figures 319 and 320 may be performed.
More specifically, a zone hype effect may be executed before the temporary stop of the decorative symbols 41, and the decorative symbols 41 may be temporarily stopped after the zone hype effect is executed. In this case, after the zone hype effect is executed, any sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of any of the decorative symbols 41 may not be output.
Also, a zone hype effect may be executed after the temporary stop of the left-row decorative pattern 41 and before the temporary stop of the right-row decorative pattern 41. In this case, if the zone hype effect fails, a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the right-row decorative pattern 41 is not output, while a sound effect accompanying the temporary stop of the middle-row decorative pattern 41 may be output, or no sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of any of the decorative patterns 41 may be output.

(Variations of execution timing of development effects)
Next, we will explain modified examples of the timing of execution of development effects.
Figure 321 shows a modified example of the timing of execution of the development effect.
First, after the start of the variation effect, a normal reach effect is executed as shown in Figure 321 (1). Also, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth visual recognition mode and performs the first variation action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 321(2), a development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed in a swinging motion from side to side.
Next, as shown in Fig. 321(3), the development image 521 stops, and a development effect image 534 is displayed around the development image 521. Also, a development stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 321 (4), the development effect is executed. At this time, the role object effect is executed, and the middle movable role object 1152 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. In addition, the role object fourth effect image 535 is displayed, and the fourth role object sound is output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 321 (5), the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. Also, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stop operation is performed.
In this way, the development effect may be performed after the start of the normal reach effect but before the start of the SP reach effect, and the SP reach effect may start after the development effect is executed.

(Variation of the performance when the development promotion performance fails)
Next, we will explain a modified example of the effect that is executed when the development provocation effect is executed but the development provocation effect is not executed, that is, when the development provocation effect fails.
Figures 322 and 323 show modified examples of the effects that are executed when the development stimulation effect fails.
First, in variant example 1, during the execution of a normal reach effect during the execution of a variable effect, a development teasing effect is started, as shown in Figure 322 (1), and the development image 521 is displayed in a swinging motion from side to side.

Next, as shown in Figure 322 (2), the development image 521 is hidden, and the middle row decorative pattern 41, "5", is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 322 (3), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the middle row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.
In this way, if the development prompting effect fails during the execution of the normal reach effect, a sound effect (stop sound) may be output in association with the temporary stopping of the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in variant example 2, when a normal reach effect is being executed during the execution of a variable effect, a development teasing effect is started as shown in Figure 322 (4), and the development image 521 is displayed in a swinging motion from side to side.
Next, as shown in Figure 322 (5), the development image 521 is hidden, and the middle row decorative pattern 41 "5" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 322 (6), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the seventh visual recognition mode and performs the first temporary stop operation. Meanwhile, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not output.
Next, as shown in Figure 322 (7), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped in conjunction with the stop display of the special pattern.
In this way, if the development prompting effect fails during the execution of the normal reach effect, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of the highly decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 may not be output.

In addition, in the third modification, during the execution of the SP reach effect, as shown in Fig. 322 (8), the development teasing effect is started, and the development image 521 is displayed. In addition, the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the thirteenth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 323(9), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fourth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode. At this time, the developed image 521 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 323 (10), the winning/losing effect is executed. In this case, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the fifth mode of the thirteenth visual recognition mode, and the first temporary stop operation is performed. On the other hand, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is not output.
In this way, if the development stimulation effect fails during the execution of the SP effect, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of the less decorative middle row decorative pattern 41 may not be output.

In addition, Figures 318 to 323 explain a presentation in which a sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 is not output.
Here, instead of the effect shown in Figures 318 to 323 in which the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 is not output, the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 41 may be output at a volume lower than usual.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 can output a specific sound (such as a stop sound) when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode (such as a highly decorative display mode with characters), and can execute the first effect (reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, zone effect, development effect) and the second effect (effect based on the result of advance judgment, reach prompting effect, pseudo consecutive prompting effect, zone prompting effect, development prompting effect) that gives hope that the first effect will be performed during the execution of the variable effect, and can also execute the second effect (effect based on the result of advance judgment, reach prompting effect, pseudo consecutive prompting effect, zone prompting effect, development prompting effect) that indicates that a special game will not be executed and that stops and displays more than one row of effect symbols. The specific variation effects include a first specific variation effect in which neither the first nor the second effect is executed, and a second specific variation effect in which at least one of the first and second effects is executed. In the first specific variation effect, a specific sound can be output when a performance pattern in a specific column (for example, left column decorative pattern 41, middle column decorative pattern 41, etc.) is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and in the second specific variation effect, the output of the specific sound can be restricted when a performance pattern in a specific column is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
After the execution of at least one of the first and second effects has heightened the player's expectations, if a specific sound is output in association with the stopped display of decorative symbols despite the fact that it is a losing variable effect, the player may become overly focused on the losing decorative symbols 41, which may result in a loss of interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when at least one of the first and second effects is executed, the output of the specific sound is limited, thereby preventing the player from becoming overly focused on the losing decorative symbols 41, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Modification of the performance when step performance is performed)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed when a step effect is performed will be described.
Figure 324 shows a modified example of the effect executed when a step effect is performed.
First, in Modification 1, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112(1) to (8), 113(1) to (8), 114(9) to (16), and 115(17) to (22) are performed, and then the third step effect is executed as shown in Figure 324(1), and a step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 324 (2), the step image 508 is hidden, and at this time, the left column decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation. Also, the right column decorative symbol 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 116 (27) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), 118 (41) to (48), 119 (49) to (56), and 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

In this way, when the step performance is executed, the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the left row decorative pattern 41 may not be output, and the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 may be output.
In addition, when the step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed (see Figure 324 (1)), the left row decorative pattern 41 may be temporarily stopped and the first stop sound may be output at a volume lower than usual (see Figure 79 (9) etc.).

In addition, in the second modification, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112(1) to (8), 113(1) to (8), 114(9) to (16), 115(17) to (22), and 324(1) and (2) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 324(3), the right-row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, performs the first stopping operation, and starts the reach effect. Meanwhile, no sound effect (stop sound) is output in association with the temporary stopping of the right-row decorative symbol 41.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 116 (28) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), 118 (41) to (48), 119 (49) to (56), and 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

In this way, when the step performance is executed, neither the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the left row decorative pattern 41 nor the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 may be output.
In addition, when the right column decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and the first stop operation is performed, the first stop sound may be output at a volume lower than normal (see Figure 79 (12) etc.).

In addition, in variant 3, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), and 115 (17) to (22) are performed, and then the third step effect is executed as shown in Figure 324 (4), and a step image 508 displaying the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 324 (5), the step image 508 is hidden, and at this time, the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows, "4", are displayed in the seventh visual mode, performing the first temporary stop operation.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 116 (28) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), 118 (41) to (48), 119 (49) to (56), and 120 (57) to (63) are performed.

In this way, when the step performance is executed, neither the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the left row decorative pattern 41 nor the sound effect (stop sound) associated with the temporary stopping of the right row decorative pattern 41 may be output.
In addition, when the step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed (see Figure 324 (1)), the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows may be temporarily stopped, and the first stopping sound may be output at a volume lower than usual (see Figure 79 (9) etc.).

In addition, in variant 4, the same effects as those shown in Figures 112 (1) to (8), 113 (1) to (8), 114 (9) to (16), and 115 (17) to (22) are performed, and then the third step effect is executed as shown in Figure 324 (6), and a step image 508 displaying the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 324 (7), the step image 508 is hidden, and at this time, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 324 (8), the right column decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual recognition mode, and the first stopping action is performed, starting the reach effect. Also, the first stopping sound is output.

After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 116 (28) to (32), 117 (33) to (40), 118 (41) to (48), 119 (49) to (56), and 120 (57) to (63) are performed.
In this way, when the step effect is executed, the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows may temporarily stop at the same time.

Also, although not shown in the figures, when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows temporarily stop simultaneously after the step performance is executed, the sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stopping of the decorative patterns 41 may not be output (it may be output at a volume lower than usual).

Also, Figure 324 shows an example in which a reach effect is executed after a step effect is executed, but this is not limited to this.
324 may be an example in which a reach effect is not executed after a step effect is executed. That is, when a step effect is executed, output of a sound effect (stop sound) accompanying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 may be limited regardless of whether a reach effect is executed or not.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of outputting a specific sound (such as a stop sound) when a presentation pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode (such as a highly decorative display mode having characters) during a variable presentation, and is capable of starting a specific presentation (such as a reach-inducing presentation or a step presentation) that raises the expectation of the possibility of a special game being played before a presentation pattern in a specific column (such as left column decorative pattern 41 or right column decorative pattern 41) is stopped and displayed during a variable presentation, and if a specific presentation is not executed during the execution of a variable presentation, a specific sound can be output when a presentation pattern in a specific column is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if a specific presentation is executed during the execution of a variable presentation, the output of the specific sound can be restricted when a presentation pattern in a specific column is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the output of specific sounds is not restricted even when specific effects are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing too much on the specific sounds and thereby losing the impression of the specific effects, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Variation of the effect in which the third effect image 524 is displayed when the reel is stopped)
Figures 325 to 327 show modified examples of the presentation in which the third effect image 524 is displayed when the reel is stopped.
In the modified example, as shown in FIG. 325(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" in the image display unit 114. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 55 for the first starting port 121.
Next, as shown in FIG. 325 (2), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third start effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The second reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the first reserved image 52, and the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. The reserved number display 55 for the first start port 121 is updated to "1." At this time, a first start sound is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 325 (3), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in Figure 325 (4), three rows of decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode and perform the first variable operation.
Next, as shown in FIG. 325 (5), the role effect is executed, and the right movable role object 1153 moves to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the image display unit 114. At this time, a role object third effect image 526 is displayed around the right movable role object 1153 on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, a third role object sound is output. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 in the fourth visual mode continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 325 (6), the reel performance ends and the reel third effect image 526 disappears. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative patterns 41 continues in the fourth visual mode. Also, at this time, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes from the normal display mode to blue. Also, at this time, the third change sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 325(7), a chance eye effect is executed, and three rows of decorative symbols 41, "331," stop. All three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red. At this time, a first chance eye effect image 537 is displayed around the three rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh stop sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 325 (8), as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "331", are fixed and stopped.
325(2) to (7), the third start action, the third effect image 525 at the start, the first start sound, the bonus effect, the effect in which the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes, and the chance eye effect are all examples of pre-determination effects. Also, these pre-determination effects are effects that make the player expect a jackpot in the next variable effect after the variable effect when these pre-determination effects are being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 326 (9), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 stops the decorative symbol 41 and small symbol 56 "331" from being confirmed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (10), as the variable display of the next special symbol begins, three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second visual confirmation mode, and a third start operation is performed. At this time, a third start effect image 525 is displayed around each of the three rows of decorative symbols 41. The first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, and the variable image 51 is displayed in blue. At this time, a first start sound is output.
At this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates.

Next, as shown in Figure 326 (11), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the third visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 326 (12), three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 326 (13), the first step effect is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 1" is displayed. At this time, the first step sound is output. Also, the vibration effect ends.
Next, as shown in Figure 326 (14), the second step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 2" is displayed. At this time, a second step sound is output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 326 (15), the third step performance is executed, and step image 508 showing the text "Step 3" is displayed. At this time, a third step sound, which is a sound effect for the third step performance, is output.

Next, as shown in Figure 326 (16), the step image 508 is hidden. At this time, the display of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 in the fourth visual recognition mode continues.
Next, as shown in Figure 327 (17), the left column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 327 (18), the left row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the sixth visual mode and performs the first stopping action. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed below the left row decorative symbol 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 327 (19), the right column decorative pattern 41 "4" is displayed in the fifth visual mode.
Next, as shown in Figure 327 (20), the right-row decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the sixth visual mode and perform the first stopping action, starting the reach effect. At this time, the first stop effect image 503 is displayed to the right of the right-row decorative symbols 41. At this time, the first stop sound is also output.

Next, as shown in Figure 327 (21), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and the third stopping action is performed. At this time, third stop effect images 524 are displayed surrounding each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, the second reach sound (fifth stopping sound) is output.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a reach effect is executed without a reach encouraging effect being executed, the first reach line image 509 is displayed (see FIG. 92 (22) etc.), and when a reach encouraging effect and a reach effect are executed, the third effect image at stop 524 is displayed (see FIG. 100 (4)). In other words, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (reach effects, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) while a variable effect is being executed, can display emphasis images (stop effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, double-digit effect image) that emphasize the specific effect while a variable effect is being executed, can execute predetermined effects (effects based on the results of advance determination, reach encouraging effect, etc.) that raise expectations that a specific effect will occur, and can display different emphasis images when a specific effect is executed without executing a predetermined effect and when both a predetermined effect and a specific effect are executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of the flow of the presentation from before the start of the specific presentation to the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a first reach sound is output when a reach effect is executed without a reach prompting effect being executed (see FIG. 92 (22) etc.), and a second reach sound is output when a reach prompting effect and a reach effect are executed (see FIG. 100 (4)). In other words, the effect control unit 300 can execute specific effects (reach effects, display of double-digit decorative patterns 41, etc.) while a variable effect is being executed, can output specific sounds (stop sounds, reach sounds, etc.) when a specific effect is executed, can execute predetermined effects (effects based on the results of advance determination, reach prompting effects, etc.) that raise expectations that a specific effect will occur, and can output different specific sounds when a specific effect is executed without executing a predetermined effect and when both a predetermined effect and a specific effect are executed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of the flow of the presentation from before the start of the specific presentation to the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display of the first reach line image 509 and the output of the first reach sound may be more likely to be executed when a specific effect is executed without a predetermined effect being executed during the execution of a variable effect than when both a predetermined effect and a specific effect are executed during the execution of a variable effect. Also, the display of the third effect image 524 at stop and the output of the second reach sound (fifth stop sound) may be more likely to be executed when both a predetermined effect and a specific effect are executed during the execution of a variable effect than when a specific effect is executed without a predetermined effect being executed during the execution of a variable effect.
Note that the fact that the first reach line image 509 is more likely to be displayed and the first reach sound to be output when a specific effect is executed without a specified effect during the execution of a variable effect than when both a specified effect and a specific effect are executed during the execution of a variable effect includes the fact that the first reach line image 509 is not displayed or the first reach sound is not output (0%) when both a specified effect and a specific effect are executed during the execution of a variable effect, and the fact that the first reach line image 509 is always displayed or the first reach sound is output (100%) when a specific effect is executed without a specified effect during the execution of a variable effect. Furthermore, the fact that the display of the third effect image 524 at stop and the output of the second reach sound (fifth stop sound) are more likely to be executed when both the predetermined effect and the specific effect are executed during the execution of the variable effect than when a specific effect is executed without the predetermined effect being executed during the execution of the variable effect includes the fact that the display of the third effect image 524 at stop and the output of the second reach sound (fifth stop sound) are not executed (0%) when a specific effect is executed without the predetermined effect being executed during the execution of the variable effect, and the fact that the display of the third effect image 524 at stop and the output of the second reach sound (fifth stop sound) are always executed (100%) when both the predetermined effect and the specific effect are executed during the execution of the variable effect.
Furthermore, even if both a predetermined effect and a specific effect are executed during the execution of a variable effect, the first reach line image 509 may be displayed and the first reach sound may be output. Furthermore, even if a specific effect is executed without executing a predetermined effect during the execution of a variable effect, the third effect image 524 at stop time may be displayed and the second reach sound (fifth stop sound) may be output.

Next, the relationship between the stage (performance mode) controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 that the performance control unit 300 causes to be output from the speaker 156 will be explained.
Figure 328 is a diagram showing the relationship between the stage controlled by the performance control unit 300 and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41.

First, we will explain the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the first stage (first presentation mode).
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach effect include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a seventh stop sound, and a fourteenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach effect include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a seventh stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
Furthermore, the stop sounds that are output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach effect include a fifth stop sound and a tenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the normal reach effect include a first stop sound, an eleventh stop sound, and a twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive images 511 are regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sounds are also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the SP reach effect include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or informing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stop sound, the ninth stop sound, and the twenty-third stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 8th stop sound, the 9th stop sound, the 13th stop sound, and the 23rd stop sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the second stage (second presentation mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a 15th stop sound, a 16th stop sound, an 18th stop sound, and a 19th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach effect include the 15th stop sound, the 16th stop sound, and the 18th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive images 511 are regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sounds are also included.
In addition, the stop sounds that are output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach effect include a tenth stop sound and a seventeenth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the normal reach effect include the 12th stop sound and the 15th stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive image 511 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sound is also included.
Furthermore, during the execution of the SP reach effect, stop sounds that are output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, the thirteenth stop sound, and the twenty-fourth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or informing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stop sound, the ninth stop sound, and the twenty-third stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 8th stop sound, the 9th stop sound, the 13th stop sound, and the 23rd stop sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the third stage (third presentation mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during execution of the reach performance include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, a 21st stop sound, and a 22nd stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the reach effect include a first stop sound, a second stop sound, and a 21st stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive images 511 are regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sounds are also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach effect include a tenth stop sound and a twentieth stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the normal reach effect include a first stop sound, an eleventh stop sound, and a twelfth stop sound. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive images 511 are regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the pseudo consecutive stop sounds are also included.
In addition, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops during the execution of the SP reach effect include the third stop sound, the fourth stop sound, and the thirteenth stop sound. In addition, when the development image 521 is regarded as the decorative symbol 41, the development stop sound is also included.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SPSP reach performance includes a sixth stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or informing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows stop include the eighth stop sound, the ninth stop sound, and the twenty-third stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 8th stop sound, the 9th stop sound, the 13th stop sound, and the 23rd stop sound.

Next, the stopping sound output from the speaker 156 when the decorative pattern 41 stops in the fourth stage (fourth presentation mode) will be described.
The stop sounds output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the reach effect include the 25th stop sound and the 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sounds that are output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the reach effect include the 25th stop sound and the 28th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sound output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop during the execution of the normal reach effect includes a 26th stop sound.
In addition, the stop sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops during the execution of the SP reach performance is the 27th stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or informing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the decorative patterns 41 on the left and right rows stop include the 29th stop sound and the 30th stop sound.
In addition, during the execution of the effect suggesting or announcing that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the stop sounds output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops include the 29th stop sound and the 30th stop sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows are different from the stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row, or the number of types of stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the left and right rows is different from the number of types of stopping sounds of the decorative patterns 41 in the middle row.
In this case, various effects can be realized depending on the symbols that stop, which can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can output a first stop sound when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed in the first stage. Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 can output a sixth stop sound when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops in a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed in the first stage. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the manner of the sound effect output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops different between the first specific variable presentation (a losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed) and the losing variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed. Therefore, the impression given to the player by the stopping of the middle row decorative symbol 41 can be made different between a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed and a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed.
In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the middle row decorative symbol 41 stops common (for example, outputting the first stop sound) between the first specific variation presentation and the second specific variation presentation (a losing variation presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and neither an SP reach presentation nor an SPSP reach presentation is executed). Therefore, in the second specific variation presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from getting excessively hopeful despite the losing variation presentation.
In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the sound effect output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop common (for example, outputting the first stop sound) in the first specific variation presentation, the second specific variation presentation, and the third specific variation presentation (miss variation presentation in which the SP reach presentation or the SPSP reach presentation is executed). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the stop of the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows, regardless of the variation presentation.
In this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can make the stop sound output when the decorative symbols 41 in the left and right rows stop in a specific display mode (a highly decorative display mode) the same for the third specific variation presentation and the fourth specific variation presentation (jackpot variation presentation) (for example, outputting the first stop sound for both), and can make the stop sound output when the middle row decorative symbols 41 stop in a special display mode (a less decorative display mode) different (outputting the sixth stop sound for the third specific variation presentation and the eighth stop sound for the fourth specific variation presentation). Therefore, even if the middle row decorative symbols 41 stop in the same display mode, the impression that the middle row decorative symbols 41 make on the player can be made different between the third specific variation presentation and the fourth specific variation presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first to third stages, the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row decorative symbols 41 is greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. In this way, by providing more variety in the stop patterns of the middle row decorative symbols 41 than the stop patterns of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, the player can be more likely to notice the stopping of the middle row decorative symbols 41. Note that in the first to third stages, the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 may be greater than the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row of decorative symbols 41. In other words, it is sufficient that the number of types of stop sounds for the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 is different from the number of types of stop sounds for the middle row of decorative symbols 41 in the first to third stages.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop different between the first and second stages (e.g., the first stop sound and the fifteenth stop sound), and to make the stop sound output when the middle row of decorative symbols 41 stop the same (e.g., the third stop sound). It is also possible to make the stop sounds output when the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 stop different between the first and fourth stages (e.g., the first stop sound and the twenty-fifth stop sound), and to make the stop sounds output when the middle row of decorative symbols 41 stop different (e.g., the third stop sound and the twenty-seventh stop sound). This makes it easier for players to recognize the fourth stage as a stage with a different presentation from the first stage than the second stage.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special games and the illumination of the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) in red are more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 113 to 120, Figure 316)) is executed, than when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect (such as a temporary stop of decorative pattern 41, reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, zone effect, step effect, etc.) and before the SPSP reach effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105, Figure 314)).
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if the vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so the player can be made to have expectations throughout the entire variable performance period, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, if the special game and the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) are more likely to illuminate red when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in normal gaming mode than when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect from the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect is executed, then the special game and the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may illuminate red when a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed without a vibration effect from the start of a specific effect until the SPSP reach effect is executed in normal gaming mode, or the special game and the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may not illuminate red when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a button operation effect before the start of a specific effect is executed in normal gaming mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, special games and the illumination of the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) in red are more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a vibration effect is performed without a special effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect 13 (see Figures 113 to 120, Figure 316)) is executed, compared to when a variable effect in which a special effect is executed without a vibration effect from the start of a specific effect (such as a modified example of variable effect example 10 (see Figures 101 to 105, Figure 314)) is executed until the SPSP reach effect.
In this case, even if it is in the first half of the variable performance, if the vibration performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be significantly increased, so the player can be made to have expectations throughout the entire variable performance period, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, if the special game and the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) are more likely to illuminate red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in normal gaming mode than when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect and before the SPSP reach effect is executed, then the special game and the effect button 161 may illuminate red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed after the start of a specific effect and before the SPSP reach effect is executed in normal gaming mode, or the special game and the effect button 161 (button lamp 1611) may not illuminate red when a variable effect in which a reel effect is performed without a vibration effect is executed before the start of a specific effect in normal gaming mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of types of variable paths used is greater in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the excitement of the game can be increased through a variety of presentations.

Next, the relationship between the state of the presentation (presentation state) in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment and the rainbow light-emitting presentation that is executed will be described.
Figure 329 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the rainbow light-emitting presentation that is executed.

First, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the variable effect in the first stage.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emission mode, a second rainbow light emission mode, a third rainbow light emission mode, a fourth rainbow light emission mode, a fifth rainbow light emission mode, a sixth rainbow light emission mode, and a ninth rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 0.4 second cycle, 0.8 second cycle, 1 second cycle, and 2 second cycles.
In addition, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a first rainbow image 539, a second rainbow image 606, a third rainbow image 540, a fourth rainbow image 607, a sixth rainbow image 612, a seventh rainbow image 613, a ninth rainbow image 615, a tenth rainbow image 616, an eleventh rainbow image 617, a twelfth rainbow image 618, an eighteenth rainbow image 626, a rainbow reach line image 619, a rainbow reach notification image 620, and a rainbow-colored hold image 52 (changing image 51).

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the variable effect in the second stage.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emission mode, a second rainbow light emission mode, a third rainbow light emission mode, a fourth rainbow light emission mode, a fifth rainbow light emission mode, a sixth rainbow light emission mode, and a ninth rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 0.4 second cycle, 0.8 second cycle, 1 second cycle, and 2 second cycles.
In addition, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a first rainbow image 539, a second rainbow image 606, a third rainbow image 540, a fourth rainbow image 607, a sixth rainbow image 612, a ninth rainbow image 615, a thirteenth rainbow image 621, a fourteenth rainbow image 622, a fifteenth rainbow image 623, a sixteenth rainbow image 624, a seventeenth rainbow image 625, an eighteenth rainbow image 626, and a rainbow-colored pending image 52 (variable image 51).

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the variable effect in the third stage.
The rainbow light emitting modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emitting mode, a second rainbow light emitting mode, a third rainbow light emitting mode, a fourth rainbow light emitting mode, a fifth rainbow light emitting mode, and a sixth rainbow light emitting mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 0.4 second cycle, 0.8 second cycle, 1 second cycle, and 2 second cycles.
In addition, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a first rainbow image 539, a second rainbow image 606, a third rainbow image 540, a fourth rainbow image 607, a sixth rainbow image 612, a seventh rainbow image 613, a ninth rainbow image 615, an eighteenth rainbow image 626, and a rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51).

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the variable effect in the fourth stage.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emission mode, a second rainbow light emission mode, a third rainbow light emission mode, a fourth rainbow light emission mode, a fifth rainbow light emission mode, a sixth rainbow light emission mode, and a tenth rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 0.4 second cycle, 0.8 second cycle, 0.9 second cycle, 1 second cycle, and 2 second cycles.
In addition, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a 19th rainbow image 597, a 20th rainbow image 627, a 21st rainbow image 598, a 22nd rainbow image 628, a 25th rainbow image 634, a 26th rainbow image 635, a 27th rainbow image 636, a 28th rainbow image 637, a 29th rainbow image 638, a 32nd rainbow image 642, a 33rd rainbow image 643, and a rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51).

Next, the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed while the customer waiting effect is being performed will be described.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow mode that the lamp can operate in has a 1.5 second cycle.
Also, the rainbow image is not displayed while the customer waiting effect is being performed.

Next, the rainbow light emission effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the stopping of the jackpot symbol A will be described.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include the second rainbow light emission mode, the sixth rainbow light emission mode, and the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 1 second, 1.6 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.3 seconds.
Furthermore, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a fifth rainbow image 608 .

Next, the rainbow light emission effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the stopping of the jackpot symbol B will be described.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include the second rainbow light emission mode, the sixth rainbow light emission mode, and the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 1 second, 1.6 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.3 seconds.
Furthermore, the rainbow images that the image display unit 114 can display include a fifth rainbow image 608 .

Next, the rainbow light emission effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the stopping of the jackpot symbol C will be described.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include the second rainbow light emission mode, the sixth rainbow light emission mode, and the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 1 second, 1.6 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.3 seconds.
Furthermore, the rainbow images that image display unit 114 can display include an eighth rainbow image 614 .

Next, the rainbow light emission effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the stopping of the jackpot symbol D will be described.
The rainbow light emitting modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emitting mode, a second rainbow light emitting mode, a third rainbow light emitting mode, a sixth rainbow light emitting mode, a seventh rainbow light emitting mode, and an eighth rainbow light emitting mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 1 second, 1.6 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.3 seconds.
Furthermore, the rainbow images that image display unit 114 can display include a 23rd rainbow image 631 , a 24th rainbow image 632 , a 31st rainbow image 640 , a 36th rainbow image 646 , and a 37th rainbow image 647 .

Next, the rainbow light emission effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the stopping of the jackpot symbol E will be described.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emission mode, a second rainbow light emission mode, a third rainbow light emission mode, a fifth rainbow light emission mode, a sixth rainbow light emission mode, and a seventh rainbow light emission mode.
The rainbow light emission cycles that the lamp can perform include 1 second, 1.6 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.3 seconds.
In addition, the rainbow images that image display unit 114 can display include a 23rd rainbow image 631, a 30th rainbow image 639, a 31st rainbow image 640, a 34th rainbow image 644, a 35th rainbow image 645, a 36th rainbow image 646, and a 37th rainbow image 647.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when a big win game is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The jackpot game may include a first jackpot game in which a rainbow light-emitting effect is produced by any of the light-emitting means, and a second jackpot game in which the rainbow light-emitting effect produced by at least one of the light-emitting means is restricted. In addition, the light-emitting means in which the rainbow light-emitting effect is restricted in the second jackpot game may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the waiting state, only one rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the first lamp in one rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 81 (3) and FIG. 329), whereas during the execution of the variable effect, the first lamp executes rainbow light-emitting effects in multiple rainbow light-emitting modes (see FIG. 118 (46), (48), etc.). That is, the effect states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first effect state (such as the waiting state or when a jackpot game is being executed) and a second effect state different from the first effect state (such as when a variable effect is being executed), and the light-emitting means includes at least frame light-emitting means (such as the first lamp, the sixth lamp, the seventh lamp, the eleventh lamp, the fourteenth lamp, and the fifteenth lamp) that illuminates the game frame, and the second effect state has a greater number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed by the frame light-emitting means (such as the types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the types of cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes, and the types of execution times of the rainbow light-emitting effects) than the first effect state.
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the frame light-emitting means can increase the player's expectations for the game in both the first and second presentation states, while varying the way in which the expectations for the game are increased depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitted by each of the first to tenth rainbow light emission modes can be regarded as different rainbow light emission effect patterns.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effects of this embodiment include multiple rainbow light-emitting effects that share a common rainbow light-emitting pattern but have different cycles (for example, a second rainbow light-emitting pattern with a 1-second cycle, a second rainbow light-emitting pattern with a 2-second cycle, etc.) These multiple rainbow light-emitting effects can also be considered as effects with different rainbow light-emitting effect patterns.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are multiple rainbow light-emitting effects that have the same rainbow light-emitting mode and rainbow light-emitting mode cycle, but different execution times (light-emitting times) (for example, 11 seconds of light emission in the second rainbow light-emitting mode with a 2-second cycle (see time points T8 to T12 in FIG. 121 ), 15 seconds of light emission in the second rainbow light-emitting mode with a 2-second cycle (see time points T2 to T6 in FIG. 132 )). These multiple rainbow light-emitting effects can also be considered as effects with different rainbow light-emitting effect performance patterns.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that light is emitted in a plurality of rainbow light-emitting modes during one jackpot variation effect, one jackpot game, from the start of a jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect, etc. Here, a plurality of rainbow light-emitting effects that differ in at least one of the executed rainbow light-emitting effect, the cycle of the executed rainbow light-emitting mode, the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting mode, and the order of the executed rainbow light-emitting mode are considered to have different presentation patterns for the rainbow light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the waiting state, only one rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the seventh lamp in one rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 81 (3) and FIG. 329), whereas during the execution of the variable effect, multiple rainbow light-emitting effects are executed by the seventh lamp in multiple rainbow light-emitting modes (see FIG. 118 (46), (48), etc.). That is, the effect states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first effect state (such as the waiting state or when a jackpot game is being executed) and a second effect state different from the first effect state (such as when a variable effect is being executed), and the light-emitting means includes at least board light-emitting means for illuminating the game board (such as the second to fifth lamps, the seventh lamp, the tenth lamp, the twelfth lamp, and the thirteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and the number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed by the board light-emitting means is greater in the second effect state than in the first effect state (such as the types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the types of cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes, the types of execution times for the rainbow light-emitting effects, the types of rainbow images, and the types of display times for the rainbow images).
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the board light-emitting means can increase the player's expectations for the game in both the first and second presentation states, while varying the way in which the player's expectations for the game are increased depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the second lamp to the fifth lamp, etc. is not executed (see FIG. 81 (3)), whereas during the execution of the variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the second lamp to the fifth lamp, etc. is executed (see FIG. 118 (46)). In other words, the execution states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first execution state (customer waiting state, while a jackpot game is being executed, etc.) and a second execution state different from the first execution state (while a variable effect is being executed, etc.), and the number of rainbow light-emitting areas in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed (the number of light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect, the number of light-emitting elements that become in the rainbow light-emitting mode, etc.) differs between the first execution state and the second execution state.
In this way, by changing the way the rainbow light-emitting effect is presented to the player depending on the presentation state, the player can feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation states in which rainbow light-emitting effects can be executed include a first presentation state (such as a state waiting for customers or while a jackpot game is being played) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (such as while a variable presentation is being played), the light-emitting means includes at least an image display means (such as image display unit 114), the rainbow light-emitting effects include at least the display of a rainbow image having a specific display color, and the number of types of rainbow images that can be displayed by the image display means is greater in the second presentation state than in the first presentation state.
In this case, the display of the rainbow image can increase the player's expectations for the game in both the first and second presentation states, while allowing the way in which expectations for the game are increased to differ depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the waiting state for customers, only the rainbow light-emitting effect using one rainbow light-emitting mode is executed by the first lamp (see FIG. 81 (3) and FIG. 329), whereas during the execution of the variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect using multiple rainbow light-emitting modes is executed by the seventh lamp (see FIG. 118 (46), (48), etc.). That is, the effect states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first effect state (such as the waiting state for customers or while a jackpot game is being executed) and a second effect state different from the first effect state (such as while a variable effect is being executed), and the effect control unit 300 determines that the second light-emitting means in the second effect state has a greater number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect (such as types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes, types of execution times for the rainbow light-emitting effect, types of rainbow images, and types of display times for the rainbow images) than the first light-emitting means in the first effect state.
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effects of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means can increase the player's expectations for the game in both the first and second presentation states, while allowing the way in which expectations for the game are increased to differ depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable performance example 13, a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed by the first lamp (see Figure 118 (46)), and in variable performance example 19, a rainbow light-emitting performance of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed by the first lamp (see Figure 138 (22)). In other words, the presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the frame light-emitting means include a first presentation pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting mode, etc.) and a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, etc.), and the presentation control unit 300 is capable of at least executing the rainbow light-emitting presentation of the first presentation pattern by the frame light-emitting means from the time the first specific variation presentation starts until the time the next variation presentation of the first specific variation presentation starts (the first variation presentation after a jackpot game), and is capable of at least executing the rainbow light-emitting presentation of the second presentation pattern by the frame light-emitting means from the time the second specific variation presentation starts until the next variation presentation of the second specific variation presentation starts (the first variation presentation after a jackpot game).
In this case, by changing the way the rainbow light emitting effect by the frame light emitting means is presented to the player in accordance with the jackpot variation effect being executed, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light emitting effect by the frame light emitting means in accordance with the jackpot variation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable performance example 13, a rainbow light-emitting performance of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed by the seventh lamp (see Figure 118 (46)), and in variable performance example 19, a rainbow light-emitting performance of the ninth rainbow light-emitting mode is executed by the seventh lamp (see Figure 138 (22)). In other words, the presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the board light-emitting means include a first presentation pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific rainbow image, a specific display time of the rainbow image, etc.) and a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect different from the first presentation pattern, a rainbow image different from the first presentation pattern, a display time of the rainbow image different from the first presentation pattern, etc.), and the presentation control unit 300 is at least capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting presentation of the first presentation pattern by the board light-emitting means from the time the first specific variation presentation starts until the time the next variation presentation of the first specific variation presentation starts (the first variation presentation after a jackpot game), and is at least capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting presentation of the second presentation pattern by the board light-emitting means from the time the second specific variation presentation starts until the time the next variation presentation of the second specific variation presentation starts (the first variation presentation after a jackpot game).
In this case, by changing the way the rainbow light emitting effect by the board light emitting means is presented to the player according to the jackpot variation effect being executed, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light emitting effect by the board light emitting means according to the jackpot variation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (for example, any one of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (for example, a light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114 that is different from the first light-emitting means), and the presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first presentation state (a state in which customers are waiting, a jackpot game is being executed, etc.) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (a variable presentation is being executed, etc.), and the second presentation state has a larger number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that the first light-emitting means can execute (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes, types of execution times for the rainbow light-emitting effect, types of rainbow images, types of display times for the rainbow images, etc.) than the first presentation state.
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first light-emitting means or the second light-emitting means can be used to increase the player's expectations for the game in the first and second presentation states, while varying the way in which the expectations for the game are increased depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when waiting for customers, the rainbow light effect is executed by the first lamp, but the rainbow light effect is not executed by the second lamp (see Figure 81 (3)), whereas when the variable effect is being executed, the rainbow light effect is executed by the first lamp and the second lamp (see Figure 118 (46)). In other words, the presentation states in which rainbow light-emitting effects can be performed include a first presentation state (such as a state waiting for customers or while a jackpot game is being played) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (such as while a variable light-emitting effect is being played), and the light-emitting means include a first light-emitting means (for example, any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (for example, a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114, etc.), and the presentation control unit 300 can restrict at least one of the rainbow light-emitting effects by the first light-emitting means and the rainbow light-emitting effects by the second light-emitting means in one presentation state, and can perform both the rainbow light-emitting effects by the first light-emitting means and the rainbow light-emitting effects by the second light-emitting means in the second presentation state.
In this case, while increasing the player's expectations for the game in both the first and second presentation states, by varying the light-emitting means used for the rainbow light-emitting presentation depending on the presentation state, it is possible to vary the way in which expectations for the game are increased depending on the presentation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the above-mentioned phrase "in the first presentation state, at least one of the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the first light-emitting means or the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the second light-emitting means can be restricted" includes, when the "first presentation state" is defined as a "jackpot game," at least one of the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the first light-emitting means or the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the second light-emitting means can be restricted in at least one jackpot game among the jackpot games that can be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In this embodiment, during a jackpot game, the second lamp can be made to produce a longer rainbow light-emitting effect than the first lamp (see FIG. 122 ). That is, the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (e.g., any one of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and the presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be produced include at least a specific presentation state in which a variable presentation is not being produced (e.g., a waiting state, a jackpot game being played, etc.), and in the specific presentation state, the second light-emitting means produces a longer rainbow light-emitting effect than the first light-emitting means.
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effects can be diversified by varying the execution time of the light-emitting means when the variable effects are not being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, in the specific presentation state, the fact that the second light-emitting means has a longer execution time for the rainbow light-emitting effect than the first light-emitting means includes the fact that in the specific presentation state, the execution time for the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting means is 0 seconds (the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the fifth lamp longer than that of the sixth lamp during execution of the jackpot variable effect (see FIG. 121 ). That is, the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (e.g., any one of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and during execution of the specific variable effect, the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second light-emitting means is longer than the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting means.
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effects can be diversified during the execution of the variable effects by varying the execution time of the light-emitting means, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, the fact that the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second light-emitting means is longer than the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting means during the execution of the specific variable effect includes the fact that the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting means is 0 seconds during the execution of the specific variable effect (the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed).

In this embodiment, the execution period of the jackpot variation effect includes a plurality of periods with different numbers of light-emitting means for executing the rainbow light-emitting effect (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in FIG. 121 , etc.). That is, the effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect include a first effect pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific rainbow image, a specific display time of the rainbow image, etc.) and a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first effect pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first effect pattern, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect different from the first effect pattern, a rainbow image different from the first effect pattern, a display time of the rainbow image different from the first effect pattern, etc.), and the execution period of the specific variation effect includes a first period in which the light-emitting means executes the rainbow light-emitting effect using the first effect pattern and a second period in which the light-emitting means executes the rainbow light-emitting effect using the second effect pattern, and the first period has a larger number of rainbow light-emitting areas in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed (the number of light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect, the number of light-emitting elements in the rainbow light-emitting mode, etc.) than the second period.
In this way, by changing the way the rainbow light-emitting effect is presented to the player depending on the period during the jackpot fluctuation effect, the player can feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the progress of the jackpot fluctuation effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when waiting for customers, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode is executed, and when a variable effect is being executed, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode is executed. In other words, there are first rainbow light-emitting effects (rainbow light-emitting effects by a specific light-emitting means, a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific rainbow image, a specific display time of the rainbow image, etc.) and second rainbow light-emitting effects different from the first rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting effects by a different light-emitting means from the first rainbow light-emitting mode, a different rainbow light-emitting mode from the first rainbow light-emitting mode, a different cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode from the first rainbow light-emitting effect, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect different from the first rainbow light-emitting effect, a different rainbow image from the first rainbow light-emitting effect, a display time of the rainbow image different from the first rainbow light-emitting effect, etc.), and the performance states in which a rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first performance state in which a variable performance is being executed (e.g., while a variable performance is being executed), and a second performance state in which no hold memory is stored and no variable performance is being executed (e.g., a waiting state for customers), and the performance control unit 300 can execute at least the first rainbow light-emitting effect in the first performance state, and can execute at least the second rainbow light-emitting effect in the second performance state.
In this case, the player can feel the variety of rainbow light-emitting effects according to the presentation state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the waiting state for customers, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second lamp is not executed (see FIG. 81 (3)), whereas the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second lamp is executed while the variable effect is being executed (see FIG. 118 (46)). In other words, the execution state in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed includes a first execution state in which the variable effect is being executed (such as while the variable effect is being executed), and a second execution state in which no pending memory is stored and no variable effect is being executed (such as the waiting state for customers), and the execution control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) in the first execution state, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in the second execution state.
In this way, by making it possible to execute rainbow light-emitting effects in both the first and second presentation states, and by making it possible to execute rainbow light-emitting effects using specific light-emitting means depending on the presentation state, the player can feel the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the jackpot variable effect is executed is a period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed, and there are multiple periods during which the number of light-emitting means during which the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed differs from the customer waiting state (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in Figures 82 and 121, etc.). In other words, the presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first presentation state (such as a waiting state for customers) in which no pending memory is stored and no variable presentation is being executed, and a second presentation state (such as a variable presentation being executed) in which a variable presentation is being executed; in the second presentation state, the first presentation (vibration presentation, stopped display of decorative pattern 41, button operation presentation, role presentation, reach presentation, etc.) can be executed, and after the start of the first presentation, the second presentation (decisive button operation presentation, stopped display of decorative pattern 41 with double digits, promotion teaser presentation, etc.) can be executed; and the number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed (type of rainbow light-emitting mode, type of cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, type of execution time of rainbow light-emitting effect, type of rainbow image, type of display time of rainbow image, etc.) differs between the first presentation state and while the first presentation is being executed.
In this case, the player can feel the variety of rainbow light-emitting effects according to the presentation state and the progress of the currently executed presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable effect is started, the effect control unit 300 can display the effect pattern in a first display size (for example, the size shown in Figure 129 (2)), and can execute a predetermined effect (enlargement of the double-digit decorative pattern 41) that displays the effect pattern in a second display size (for example, the size shown in Figure 378 (1)) that is larger than the first display size, the effect patterns include a first effect pattern (for example, the left column decorative pattern 41) and a second effect pattern (for example, the middle column decorative pattern 41) that is displayed in a different position on the display means from the first effect pattern, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and can execute a specific variable effect based on the determination that a special game is being played, and can execute a specific effect that suggests that a special game is being played during the execution of the specific variable effect, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect during the execution of the specific effect, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means when the proportion of the second effect pattern on the display means is largest during the execution of the specific variable effect.
In this way, when a specific variable effect is executed, by switching between executing a rainbow light-emitting effect or restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect to further emphasize the effect pattern to the player depending on the progress of the effect, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of the effects in the specific variable effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (see Figure 119 (56)), and when the warning image 610 is displayed, a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (see Figure 120 (61)). That is, in a specific presentation state in which a variable presentation is not being performed (such as a state where customers are waiting, or while a jackpot game is being played), the presentation control unit 300 can display first specific character information (such as the demo image 605 shown in Figure 81 (3), the jackpot game notification image 542, the second right-hit image 543, and the number of rounds image 544) and second specific character information different from the first specific character information (such as the demo image 605 shown in Figures 81 (4) and (5), the first right-hit image 609, the time-saving start image 546, the warning image 610, and the company name image 611), and can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114) while the second specific character information is being displayed, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means while the second specific character information is being displayed.
In this way, by switching between executing the rainbow light-emitting effect or restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect to further emphasize the specific character information to the player depending on the content of the specific character information displayed, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of the effects in a specific effect state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the first mode, when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (see Figure 119 (51)), and when a warning image 610 is displayed, a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (see Figure 120 (61)). In other words, the presentation control unit 300 can display specific text information from the start of a specific variable presentation in a specific presentation mode (for example, any of the first to third stages) until the start of the next variable presentation after the specific variable presentation (the first variable presentation after a jackpot game), and can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114) when multiple presentation patterns are displayed in a specific sequence (double numbers) from the start of a specific variable presentation in a specific presentation mode until the start of the next variable presentation after the specific variable presentation, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means while specific text information (such as the first right-hit image 609, the time-saving start image 546, the warning image 610, or the company name image 611) is being displayed.
In this way, by switching between executing a rainbow light-emitting effect or restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect to emphasize to the player other effects that are different from the rainbow light-emitting effect, such as the display of specific text information, depending on the effect being executed, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of effects from the start of a specific variable effect in a specific effect mode to the start of the next variable effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the start of the jackpot variation effect and before the start of the next variation effect, there are times when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (see Figure 118 (45) etc.) and then the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (see Figure 120 (61) etc.). In other words, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a first presentation (a presentation that suggests or notifies that the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a jackpot) and a second presentation that can be started after the start of the first presentation (such as displaying the first right-hit image 609, displaying the time-saving start image 546, displaying the warning image 610, displaying the company name image 611, etc.) from the time a specific variable presentation in a specific presentation mode (such as any of the first to third stages) is started until the time the next variable presentation of the specific variable presentation is started (the first variable presentation after a jackpot game), and can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114) while the first presentation is being executed, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific light-emitting means while the second presentation is being executed.
When the rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed, the player focuses on the rainbow light-emitting effect, making it difficult for the player to focus on other effects that are different from the rainbow light-emitting effect. In this embodiment, however, by restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means while the second effect is being executed, it is possible to make the player focus on the second effect more easily, even after the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect, from the start of a specific variable effect in a specific effect mode until the start of the next variable effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the jackpot fluctuation effect ends (the jackpot game starts) and before the next fluctuation effect starts, there are times when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (see Figure 120 (59) etc.) but then the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (see Figure 120 (61) etc.). In other words, from the end of a specific variable effect until the start of the next variable effect after the specific variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can execute a first effect (displaying a jackpot game notification image 542, displaying a first right-hit image 609, displaying a second right-hit image 543, displaying a number of rounds image 544, etc.) and a second effect that can be started after the start of the first effect (displaying a time-saving start image 546, displaying a warning image 610, displaying a company name image 611, etc.), and from the end of a specific variable effect until the start of the next variable effect after the specific variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114) while the first effect is being executed, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means while the second effect is being executed.
In this case, from the end of the specific variable effect until the start of the next variable effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the second effect even after the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is executed), the presentation control unit 300 can change the light emitting means to a rainbow light emitting mode in a first cycle, and then change it to a rainbow light emitting mode in a second cycle that is longer than the first cycle (see time T2 to time T3 and time T4 to time T5 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, the rainbow light emitting mode is repeated in a short cycle to further enhance the player's sense of excitement, and then the rainbow light emitting mode is repeated in a long cycle to make it easier for the player to recognize the rainbow light emitting effect, allowing the player to easily immerse themselves in the afterglow of the rainbow light emitting effect.

The light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be the same light-emitting means or different rainbow light-emitting means. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle are not limited to the above-described example. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The first cycle and the second cycle may be any time period that satisfies the above relationship. The light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the light emitting means is changed to the rainbow light emitting mode in a first cycle and then changed to the rainbow light emitting mode in a second cycle longer than the first cycle is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot variation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is executed), the presentation control unit 300 can change the light emitting means to a rainbow light emitting mode in a first cycle, and then change it to a rainbow light emitting mode in a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle (see time T4' to time T5' and time T5' to time T6' in Figure 150, etc.).
In this case, by repeating the rainbow light emitting mode at a long cycle, the player can be sure to recognize the rainbow light emitting effect, and therefore even if the rainbow light emitting mode is subsequently performed at a short cycle, the player can easily recognize that this short cycle rainbow light emitting mode is a rainbow light emitting effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that multiple modes of rainbow light emitting effects have been performed.

The light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be the same light-emitting means or different rainbow light-emitting means. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle are not limited to the above-described example. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The first cycle and the second cycle may be any time period that satisfies the above relationship. The light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the first cycle and the light-emitting means that changes to the rainbow light-emitting mode in the second cycle may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the light emitting means is changed to the rainbow light emitting mode in a first cycle and then changed to the rainbow light emitting mode in a second cycle shorter than the first cycle is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot variation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a specific rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), then execute a non-rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the rainbow light-emitting mode, and then execute a predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting effect (such as a different rainbow light-emitting mode or a different cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode) (see time points T10 to T13 in Figure 289).
In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise that a predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect will be executed, and the impact of the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect can be prevented from being weakened compared to a specific rainbow light-emitting effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can synchronize and execute non-rainbow light emission modes between a specific rainbow light emission performance and a predetermined rainbow light emission performance using multiple light emission means (see time T11 to time T12 in Figure 289, etc.).
In this case, even when the light emitting means is in a non-rainbow light emitting mode, it is possible to realize an impactful effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is not only capable of executing a specific rainbow light-emitting performance during a specific period, followed by a non-rainbow light-emitting performance, and then executing a predetermined rainbow light-emitting performance, but is also capable of executing a specific rainbow light-emitting performance during a specific period, followed by a predetermined rainbow light-emitting performance without executing a non-rainbow light-emitting performance (see time points T2 to T4 in Figure 140, etc.).
When the rainbow light-emitting mode is changed without going through the effect of a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rainbow light-emitting mode has switched. In other words, in this embodiment, when the rainbow light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means is changed, depending on whether or not the effect of a non-rainbow light-emitting mode is used, it is possible to switch between suppressing the weakening of the impact of a predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect compared to a specific rainbow light-emitting effect and making it easier for the player to recognize that the rainbow light-emitting effect has switched.

The light-emitting means for producing the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the light-emitting means for producing the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect are not limited to the above-mentioned examples. The specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may have the same rainbow light-emitting mode as long as the cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes are different, or may have the same cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode as long as the cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes are different, or the cycles of the rainbow light-emitting mode and the rainbow light-emitting mode may both be different. The cycles of the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may be any time period as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the first through tenth rainbow light-emitting modes as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied. Furthermore, the light-emitting means for producing the rainbow light-emitting effect of the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means for producing the rainbow light-emitting effect of the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 is capable of synchronizing the rainbow light emission modes of multiple light-emitting means (simultaneously setting multiple light-emitting means to a common rainbow light emission mode) during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being executed).
In this case, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a sense of unity can be achieved using a plurality of light-emitting means, thereby making the impact of the rainbow light-emitting effect on the player even greater.

The plurality of light-emitting means whose rainbow light-emitting modes are synchronized are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light emission modes of the plurality of light-emitting means can be synchronized is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot variation effect, and may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being performed), then execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode, and then execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation using the specific rainbow light-emitting mode again (see time points T2 to T6 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects, and the rainbow light-emitting effects resulting from a specific rainbow light-emitting mode can be more emphasized to the player, so that the effect when the rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode can be made to leave a deeper impression on the player.

The light-emitting means that changes to the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means that changes to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode are not limited to the above-mentioned examples. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle. The light-emitting means that changes to the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means that changes to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The specific rainbow light-emitting mode performed before changing to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode and the specific rainbow light-emitting mode performed after changing to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect based on a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect based on a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting effect based on another specific rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is being executed), the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode, and then change to a specific light-emitting mode that is different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode again (see time points T2 to T6 in Figure 140, etc.).
In this case, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects and the surprise of the rainbow light-emitting effect being performed again in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the effect when the rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode can be made to leave a deeper impression on the player.

The light-emitting means that changes to a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting means that changes to a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light-emitting means that changes to a specific light-emitting mode may all be the same light-emitting means or different rainbow light-emitting means. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode are not limited to the examples described above. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may have the same cycle or different cycles. The light-emitting means that changes to a specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means that changes to a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode before changing to a specific light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode after changing to a specific light-emitting mode may have the same cycle or different cycles.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect by a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, the specific light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode again can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation for a first time (e.g., 1 second) during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is executed), and then execute the rainbow light-emitting presentation for a second time (e.g., 5 seconds) that is longer than the first time (see time points T2 to T5 in Figure 121).
In this case, the player feels more excited when the rainbow light-emitting effect with a first execution time is executed, to the extent that the player feels sad that the rainbow light-emitting effect with a second execution time is finished.

The light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. The rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour are not limited to the above-described examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode, different rainbow light-emitting modes, rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle, or rainbow light-emitting modes with different cycles. The light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the first-hour rainbow light-emitting effect and the second-hour rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In particular, in this embodiment, during a specific period (the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed, the period during which a jackpot game is executed, the period from when a jackpot variable effect is started until the next variable effect is started (until the jackpot game ends), etc.), the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting mode of a first cycle for a first time (e.g., 1 second), and then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle longer than the first cycle for a second time longer than the first time (e.g., 5 seconds) (see time points T2 to T5 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, the player feels more excited when the rainbow light-emitting effect with an execution time of the second hour is executed, since the player feels sad that the rainbow light-emitting effect with an execution time of the first hour is coming to an end, and the player can be made to more reliably recognize that the effect with an execution time of the second hour is a rainbow light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using the rainbow light-emitting mode of a first cycle for a first time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using the rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle for a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the first time (see time points T4 to T6 in Figure 283).
In this case, it is possible to allow the player to sense the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects, while preventing the player from becoming bored with the rainbow light-emitting effects.

Note that the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour are not limited to the above-mentioned examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour may be any of the first rainbow light-emitting mode to the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode performed for the second hour may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the first-hour rainbow light-emitting effect and the second-hour rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), the effect control unit 300 executes a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first time (e.g., 3 seconds), then executes a rainbow light-emitting effect using a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern different from the specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the first time, and further executes a rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting pattern different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a third time (e.g., 6 seconds) that is longer than the first time (see times T4 to T5, T6 to T7, T8 to T9, etc. in Figure 283).
In this case, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light emitting effects, and can be excited without getting bored even when the third rainbow light emitting effect, which takes a long time to be executed, is executed, to the extent that the player feels sad to see the second rainbow light emitting effect, which takes a short time to be executed, come to an end.

Note that the light-emitting means that produces a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting means that produces a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light-emitting means that produces a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may all be the same light-emitting means or different rainbow light-emitting means. Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode are not limited to the examples described above. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. In addition, the light-emitting means that exhibits a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting means that exhibits a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light-emitting means that exhibits a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the first hour rainbow light-emitting effect, the second hour rainbow light-emitting effect, and the third hour rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first time (e.g., 1 second) during execution of a first jackpot variation effect, and execute a rainbow light-emitting effect of a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern different from the specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a second time (e.g., 5 seconds) different from the first time (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in FIG. 121 ). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first time during execution of a second jackpot variation effect different from the first jackpot variation effect, and execute a rainbow light-emitting effect of a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a third time (e.g., 3 seconds) different from the second time (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in FIG. 283 ).
In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode can make a deeper impression on the player, and even if a rainbow light-emitting effect of a common rainbow light-emitting mode is executed when the first variable effect is executed and when the second variable effect is executed, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the variable effect executed.

The light-emitting means that produces the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means that produces the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode are not limited to the examples described above. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. The light-emitting means that produces the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the light-emitting means that produces the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The first and second times may be longer than each other as long as they are different periods. The second and third times may be longer than each other as long as they are different periods. The first and third times may be the same or different periods.
In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first hour during the execution of a first jackpot game, and then executing a rainbow light-emitting effect with a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a second hour, and of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first hour during the execution of a second jackpot game that is different from the first jackpot game, and then executing a rainbow light-emitting effect with a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a third hour.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 may be capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first hour, and then executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a second hour, from the start of the first jackpot variation presentation until the start of the next variation presentation (until the end of the jackpot game), and of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern for a first hour, and then executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a predetermined rainbow light-emitting pattern for a third hour, from the start of the second jackpot variation presentation until the start of the next variation presentation (until the end of the jackpot game).

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being executed), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of causing the second light-emitting means to not execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation when causing the first light-emitting means to execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation, and of causing the second light-emitting means to execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation when causing the first light-emitting means to execute a rainbow light-emitting presentation (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in Figure 283, etc.).
In this case, depending on the progress of the presentation during the specific period, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the first light-emitting means and increasing the impact of the rainbow light-emitting presentation.

The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may all be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect are not limited to the above-described examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode, may be different rainbow light-emitting modes, may have the same cycle, or may have different cycles. Furthermore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the second light-emitting means is not caused to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is causing the rainbow light-emitting effect, and during which the second light-emitting means is allowed to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is causing the rainbow light-emitting effect, is not limited to the period during which a jackpot variation effect is performed. The specific period may be the period during which a jackpot game is performed, the period from the start of a jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 300 causes the first light-emitting means to perform a rainbow light-emitting performance while causing the second light-emitting means to perform a rainbow light-emitting performance, it is possible to make the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means emit rainbow light with the same period.
In this case, by increasing the sense of unity of the rainbow light-emitting effect that is simultaneously produced by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means, the impact of the rainbow light-emitting effect can be made greater.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being performed), the presentation control unit 300 is capable of not causing the second light-emitting means to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation when the first light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a first cycle, and of causing the second light-emitting means to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation when the first light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle different from the first cycle (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in Figure 283, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the first light-emitting means and increasing the impact of the rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the progress of the effect during a specific period. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means does not change whether the second light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect or not, it is possible to make the player feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect provided by the first light-emitting means.

The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may all be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect are not limited to the above-described examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the first light-emitting means is performing a second-cycle rainbow light-emitting mode may be a second-cycle rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting mode with a cycle different from the second cycle, or a non-periodic rainbow light-emitting mode. Furthermore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the second light-emitting means is not allowed to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is causing the first light-emitting means to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a first cycle, and during which the second light-emitting means is allowed to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is causing the rainbow light-emitting effect in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle different from the first cycle, is not limited to the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is performed. The specific period may be the period during which a jackpot game is performed, the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a first number of light-emitting means during a specific period (such as a period during which a variable jackpot effect is being performed), and then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a second number of light-emitting means that is less than the first number. In other words, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in a first number of light-emitting areas during a specific period, and then execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in a second number of light-emitting areas that is less than the first number (see time points T4 to T6 in FIG. 121 ).
In this case, compared to a configuration in which a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) before a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas), the impact on the player when a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be made greater to the extent that the player is not accustomed to the rainbow light-emitting effect. Also, compared to a configuration in which the number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) that execute the rainbow light-emitting effect does not decrease regardless of the progress of the effect during a specific period, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be made less annoying to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is being performed), the effect control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a first number of light-emitting means, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a second number of light-emitting means that is greater than the first number. In other words, during the execution of a variable effect, the effect control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a first number of light-emitting areas, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a second number of light-emitting areas that is greater than the first number (see time points T2 to T5 in FIG. 121 ).
In this case, the sense of excitement that the rainbow light-emitting effect gives to the player can be gradually increased as the variable effect progresses.

The light-emitting means corresponding to the first and second number of light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The first and second number of light-emitting regions may be any of the light-emitting regions of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can, during a specific period (such as a period during which a variable jackpot effect is being performed), perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a first number of light-emitting means, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a second number of light-emitting means that is greater than the first number, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a third number of light-emitting means that is less than the second number. In other words, during a specific period, the effect control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a first number of light-emitting areas, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a second number of light-emitting areas that is greater than the first number, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a third number of light-emitting areas that is less than the second number (see time points T2 to T6 in FIG. 121 ).
In this case, the sense of excitement that the rainbow light-emitting effect gives to the player can be increased as the effect progresses during the specific period, while the rainbow light-emitting effect can be prevented from being annoying to the player.

The light-emitting means corresponding to the first, second, and third number of light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The first, second, and third number of light-emitting regions may be any of the light-emitting regions of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas), the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas), and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the third number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can, during a specific period (such as a period during which a variable jackpot effect is being performed), perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a first number of light-emitting means, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a second number of light-emitting means that is less than the first number, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a third number of light-emitting means that is more than the second number. In other words, during a specific period, the effect control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a first number of light-emitting areas, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a second number of light-emitting areas that is less than the first number, and then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a third number of light-emitting areas that is more than the second number (see time points T4 to T7 in FIG. 121 ).
In this case, the impact on the player when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be made greater, and the sense of exhilaration that the rainbow light-emitting effect gives to the player can be increased as the effect progresses over a specific period, while preventing the rainbow light-emitting effect from being an annoyance to the player.

In particular, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can, during a specific period (such as a period during which a variable jackpot effect is being performed), perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a first number of light-emitting means, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a second number of light-emitting means that is less than the first number, and further perform a rainbow light-emitting effect using a third number of light-emitting means that is more than the first number. In other words, during a specific period, the effect control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a first number of light-emitting areas, then perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a second number of light-emitting areas that is less than the first number, and further perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in a third number of light-emitting areas that is more than the first number (see time points T2 to T5 in FIG. 121 ).
In this case, the impact on the player when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) is made greater, and the rainbow light-emitting effect is prevented from being annoying to the player, while the player can be excited about the third rainbow light-emitting effect without getting bored.

The light-emitting means corresponding to the first, second, and third number of light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The first, second, and third number of light-emitting regions may be any of the light-emitting regions of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas), the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas), and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the third number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being performed), the presentation control unit 300 can cause the second light-emitting means to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation when the first light-emitting means is not performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation, and can prevent the second light-emitting means from performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation when the first light-emitting means is performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation (see time points T5 to T7 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, by switching the light emitting means that draws the player's attention depending on the progress of the presentation during a specific period, the player can be made to experience a wider range of presentations from the pachinko gaming machine 100.

The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the first light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect may be the same or different, or may have the same or different cycles. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the first light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect are not limited to the above-described examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting means when the second light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second light-emitting means when the first light-emitting means is not performing the rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the second light-emitting means can be made to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is not being made to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect, and the second light-emitting means can be made not to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect when the first light-emitting means is being made to perform the rainbow light-emitting effect, is not limited to the period during which a jackpot variation effect is performed. The specific period may be the period during which a jackpot game is performed, the period from the start of a jackpot variation effect to the start of the next variation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using a first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using a second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) that is less than the first number while the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is being displayed, or not execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using the light-emitting means (times T4 to T5 and time points T7 to T8 in Figure 121).
In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement even before the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed, and to draw the player's attention to the doublet decorative pattern 41 more.

In addition, during execution of the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using a first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is in a first display mode, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using a second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) that is greater than the first number when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is in a second display mode that is different from the first display mode.
In this case, depending on the display mode of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, it is possible to switch between giving the player a sense of excitement through the rainbow light-emitting effect and drawing the player's attention more to the double-digit decorative pattern 41.

In addition, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being performed), the presentation control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, and can perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation using a second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) that is less than the first number after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, or can not perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation using the light-emitting means (times T4 to T5 and times T7 to T8 in Figure 121).
In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement even before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed, and it is possible to change the way in which the player focuses on the rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the progress of the effect during a specific period.

The light-emitting means corresponding to the first and second number of light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The first and second number of light-emitting regions may be any of the light-emitting regions of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second number of light-emitting means (light-emitting areas) can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a specific period during which an effect can be executed (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), and the specific period includes a first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 77 is executed) and a second specific period that is shorter than the first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 71 is executed), and the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect during the first specific period, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect during the second specific period using a specific light-emitting means (such as the second lamp (left movable role object 1151)) that does not execute a rainbow light-emitting effect during the first specific period.
In this case, not only can the player be made to anticipate which effect will be executed, but also the player can be given a sense of anticipation as to which light-emitting means will be used to execute the rainbow light-emitting effect.

The specific light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
The specific period may also be the period during which a jackpot game is played. In this case, the first specific period is the period during which a specific jackpot game is played, and the second specific period is the period during which a predetermined jackpot game different from the specific jackpot game is played. The specific period may also be the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends). In this case, the first specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is a predetermined time, and the second specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is different from the first specific period.

In this embodiment, the variation effects in both the first and fourth stages include a jackpot variation effect in which a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle, and a jackpot variation effect in which a rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle is not executed. Here, it may be configured so that a rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) is more likely to be executed during a specific period (such as the execution period of a jackpot variation effect) when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage) than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting pattern with a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be more likely that a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a rainbow light-emitting pattern at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) will be performed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot variation presentation is performed) when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation where the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "777" are lined up) is performed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation where the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "444" are lined up) is performed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp from the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) to perform a rainbow light-emitting performance with a rainbow light-emitting pattern at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable performance is performed) than for a specific lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) (at a specific stage (any of the first stage to the fourth stage)).

In this case, the way in which the player focuses on the rainbow light-emitting effect due to the rainbow light-emitting pattern at a specific cycle can be varied depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of lamp, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

The lamp that performs the rainbow light emission effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light emission may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The specific lamp and the predetermined lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific period is not limited to 0.4 seconds, and may be any of the periods described above.
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed than when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle is not executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle is always executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle may be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed than when the jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed. In other words, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle in a specific period may be different between when the jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed and when the jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed than when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, in a specific presentation mode, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed.

Furthermore, the phrase "a specific lamp is more likely to produce a rainbow light effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light emission than a specific lamp" (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)) includes the possibility that a specific lamp will not produce a rainbow light effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light emission during a specific period (0%), and the possibility that a specific lamp will always produce a rainbow light effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light emission during a specific period (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)). However, it is possible that a specific lamp will produce a rainbow light effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light emission during a specific period (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)), and it is also possible that a specific lamp will not produce a rainbow light effect in a specific cycle of rainbow light emission during a specific period (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)).

In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be more likely that a rainbow light-emitting presentation with a specific rainbow light-emitting mode will be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variation presentation is being performed) when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "777" are lined up) is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "444" are lined up) is executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp from the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) to perform a rainbow light-emitting performance with a specific rainbow light-emitting mode during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable performance is being performed) than for a specific lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) (in a specific stage (any of the first stage to the fourth stage)).

In this case, the way in which the player focuses on the rainbow light-emitting effect due to a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern can be varied depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of lamp, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, allowing the player to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

The lamp that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511). The specific lamp and the predetermined lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
Furthermore, the specific rainbow light emission mode may be any one of the first to tenth rainbow light emission modes.
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed than when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is not executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is always executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern may be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the first presentation mode is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect in the second presentation mode is executed.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern to be executed in a specific period different between when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific rainbow light-emitting pattern to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the phrase "a rainbow light effect in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is more likely to be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period of time (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)) than by a predetermined lamp" includes the possibility that a rainbow light effect in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode will not be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period of time (0%) (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)), and the possibility that a rainbow light effect in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode will always be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period of time (100%) (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)). However, it is possible that a rainbow light effect in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode will be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period of time (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)), and it is also possible that a rainbow light effect in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode will not be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period of time (at a specific stage (any of stages 1 to 4)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a specific period during which an effect can be executed (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), and the specific period includes a first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 71 is executed) and a second specific period that is shorter than the first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 77 is executed), and the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in the first specific period, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle (for example, 0.9 seconds) that is not executed in the first specific period, in the second specific period.
In this case, the player is not only made to anticipate whether or not a jackpot variation effect will be executed, but also given a sense of anticipation as to which cycle of rainbow light emission mode will result in the execution of the rainbow light emission effect.

In addition, the light-emitting means that performs the rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting pattern with a specific cycle may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
The specific period may be any of the periods described above.
The specific period may also be the period during which a jackpot game is played. In this case, the first specific period is the period during which a specific jackpot game is played, and the second specific period is the period during which a predetermined jackpot game different from the specific jackpot game is played. The specific period may also be the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends). In this case, the first specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is a predetermined time, and the second specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is different from the first specific period.

In this embodiment, the variation effects in both the first and fourth stages include a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect takes a longer time to execute before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41, and a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect takes a shorter time to execute before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41. Here, it may be configured so that a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific lamp or all lamps takes a longer time to execute before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 is more likely to be executed when a jackpot variation effect in the second presentation mode (the other of the first and fourth stages) is executed than when a jackpot variation effect in the first presentation mode (either the first or fourth stage) is executed.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) to execute a performance in which the rainbow light-emitting performance takes a longer time to execute before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41) (in a specific stage (any of the first stage to the fourth stage)).
In this case, depending on the type of effect to be executed such as the type of effect mode or the type of lamp, it is possible to vary the expectation of the execution of the big win variable effect that gives an uplifting feeling by the long rainbow light emission effect even before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41.
In addition, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).

Furthermore, the fact that a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed is more likely to be executed when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed is never executed (0%), and that when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed is always executed (100%). However, when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed may be executed, and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed may not be executed.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode compared to when the jackpot variation effect in the second presentation mode is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a jackpot variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by either a specific lamp or all of the lamps is executed for a longer time before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 when the jackpot variation effect in the first presentation mode is executed and when the jackpot variation effect in the second presentation mode is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp is more likely to execute an effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed includes (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a performance in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific lamp is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed is never executed (0%), and (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a performance in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific lamp is executed for a longer time before the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed than after the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed is always executed (100%). However, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be the case that an effect in which a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specified lamp is executed for a longer time before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, or (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be the case that an effect in which a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specified lamp is executed for a longer time before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, is not executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp may be more likely to execute an effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect takes a longer time to execute before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41, than a specific lamp. In other words, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp may be more likely to execute an effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect takes a longer time to execute before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 than after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41.

In addition, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is being performed), when the presentation control unit 300 is performing a rainbow light-emitting presentation of the first light-emitting means in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle, the presentation control unit 300 can perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation of the second light-emitting means in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle that is different from the first cycle (see time points T4 to T5 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to realize a rainbow light-emitting effect that is complex while increasing the impact, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle may be the same or different. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle are not limited to the examples described above. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. Furthermore, as long as the first cycle and the second cycle are different cycles, either one may be longer.
Furthermore, when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first light-emitting means is being executed in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle, the specific period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second light-emitting means can be executed in the rainbow light-emitting mode of a second cycle different from the first cycle is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable presentation is executed), the presentation control unit 300 can cause two (multiple) light-emitting means to emit rainbow light with the same cycle during a first period, and can cause two (multiple) light-emitting means to emit rainbow light with different cycles during a second period different from the first period (see time points T4 to T5 and time points T8 to T9 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, depending on the progress of the presentation during a specific period, it is possible to switch between a more unified rainbow light-emitting presentation and a more complex rainbow light-emitting presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light-emitting means that exhibit a rainbow light-emitting mode with the same cycle during the first period and the light-emitting means that exhibit a rainbow light-emitting mode with a different cycle during the second period may be the same light-emitting means, or may be different light-emitting means, or some of the light-emitting means may be the same and some of the light-emitting means may be different. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the two (plural) light-emitting means during the first period and the two (plural) light-emitting means during the second period are not limited to the above-described examples. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the two (plural) light-emitting means during the first period may be the same or different rainbow light-emitting modes. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the two (plural) light-emitting means during the second period may be the same or different rainbow light-emitting modes. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the light-emitting means during the first period and the rainbow light-emitting modes of the light-emitting means during the second period may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the light emitting means that changes to the rainbow light emitting mode with the same cycle in the first period and the light emitting means that changes to the rainbow light emitting mode with a different cycle in the second period may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. Furthermore, the cycle of the rainbow light emitting mode in the first period and the cycle of the rainbow light emitting mode in the second period may be the same cycle or different cycles.
Furthermore, the specific period including the first period and the second period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a specific period during which the effect can be executed (such as the period during which the jackpot variable effect is executed), and the specific period includes a first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 21 is executed) and a second specific period that is shorter than the first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 77 is executed), and the effect control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting effect for a first time during the first specific period, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting effect for a second time during the second specific period that is longer than the first time.
In this case, even if the specific period is short, the player's sense of excitement regarding the rainbow light-emitting effect can be further enhanced.

The light-emitting means that produces the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that produces the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode for the second hour are not limited to the above-described example. The rainbow light-emitting mode for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode for the second hour may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes, or rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode for the first hour and the rainbow light-emitting mode for the second hour may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the light-emitting means that produces the rainbow light-emitting effect for the first hour and the light-emitting means that produces the rainbow light-emitting effect for the second hour may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
The specific period may also be the period during which a jackpot game is played. In this case, the first specific period is the period during which a specific jackpot game is played, and the second specific period is the period during which a predetermined jackpot game is played that is longer than the first specific period. The specific period may also be the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends). In this case, the first specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is a predetermined time, and the second specific period is the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), which is longer than the first specific period.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a specific period during which an effect can be executed (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), and the specific period includes a first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 13 is executed) and a second specific period that is shorter than the first specific period (for example, the period during which the variable effect in variable effect example 78 is executed), and the effect control unit 300 can cause the first light-emitting means (for example, the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period (for example, 24 seconds) during the first specific period, and can cause the second light-emitting means (for example, the 11th lamp (right frame lamp 1575)) to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period (for example, 9 seconds) during the second specific period.
In this case, by varying the light-emitting means that produces the longest rainbow light-emitting effect during the execution of the variable effect depending on the variable effect, the player can be made to pay attention to each light-emitting means evenly, making it easier for the player to sense the diversity of the effects.

The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. The rainbow light-emitting mode at the first time and the rainbow light-emitting mode at the second time are not limited to the above-mentioned examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode at the first time and the rainbow light-emitting mode at the second time may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode, or different rainbow light-emitting modes, or rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. The rainbow light-emitting mode at the first time and the rainbow light-emitting mode at the second time may be any of the first rainbow light-emitting mode to the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode.
The specific period may also be the execution period of a jackpot game. In this case, the first specific period and the second specific period may be either of the jackpot games, as long as they are execution periods of two jackpot games with different execution periods. The specific period may also be the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends). In this case, the first specific period and the second specific period may be the execution period of either of the jackpot fluctuation effects and jackpot games, as long as the period from the start of a jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends) is different.

In addition, in variation presentation example 13 (see FIGS. 113 to 120), the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) performs the longest rainbow light-emitting presentation during the execution of the jackpot variation presentation, whereas the 2nd lamp (left movable role device 1151) and the like perform the longest rainbow light-emitting presentation during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 differentiates the lamp that performs the longest rainbow light-emitting presentation during the execution of the jackpot variation presentation from the lamp that performs the longest rainbow light-emitting presentation during the execution of the jackpot game.
In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to each light-emitting means evenly depending on the type of effect, making it easier for the player to sense the diversity of the effects.

The lamp that performs the longest rainbow light effect during the jackpot variable effect and the lamp that performs the longest rainbow light effect during the jackpot game can be different lamps, and can be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).

In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to execute an effect in which a specific light-emitting means executes a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period of time during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (either the first stage or the fourth stage).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for an effect in which a specific light-emitting means performs a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game to be executed when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be easier to execute a presentation in which a specific light-emitting means executes a rainbow light-emitting presentation for the longest period of time during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variation presentation is being performed) when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "777" are lined up) is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative patterns 41 "444" are lined up) is executed.

In this case, the player's expectations for the execution of a rainbow light-emitting effect that most emphasizes a specific light-emitting means can be varied depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period may be executed when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to execute an effect in which a specific light-emitting means executes a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period of time when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier to execute an effect in which a specific light-emitting means executes a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period of time when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot game is executed, and the fact that an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot game is executed. However, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game may be executed when a first jackpot game is executed, and an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of a jackpot game may not be executed when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the effect in which the specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of the jackpot game may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the ease with which the effect in which the specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest period during the execution of the jackpot game may be made to differ between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that in a specific presentation mode, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed includes the fact that when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is not executed (0%), and the fact that when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period is always executed (100%). However, when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period may be executed, and when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, an effect in which a specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting effect for the longest time in a specific period may not be executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the presentation in which the specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting presentation for the longest period of time may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of executing the presentation in which the specific light-emitting means produces a rainbow light-emitting presentation for the longest period of time may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is being executed), when the effect control unit 300 is executing a rainbow light-emitting effect using the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific cycle of a first light-emitting means (for example, the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511)), it is possible to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle of a second light-emitting means (for example, the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611)) different from the first light-emitting means, and a rainbow light-emitting effect using the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle (see time points T4 to T6 in Figure 121, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to switch between a light emitting means that makes it easier for the player to recognize that a rainbow light emitting effect is being executed and a light emitting means that makes it easier for the player to sense the diversity of the rainbow light emitting effect, depending on the light emitting means that the player focuses on.

The rainbow light-emitting mode of the specific cycle, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle are not limited to the above examples. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the specific cycle, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle may all be the same rainbow light-emitting mode or different rainbow light-emitting modes. Some of them may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode and other parts may be different rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the specific cycle, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. Furthermore, the specific cycle and the first cycle may be the same cycle or different cycles. Furthermore, the specific cycle and the second cycle may be the same cycle or different cycles. Furthermore, the first period and the second period may be longer than the other period as long as they are different periods. Furthermore, the light-emitting means for producing the rainbow light-emitting effect in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first period and the light-emitting means for producing the rainbow light-emitting effect in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second period may be the same light-emitting means or different light-emitting means.
Furthermore, the specific period during which the specific cycle rainbow light-emitting mode, the first cycle rainbow light-emitting mode, and the second cycle rainbow light-emitting mode are performed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

In addition, during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect whose execution time is shorter than one cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect whose execution time is one cycle or more of the rainbow light-emitting mode (see time points T2 to T3 and time points T4 to T5 in Figure 135, etc.).
In this way, by executing a rainbow light-emitting effect that has an execution time shorter than one cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode, it is possible to realize a novel effect that leaves the player with the impression that a rainbow light-emitting effect has been executed, even though it is uncertain. Also, because a rainbow light-emitting effect that has an execution time longer than one cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode is executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the player not being aware that the rainbow light-emitting effect has been executed.

Note that the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time shorter than one cycle and the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time of one or more cycles are not limited to the examples described above. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time shorter than one cycle and the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time of one or more cycles may be the same rainbow light-emitting mode, different rainbow light-emitting modes, rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle, or rainbow light-emitting modes with different cycles. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time shorter than one cycle and the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time of one or more cycles may be any of the first through tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The light-emitting means that perform the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time shorter than one cycle and the light-emitting means that perform the rainbow light-emitting effects having an execution time of one or more cycles may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. Furthermore, the light emitting means that performs the rainbow light emitting effect with an execution time shorter than one cycle and the light emitting means that performs the rainbow light emitting effect with an execution time of one cycle or more may be the same light emitting means or different light emitting means.
Furthermore, the specific period during which a rainbow light-emitting effect whose execution time is shorter than one cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode and a rainbow light-emitting effect whose execution time is equal to or longer than one cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect. The specific period may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, during the execution of the first variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a first time period before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a second time period longer than the first time period after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 (see time points T3 to T4 and T4 to T7 in FIG. 305, etc.). Furthermore, during the execution of the second variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a third time period before the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a fourth time period shorter than the third time period after the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41 (see time points T2 to T7 and T7 to T12 in FIG. 121, etc.).
In this case, the timing to further enhance the sense of excitement can be varied depending on the variable presentation, whether it is before or after the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the double digits, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects executed for the first hour, the second hour, the third hour, and the fourth hour are not limited to the examples described above. The rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects executed for the first hour, the second hour, the third hour, and the fourth hour may all be the same or different, or some may be the same and others may be different. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting modes of the rainbow light-emitting effects executed for the first hour, the second hour, the third hour, and the fourth hour may all be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle or different cycles. Some may be rainbow light-emitting modes with the same cycle and others with different cycles. Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed for the first hour, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed for the second hour, the rainbow light-emitting mode of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed for the third hour, and the rainbow light-emitting mode of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed for the fourth hour may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Furthermore, the first and second hours, and the third and fourth hours, may be the times when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by a single lamp, or may be the times when the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed by multiple lamps. Furthermore, the single lamp and the multiple lamps may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means is periodically set to a rainbow light-emitting mode while a specific jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed (see Figure 121, etc.), and when a fluctuation effect is not being executed, can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect using a rainbow light-emitting mode with a period that is not executed while the specific jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed (see Figure 82, etc.).
In this case, even when the variable effect is not being executed, the player can experience the novel rainbow light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means is periodically set to a rainbow light-emitting mode while a specific jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and may be capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect with a rainbow light-emitting mode that is not being executed while the specific jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed when the fluctuation effect is not being executed.
Even in this case, the player can experience the novel rainbow light-emitting effect when the variable effect is not being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation control unit 300 can make it possible to have a greater number of types of rainbow light emission patterns that can be executed when a specific jackpot variable presentation is being executed than when a specific jackpot game is being executed (see Figures 121, 122, etc.).
In this case, the player's expectations for the game can be increased both during the execution of the variable presentation and during the execution of the jackpot game, and the player's sense of elation can be increased by the various rainbow light emitting presentations even when the jackpot game is not being executed.

The effect control unit 300 may also be configured to allow a greater number of executable rainbow light-emitting patterns during a specific jackpot game than during a specific jackpot variation effect. In other words, the effect control unit 300 may simply allow a different number of executable rainbow light-emitting patterns during a specific jackpot game and during a specific jackpot variation effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the middle movable device 1152 is difficult or impossible to see when it is in the initial position, i.e., when the device performance is not being executed.
Here, during a specific period (such as a period during which a variable effect is being performed), a visible effect (a rainbow light-emitting effect of the middle movable role device 1152 when the middle movable role device 1152 is performing a role effect) in which the rainbow light-emitting effect of the middle movable role device 1152 is visible may be more easily performed when the second effect state is in place than when the first effect state is in place. Examples of the first effect state and the second effect state include before the start of a reach effect and after the start of a reach effect. Examples of the first effect state and the second effect state include a normal game state and a time-saving game state. Examples of the first effect state and the second effect state include a time-saving game state and a normal game state.
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a visible effect to be executed during a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for visible effects to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be possible to make it easier for a visible presentation to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the decorative symbols 41 of the same digits "777" line up) is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the decorative symbols 41 of the same digits "444" line up) is executed.

In this case, the way the rainbow light-emitting effect is displayed by the central movable device 1152 can be varied depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the effect state, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, and type of jackpot variable effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific period is not limited to the period during which the (jackpot) variable effect is executed. The specific period may be the period during which the jackpot game is executed, the period from the start of the jackpot variable effect to the start of the next variable effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a visible effect is more likely to be executed in the second effect state than in the first effect state during a specific period includes the case where a visible effect is not executed (0%) in the first effect state, and the case where a visible effect is always executed (100%) in the second effect state. However, a visible effect may be executed in the first effect state, and a visible effect may not be executed in the second effect state.
Furthermore, during a specific period, the visible effect may be more likely to be executed in the first effect state than in the second effect state. That is, during a specific period, the likelihood of the visible effect being executed may differ between the first effect state and the second effect state.

Furthermore, the fact that a visible effect is more likely to be executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a visible effect is not executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a visible effect is always executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a visible effect may be executed in the specific period, and even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a visible effect may not be executed in the specific period.
Furthermore, the visible effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. That is, the likelihood of the visible effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a visible effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the case where a visible effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the case where a visible effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a visible effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game even when a first jackpot game is executed, and a visible effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the visible effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the visible effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed. The likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect, which does not change in appearance, being executed may be different.

Furthermore, the fact that a visible effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a visible effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a visible effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, even when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a visible effect may be executed in a specific period, and even when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a visible effect may not be executed in a specific period.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the visible presentation may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the visible presentation being executed in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, during the execution of the variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect (display of a rainbow image) may be more likely to be executed by the image display unit 114 if the reel effect is executed after the start of the deciding effect than if the reel effect is executed before the deciding effect starts. In this case, it is possible to diversify whether or not the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed depending on the progress of the effect.
Note that, during the execution of a variable performance, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 is more likely to be executed when the reel performance is executed after the start of the deciding performance than when the reel performance is executed before the start of the deciding performance, including the fact that, during the execution of a variable performance, when the reel performance is executed before the start of the deciding performance, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 is not executed (0%), and the fact that, during the execution of a variable performance, when the reel performance is executed after the start of the deciding performance, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 is always executed (100%). However, during the execution of a variable performance, when the reel performance is executed before the start of the deciding performance, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 may be executed, and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 may not be executed when the reel performance is executed after the start of the deciding performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the deciding button effect during the execution of the variable effect, a specific light-emitting means (such as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) executes a rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and then executes a rainbow light-emitting effect in the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 121, etc.). Here, after the deciding button effect during the execution of the variable effect, it may be easier to execute an effect pattern in which a specific light-emitting means executes a second rainbow light-emitting effect followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect (for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode) than an effect pattern in which a specific light-emitting means executes a first rainbow light-emitting effect (for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect in the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode) followed by a second rainbow light-emitting effect (for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect in the second rainbow light-emitting mode).
The first rainbow light-emitting effect may be, for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, etc. In this case, the second rainbow light-emitting effect may be, for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, etc. Furthermore, the first rainbow light-emitting effect and the second rainbow light-emitting effect may be, for example, a rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode and a rainbow light-emitting effect of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, the specific light-emitting means is not limited to the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), but may be the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611).

Note that, after a decide button effect is being pressed during the execution of a variable effect, a display pattern in which a second rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect, more likely to be executed than a display pattern in which a second rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect. This includes the case where, after a decide button effect is being pressed during the execution of a variable effect, a display pattern in which a second rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect (0%), and the case where, after a decide button effect is being pressed during the execution of a variable effect, a display pattern in which a second rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect (100%). However, after a decide button effect is being pressed during the execution of a variable effect, a display pattern in which a first rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a second rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed, and the case where, after a decide button effect is being pressed during the execution of a variable effect, a display pattern in which a second rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is executed followed by a first rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow light effects that can be performed (the number of types of rainbow light effects (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light effects performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of rainbow images displayed, and the total number of types of rainbow light effects (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps and the number of types of rainbow images displayed) may be greater when a rainbow light effect in a rainbow light effect in a second cycle is performed than when a rainbow light effect in a rainbow light effect in a first cycle is performed.
Here, examples of the first period include 0.4 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.3 seconds, etc. Examples of the second period include 1 second, 2 seconds, etc. However, the first period and the second period may be any time as long as they are different periods.
Furthermore, the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).

In addition, the performance control unit 300 can execute rainbow light-emitting performances in the customer waiting performance state (demo performance state), but can restrict rainbow light-emitting performances using specific light-emitting means (movable props 115, light guide plate 118, etc.) and the image display unit 114.
However, even in the customer waiting performance state (demo performance state), a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed by a specific light-emitting means (such as the movable role object 115 or the light guide plate 118). Even in this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect executed by the image display unit 114 may be restricted in the customer waiting performance state (demo performance state). Furthermore, while the rainbow light-emitting effect executed by the movable role object 115 may be executed in the customer waiting performance state (demo performance state), the rainbow light-emitting effect executed by the light guide plate 118 and the image display unit 114 may be restricted. Furthermore, while the rainbow light-emitting effect (display of a rainbow image) executed by the image display unit 114 may be executed in the customer waiting performance state (demo performance state), the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed by the image display unit 114 (display of a rainbow image) may be shorter than the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect executed by the light-emitting means.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable performance example 13 (see Figures 113 to 120), variable performance example 16 (see Figures 125 to 128), variable performance example 35 (see Figures 184 to 191), and variable performance example 56 (see Figures 244 to 251), each lamp performs a common rainbow light-emitting effect (execution time of the common rainbow light-emitting effect, performance pattern of the common rainbow light-emitting effect).

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable effect in the time-shortened game state, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed before the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 and before the start of the reach effect (see, for example, Figures 285 (2), 286 (2), 297 (6)). In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable effect in the time-shortened game state, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed after the start of the reach effect (SP reach effect) and before the start of the deciding effect (see, for example, Figure 290 (2)). In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable effect in the time-shortened game state, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed after the start of the deciding effect and before the display (temporary stop) of the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers (see, for example, Figures 281 (17) to (20)). Here, the effect control unit 300 may make it easier to execute a specific rainbow light-emitting effect before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot variable effect is executed in the time-shortened game state than when a jackpot variable effect is executed in the normal game state. Examples of before the start of a specific effect include before the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, before the start of a reach effect (SP reach effect), after the decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and before the start of a reach effect (SP reach effect), before the start of a final effect, after the start of a reach effect (SP reach effect) and before the start of a final effect, before the display (temporary stop) of a doublet decorative pattern 41, after the start of a reach effect (SP reach effect) and before the display (temporary stop) of a doublet decorative pattern 41, after the start of a final effect and before the display (temporary stop) of a doublet decorative pattern 41, etc. Examples of specific rainbow light-emitting effects include a specific rainbow light-emitting mode by a specific lamp or any of all lamps.
In addition, the effect control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect (the number of types (per cycle) of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, etc.) is greater when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in a time-saving game state than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in a normal game state.
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may be configured so that (in a specific stage (any of the first stage to the fourth stage)) a specific lamp (a lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) has a greater number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be performed before the start of a specific performance (the number of types (per cycle) of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, etc.) than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).
In this case, it is possible to diversify the rainbow light-emitting effects according to the type of effect being executed, such as the type of game state or the type of lamp, and it is also possible to make it easier for players to sense the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects in time-saving game states and specific lamps.

Note that the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a time-saving game state than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a normal game state includes the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a normal game state (0%), and that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a time-saving game state (100%). However, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a normal game state, and a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 may make it easier for the specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed before the start of the specific effect when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the normal game state than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the time-shortened game state. In other words, the effect control unit 300 may make it easier for the specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed before the start of the specific effect different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the normal game state and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect is greater when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the normal game mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the time-shortened game mode. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect is different between when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the normal game mode and when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the time-shortened game mode.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp has a greater number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be executed before the start of a specific performance than a specific lamp. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp have a different number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be executed before the start of a specific performance.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier for the specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed before the start of the specific effect when the jackpot variation effect is executed in one of the first to third stages in the normal gaming state than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in another of the first to third stages in the normal gaming state. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier for the specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed before the start of the specific effect when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting presentations that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific presentation (the number of types (per cycle) of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, etc.) is greater when the jackpot fluctuation presentation is performed in the second presentation mode (a stage among the first to fourth stages that is different from the first presentation mode) than when the jackpot fluctuation presentation is performed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In this case, it is possible to realize a variety of rainbow light-emitting effects according to the presentation mode, and it is also possible to make it easier for the player to sense the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects before the start of a specific presentation in the second presentation mode.

The specific light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first rainbow light-emitting mode through the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the possibility that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect will not be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the possibility that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect will always be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed before the start of a specific effect, and a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that there are more types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in the first presentation mode, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect is zero. However, even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is performed in the first presentation mode, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect may be one or more.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific rainbow light-emitting performance to be executed during the execution of a specific performance (while the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, while a reach performance (SP reach performance) is being executed, while a deciding performance is being executed, while a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is being displayed (temporarily stopped), etc.) when a jackpot variation performance is executed in the second performance mode (a stage among the first to fourth stages that is different from the first performance mode) than when a jackpot variation performance is executed in the first performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages). Furthermore, examples of the specific rainbow light-emitting performance include a specific rainbow light-emitting mode by a specific lamp or by any of all lamps.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps during the execution of a specific performance is greater when the jackpot fluctuation performance is performed in the second performance mode (a stage among the first stage to the fourth stage that is different from the first performance mode) than when the jackpot fluctuation performance is performed in the first performance mode (any of the first stage to the fourth stage).
In addition, the performance control unit 300 may be configured so that (in a specific stage (any of the first stage to the fourth stage)) a specific lamp (a lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) has a greater number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be executed during the execution of a specific performance than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).
In this case, it is possible to diversify the rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of game state or the type of lamp.

The specific light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118. The specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first rainbow light-emitting mode through the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution of a specific effect when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution of a specific effect when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution of a specific effect when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). Also, even when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution of a specific effect, and even when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution of a specific effect.
Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during the execution of a specific effect when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 may make it easier for a specific rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during the execution of a specific effect when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps during the execution of a specific effect is greater when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first stage than when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second stage. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may make the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be performed by a specific lamp or all lamps before the start of a specific effect different between when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the first stage and when a jackpot variation effect is executed in the second stage.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp has a greater number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed while a specific performance is being performed than a specific lamp. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp have a different number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed while a specific performance is being performed.

In addition, the presentation control unit 300 can change the rainbow light emission pattern (by a specific light-emitting means) before the start of a specific presentation or during the execution of a specific presentation depending on whether the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode (see Figure 118 (46), Figure 199 (4), etc.).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that there is a variation effect (see FIG. 119 (50) etc.) in which the lamps change to a non-rainbow light emitting mode different from the rainbow light emitting mode while the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed. Here, it may be configured so that the variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps change to a non-rainbow light emitting mode when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is more likely to be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (one of the first to fourth stages that is different from the first presentation mode) than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the variation presentation in which a specific lamp or all lamps are in a non-rainbow light emitting state when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) may be more likely to be executed when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp (a lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) may be more likely to execute a variable effect that becomes a non-rainbow light-emitting mode when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, the degree of emphasis of the decorative pattern 41 of the double numbers can be varied depending on the type of effect to be executed, such as the type of effect mode or the type of big win variable effect, thereby realizing diversification of the effect.
The specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).

In addition, the fact that a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is more likely to be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is not executed (0%), and that when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is always executed (100%). However, even when a jackpot variable effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a variable effect may be executed in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped), and when a jackpot variable effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a variable effect may not be executed in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped).
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to execute a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier to execute a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the fact that a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is more likely to be executed when the second jackpot variation effect is executed than when the first jackpot variation effect is executed includes the fact that when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is not executed (0%), and the fact that when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is always executed (100%). However, when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) may be executed, and when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a variation effect in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) may not be executed.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, a variation presentation in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. That is, in a specific presentation mode, the ease of execution of a variation presentation in which a specific lamp or all lamps become non-rainbow luminous when doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp is more likely to execute a variable effect in which it becomes non-rainbow luminous when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) than a specific lamp includes the fact that (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a variable effect in which the specific lamp becomes non-rainbow luminous when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is not executed (0%), and the fact that (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a variable effect in which the specific lamp becomes non-rainbow luminous when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) is always executed (100%). However, (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped), a variable effect may be executed in which a specific lamp changes to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, or (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped), a variable effect may not be executed in which a specific lamp changes to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp may be more likely to execute a variable effect in which the display changes to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) than a specific lamp. In other words, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp may be more likely to execute a variable effect in which the display changes to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed (temporarily stopped) than a specific lamp.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the presentation control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light emission pattern of the lamp at a specific cycle for a time shorter than the specific cycle (referred to as a predetermined time) during the execution of the jackpot variable presentation (see time points T2 to T3 in Figure 135).
Here, it may be arranged so that the rainbow light emission mode is more likely to be executed for a predetermined time period with a specific cycle of a specific lamp during a specific period (the period during which the jackpot fluctuation presentation is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation presentation is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation presentation is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp to emit rainbow light for a predetermined period of time at a specific cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be easier for a specific lamp to emit rainbow light for a predetermined time at a specific cycle during a specific period (the period during which the jackpot variation presentation is performed) when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is performed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is performed.
Furthermore, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp (a lamp from the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) may be more likely to perform a rainbow light emission pattern at a specific cycle for a specific period during a specific period (the period during which the jackpot variable presentation is executed) than a specific lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, the player can experience the diversity of whether or not the rainbow light emission occurs in less than one cycle depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period may be any time, and the predetermined time may be any time as long as it is shorter than the specific period.
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is more likely to be executed for a predetermined time when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is not executed for a predetermined time (0%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is always executed for a predetermined time (100%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. Also, even when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period may be executed for a predetermined time, and even when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period may not be executed for a predetermined time.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp to emit rainbow light for a specific period of time when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a specific lamp to emit rainbow light for a specific period of time when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution period of a jackpot game is more likely to occur when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution period of a jackpot game is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot game is executed, and the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution period of a jackpot game is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot game is executed. However, the rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution period of a jackpot game may be executed when a first jackpot game is executed, and the rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution period of a jackpot game may not be executed when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emission mode may be performed for a predetermined period of time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution of the jackpot game more easily when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light emission mode being performed for a predetermined period of time using a specific cycle of a specific lamp during the execution of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is more likely to be executed for a specific time when the second jackpot variation effect is executed than when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is not executed for a specific time (0%) when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period is always executed for a specific time (100%) when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period may be executed for a specific time when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period may not be executed for a specific time when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, it may be easier to execute a rainbow light emission mode for a specific period of time with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier to execute a rainbow light emission mode for a specific period of time with a specific cycle of a specific lamp in a specific period of time different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the phrase "a specific lamp is more likely to emit rainbow light at a specific cycle in a specific period than a specific lamp" (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where the specific lamp emits rainbow light at a specific cycle in a specific period (0%), and the case where the specific lamp emits rainbow light at a specific cycle in a specific period (100%). However, the case where the specific lamp emits rainbow light at a specific cycle in a specific period in a specific period in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages) may be executed for a specific period in a specific lamp, or the case where the specific lamp emits rainbow light at a specific cycle in a specific period in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages) may not be executed for a specific period in a specific lamp.
Furthermore, in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages), a predetermined lamp may be more likely to perform the rainbow light emission mode in a specific cycle for a specific period than a specific lamp. In other words, in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages), the predetermined lamp and the specific lamp may be more likely to perform the rainbow light emission mode in a specific cycle for a specific period for a specific period.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may be configured so that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting presentations that can be performed in a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot fluctuation presentation is performed) (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of rainbow images displayed, the total number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps and the number of types of rainbow images displayed) is greater when a jackpot fluctuation presentation is performed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when a jackpot fluctuation presentation is performed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) executed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes executed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of rainbow images displayed, the total number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) executed by a specific lamp or all lamps and the number of types of rainbow images displayed) may be greater when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the number of types of rainbow light-emitting presentations that can be performed in a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variation presentation is performed) (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes performed by a specific lamp or all lamps, the number of types of rainbow images displayed, the total number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes (per cycle) performed by a specific lamp or all lamps and the number of types of rainbow images displayed) may be greater when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is performed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is performed.
Furthermore, (in a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages))) the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed during a specific period (such as the execution period of a jackpot variable effect) (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes executed (per cycle), the number of types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles executed, the number of types of rainbow images displayed, the total number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes executed (per cycle) and the number of types of rainbow images displayed) may be greater for a specific lamp (a lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) that is different from the specified lamp) than for a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, the type of rainbow light-emitting effect executed can be varied depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby achieving a greater variety of rainbow light-emitting effects.

The specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit 300 may make the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed in a specific period greater when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the presentation control unit 300 may make the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed during the execution of the jackpot variation presentation different between when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 may be configured to have a larger number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects executable during the execution period of the first jackpot game than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the effect control unit 300 may be configured to have a different number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects executable during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed in a specific period greater when the first jackpot variation effect is executed than when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific performance mode. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may make the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed in a specific period different between when the first jackpot variation effect is executed and when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific performance mode.
Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp has a greater number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be executed in a specific period than a predetermined lamp. In other words, the performance control unit 300 may make it so that (at a specific stage (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp has a different number of types of rainbow light-emitting performances that can be executed in a specific period.

In addition, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot variable performance is executed), there are specific lamps (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) whose rainbow light emission pattern changes, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161)) whose rainbow light emission pattern does not change (see Figure 121, etc.).
Here, (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), a specific lamp may be made more likely to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation in which the rainbow light-emitting pattern changes over a specific period than a predetermined lamp.
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during a specific period to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage among the first stage to the fourth stage that is different from the first presentation mode) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first stage to the fourth stage).
In addition, it may be configured so that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specified lamp does not change during a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be configured so that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that in the case where the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, it may be configured such that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting pattern of a predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that in the case where the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during a specific period may be more likely to be executed when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be possible to make it easier to execute a rainbow light emission presentation in which the rainbow light emission pattern of a specified lamp does not change during a specific period when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.

In this case, the player can experience a variety of changes in the rainbow light emission pattern depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of lamp, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the specific lamp and the predetermined lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period is more likely to be performed with a specific lamp than with a predetermined lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period is not performed (0%) with a specific lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of first to fourth stages)), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period is always performed (100%) with a specific lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of first to fourth stages)). However, even with a predetermined lamp, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period may be performed, and even with a specific lamp, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period may not be performed.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode changes over a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes over a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes over a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes over a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes over a specific period may be executed, and even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes over a specific period may not be executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes over a specific period may be more likely to be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes over a specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, even when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period may be executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light emission state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light emission state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot game is executed, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot game is executed. However, even when a first jackpot game is executed, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game may be executed, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during the execution of a jackpot game may not be executed when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during the execution of the jackpot game may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during the execution of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot game is executed, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot game is executed. However, even when a first jackpot game is executed, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game may be executed, and even when a second jackpot game is executed, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game may not be executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of the predetermined lamp does not change during the execution of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during a specific period is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, even when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during a specific period may be executed, and even when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of a specific lamp changes during a specific period may not be executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during a specific period may be more likely to be executed when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, in a specific presentation mode, the likelihood of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a specific lamp changes during a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, even when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period may be executed, and even when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode of the predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period may be executed.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting presentation in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period to be executed when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting presentation in which the rainbow light-emitting state of a predetermined lamp does not change during a specific period to be executed when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot variation effect is executed), a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 1-second cycle) of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the first rainbow light-emitting mode), and a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4-second cycle) that is shorter than the specific cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the third rainbow light-emitting mode) (see Figure 121, etc.).
Here, during a specific period, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode (e.g., the third rainbow light-emitting mode) than in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode (e.g., the first rainbow light-emitting mode) at a specific cycle (e.g., a 0.4 second cycle).
Furthermore, during a specific period, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 1-second cycle) in a specified rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the first rainbow light-emitting mode) than in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the third rainbow light-emitting mode).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) during a specific period (such as the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 1-second cycle) during a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be arranged so that the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for the rainbow light-emitting effect to be performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1-second cycle) during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, out of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be executed at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, one second cycle) during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) may be made more likely to perform a rainbow light performance at a specific cycle (for example, a 0.4 second cycle) during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).
Furthermore, (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), a specific lamp may be made more likely to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation at a specific cycle (for example, a one-second cycle) during a specific period than a predetermined lamp.

In this case, the player can sense the variety of cycles of the rainbow light-emitting pattern depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The lamps for which the rainbow light effect based on a specific cycle or the rainbow light effect based on a predetermined cycle may be a specific lamp or all lamps. The specific lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.
The specific period may be any of the above-mentioned periods as long as it is shorter than the predetermined period. The specific period may be any of the above-mentioned periods as long as it is longer than the specific period.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific cycle in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode than in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode during a specific period includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle of a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed in a specific period (0%), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is always executed in a specific period (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle of a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed in a specific period, or a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may not be executed in a specific period.
Furthermore, during a specific period, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode than in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, during a specific period, the likelihood of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle may differ between the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode and the specific rainbow light-emitting mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a predetermined cycle in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode than in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode during a specific period includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in a predetermined cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed in a specific period (0%), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect in a predetermined cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode is always executed in a specific period (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect in a predetermined cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed in a specific period, or a rainbow light-emitting effect in a predetermined cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode may not be executed in a specific period.
Furthermore, during a specific period, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode than in a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, during a specific period, the likelihood of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific cycle may differ between a specific rainbow light-emitting mode and a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is not executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is always executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific cycle during a specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light emitting effect being executed in a specific cycle during a specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a predetermined cycle during a specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in a predetermined cycle during a specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects based on a specific cycle are more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects based on a specific cycle are not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects based on a specific cycle are always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, rainbow light-emitting effects based on a specific cycle may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and rainbow light-emitting effects based on a specific cycle may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific cycle during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in a specific cycle during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be executed at a predetermined cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed at a predetermined cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are always executed at a predetermined cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, rainbow light-emitting effects may be executed at a predetermined cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and rainbow light-emitting effects may not be executed at a predetermined cycle during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed periodically during the execution of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed periodically during the execution of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect with a specific cycle may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific cycle in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in a specific cycle in a specific period may be different when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that in a specific presentation mode, rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be executed in a specific period with a predetermined cycle when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed in a specific period with a predetermined cycle (0%) when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are always executed in a specific period with a predetermined cycle when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, rainbow light-emitting effects may be executed in a specific period with a predetermined cycle when a first jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode, and rainbow light-emitting effects may not be executed in a specific period with a predetermined cycle when a second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a predetermined cycle in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in a predetermined cycle in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light effect is more likely to be performed at a specific cycle in a specific period by a specific lamp than by a predetermined lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a rainbow light effect at a specific cycle by a specific lamp is not performed (0%) in a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a rainbow light effect at a specific cycle by a specific lamp is always performed (100%) in a specific period. However, (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a rainbow light effect at a specific cycle by a specific lamp may sometimes be performed in a specific period, or a rainbow light effect at a specific cycle by a specific lamp may not sometimes be performed in a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect at a specific cycle during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect at a specific cycle during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light effect is more likely to be performed at a predetermined cycle in a specific period with a specific lamp than with a specific lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a rainbow light effect is not performed at a predetermined cycle with a specific lamp in a specific period (0%) (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a rainbow light effect is always performed at a predetermined cycle with a specific lamp in a specific period (100%) (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)). However, it is also possible that a rainbow light effect is sometimes performed at a predetermined cycle with a specific lamp in a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and that a rainbow light effect is not sometimes performed at a predetermined cycle with a specific lamp in a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).
Also, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), a predetermined lamp may be made more likely to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation at a predetermined cycle in a specific period than a specific lamp. In other words, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp may be made more likely to perform a rainbow light-emitting presentation at a predetermined cycle in a specific period.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific lamp performs a specific rainbow light-emitting effect (light emission in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode at a specific cycle), and then performs a predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting effect without going through a non-rainbow light-emitting mode (see time points T2 to T5 in FIG. 121 ). Note that an effect in which a specific lamp performs a specific rainbow light-emitting effect, and then performs a predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect that is different from the specific rainbow light-emitting effect without going through a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, will be referred to as a continuous rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the continuous rainbow light emission effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the continuous rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the continuous rainbow light emission presentation may be more likely to be performed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)),) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform the continuous rainbow light performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, examples of specified rainbow light-emitting effects include rainbow light-emitting modes that are different from the specific rainbow light-emitting effect but with the same cycle as the specific rainbow light-emitting effect, rainbow light-emitting modes that are the same as the specific rainbow light-emitting effect but with a different cycle than the specific rainbow light-emitting effect, and rainbow light-emitting modes that are different from the specific rainbow light-emitting effect but with a different cycle than the specific rainbow light-emitting effect.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting pattern in the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the rainbow light-emitting pattern in the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting patterns. Furthermore, the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting pattern in the specific rainbow light-emitting effect and the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting pattern in the predetermined rainbow light-emitting effect may be any of the cycles described above.

Furthermore, the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is more likely to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is not executed (0%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is always executed (100%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the continuous rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease of execution of the continuous rainbow light emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the case where the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the case where the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the ease with which the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be made different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed than when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease with which the continuous rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a continuous rainbow light effect during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a continuous rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a continuous rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) during a specific period. However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a continuous rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may be performed during a specific period, or a continuous rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a continuous rainbow light effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a continuous rainbow light effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a specific lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect, then passes through a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, and then performs a rainbow light-emitting effect (see time points T6 to T9 in FIG. 121 ). Note that a performance in which a specific lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect, then passes through a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, and then performs a rainbow light-emitting effect will be referred to as a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the discontinuous rainbow light emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be configured so that discontinuous rainbow light emitting effects are more likely to be performed during the execution of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the discontinuous rainbow light emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform a discontinuous rainbow light performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The rainbow light-emitting effect before passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode and the rainbow light-emitting effect after passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode may have different cycles of the rainbow light-emitting mode and different rainbow light-emitting modes, may have the same cycle but different rainbow light-emitting modes, may have different cycles but the same rainbow light-emitting mode, or may have the same cycle and rainbow light-emitting mode. The rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect before passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode and the rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect after passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. The cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect before passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode and the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect after passing through the non-rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the discontinuous rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the discontinuous rainbow light emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may be executed when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the discontinuous rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the discontinuous rainbow light emitting effect being executed in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) during a specific period. However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may be performed during a specific period, or a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a discontinuous rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific rainbow mode, then passes through a light-emitting mode different from the rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific rainbow mode, and then performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific rainbow mode again (see time points T6 to T9 in FIG. 121 ). Note that an effect in which a specific lamp performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific rainbow mode (specific rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of specific rainbow light-emitting mode), then passes through a light-emitting mode different from the rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific rainbow mode, and then performs a rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific rainbow mode again will be referred to as a second rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter. Furthermore, examples of the specific rainbow mode include a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a cycle of a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, etc.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the rainbow re-emission effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the rainbow light emission effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow re-emission presentation may be more likely to be performed during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)),) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform the rainbow re-emission performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the specific rainbow mode may be any one of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Also, the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the specific rainbow mode may be any one of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow re-emission effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow re-emission effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the first jackpot game than during the execution period of the second jackpot game. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the first jackpot game may be different from that during the execution period of the second jackpot game.

Furthermore, the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may be executed when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a re-rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in the specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to have a rainbow re-lighting effect performed during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of stages 1 to 4)) includes the case where a specific lamp will not have a rainbow re-lighting effect performed during a specific period (0%), and the case where a specific lamp will always have a rainbow re-lighting effect performed during a specific period (100%). However, (in a specific performance mode (any of stages 1 to 4)) a rainbow re-lighting effect may be performed during a specific period, or a rainbow re-lighting effect may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform the rainbow re-emission effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform the rainbow re-emission effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a specific lamp changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a specific cycle, and then changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a predetermined cycle that is longer than the specific cycle (see time points T4 to T7 in FIG. 121 ). Note that an effect in which a specific lamp changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a specific cycle, and then changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a cycle that is longer than the specific cycle, will be referred to below as a long-cycle rainbow light emitting effect.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the long-period rainbow light emission effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the long-period rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)),) a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) may be made more likely to perform the long-period rainbow light performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific cycle and the predetermined cycle may be any of the cycles described above. In addition, in a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific lamp may change from a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode and then change to a rainbow light-emitting mode with a predetermined cycle, or a specific lamp may change from a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle to a rainbow light-emitting mode with a predetermined cycle without changing to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emission pattern based on a specific cycle and the rainbow light emission pattern based on a predetermined cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission patterns.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease with which the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease with which the long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a long-cycle rainbow light effect during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a long-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a long-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) during a specific period. However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a long-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may be performed during a specific period, or a long-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a long-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific lamp changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a predetermined cycle, and then changes back to the rainbow light emitting mode in a specific cycle that is shorter than the predetermined cycle (see time points T5 to T7 in FIG. 289 ). Note that an effect in which a specific lamp changes to a rainbow light emitting mode in a predetermined cycle, and then changes back to the rainbow light emitting mode in a cycle that is shorter than the predetermined cycle, will be referred to as a short-cycle rainbow light emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the short cycle rainbow light emission presentation may be more likely to be performed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform a short-cycle rainbow light performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific cycle and the predetermined cycle may be any of the cycles described above. In addition, in a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect, the specific lamp may change from a rainbow light-emitting mode with a predetermined cycle to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode and then change to a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle, or the specific lamp may change from a rainbow light-emitting mode with a predetermined cycle to a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle without changing to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light emission pattern based on a specific cycle and the rainbow light emission pattern based on a predetermined cycle may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission patterns.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is more likely to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is not executed (0%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is always executed (100%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease of execution of the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the case where the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the case where the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed than when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease with which the short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a short-cycle rainbow light effect during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a short-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a short-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) during a specific period. However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a short-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may be performed during a specific period, or a short-cycle rainbow light effect of a specific lamp may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a short-cycle rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific lamp enters a specific rainbow light-emitting mode for a first time, and then enters a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode for a second time period that is longer than the first time period (see time points T2 to T5 in FIG. 121 ). Note that an effect in which a specific lamp enters a specific rainbow light-emitting mode for a first time, and then enters a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode for a second time period that is longer than the first time period will be referred to as a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed for a long period of time during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed for a long period during the execution of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed for a long period of time in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform a rainbow light performance for a long period of time during a specific period of time than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The first time and the second time may be any time as long as the relationship satisfies the above-described configuration. Furthermore, the cycle of the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the cycle of the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the cycles described above. Furthermore, in a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect, the specific lamp may change from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode via a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, or the specific lamp may change from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode without changing to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a long-term rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a long-time rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a long-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a long-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, a long-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may be executed when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a long-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the long-time rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a long-duration rainbow light effect in a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a long-duration rainbow light effect is not performed by a specific lamp in a specific period (0%), and the case where a long-duration rainbow light effect is always performed by a specific lamp in a specific period (100%). However, (in a specific performance mode (any of first to fourth stages)) a long-duration rainbow light effect may be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period, or a long-duration rainbow light effect may not be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a long-duration rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period than for a specific lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)). In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a long-duration rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period differently (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific lamp changes from a specific rainbow light-emitting mode for a first time to a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode for a second time period that is shorter than the first time (see time points T3 to T6 in FIG. 132 ). Note that the effect in which a specific lamp changes from a specific rainbow light-emitting mode for a first time to a predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode for a second time period that is shorter than the first time will be referred to as a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for a short-term rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed for a short time during the execution of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the short-time rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)),) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform a short-term rainbow light performance during a specific period of time than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The first time and the second time may be any time as long as the relationship satisfies the above-described configuration. Furthermore, the cycle of the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the cycle of the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the cycles described above. Furthermore, in a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect, the specific lamp may change from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode via a non-rainbow light-emitting mode, or the specific lamp may change from the specific rainbow light-emitting mode to the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode without changing to a non-rainbow light-emitting mode.
Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode and the predetermined rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease of execution of the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease of execution of the short-time rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a short-time rainbow light effect in a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a short-time rainbow light effect is not performed by a specific lamp in a specific period (0%), and the case where a short-time rainbow light effect is always performed by a specific lamp in a specific period (100%). However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a short-time rainbow light effect may be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period, or a short-time rainbow light effect may not be performed by a specific lamp in a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a rainbow light effect for a short time in a specific period than for a specific lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)). In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a rainbow light effect for a short time in a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific lamp is in the rainbow light emitting mode, a predetermined lamp other than the specific lamp is in the non-rainbow light emitting mode (see time points T2 to T3 in FIG. 121 ). Note that, hereinafter, an effect in which a predetermined lamp other than the specific lamp is in the non-rainbow light emitting mode when the specific lamp is in the rainbow light emitting mode will be referred to as a one-sided rainbow light emitting effect.
Here, it may be arranged so that the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be configured so that one-sided rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the one-sided rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The cycle of the rainbow light emission pattern of the specific lamp may be any of the cycles described above. Also, the rainbow light emission pattern of the specific lamp may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission patterns.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Also, the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease of execution of the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease with which the one-sided rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of lamps execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in a common rainbow mode (see time points T4 to T5 in FIG. 121 ). Hereinafter, a performance in which a plurality of lamps execute a rainbow light-emitting effect in a common rainbow mode will be referred to as a common rainbow light-emitting effect. Examples of the common rainbow mode include a common rainbow light-emitting mode and a cycle of the common rainbow light-emitting mode.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for a common rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the common rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the common rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be executed during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the common rainbow mode may be any one of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Also, the cycle of the rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow light-emitting effect according to the common rainbow mode may be any one of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the multiple lamps may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, a common rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a common rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the common rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. That is, the ease of execution of the common rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a common rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a common rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the common rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the ease with which the common rainbow light-emitting effect is executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be made different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a common rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a common rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a common rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the common rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the ease with which the common rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in a specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of lamps perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in different rainbow modes (see time points T4 to T5 in FIG. 121 ). Note that an effect in which a plurality of lamps perform a rainbow light-emitting effect in different rainbow modes will be referred to as a "different rainbow light-emitting effect" hereinafter. Furthermore, examples of the different rainbow modes include different rainbow light-emitting modes and the cycles of the different rainbow light-emitting modes.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the different rainbow light emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for different rainbow light emitting effects to be performed during the execution of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the differential rainbow light emitting presentation may be more likely to be performed during a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, and the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The rainbow light-emitting modes in the rainbow light-emitting effects according to the different rainbow modes may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light-emitting modes. Also, the cycles of the rainbow light-emitting modes in the rainbow light-emitting effects according to the different rainbow modes may be any of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the multiple lamps may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is more likely to be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is not executed (0%) when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is always executed (100%) when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, the differential rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the differential rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the different rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the different rainbow light emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the differential rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the differential rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the different rainbow light-emitting effects may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the different rainbow light-emitting effects being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed than when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that the differential rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, the differential rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the differential rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the different rainbow light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the different rainbow light emitting effect being executed in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is executed before the start of a specific effect (see FIG. 285 (2) etc.). Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of decorative symbols 41, a reach effect (SP reach effect), a deciding effect, and the display (temporary stop) of decorative symbols 41 with double numbers. Also, examples of specific rainbow light-emitting effects include a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle, and a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific lamp. Also, an effect in which a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is executed before the start of a specific effect will be referred to as a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the pre-start rainbow light emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the pre-start rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform the pre-start rainbow light performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow light emission mode with a specific cycle, and the rainbow light emission mode with a specific lamp may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission modes. The specific cycle may be any of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in the specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the pre-start rainbow light emitting effect in the specific period may be more likely to be executed when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the ease of execution of the pre-start rainbow light emitting effect in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may be executed when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect in a specific period may not be executed when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, in a specific presentation mode, the ease with which the pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect is executed in the specific period may be made to differ between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to have a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect performed in a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) in a specific period (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) in a specific period. However, (in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may be performed in a specific period, or a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may not be performed in a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a pre-start rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is executed while a specific effect is being executed (see FIG. 290 (2) etc.). Examples of specific effects include a temporary stop of decorative symbols 41, a reach effect (SP reach effect), a winning effect, and the display (temporary stop) of decorative symbols 41 with double numbers. Also, examples of specific rainbow light-emitting effects include a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific cycle, and a rainbow light-emitting mode with a specific lamp. Also, an effect in which a specific rainbow light-emitting effect is executed while a specific effect is being executed will be referred to as an executing rainbow light-emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for the rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during execution during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation may be more likely to be executed during the specific period when the second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when the first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)),) a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) may be made more likely to perform the rainbow light performance during execution during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, players can experience the diversity of rainbow light-emitting effects depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, type of effect mode, type of jackpot game, type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and type of lamp, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The specific rainbow light emission mode, the rainbow light emission mode with a specific cycle, and the rainbow light emission mode with a specific lamp may be any of the first to tenth rainbow light emission modes. The specific cycle may be any of the cycles described above.
Furthermore, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is more likely to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is not executed (0%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is always executed (100%) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period may not be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that the in-progress rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed than when the first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that the in-progress rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that the in-progress rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, the in-progress rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed, and the in-progress rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is more likely to be executed when the second jackpot variation effect is executed than when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is not executed (0%) when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period is always executed (100%) when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode. However, the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period may be executed when the first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and the rainbow light-emitting effect during execution during the specific period may not be executed when the second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Also, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect during execution in a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific execution mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp during execution is not performed (0%) during the specific period (in a specific execution mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp during execution is always performed (100%) during the specific period. However, (in a specific execution mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp during execution may be performed, or a rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp during execution may not be performed during the specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect during execution in a specific period than for a specific lamp (in a specific execution mode (any of the first to fourth stages)). In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a rainbow light-emitting effect during execution in a specific period (in a specific execution mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot variation effect is executed, there is a lamp that does not become a rainbow light emitting mode (see FIG. 132, etc.). Note that the effect in which the lamp does not become a rainbow light emitting mode will be referred to as a non-rainbow light emitting effect hereinafter.
Here, it may be possible to make it easier for a non-rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed during a specific period (such as the period during which the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed) when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be possible to make it easier for non-rainbow light emitting effects to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), it may be possible to make it easier for a non-rainbow light-emitting presentation to be performed during a specific period when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is performed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is performed.
Furthermore, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) it may be possible to make it easier for a specific lamp (a lamp different from the specified lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)) to perform a non-rainbow light-emitting performance during a specific period than a specified lamp (any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511)).

In this case, the effects can be enhanced depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of rainbow light emission pattern, the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and the type of lamp.

In addition, the specified lamp and the specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511).
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a non-rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a non-rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (0%), and the fact that a non-rainbow light-emitting effect is always executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (100%). However, a non-rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a non-rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in the specific period when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the non-rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the non-rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, it is also possible that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the non-rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the non-rainbow light-emitting effect being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode includes the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (0%), and the fact that non-rainbow light-emitting effects are always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode (100%). However, a non-rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode, and a non-rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific presentation mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the non-rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the non-rainbow light-emitting effect being executed in the specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in the specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a specific lamp is more likely to perform a non-rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period than a predetermined lamp (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) includes the case where a non-rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is not performed (0%) during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)), and the case where a non-rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp is always performed (100%) during a specific period. However, (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) a non-rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may be performed during a specific period, or a non-rainbow light-emitting effect of a specific lamp may not be performed during a specific period.
Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier for a predetermined lamp to perform a non-rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)) than for a specific lamp. In other words, it is sufficient to make it easier for a predetermined lamp and a specific lamp to perform a non-rainbow light-emitting effect during a specific period (in a specific performance mode (any of the first to fourth stages)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first right hit image 609 (see Figure 120 (58)) or the third right hit image (see Figure 282 (29)) is displayed, that is, when promoting the launch of the game ball to the right in the game area 111, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode is executed. When the first right hit image 609 or the third right hit image is not displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed. In this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the launch of the game ball to the right in the game area 111 is being promoted when the rainbow light-emitting effect of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode is executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the seventh rainbow light emission mode is a light emission mode in which the rainbow colors are visually perceived by the player as moving from the left side to the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Therefore, the rainbow light emission effect of this seventh rainbow light emission mode can also encourage the player to launch the gaming ball to the right side of the gaming area 111. Here, the seventh rainbow light emission mode can also be considered as a mode that encourages the player to launch the gaming ball to the right side of the gaming area 111.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that during a specific period (such as the period during which a jackpot variable effect is executed), the light guide plate 118 may execute a rainbow light-emitting effect (see FIG. 121, etc.) or may not execute a rainbow light-emitting effect (see FIG. 295, etc.).
Here, it may be arranged so that the rainbow light emitting effect by a specific light emitting means in a specific period is more likely to be executed when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode among the first to fourth stages) than when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages).
In addition, it may be arranged so that the rainbow light emitting effect by a specific light emitting means is more likely to be performed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of a jackpot pattern different from that used when the first jackpot game is executed, among jackpot patterns A to E) is executed than when a first jackpot game (a jackpot game based on the stopping of any of jackpot patterns A to E) is executed.
In addition, in a specific presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the rainbow light-emitting presentation by a specific light-emitting means during a specific period may be more likely to be performed when a second jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "777" is lined up) is executed than when a first jackpot variation presentation (for example, a jackpot variation presentation in which the double-digit decorative pattern 41 "444" is lined up) is executed.
In addition, the rainbow light emitting effect by a specific light emitting means may be more likely to be executed during the execution of a jackpot variable effect than during the execution of a jackpot game.

In this case, depending on the type of effect being executed, such as the type of effect mode, the type of jackpot game, the type of jackpot variation effect in a specific effect mode, and whether a jackpot game or a jackpot variation effect is executed, the player can sense the diversity of whether a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed using a specific light-emitting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific light-emitting means may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118.
The specific period is not limited to the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect, but may be the execution period of the jackpot game, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation effect to the start of the next fluctuation effect (until the jackpot game ends), etc.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in a specific period is more likely to be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode than when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in a specific period is not executed (0%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in a specific period is always executed (100%) when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. However, a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in a specific period may be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the first presentation mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means in a specific period may not be executed when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means may be more likely to be executed in the specific period when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode than when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means being executed in the specific period may be different between when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the first presentation mode and when the jackpot variation effect is executed in the second presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is more likely to be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed than when a first jackpot game is executed includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is not executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is always executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a first jackpot game is executed, and a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may not be executed during the execution period of a jackpot game when a second jackpot game is executed.
Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means may be more likely to be executed during the execution period of the jackpot game when the first jackpot game is executed than when the second jackpot game is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means being executed during the execution period of the jackpot game may be different between when the first jackpot game is executed and when the second jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is more likely to be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed than when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific effect mode includes the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is not executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific effect mode (0%), and the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is always executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific effect mode (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may be executed in a specific period when a first jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific effect mode, and a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may not be executed in a specific period when a second jackpot variation effect is executed in a specific effect mode.
Furthermore, in a specific presentation mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means may be more likely to be executed in a specific period when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed than when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means being executed in a specific period may be different between when the first jackpot variation presentation is executed and when the second jackpot variation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode.

Furthermore, the fact that a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is more likely to be executed during execution of a jackpot fluctuation effect than during execution of a jackpot game includes the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is not executed during execution of a jackpot game (0%), and the case where a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means is always executed during execution of a jackpot fluctuation effect (100%). However, a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may be executed during execution of a jackpot game, or a rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means may be executed during execution of a jackpot fluctuation effect.
Also, the rainbow light emitting effect by the specific light emitting means may be more likely to be executed during the execution of a jackpot game than during the execution of a jackpot fluctuation effect. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light emitting effect by the specific light emitting means being executed may be different during the execution of a jackpot game and during the execution of a jackpot fluctuation effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the effect button 161 emits light in a specific light emission manner while the deciding button effect is being executed (see Figure 119 (52) etc.).
Here, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed by the effect button 161 during execution of the deciding button effect. In this case, depending on the speed at which the light color of the effect button 161 changes, the rainbow color may or may not appear. An example of a case in which the rainbow color does not appear due to the speed at which the light color of each effect button 161 changes is when the speed at which the light color of each lamp changes is slow. For example, in the deciding button effect in the first effect mode (any of the first to fourth stages), the light emitted by the effect button 161 may appear rainbow-colored, while in the deciding button effect in the second effect mode (a stage among the first to fourth stages that is different from the first effect mode), the light emitted by the effect button 161 may not appear rainbow-colored. The first and second effect modes may be a normal game mode and a time-saving game mode, respectively. Furthermore, the first and second effect modes may be a time-saving game mode and a normal game mode, respectively.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed or the type of rainbow light-emitting effect (the type of lamp that executes the rainbow light-emitting effect, the type of rainbow light-emitting pattern, etc.) differs before the reach effect starts while the variable effect is being executed and after the reach effect starts while the variable effect is being executed.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the rainbow light-emitting effects according to the progress of the variable effects.

In addition, when a jackpot variation effect is executed, if the deciding effect is successful (see Figures 118 (44) to (46), 280 (16), 281 (17), (18), etc.), or when a promotion teaser effect is executed (see Figure 119 (52), etc.), the rainbow light-emitting effect may be always executed (100%).

Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 may be capable of executing a flash effect (rainbow flash effect) while a winning effect is being executed or when the winning effect is successful (see (44) to (46) of FIG. 118, (16) of FIG. 280, (17) and (18) of FIG. 281, etc.). Even in this case, the flash effect (rainbow flash effect) is restricted in the attention-call effect during the execution of the customer-waiting effect (see (5) of FIG. 81).
In this case, it is possible to emphasize the light emission effect when the decisive effect is executed, and it is possible to prevent the attention-calling effect from going unnoticed by the player.

In addition, the effect control unit 300 may make it easier for a rainbow light-emitting effect to be executed when a predetermined effect (such as a special effect, the sound of a decorative pattern 41 stopping with a double number, the first success sound, the second success sound, or an effect in which a radial image is displayed (see Figure 118 (45), Figure 281 (17), etc.)) is executed in either the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode, than when the predetermined effect is not executed.
In this case, it is possible to realize an impactful effect that combines the predetermined effect and the rainbow light emission effect.

In addition, when a predetermined effect is executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, the effect control unit 300 may be able to execute common effects (common rainbow light-emitting effect, common feature effect, common stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of double digits, common success sound, common rainbow image) for (such as special effect effect, stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of double digits, first success sound, second success sound, effect in which a radial image is displayed (see Figure 118 (45), Figure 281 (17), etc.)).
In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the presentation situation regardless of the game state.

Also, as described above, in this embodiment, each rainbow image (first rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 627, Rainbow image 597, 20th rainbow image 627, 21st rainbow image 598, 22nd rainbow image 628, 23rd rainbow image 631, 24th rainbow image 632, 25th rainbow image 634, 26th rainbow image 635, 27th rainbow image 636, 28th rainbow image 637, 29th rainbow image 638, 30th rainbow image 639, 31st rainbow image 640, 32nd rainbow image 642, 33rd rainbow image 643, 34th rainbow image 644, 35th rainbow image 645, 36th rainbow image 646, 37th rainbow image 647, and rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51) each have a single operating mode. In contrast, each lamp has multiple rainbow light-emitting modes. In other words, the number of rainbow light-emitting mode patterns for a single lamp is greater than the number of operating mode patterns for a single rainbow image.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period for the dynamic display of each rainbow image is described as 0.5 seconds. In other words, in this embodiment, the period for the dynamic display of each rainbow image is different from the period for the rainbow light emission mode of the lamp (see Figure 329).

In this embodiment, it has been described that the operation modes of each rainbow image are the same, but this is not limited to this. First rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 627, twenty-first rainbow image 598, The operation modes of the 22nd rainbow image 628, 23rd rainbow image 631, 24th rainbow image 632, 25th rainbow image 634, 26th rainbow image 635, 27th rainbow image 636, 28th rainbow image 637, 29th rainbow image 638, 30th rainbow image 639, 31st rainbow image 640, 32nd rainbow image 642, 33rd rainbow image 643, 34th rainbow image 644, 35th rainbow image 645, 36th rainbow image 646, 37th rainbow image 647, and the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51) may be different from each other, as long as they are all one operation mode (one pattern).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the operation modes of each rainbow image have the same cycle, but this is not limited to this. First rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 6 27, the cycles of the operation modes of the 21st rainbow image 598, 22nd rainbow image 628, 23rd rainbow image 631, 24th rainbow image 632, 25th rainbow image 634, 26th rainbow image 635, 27th rainbow image 636, 28th rainbow image 637, 29th rainbow image 638, 30th rainbow image 639, 31st rainbow image 640, 32nd rainbow image 642, 33rd rainbow image 643, 34th rainbow image 644, 35th rainbow image 645, 36th rainbow image 646, 37th rainbow image 647, and the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51) may be different from each other.

(Example of notification regarding the complete function)
Next, an example of notification regarding the complete function will be described.
FIG. 330 is a diagram showing an example of a notification regarding the complete function.
In the above-described pre-activation notification process (see FIG. 42), it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 notifies the MY remaining value (see S4201). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 330(1), the remaining value notification image 651 is displayed on the image display unit 114, thereby notifying the MY remaining value.

It has also been explained that if the advance notification conditions are met in the pre-activation notification process, the performance control unit 300 issues an advance notification (see S4203). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 330 (2), an advance notification is issued by displaying an advance notification image 652 on the image display unit 114.

Furthermore, in the command reception process described above (see Figure 37), it was explained that the performance control unit 300 issues a complete operation notification when it receives a complete command (see S3721). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 330 (3), the complete operation notification is issued by displaying a complete notification image 653 on the image display unit 114 and outputting a sound from the speaker 156 saying "The complete function has been activated." Note that the sound saying "The complete function has been activated" may be referred to as the complete notification sound below.

Furthermore, in the command reception process, it was explained that the performance control unit 300 issues a complete standby notification when it receives a complete standby command. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 330 (4), the complete standby notification is issued by displaying a standby notification image 654 on the image display unit 114.

Here, the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 are displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61. On the other hand, the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 are displayed on a layer behind the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.
In this embodiment, the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56. However, the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the variable image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the small pattern 56.

In the illustrated example, the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 indicate the MY remaining value using numbers, but this is not limiting.
For example, the MY remaining value may be indicated by a meter or the like in the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652. Furthermore, the MY remaining value may be indicated precisely in the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652, or an approximate result may be indicated.

Furthermore, if the advance notification conditions are met in the pre-activation notification processing, the presentation control unit 300 may display both the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652. In this case, the presentation control unit 300 may display the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 so that their display areas do not overlap. Furthermore, if the remaining value notification image 651 and the advance notification image 652 are displayed so that at least a portion of their display areas overlap, the advance notification image 652 may be displayed in a layer in front of the remaining value notification image 651, so that at least a portion or all of the remaining value notification image 651 may be difficult or impossible for the player to see.

In addition, when displaying the waiting notification image 654, the performance control unit 300 may darken images other than the waiting notification image 654 in the image display unit 114 (such as the in-round image 545 in the illustrated example), and may display the waiting notification image 654 on a layer in front of images other than the waiting notification image 654 in the image display unit 114.

Furthermore, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during a jackpot game (see Figure 330 (4)), that is, if a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122 during standby mode, prize balls corresponding to the entry will be paid out. On the other hand, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during variable performance (see Figure 330 (3)), and a game ball enters the first start hole 121 or the second start hole 122, the payout of prize balls corresponding to the entry will be limited.

(Example of the effect when the complete function is activated during the jackpot variation effect)
Next, an example of the effect that is executed when the complete function is activated during the execution of the jackpot variable effect will be described.
Figure 331 shows an example of a presentation that is executed when the complete function is activated during the execution of a jackpot variation presentation.
In addition, Figure 331 shows the presentation that occurs when the complete function is activated during the execution of the jackpot variation presentation shown in Variation Presentation Example 71 (Figures 279 to 282).

First, the jackpot variation effect shown in the variation effect example 71 progresses, and when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period of the decide button operation effect (see FIG. 280 (15)), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 331 (1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, a second success sound is output.
At this time, a pre-notification image 652 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 331 (2), the bonus feature performance begins, and the left movable bonus feature 1151, the center movable bonus feature 1152, and the right movable bonus feature 1153 each move to a position where they overlap the display area of the image display unit 114. Meanwhile, at this time, the left movable bonus feature 1151, the center movable bonus feature 1152, and the right movable bonus feature 1153 have not yet reached (are yet to reach) the performance position in this bonus feature performance (see FIG. 281 (17)). Also, at this time, the 19th rainbow image 597 is displayed. Also, at this time, the vibration performance continues, and a second jackpot notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, when a game ball enters either the first start slot 121, the second start slot 122, or the normal winning slot 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variation of the special symbols. In this case, as shown in FIG. 331 (3), as the variation effect is stopped, the displayed effect images (reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, second right-hit image 543, 19th rainbow image 597, advance notification image 652) are hidden, the vibration effect is stopped, the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the left movable role piece 1151 and the right movable role piece 1153 both return to their initial positions. That is, the left movable role piece 1151 and the right movable role piece 1153 return to their initial positions without reaching the performance position (see FIG. 281 (17)) in the role piece performance that was being executed. On the other hand, the center movable role piece 1152 reaches its performance position by continuing the role piece performance.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) through the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In other words, the lamps are lit in a different light emitting mode from the light emitting mode when the complete function is not activated (see Figure 281 (17) and (18)).

Next, as shown in Fig. 331 (4), the role production ends, and the central movable role 1152 returns to its initial position. In addition, the display of the complete notification image 653, the output of the complete notification sound, and the light emission mode of the lamp shown in Fig. 331 (3) continue.
After the complete function is activated, the big win game is not executed (execution of the big win game is restricted).

In the example shown in Figure 331, if the complete function is activated while the reel performance is being executed (before the movable reel 115 reaches the performance position), the performance control unit 300 stops the reel performance of the left movable reel 1151 and the right movable reel 1153 and continues the reel performance of the center movable reel 1152, but this is not limited to this.
If the complete function is activated while the reel performance is being executed (before the movable reels 115 reach the performance position), the performance control unit 300 may cancel the reel performance of all three movable reels 115 and return the three movable reels 115 to their initial positions without allowing them to reach the performance position.
In addition, if the complete function is activated while the reel performance is being executed (before the movable reel 115 reaches the performance position), the performance control unit 300 may continue the reel performance of all three movable reels 115 and move the three movable reels 115 to the performance position.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can superimpose the advance warning image 652 and at least a portion of the rainbow image (19th rainbow image 597) to display them (see Figure 331 (2)).
In this case, the player can be made to notice the rainbow light-emitting effect while also being made aware of the notification regarding the activation of the complete function.
In addition, when the performance control unit 300 superimposes the advance warning image 652 and the rainbow image, the performance control unit 300 may display the rainbow image on a layer closer to the front of the advance warning image 652 in the image display unit 114.

(Aspects when the complete function is activated during the jackpot variation performance)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the complete function is activated during the execution of the jackpot variation presentation will be described.
Figure 332 shows an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the complete function is activated during the execution of a jackpot variation presentation.
In addition, Figure 332 shows an example of the state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the same jackpot variation presentation as shown in Variation Presentation Example 71 (Figures 279 to 282) is executed, except that two holds are generated for the second starting port 122, and the complete function is activated during the execution of this jackpot variation presentation.

First, the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses, and when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect (see FIG. 280 (15)), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 332 (1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, a second success sound is output. Also, at this time, a pre-alert image 652 is displayed. In the example shown, the pre-alert image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1". Also, at this time, the hold number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "2", and two hold images 52 are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.
Also, at this time, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219 is displayed in a manner indicating "2", and the second special symbol indicator 222 is displayed in a variable manner. Also, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is displayed in a manner indicating "2", and the normal symbol indicator 223 is displayed in a variable manner. Also, two random numbers are stored in the memory area 204 of the RAM 203 as reserved numbers in the second special symbol indicator 222. Also, the information indicator 230 shows the normal base value "bL.35".

Next, when a game ball enters either the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, or the normal winning hole 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 332 (2), as the variable display is stopped, the displayed display images (hold number display 55, small symbol 56, SP reach image 517, success image 538, second right hit image 543, advance notification image 652) are hidden, the vibration display is stopped, the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable part 1152), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and light guide plate 118 are turned off.
At this time, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 are turned off. Meanwhile, the memory area 204 of the RAM 203 maintains the storage of two reserved random numbers. Also, the information indicator 230 continues to show "bL.35."
Also, although not shown in the figure, at this time, the sub-information displays 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal map change display 85, sub-normal map hold display 86, and sub-right-hit display 87) also turn off.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114, the lamp, and the information display 230 are turned off, as shown in Figure 332 (3). In addition, the memory area 204 of the RAM 203 maintains the storage of two random numbers as reserved numbers.
Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on without executing RAM clear, as shown in Fig. 332 (4), a recovery image 655 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Also, a recovery sound is output to indicate or notify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being recovered. Meanwhile, the lamps, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, the normal symbol indicator 223, and the information indicator 230 remain off.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the complete notification image 653 is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 332 (5).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. That is, the lamps and the light guide plate 118 return to the light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 332 (2).
At this time, the normal base value "bL.35" is again displayed on the information display 230. Meanwhile, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 remain off.

Next, the gaming ball that has been in the gaming area 111 enters the first starting hole 121. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 332 (6), the state of the image display unit 114, the lamp, and the light guide plate 118 does not change. Furthermore, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 remain unlit. Additionally, when the complete function is activated, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218 and the first special symbol indicator 221 are turned off, and even if a winning entry into the first starting hole 121 occurs this time, the first special symbol reserve indicator 218 and the first special symbol indicator 221 remain unlit.
Furthermore, even if a time-up time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball winning through either the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, the customer waiting effect (see FIG. 81(1)) will not be executed (will be limited). Furthermore, even if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball winning through either the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, the demo image 605 will not be displayed, and the rainbow light-emitting effect (see FIG. 81(3)) will not be executed (will be limited).

In addition, Figure 332 describes an example in which a gaming ball wins after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, but if a gaming ball wins in the first starting hole 121 after the complete function is activated (the timing shown in Figure 332 (2)), even before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be in the same state as shown in Figure 332 (6).

Also, although not shown, when the state shown in Figure 332 (1) is being maintained and the complete function is not activated, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and then turned on again without performing a RAM clear, the hold image 52, hold number display 55, sub information display 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal pattern change display 85, sub normal pattern hold display 86, sub right-hit display 87), and display 130 (first special pattern display 221, second special pattern display 222, normal pattern display 223, first special pattern hold display 218, second special pattern hold display 219, normal pattern hold display 220, status display 224, round number display 225, status confirmation display 226) can be displayed again. In this case, the information display 230 will display the information immediately before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 was shut off.

FIG. 333 is a chart showing the flow of the contents shown in FIG. 332.
Figure 333 shows the flow of the display contents of the image display unit 114, the MY remaining value, the display contents of the second special pattern display 222, the display contents of the second special pattern reserved display 219, the display contents of the normal pattern display 223, the display contents of the normal pattern reserved display 220, the display contents of the information display 230, the memory contents in the memory area 204 of RAM 203, the light emission mode of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the light emission mode of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the light emission mode of the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the light emission mode of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), which were explained using Figure 332.

First, at time T1, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the MY remaining value is "1." Also, the second special symbol display 222 displays a variable value, the second special symbol reserved display 219 displays "2," the normal symbol display 223 displays a variable value, the normal symbol reserved display 220 displays "2," and the information display 230 displays "bL.35." Two random numbers are stored in the memory area 204 of the RAM 203 as reserved numbers in the second special symbol display 222. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals, the second lamp (left movable role piece 1151) is turned off, and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) are lit in white.
Time T1 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 332(1) begins.

Next, at time T2, the MY remaining value becomes "0." At this time, the complete notification image 653 is displayed. The second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 are all turned off. The information display 230 continues to display the same content as at time T1. The memory area 204 of the RAM 203 continues to store the same content as at time T1. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) lights up in white, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) continues its light-emitting mode from time T1, and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) are both turned off.
Time T2 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 332(2) begins.

Next, at time T3, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. At this time, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 continue to operate as they did at time T2. The information display 230 is also turned off. The memory area 204 of the RAM 203 continues to store the contents stored therein since time T2. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) are all turned off.
Time T3 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 332(3) begins.

Next, at time T4, the restoration image 655 is displayed. At this time, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, the normal symbol reserved display 220, and the information display 230 continue to operate in the same manner as at time T3. The memory area 204 of the RAM 203 also continues to store the contents stored therein since time T3. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 332(4) begins.

Next, at time T5, the complete notification image 653 is displayed again. At this time, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 continue to display the same status as at time T4. The information display 230 also displays "bL.35." The memory area 204 of the RAM 203 also continues to display the same contents as at time T4. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) lights up in white, and the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to display the same status as at time T4.
Time T5 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 332(5) begins.

(Aspects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when RAM is cleared after the complete function is activated)
Next, an example of the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when RAM clearing is performed after the complete function is activated will be described.
Figure 334 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when RAM clearing is performed after the complete function is activated.

First, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the same state as shown in Figures 332 (1) and (2), and then when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114, lamp, and information display 230 turn off, as shown in Figure 334 (1). Also, two random numbers are kept stored as reserved data in the memory area 204 of the RAM 203.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on while the RAM clear switch is ON. That is, the RAM is cleared. In this case, as shown in FIG. 334 (2), an initialization image 656 is displayed. In addition, an initialization sound is output to indicate or notify that the RAM clear is being executed (various settings of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are being initialized). Meanwhile, the lamps, second special symbol reserve indicator 219, second special symbol indicator 222, normal symbol reserve indicator 220, normal symbol indicator 223, and information indicator 230 remain off. In addition, the random numbers stored in the memory area 204 of the RAM 203 are erased.

Next, when the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is complete, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is set to the normal gaming state, and as shown in Figure 334 (3), a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage, a decorative symbol 41 corresponding to the first stage, a reserved number display 55, and a small symbol 56 are displayed. At this time, the left movable symbol 1151, the center movable symbol 1152, and the right movable symbol 1153 operate in an operating mode corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. At this time, all of the lamps are lit white. The information display 230 again shows the normal base value "bL.35". Meanwhile, the lamps, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 remain off.

Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, a special symbol is displayed in a changing state, and a performance (changing performance) is executed using the image display unit 114, lamps, speaker 156, etc.

(When the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during a jackpot game)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during execution of a jackpot game will be described.
335 and 336 are diagrams showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during execution of a jackpot game.
In addition, Figures 335 and 336 show an example of the state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the same jackpot game as shown in Variable Presentation Example 71 (Figures 279 to 282) is executed, except that one hold has occurred for the second starting port 122, and the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during the execution of this jackpot game.

First, the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses, and as shown in FIG. 335 (1), a third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10." At this time, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219 is displayed in a manner indicating "1," which is the number of reserves based on winning at the second starting gate 122, and the second special symbol display 222 is displayed in a stopped state. Furthermore, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is turned off (indicating that there are no reserves based on passing through the gate 124), and the normal symbol display 223 is displayed in a stopped state.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) enters the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the gaming ball passes through gate 124, as shown in Figure 335 (2), the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is displayed in a manner indicating "1", which is the number of reserved balls based on passing through gate 124. At this time, the display content of the image display unit 114, the illumination state of the lamp, the display content of the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the display content of the second special symbol indicator 222, and the display content of the normal symbol indicator 223 continue in the manner shown in Figure 335 (1).

Next, when a gaming ball enters the jackpot opening 125, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). However, since a jackpot game is currently being played, the complete function does not operate, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in Figure 335 (3), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. Also, at this time, the illumination patterns of the lamps, the display contents of the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the display contents of the second special symbol indicator 222, the display contents of the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, and the display contents of the normal symbol indicator 223 continue to be the patterns shown in Figure 335 (2).

Next, as shown in Figure 335 (4), the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "0", and accordingly, the normal symbol indicator 223 begins to display a variable value. At this time, the display content of the image display unit 114, the illumination state of the lamp, the display content of the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, and the display content of the second special symbol indicator 222 continue to be the same as shown in Figure 335 (3).

335(5), the second right-hit image 543, the round number image 544, the in-round image 545, and the type notification image 633 are displayed. Also, the standby notification image 654 continues to be displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
At this time, the normal symbol display 223 is displayed in a stopped state.

Next, the jackpot game round progresses, and as shown in Figure 335 (6), the round number image 544 displays "Round 4." The lamp also continues to emit light as shown in Figure 335 (5). At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 124, and the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is displayed in a mode showing "1."

Next, as shown in Figure 336 (7), the display on the normal symbol pending indicator 220 is updated to "0," and the normal symbol indicator 223 begins to display a variable value. The lamp also continues to emit light as shown in Figure 335 (6).

Next, when the gaming ball passes through the 4-ball gate 124, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 displays "4" as shown in Figure 336 (8). At this time, the normal symbol indicator 223 displays a stopped state. The lamp continues to emit light as shown in Figure 336 (7).

Next, as shown in Figure 336 (9), the display on the normal symbol pending indicator 220 is updated to "3," and the normal symbol indicator 223 begins to display a variable number. The lamp also continues to emit light as shown in Figure 335 (8).

Next, when the final round ends, the time-shortening start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 336(10). Also, the standby notification image 654 continues to be displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in orange, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
At this time, the normal symbol display 223 is displayed in a stopped state.

Next, as shown in Figure 336 (11), the display on the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is updated to "2," and the normal symbol indicator 223 begins to display a variable value. Furthermore, the display content on the image display unit 114 and the illumination state of the lamp continue to be as shown in Figure 336 (10).

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the complete function is activated, and as shown in FIG. 336 (12), the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 are all turned off. That is, the display of the special symbol variations based on the reserve displayed on the second special symbol reserve indicator 219 is not executed, the display of the normal symbol variations based on the reserve displayed on the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is not executed, and the display of the variations being executed on the normal symbol indicator 223 is stopped. At this time, a complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.

In addition, even if the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function while the normal symbol display 223 is displaying changes, the normal symbol display 223 will continue to display changes, as in the example shown in Figure 335 (4) (the normal symbol display 223's display changes is not restricted).

FIG. 337 is a chart showing the flow of the contents shown in FIGS. 335 and 336.
Figure 337 shows the flow of the display contents of the image display unit 114, the MY remaining value, the display contents of the second special pattern display 222, the display contents of the second special pattern reserved display 219, the display contents of the normal pattern display 223, the display contents of the normal pattern reserved display 220, the light emission pattern of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the light emission pattern of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the light emission pattern of the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the light emission pattern of the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), which were explained using Figures 335 and 336.

First, at time T1, the third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, the MY remaining value is "10." Also, the second special symbol display 222 is displayed as stopped, the second special symbol reserved display 219 displays "1," the normal symbol display 223 is displayed as stopped, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 displays "0." Also, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode at 1.6-second intervals, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) repeats the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals, the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode at 2-second intervals, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) is off.
Time T1 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 335(1) begins.

Next, at time T2, the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "1." At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, and the normal symbol indicator 223 continue the same state as at time T1. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue the light-emitting state as at time T1.
Time T2 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 335(2) begins.

Next, at time T3, the MY remaining value becomes "0". At this time, a standby notification image 654 is displayed. In addition, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, the normal symbol reserved display 220, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T2.
Time T3 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 335(3) begins.

Next, at time T4, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "0", and the normal symbol indicator 223 starts to display a variable value. Also, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 335(4) begins.

Next, at time T5, the round number image 544 and the round in progress image 545 are displayed. At this time, the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed. The second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 continue the same state as at time T4. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable role 1151) and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting state at 2.3 second intervals.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode.
Also, time T5 is the time when the mode shown in Figure 335 (5) begins.

Next, at time T6, the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "1." At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol indicator 223, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T5.
Time T6 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 335(6) begins.

Next, at time T7, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "0", and the normal symbol indicator 223 starts to display a variable value. Also, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T6.
Time T7 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(7) begins.

Next, at time T8, the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "1." At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol indicator 223, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T7.
Next, at time T9, the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "2." At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol indicator 223, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T8.
Next, at time T10, the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "3." At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the normal symbol indicator 223, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T9.

Next, at time T11, the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the display of the normal symbol reserve display 220 is updated to "4." Also, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserve display 219, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to be in the same state as at time T9.
Time T11 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(8) starts.

Next, at time T12, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "3", and the normal symbol indicator 223 starts to display a variable value. At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to display the same values as at time T11.
Time T12 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(9) begins.

Next, at time T13, the time-saving start image 546 is displayed. At this time, the normal symbol display 223 is displayed as stopped. The second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 continue to operate as they did at time T12. The first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) are illuminated in orange, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) is illuminated in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) is turned off.
Time T13 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(10) starts.

Next, at time T14, the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is updated to "2", and the normal symbol indicator 223 starts to display a variable value. At this time, the second special symbol indicator 222, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) continue to display the same values as at time T13.
Time T14 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(11) starts.

Next, at time T15, a complete notification image 653 is displayed. At this time, the second special symbol display 222, the second special symbol reserved display 219, the normal symbol display 223, and the normal symbol reserved display 220 are all turned off. In addition, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) are turned off.
Time T15 is the time when the mode shown in FIG. 336(12) starts.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 can execute a variable display based on the judgment information, and if a specific value (e.g., MY value) reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) during the execution of the variable display, the progress of the variable display being executed is stopped, and if a specific value reaches a predetermined value during the execution of a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), the special game being executed can be progressed.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the progress of a jackpot game in progress is restricted when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during the execution of the jackpot game, the player's profit from the jackpot game in progress can be secured, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that when the game control unit 200 "executes a variable display based on the determination information," it not only includes the game control unit 200 variable displaying the special symbol, but also includes the game control unit 200 having the presentation control unit 300 variable display the symbols (decorative symbol 41, small symbol 56, sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) (execute a variable presentation). Note that when the game control unit 200 "stops the progress of a variable display that is currently being executed," it not only includes the game control unit 200 stopping the progress of the variable display of the special symbol, but also includes the game control unit 200 having the presentation control unit 300 stop the progress of the variable display of the symbols (decorative symbol 41, small symbol 56, sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) (stopping the progress of the variable presentation).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) while storing reserved memory, the game control unit 200 can restrict the execution of variable display based on the judgment information stored as reserved memory and maintain (not erase) the stored reserved memory.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the reserved data stored when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit is erased, the processing performed by the game control unit 200 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit can be reduced. Also, compared to a configuration in which the variable display starts even though the jackpot game has not started after the MY value reaches the MY upper limit, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the jackpot game may start even after the MY value reaches the MY upper limit, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special game (jackpot game) is being played and the first reserved memory (reservation of special patterns) and the second reserved memory (reservation of normal patterns) are stored, and a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000), the game control unit 200 can restrict the execution of the first variable display based on the first judgment information stored as the first reserved memory during the special game being played, and can execute the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory.
Here, since the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a normal game state during a jackpot game, even if a normal symbol lottery is won, the operation time of the electric tulip 123 is relatively short, making it difficult for a winning ball to enter the second starting hole 122 while the electric tulip 123 is operating, and thus the impact on the game is small. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 enables the display of a variable normal symbol based on a reserved symbol on the normal symbol display 223 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during a jackpot game, thereby reducing the processing performed by the game control unit 200 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit, compared to a configuration in which the display of a variable normal symbol based on a reserved symbol on the normal symbol display 223 is restricted when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during a jackpot game. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the variable display of special symbols starts even though a jackpot game has not started after the MY value has reached the MY upper limit, the player's mistaken belief that a jackpot game may start even after the MY value has reached the MY upper limit can be prevented, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) while the first variable display (variable display of special patterns) is being executed and the second reserved memory (reservation of normal patterns) is being stored, the execution of the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory is restricted, and if a specific value reaches a predetermined value while a special game is being executed and the second reserved memory is being stored, the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory can be executed.
As described above, when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during a jackpot game, the execution of the normal symbol variable display has little effect on the game. On the other hand, for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving game mode and the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during the execution of the special symbol variable display, if the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation time of the electric tulip 123 is relatively long, and a prize is likely to be awarded in the second start slot 122 while the electric tulip 123 is operating. This can easily lead to the player mistaking that the jackpot game may begin even after the MY value reaches the MY upper limit. Therefore, if the MY value reaches the MY upper limit during the execution of the special symbol variable display, limiting the normal symbol variable display based on the reserved normal symbol display 223 can prevent the player from mistaking the normal symbol and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(What happens when you win while waiting for the complete function to activate)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 122 while the complete function is in a standby state will be described.
Figure 338 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko game machine 100 when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while in a standby state for activation of the complete function.
In addition, Figure 338 shows an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during the execution of the jackpot game shown in Variable Presentation Example 71 (Figures 279 to 282).

First, the jackpot game shown in the variation presentation example 71 progresses, and as shown in FIG. 338(1), a third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10." At this time, the second special symbol reserve indicator 219 is turned off (indicating that there are no reserved symbols based on winning at the second starting gate 122), and the second special symbol indicator 222 is displayed as stopped. Furthermore, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220 is turned off (indicating that there are no reserved symbols based on passing through the gate 124), and the normal symbol indicator 223 is displayed as stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) enters the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

After this, although not shown in the figure, when a gaming ball enters the jackpot opening 125, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). However, since a jackpot game is currently being played, the complete function does not operate, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for activation of the complete function.

338(2), a second right-hit image 543, a round number image 544, a round-in-progress image 545, and a type notification image 633 are displayed. Also, a standby notification image 654 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, "1" is displayed on the normal symbol reserve display 220 as shown in FIG. 338 (3).
Next, as shown in Figure 338 (4), the normal pattern pending display 220 is updated to "0", and accordingly, the normal pattern display 223 begins to display a variable value.

Next, the normal symbol display 223 stops to indicate a win, and the electric tulip 123 opens. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the display of the second special symbol reserve display 219 is updated to "1" as shown in FIG. 338 (5). However, since the jackpot game is being played, the display of the special symbol based on the reserve for the entry into the second starting hole 122 does not start.
Although not shown in the figure, the jackpot game continues after this, and when all the rounds have been played, the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game ends, the complete function is activated, and the second special symbol reserve indicator 219, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol reserve indicator 220, and the normal symbol indicator 223 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 338 (6). In other words, the display of the variable special symbol based on the reserve for the winning of the second start slot 122 that occurred during the jackpot game is not initiated. At this time, a complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.

(What happens if a magnetic error occurs while the complete function is in standby mode)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a magnetic error occurs while the complete function is in standby mode will be described.
Figure 339 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a magnetic error occurs while waiting for the complete function to be activated.

First, during the execution of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 339(1), a third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) enters the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Note that Figure 339(1) is the same state as that shown in Figure 335(1) and Figure 338(1).

Next, when an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 207, a magnetic error occurs, and as shown in FIG. 339(2), a magnetic error image 657 is displayed and a magnetic alarm sound is output to notify the user of the magnetic error. In the illustrated example, the magnetic error image 657 is displayed on a layer in front of the advance warning image 652 (see FIG. 339(1)), making the advance warning image 652 difficult or impossible to see. At this time, the lamp lights up in red. That is, the lamp emits light to notify the user of a magnetic error.
In the example shown in Figure 339, the jackpot game continues even after a magnetic error occurs.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the big winning slot 125, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). However, since a big win game is currently being played, the complete function does not operate and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in Figure 339 (3), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. However, because the standby notification image 654 is displayed on a layer behind the magnetic error image 657, a portion of it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the magnetic notification sound continues to be output and the lamp continues to light up in red.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the complete function is activated and the complete notification image 653 is displayed, as shown in Figure 339 (4). However, because the complete notification image 653 is displayed in a layer behind the magnetic error image 657, a portion of it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the magnetic notification sound continues to be output and the lamp continues to light up in red. In other words, even if the complete function is activated, the lamp will not light up or the complete notification sound will not be output in accordance with the activation of the complete function.

(What happens if a magnetic error occurs after the complete function is activated)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a magnetic error occurs after the complete function is activated will be described.
Figure 339 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a magnetic error occurs after the complete function is activated.

First, when the complete function is activated, a complete notification image 653 is displayed and a complete notification sound is output, as shown in FIG. 340(1).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. That is, the lamps light up in a manner that corresponds to the operation of the complete function.

Next, when an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 207, a magnetic error occurs, and as shown in Figure 340 (2), a magnetic error image 657 is displayed and a magnetic alert sound is output. In the example shown, the magnetic error image 657 is displayed in a layer in front of the complete alert image 653. At this time, the lamp also lights up in red. In other words, the lamp emits light to alert of a magnetic error.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the complete function is activated and a magnetic error occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 100 will prioritize notifying the user of the magnetic error over notifying the user that the complete function has been activated.

(What happens if a payout error occurs while the complete function is in standby mode)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a payout abnormality occurs while the complete function is in standby mode will be described.
Figure 341 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a payout abnormality occurs while the complete function is in standby mode.

First, the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses, and as shown in FIG. 341(1), a third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) enters the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Note that Figure 341(1) is the same state as that shown in Figure 335(1) and Figure 338(1).

Next, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 341 (2), a dispensing abnormality image 658 is displayed and a dispensing notification sound is output to notify the user of the dispensing abnormality. In the illustrated example, the dispensing abnormality image 658 is displayed on a layer in front of the advance notification image 652 (see FIG. 341 (1)), making the advance notification image 652 difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the lamp lights up yellow. That is, the lamp emits light to notify the user of a dispensing abnormality.
In the example shown in Figure 341, the jackpot game continues even after a payout abnormality occurs.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the big prize opening 125, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). However, since a big win game is currently being played, the complete function does not operate and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 341 (3), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. However, because the standby notification image 654 is displayed on a layer behind the abnormal payout image 658, a portion of it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the payout notification sound continues to be output and the lamp continues to light up in yellow.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the complete function is activated and the complete notification image 653 is displayed, as shown in Figure 341 (4). However, because the complete notification image 653 is displayed in a layer behind the abnormal payout image 658, a portion of it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the payout notification sound continues to be output and the lamp continues to light up in yellow. In other words, even if the complete function is activated, the lamp will not light up or the complete notification sound will not be output in accordance with the activation of the complete function.

Next, when the payout abnormality is resolved, the payout abnormality image 658 disappears as shown in Figure 341 (5). At this time, a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. That is, the lamps light up in a manner that corresponds to the operation of the complete function.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the complete function is activated and a payout abnormality occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 100 will prioritize notifying the user of the payout abnormality over notifying the user that the complete function has been activated.

(What happens when a door open error occurs while the complete function is in standby mode)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a door opening error occurs while the complete function is in standby mode will be described.
Figure 342 is a diagram showing an example of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when a door opening error occurs while waiting for the complete function to be activated.

First, the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses, and as shown in FIG. 342(1), a third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) enter the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) enters the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) enters the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Note that Figure 342(1) is the same state as that shown in Figure 335(1) and Figure 338(1).

Next, when a door opening error occurs, as shown in Figure 342 (2), a door opening error image 659 is displayed and a door alarm sound is output to notify the user of the door opening error. In the example shown, the door opening error image 659 is displayed on a layer in front of the advance warning image 652 (see Figure 341 (1)), making the advance warning image 652 difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the lamp lights up blue. In other words, the lamp emits light to notify the user of a door opening error.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the big winning slot 125, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). However, since a big win game is currently being played, the complete function does not operate and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in Figure 342 (3), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. However, because the standby notification image 654 is displayed on a layer behind the door opening error image 659, a portion of it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, at this time, the door opening sound continues to be output and the lamp continues to light up in blue.

Next, when the big win game ends, the complete function is activated, and as shown in Figure 342 (4), the door open error image 659 disappears and the complete notification image 653 is displayed. At this time, a complete notification sound is also output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. That is, the lamps light up in a manner that corresponds to the operation of the complete function.
In the example shown in Figure 342 (4), although a door opening error image 659 is displayed, the complete notification image 653 is displayed on a layer in front of the door opening error image 659, so that the door opening error image 659 may be difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the complete function is activated, the complete notification sound is repeated a predetermined number of times and then ceases to be output. On the other hand, when the complete function is activated, the lamp continues to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the activation of the complete function.

Then, after the completion notification sound is repeated a predetermined number of times and is no longer output, the door notification sound is output as shown in Fig. 342 (5). Meanwhile, the door open error image 659 is not visible, and the lamp continues to emit light in accordance with the operation of the complete function.
In this way, in this embodiment, when the complete function is activated and a door opening error occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 100 prioritizes notifying that the complete function has been activated over notifying that the door opening error has occurred.

(Modification of the fluctuation mode when the complete function is activated)
Next, a modified example of the change mode when the complete function is activated while the symbols are changing will be described.
Figure 343 shows a modified example of the way in which the special and normal symbols change when the complete function is activated while the special and normal symbols are changing.
In addition, Figure 343 shows an example of the state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the same jackpot variation presentation as shown in Variation Presentation Example 71 (Figures 279 to 282) is executed, except that two holds are generated for the second starting port 122, and the complete function is activated during the execution of this jackpot variation presentation.

First, in variant example 1, when the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses and the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect (see FIG. 280 (15)), the decorative pattern 41 is hidden and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 343 (1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, a second success sound is output. Also, at this time, a pre-alert image 652 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-alert image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1". Also, at this time, the hold number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "2", and two hold images 52 are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.
At this time, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219 is displayed in a manner showing "2", and the second special symbol indicator 222 is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol reserved indicator 220 is displayed in a manner showing "2", and the normal symbol indicator 223 is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, when a game ball enters either the first starting slot 121, the second starting slot 122, or the normal winning slot 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 343 (2), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a loss. Also, the normal symbol display 223 is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a loss. Also, the second special symbol reserved display 219 and the normal symbol reserved display 220 both continue to be in the manner shown in FIG. 343 (1).
In addition, as the variable effect is stopped, the effect images that were displayed (hold number display 55, small pattern 56, SP reach image 517, success image 538, second right hit image 543, advance notification image 652) become hidden, the vibration effect is stopped, the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.

In addition, in Modification 2, after the same mode as shown in FIG. 343(1) is executed, if a game ball enters either the first start slot 121, the second start slot 122, or the normal prize slot 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variable display of the special and normal symbols. In this case, as shown in FIG. 343(3), the second special symbol display 222 is displayed as stopped in a mode different from any of the modes indicating a big win, a small win, or a loss. Furthermore, the normal symbol display 223 is displayed as stopped in a mode different from any of the modes indicating a win or a loss. In other words, the second special symbol display 222 and the normal symbol display 223 are displayed as stopped in a mode unique to the activation of the complete function. In addition, the second special symbol reserved indicator 219 and the normal symbol reserved indicator 220 both continue to operate in the manner shown in Figure 343 (1).
In addition, as the variable effect is stopped, the effect images that were displayed (hold number display 55, small pattern 56, SP reach image 517, success image 538, second right hit image 543, advance notification image 652) become hidden, the vibration effect is stopped, a complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.

Note that Figure 343 shows the change in the second special pattern display 222 when the complete function is activated while the second special pattern display 222 is displaying a change, but the change in the first special pattern reserved display 218 when the complete function is activated while the first special pattern reserved display 218 is displaying a change is also the same as the change in the second special pattern display 222.

As described above, if the complete function is activated while the symbols are changing, the symbols that are changing may be displayed as still symbols.
In addition, in the first and second modified examples, the pattern that was changing when the complete function was activated is displayed as still regardless of whether the predetermined execution time for the changing display has elapsed or not.
Furthermore, in variants 1 and 2, regardless of the results of the special pattern lottery and the normal pattern lottery (even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot and the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win), the format will be as shown in Figures 343 (2) and (3).

(Modification of effects when controlled to standby state during jackpot game)
Next, a modified example of the effect that is executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a standby state for the activation of the complete function will be described.
Figure 344 shows a modified example of the presentation that is executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a standby state for activation of the complete function.

First, in Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 344(1), a jackpot game is being played, and a round number image 544, a round in progress image 545, a type notification image 633, and a 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed. In the illustrated example, two 31st rainbow images 640 indicating that an "A bonus" has been played twice, and two 31st rainbow images 640 indicating that a "B bonus" has been played twice, are displayed. At this time, a pre-announcement image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the pre-announcement image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "10." At this time, the number of prize balls based on winning into the jackpot slot 125 is assumed to be 4,990.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when a gaming ball enters the jackpot opening 125, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the jackpot opening 125 reaches 5,000, and the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls). Meanwhile, since a jackpot game is currently being played, the complete function is not activated, and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 344 (2), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. Furthermore, in Modification 1, the 36th rainbow image 646 (see FIG. 301 (2)) is not displayed.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) through the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. That is, the lamps are illuminated in the same manner as when the complete function is activated (see FIG. 331 (3)).

As described above, in the first modified example, the pachinko gaming machine 100 restricts the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect after being controlled to a standby state for the activation of the complete function.
In this case, it is possible to make the player more aware that the complete function will be activated after the end of the jackpot game, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the complete function is activated, compared to when the player is not aware during the standby state that the complete function will be activated after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in Modification 2, after the same effect as shown in Fig. 344(1) is performed, when a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 125, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the large prize opening 125 reaches 5,000, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in Fig. 344(3), a standby notification image 654 is displayed. Also in Modification 2, the 36th rainbow image 646 (see Fig. 301(2)) is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

As described above, in variant example 2, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to a standby state for the activation of the complete function, it can continue to produce rainbow light-emitting effects using a predetermined light-emitting means (for example, the third lamp (middle movable role 1152)), while restricting the execution of rainbow light-emitting effects using a specific light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)).
Even in this case, compared to a configuration in which the rainbow light-emitting effects by all light-emitting means continue after the complete function is put into a standby state, it is possible to make the player more aware that the complete function will be activated after the jackpot game has ended. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is not aware during the standby state that the complete function will be activated after the jackpot game has ended, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest when the complete function is activated.

Furthermore, after the complete function is controlled to a standby state for activation, the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the lamp may be restricted, while the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 (display of a rainbow image) may not be restricted.Furthermore, after the complete function is controlled to a standby state for activation, the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the image display unit 114 (display of a rainbow image) may be restricted, while the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the lamp may not be restricted.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the frame light-emitting means (any of the first lamp, sixth lamp, seventh lamp, eleventh lamp, fourteenth lamp, or fifteenth lamp) when a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) in a specific presentation state in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be performed (such as during a variable presentation or during a jackpot game).
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the frame light-emitting means is not restricted even when the specific value reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the player continues playing without realizing that the specific value has reached a predetermined value, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can restrict the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the board light-emitting means (any of the second to fifth lamps, seventh lamp, tenth lamp, twelfth lamp, thirteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114) when a specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) in a specific presentation state in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be performed (such as when a variable presentation is being performed or when a jackpot game is being played).
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the board light-emitting means is not restricted even when the specific value reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the player continues playing without realizing that the specific value has reached a predetermined value, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Variations of effects performed during reach effects in time-limited gaming state)
Next, a modified example of the presentation that is performed during the execution of the reach presentation in the time-shortened gaming state will be described.
Figure 345 shows a modified example of the presentation that is performed during the execution of the reach presentation in the time-shortened game state.
In addition, in the modified example, the same presentation as shown in Variable Presentation Example 71 (see Figures 279 to 282) is performed, except for the part explained using Figure 345.

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 279(1) to (6) are performed, and then the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode, as shown in Figure 345(1). At this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.
Next, as shown in Fig. 345 (2), the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping motion is performed. At this time, a second reach line image 531 and a second reach notification image 532 are displayed. At this time, a third reach sound is output.

After that, after the deciding button effect, the 19th rainbow image 597, 21st rainbow image 598, etc. are displayed, and then, as shown in Figure 345 (3), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 345(4), the 22nd rainbow image 628 is displayed, and the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode. At this time, the doublet first effect images 556 are displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the eighth stop sound is also output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 281 (23), (24) and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

As described above, in both the normal game state and the time-saving game state, when a reach effect is executed, a common emphasis effect may be executed as an emphasis effect (display of an image, output of sound effects) that emphasizes the reach effect (see Figure 116 (28) and Figure 345 (2)).
In addition, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed, a common emphasis effect (display of an image, output of sound effects) may be executed to emphasize the double-digit decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 119 (51), Figure 345 (4)).

(Variations of customer waiting performance)
Next, a modified example of the customer waiting performance will be described.
Figure 346 shows a modified example of the customer waiting presentation.
In the first modified example, first, in the customer waiting presentation, as shown in FIG. 346(1), the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" is displayed as a demo image 605.
At this time, the lamps emit light in a manner that corresponds to the display content of the demo image 605. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 346 (2), the display content of the demo image 605 changes to something that alerts the player.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) to the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up green, and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) to the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 346 (1).

In this way, the lamp's illumination may be different when the demo image 605 displays the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" and when it displays warning content.

In addition, in variant 2, after the effect shown in Figure 346 (1) is performed, the display content of the demo image 605 changes to a warning to the player, as shown in Figure 346 (3). In the example shown, the demo image 605 displays an "X" mark and the text "Cheating is a crime." At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 346 (1).

In addition, in variant 3, after the effect shown in Figure 346 (1) is performed, the display content of the demo image 605 changes to a warning to the player, as shown in Figure 346 (4). In the example shown, the demo image 605 displays a picture imitating the effect button 161 and the text "The button is moving. Be careful not to get your hands or fingers pinched." Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 346 (1).

In addition, in variant 4, after the effect shown in Figure 346 (1) is performed, the display content of the demo image 605 changes to a warning to the player, as shown in Figure 346 (5). In the example shown, the demo image 605 displays the text "Do not handle the machine roughly, such as by hitting, punching, or shaking it." At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 346 (1).

In addition, in Modification 5, after the effect shown in FIG. 346(1) is performed, the display content of the demo image 605 changes to a message alerting the player as shown in FIG. 346(6). In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text "Please be careful not to stare at the same light for a long period of time." At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light as shown in FIG. 346(1).
Next, in Modification 5, as shown in FIG. 346(7), the display content of the demo image 605 changes to a content that alerts the player and is different from the content shown in FIG. 346(6). In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text, "Playing by persons under the age of 18 is prohibited by law." At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the second lamp (left movable device 1151), the third lamp (center movable device 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) through the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit green, and the fourth lamp (right movable device 1153) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) through the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) continue to emit light in the manner shown in FIG. 346(6).

In this way, the content of the warning displayed to the player as the demo image 605 is not limited to that shown in Figure 81 (5).
In addition, when content to warn the player is displayed as demo image 605, one or more of the contents shown in Figure 81 (5) and Figures 346 (2) to (7) may be displayed, or all of the contents shown in Figure 81 (5) and Figures 346 (2) to (7) may be displayed.
Furthermore, the illumination mode of the lamp displaying the demo image 605 shown in Figures 81 (5) and 346 (2) to (7) may be either the mode shown in Figure 81 (5) or the mode shown in Figure 346 (2).

(Variation 1 of Variation Example 71)
Figure 347 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 1 of variable presentation example 71.
Next, a description will be given of a first modified example of the variation presentation example 71. The presentation performed in the variation presentation example 71 is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.
Figure 347 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variant example 1 of variable performance example 71.
In addition, in the modified example 1 of the variable performance example 71, the performance (such as the display content of the image display unit 114) except for the light emission mode of the lamp is the same as that shown in Figures 279 to 284. In addition, the light emission mode of the lamp in the modified example 1 of the variable performance example 71 is the same as that shown in Figures 279 to 284 except for the part shown in Figure 347.

First, at time T10', the third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) repeat the seventh rainbow light-emitting pattern in a 1.6-second cycle. Also, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern in a 2-second cycle. Also, the third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern in a 2-second cycle. Also, the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern in a 2-second cycle. In addition, the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the seventh rainbow light emission mode.
Time T10' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (24) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10' will continue for 9 seconds.

Next, at time T11', the winning notification image 630 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T10'.
Time T11' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (25) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11' will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T12', the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable part 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T10'. The seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode every one second.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the fourth rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) with the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).
282(26) begins at time T12'. The effect shown to be executed at time T12' continues for one second.
After this, the same effects as those shown at time T13 to time T18 in FIG. 284 are performed.

As described above, during execution of a jackpot game, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a second cycle different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a third cycle different from the second cycle (see time points T10' to T11' and time points T12' to T13 in Figure 347, etc.).
In this case, a rainbow light-emitting effect with a sense of unity can be realized by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means, and then the rainbow light-emitting effect can be diversified in accordance with the light-emitting means depending on the progress of the variable effect.
In the illustrated example, the third period is different from both the first period and the second period, but is not limited to this. The third period may be different from the second period or may be the same period as the first period.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 347, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) is a specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T12' to time T13, but this is not limited to this.
The specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T12' to time T13 may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).

In addition, during the period from time T12' to time T13, the performance control unit 300 may make the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp (one of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164)) different from that of another lamp (a lamp other than the specific lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164)). In this case, if the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp is different between the period from time T10' to time T11' and the period from time T12' to time T13, the rainbow light emission pattern of the other lamps may be the same or different.

(Variation 2 of Variation Example 71)
Figure 348 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in variant example 2 of variable presentation example 71.
Figure 348 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114 and the light emission pattern of the lamp in variant example 2 of variable performance example 71.
In addition, in the modified example 2 of the variation performance example 71, the performance (such as the display content of the image display unit 114) except for the light emission mode of the lamp is the same as that shown in Figures 279 to 284. In addition, the light emission mode of the lamp in the modified example 2 of the variation performance example 71 is the same as that shown in Figures 279 to 284 except for the part shown in Figure 348.

First, at time T10', the third right-hit image 629 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) repeats the seventh rainbow light-emitting pattern at a 1.6-second cycle. The second lamp (left movable role 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting pattern at a 2-second cycle. The third lamp (center movable role 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting pattern at a 2-second cycle. The fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting pattern at a 2-second cycle. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In addition, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the fourth rainbow light-emitting pattern in one-second cycles.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the fourth rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) with the light emission modes of the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).
Time T10' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 281 (24) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T10' will continue for 9 seconds.

Next, at time T11', the winning notification image 630 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) are lit in white. In addition, the second lamp (left movable role 1151) to the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting gate lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as at time T10'.
Time T11' is the time when the effect shown in Figure 282 (25) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T11' will continue for two seconds.

Next, at time T12', the 23rd rainbow image 631 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue the light-emitting mode from time T11'.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
282(26) begins at time T12'. The effect shown to be executed at time T12' continues for one second.

As described above, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a third cycle that is different from the first cycle and then to the second cycle (see times T10' to T11' and times T12' to T13 in Figure 348, etc.).
In this case, after realizing diversification of rainbow light-emitting effects according to the light-emitting means, it is possible to realize a rainbow light-emitting effect with a sense of unity between the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means according to the progress of the variable effect.
In the illustrated example, the third period is different from the second period, but this is not limiting. The third period may be any period different from the first period, or may be the same period as the second period.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 348, a specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T10' to time T11' is set as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), but this is not limited to this.
The specific lamp whose light emission pattern is not synchronized (aligned) with the other lamps during the period from time T10' to time T11' may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164).

In addition, during the period from time T10' to time T11', the performance control unit 300 may make the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp (one of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164)) different from that of the other lamps (lamps other than the specific lamp among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164)). In this case, if the rainbow light emission pattern of a specific lamp is different between the period from time T10' to time T11' and the period from time T12' to time T13, the rainbow light emission pattern of the other lamps may be the same or different.

(Modification of the second reach notification image)
Next, we will explain modified examples of the second reach notification image 532. The second reach notification image 532 is not limited to the example shown in FIG.
Figure 349 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the second reach notification image 532.

In Figure 349 (1), the text "Reach!" is shown in purple as the second reach notification image 532. That is, as the second reach notification image 532, the same text as in the first reach notification image 510 (see Figure 88 (14)) is shown in a color different from that of the first reach notification image 510. Even in this case, the first reach notification image 510 and the second reach notification image 532 are regarded as the first emphasized image and a second emphasized image different from the first emphasized image, which are emphasized images that emphasize a specific effect (reach effect).
As described above, "a first emphasized image and a second emphasized image different from the first emphasized image" includes not only two emphasized images with different display sizes or display formats, but also two emphasized images with different display colors.

(Modification of the display color of the decorative pattern 41)
Next, modified examples of the display color of the numbers in the decorative pattern 41 will be described.
In this embodiment, it has been described that in each visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41, the number portions of the decorative pattern 41 are all displayed in white, but this is not limited to this.
Figure 350 is a diagram for explaining modified examples of the display color of the numbers in the decorative pattern 41.

Figure 350 (1) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 100 (4)) during the reach performance after the reach-teasing performance (see Figure 100 (3)) using the decorative pattern 41 in the left and right rows, ``4'', has been performed in the first stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (1), during the reach effect after the reach stimulation effect using the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows in the first stage, the number portion of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows is displayed in blue. This color is different from the display color (white) of the number portion of the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows during the reach effect that is performed in the first stage without going through the reach stimulation effect (see Figure 116 (28) etc.).

Figure 350 (2) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 "7" (see Figure 129 (6)) during the reach performance in the first stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (2), during the reach effect in the first stage, the number portion of the decorative symbol 41 "7" on the left and right rows is displayed in red. This color is different from the display color (white) of the number portion of the decorative symbol 41 "4" on the left and right rows (see Figure 116 (28) etc.) during the reach effect in the first stage.

Figure 350 (3) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 of the double number "7" (see Figure 139 (25)) in the first stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (3), the number part of the "7" decorative symbol 41, which is a doublet in the first stage, is displayed in rainbow colors. This color is different from the display color (white) of the number part of the "4" decorative symbol 41, which is a doublet in the first stage (see Figure 119 (51)).

Figure 350 (4) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 "4" (see Figure 187 (28)) during the reach performance in the second stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (4), the numerical portion of the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows is displayed in green during the reach effect in the second stage. This color is different from the display color (white) of the numerical portion of the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows during the reach effect in the first stage (see Figure 116 (28) etc.).

Figure 350 (5) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 "4" (see Figure 279 (8)) during the reach performance in the fourth stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (5), the number portion of the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows is displayed in purple during the reach effect in the fourth stage. This color is different from the display color (white) of the number portion of the decorative symbols 41 "4" on the left and right rows during the reach effect in the first stage (see Figure 116 (28) etc.).

Figure 350 (6) shows a modified example of the decorative pattern 41 of the double number "4" (see Figure 281 (22)) in the fourth stage.
In the example shown in Figure 350 (6), the number part of the decorative symbol 41 of the doublet "4" in the fourth stage is displayed in orange. This color is different from the display color (white) of the number part of the decorative symbol 41 of the doublet "4" (see Figure 119 (51)) in the first stage.

In this way, the emphasis image that emphasizes a specific effect (such as a reach effect or an effect that displays the decorative symbols 41 of double numbers) also includes the decorative symbols 41. The "first emphasis image and the second emphasis image different from the first emphasis image" also includes two decorative symbols 41 with different display colors.
350(1) to (6), the number portion of the decorative pattern 41 is shown in a specific color (blue, red, gold, green, purple, orange, etc.), but is not limited to this. The portion shown in a specific color may be a character portion of the decorative pattern 41, or the entire decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be produced using the decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 350 (3)). On the other hand, a rainbow light-emitting effect using the small pattern 56 is not produced.

(Variations of sound effects)
Next, modified examples of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 will be described.
FIG. 351 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the effect sound output from the speaker 156.
Figure 351 (1) shows a modified example of the presentation mode (see Figure 116 (28)) when the second reach line image 531 is displayed in variable presentation example 13 (see Figures 113 to 120). In this modified example, when the second reach line image 531 is displayed, the first reach sound (see Figure 88 (14)) is output, and then a reach reverberation sound is output. The reach reverberation sound is the reverberation sound of the first reach sound.

Figure 351 (2) shows a modified example of the presentation mode (see Figure 134 (13)) when the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode in variable presentation example 18 (see Figures 133 and 134). In this modified example, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode, the eighth stop sound (see Figure 119 (51)) is output, followed by a doublet reverberation sound. The doublet reverberation sound is the reverberation sound of the eighth stop sound. In other words, the doublet reverberation sound is the reverberation sound of the stopping sound (sound effect) of the doublet decorative pattern 41.

In this way, the "first specific sound and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound" as specific sounds output when a specific effect (such as a reach effect or an effect displaying a double-digit decorative pattern 41) is executed includes the relationship between two specific sounds that have a common effect sound and only one of which has a unique effect sound, such as "the first reach sound, the first reach sound and a reach reverberation sound" or "the eighth stop sound, the eighth stop sound and a double-digit reverberation sound."
It is also possible to configure the system so that when the second reach line image 531 is displayed, the first reach sound is output but the reach reverberation sound is not output, while when the first reach line image 509 is displayed, the first reach sound and the reach reverberation sound are output. Also, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 "777" is displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode, the eighth stop sound is output but the doublet reverberation sound is not output, while when the doublet decorative pattern 41 "444" is displayed and stopped in the fourth mode of the 16th visual mode, the eighth stop sound and the doublet reverberation sound are output.

In addition, when the reach performance is executed after the reach promotion performance and when the reach performance is executed without going through the reach promotion performance, in one case the first reach sound may be output and the reach reverberation sound may not be output, and in the other case the first reach sound and the reach reverberation sound may be output.
In addition, when a reach line image is displayed in the first stage and when a reach line image is displayed in the second stage, the first reach sound may be output and the reach reverberation sound may not be output in one case, and the first reach sound and the reach reverberation sound may be output in the other case.
In addition, when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first stage and when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second stage, the eighth stop sound may be output and the double-digit reverberation sound may not be output in one case, and the eighth stop sound and the double-digit reverberation sound may be output in the other case.

(Modification of the enlarged decorative pattern of doublets)
Next, a modified example of the presentation mode (see FIG. 119 (50) etc.) when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode will be described.
Figure 352 shows a modified example of the presentation mode when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode.
First, in the first modification, as shown in Fig. 352(1), when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, no rainbow image such as the third rainbow image 540 (see Fig. 119(50)) is displayed. Also, all the lamps have a light emission mode different from the rainbow light emission mode.
In this way, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode (when the proportion of the middle row decorative pattern 41 in the image display unit 114 is the largest), none of the rainbow light-emitting effects may be performed.

352(2), when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable role element 1151) becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode. Also, the third lamp (middle movable role element 1152), the fourth lamp (right movable role element 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.
In this way, when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode (when the middle row decorative pattern 41 occupies the largest proportion in the image display unit 114), a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed using a predetermined lamp (e.g., the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)), while the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific lamp (e.g., the third lamp (middle movable role 1152)) may be restricted.

In addition, in Variations 1 and 2, the presentation mode when the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode before the start of the promotion teasing presentation has been described, but this is not limited to this. When the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode after the start of the promotion teasing presentation (see Figure 119 (53), etc.), the presentation shown in Figure 352 (1) or Figure 352 (2) may also be performed.

Furthermore, for example, when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode in the first stage, the effects shown in Figure 352 (1) or Figure 352 (2) may be performed (rainbow light-emitting effects using specific light-emitting means may be restricted), while when a double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode in the second stage, the effect shown in Figure 190 (53) or the third rainbow image 540, etc. may be displayed (rainbow light-emitting effects using specific light-emitting means may be performed). Furthermore, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode in the first stage, the effects shown in Figure 352 (1) or Figure 352 (2) are produced (rainbow light-emitting effects using specific light-emitting means are limited), while when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the 16th visual mode in the fourth stage, the lamp light-emitting mode shown in Figure 281 (22) or a rainbow image such as the 21st rainbow image 598 may be displayed (rainbow light-emitting effects using specific light-emitting means).

Next, an example will be described in which the effect button 161 is operated while the customer waiting effect is being executed.
Figure 353 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect button 161 is operated before the rainbow light effect starts during the customer waiting effect.

First, after the customer waiting effect has started, if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the machine will be controlled to a demo effect state, and a demo image 605 will be displayed, as shown in Figure 353 (1).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the demo image 605 shown in Figure 353 (1) is displayed, the demo effect state ends and the demo image 605 is no longer displayed, as shown in Figure 353 (2).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white.
The presentation mode shown in Figure 353 (2) is the same as the presentation mode shown in Figure 81 (1), that is, the presentation mode before the demo image 605 is displayed in the customer waiting presentation.

In this way, when the effect button 161 is operated in the demo effect state, the demo effect state ends and the progress of the effect in the demo effect state (see Figures 81 (3) to (6)) is restricted.

Figure 354 is a diagram showing an example of when the effect button 161 is operated when a rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed in the customer waiting effect.
First, the performance is progressing in the demo performance state, and as shown in Figure 354 (1), the text "Featured Performance SPSP Challenge!" is displayed as a demo image 605.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light effect of the first rainbow light emission mode. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

When the player operates the effect button 161 in the effect mode shown in FIG. 354(1), the demo effect state ends and the demo image 605 disappears as shown in FIG. 354(2).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white.
The presentation mode shown in Figure 354 (2) is the same as the presentation mode shown in Figure 81 (1), that is, the presentation mode before the demo image 605 is displayed in the customer waiting presentation.

In this way, if the effect button 161 is operated while the rainbow light effect is being performed during the customer waiting effect, the demo effect state will end and the rainbow light effect will be limited.

Figure 355 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the effect button 161 is operated when a rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed in the customer waiting effect.
First, the performance is progressing in the demo performance state, and as shown in Figure 355 (1), the text "Featured Performance SPSP Challenge!" is displayed as a demo image 605.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 64). Also, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. Also, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

When the player operates the effect button 161 in the effect mode shown in FIG. 355(1), the demo image 605 disappears as shown in FIG. 355(2).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light effect of the first rainbow light emission mode. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

In this way, if the effect button 161 is operated while the rainbow light effect is being performed in the customer waiting effect, the demo image 605 may be hidden, while the rainbow light effect using the lamp may continue.

Figure 356-1 is a diagram showing the relationship between when the effect button 161 is operated before the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect while the customer waiting effect is being executed, and when the effect button 161 is operated before the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect while the jackpot variable effect is being executed.
First, in the customer waiting effect, as shown in Fig. 356-1 (A-1), the machine is controlled to a demo effect state, and a demo image 605 is displayed. At this time, the rainbow light emission effect is not performed.
The state shown in Figure 356-1 (A-1) is before the rainbow light emission effect (see Figure 81 (3)) in the demo effect state begins.

If the player operates the effect button 161 while the demo image 605 shown in Figure 356-1 (A-1) is displayed, the demo effect state ends and the demo image 605 disappears, as shown in Figure 356-1 (A-2). In this case, the progress of the effect in the demo effect state is restricted, and the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the demo effect state (see Figure 81 (3)) is restricted.

Also, while the jackpot variation effect is being executed, as shown in Figure 356-1 (B-1), the deciding button operation effect begins and the button operation image 502 is displayed (see Figure 118 (43)).

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, depending on the timing at which the effect button 161 is operated, as shown in Figure 356-1 (B-2). At this time, the rainbow light-emitting effect also begins. In other words, while the jackpot variation effect is being executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect begins in response to the operation of the effect button 161 in the decide button operation effect.

Figure 356-2 is a diagram showing the relationship between when the effect button 161 is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the customer waiting effect and when the effect button 161 is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the jackpot variable effect.
First, in the customer waiting effect, the effect is progressing in a demo effect state, and as shown in FIG. 356-2 (A-1), the text "Featured effect SPSP Challenge!" is displayed as a demo image 605. Also, at this time, a rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed.

If the player operates the effect button 161 while the rainbow light-emitting effect shown in Figure 356-2 (A-1) is being displayed, the demo effect state ends and the demo image 605 disappears, as shown in Figure 356-2 (A-2). In this case, the progress of the effect in the demo effect state is limited, and the rainbow light-emitting effect in the demo effect state is also limited (interrupted).

During the execution of the big win variation effect, a success image 538 is displayed as shown in FIG. 356-2 (B-1). At this time, a rainbow light-emitting effect is also performed.
If the player operates the effect button 161 while the rainbow light-emitting effect shown in Fig. 356-2 (B-1) is being performed, the operation of the effect button 161 is not accepted, and the effect that was being performed continues as shown in Fig. 356-2 (B-2). In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect continues without any restrictions.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first presentation state (such as when a variable presentation is being executed) and a second presentation state that is different from the first presentation state (such as when waiting for customers), and in the first presentation state, the presentation control unit 300 can start the rainbow light-emitting effect based on the operation of the operating means, and in the second presentation state, it can restrict the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect based on the operation of the operating means.
In this way, by varying whether to start or limit the rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the operation of the operating means depending on the presentation state, the player can feel the variety of triggers for executing the rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the presentation state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, if the effect button 161 is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the customer waiting effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect is limited. On the other hand, if the effect button 161 is operated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the jackpot variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect continues.
In this way, whether or not to terminate a currently running effect in response to the operation of the effect button 161 can be switched depending on the effect status.

Figure 357 shows an example of a presentation in which a game ball wins before the rainbow light-emitting presentation begins during the customer waiting presentation.
First, after the customer waiting effect has started, if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the machine will be controlled to a demo effect state, and a demo image 605 will be displayed, as shown in Figure 357 (1).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
The state shown in Figure 357 (1) is before the rainbow light emission effect (see Figure 81 (3)) in the demo effect state begins.

When the demo image 605 shown in Figure 357 (1) is displayed and the game ball launched in response to the player's operation of the handle 151 enters the first starting hole 121, the special symbol begins to change, and the changing effect begins, as shown in Figure 357 (2), and the changing image 51 is displayed. Although not shown, at this time, all of the lamps are in a different light-emitting mode from the rainbow light-emitting mode.

In this way, if the variable effect is started in response to the winning of the game ball released in response to the player's operation of the handle 151 before the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the customer waiting effect, the progress of the effect in the demo effect state is restricted, and the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect (see Figure 81 (3)) in the demo effect state is restricted.
Therefore, the operation of the operating means that can limit the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect includes not only the operation of the effect button 161 but also the operation of the handle 151.

Figure 358 shows an example of a customer waiting presentation during time-saving gaming mode.
First, in the fourth stage (time-shortened game state), if the time-up time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special symbols start to stop and no game balls enter either the first start slot 121 or the second start slot 122, the pachinko game machine 100 enters a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting effect is executed, as shown in Fig. 358 (1). During the execution of the customer waiting effect, no sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, after the customer waiting effect has started, a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) passes during which no game balls enter either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. In this case, as shown in Figure 358 (2), the presentation mode of the customer waiting effect continues without change. That is, in the normal gaming state, the state is controlled to the demo presentation state as the specific time passes after the customer waiting effect has started, whereas in the time-saving gaming state, the state is not controlled to the demo presentation state even after the specific time has passed since the customer waiting effect started. In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect in the demo presentation state (see Figure 81 (3)) is also not executed.

In addition, the customer waiting presentation during the time-saving game mode is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 358 (1) and (2), but may be the examples (modified examples) shown in Figures 358 (3) and (4).
In a modified example, in the fourth stage (time-shortened game state), if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting performance began without the game ball entering either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, a demo image 605 is displayed, as shown in Figure 358 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 358(4), as time passes, the text "Featured Performance: SPSP Challenge!" is displayed as a demo image 605.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 64). Also, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white. Also, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
In this way, even in the time-saving game mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in the customer waiting effect.

In addition, when a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed during the customer waiting effect in the time-saving game mode, the effect mode when the effect button 161 or handle 151 is operated during the execution of this customer waiting effect will be the same as that shown in Figures 353 to 357.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in a predetermined state in the normal gaming state than in a predetermined state in the time-saving gaming state (such as a state where there are no reserved balls and a predetermined time has passed without the execution of a variable effect, such as a customer waiting state). In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be restricted in a predetermined state in the time-saving gaming state than in a predetermined state in the normal gaming state.
In this case, even in the normal game state, the interest in the game can be increased in the predetermined state, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between the normal game state and the time-saving game state.

Note that the rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be executed in a predetermined state in the normal game state than in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state (such as a state where there are no reserved balls and a predetermined time has passed without the execution of variable effects, such as a waiting-for-customer state), and that the rainbow light-emitting effects are more likely to be restricted in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state than in a predetermined state in the normal game state, both of which include the rainbow light-emitting effects not being executed (0%) in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more likely to be executed in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state than in a predetermined state in the normal game state (such as a state where there are no reserved balls and a predetermined time has passed without a variable effect being executed, such as a waiting state for a customer). In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed may be different between a predetermined state in the time-saving game state and a predetermined state in the normal game state.

In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effects may be more easily restricted in a predetermined state in the normal game state than in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state (such as a waiting state where there are no reserved balls and a predetermined time has passed without a variable effect being executed). In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effects may be more easily restricted in a predetermined state in the time-saving game state than in a predetermined state in the normal game state.

(Variation of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state)
Next, a modified example of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state will be explained.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable effects based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state, the rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed (see Figures 306 to 308), but this is not limited to this.

Figures 359 to 361 show modified examples of variation presentation example 81 (see Figure 308).
As shown in FIG. 359(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the performance control unit 300, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "213" are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 55 of the first starting gate 121 shows "1", which is the reserved number for winning the first starting gate 121, and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting gate 122 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second starting gate 122. Meanwhile, the reserved image 52 is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 359 (2), when the next special symbol starts to change, the change effect starts, and three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode. At this time, the change image 51 is not displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 359(3), the reach stimulation effect is started, and the "4" decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode and perform the first varying action. At this time, the reach stimulation seventh effect image 590 is displayed below each of the decorative symbols 41 on the left and right rows.

Next, as shown in Figure 359 (4), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the second mode of the ninth visual mode. At this time, the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed lower than when they are displayed in the first mode of the ninth visual mode. Also, at this time, eighth reach-inducing effect images 591 are displayed above and below each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in Fig. 359 (5), the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the ninth visual mode, and a twelfth stopping action is performed. At this time, a sixteenth stop effect image 594 is displayed around each of the left and right rows of decorative symbols 41. At this time, a seventh reach sound is output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359(6), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed in a shrinking motion.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (7), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the first mode of the eleventh visual mode. At this time, the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an operational manner so as to shrink and move toward the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the image display unit 114. At this time, the middle row decorative symbol 41 is hidden (hard to see or impossible to see). At this time, a transition image 516 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 359 (8), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach pattern is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and a second temporary stopping action is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (9), the SP reach effect starts and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 360 (10), the middle row decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first mode of the 12th visual mode, and the 9th variable operation is performed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (11), the middle row decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the third mode of the twelfth visual mode. At this time, SP third effect images 595 are displayed on the left and right sides of the middle row decorative symbol 41, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (12), the final button operation effect starts, and button operation image 502 is displayed. Button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!". At this time, a sixth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 360 (13). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, at this time, a second success sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (14), the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is again displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is also displayed. At this time, the vibration effect is also continued.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 continues to be displayed, and the vibration effect continues. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.
When the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode, rainbow images such as the twenty-first rainbow image 598 may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 360 (16), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-first rainbow image 598 is displayed, and the twenty-second rainbow image 628 is also displayed. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361 (17), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 281 (24) and Figure 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

Figure 362 is a chart showing the flow of the presentation performed in a modified example of variable presentation example 81 (see Figures 359 to 361).
Figure 362 shows the flow of the display content of the image display unit 114, the light emission mode of the lamp, and the light emission mode of the light guide plate 118 in a modified example of variable performance example 81.

First, at time T1, the button operation image 502 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are illuminated in white. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) through the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) is illuminated in red.
Time T1 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 360 (12) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T1 will continue for 3 seconds.

Next, at time T2, the success image 538 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), and the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) are turned off. The third lamp (center movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the third rainbow light-emitting mode at 0.4-second intervals. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are lit in white. In addition, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) continue to emit light in the same manner as from time T1.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the third lamp (middle movable role object 1152), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to perform the rainbow light emission performance of the third rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T2 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 360 (13) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T2 continues for one second.

Next, at time T3, the 21st rainbow image 598 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) repeatedly emit a first rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The second lamp (left movable accessory 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are illuminated in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off. The fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeatedly emits a second rainbow light-emitting pattern at two-second intervals. The light guide plate 118 is also turned off.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to execute the rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode.
Furthermore, time T3 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 360 (14) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T3 continues for 2 seconds.

Next, at time T4, the doublet decorative pattern 41 begins to expand. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in white. The light guide plate 118 continues to emit light as it did at time T3.
Time T4 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 360 (15) starts. The effect shown to be executed at time T4 continues for one second.

Next, at time T5, the 22nd rainbow image 628 is displayed, and the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) repeat the first rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The second lamp (left movable role object 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) repeat the second rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The third lamp (center movable role object 1152) repeats the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. The fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) repeats the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode every two seconds. In addition, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off. In addition, the light guide plate 118 continues the light emitting mode from time T4.
Here, the performance control unit 300 synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the first rainbow light emission mode. The performance control unit 300 also synchronizes (aligns) the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153) to execute a rainbow light emission performance of the second rainbow light emission mode. Meanwhile, the performance control unit 300 does not synchronize (align) the light emission mode of the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) with the light emission modes of the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153).
Furthermore, time T5 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 360 (16) starts. Furthermore, the effect shown to be executed at time T5 continues for 6 seconds.

Next, at time T6, decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped, and the variable effect ends. At this time, 21st rainbow image 598 and 22nd rainbow image 628 are not displayed.
Time T6 is the time when the effect shown in Figure 361 (17) begins.

Figure 363 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the rainbow light-emitting presentation that is executed.
329 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the rainbow light-emitting presentation executed when the example shown in FIG. 308 is performed as a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened gaming state, that is, when a rainbow light-emitting presentation is not executed in the variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened gaming state. On the other hand, FIG. 363 is a diagram showing the relationship between the presentation state in the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the rainbow light-emitting presentation executed when the example shown in FIG. 359 to FIG. 361 is performed as a jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened gaming state, that is, when a rainbow light-emitting presentation is executed in the variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened gaming state.
In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effect performed during the customer waiting effect and the rainbow light-emitting effect performed during the jackpot game are the same as those shown in FIG. 329 as shown in FIG. 363.

The "starting gate" shown in Figure 363 means that the trigger for the variable effect of the target for which the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed is whether winning at the first starting gate 121 or the second starting gate 122.
First, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the execution of a variable effect in the first stage (normal gaming state) triggered by winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. The rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the execution of a variable effect in the first stage (normal gaming state) triggered by winning at the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the same as the rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the execution of the variable effect in the first stage shown in FIG.
In addition, the rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the execution of the variable effect triggered by winning at the first starting port 121 in the first stage is the same as the rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the execution of the variable effect triggered by winning at the second starting port 122 in the first stage.

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the execution of the variable effect in the second and third stages (normal gaming state) triggered by winning at first starting hole 121. The rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the variable effect in the second and third stages (normal gaming state) triggered by winning at first starting hole 121 is the same as the rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the variable effect in the second and third stages (normal gaming state) shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, in the second and third stages, the variable effects triggered by winning the first starting hole 121 are not executed (are limited).

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the variable effect triggered by winning at the first starting port 121 in the fourth stage (time-saving game state).
The rainbow light emitting modes that the lamp can perform include a first rainbow light emitting mode, a second rainbow light emitting mode, a third rainbow light emitting mode, a fifth rainbow light emitting mode, and a sixth rainbow light emitting mode.
The rainbow light emission modes that the lamp can perform include 0.4 second, 1 second, and 2 second cycles.
Furthermore, the rainbow images that image display unit 114 can display include a 21st rainbow image 598 and a 22nd rainbow image 628 .

Next, we will explain the rainbow light-emitting effect that is performed during the execution of the variable effect triggered by winning at the second starting hole 122 in the fourth stage (time-shortened game state). The rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the variable effect triggered by winning at the second starting hole 122 in the fourth stage (time-shortened game state) is the same as the rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting mode, cycle of rainbow light-emitting mode, rainbow image) that is performed during the variable effect in the fourth stage shown in Figure 329.

Here, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) is greater during execution of variable effects based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of variable effects based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.
In this case, the player can be made aware that the game ball should not enter the first starting hole 121 in the time-saving game state.

In addition, there are more types of rainbow moving light emitting patterns that can be executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.
In this case, even when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect ensures an increase in the excitement of the game, while the variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal game state allows the player to feel the greater diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

In addition, the number of times that the rainbow light emitting effect is executed is greater during the execution of the variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during the execution of the variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.
In this case, even when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect ensures an increase in the excitement of the game, while the variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the normal game state allows the player to feel the greater diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, the number of times that the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed at a specific timing may be greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal gaming state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened gaming state. The specific timings may be, for example, a first timing (e.g., before the start of the reach effect), a second timing (e.g., after the start of the reach effect and before the display of the winning effect or the doublet decorative pattern 41), and a third timing (e.g., after the start of the winning effect or the display of the doublet decorative pattern 41) in the variable effect.
The rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed more frequently at the first timing during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state. The rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed more frequently at the second timing during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state. The rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed more frequently at the third timing during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state. In addition, the number of times that the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed may be greater at any of the first to third timings during execution of the variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of the variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (number of types of rainbow light-emitting patterns, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting patterns, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-saving play state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving play state.
In this case, in the time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball should enter the second starting hole 122 instead of the first starting hole 121.

In addition, there are more types of rainbow moving light emitting patterns that can be executed during the execution of a variable effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state than during the execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state.
In this case, even when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving play state is executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect ensures an increase in the interest of the game, while the variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the time-saving play state allows the player to feel the greater diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) that can be executed is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state than during execution of a customer waiting effect.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed is fewer when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed than when a customer waiting effect is being executed, an excessive decrease in interest due to the execution of a jackpot variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state can be suppressed, and an increase in interest in the game can be ensured even when a jackpot variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is executed.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow moving light emitting modes that can be executed is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened game state than during execution of a customer waiting effect.
In this case, even when a jackpot variation effect is executed based on winning into the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effect.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) may be fewer when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state is being executed than when a customer waiting effect is being executed.
In other words, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) can be made different when a customer waiting effect is being executed and when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is being executed.

In addition, the number of types of rainbow moving light emitting patterns that can be executed may be made smaller during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state than during execution of a customer waiting effect.
In other words, the number of types of rainbow moving light emitting modes that can be executed may be different when a customer waiting effect is being executed and when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are fewer types of rainbow light-emitting patterns in the rainbow light-emitting effect that is executed during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the normal game state. In other words, there are a first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and a second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode) that is different from the first presentation mode, and the number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed (types of rainbow light-emitting patterns, types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting patterns, types of execution times for the rainbow light-emitting effect, types of rainbow images, types of display times for the rainbow images, etc.) differs during execution of the first variable effect in the first presentation mode and during execution of the first variable effect in the second presentation mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the number of rainbow light-emitting effect patterns that can be executed is the same during execution of the first variable effect in the first effect mode and during execution of the first variable effect in the second effect mode, the player can be made to feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects that correspond to the effect mode in which the first variable effect is executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are more types of rainbow light-emitting patterns in the rainbow light-emitting effect that are executed during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a winning entry into the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state. In other words, there are a first presentation mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second presentation mode (for example, the fourth stage) that is different from the first presentation mode, and the number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed (types of rainbow light-emitting patterns, types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting patterns, types of execution times for the rainbow light-emitting effect, types of rainbow images, types of display times for the rainbow images, etc.) differs during execution of the first variable effect in the second presentation mode and during execution of the second variable effect in the second presentation mode.
In this case, compared to a configuration in which the number of rainbow light-emitting effect patterns that can be executed is the same during execution of the first variable effect in the second presentation mode and during execution of the second variable effect in the second presentation mode, the player can feel the diversity of the rainbow light-emitting effects depending on whether the variable effect executed in the second presentation mode is the first variable effect or the second variable effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, the number of types of rainbow images, etc.) may be smaller during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state. In other words, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, the number of types of rainbow images, etc.) may be different during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state and during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state.
Furthermore, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, the number of types of rainbow images, etc.) may be smaller during execution of a variable effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state than during execution of a variable effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state. In other words, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (the number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, the number of types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, the number of types of rainbow images, etc.) may be different during execution of a variable effect based on a win at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state and during execution of a variable effect based on a win at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, the fact that the number of times the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (at a specific timing) is greater during the execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during the execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state also includes the fact that the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed during the execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state.
Furthermore, the number of times the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (at a specific timing) may be greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state. In other words, the number of times the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed (at a specific timing) may be different during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state and during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state.

Furthermore, the fact that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) that can be executed is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the fact that there are more types of rainbow moving and light emitting modes that can be executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the normal game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state includes the fact that rainbow light emitting modes of rainbow moving and light emitting modes are not executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state.
Furthermore, the fact that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects (number of types of rainbow light-emitting patterns, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting patterns, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) that can be executed is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, the fact that there are more types of rainbow moving and light emitting modes that can be executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the second starting port 122 in the time-shortened game state than during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened game state includes the fact that rainbow light emitting modes of rainbow moving and light emitting modes are not executed during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened game state.
Furthermore, the fact that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) that can be executed is greater during execution of a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-saving game state than during execution of a customer waiting effect includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed during execution of a customer waiting effect.
Furthermore, the fact that there are more types of rainbow moving and light emitting modes that can be executed when a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed than when a customer waiting effect is being executed includes the fact that a rainbow light emitting effect of a rainbow moving and light emitting mode is not executed when a customer waiting effect is being executed.
Furthermore, the fact that the number of types of rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed (number of types of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, number of types of rainbow images, etc.) is fewer when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed than when a customer waiting effect is being executed includes the fact that rainbow light-emitting effects are not executed when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed.
Furthermore, the fact that there are fewer types of rainbow moving and light emitting modes that can be executed when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed than when a customer waiting effect is being executed includes the fact that a rainbow light emitting effect of a rainbow moving and light emitting mode is not executed when a variable effect based on winning at the first start port 121 in the time-shortened game state is being executed.

(Variation 2 of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting slot 121 in the time-saving gaming state)
Next, we will explain variant example 2 of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state.
Figure 364 shows a modified example 2 of the variation performance example 81 (see Figure 308).

First, the same effects as those shown in Fig. 359 (1) to (8) and Fig. 360 (9) to (12) are performed, and then when the effect button 161 is operated during the operation valid period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 364 (1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, at this time, a second success sound is output.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white. Also, although not shown, the light guide plate 118 is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 364(2), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach pattern is again displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect continues. Meanwhile, the 21st rainbow image 598 (see FIG. 360(14)) is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 364 (3), the double-digit decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues. Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 364 (4), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-second rainbow image 628 is also displayed. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound is also output. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) goes out, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white.

Next, as shown in Figure 364 (5), in conjunction with the display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) turns off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 281 (24) and Figure 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

As described above, in variant 2, during the execution of a jackpot variation effect based on a win in the first starting slot 121 during time-saving play, a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed using a specified light-emitting means (such as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)), and the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (such as the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153)) is restricted.

(Variation 3 of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state)
Next, we will explain variant example 3 of the variable presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 121 in the time-saving game state.
Figure 365 shows variant example 3 of variation presentation example 81 (see Figure 308).

First, the same effects as those shown in Figures 359 (1) to (8) and Figures 360 (9) to (11) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 365 (1), the final button operation effect begins, and a button operation image 502 is displayed. The button operation image 502 displays the text "Operation!" At this time, a sixth button sound is output. The operation valid period of this button operation effect is the fourth period.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the decide button operation effect, the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 365 (2). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, at this time, a second success sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 365 (3), the decorative symbol 41 of the reach eye is displayed again in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop motion is performed. At this time, the vibration effect is also continued.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 365 (4), the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the third mode of the sixteenth visual mode. At this time, the vibration effect continues.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 365 (5), the doublet decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth mode of the sixteenth visual mode and then stopped. At this time, the seventeenth stop effect image 599 is displayed around each of the doublet decorative symbols 41. At this time, the twenty-ninth stop sound is output. Meanwhile, the twenty-second rainbow image 628 (see FIG. 364 (4)) is not displayed. At this time, the vibration effect ends.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 365 (6), in conjunction with the display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) lights up in red.

As described above, in Variation 3, during the execution of a jackpot variation effect based on a win in the first starting slot 121 in the time-saving game mode, reach effects and effects in which the decorative symbol 41 of double numbers stops are executed, but rainbow light-emitting effects are restricted.

(Modification of the light emission mode during right-hit image display)
Next, a modified example of the light emission mode of the lamp when the right-hit image is displayed will be described.
Figure 366 is a diagram showing a modified example of the lamp's lighting mode when the first right-hit image 609 (see Figure 120 (58) etc.) is displayed.

In variant example 1, as shown in Figure 366 (1), when the first right-hit image 609 is displayed during a jackpot game, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
In this way, in variant example 1, the rainbow light-emitting effect is limited when the first right-hit image 609 is displayed.

In addition, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 366 (2), when the first right-hit image 609 is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the 12th lamp (lower board lamp 1164) become the first mode of the seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, and the second lamp (left movable role 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 116 2), the 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the 10th lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the 11th lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the 3rd lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the 6th rainbow light-emitting mode, and the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
In this way, in variant example 2, when the first right-hit image 609 is displayed, a rainbow light-emitting effect is produced by a predetermined light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)), and the rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means (for example, the fourth lamp (right movable role object 1153)) is restricted.

It should be noted that the example shown in Figure 366 is an example of the lighting state of the lamp when the first right-hit image 609 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
The example shown in Figure 366 may be an example of the lamp's lighting mode when the third right-hit image 629 (see Figure 282 (29) etc.) is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the presentation control unit 300 can execute promotional presentations (such as displaying a right-hit image or displaying a button operation image 502) that encourage the player to operate the operating means, and can execute rainbow light-emitting presentations using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) when multiple presentation patterns are displayed in a specific sequence (double numbers) from the time a specific variable presentation in a specific presentation mode is started until the time the next variable presentation of the specific variable presentation is started (the first variable presentation after a jackpot game), and can restrict rainbow light-emitting presentations using a specific light-emitting means while a specific promotional presentation (such as displaying the first right-hit image 609 or the third right-hit image 629) is being executed.
In this way, by switching between executing a rainbow light-emitting effect or restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect to emphasize to the player other effects that are different from the rainbow light-emitting effect, such as specific promotional effects, depending on the effect being executed, it is possible to make the player more aware of the diversity of effects from the start of a specific variable effect in a specific effect mode to the start of the next variable effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 367 shows an example of the presentation when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 during time-saving game mode.
First, as shown in Figure 367 (1), in the fourth stage (time-saving game state), the image display unit 114 displays the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness and the small pattern 56 "444" in a fixed state.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 121, as shown in FIG. 367(2), the special symbol starts to change, and the three rows of decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the fourth visual mode, performing the first change operation. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the reserved image 52 nor the changing image 51 is displayed. Also, at this time, the fourth right-hit image 660 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up green, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three rows of decorative symbols 41 and small symbols 56, "412", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 367 (3).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
In this way, when the fourth right-hit image 660 is displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect is limited.

Figure 368 shows the light emission pattern of the lamp when the time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state.
First, when the result of the final special pattern lottery out of the number of times set in the game state setting process (see Figure 20) as the number of times to draw special patterns in the time-saving game state is shown as a miss (the display of the final special pattern changes ends), a stage transition image 661 and a result image 662 are displayed as shown in Figure 368 (1).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up green, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled to switch from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 368(2), a stage image 61 corresponding to the first stage, a highly decorative decorative symbol 41, and a small symbol 56 are displayed. At this time, a left-hit image 663 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white.
In this way, when the left-hit image 663 is displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect is limited.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute an instruction effect (promotion effect) that instructs (promotes) the flow of the game ball into a specific area of the game area 111. The instruction effects include a first instruction effect (e.g., second right hit image 543, fourth right hit image 660, left hit image 663) and a second instruction effect (e.g., third right hit image 629). The rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed. In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be restricted (in specific light-emitting means (e.g., the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), the image display unit 114, etc.)) when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed.
In this case, depending on the instruction effect being executed, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the rainbow light-emitting effect to the player or emphasizing the instruction effect to the player.
If the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed while the first right-hit image 609 is displayed (see FIG. 120 (58)), the display of the first right-hit image 609 is regarded as the second instruction effect. Also, if the rainbow light-emitting effect is restricted while the first right-hit image 609 is displayed (see FIG. 366 (1) and (2)), the display of the first right-hit image 609 is regarded as the first instruction effect.
Also, second right hit image 543 may be displayed while first right hit image 609 is being displayed, while third right hit image 629 is being displayed, or while fourth right hit image 660 is being displayed. In other words, the instruction effect that displays first right hit image 609, the instruction effect that displays third right hit image 629, and the instruction effect that displays fourth right hit image 660 all include an effect in which second right hit image 543 is also displayed.

Furthermore, the fact that the rainbow light effect is more likely to be executed when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed, and that the rainbow light effect is more likely to be restricted when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed, includes the fact that the rainbow light effect is not executed (0%) when the first instruction effect is being executed.

Furthermore, the rainbow light effect may be less likely to be executed when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light effect being executed may be different when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed.

Furthermore, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more easily restricted when the second instruction effect is being executed than when the first instruction effect is being executed. In other words, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more easily restricted when the first instruction effect is being executed than when the second instruction effect is being executed.

Figure 369 shows a modified example of the presentation mode when a jackpot game is played after the jackpot variable presentation in the time-saving game state has ended.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that when a jackpot game is played after the jackpot variable presentation in the time-saving game state has ended, the warning image 610 (see Figure 120 (61)) and the company name image 611 (see Figure 120 (62)) are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In this variation, after the jackpot variation effect ends, the same effects as those shown in Figures 281 (24) and 282 (25) to (29) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 369 (1), a second right-hit image 543, a round number image 544, and a round-in-progress image 545 are displayed. The round number image 544 displays the text "Round 1." In addition, a type notification image 633 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when the final round ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 369(2). The time-saving start image 546 displays the text "Special time-saving continues!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in orange, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 369 (3), the warning image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 369 (4), the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up blue, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) through fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is controlled from the normal game state to the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (5), the stage image 61 corresponding to the fourth stage, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness, and the small symbol 56 "444" are fixed and stopped on the image display unit 114. In addition, background music corresponding to the fourth stage is output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.
In this way, even when a jackpot game is played after the jackpot variable presentation in the time-saving game state has ended, the warning image 610 and the company name image 611 may be displayed.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is played after the end of the jackpot fluctuation presentation in the normal game state (when a jackpot game is played due to the first win), the display of the attention drawing image 610 and the company name image 611 is always (100%) executed, whereas when a jackpot game is played after the end of the jackpot fluctuation presentation in the time-saving game state (when a jackpot game is played due to consecutive jackpots), the attention drawing image 610 and the company name image 611 may or may not be displayed. In other words, it may be configured so that a predetermined presentation (such as the display of the attention drawing image 610 and the company name image 611) that can limit the rainbow light-emitting presentation is more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is played due to the first win than when a jackpot game is played due to consecutive jackpots.
In this case, the degree of emphasis of the rainbow light-emitting effect can be varied depending on the jackpot game being executed.

Note that the fact that a specified effect that can limit the rainbow light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed on the first hit than when a jackpot game is executed on consecutive jackpots also includes the case where the rainbow light-emitting effect is not executed (0%) when a jackpot game is executed on the first hit.

The state from the start of the jackpot game after a jackpot fluctuation effect in the normal game state until the start of the next fluctuation effect (the first fluctuation effect in the time-saving game state) is considered to be the first special game state. The state from the start of the jackpot game after a jackpot fluctuation effect in the time-saving game state until the start of the next fluctuation effect is considered to be the second special game state.

Figure 370 shows a modified example of the lamp's lighting mode when a jackpot game is played.
In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the rainbow light effect is not executed when the time-saving start image 546, the warning image 610, and the company name image 611 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In a modified example, when the final round of a jackpot game ends, a time-saving start image 546 is displayed as shown in FIG. 370(1).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) and the 14th lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) and the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in orange, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 370 (2), the warning image 610 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), third lamp (middle movable part 1152), and twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 370 (3), the company name image 611 is displayed. At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in blue.

In this way, when the time-saving start image 546, the warning image 610, and the company name image 611 are displayed, a light-emitting effect may be produced by a predetermined light-emitting means (such as the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)), and the rainbow light-emitting effect may be restricted by a specific light-emitting means (such as the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161)).

Figure 371 is a diagram showing the relationship between when an advance notification (see S4203) is made and when a complete operation notification (see S3721) is made during the execution of a suggestive effect (an effect that suggests the expected probability of a jackpot game being played) in a jackpot fluctuation effect.
In the example shown in Figure 371, a modified version of Variation Presentation Example 72 (see Figure 285) is used as the jackpot variation presentation.

First, before an advance notification is made (before the advance notification conditions are met), during the execution of the jackpot variation effect in the time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 371 (A-1), while the decorative pattern 41 is varying, the 25th rainbow image 634 is displayed and the rainbow-colored variation image 51 is also displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Here, when a game ball enters either the first start opening 121, the second start opening 122, or the normal winning opening 127, the MY value reaches a specific value (90,000 balls), and the advance notification condition is satisfied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 371 (A-2), an advance notification image 652 is displayed, thereby performing an advance notification.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off. In other words, even if a pre-announcement is made, the rainbow light-emitting effect continues.

371(B-1), during the execution of the advance notification, in the jackpot variation presentation in the time-saving gaming state, while the decorative pattern 41 is varying, the 25th rainbow image 634 and the rainbow-colored variation image 51 are displayed, and an advance notification image 652 is also displayed. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Here, when a game ball enters either the first start slot 121, the second start slot 122, or the normal winning slot 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variation of the special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 371 (B-2), as the variation effect is stopped, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, the second right-hit image 543, the 25th rainbow image 634, the rainbow-colored variation image 51, and the advance notification image 652 are hidden, and the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In other words, the lamps light up in a manner that corresponds to the operation of the complete function, and the rainbow light-emitting effect ends (is limited).

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can execute a first specific notification (e.g., advance notification) when the specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a first value, can execute a second specific notification (e.g., complete operation notification) when the specific value reaches a second value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000), can execute a rainbow light-emitting performance using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) while the first specific notification is being executed, and can restrict the rainbow light-emitting performance using a specific light-emitting means while the second specific notification is being executed.
In this way, by varying whether to draw the player's attention to the rainbow light-emitting effect produced by a specific light-emitting means or to prevent the player from losing attention to other effects due to the rainbow light-emitting effect produced by a specific light-emitting means depending on the specific notification that is executed, it becomes possible to switch the effect that draws the player's attention depending on the specific value that is reached, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) reaches a first value, a first specific notification (e.g., advance notification) can be executed, and when a specific value reaches a second value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000), a second specific notification (e.g., complete operation notification) can be executed, and during the execution of a suggestion effect while a specific variable effect is being executed, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting effect by a specific light-emitting means, display of a specific rainbow image, etc.) can be executed, and when the first specific notification is executed while the specific rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed, the specific rainbow light-emitting effect can be continued, and when the second specific notification is executed while the specific rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed, the specific rainbow light-emitting effect can be restricted.
In this way, by varying whether to draw the player's attention to a specific rainbow light-emitting effect or to prevent the player from losing attention to other effects due to the specific rainbow light-emitting effect depending on the specific notification that is executed, it becomes possible to switch the effect that draws the player's attention depending on the specific value that is reached, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 372 is a diagram showing the presentation mode when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the rainbow light-emitting presentation and advance notification are being executed in the jackpot variation presentation.
In the example shown in Figure 372, the big win variation effect is the variation effect shown in Figure 371 (a modified example of variation effect example 72).

372(1), during the execution of the variable effect, the 25th rainbow image 634 and the rainbow-colored variable image 51 are displayed, along with the advance notification image 652. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 and the lamp are turned off as shown in FIG. 372 (2).
Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on without executing the RAM clear, as shown in FIG. 372 (3), a recovery image 655 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Also, a recovery sound is output to indicate or notify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being recovered. Meanwhile, the lamp remains off.

Next, as the special symbol that was being displayed changes position, the restoration image 655 disappears, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444," are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 372(4). Meanwhile, the advance notice image 652 (see FIG. 372(1)) is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Here, even if a game ball enters the first start slot 121, the second start slot 122, or the normal winning slot 127 at the timing shown in Figure 372 (2) or the timing shown in Figure 372 (3), the complete function will not be activated and no advance notification will be issued. In other words, in this embodiment, as described above, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored, the MY value and MY specific reference value are cleared, so the MY value does not reach either the upper limit value (95,000 balls) or the specific value (90,000 balls).

Figure 373 shows a modified example of the presentation when the complete function is activated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting presentation in the jackpot variation presentation.
In this embodiment, when the complete function is activated during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect in the jackpot variation effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect ends, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In addition, in Figure 373, it is assumed that variable performance example 71 (see Figures 279 to 282) is performed.

As the jackpot variation effect shown in variation effect example 71 progresses and the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the deciding button operation effect (see FIG. 280 (15)), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 373 (1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration effect is started and the effect button 161 vibrates. Also, a second success sound is output. Also, at this time, the advance notification image 652 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, when a game ball enters either the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, or the normal winning hole 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 373 (2), as the variable display is stopped, the displayed display images (hold number display 55, small symbol 56, SP reach image 517, success image 538, second right hit image 543, advance notification image 652) are hidden, the vibration display is stopped, the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611), the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574) and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white.

In this way, if the complete function is activated while the rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed, the light-emitting effect using a specified light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) may continue, and the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (for example, the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153)) may be restricted.
In addition, if the complete function is activated before the start of the rainbow light emitting effect in the big win variation effect, the rainbow light emitting effect will not be executed by any of the light emitting means thereafter.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the advance notification image 652 is displayed, the variable image 51, the pending image 52, the small pattern 55 and the pending number display 56 are visible until the complete notification image 653 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to notify the user of the activation of the complete function while preventing a decrease in the performance of the currently executed game.

Next, the relationship between the modified variable presentation example and the modified customer waiting presentation example will be explained.
Figure 374 is a diagram showing the relationship between an example of a modified variable presentation and an example of a modified customer waiting presentation.
In addition, Figure 374 shows a modified example of variable performance example 77 (see Figures 297 and 298).

First, in the modified variable presentation, the same presentations as those shown in Figures 278 (1) to (7), 279 (1) to (4), and 297 (1) are performed, and then, as shown in Figure 374 (A-1), the button operation presentation begins and button operation image 502 is displayed.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a blackout image 641 is displayed and the decorative pattern 41 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 374 (A-2).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) to the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) are lit in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 374 (A-3), the blackout image 641 is hidden and a 32nd rainbow image 642 is displayed. In a modified example, a character appearing in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the 32nd rainbow image 642. This character is a so-called premium character that suggests or notifies that the expectation rate of a jackpot game being executed is 100%.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) enter the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figures 297 (6) to (8), 298 (9) to (13), 281 (24), and 282 (25) to (32) are performed.

In addition, in a modified customer waiting effect, as shown in Figure 374 (B-1), the customer waiting effect is executed and sound is no longer output from the speaker 156.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left board lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in yellow, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right board lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower board lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white.

Next, after the customer waiting effect has started, if a specific time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start gate 121 or the second start gate 122, a demo image 605 is displayed as shown in FIG. 374 (B-2). In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text "New effect coming!"
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 374(B-3), the display content of the demo image 605 changes over time. In this modification, the premium character shown in Fig. 374(A-3) is displayed as the demo image 605.
At this time, the lamps change to a light-emitting mode corresponding to the display content of the demo image 605. More specifically, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) through the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) perform the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first rainbow light-emitting mode (see FIG. 64 ). The second lamp (left movable role object 1151) through the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) are lit in white. The sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
After this, the same effects as those shown in Figure 81 (4) to (6) are performed.

As described above, in the modified example, when the customer waiting effect is being executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed when the premium character (see Figure 374 (B-3)) is displayed.
In this case, the player can be made aware of the high degree of relationship between the premium character and the rainbow light-emitting effect.

In addition, the display mode of the premium character displayed may be different between the variable effect and the customer waiting effect.
Also, although it has been explained in Figure 374 (A-3) that a rainbow image is displayed as a premium character, the premium character may be displayed in a display color other than the rainbow color.

Next, modified examples of the light emission mode of the lamp in the demonstration performance state will be described.
Figures 375 and 376 are diagrams showing modified examples of the light emission mode of the lamp in the demo performance state.

First, in the first modification, in the demo effect state, a demo image 605 is displayed as shown in Fig. 375(1). In the illustrated example, the demo image 605 displays the text "New effect coming!"
In the first modification, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in red at this time.

Next, as shown in Figure 375 (2), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (1), the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to blue.
In this way, the light color of the lamp may change in the demo performance state.
When the text "New effects coming!" is displayed as demo image 605, the light color of the lamp may change to three or more colors.

Also, in variant example 2, as shown in Figure 375 (3), when the text "New performance coming!" is displayed as demo image 605, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up red.
Next, as shown in Figure 375 (4), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (3), the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to white.

Next, as shown in Figure 375 (5), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (3), the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from white to blue.
Next, as shown in Figure 375 (6), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (3), the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from blue to white.
In this way, a flash light effect may be executed in the demo effect state.
In addition, in the flash light emission effect executed in the demo effect state, the light colors before and after the white light in the time series may be the same chromatic color (for example, red).

Also, in variant example 3, as shown in Figure 375 (7), when the text "New performance coming!" is displayed as demo image 605, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up red.
Next, as shown in Figure 375 (8), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (7), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 376 (9), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (7), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in red.
Next, as shown in Figure 376 (10), when the display content of the demo image 605 is the same as that shown in Figure 375 (7), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are all turned off.
In this way, the lamp may flash during the demo performance state.

As described above, the performance control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting performance at a first timing in the customer waiting performance (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 81 (3)), can execute a predetermined light-emitting performance different from the rainbow light-emitting performance at a second timing in the customer waiting performance (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 81 (2)), and can execute a specific light-emitting performance by restricting the rainbow light-emitting performance and the predetermined light-emitting performance at a third timing in the customer waiting performance (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 81 (4) and (5)). Examples of predetermined light-emitting performances include a light-emitting performance in which the light color of the lamp changes, a flash light-emitting performance, and a performance in which the lamp blinks. Also, examples of specific light-emitting performances include a performance in which the lamp emits light in a single color.
In this case, it is possible to diversify the lighting effects according to the progress of the customer waiting effects.

In addition, at the third timing in the customer waiting effect (for example, the timing shown in Figure 81 (4) and (5)), a flashing effect or a blinking lamp may be executed, while the speed at which the light color of the lamp changes (blinking speed) may be slower than at the second timing in the customer waiting effect (for example, the timing shown in Figure 81 (2)).

Next, we will explain modified examples of the lamp lighting pattern from the end of a round of jackpot play after the jackpot variation presentation in the normal game state until the game is controlled to the time-shortened game state (see Figures 120 (60) to (62), etc.).
Figure 377 shows a modified example of the lamp's illumination mode from the end of a round of jackpot play after the jackpot variation presentation in the normal game state until the game is controlled to the time-shortened game state.

First, as shown in Figure 377 (1), the warning image 610 is displayed. In Variation 1, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable role 1152) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable role 1151) light up in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 377 (2), while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) light up in red.
Next, as shown in FIG. 377 (3), while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the third lamp (middle movable role 1152), the fifth lamp (upper board lamp 1161) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the fourth lamp (right movable role 1153) light up in red.
In this way, while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, a lighting effect may be executed in which a specific light color (e.g., red) moves from one lamp (e.g., the second lamp (left movable device 1151)) to another lamp (e.g., the third lamp (middle movable device 1152) adjacent to the first lamp).

In addition, in variant example 2, as shown in Figure 377 (4), when the warning image 610 is displayed, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in red.
Next, as shown in Figure 377 (5), while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to blue.

Next, as shown in Figure 377 (6), while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from blue to red.
Next, as shown in Figure 377 (7), while the warning image 610 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to blue.
In this way, the lamp may emit light in a manner that repeatedly emits a specific color (e.g., red and blue) while the attention-calling image 610 is continuously displayed. In this case, the lamp may periodically emit light in the specific color.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 can execute an attention-calling effect to call the player's attention (such as displaying the demo image 605 shown in FIG. 81(5) or the attention-calling image 610 shown in FIG. 377). The effect control unit 300 can make the light-emitting state of the lamp when an attention-calling effect is being executed in the customer-waiting effect different from the light-emitting state of the lamp when an attention-calling effect is being executed after a round in a jackpot game.
In this case, by adjusting the light emission mode of the lamp according to the attention-calling effect being executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the target of attention call in each attention-calling effect is different.

In addition, even during the execution of the attention warning effect in the customer waiting effect, a moving light-emitting effect in which a specific light color moves from one lamp to another (see FIG. 377 (1) to (3)), or a cyclic light-emitting effect in which a lamp periodically repeats emitting light in a specific light color (see FIG. 377 (4) to (7)) may be executed. In this case, the movement speed of the lamps in the moving light-emitting effect may be faster and the lighting cycle of the lamps in the cyclic light-emitting effect may be shorter when the attention warning effect is executed after a round in a jackpot game than when the attention warning effect is executed in the customer waiting effect. Also, the movement speed of the lamps in the moving light-emitting effect may be faster and the lighting cycle of the lamps in the cyclic light-emitting effect may be shorter when the attention warning effect is executed in the customer waiting effect than when the attention warning effect is executed after a round in a jackpot game. In other words, the movement speed of the lamps in the moving light-emitting effect and the lighting cycle of the lamps in the cyclic light-emitting effect may be different when the attention warning effect is executed in the customer waiting effect and when the attention warning effect is executed after a round in a jackpot game.

In addition, the lamps include multiple lamps with different light-emitting areas, and the performance control unit 300 can change the light-emitting mode of the lamps and restrict the rainbow light-emitting performance by the lamps and image display unit 114 at the first timing (for example, the timing shown in Figure 81 (5)) and the second timing (for example, the timing shown in Figure 377) when the warning performance is executed.
In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the attention-warning effect at both the first and second timings, and it is also possible to make the player more aware that the target of attention in each attention-warning effect is different.
The first timing and the second timing may occur during the execution of the variable effect. That is, during the execution of the variable effect, the demo image 605 shown in FIG. 81(5) or the warning image 610 shown in FIG. 377 may be displayed.

In addition, the light emission mode of the lamp can be made different between the first state in which the warning effect is executed (for example, the customer waiting effect state) and the second state in which the warning effect is executed (the jackpot game state), and the rainbow light emission effect by the lamp and the image display unit 114 can be restricted.
In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the attention-warning effects in both the first and second states, and it is also possible to make the player more aware that the targets of the attention-warning effects are different.

Next, a modified example of the effect of enlarging and displaying the doublet decorative pattern 41 (see Figure 119 (50) etc.) will be described.
Figure 378 is a diagram showing the display size of the decorative pattern 41 according to the performance situation.
First, before the start of the reach effect during the execution of the variable effect, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the size shown in Figure 378 (1) (see Figure 129 (5) etc.).

Next, when the reach effect begins in the variable effect, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in the size shown in Figure 378 (2) (see Figure 129 (6), etc.). The display size of the decorative patterns 41 at this time is larger than the display size shown in Figure 378 (1).

Next, in a modified example, when the doublet decorative pattern 41 is enlarged during the execution of the variable effect, the doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the size shown in Fig. 378 (3). The display size of the decorative pattern 41 at this time is larger than the display size shown in Fig. 378 (1) and (2).
In a modified example, the center decorative pattern 41 occupies a larger area of the display area of the image display unit 114 than the left and right decorative patterns 41, and the display area of the image display unit 114 is occupied by the decorative patterns 41 so that no display area for the rainbow image is provided. In this way, among the various effects that display the decorative patterns 41, the effect that displays the doublet decorative patterns 41 can be most emphasized to the player.

Next, we will explain modified examples of the lamp lighting pattern from the end of a round of jackpot play after the jackpot variation presentation in the time-shortened play state until the time-shortened play state is controlled (see Figure 282 (31) etc.).
Figure 379 shows a modified example of the lamp's lighting pattern from the end of a round of jackpot play that has undergone a jackpot variation presentation in the time-shortened play state until the game is controlled to the time-shortened play state.

First, when a round of jackpot play ends after a jackpot variation effect in a time-saving game state, the text "Special time-saving continues!" is displayed as a time-saving start image 546, as shown in FIG. 379(1). In a modified example, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) all light up in red.
Next, as shown in FIG. 379 (2), while the time-saving start image 546 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 379 (3), while the time-saving start image 546 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from white to red.
Next, as shown in FIG. 379 (4), while the time-saving start image 546 continues to be displayed, the lighting color of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) changes from red to white.
In this way, a flash light emission effect may be executed from the end of the round of jackpot game that has undergone the jackpot variation effect in the time-shortened game state until the game is controlled to the time-shortened game state.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 can change the light emission mode of the lamps and restrict the rainbow light emission effect by the lamps and image display unit 114 at the first timing (for example, while the customer waiting effect is being executed) and the second timing (after the start of a jackpot game) (see FIG. 81 (5), FIG. 120 (60) to (62), and FIG. 282 (31)). In other words, the effect control unit 300 can change the light emission mode of the lamps and restrict the rainbow light emission effect by the lamps and image display unit 114 at the first state (for example, a customer waiting effect state) and the second timing (a jackpot game state).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the light emitted by the lamp at both the first timing (first state) and the second timing (second state).

In particular, the presentation control unit 300 can restrict the flashing effect while specific character information is being displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect (during the execution of the effect shown in FIG. 81(5)), and from the end of a round of jackpot game that has undergone a jackpot fluctuation effect in the normal game state until control is exercised in the time-shortened game state (during the execution of the so-called ending effect after the first win).On the other hand, the presentation control unit 300 can execute the flashing effect from the end of a round of jackpot game that has undergone a jackpot fluctuation effect in the time-shortened game state until control is exercised in the time-shortened game state (during the execution of the so-called ending effect after consecutive jackpots) (see FIG. 379).
In this case, depending on the jackpot game that is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to focus on the light emitting effect even while the ending effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information while the customer waiting effect is being executed. Examples of the first identification information include the text "Featured effect SPSP Challenge!" (see FIG. 81(3)), the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" (see FIG. 81(4)), and premium characters (see FIG. 374(B-3)) in the demo image 605. Examples of the second identification information include information containing text (text related to a warning), such as the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted." The effect control unit 300 can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect while the first identification information is being displayed (see FIG. 81(3), FIG. 370(3), FIG. 374(B-3), etc.), and can limit the rainbow light-emitting effect while the second identification information is being displayed. In other words, the likelihood of the rainbow light-emitting effect being executed differs between when the first identification information is displayed and when the second identification information is displayed.
In this case, depending on the specific information to be displayed, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the rainbow light-emitting effect to the player and emphasizing the specific information to the player.

The performance control unit 300 may be capable of executing a flash effect while the first specific information is being displayed. In this case, the performance control unit 300 restricts the flash effect when the second specific information (specific text information) is being displayed.
In this case, depending on the specific information to be displayed, it is possible to switch between emphasizing the light emitting effect to the player and emphasizing the specific information to the player.

Next, a modified example in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored after being cut off will be described.
Figure 380 is a diagram showing the relationship between when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while a variable effect is being executed, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored when the complete function is activated.

First, we will explain the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while a variable effect is being executed. Note that Figure 380 shows an example of a case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while a variable effect is being executed, in which the same variable effect as that shown in Figure 372 is executed, except that there is one more reserved ball for the second starting port 122.

380 (A-1), during execution of the variable effect, the pending image 52, the 25th rainbow image 634, and the rainbow-colored variable image 51 are displayed, along with the advance notification image 652. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1."
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

Next, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 and the lamp are turned off as shown in FIG. 380 (A-2).
Next, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on without executing RAM clear, as shown in FIG. 380 (A-3), a recovery image 655 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Also, a recovery sound is output to indicate or notify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is being recovered. Meanwhile, the lamp remains off.

Next, as shown in Fig. 380 (A-4), with the special symbol being displayed in a stopped state, the restoration image 655 disappears, the reserved image 52 is displayed, and the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, "444", are fixed and stopped. Meanwhile, the advance notification image 652 (see Fig. 372 (1)) is not displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off, and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) becomes the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Next, we will explain the case where the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored when the complete function is activated. Note that Figure 380 explains a modified example of the example shown in Figure 332, where the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored when the complete function is activated.

First, the jackpot variation presentation shown in variation presentation example 71 progresses, and when the presentation button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the deciding button operation presentation (see FIG. 280 (15)), the decorative pattern 41 disappears and the success image 538 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 380 (B-1). Also, although not shown, at this time, a vibration presentation starts and the presentation button 161 vibrates. Also, a second success sound is output. Also, at this time, a pre-alert image 652 is displayed. In the example shown, the pre-alert image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1". Also, at this time, the hold number display 55 for the second starting port 122 shows "2", and two hold images 52 are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) and the light guide plate 118 become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the fifth mode of the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are lit in white.

Next, when a game ball enters either the first start slot 121, the second start slot 122, or the normal winning slot 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), which activates the complete function and stops the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 380 (B-2), as the variable display is stopped, the displayed display images (reserved number display 55, small symbol 56, SP reach image 517, success image 538, second right hit image 543, advance notification image 652) are hidden, the vibration display is stopped, the complete notification image 653 is displayed, and a complete notification sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) and the light guide plate 118 are turned off.

Next, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, the image display unit 114 and the lamp turn off, as shown in Figure 380 (B-3).

Next, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on without clearing the RAM, the complete notification image 653 is displayed again, as shown in Figure 380 (B-4).
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511), and the light guide plate 118 are turned off. That is, the lamps and the light guide plate 118 return to the light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 332 (2).
In this way, in the modified example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off after the complete function is activated and then restored, the restoration in progress image 655 is not displayed and the restoration sound is not output (see Figure 332 (4)).

As described above, when a hold is stored and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while a variable effect is being executed, the performance control unit 300 displays the restoration in progress image 655, and does not display the retention image 52 while the restoration in progress image 655 is being displayed (see FIG. 380 (A-3)). Also, when a hold is stored and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the complete notification image 653 is being displayed (after the complete function is activated), the performance control unit 300 restricts the display of the retention image 52 and the restoration in progress image 655, and displays the complete notification image 653 (see FIG. 380 (B-4)).
In this case, if the power to the pachinko game machine 100 is cut off and then restored while the complete notification image 653 is being displayed (after the complete function has been activated), it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he or she will be able to play again.

Next, a modified example of the notification of the number of winning balls during the execution of a jackpot game will be explained.
Figure 381 shows a modified example of the notification of the number of winning balls during a jackpot game.
First, an example will be described in which the number of prize balls is notified when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. In this example, during a jackpot game, the 36th rainbow image 646 (see FIG. 301(2)) is displayed every time the number of prize balls based on winning into the jackpot slot 125 increases by 1,000.

381 (A-1), a jackpot game is being played, and displays a round number image 544, a round in progress image 545, a type notification image 633, and a 31st rainbow image 640. In the illustrated example, two 31st rainbow images 640 indicating that an "A bonus" has been played twice, and two 31st rainbow images 640 indicating that a "B bonus" has been played twice are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, during the execution of a jackpot game, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the big prize opening 125 reaches 3000. In this case, as shown in FIG. 381(A-2), the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in black. In other words, the 36th rainbow image 646 is not rainbow-colored at the timing shown in FIG. 381(A-2).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, as the jackpot game progresses, the 36th rainbow image 646 disappears as shown in FIG. 381 (A-3). Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
Although not shown in the figures, thereafter, during the execution of the jackpot game, the 36th rainbow image 646 remains hidden until the number of prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening 125 reaches 4000. Furthermore, once the 36th rainbow image 646, which was displayed when the number of prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening 125 reached 4000, becomes hidden, the 36th rainbow image 646 remains hidden until the number of prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening 125 reaches 5000.

Next, during the execution of the jackpot game, the number of prize balls based on the winning into the big prize opening 125 reaches 5000. In this case, as shown in FIG. 381 (A-4), the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in rainbow colors.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Although not shown in the figures, thereafter, during the execution of a jackpot game, the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed each time the number of prize balls resulting from winning at the large prize opening 125 increases by 1000. Here, if the number of prize balls resulting from winning at the large prize opening 125 is a multiple of 5000, the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in rainbow colors, and if the number of prize balls resulting from winning at the large prize opening 125 is a multiple of 1000 but not a multiple of 5000, the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in a color other than rainbow colors (for example, black).

Next, we will explain an example in which the number of prize balls is continuously announced during a jackpot game, regardless of the value of the number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 381 (B-1), a jackpot game is being played, and a round number image 544, a round in progress image 545, a type notification image 633, and a 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed. In the illustrated example, two 31st rainbow images 640 are displayed, indicating that an "A bonus" has been played twice, and two 31st rainbow images 640 are displayed, indicating that a "B bonus" has been played twice. In addition, a 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in black. The 36th rainbow image 646 displays the text "4970 pt," which indicates the number of prize balls during the jackpot game.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 125, the display content of the 36th rainbow image 646 is updated as shown in Fig. 381 (B-2). More specifically, the 36th rainbow image 646 displays the text "4980 pt" in black, which indicates the number of prize balls during the execution of the big prize game.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 125, the display content of the 36th rainbow image 646 is updated as shown in Fig. 381 (B-3). More specifically, the 36th rainbow image 646 displays the text "4990 pt" in black, which indicates the number of prize balls during the execution of the big win game.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Next, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 125, the display content of the 36th rainbow image 646 is updated as shown in Fig. 381 (B-4). More specifically, the 36th rainbow image 646 displays the text "5000pt" in rainbow colors, which indicates the number of prize balls during the execution of the big win game.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Although not shown in the figures, the 36th rainbow image 646 continues to be displayed while the jackpot game is being played, and the display content of the 36th rainbow image 646 is updated each time the number of prize balls awarded based on winning at the large prize opening 125 increases. Here, if the number of prize balls awarded based on winning at the large prize opening 125 is a multiple of 5000, the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in rainbow colors, and if the number of prize balls awarded based on winning at the large prize opening 125 is not a multiple of 5000, the 36th rainbow image 646 is displayed in a color other than rainbow colors (for example, black).

As described above, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on winning into the large prize slot 125 has a specific value (a multiple of 5000) and a predetermined value different from the specific value (a value other than a multiple of 5000), and it is more difficult to execute the rainbow light-emitting effect using the 36th rainbow image 646 with the predetermined value than with the specific value.
In this case, the number of winning balls that reaches a specific value can be more emphasized.

In addition, there are two modes for announcing the number of prize balls based on a prize entered into the large prize slot 125: a first mode (the mode shown in Figures 381 (A-1) to (A-4)) and a second mode (the mode shown in Figures 381 (B-1) to (B-4)). When the number of prize balls is announced in the first mode, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the 36th rainbow image 646 is more likely to be executed than when the number of prize balls is announced in the second mode (the frequency of execution of the rainbow light-emitting effect is higher relative to the display frequency of the 36th rainbow image 646).
In this case, the degree of emphasis on the number of prize balls can be varied depending on the manner in which the number of prize balls based on winning into the large prize opening 125 is announced.
The presentation control unit 300 may determine whether to use the first mode or the second mode for reporting the number of prize balls based on the winning of a ball into the jackpot opening 125, depending on the type of jackpot game being executed. For example, the presentation control unit 300 may report the number of prize balls in the first mode when a jackpot game consisting of the first number of rounds is executed, and may report the number of prize balls in the second mode when a jackpot game consisting of a second number of rounds, which is greater than the first number of rounds, is executed. The presentation control unit 300 may also report the number of prize balls in the second mode when a jackpot game consisting of the first number of rounds is executed, and may report the number of prize balls in the first mode when a jackpot game consisting of the second number of rounds is executed.

Next, a modified example of the rainbow light-emitting effect that is executed when the effect button 161 is operated will be described.
Figure 382 shows a modified example of the rainbow light effect that is executed when the effect button 161 is operated.

First, in Modification 1, as shown in Fig. 382 (1), a variable effect is executed in the time-saving gaming state. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. This reserved image 52 is displayed in a manner that resembles the effect button 161, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 161.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the reserved image 52 is displayed, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes as shown in FIG. 382 (2). More specifically, the display mode of the reserved image 52 changes to rainbow colors. At this time, the seventh change sound is output.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

In the first modified example, an example is described in which the pending image 52 is displayed in a manner that resembles the effect button 161, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the variable image 51 may be displayed in a manner imitating the effect button 161. In this case, when the effect button 161 is operated, the variable image 51 changes to a rainbow color, the seventh variable sound is output, and the lamp changes to the light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 382 (2).

In the second modification, after the variable effect in the time-saving gaming state is started, the reach effect is passed, and the reach-eye decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop operation is performed, as shown in Fig. 382 (3). At this time, the transition image 516 is displayed, the button operation effect is started, and the button operation image 502 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the valid operation period in the button operation effect, a 29th rainbow image 638 is displayed, as shown in Fig. 382 (4). At this time, the SP reach effect starts, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) to the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) light up in yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

In addition, in the third modification, during the execution of the variable effect in the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 382 (5), the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second mode of the eleventh visual mode, and the second temporary stop operation is performed. At this time, the SP reach effect is started, and the SP reach image 517 is displayed. At this time, the button operation effect (see FIG. 382 (3)) is not executed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.

When the effect button 161 is operated during the execution of the SP reach effect, the 26th rainbow image 635 is displayed as shown in Figure 382 (6). Also, at this time, the 1st lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the 7th lamp (left board lamp 1162), the 8th lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the 10th lamp (right board lamp 1163) to the 12th lamp (lower board lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light emission mode, the 2nd lamp (left movable role object 1151) to the 5th lamp (upper board lamp 1161), the 13th lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the 15th lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up in white, and the 6th lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the 9th lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) are turned off.
In this way, even when a button effect is not being executed, when a specific effect (such as a reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, or a variable effect in a time-saving game state) is being executed, an effect may be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 161.

As described above, the rainbow light-emitting effect that is executed when the effect button 161 is operated is not limited to the rainbow light-emitting effect that corresponds to the operation of the effect button 161 associated with the decide button operation effect.
In this way, by providing various rainbow light-emitting effects as rainbow light-emitting effects that are executed when the effect button 161 is operated, the player's anticipation for operating the effect button 161 can be further increased.

Next, a modified example of the manner in which information regarding the awarding of game value is notified will be described.
Figure 383 shows a modified example of how information regarding the awarding of gaming value is notified.

First, variant example 1 is a variant example in which a round promotion effect (see FIG. 300(3)) is executed. In this variant example, when the round promotion effect is executed, a 34th rainbow image 644 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 383(1). In addition, in this variant example, the 34th rainbow image 644 displays a value indicating the difference between the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the number of rounds suggested before the execution of the round promotion effect and the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the actual number of rounds during the execution of a jackpot game (a value indicating the number of additional prize balls). In the illustrated example, the 34th rainbow image 644 displays the text "+600" in rainbow colors.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211), and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) become the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572) and the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, and the light guide plate 118 becomes the fourth mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode.

Moreover, variant example 2 is a variant example in which the 37th rainbow image 647 (see FIG. 302 (7)) is displayed. In this variant example, as shown in FIG. 383 (2), the 37th rainbow image 647 displays the total number of prize balls that can be won in the ongoing jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that can be won in the jackpot game that is held based on the pending jackpot result of the special symbol lottery. In the illustrated example, the 37th rainbow image 647 displays the text "2000 get" in rainbow colors.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Also, variant example 3 is a variant example in which a result image 662 (see FIG. 368(1)) is displayed. This variant example is an example of a presentation that is performed when the result of the final special symbol lottery among the number of times set in the game state setting process as the number of special symbol lotteries in the time-saving game state is a jackpot. When the variable display related to this final special symbol lottery begins, a stage transition image 661 and a result image 662 are displayed as shown in FIG. 383(1) before the special symbol is statically displayed. In the illustrated example, the text portion of "3024" in the result image 662 is displayed in rainbow colors. The result image 662 in this case is also perceived as a rainbow image. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol 56 continues.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up green, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol 56 "777" is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 383 (4).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) light up green, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) light up white, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) light up yellow, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573) and the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) are turned off.

Next, the big win game starts, and as shown in FIG. 383 (5), a winning notification image 630 and a 23rd rainbow image 631 are displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the first mode of the first rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

As described above, the presentation control unit 300 can display first information related to the awarding of game value (the number of game values expected to be awarded in a jackpot game), and second information related to the awarding of game value that is different from the first information (the number of game values awarded during a jackpot game, the cumulative number of game values awarded when jackpot games occur consecutively, information indicating that the cumulative number of awarded game values has reached a predetermined number, and the cumulative number of awarded game values displayed as a result of a jackpot game). Examples of the first information include the 34th rainbow image 644 (see FIG. 383(1)), the 37th rainbow image 647 (see FIG. 383(2)), etc. Examples of second information include the 34th rainbow image 644 (see Figure 383 (1)), the 37th rainbow image 647 (see Figure 383 (2)), the result image 662 (see Figure 383 (3)), and the 36th rainbow image 646 (see Figure 301 (2), Figure 381, etc.).
The rainbow light-emitting effect may be more easily executed when the first information is displayed than when the second information is displayed. Also, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be more easily executed when the second information is displayed than when the first information is displayed. In other words, it is sufficient if the ease of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect differs between when the first information is displayed and when the second information is displayed.

Note that the rainbow light effect is more likely to be performed when the first information is displayed than when the second information is displayed, including the case where the rainbow light effect is not performed when the second information is displayed (0%), and the case where the rainbow light effect is always performed when the first information is displayed (100%). Note that the rainbow light effect is more likely to be performed when the second information is displayed than when the first information is displayed, including the case where the rainbow light effect is not performed when the first information is displayed (0%), and the case where the rainbow light effect is always performed when the second information is displayed (100%).

Figure 384 shows the relationship between when an advance notification (see S4203) is made and when a complete standby notification (see S3720) is made while the 30th rainbow image 639 is being displayed.

First, before advance notification is made (before advance notification conditions are met), when a jackpot game is executed, the 30th rainbow image 639 is displayed as shown in Figure 384 (A-1).
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Here, when a game ball enters either the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, or the normal winning hole 127, the MY value reaches a specific value (90,000 balls), and the advance notification condition is satisfied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 384 (A-2), the display of the 30th rainbow image 639 continues, and an advance notification image 652 is displayed, thereby performing an advance notification.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In other words, even if a pre-announcement is made, the rainbow light-emitting effect continues.

Next, when the display time of the 30th rainbow image 639 has elapsed, as shown in Figure 384 (A-3), the 30th rainbow image 639 is no longer displayed, and the second right-hit image 543, the number of rounds image 544, the round in progress image 545, the type notification image 633 and the 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed, while the advance notification image 652 continues to be displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Furthermore, if a jackpot game is executed during the execution of an advance notification, as shown in Fig. 384 (B-1), the 30th rainbow image 639 is displayed together with an advance notification image 652. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Here, when a game ball enters either the first start hole 121, the second start hole 122, or the normal winning hole 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value (95,000 balls), and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 384 (B-2), the display of the 30th rainbow image 639 continues, and the standby notification image 654 is displayed to notify the completion standby.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable accessory 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) are lit in white, and the second lamp (left movable accessory 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable accessory 1153) through the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. That is, the lamps are illuminated in the same manner as when the complete function is activated (see FIG. 331 (3)).

Next, when the display time of the 30th rainbow image 639 has elapsed, as shown in Figure 384 (B-3), the 30th rainbow image 639 is no longer displayed, and the second right-hit image 543, the number of rounds image 544, the round in progress image 545, the type notification image 633 and the 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed, while the standby notification image 654 continues to be displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the third lamp (middle movable part 1152), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), and the eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, and the second lamp (left movable part 1151), the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) to the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

As described above, the information related to the jackpot game includes the first information (for example, the 24th rainbow image 632) and the second information (the 30th rainbow image 639), and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second information does not end when the advance notification is executed, but ends when the display time has elapsed. Examples of the information related to the jackpot game include images that suggest or notify the type of jackpot game.
In this case, even if advance notification is given, the information relating to the jackpot game can be made more easily recognized by the player while increasing the interest in the game.

Note that the second information may be displayed in rainbow colors, while the first information may be displayed in a color different from the rainbow colors (e.g., red).

Figure 385 is a diagram showing a modified example in which a complete standby notification is made while the 30th rainbow image 639 is being displayed.
First, when a jackpot game is executed during the execution of an advance notification, as shown in Fig. 385(1), the 30th rainbow image 639 is displayed together with an advance notification image 652. In the illustrated example, the advance notification image 652 includes information indicating that the MY remaining value is "1".
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first mode of the fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.

Here, when a game ball enters either the first start hole 121, the second start hole 122, or the normal winning hole 127, the MY value reaches the MY upper limit (95,000 balls), and the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for the activation of the complete function. In this case, as shown in FIG. 385 (2), the display of the 30th rainbow image 639 continues, and the standby notification image 654 is displayed to notify the completion standby.
At this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), the eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), the tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163) to the twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164) become the fourth aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the second lamp (left movable part 1151) and the fourth lamp (right movable part 1153) become the first aspect of the second rainbow light-emitting aspect, the third lamp (center movable part 1152) becomes the first aspect of the sixth rainbow light-emitting aspect, the fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161) becomes the first aspect of the fifth rainbow light-emitting aspect, and the sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), the ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), the thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off. In other words, even if a complete standby notification is issued, the rainbow light-emitting effect continues.

Next, when the display time of the 30th rainbow image 639 has elapsed, as shown in Figure 385 (3), the 30th rainbow image 639 is no longer displayed, and the second right-hit image 543, the round number image 544, the round in progress image 545, the type notification image 633 and the 31st rainbow image 640 are displayed, while the standby notification image 654 continues to be displayed.
Also, at this time, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571), fifth lamp (upper panel lamp 1161), seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162), eighth lamp (left frame lamp 1574), tenth lamp (right panel lamp 1163), and eleventh lamp (right frame lamp 1575) light up in white, the second lamp (left movable part 1151), fourth lamp (right movable part 1153), sixth lamp (upper left frame lamp 1572), ninth lamp (upper right frame lamp 1573), twelfth lamp (lower panel lamp 1164), and thirteenth lamp (starting port lamp 1211) become the first mode of the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third lamp (middle movable part 1152) becomes the first mode of the sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, and the fourteenth lamp (button lamp 1611) and the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 1511) are turned off.
As described above, when information related to a jackpot game is being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect may not be restricted even if a complete waiting notification is made.

In the above example, various rainbow images are displayed. Here, in each rainbow image, the characters themselves may be displayed in rainbow colors, or only some of the characters may be displayed in rainbow colors. Furthermore, the periphery of each rainbow image may be displayed in rainbow colors, or the background of the characters in each rainbow image may be displayed in rainbow colors. Furthermore, when each rainbow image is displayed, the edges of the display area of the image display unit 114 (such as the outer periphery, one side, or corner) may be displayed in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in a miss-changing performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode is the same as the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a miss-changing performance in which a reach performance is not executed, but this is not limited to this.
In a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed, the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode may be an original stopping sound different from either the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a losing variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed, or the stopping sound output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the presentation control unit 300 can make the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is met different from the time from the start of the second operation display to the start of the vibration presentation when a predetermined condition is not met. Here, when a predetermined condition is not met, this may include a case where the presentation button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation presentation (see Figures 267 (7) and (8)). In other words, the relationship between time t71 and time t72 described above may be the relationship between the timing (time t71) when the button operation presentation starts in variation presentation example 13 and the timing (time t72) when the vibration presentation starts when the presentation button 161 is not operated during the valid operation period in the button operation presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the fourth stage, three rows of decorative symbols 41 move along the first movement path, but this is not limited to this. In the fourth stage, when no reach effect is being executed, three rows of decorative symbols 41 may move along a movement path different from any of the movement paths used in the first to third stages. In this case, it can be emphasized that the fourth stage is a movement mode unique to the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in one variable performance, the decorative pattern 41 of the reach eye is the same number before and after the execution of the pseudo-consecutive performance (see Figure 91 (9), Figure 92 (22), etc.), but this is not limited to this.
In one variation effect, the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 may be different before and after the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect (for example, the number of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is "4" before the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect, and the number of the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is "3" after the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect). Here, the variation effect that changes the characters of the patterns that are stopped in the reach effect also includes an effect in which the reach-eye decorative pattern 41 is different before and after the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the action effects that cause some of the stopped symbols in a column (for example, decorative symbol 41 in the left column) to move in a reach effect include a first action effect (see FIG. 88 (14)) and a second action effect (see FIG. 103 (19)) in which the movement pattern of the symbols differs from that of the first action effect. Here, for example, the first action effect may be the movement of decorative symbol 41 "4" (see FIG. 88 (14), FIG. 103 (19)), and the second action effect may be the movement of decorative symbol 41 "3" (see FIG. 151 (5)). In other words, the first action effect and the second action effect may be the movement of decorative symbols of different characters.

In addition, the likelihood of a jackpot game when a specific effect (such as a normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, zone effect, bonus effect, development effect, vibration effect, step effect, or effect that changes the display mode of the reserved image 52 or variable image 51) is executed may be varied depending on the stage. For example, a jackpot game may be more likely to be executed when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the second stage than when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed is executed in the first stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the presentation control unit 300 can make the operational mode of the decorative symbols 41 when they temporarily stop in a reach presentation the same in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state. Here, the operational mode of the decorative symbols 41 when they temporarily stop in a reach presentation being the same in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state not only means that the operational mode of the decorative symbols 41 when they temporarily stop in a reach presentation is completely identical in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, but also that some of the operational mode of the decorative symbols 41 when they temporarily stop in a reach presentation is the same in both the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (for example, the size and display mode are different but the direction of the operation when they temporarily stop is the same).

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the reach effect is executed when two rows of decorative symbols 41 are aligned, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a reach effect may be executed by temporarily stopping one column of decorative symbols 41 with a specific character. At this time, the remaining two columns of decorative symbols 41 may continue to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the following sound effects are output from the speaker 156: a first button sound, a first stop sound, a first operation sound, a second stop sound, a first role sound, a first step sound, a second step sound, a first reach sound, a second role sound, a pseudo consecutive stop sound, a first re-variation sound, a third stop sound, a switching display sound, a switching non-display sound, a fourth stop sound, a second reach sound (fifth stop sound), a first start sound, a third role sound, a third step sound, a second operation sound, a zone start sound, a third Reach sound, 1st change sound, pattern change sound, development stop sound, 4th role sound, 2nd button sound, 6th stop sound, 2nd re-variation sound, 2nd change sound, 3rd change sound, 7th stop sound, 3rd button sound, 1st success sound, 1st jackpot notification sound, 8th stop sound, 4th button sound, 9th stop sound, 4th change sound, 4th reach sound (10th stop sound), 11th stop sound, 12th stop sound, 13th stop sound, 1st revival sound, 14th stop sound, 15th stop sound, 3rd operation sound, 16th stop Sound, 5th role sound, step 1 sound, step 2 sound, 6th role sound, 5th reach sound (17th stop sound), 2nd start sound, 7th role sound, step 3 sound, 4th operation sound, 18th stop sound, 19th stop sound, 5th operation sound, 8th role sound, 1st stage sound, 2nd stage sound, 9th role sound, 6th reach sound (20th stop sound), 10th role sound, 3rd stage sound, 6th operation sound, 21st stop sound, 22nd stop sound, 23rd stop sound, 24th stop sound, 25th stop sound, 4th start The sound, 11th role sound, 7th reach sound (26th stop sound), 5th button sound, 27th stop sound, 5th change sound, 28th stop sound, 6th change sound, 6th button sound, 2nd success sound, 2nd jackpot notification sound, 29th stop sound, 7th button sound, 30th stop sound, 2nd revival sound, 1st SPSP sound, 2nd SPSP sound, 1st super hot sound, special development sound effect, 3rd SPSP sound, 1st rainbow reach sound, and 4th SPSP sound are all different sound effects (different sounds).

In addition, in this embodiment, there are a first start operation, a first fluctuation operation, a first stop operation, a first temporary stop operation, a second start operation, a second stop operation, a first reach operation, a second temporary stop operation, a second fluctuation operation, a third fluctuation operation, a third stop operation (second reach operation), a third start operation, a third reach operation, a pattern change operation, a fourth start operation, a fourth stop operation (fourth reach operation), a fifth reach operation, a fifth start operation, a fourth fluctuation operation, a fifth stop operation, a sixth start operation, a sixth stop operation, a sixth reach operation, a seventh stop The first, seventh start action, eighth reach action, eighth start action, ninth reach action, fifth variable action, ninth start action, sixth variable action, eighth stop action, seventh variable action, tenth start action, ninth stop action, tenth reach action, tenth stop action, eleventh start action, twelfth reach action, twelfth start action, thirteenth reach action, eighth variable action, thirteenth start action, eleventh stop action, fourteenth start action, twelfth stop action, and ninth variable action all have different action modes (display modes). Additionally, even though the first reach action (see Figure 88 (14)) and the sixth reach action (see Figure 160 (14)) are both the same action of "raising the right hand," the decorative patterns 41, each with a different display mode, are activated, resulting in different action modes (display modes).

In addition, when there is no hold for a winning ball at the first starting gate 121 and the special symbol has not changed, a gaming ball may enter the first starting gate 121. In this case, a hold for a winning ball at the first starting gate 121 is first generated. In this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see Figure 27). Therefore, the "hold number" when a variation pattern is selected is "1." When a variation pattern is selected, the "hold number" for a winning ball at the first starting gate 121 is subtracted. In addition, when there is no hold for a winning ball at the second starting gate 122 and the special symbol has not changed, if a gaming ball enters the second starting gate 122, a hold for a winning ball at the second starting gate 122 is first generated. In this state, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table. Therefore, the "hold number" when a variation pattern is selected is "1." When a variation pattern is selected, the "hold number" for a winning ball at the second starting gate 122 is subtracted.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting gate 121 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the first starting gate 121 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting gate 121, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the first starting gate 121. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second start port 122 in a state where no reservation has been made for a winning entry at the second start port 122 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122, and the reservation image 52 is also displayed. Then, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 55 at the second start port 122. Furthermore, the reservation image 52 moves to the display position of the changing image 51.

Therefore, each of the above-mentioned variable effects performed based on the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 121 being "1" may also be a variable effect performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 121 in a state where no reserved ball has been entered for a winning ball at the first starting port 121 and the special pattern has not changed.
Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned variable effects performed based on the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 122 being "1" may also be a variable effect performed based on a game ball entering the second starting port 122 in a state where no reserved ball has been generated for a winning ball at the second starting port 122 and the special pattern has not changed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a variation effect in which various jackpot variation effects and reach effects are executed has been described. Here, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect in which the above-mentioned jackpot variation effect or reach effect is executed is started is not limited to the example shown. The variation effect in which the above-mentioned jackpot variation effect or reach effect is executed may be a variation effect that is executed based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 being any number between "1" and "4."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the development teasing effect and the development effect are executed in the SP reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The development teasing effect and the development effect may be executed while the normal reach effect is being executed or when the reach effect is not being executed. In this case, the execution of the development effect may result in the execution of the SP reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the operation valid period in the button operation presentation includes the first period to the fourth period.
Here, the valid operation periods may be set so that the later the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period are, the longer the valid operation periods may be.Also, the earlier the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period are, the longer the valid operation periods may be.Also, the first period, the second period, the third period, and the fourth period may all be the same length of time.
Furthermore, the operation valid period of the button operation effect in the SPSP reach effect and the operation valid period of the button operation effect in the promotion teasing effect may be different times.

In addition, in this embodiment, different change paths are used for the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limited to this.
In the SPSP reach effect in a specific change effect, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may change along the same change path as the SP reach effect in this specific change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a distinction is made between the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, but this is not limiting.
The SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect in one variable effect may be collectively regarded as the SP reach effect.

Also, in this embodiment, in the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 performs the sixth fluctuation action (fluctuation along the sixth fluctuation path) at the start of the reach performance (see Figure 219 (14)), and then performs the first fluctuation action (fluctuation along the first fluctuation path) (see Figure 219 (15)), but is not limited to this.
In the third stage, the middle row decorative pattern 41 may perform the first variable action from the start of the reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second stage, the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed (see Figure 160 (15)) is different from the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage (see Figure 88 (15), Figure 219 (15)), but is not limited to this.
The change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the second stage may be the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first stage or the third stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach effect is being executed in the third stage is the same as the change path of the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach effect is being executed in the first stage, but this is not limited to this.
The variation path of the middle row decorative symbols 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the third stage may be made different from either of the variation paths of the middle row decorative symbols 41 when the normal reach performance is being executed in the first and second stages.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that variable BGM is output during the variable presentation. Here, the type of sound output from the variable BGM may differ depending on the progress of the presentation. To give one example, the type of sound in the variable BGM may differ before the start of the reach presentation, while a normal reach presentation is being executed, while an SP reach presentation is being executed, while an SPSP reach presentation is being executed, and after the reach presentation is executed, when a decorative pattern 41 with a miss or a decorative pattern 41 with a double number is being displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that each of the variable effects from variable effect example 66 to variable effect example 81 is a variable effect in a special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
Each of the variable effects from variable effect example 66 to variable effect example 81 may be a variable effect in a specific time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second visual recognition mode in which the symbols in the specific row move at a slower speed after the first mode and become visible" also includes a visual recognition mode when the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In other words, the "slow speed" of the symbols in the specific row after the first mode also includes the speed of the symbols becoming "0".
In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that even in the special time-saving gaming state, there are display times in the fifth visual recognition mode and the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41, but this is not limited to this. In the special time-saving gaming state, the display in the fifth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed. Also, in the special time-saving gaming state, the display in the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may not be executed.
In the special time-saving gaming state, neither the fifth visual recognition mode nor the sixth visual recognition mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be executed. In other words, in the special time-saving gaming state, the display time of the "second visual recognition mode in which the patterns in the specific row slow down after the first mode and become visible" may be 0 seconds.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the pseudo consecutive images 511 and the development images 521 are displayed. Here, the pseudo consecutive images 511 and the development images 521 are images displayed in place of the middle row decorative pattern 41. Therefore, in a broad sense, the pseudo consecutive images 511 and the development images 521 are also included in the middle row decorative pattern 41.
Furthermore, the pseudo-series images 511 and the developed images 521 may be displayed in place of the left-row decorative pattern 41 or in place of the right-row decorative pattern 41. In other words, the pseudo-series images 511 and the developed images 521 may be regarded as the left-row decorative pattern 41 or as the right-row decorative pattern 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in normal game mode, after the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, there is no sound when the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again (see Figure 95 (16)), but this is not limited to this.
In the normal game state, after the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, when the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed again, the output of the switching non-display sound (see Figure 95 (15)) may continue and then become silent.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that various stop sounds are output when the decorative pattern 41 stops.
Here, the timing at which the stop sound is output is not limited to the same time as the stopping of the decorative pattern 41. If the stop sound is output when the decorative pattern 41 is stopped, the output of the stop sound may start before the decorative pattern 41 stops, or may start after the decorative pattern 41 stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, three rows of decorative patterns 41 are arranged in the left-right direction, but this is not limited to this.
The three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be arranged vertically.
Furthermore, the decorative patterns 41 in a specific row among the three rows of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally relative to the decorative patterns 41 in the other rows.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the decorative patterns 41 stop in the order of the left row decorative patterns 41, the right row decorative patterns 41, and the middle row decorative patterns 41, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the decorative symbols 41 may stop in the order of the left column decorative symbols 41, the middle column decorative symbols 41, and the right column decorative symbols 41. In this case, the relationship between the movement of the decorative symbols 41 and whether or not a stop sound is output in each of the above-described variable performance examples is reversed between the right column decorative symbols 41 and the middle column decorative symbols 41.
Also, for example, the decorative symbols 41 may stop in the order of the right-row decorative symbols 41, the middle-row decorative symbols 41, and the left-row decorative symbols 41. In this case, the relationship between the movement of the decorative symbols 41 and whether or not a stop sound is output in each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples is reversed between the left-row decorative symbols 41 and the middle-row decorative symbols 41.
That is, the "design of a specific row" described above using the middle row decorative design 41 as an example may be the left row decorative design 41 or the right row decorative design 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4" (see Figure 309, etc.) has been described, but is not limited to this. The relationship between the two change effects described above may be the relationship between the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3". The relationship between the two change effects described above may be the relationship between the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "1" and the change effect based on the reserved number for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2". Furthermore, the relationship between the two variable effects described above may be a relationship between a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". Furthermore, the relationship between the two variable effects described above may be a relationship between a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3" and a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "4". Furthermore, the relationship between the two variable effects described above may be a relationship between a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "2" and a variable effect based on the number of reserved balls for the first start port 121 (second start port 122) being "3".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the development teasing effect is being executed, one of the middle row decorative patterns 41 and the development image 521 change (see Figures 228 (2) and (3)), but this is not limited to this.
When the development teasing effect is being executed, multiple middle row decorative patterns 41 (for example, "4" and "5") and the development image 521 may change.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when three rows of decorative patterns 41 consisting of highly decorative display modes come to a stop, one stopping sound is output (see Figure 85 (6)), but this is not limited to this.
When three rows of decorative patterns 41 having highly decorative display modes are aligned and stopped, a stop sound may be output three times. In this case, consecutive stop sounds among the three stop sounds may be output so as to overlap each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 78 (1)), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 152 (1)), and the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 211 (1)) have different display modes for the character parts, but the display modes for the letter (number) parts are the same, but are not limited to this.
The highly decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 78 (1)), the highly decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 152 (1)), and the highly decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 211 (1)) may have the same display mode for the character portion, but may have different display modes for the letter (number) portion.
In addition, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the first stage (see Figure 78 (1)), the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the second stage (see Figure 152 (1)), and the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 in the third stage (see Figure 211 (1)) may have different display modes for the character portion and the letter (number) portion.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative pattern 41 differs when a reach effect is not being executed (see Figure 87 (2), Figure 98 (9), etc.) and when a normal reach effect is being executed (see Figure 89 (18)). Here, the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a reach effect is not being executed and the middle row decorative pattern 41 when a normal reach effect is being executed are regarded as display modes that are the same decorative mode (both are specific display modes).
In addition, in this embodiment, the display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 is made different before the start of the reach effect and during the execution of the normal reach effect, but this is not limiting. The display size of the middle row decorative symbol 41 may be the same before the start of the reach effect and during the execution of the normal reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a change effect (the effect shown in Figure 103 (20)) is executed in which the display mode of the identification information (variable image 51, pending image 52) changes to a specific mode (e.g., red). Here, the specific mode may be green or blue. In other words, the specific mode may be any display mode as long as it is different from the normal display mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (ease of winning) of various effects has been described. Here, the expectation level of an effect may be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that an effect image will be displayed when an effect is being executed. The expectation level of an effect may also be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that a sound effect will be output when an effect is being executed. The expectation level of an effect may also be the expectation level that suggests or notifies that an effect element (effect button 161, movable role object 115) will light up or operate when an effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the next change performance after change performance example 12 is change performance example 13, but this is not limited to this. The next change performance after change performance example 12 may be change performance example 10 or change performance example 11. In this case, the role device performance, third start action, and start-up third effect image 525 performed in change performance example 12 and change performance example 10 or change performance example 11 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the next change performance after change performance example 34 is change performance example 35, but this is not limited to this. The next change performance after change performance example 34 may be change performance example 32 or change performance example 33. In this case, the role device performance, seventh start action, and seventh start effect image 567 performed in change performance example 34, and change performance example 32 or change performance example 33 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the next change performance after change performance example 60 is change performance example 61, but this is not limited to this. The next change performance after change performance example 60 may be change performance example 58 or change performance example 59. In this case, the role device performance, eleventh starting action, and eleventh start effect image 581 performed in change performance example 60, and change performance example 58 or change performance example 59 are each regarded as a continuous performance and as a pre-determination performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the variable effect in the special time-shortened game state (specific time-shortened game state), but this is not limited to this.
An SPSP reach effect may also be executed in a variable effect in a special time-shortened gaming state (specific time-shortened gaming state). For example, the button operation effects in variable effect example 69, variable effect example 71, and variable effect example 75 (see FIG. 276 (14), FIG. 280 (15), and FIG. 291 (1)) may be button operation effects in an SPSP reach effect. That is, in variable effect example 69, variable effect example 71, and variable effect example 75, an SPSP reach effect may be executed after an SP reach effect. Also, in variable effect example 69, variable effect example 71, and variable effect example 75, an SPSP reach effect may be executed instead of an SP reach effect. That is, in a variable effect in a special time-shortened gaming state (specific time-shortened gaming state), an SPSP reach effect may be executed without executing an SP reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is executed in each stage (effect mode), the image displayed as the background on the image display unit 114 changes from a stage image 61 corresponding to each stage (effect mode) to an effect image corresponding to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.
Here, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are not effects that change the stage (effect mode), unlike the effect in which the stage change image 585 is displayed. Therefore, in one variable effect in which the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the stage (effect mode) before the start of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect and the stage (effect mode) during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be considered to be the same stage (effect mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the stopping sounds of the performance symbols include the stopping sound of the decorative symbol 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a reach performance is not executed (see Figure 79 (15) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative symbol 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is not executed (see Figure 89 (19) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative symbol 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed (see Figure 95 (13), Figure 97 (6) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative symbol 41 of a missing number in a variable performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed (see Figure 105 (35) etc.), the stopping sound of the pseudo-consecutive image 511 (see Figure 91 (13) etc.), the stopping sound of the development image 521 (see Figure 104 (31) etc.), the stopping sound of the decorative symbol 41 of a double number (see Figure 119 (51), Figure 119 (54) etc.), etc.
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output duration of the stop sound (execution duration of the stop sound) may be longer for the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed, than for the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output duration (execution duration of the stop sound) of the pseudo consecutive image 511 and the stop sound of the development image 521 may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, and the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a missing number in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output duration (execution duration of the stop sound) of the decorative pattern 41 with a double digit may be longer than the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed, etc.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 with double numbers may be longer than the stop sound of the pseudo-consecutive image 511 or the stop sound of the development image 521.
In addition, in each stage (each presentation mode), the output time (execution time of the stop sound) of the stop sound of the pseudo-consecutive image 511 or the stop sound of the development image 521 may be longer than the stop sound of the decorative pattern 41 with double numbers.

Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (the variable presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed, may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the missing decorative pattern 41 is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which a reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) may be longer in a jackpot fluctuation presentation than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which a normal reach is executed and an SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation is not executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), in a variable presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the variable presentation ends) may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 of a miss is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the variable presentation ends) in a variable presentation in which an SP SP reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) may be longer in a jackpot fluctuation presentation than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) to when the fluctuation stops (when the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SP reach presentation is executed may be longer than the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed, or the time from when the stopping sound of the decorative pattern 41 with a missing number is output (from when the output of the stop sound starts or ends) until the fluctuation stops (the fluctuation presentation ends) in a fluctuation presentation in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been described that the SPSP reach effect is executed in the variable effect in which the development image 521 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
In the variable performance, the SPSP reach performance may be executed without displaying the development image 521.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that there are two types of development effects: a first development effect (the development effect shown in Figure 118 (41)) and a second development effect (the development effect shown in Figure 138 (18)). Here, while the first development effect and the second development effect have the same type of sound effect, the sounds output may differ due to differences in volume settings. In other words, the volume output may be louder when the second development effect is executed when the volume is set to "3" (the volume is set to "3" by operating the effect key 162) than when the first development effect is executed when the volume is set to "2" (the volume is set to "2" by operating the effect key 162).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variation effect is based on the number of reserved positions for the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 being "2" or more, and that there are miss variation effects in which no reach effect is executed, such as a miss variation effect in which no start sound is output (see Figure 85 (2), Figure 273 (2), etc.), and a variation effect in which a start sound is output (see Figure 112 (2), Figure 278 (2), etc.).
Here, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a losing variation presentation in which a reach effect is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be configured so that a jackpot is more likely to occur in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output is executed. Also, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a losing variation presentation in which a reach effect is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be configured so that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is more likely to be executed in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output is executed. In other words, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a losing variation presentation in which a reach effect is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it may be configured so that a sound effect (stop sound) is less likely to be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output is executed.

In each stage (each presentation mode), when a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output, which includes the fact that a jackpot will not always be won in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output (0%). Also, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the reserved number being "2" or more is executed, it is easier to win a jackpot in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output, so it may be possible to win a jackpot in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output, or it may be possible not to win a jackpot in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is output.
Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is "2" or more, it is more likely that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation will be executed in the next variation presentation when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output (it is less likely that a sound effect (stop sound) will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode). This includes the fact that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation will not be executed (0%) in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output (the sound effect (stop sound) will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode will be output (100%)), and the fact that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation will be executed (100%) in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is output (the sound effect (stop sound) will not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode will be output (0%)). Furthermore, in each stage (each presentation mode), when a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed based on the pending number being "2" or more is executed, if a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed, it is easier for an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation to be executed in the next variation presentation (it is less likely that a sound effect (stop sound) will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode) than when a variation presentation in which a start sound is output is executed, so it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation will be executed in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is not output (the sound effect (stop sound) will not be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode), or it is possible that an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation will not be executed in the variation presentation next to a variation presentation in which a start sound is output (the sound effect (stop sound) will be output when the middle row decorative pattern 41 stops in a highly decorative display mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the effect image displayed changes depending on the stage of the step performance. Here, the effect image displayed depending on the step performance may be an effect image made of a specific color. As an example, a blue effect image may be displayed when the first stage of step performance is being performed, a green effect image may be displayed when the second stage of step performance is being performed, and a red effect image may be displayed when the third stage of step performance is being performed. In other words, the color of the effect image displayed may change as the stage of the step performance progresses.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a change performance in which the second stop performance is performed (for example, change performance example 10) is performed, it is easier to execute a change performance (the performance shown in FIG. 103 (20)) in which the display mode of the identification information changes to a specific mode (for example, red) than when a change performance in which the first stop performance is performed (for example, change performance example 1). And, although it has been explained that the identification information includes the change image 51 and the reserved image 52, it is not limited to this.
For example, the step effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of expectation according to the stage being executed. Therefore, the effect image displayed according to the step effect can be regarded as identification information corresponding to the determination information (random number value) determined by the special symbol determination unit 234. Furthermore, the effect that changes from the effect image corresponding to the step effect of the first or second stage to the effect image corresponding to the step effect of the third stage can be regarded as a change effect that changes the display mode of the identification information to a specific mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in variable presentations (such as variable presentation example 4) where a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed, no button operation presentation is executed, but this is not limited to this.
In each of the variable effects in which the normal reach effect is executed and the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are not executed, the button operation effect may be executed. In this case, the execution timing of the button operation effect may be after the start of the variable effect and before any of the three rows of decorative symbols 41 is temporarily stopped, or may be during the execution of the normal reach effect and before the middle row of decorative symbols 41 is temporarily stopped.
Furthermore, in a button operation presentation in a variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed, a common presentation (a common presentation image, a common sound, etc.) may be executed whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the valid operation period. Furthermore, if a different presentation (a different presentation image, a different sound, etc.) is more likely to be executed whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the valid operation period when one of an SP reach presentation, an SPSP reach presentation, or a jackpot is executed and a button operation presentation is executed is executed than when a variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed and a button operation presentation is executed is executed, then in a button operation presentation in a variable presentation in which a normal reach presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation and an SPSP reach presentation are not executed and a button operation presentation is executed, a different presentation (a different presentation image, a different sound, etc.) may be executed whether the presentation button 161 is operated or not during the valid operation period. Furthermore, the fact that different effects (different effect images, different sounds, etc.) are more likely to be executed between when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period when either an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, or a jackpot is executed and a variable effect in which a button operation effect is executed is executed than when a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed and neither an SP reach effect nor an SPSP reach effect is executed and a button operation effect is executed includes the fact that, in the button operation effect in a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed and neither an SP reach effect nor an SPSP reach effect is executed, a different effect (different effect images, different sounds, etc.) is always executed between when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period (0%), and the fact that, in the button operation effect in a variable effect in which either an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, or a jackpot is executed, a different effect (different effect images, different sounds, etc.) is always executed between when the effect button 161 is operated and when it is not operated during the valid operation period (100%).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been described that the light guide plate 118 emits light. Here, when the light guide plate 118 emits light, by displaying the blackout image 641, images other than the reserved number display 55 and the small symbol 56 among the effect images displayed immediately before the display of the blackout image 641 become invisible or may be hidden by the blackout image 641, making them difficult to see or impossible to see.
In this case, the light emitting state of the light guide plate 118 can be easily recognized by the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the emphasis images that emphasize the reach effect, which is an example of a specific effect, are the first reach line image 509 and the first reach notification image 510, but the emphasis images are not limited to the above examples.
Various effect images displayed during the execution of a reach effect, such as the development image 521, the SPSP suggestion image 601, and the button operation image 502 in the deciding button effect, are images that highlight that a reach effect is being executed (a reach effect). Therefore, the various effect images displayed during the execution of a reach effect can be regarded as emphasis images that emphasize the reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the pre-determination effect is the display of an effect image, a role-play effect, or the like.
Here, as a pre-determination effect, an effect may be performed in which the display mode of the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is changed from the normal mode. As an example, in a case where the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 are normally displayed as lit, an effect may be performed in which the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 are displayed as flashing lights as a pre-determination effect. In other words, the effect by the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 can also be seen as an effect that creates anticipation of the possibility of a reach effect being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the expectation of a jackpot game being executed differs between when an advanced presentation is executed in the first presentation mode and when an advanced presentation is executed in the second presentation mode.
Here, the presentation mode may be set by the player operating the operating means. For example, the presentation mode may be set to either the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode depending on the operation of the presentation button 161 in the waiting state for customers. The first presentation mode may be a presentation mode in which the likelihood of a development presentation being executed when a variable presentation is executed is higher than in the second presentation mode, and the likelihood of a jackpot game being expected when a variable presentation in which a development presentation is executed is lower than in the second presentation mode. In this way, the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode are not limited to presentation modes that change depending on the transition of the stage image 61.

The first presentation mode may be a presentation mode in which the likelihood of a development effect being executed when a variable effect is executed is lower than in the second presentation mode, and in which the likelihood of a jackpot game being played when a variable effect in which a development effect is executed is higher than in the second presentation mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that in the jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 of double numbers may not be displayed and the pattern stopping sound (sound effect) may not be output (see Figure 308 (3)).
Here, in the jackpot variation presentation based on winning at the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state, the double-digit decorative pattern 41 may be displayed stopped, while the stopping sound (sound effect) of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 may not be output.
Furthermore, in a jackpot variation effect based on winning at second start port 122 in the time-shortened game state, while doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed as stopped, the stopping sound (sound effect) of doublet decorative pattern 41 may not be output. When this jackpot variation effect is executed, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot variation effect may be greater (a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player may be executed) than when a jackpot variation effect in which the stopping sound (sound effect) of doublet decorative pattern 41 is output is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the jackpot game execution period is the period during which the jackpot game notification image 542 is displayed (see Figure 119 (56) etc.), while the third right-hit image 629 is displayed (see Figure 281 (24) etc.), and after the start of the display of the time-saving start image 546 (see Figure 120 (60) etc.) and before the display of the stage image 61 (see Figure 120 (63) etc.) corresponding to the time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this.
The period during which the jackpot game notification image 542 or the third right-hit image 629 is displayed may be regarded as a period before the start of the jackpot game. Also, the period after the start of the time-saving start image 546 and before the display of the stage image 61 corresponding to the time-saving game state may be regarded as a period after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in each of the variable performance examples and modified examples of this embodiment, at one timing, the rainbow light-emitting performance in which all of the lamps performing the rainbow light-emitting performance, among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) and the light guide plate 118, have the same rainbow light-emitting state, is not performed, but this is not limited to this.
At specific timings shown in the variation effect examples and modified examples of this embodiment, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in which all of the lamps executing the rainbow light-emitting effect among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) and the light guide plate 118 are in the same rainbow light-emitting mode. For example, at the timings shown in the variation effect examples and modified examples, a rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in which all of the lamps executing the rainbow light-emitting effect among the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) and the light guide plate 118 are in the same rainbow light-emitting mode due to the rainbow light-emitting mode described for the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571). As an example, at the execution timing of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (46), the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) through the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151) may all execute a rainbow light-emitting effect according to the sixth mode of the fourth rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the rainbow light-emitting effect is restricted when the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" is displayed as demo image 605, and when content that warns the player is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" is displayed as the demo image 605, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be restricted, whereas when content that warns the player is displayed as the demo image 605, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in the manner shown in Fig. 81 (3). Also, when content that warns the player is displayed as the demo image 605, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be restricted, whereas when the text "XY Company Pachinko ABC" is displayed as the demo image 605, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed in the manner shown in Fig. 81 (3).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when a button operation effect is executed in a promotion promotion effect, a rainbow light emission effect is executed (see Figure 119 (52) etc.), but this is not limited to this.
When a button operation effect is being executed in the promotion promotion effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect may not be executed by any of the light-emitting means (the rainbow light-emitting effect may be restricted).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the rainbow light-emitting effect is executed when the button operation effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game (see Figure 300 (2), Figure 302 (2), etc.), but this is not limited to this.
When a button operation effect is being executed during a jackpot game, the rainbow light emitting effect may not be executed by any of the light emitting means (the rainbow light emitting effect may be restricted).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the rainbow image is not displayed while the customer waiting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The rainbow image may be displayed even during the execution of the customer waiting effect. For example, while the demo image 605 shown in FIG. 81(3) is being displayed, the text "Pachinko ABC" in the demo image 605 may be displayed in rainbow colors. In this case, the rainbow image may be displayed in a specific operating mode at a specific cycle (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

In this way, rainbow light-emitting effects (illumination by the lamp in a rainbow light-emitting mode, display of a rainbow image) may be performed even while a customer waiting effect is being performed, but rainbow light-emitting effects performed while a customer waiting effect is being performed do not indicate that a jackpot game will be played. More specifically, rainbow light-emitting effects performed while a customer waiting effect is being performed do not indicate the level of expectation or the game that will be played, but are instead an effect intended to advertise the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that a rainbow light-emitting effect is executed when the success image 538 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 118 (44) and 280 (16)). Here, the effect control unit 300 may synchronize (align) the light-emitting modes of all lamps that execute a rainbow light-emitting effect when the success image 538 is displayed to a rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the second rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle). Furthermore, in the normal game mode only, the effect control unit 300 may synchronize (align) the light-emitting modes of all lamps that execute a rainbow light-emitting effect when the success image 538 is displayed to a rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the second rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle). Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode only, the effect control unit 300 may synchronize (align) the light-emitting modes of all lamps that execute a rainbow light-emitting effect when the success image 538 is displayed to a rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, the second rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle, the third rainbow light-emitting mode with a 0.4 second cycle, etc.).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the performance control unit 300 can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a second time while the first variable performance (variable performance example 21) having an execution time of a first time is being executed, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a fourth time, which is longer than the second time, while the second variable performance (variable performance example 77) having an execution time of a third time, which is shorter than the first time, is being executed.
Here, the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect to be compared between the first and second variable effects may be the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using a common light-emitting means, or the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using different light-emitting means, or the total execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using any of the light-emitting means.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, during the execution of the first variable performance, the performance control unit 300 executes a rainbow light-emitting performance for a first time before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a second time longer than the first time after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 (see time points T3 to T4 and time points T4 to T7 in Figure 305, etc.), and that, during the execution of the first variable performance, the performance control unit 300 executes a rainbow light-emitting performance for a third time before the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41, and can execute the rainbow light-emitting performance for a fourth time shorter than the third time after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 (see time points T2 to T7 and time points T7 to T12 in Figure 121, etc.).
Here, in the first and second variable effects, the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect that is compared before and after the display of the double-digit decorative pattern 41 may be the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using a common light-emitting means, or the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using different light-emitting means, or the total execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect using any of the light-emitting means.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the second cycle which is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the first cycle and then to a third cycle which is different from both the first cycle and the second cycle (see time points T4' to T5' and time points T6' to T7' in Figure 149, etc.).
Here, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle do not have to be the same timing. Also, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the third cycle do not have to be the same timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the second cycle which is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the third cycle which is different from both the first cycle and the second cycle and then to the second cycle (see time points T4' to T5' and time points T6' to T7' in Figure 150, etc.).
Here, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the third cycle do not have to be the same timing.Furthermore, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle do not have to be the same timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, during the execution of a jackpot game, the presentation control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the second cycle which is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for the first cycle and then to a third cycle which is different from both the first cycle and the second cycle (see time points T10' to T11' and time points T12' to T13 in Figure 347, etc.).
Here, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle do not have to be the same timing. Also, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the third cycle do not have to be the same timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, during the execution of a variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can change the first light-emitting means (for example, the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a first cycle and then to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a second cycle that is different from the first cycle, and can change the second light-emitting means (for example, the seventh lamp (left panel lamp 1162)) to a rainbow light-emitting mode for a third cycle that is different from both the first cycle and the second cycle, and then to the second cycle (see time points T10' to T11' and time points T12' to T13 in Figure 348, etc.).
Here, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the first cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the third cycle do not have to be the same timing.Furthermore, the timing when the first light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle and the timing when the second light-emitting means is in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the second cycle do not have to be the same timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the complete function is activated when the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value during the execution of the jackpot variable presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this.
If the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value while the jackpot variation effect is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may enter a standby state for activation of the complete function. Then, after this jackpot variation effect is executed, the jackpot game may be executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the complete function may be activated. In this case, after the pachinko gaming machine 100 enters a standby state for activation of the complete function while the jackpot variation effect is being executed, the rainbow light-emitting effect may be executed without restriction, or the rainbow light-emitting effect may be restricted (see FIG. 344 (2)).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the condition for the complete function to be activated is that the jackpot symbol is not stopped and determined, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, if the timing at which the MY value reaches the MY upper limit value is while the jackpot symbol is being fixed and stopped, but before the jackpot game starts, the complete function may be activated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that when one lamp is performing a rainbow light emission effect, another lamp is performing a rainbow light emission effect.
Here, "while one lamp is performing a rainbow light-emitting effect, the other lamps are performing a rainbow light-emitting effect" means that there is at least a timing overlap between the period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by one lamp is performed and the period during which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the other lamps is performed, and the timing at which the rainbow light-emitting effect by one lamp starts may be different from the timing at which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the other lamps starts, and the timing at which the rainbow light-emitting effect by one lamp ends may be different from the timing at which the rainbow light-emitting effect by the other lamps ends.

In this embodiment, each rainbow image (first rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 627, twenty-first rainbow image 598) , the 22nd rainbow image 628, the 23rd rainbow image 631, the 24th rainbow image 632, the 25th rainbow image 634, the 26th rainbow image 635, the 27th rainbow image 636, the 28th rainbow image 637, the 29th rainbow image 638, the 30th rainbow image 639, the 31st rainbow image 640, the 32nd rainbow image 642, the 33rd rainbow image 643, the 34th rainbow image 644, the 35th rainbow image 645, the 36th rainbow image 646, the 37th rainbow image 647, and the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 (variable image 51)) are displayed so that the display colors are perceived as seven different colors (rainbow colors) at one timing, but this is not limited to this.
The performance control unit 300 may display each rainbow image so that the display colors are perceived as fewer than six colors at a specific timing. Then, at one or more predetermined timings after the specific timing, the performance control unit 300 may display each rainbow image using the display colors of the seven colors (rainbow colors) that were not used at the specific timing, so that the display colors are perceived as seven colors (rainbow colors) during a period including the specific timing and the predetermined timing.

In this embodiment, each rainbow image (first rainbow image 539, second rainbow image 606, third rainbow image 540, fourth rainbow image 607, fifth rainbow image 608, sixth rainbow image 612, seventh rainbow image 613, eighth rainbow image 614, ninth rainbow image 615, tenth rainbow image 616, eleventh rainbow image 617, twelfth rainbow image 618, rainbow reach line image 619, rainbow reach notification image 620, thirteenth rainbow image 621, fourteenth rainbow image 622, fifteenth rainbow image 623, sixteenth rainbow image 624, seventeenth rainbow image 625, eighteenth rainbow image 626, nineteenth rainbow image 597, twentieth rainbow image 628, It has been explained that rainbow image 627, 21st rainbow image 598, 22nd rainbow image 628, 23rd rainbow image 631, 24th rainbow image 632, 25th rainbow image 634, 26th rainbow image 635, 27th rainbow image 636, 28th rainbow image 637, 29th rainbow image 638, 30th rainbow image 639, 31st rainbow image 640, 32nd rainbow image 642, 33rd rainbow image 643, 34th rainbow image 644, 35th rainbow image 645, 36th rainbow image 646, 37th rainbow image 647, and rainbow-colored pending image 52 (variable image 51) are all displayed in motion, but this is not limited to this.
Each rainbow image may be displayed in a static manner.

Furthermore, the first light-emitting portion 1572a, second light-emitting portion 1572b, and third light-emitting portion 1572c of the upper frame lamp 1571 and upper left frame lamp 1572, the first light-emitting portion 1573a, second light-emitting portion 1573b, and third light-emitting portion 1573c of the upper right frame lamp 1573, the first light-emitting portion 1574a and second light-emitting portion 1574b of the left frame lamp 1574, the first light-emitting portion 1575a and second light-emitting portion 1575b of the right frame lamp 1575, the first light-emitting portion 1161a, second light-emitting portion 1161b, and third light-emitting portion 1161c of the upper panel lamp 1161, and the first light-emitting portion 1162 of the left panel lamp 1162, which are described as light-emitting means in this embodiment. a, second light-emitting unit 1162b, first light-emitting unit 1163a and second light-emitting unit 1163b of the right panel lamp 1163, first light-emitting unit 1164a, second light-emitting unit 1164b, and third light-emitting unit 1164c of the lower panel lamp 1164, left movable role element 1151, first light-emitting unit 1152a and second light-emitting unit 1152b of the middle movable role element 1152, right movable role element 1153, starter lamp 1211, button lamp 1611, handle lamp 1511, light guide plate 118, and each of the light-emitting areas of the image display unit 114 are different light-emitting areas and can also be considered as rainbow light-emitting areas capable of producing rainbow light-emitting effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of a jackpot game, the attention-calling image 610 is displayed first, and then the company name image 611 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
During the execution of a jackpot game, when the attention-calling image 610 is displayed, the company name image 611 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of a jackpot game, the time-saving start image 546 is displayed, and then the warning image 610 and the company name image 611 are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
During a jackpot game, when the time-saving start image 546 is displayed, the warning image 610 and the company name image 611 may be displayed in a smaller size than the illustrated example (see Figures 120 (61) and (62)).

In the present embodiment, the rainbow image is displayed on the image display unit 114 .
Here, the image display unit 114 displays an image by emitting light from the light-emitting elements, and therefore, the image display unit 114 is also included in the light-emitting means in a broad sense.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot game that starts after the jackpot variable presentation is executed in the time-saving game state, the warning image 610 and the company name image 611 are not displayed (see Figure 282, etc.), but this is not limited to this.
In a jackpot game that starts after the execution of a jackpot variation effect in the time-shortened game state, the attention-calling image 610 and the company name image 611 may be displayed. In this case, when the attention-calling image 610 and the company name image 611 are displayed, the lamp may be in a non-rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the rainbow light-emitting mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the variable image 51 is changed to display a rainbow-colored variable image 51 (see Figure 129 (2) etc.), but this is not limited to this.
The display mode of the reserved image 52 may change, so that the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 is displayed. Then, the rainbow-colored variable image 51 may be displayed by moving the reserved image 52.
Furthermore, when the display of the rainbow-colored hold image 52 or the rainbow-colored varying image 51 starts, a specific lamp or all lamps may be in a specific rainbow light-emitting mode for a predetermined period of time. This specific lamp may be any of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151). Furthermore, the specific rainbow light-emitting mode may be any of the first rainbow light-emitting mode to the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the lamp may enter a non-rainbow emission mode that is different from the rainbow emission mode. Here, the non-rainbow emission mode includes not only emission of light in colors that do not appear to be rainbow colors, but also extinguishing the lamp.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the rainbow light effect can be executed even when the complete function is in a standby state for activation. Therefore, the standby state for activation of the complete function can also be considered a performance state in which the rainbow light effect can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the complete function is activated, the rainbow light-emitting effect that has been executed is limited, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Even if the complete function is activated, the rainbow light effect that was being executed may be continued. In this case, the state in which the complete function is activated is also considered to be an effect state in which the rainbow light effect can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the lamps will be in the rainbow light emitting mode for each performance situation, along with which lamps will be in the rainbow light emitting mode.
Here, the lamp that changes to a rainbow light-emitting mode for each performance situation is not limited to the example shown, but may be any one or more of the first lamp (upper frame lamp 1571) to the fifteenth lamp (handle lamp 151).

Furthermore, among the various rainbow light-emitting modes described above, the first, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth rainbow light-emitting modes are light-emitting modes that, when a first lamp and a second lamp with different light-emitting areas are in a common rainbow light-emitting mode, cause a player to visually recognize that the rainbow colors are moving from the first lamp to the second lamp over time. Therefore, the first, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth rainbow light-emitting modes may be collectively referred to as rainbow-moving light-emitting modes.
Furthermore, when a first lamp and a second lamp having different light-emitting regions are in a common rainbow light-emitting mode, the first, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth rainbow light-emitting modes result in different light emission colors from the first lamp and the second lamp at a given timing. Therefore, the first, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth rainbow light-emitting modes may be collectively referred to as different rainbow color light-emitting modes.
The second, third, and tenth rainbow light-emitting modes are light-emitting modes that allow a player to visually recognize that the rainbow colors change over time, and therefore the second, third, and tenth rainbow light-emitting modes may be collectively referred to as rainbow switching light-emitting modes.
Furthermore, in the second, third, and tenth rainbow light emission modes, when a first lamp and a second lamp having different light-emitting regions are in a common rainbow light emission mode, the first lamp and the second lamp emit the same light color at a given timing. Therefore, the second, third, and tenth rainbow light emission modes may be collectively referred to as rainbow same-color light emission modes.

The above-mentioned first rainbow light-emitting mode, fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, and ninth rainbow light-emitting mode may all be read as “moving rainbow light-emitting modes.” Furthermore, the above-mentioned first rainbow light-emitting mode, fourth rainbow light-emitting mode, fifth rainbow light-emitting mode, sixth rainbow light-emitting mode, seventh rainbow light-emitting mode, eighth rainbow light-emitting mode, and ninth rainbow light-emitting mode may all be read as “different rainbow color light-emitting modes.”
Furthermore, the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode described above may all be read as a “rainbow switchable light-emitting mode.” Furthermore, the second rainbow light-emitting mode, the third rainbow light-emitting mode, and the tenth rainbow light-emitting mode described above may all be read as a “rainbow same-color light-emitting mode.”

Furthermore, the variable effects (variable effect examples) described in this embodiment may be all variable effects that can be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this case, the rainbow light-emitting effect forms shown in Figures 329 and 363 may be considered to be all rainbow light-emitting effect forms that can be executed for each effect state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rainbow light emission effect pattern has been described.
Here, rainbow light-emitting effects with different rainbow light-emitting modes can be considered as rainbow light-emitting effects with different performance patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes can be considered as rainbow light-emitting effects with different performance patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different types of rainbow images can be considered as rainbow light-emitting effects with different performance patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different execution times (display times of rainbow images) can be considered as rainbow light-emitting effects with different performance patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different light-emitting means that produce rainbow light-emitting modes can be considered as rainbow light-emitting effects with different performance patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, the types of rainbow light-emitting effects have been described.
Here, rainbow light-emitting effects with different rainbow light-emitting patterns are considered to be different types of rainbow light-emitting patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different cycles of rainbow light-emitting patterns are considered to be different types of rainbow light-emitting patterns. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with different types of rainbow images are considered to be different types of rainbow light-emitting patterns. On the other hand, rainbow light-emitting effects with the same rainbow light-emitting pattern and cycle of the rainbow light-emitting pattern but different execution times are considered to be the same type of rainbow light-emitting pattern. Also, rainbow light-emitting effects with the same type of rainbow image but different display times of the rainbow image are considered to be the same type of rainbow light-emitting pattern.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope thereof.
Furthermore, various configurations in the above-described embodiments may be combined.

[Technical feature 1 of the present invention]
A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the gaming control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) that are determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is able to determine whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and is able to execute a variable display (variable display of a special pattern, a variable display executed by the presentation control unit 300) based on the judgment information, and if the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) during the execution of the variable display, it stops the progress of the variable display that is being executed, and if the specific value reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special game, it is able to proceed with the special game that is being executed.

◆The second configuration that achieves the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation. The game control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, executing a variable display based on the judgment information, and storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been performed as reserved memory. If the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit, MY upper limit, 95,000) while the reserved memory is stored, the game control means is capable of restricting the execution of the variable display based on the judgment information stored as reserved memory and maintaining the reserved memory.

◆ A third configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the gaming control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains first judgment information when a first start condition is met, obtains second judgment information when a second start condition is met, and is capable of making a first judgment of whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the first judgment information, and a second judgment of whether or not to play an auxiliary game (e.g., opening and closing operation of an electric tulip 123) based on the second judgment information, and displays a first variable display (special It is possible to execute a variable display of a different symbol, a variable display executed by the performance control unit 300), and to execute a second variable display (variable display of a normal symbol) based on the second judgment information, and to store the first judgment information when the first judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory, and to store the second judgment information when the second judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and if the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) while the special game is being executed and the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are stored, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first variable display based on the first judgment information stored as the first reserved memory during the special game being executed, and to execute the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory.

◆ A fourth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the gaming control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains first judgment information when a first start condition is met, obtains second judgment information when a second start condition is met, and is capable of making a first judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the first judgment information, and is capable of making a second judgment on whether or not to play an auxiliary game (e.g., opening and closing operation of an electric tulip 123) based on the second judgment information, and displays a first variable display (variable display of a special symbol, presentation control unit 300) based on the first judgment information. 00), and is capable of executing a second variable display (variable display of a normal symbol) based on the second judgment information; the first judgment information when the first judgment has not been executed can be stored as a first reserved memory; the second judgment information when the second judgment has not been executed can be stored as a second reserved memory; if the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) while the first variable display is being executed and the second reserved memory is stored, the execution of the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory is restricted; and if the specific value reaches the predetermined value while the special game is being executed and the second reserved memory is stored, the second variable display based on the second judgment information stored as the second reserved memory can be executed.

◆ A fifth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the judgment information, and during the execution of the variable presentation, specific presentations (stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach presentation, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) can be executed. etc.), and while the variable effect is being executed, an emphasis image (a stop effect image, a reach line image, a reach notification image, a double-digit effect image) that emphasizes the specific effect can be displayed, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and the same emphasis image can be displayed when the specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the first effect mode and when the specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the second effect mode.

◆The sixth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (for example, a presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations. The game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and can execute a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (for example, a jackpot game) based on the judgment information. The presentation control means can control the presentation mode, and can execute a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation of presentation symbols based on the judgment information. During the execution of the variable presentation, specific presentations (presentations based on a preliminary judgment result, stop display of decorative symbols 41, reach promotion presentation, reach presentation, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) can be executed, and during the execution of the variable presentation, emphasis images (chance eye effect image, stop effect image, reach promotion effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, double-digit effect image) that emphasize the specific presentation can be displayed. The presentation modes include a first presentation mode (first stage to fourth stage). The emphasized image includes a first emphasized image and a second emphasized image (a fourth chance effect image 596, a fifteenth chance effect image 597, a fifteenth chance effect image 598, a tenth chance effect image 59 ... The display includes the following: eighth reach-inducing effect image 589, eighth reach-inducing effect image 591, second reach line image 531, second reach notification image 532, sixteenth stop effect image 594, seventeenth stop effect image 599, etc.; when the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the first effect mode, at least the first emphasis image can be displayed; and when the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the second effect mode, at least the second emphasis image can be displayed.

◆ A seventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the judgment information, and during the execution of the variable presentation, specific presentations (stop display of decorative symbol 41, reach presentation, decorative symbol with double numbers) can be executed. 41 display, etc.), and when the specific effect is executed, a specific sound (first stop sound, third stop sound, sixth stop sound, eighth stop sound, tenth stop sound, first reach sound, etc.) can be output, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) that is different from the first effect mode, and the same specific sound can be output when the specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the first effect mode and when the specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the second effect mode.

◆ An eighth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing specific presentations (stopped display of decorative symbols 41, reach presentation, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and is capable of outputting specific sounds (stop sounds, reach sounds, etc.) when the specific presentation is executed. The presentation modes include a first presentation mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and a second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode) that is different from the first presentation mode, and the specific sounds include a first specific sound (first stop sound, third stop sound, fifth stop sound, eighth stop sound, first reach sound, etc.) and a second specific sound that is different from the first specific sound (25th stop sound, 26th stop sound, 27th stop sound, 29th stop sound, seventh reach sound, etc.), and when the specific presentation is executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the first presentation mode, at least the first specific sound can be output, and when the specific presentation is executed during the execution of the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, at least the second specific sound can be output.

◆ A ninth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a first presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) and a second presentation that can start after the start of the first presentation (e.g., an SPSP reach presentation) during the execution of the variable presentation. The presentation modes include a first presentation mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode) that is different from the first presentation mode, and when the first presentation and the second presentation are executed, a specific image (for example, transition image 516, role-playing device fourth effect image 535, etc.) can be displayed from the start of the first presentation to the start of the second presentation, and the same specific image can be displayed when the first presentation and the second presentation are executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the first presentation mode, and when the first presentation and the second presentation are executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the second presentation mode.

◆ A tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the judgment information, and during the execution of the variable presentation, a first presentation (e.g., reach presentation), and a second presentation (e.g., SPSP reach presentation) that can start after the start of the first presentation, , and the presentation modes include a first presentation mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode) that is different from the first presentation mode. When the first presentation and the second presentation are executed, a specific sound (such as a development stop sound or a fourth role sound) can be output from the start of the first presentation to the start of the second presentation. The specific sound can be output in common when the first presentation and the second presentation are executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the first presentation mode, and when the first presentation and the second presentation are executed while the variable presentation is being executed in the second presentation mode.

◆ An eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation in which presentation symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing specific presentations (such as stopped display of decorative symbols 41, reach presentations, display of double-digit decorative symbols 41, etc.) during the execution of the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the specific presentations during the execution of the variable presentation. It is possible to display an emphasis image (such as a stop effect image, a reach line image, a reach notification image, or a double-digit effect image), and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern including first character information (such as any number from 1 to 9) and a second effect pattern including second character information different from the first character information (such as a number different from the first character information), and the specific effects include a first specific effect in which the first effect pattern is displayed stopped, and a second specific effect in which the second effect pattern is displayed stopped, and different emphasis images can be displayed when the first specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the specific effect mode and when the second specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect in the specific effect mode.

◆ A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation in which presentation symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing specific presentations (such as a stopped display of decorative symbols 41, a reach presentation, or the display of double-digit decorative symbols 41) during the execution of the variable presentation. When the specific effect is executed, a specific sound (such as a stop sound or a reach sound) can be output, and the effect patterns include a first effect pattern including first character information (such as any number from 1 to 9) and a second effect pattern including second character information different from the first character information (such as a number different from the first character information), and the specific effects include a first specific effect in which the first effect pattern is displayed stopped, and a second specific effect in which the second effect pattern is displayed stopped, and different specific sounds can be output when the first specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the specific effect mode and when the second specific effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed in the specific effect mode.

◆ A thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the judgment information, and during the execution of the variable presentation, a specific presentation (reach presentation) During the execution of the variable effects, it is possible to display emphasis images (stop effect image, reach line image, reach notification image, double-digit effect image) that emphasize the specific effect, and it is possible to execute predetermined effects (effects based on advance determination results, reach stimulation effects, etc.) that raise expectations that the specific effect will occur, and different emphasis images can be displayed when the specific effect is executed without executing the predetermined effect and when both the predetermined effect and the specific effect are executed.

◆The fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) is equipped with a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation. The game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information. The presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays variable presentation symbols based on the determination information. During the variable presentation, specific presentations (such as reach presentations and display of double-digit decorative symbols 41) can be executed. When the specific presentation is executed, specific sounds (such as stop sounds and reach sounds) can be output. Predetermined presentations (such as presentations based on advance determination results and reach-inducing presentations) that raise expectations of the specific presentation can be executed. Different specific sounds can be output when the specific presentation is executed without executing the predetermined presentation and when both the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation are executed.

◆ A fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern including text information is displayed in a variable manner and then displayed stationary, and in the variable presentation based on the determination that the special game will be played, multiple presentation patterns can be displayed stationary in a specific sequence (e.g., a double number), and when the multiple presentation patterns are displayed stationary in the specific sequence in the variable presentation, a specific It is possible to output a sound (such as a stop sound), and the specific sounds include a first specific sound (such as the 8th stop sound and the 13th stop sound) and a second specific sound (such as the 29th stop sound and the 30th stop sound) that is different from the first specific sound. The presentation modes include a first presentation mode (any of the 1st to 4th stages) and a second presentation mode (a stage different from the first presentation mode) that is different from the first presentation mode. In the variable presentation in the first presentation mode, the first specific sound can be output when a plurality of presentation symbols including specific character information (for example, the numbers 4 and 7) are stopped and displayed in the specific sequence, and in the variable presentation in the second presentation mode, the second specific sound can be output when a plurality of presentation symbols including the specific character information are stopped and displayed in the specific sequence.

◆ A sixteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays multiple rows of presentation symbols in a variable manner and then displays them stationary, and in the variable presentation, a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is generated when the presentation symbols are displayed stationary in a specific display mode. a specific effect (reach stimulation effect, step effect, etc.) that raises the expectation that the special game will be played can be started before the effect symbols in a specific column (left column decorative pattern 41, right column decorative pattern 41, etc.) are stopped and displayed in the variable effect; if the specific effect is not executed during the execution of the variable effect, the specific sound can be output when the effect symbols in the specific column are stopped and displayed in the specific display mode; and if the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect, the output of the specific sound can be limited when the effect symbols in the specific column are stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

◆ A seventeenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, and presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment as to whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation in which multiple rows of presentation symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then displayed stationary, based on the judgment information, and in the variable presentation, is capable of outputting a specific sound (such as a stop sound) when the presentation symbols are displayed stationary in a specific display mode, and during the execution of the variable presentation, a first presentation (reach presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, zone presentation, development presentation) and a second presentation (preliminary judgment result) that anticipates the possibility of the first presentation being executed are displayed. It is possible to execute effects based on the above, reach prompting effects, pseudo consecutive prompting effects, zone prompting effects, and development prompting effects, and it is possible to execute specific variation effects (miss variation effects) that indicate that the special game will not be executed and that stop and display the performance symbols in the multiple columns, and the specific variation effects include a first specific variation effect in which neither the first nor the second effect is executed, and a second specific variation effect in which at least one of the first and second effects is executed, and in the first specific variation effect, it is possible to output the specific sound when the performance symbols in the specific column (for example, left column decorative pattern 41, middle column decorative pattern 41, etc.) are stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, and in the second specific variation effect, it is possible to limit the output of the specific sound when the performance symbols in the specific column are stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

◆ An 18th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and the rainbow light-emitting presentation is executed based on the judgment information. The presentation states in which light-emitting effects can be executed include a first presentation state (waiting for customers, when a jackpot game is being played, etc.) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (when a variable presentation is being played, etc.), and the light-emitting means includes at least a frame light-emitting means (first lamp, sixth lamp, seventh lamp, eleventh lamp, fourteenth lamp, fifteenth lamp, etc.) that illuminates the game frame, and the second presentation state has a greater number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effects that can be executed by the frame light-emitting means (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of cycles of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of execution times for rainbow light-emitting effects, etc.) than the first presentation state.

◆ A nineteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and a presentation state in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be executed includes There is a first presentation state (waiting for customers, when a jackpot game is being played, etc.) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (when a variable presentation is being played, etc.), and the light-emitting means includes at least a board light-emitting means for illuminating the game board (second to fifth lamps, seventh lamp, tenth lamp, twelfth lamp, thirteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114, etc.), and the second presentation state has a greater number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting presentation that can be executed by the board light-emitting means (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting presentation execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) than the first presentation state.

◆ A twentieth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), and the presentation control means controls the light-emitting means to emit a specific light color. The rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed in a plurality of different rainbow light-emitting areas, and the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed in a first effect state (such as a waiting state for customers or when a jackpot game is being played) and a second effect state different from the first effect state (such as when a variable effect is being played), and the number of rainbow light-emitting areas in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed (such as the number of light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect and the number of light-emitting elements that are in a rainbow light-emitting mode) differs between the first and second effect states.

◆ A twenty-first configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), and the presentation control means controls the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. The rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed by lighting up the ball, and the effect states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first effect state (such as a waiting state for customers or when a jackpot game is being played) and a second effect state different from the first effect state (such as when a variable effect is being played), the light-emitting means includes at least an image display means (such as the image display unit 114), the rainbow light-emitting effect includes at least the display of a rainbow image having a specific display color, and the number of types of rainbow images that can be displayed by the image display means is greater in the second effect state than in the first effect state.

◆ A 22nd configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (e.g., any of the first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, and image display unit 114). or the like), and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (for example, a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114, etc.), and the presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first presentation state (a state waiting for customers, when a jackpot game is being executed, etc.) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (when a variable effect is being executed, etc.), and the second light-emitting means in the second presentation state has a greater number of presentation patterns for the rainbow light-emitting effect (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting effect execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) that can be executed by the first light-emitting means in the first presentation state.

◆ A 23rd configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentation, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means The stage can execute a variation effect that varies the display of the performance symbols based on the determination information, can execute a specific variation effect (jackpot variation effect) based on the determination that the special game is being played, and can execute a rainbow light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and the light-emitting means includes at least a frame light-emitting means (first lamp, sixth lamp, seventh lamp, eleventh lamp, fourteenth lamp, fifteenth lamp, etc.) that emits light to the game frame, and the specific variation effect includes a first specific light-emitting means (a first light, a sixth lamp, a seventh lamp, an eleventh lamp, a fourteenth lamp, a fifteenth lamp, etc.). The rainbow light-emitting effect includes a first specific variation effect and a second specific variation effect that is different from the first specific variation effect, and the presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect produced by the frame light-emitting means include a first presentation pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time for the rainbow light-emitting effect, etc.) and a second presentation pattern that is different from the first presentation pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the first presentation pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode that is different from the first presentation pattern, an execution time for the rainbow light-emitting effect that is different from the first presentation pattern, etc.), and the rainbow light-emitting effect of the first presentation pattern can be executed by the frame light-emitting means at least from the time the first specific variation effect starts until the next variation effect after the first specific variation effect starts (the first variation effect after a jackpot game), and the rainbow light-emitting effect of the second presentation pattern can be executed by the frame light-emitting means at least from the time the second specific variation effect starts until the next variation effect after the second specific variation effect starts (the first variation effect after a jackpot game).

◆ A 24th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of making a judgment based on the judgment information as to whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game), and the presentation control means controls a presentation symbol based on the judgment information. It is possible to execute a variation effect that displays a variation of the special game, and based on the determination that the special game is being executed, it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (jackpot variation effect), and it is possible to execute a rainbow light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a specific light emitting color, and the light emitting means has at least a board light emitting means (second lamp to fifth lamp, seventh lamp, tenth lamp, twelfth lamp, thirteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114, etc.) that emits light to the game board, and the specific variation effect includes a first specific variation effect and a second specific variation effect that is different from the first specific variation effect. and a second specific variation effect in which the rainbow light-emitting effect is produced by the board light-emitting means. The presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect produced by the board light-emitting means include a first presentation pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific rainbow image, a specific display time of the rainbow image, etc.) and a second presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first presentation pattern, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect different from the first presentation pattern, a rainbow image different from the first presentation pattern, a display time of the rainbow image different from the first presentation pattern, etc.). The rainbow light-emitting effect of the first presentation pattern can be executed by the board light-emitting means at least from the start of the first specific variation effect until the start of the variation effect next to the first specific variation effect (the first variation effect after a jackpot game). The rainbow light-emitting effect of the second presentation pattern can be executed by the board light-emitting means at least from the start of the second specific variation effect until the start of the variation effect next to the second specific variation effect (the first variation effect after a jackpot game).

◆ A 25th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and the light-emitting means comprises a first light-emitting means (e.g., any of the first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (e.g., first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114, etc.). 5 lamps, light guide plate 118, light display unit 114, or other light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means. The presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed include a first presentation state (waiting for customers, when a jackpot game is being played, etc.) and a second presentation state different from the first presentation state (when a variable effect is being played, etc.). The second presentation state has a greater number of presentation patterns for the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed by the first light-emitting means (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting effect execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) or a greater number of presentation patterns for the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed by the second light-emitting means (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting effect execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) than the first presentation state.

◆ A 26th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and presentation states in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be executed include a first presentation state (a waiting state, a jackpot game being executed, etc.) and a second presentation state (a waiting state, a jackpot game being executed, etc.) There is a second presentation state (such as when a variable presentation is being performed) that is different from the first presentation state, and the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (for example, any of the first to fifteenth lamps, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means that is different from the first light-emitting means (for example, a light-emitting means of the first to fifteenth lamps, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114 that is different from the first light-emitting means), and in the first presentation state, at least one of the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the first light-emitting means and the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the second light-emitting means can be limited, and in the second presentation state, both the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the first light-emitting means and the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the second light-emitting means can be performed.

◆ A 27th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the determination information, and a rainbow light-emitting device that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. A light effect can be produced, and the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (e.g., any one of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and the production states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be produced include at least specific production states in which the variable effect is not being produced (such as a customer waiting state or when a jackpot game is being played), and in these specific production states, the second light-emitting means produces the rainbow light-emitting effect for a longer period of time than the first light-emitting means.

◆ A 28th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the determination information, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. A rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed, and a specific variation effect (jackpot variation effect) can be executed based on the determination that the special game has been executed, and the light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means (e.g., any one of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, the image display unit 114, etc.) and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means among the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and during the execution of the specific variation effect, the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the second light-emitting means is longer than the execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting means.

◆ A 29th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the determination information, is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, is capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting presentation in a plurality of rainbow light-emitting areas that are different from each other, is capable of executing a specific variable presentation (jackpot variable presentation) based on the determination that the special game will be played, and is capable of executing a specific variable presentation (jackpot variable presentation) based on the presentation pattern of the rainbow light-emitting presentation. has a first effect pattern (a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect, a specific rainbow image, a specific display time of the rainbow image, etc.) and a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern (a rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first effect pattern, a cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode different from the first effect pattern, an execution time of the rainbow light-emitting effect different from the first effect pattern, a rainbow image different from the first effect pattern, a display time of the rainbow image different from the first effect pattern, etc.), and the execution period of the specific variable effect includes a first period in which the light-emitting means executes the rainbow light-emitting effect using the first effect pattern and a second period in which the light-emitting means executes the rainbow light-emitting effect using the second effect pattern, and the number of rainbow light-emitting regions in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed (the number of light-emitting means capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect, the number of light-emitting elements in the rainbow light-emitting mode, etc.) is greater in the first period than in the second period.

◆ A thirtieth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the judgment information and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and based on the judgment that the special game will be executed, A specific fluctuation effect (jackpot fluctuation effect) can be executed, and specific text information (such as time-saving start image 546, warning image 610, and company name image 611) can be displayed from the start of the specific fluctuation effect until the start of the next fluctuation effect after the specific fluctuation effect (the first fluctuation effect after a jackpot game). From the start of the specific fluctuation effect until the start of the next fluctuation effect after the specific fluctuation effect, when the specific text information is not being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, light guide plate 118, and image display unit 114), and the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted when the specific text information is being displayed.

◆ A thirty-first configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the determination information, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. When the variable effect is not being performed, the display can be controlled to a specific effect mode (such as a customer waiting state), and in the specific effect mode, specific text information (such as the manufacturer name, the name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and warning messages in the demo image 605) can be displayed. In the specific effect mode, when the specific text information is not being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be performed using specific light-emitting means (any of the first to fifteenth lamps, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and when the specific text information is being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted.

[Technical feature 2 of the present invention]
Furthermore, a first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, presentation control means (for example, a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, and light-emitting means capable of emitting light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, a light guide plate 118, an image display unit 114),
The light-emitting means includes at least a frame light-emitting means (any of the first lamp, sixth lamp, seventh lamp, eleventh lamp, fourteenth lamp, or fifteenth lamp) that illuminates the game frame, and the game control means stores a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) that is determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (for example, a jackpot game), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and is capable of restricting the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the frame light-emitting means when the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) in a specific presentation state in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be executed (such as during the execution of a variable presentation or during the execution of a jackpot game).

The second configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (for example, a presentation control unit 300) for controlling presentations, and light-emitting means capable of emitting light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, a light guide plate 118, an image display unit 114),
The light-emitting means includes at least a board light-emitting means (any of the second to fifth lamps, seventh lamp, tenth lamp, twelfth lamp, thirteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, and image display unit 114) that illuminates the game board, and the game control means stores a specific value (MY value, difference in balls) that is determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (for example, a jackpot game), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color, and is capable of restricting the rainbow light-emitting presentation by the board light-emitting means when the specific value reaches a predetermined value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000) in a specific presentation state in which the rainbow light-emitting presentation can be executed (such as during the execution of a variable presentation or during the execution of a jackpot game).

◆ A third configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), wherein the game control means acquires first determination information when a first start condition is met, acquires second determination information when a second start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the first determination information or the second determination information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode and is capable of executing a first variable presentation based on the first determination information. and is capable of executing a second variation effect based on the second determination information, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means emits light in a specific light color, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to fourth stages) and a second effect mode (a stage different from the first effect mode) different from the first effect mode, and the number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting effect execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) differs during execution of the first variation effect in the first effect mode and during execution of the first variation effect in the second effect mode.

◆ A fourth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the light-emitting means is configured such that the game control means acquires first judgment information when a first start condition is met, acquires second judgment information when a second start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the first judgment information or the second judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and executes a first variable based on the first judgment information. It is capable of executing a dynamic effect, a second variable effect based on the second determination information, and a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means emits light in a specific light color, and the effect modes include a first effect mode (any of the first to third stages) and a second effect mode (for example, the fourth stage) different from the first effect mode, and the number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect (types of rainbow light-emitting modes, types of rainbow light-emitting mode cycles, types of rainbow light-emitting effect execution times, types of rainbow images, types of rainbow image display times, etc.) that can be executed during execution of the first variable effect in the second effect mode differs from the number of effect patterns of the rainbow light-emitting effect that can be executed during execution of the second variable effect in the second effect mode.

◆ A fifth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, the rainbow light-emitting presentation including a first rainbow light-emitting presentation (a rainbow light-emitting presentation by a specific light-emitting means, a specific rainbow light-emitting mode, a specific cycle in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow light-emitting presentation ... The display states in which the rainbow light-emitting effects can be executed include a first display state in which the variable effect is being executed (such as a variable effect being executed), and a second display state in which the hold memory is not stored and the variable effect is not being executed (such as a waiting state). In the first display state, at least the first rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed, and in the second display state, at least the second rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed.

◆ A sixth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and is capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, and the presentation control means executes a variable presentation based on the judgment information. The display state in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be performed includes a first display state in which the variable display is being performed (such as when a variable display is being performed), and a second display state in which the hold memory is not stored and the variable display is not being performed (such as when a customer is waiting), and in the first display state, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be performed using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114), and in the second display state, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted.

◆ A seventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (presentation button 161, handle 151), and the game control means obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and determines whether to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information. The effect control means is capable of determining whether or not a rainbow light-emitting effect is being performed, and the effect control means is capable of performing a rainbow light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. The effect states in which the rainbow light-emitting effect can be performed include a first effect state (such as when a variable effect is being performed) and a second effect state (such as when a customer is waiting) that is different from the first effect state. In the first effect state, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be started based on operation of the operating means, and in the second effect state, the start of the rainbow light-emitting effect can be restricted based on operation of the operating means.

◆ An eighth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentation, and light-emitting means capable of emitting light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and is capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as pending memory, the presentation control means is capable of executing variable presentation based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a rainbow-light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and a player capable of executing the rainbow-light-emitting presentation. The output states include a first presentation state (such as a waiting state for customers) in which the pending memory is not stored and the variable presentation is not being executed, and a second presentation state (such as a variable presentation being executed) in which the variable presentation is being executed. In the second presentation state, it is possible to execute a first presentation (vibration presentation, stopped display of decorative symbols 41, button operation presentation, role-play presentation, reach presentation, etc.), and after the start of the first presentation, it is possible to execute a second presentation (decisive button operation presentation, stopped display of decorative symbols 41 with double digits, promotion teaser presentation, etc.). The number of presentation patterns of the rainbow light-emitting presentation that can be executed (type of rainbow light-emitting mode, type of rainbow light-emitting mode cycle, type of rainbow light-emitting presentation execution time, type of rainbow image, type of rainbow image display time, etc.) differs between the first presentation state and when the first presentation is being executed.

◆ A ninth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that causes presentation symbols to be displayed in a variable manner on the display means based on the judgment information, and is capable of displaying the presentation symbols in a first display size (e.g., the size shown in Figure 129 (2)) when the variable presentation is started, and is capable of displaying the presentation symbols in a second display size (e.g., the size shown in Figure 378 (1)) that is larger than the first display size. a predetermined effect (enlargement of double-digit decorative symbols 41) displayed by a display means (size corresponding to the size of the display means), the effect symbols include a first effect symbol (e.g., left row decorative symbols 41) and a second effect symbol (e.g., middle row decorative symbols 41) whose display position on the display means is different from that of the first effect symbol; a rainbow light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color can be executed; a specific variable effect can be executed based on the determination that the special game has been played; a specific effect that suggests that the special game has been played can be executed during the execution of the specific variable effect; the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed during the execution of the specific effect; and the rainbow light-emitting effect by the specific light-emitting means can be restricted when the proportion of the second effect symbol on the display means is largest during the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific variable effect.

◆ A tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and is capable of executing a specific presentation state in which the variable presentation is not executed. (While waiting for customers, while a jackpot game is being played, etc.), first specific character information (such as the demo image 605 shown in Figure 81 (3), the jackpot game notification image 542, the second right-hit image 543, and the number of rounds image 544) and second specific character information different from the first specific character information (such as the demo image 605 shown in Figures 81 (4) and (5), the first right-hit image 609, the time-saving start image 546, the warning image 610, and the company name image 611) can be displayed, and while the first specific character information is being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and while the second specific character information is being displayed, the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted.

◆ An eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that causes presentation symbols to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and is capable of executing a specific variable presentation (a jackpot game) based on the judgment information. It is possible to execute a winning variation effect, and specific text information can be displayed from the time the specific variation effect in a specific presentation mode starts until the time the variation effect following the specific variation effect starts (the first variation effect after a jackpot game), and from the time the specific variation effect in the specific presentation mode starts until the time the variation effect following the specific variation effect starts, when a plurality of performance symbols are displayed in a specific sequence (double numbers), it is possible to execute the rainbow light-emitting effect using specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114), and it is possible to restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means while the specific text information (first right-hit image 609, time-saving start image 546, warning image 610, company name image 611, etc.) is being displayed.

◆ A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, effect control means (e.g., effect control unit 300) that controls the effects, light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and operation means that can be operated by the player (effect button 161, handle 151, etc.), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met and is capable of executing a judgment on whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the effect control means is capable of controlling the effect mode and, based on the judgment information, is capable of executing a variable effect that causes effect symbols to change and then stop, and causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light color. It is possible to execute a rainbow light-emitting effect, and based on the determination that the special game is being played, it is possible to execute a specific variable effect, and it is possible to execute a promotion effect (such as displaying a right-hit image or displaying a button operation image 502) that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and from the start of the specific variable effect in a specific effect mode until the start of the next variable effect after the specific variable effect (the first variable effect after a jackpot game), it is possible to execute the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) when multiple effect symbols are displayed in a specific sequence (double numbers), and it is possible to restrict the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means while a specific promotion effect (such as displaying the first right-hit image 609) is being played.

◆ A thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires determination information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the determination information, the presentation control means is capable of controlling the presentation mode, and is capable of executing a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern based on the determination information, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and is capable of executing a specific variable presentation (a jackpot variable presentation) based on the determination that the special game will be played. ) can be executed, and from the start of the specific variable effect in a specific effect mode (such as any one of the first to third stages) until the start of the next variable effect after the specific variable effect (the first variable effect after a jackpot game), a first effect (an effect that suggests or notifies that the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot) and a second effect that can be started after the start of the first effect (such as displaying the first right-hit image 609, displaying the time-saving start image 546, displaying the warning image 610, displaying the company name image 611, etc.) can be executed, and the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, and the image display unit 114) during the execution of the first effect, and the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted during the execution of the second effect.

◆ A fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means acquires judgment information when a start condition is met and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to execute a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and is capable of executing a specific variable presentation (jackpot variable presentation) based on the judgment of the execution of the special game, and From the end of a specific variable effect until the start of the next variable effect of the specific variable effect, a first effect (display of jackpot game notification image 542, display of first right hit image 609, display of second right hit image 543, display of round number image 544, etc.) and a second effect that can start after the start of the first effect (display of time-saving start image 546, display of warning image 610, display of company name image 611, etc.) can be executed, and from the end of a specific variable effect until the start of the next variable effect of the specific variable effect, the rainbow light-emitting effect can be executed using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114) while the first effect is being executed, and the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means can be restricted while the second effect is being executed.

◆ A fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls the presentation, and a light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), and the game control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) that are determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), and obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, and The effect control means is capable of executing a rainbow light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means emits light in a specific light color, is capable of executing a first specific notification (e.g., advance notification) when the specific value reaches a first value, is capable of executing a second specific notification (e.g., complete operation notification) when the specific value reaches a second value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95000), is capable of executing the rainbow light-emitting effect using a specific light-emitting means (any of the first lamp to the fifteenth lamp, the light guide plate 118, or the image display unit 114) while the first specific notification is being executed, and is capable of restricting the rainbow light-emitting effect using the specific light-emitting means while the second specific notification is being executed.

◆ A sixteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 100) comprises a game control means (e.g., game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control means (e.g., presentation control unit 300) that controls presentations, and light-emitting means that can emit light (first lamp to fifteenth lamp, light guide plate 118, image display unit 114), the game control means stores specific values (MY value, difference in balls) that are determined from the amount of game value awarded (number of payouts, total number of payouts) and the amount used (number of outs, total number of outs, number of shots), obtains judgment information when a start condition is met, and is capable of determining whether or not to play a special game (e.g., a jackpot game) based on the judgment information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation that causes presentation symbols to be displayed in a variable manner based on the judgment information, and is capable of executing a rainbow-light-emitting presentation that causes the light-emitting means to emit light in a specific light-emitting color, and during the execution of the variable presentation, It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being executed, and based on the determination that the special game will be executed, a specific variation effect (jackpot variation effect) can be executed, and when the specific value reaches a first value, a first specific notification (e.g., advance notification) can be executed, and when the specific value reaches a second value (upper limit value, MY upper limit value, 95,000), a second specific notification (e.g., complete operation notification) can be executed, and during the execution of the suggestion effect while the specific variation effect is being executed, a specific rainbow light-emitting effect (rainbow light-emitting effect by specific light-emitting means, display of a specific rainbow image, etc.) can be executed, and when the first specific notification is executed while the specific rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed, the specific rainbow light-emitting effect can be continued, and when the second specific notification is executed while the specific rainbow light-emitting effect is being executed, the specific rainbow light-emitting effect can be restricted.

41...Decorative symbol, 51...Variable image, 52...Reserved image, 61...Stage image, 100...Pachinko game machine, 114...Image display unit, 115...Moving device, 116...Board lamp, 121...First start slot, 122...Second start slot, 157...Frame lamp, 161...Effect button, 200...Game control unit, 231...Random number acquisition unit, 234...Special symbol determination unit, 300...Effect control unit

Claims (1)

a game control means capable of controlling the progress of the special game;
a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The game control means
Determination information can be acquired based on the establishment of the start condition,
A variable display of the pattern can be executed based on the determination information,
The performance control means
The performance mode can be controlled,
A rainbow light emitting effect can be performed by making the light emitting means emit light in a specific light emitting color,
The light emitting means is
a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means provided on the operating means, the second light-emitting means being different from the first light-emitting means;
A variable effect can be executed in which a plurality of rows of effect symbols are varied along a predetermined path in the display means in accordance with the variable display,
The display means can execute an operation prompt display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
During the execution of the variable performance, a specific performance can be executed,
During the execution of the variable performance, an emphasis image that emphasizes the specific performance can be displayed,
In the performance mode in which the variable performance is displayed ,
There is a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode,
The enhanced image includes:
a first emphasized image and a second emphasized image different from the first emphasized image;
When the specific performance is executed during the execution of the variable performance in the first performance mode, at least the first emphasized image can be displayed,
When the specific performance is executed during the execution of the variable performance in the second performance mode, at least the second emphasis image can be displayed,
The rainbow light emitting effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing different from the first timing during a variable effect in which the special game is executed or during the special game,
The first timing and the second timing are during a variable performance in which the special game is executed or during the special game,
The light emitting mode of the rainbow light emitting effect in the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means or the cycle of a specific light emitting color of the rainbow light emitting effect is made different between the first timing and the second timing ,
In accordance with the variable display in the first performance mode, a first variation in which the performance pattern varies along a first variation path can be executed;
In accordance with the variable display in the second performance mode, a second variation in which the performance pattern varies along a second variation path different from the first variation path can be executed;
In the variation performance, switching of the first variation path or the second variation path can be executed in response to a transition to the first performance mode or the second performance mode,
In the variable performance, a predetermined performance that covers all or part of the display area of the display means can be executed in response to a transition to the first performance mode or the second performance mode,
A gaming machine capable of restricting the execution of the specified presentation during the period in which the operation prompt display is executed in the first variation .